Bhota Prakasa

Author(s): Vidhushekhara Bhattacharya
Publisher: Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt Ltd
Catalog link: https://jainqq.org/explore/032131/1

Page #1

भोट प्रकाशः
Bhota-Prakasa A Tibetan Chrestomathy

Page #2

SPECIMEN OF A TIBETAN XYLOGRAPH
|རྒྱགརསྐདདུ། ཡོགཙརྱ་བྷཱམི ། བོད་སྐད་དུ། རྣལ་འབྱོར་སྤྱོད་པའིས། བམ་པོང་བོ། །ཚིག་ གམ་པའ་བདག་འཇམ་དཔལ་གཞོན་ནུར་གྱུརཔ་ལ་ཕྱག་འཚལ་ལོ། །རྣལ་འབྱོར་སྤྱོད་པའིས་གུང་ཞེན ། ད་ནིས་བཅུ་བདུན་ བལྟ་བར་བྱས | བཅུ་བདུན་གཞོན 1 སྤྱི་སྡོམ་ནི ། རྣམ་ཤེས་ལྔ་དང་ལྡན་པ་དང་། །ཡང་ཀྱིས་དང་བ ་བཙོས་ལ་སོགས་ཡོདང་། །ཏིང་འཛིན་བཅས་དངམ་ཡིན་དང་། སེམས་ཡོད་པ་དང་སེམས་མེད་དག་
THE YOGACARYABHUMI OF ASANGA, Folio t.

Page #3

भोट प्रकाशः BHOṬA-PRAKĀŚA
A Tibetan Chrestomathy
with introduction, skeleton grammar, notes, texts and vocabularies
Vidhushekhra Bhattacharya
Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt Ltd

Page #4

ISBN 81-215-0534-6
Second edition 1991
Originally published in 1939 by University of Calcutta.
Published by Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt. Ltd. Post Box 5715,54 Rani Jhansi Road, New Delhi-110055 & Printed at New Gian Offset Printers, Inder Lok Extension, New Delhi-110035

Page #5

TO
THE MEMORY OF
SIR ASUTOSH MOOKERJEE
WHO MADE HIS ALMA MATER GREAT AMONG THE SEATS OF LEARNING
AND AMONG OTHER THINGS INAUGURATED TIBETAN STUDIES
IN OUR UNIVERSITY

Page #6


Page #7

CONTENTS
SPECIMEN OF A TIBETAN XYLOGRAPH
PREFACE
INTRODUCTION
ABBREVIATIONS
A SKELETON GRAMMAR OF THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE
TEXTS:
Part I
I. Prajñādanda
II. Nāgānanda
III. Udanavarga
IV.
Buddhacarita
V. Lalitavistara
VI. Bodhisattvävadānakalpalatā
VII. Bhagavadgitā
VIII. Nyāyabindu
IX. Nyāyabinduṭīkā
X. Catuḥśataka
XI. Mūlamadhyamakakārikā
XII. Kasyapaparivarta
XIII. Kāvyādarśa XIV. Rūpādityakatha
Pages
Frontispiece
ix
xxix
xxxvii
XXXIX
3-217
3-32
33-70
71-82
83-113
114-136
137-151
152-154
154-159
160-166
166-175
176-182
183-191
192-198
199-217

Page #8

vü
CONTENTS
Part II
NOTES:
....
...
... 221-316
Part III
VOCABULARY:
I Tibetan-Sanskrit ... II. Sanskrit-Tibetan ...
III. Addenda ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS APPENDIX
... 319-568 ... 319-465
466-566 ... 566-569 ... 569-573 ... 575-578

Page #9

PREFACE Considering the contiguity of Bengal and Tibet and the close cultural connexion between this province of India and the latter country for a number of centuries, it is only fitting that Tibetan studies should first be undertaken in Calcutta and Bengal. The Hungarian scholar Csoma de Körös began the tradition of modern Tibetology in Calcutta over a hundred years ago. Sarat Chandra Das, the great Indian of modern times to revive Tibetan studies, worked in Calcutta. But Tibetan was rather neglected otherwise. Fortunately, however, Rabindranath Tagore felt its importance and arranged for it in his Viśva-bhārati, and here in the University of Calcutta it was Sir A su tosh Mookerjee who strongly realized its necessity and took steps making adequate arrangements for it. It was in his time that the large collection of Tibetan works including both the Kanjur and Tanjur was acquired for the University Library, and students were given special facilities for studying it, being placed under good teachers and occasionally being sent to Darjeeling for that purpose. His endeavours bore fruit. For, it was when he held the reins of the University that not only the History of Indian Logic of Mahāmahopādhyāya Pandit Satish Chandra Vid y a bhushan, the materials of which were collected from a large number of works on logic in Tibetan, but also the following books were published from the University:
b

Page #10

PREFACE Herbert Bruce Hannah: A Grammar of the Tibetan Language (1912); W. L. Campbell: She-rab-Dong-bu (quisas 3). 1919; and Lama Dawa sa m d up: An English-Tibetan Dictionary, 1919.
But as ill luck would have it, after the untimely death of Sis Asutosh in 1924 not much interest was felt in the University for Tibetan studies, and the whole collection of the Tibetan MSS. and xylographs was found deposited in an obscure corner of the Durbhanga Building, and there was hardly any one to take proper care of it.
In 1935, however, Dr. Sy a ma Prasad Mookerjee, worthy son of the late Sir Asutosh, occupied the chair of the Vice-Chancellor of the University, and he keenly felt the deplorable condition, and revived the study of Tibetan instituted by his father making again new and better arrangements. Since then he has been taking proper care for and interest in it. It is to be hoped that this time this important subject will not be neglected in the University.
Some interest in Tibetan can now be noticed not only in a certain number of students of the University, but also among some scholars of the country, who are well familiar with Sanskrit and want to study Tibetan particularly with reference to Sanskrit texts. For such students is now required some suitable Chrestomathy. I do not know of any such Chrestomathy that can be suitable for the special

Page #11

PREFACE
requirements of those who have studied Sanskrit and are interested in Tibetan as a repository of early Indian literature. The present volume has been prepared with a view to removing this want: to what extent it will serve the purpose, the author is not competent to say.
xi
The Chrestomathy is divided into three parts: Part I contains lessons in Tibetan and Sanskrit ; Part II consists of Notes; and Part III gives complete Vocabularies, (i) Tibetan-Sanskrit, and (ii) Sanskrit-Tibetan. The Introduction among other things gives a short description as to how Sanskrit literature along with Buddhism entered into Tibet, as well as a brief notice of Tibetan literature. A Skeleton Grammar of the language has also been added to the Introduction. In an Appendix a short bibliography has been given to help further study.
The texts occurring in the present Chrestomathy, as enumerated below, will show that they represent a variety of Tibetan literature, religious and secular, including passages from sūtras and śāstras.
All of them are in classical Tibetan excepting one, viz. Rūpāditya-katha, which has been included as a specimen of modern Tibetan.
I. Prajñādaṇḍa, Ses.rab.sdon.bu (9), attributed to Nāgārjuna. Tibetan text ed. Sarat Chandra Das, Darjeeling, 1896; and with an English translation by W. L. Campbell, Calcutta, 1919.
II. Nāgānanda nāma Nāṭaka, Klu.kun.tu.dgah.bahi.žes.

Page #12

PREFACE
bya.bahi.zlos.gar (2755999999 augina 95 ) of Sriharșa. Sanskrit text, Trivandrum Sanskrit Series, 19; Tibetan text, Tanjur, Mdo. XCII; Cordier, III, p. 419.
III. Udānavarga, Ched.du.brjod.pahi tshogs (655'ÉT DÅ 96). Sanskrit Text ed. Louis de la Vallée Poussin, JRAS, 1912; Tibetan text. ed. Hermann Beckh, Berlin,
1911.
IV. Buddhacarita nāma Mabākāvya, Sans. rgyas.kyi.spyod.pa. žes.bya.baḥi. snan.nag.pa.chen.po ( VVHV v 1501@'
55721873) of A śvaghoșa. Sanskrit text ed. E. B. Cowell, Oxford, 1893, and E. H. Johnston, Punjab University, 1936. Tibetan text, under the name of Das Leben des Buddha, ed. Friedrich Weller, Leipzig, 1926.
V. Lalitavistara, Rgya.cher.rol.pa (HWT BRIT). Sanskrit Text ed. Lefman, Halle, 1902 and 1908; Tibetan Text ed. Ph. Ed. Fouca u x, Paris, 1847.
VI. Bodhisattvāvadānakalpalatā, Byan.chub.sems.dpahi.rtogs. brjod.dpag.bsam.gyi.ḥkhri.śiń (5584 AWGSÅ: 594 +555147 AW 'RÊ 5 ) of Keşemen dra. Both the texts, Sanskrit and Tibetan, ed. Sarat Chandra Das, Bibliotheca Indica.
VII. Bhagavadgitā, Bcam.Idan.ḥdas.kyi.glu.dbyans (Ft/"219"

Page #13

PREFACE
xiii
399 075359). The Sanskrit Text in the Mahābhārata is well. known. As regards the Tibetan Text, in Tanjur, Bstod.tshogs ( ), K, fols. 1—56.3 (Cordie r, III. p. 1) there is a small work, Viseșastava, Khyad.par.du.hphags.paḥi.bstod.pa (1351955 229 gà aig 5 ) of Ācārya Udbha ța Siddh asvāmin, as well as its commentary, Visesastavatikā, Khyad.par. du.hphags.pahi. bstod.paḥi. rgya.cher.bśad.pa ( 15*25*5:2295 ga. agg si 3 5 995') in the same volume, fols. 56.3—48a.8, by Ācārya Prajñā varman of Bengal. The former was translated into Tibetan by Upadhyā ya Sarvajnadeva and the latter by Upādh yāy a Pandita J a nārda na, both of India. The ślokas of the Bhagavadgitā given here are quoted in his commentary by Prajñā var man in the course of explaining a passage in the Visesastava. These ślokas are 27-32 of the first chapter of the Bhagavadgitā. Cosma has also quoted them in his Grammar, p. 167.
VIII and IX. Nyāyabindu nāma Prakarana, Rigs.pahi. thigs. pa. žes.bya.baḥi. rab.tu.byed.pa ( au Tào âmara @vigaa 34°5 35191) of Dharmakirti, and Nyāyabindutikā, Rigs.pahi.
higs.paḥi.rgya.cher.hgrel (944951°418 525iQa ) of Dh ar matrāta. Both Sanskrit and Tibetan Texts ed. Th. Soch erba tsk y, Bibliotheca Buddhica.

Page #14

xiv
PREFACE
X. Catuḥśataka, Bži.brgya.pa (1875*) of Aryadev a. Both the Sanskrit and Tibetan [exts ed. Vidh u shekhara Bhattachary a, Visvabharati Series, 1931.
XI. Mülamadhyamakakātikā, Dbu.ma.rtsa.bahi.tshig.lehur. byas.pa (59*8*7* 60*35*3'51) of Nagarjun a. Both Sanskrit and Tibetan texts ed. Louis de La Vallée Poussin, Bibliotheca Buddhica, IV.
XII. Āryakāśyapaparivarta nāma Mabāyānasūtra, Hphags.pa. hod.srun.gi. Ichu. žes.bya.ba, theg.pa.chen.paḥi.mdo (2294155 yskazanija TQDK). Both the Texts, Sanskrit and Tibetan, along with the Chinese versions ed. Baron A. Von Staël-Holstein, Sanghai, 1926.
XIII. Kävyādarśa, Sñan.nag.me.lon (99547 KB ) of Dandin. Both the Texts, Sanskrit and Tibetan are taken from the xylograph of Tanjur of the Narthang edition belonging to the University of Calcutta. See Cordier, III, p. 465.
XIV. Rūpādityakathā Gzugs.kyi.ñi.maḥi. rnam.thar (73960 E'NÂ ***95). This is the short title of the work, the full one being Munikanyārūpādityakathā, Dran.ston.bu.mo.gzugs.kyi.ñi.maḥi. rnam.thar (དྲང་སྲོང་བུ་མོ་གཟུགས་ཀྱི་ཉི་མའི་རྣམ་ཐར). This Sanskrit name is nowhere found, but translated by the present author from the Tibetan. The Tibetan text is by Lo.tsā.ba Vairoca na

Page #15

PREFACE -
XV
and se ḥ u Lo.tsā.ba. It is said by them that the work was trans lated from the Indian language. Whether it is Sanskrit is not ascertained. The Tibetan text is published from the Mani Press, Kalimpong.
With regard to the Sanskrit rendering of the Rūpādityakatha it is to be noted that it is rather free and only tentative. Therefore its correctness must in no way be considered to be the same as that of the other Sanskrit texts in the book. The only purpose of this Sanskrit rendering is to help the students in understanding the Tibetan text, so far as possible, through Sanskrit. It will, therefore, not be always safe to utilize the Sanskrit words of the Rūpādityakathā in the Vocabulary for any lexicographical work.
The texts in the Chrestomathy are arranged in three different ways. In Text I, Prajñādanda, the Tibetan is given in the native character with a Roman transliteration and the Sanskrit equivalents below.
In text II, Nāgānanda, in the first line there are the Tibetan words in Tibetan script and the second line contains their Sanskrit equivalents, the connexion between the Tibetan and the components of compound words in Sanskrit being indicated by superscribed a, b, c, d, etc.
In texts from III, Udānavarga, to XIV, Rūpādityakatbā, in both, Tibetan and Sanskrit, the corresponding words are indicated by figures, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc."

Page #16

xvi
PREFACE
Where there is any difference between the words of the two texts, an asterisk is put to indicate it.
The Prajñādanda is an anthology of verses from 'different Sanskrit works. The sources of the verses are shown in the Notes.
In the case of the following texts in the book the figures put at the end of passages refer to the chapters, etc., as the case may be, of the original works described above: Prajñādaṇḍa, Udānavarga, Catuḥsataka, and Aryakāśyapaparivarta (here the numbers are in brackets), etc. For instance, on page 1, the figure 105 refers to the verse of that number in the Prajñādanda of the edition referred to above.
In the Tibetan text of the Lalitavistara the figures put in brackets refer to the pages and lines of the edition alluded to.
As has already been said, this Chrestomathy is mainly intended for students knowing Sanskrit, but it is hoped that others may also find it useful.
The author knows more than anybody else the large number of shortcomings and mistakes that have crept in the book owing to various causes not excepting his own ignorance and inadvertance. Yet, he may hope that it will serve to some extent the for purpose which it is written. And if it does so, he will deem his labour amply rewarded.
I cannot conclude the preface without offering my sincere thanks to Lama Lobzang Mingyur Dorje, Tibetan

Page #17

INTRODUCTION
xxxü
tunity to study Tibetan. At the request of the Indian Government, he went four times to Tibet during 1878-1883. He was sent by the Government of India also to Peking to assist them in diplomatic matters connected with Tibet. His journeys to Tibet helped him much in various ways in enriching his knowledge of the language of the country. He wrote not only a great number of papers dealing with different subjects connected with Tibet, which will be found in the volumes of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal of that time, but also many books on them. He edited many Tibetan works most interesting and important of them being Bhadrakalpadruma (Dpag.bsm.ljon.bzan, 5519.495 74 126 ) of Su m.. pa. mk han.po ye.ses.d pal. ḥ by or which is not a translation, but an independent book giving the history of Buddhism in India and the matters connected therewith. He edited also the celebrated work of Kșcmendra of Kashmir, the Bodhisattvāvadānakalpalatā (Byan.chub.sems.dpaḥi.rtogs.brjod.dpag.bsam.hkhri.śin, (95*39* 55918. 59.Ě552199 9 5) in its both versions, Sanskrit and Tibetan. His most valuable work with regard to Tibetan studies is, however, the Tibetan-English Dictionary (1899) which is the best ever published, it has not yet been surpassed by any one. Subsequently it was revised (1902) by Graham Sandberg and A. William Heyde.
It may be noted here that a good number of Tibetan books

Page #18

xxxiv
INTRODUCTION
belonging to Sarat Chandra Das is now kept in the Tibetan Seminary of the University of Calcutta. There is a copy on Tibetan paper of the Tibetan version of the Kavyadarśa prepared evidently by Sarat Chandra Das leaving some space under cach of the Tibetan verses, perhaps for the original Sanskrit equivalents. It seems that he wanted to edit it, but could not do so.'
In connection with the Tibetan scholars in India mention should be made also of Mahāmahopādhyāya Pandit Satish Chandra Vidyabhushan. His History of Indian Logic shows his deep scholarship in the language. For the Asiatic Society of Bengal he edited the following two books: The Sragdharastotra with its two Tibetan versions; the Amarakosa, Sanskrit and Tibetan texts, as well as its commentary in Tibetan called Kamadhenu. He prepared and edited also the Bilingual Index to the Nyayabindu using the edition of both the versions, Sanskrit and Tibetan of that society. For the Asiatic Society of Bengal he edited also a part of the Mahavyutpatti under the title of Sanskrit-Tibetan-English Vocabulary.
In conclusion, there is only one word to say. Reference has been made above to the Tibetan translations of Sanskrit works as well as to the indigenous literature of the country, from which, one can know, in the words of Csoma, "the manners, customs, opinions, knowledge, ignorance, superstition, hopes and fears
I It is now edited by Anukul Chandra Banerji and included in the publications of the University.

Page #19

INTRODUCTION
xxxy
of a great part of Asia especially of India, in former ages.” As rcgards the translations, the Sanskrit originals of most of them have disappeared, perhaps for cvcr. Some of them may be discovered in the future in Nepal, Kashmir, Tibet, or Central Asia, but we cannot hope that they will ail cver be found. The contents of these Sanskrit works are now prescrvcd in translation in Tibetan as well as in Chinese and Mongolian. An Indian student desirous of knowing certain lost chapters in the history of literature and culture in his own country can in no way ignore or neglect these translations in Tibetan and other languages. He must bring back from those sources the treasure that has unfortunately been lost to him.

Page #20


Page #21

ABBREVIATIONS
BB
BC
BG
BT
DK
HU IP
KA
KP
Bibliotheca Buddhica, Buddhacarita. Bhagavadgitā. Bibliotheca Indica. + Bodhisattvāvadānakalpalatā. Catuhsataka. But in the Notes on PD, it is for
Cāņakyaśataka cd. Is h var Ch a n d r a Shastri, Calcutta, 1935. Hitopadeśa. Indische Sprüche by Bühler Kavyādarśa Kāśyapaparivarta. Lalitavistara. Mūlamadhyamakakārikā. Mahābhārata. Mahānirvāna Tantra.
Manusmeti. Nāgānanda. Nyāyabindu Nyāyabinduţikā. Prajnadanda. Pañcatantra. Rūpādityakathā.
UP
LV
MK MB MT
MS
NA NB NBT PD PT
RK

Page #22

xxxviii
ABBREVIATIONS
UV Lit. or lit. Skt.
Tib.
abl.
ind.
I sais *******************
acc. adj.
Subhāṣitāvali ed. Peterson, Bombay, 1886. Sarat Chandra Da s. Sanskrit. Sārngadharapaddhati (=The Paddhati of Sārnga
dhara ed. Peterson, Bombay, 1888. Subhāṣitaratnabhāņdāgāra, Nirņayasāgara, 1929. Udānavarga. Literally Sanskrit.
Tibetan. ablative.
indeclinable. accusitive. inst.
instrumental. adjective.
inter. interjection. adverb.
neuter. conditional.
number. conjunction.
particle. dative.
· pers.
person or personal feminine.
perfect. figuratively.
participle. gerund. plu. future.
pt. pl. present participle. honorific.
singular. infinitive. subst. substantive. imparative.
verb.
n.
adv. cond. conj.
num.
pel.
pf. pl.
plural.
sing.
imp.
vb.

Page #23

A Skeleton Grammar
of the Tibetan Language
ALPHABET
1. The Tibetan alphabet comprises thirty-four letters, four vowels and thirty' consonants.
2. Vowels. The following are the vowels ( WV a ), Li, Wu. e, Ho. There are no long vowels in Classical Tibetan.
Though W a is, in fact, a vowel, the Tibetan grammarians take it as a consonant, possibly owing to the fact that it is always inherent in a consonant and never used separately. We can look upon it as the vowel bearing base, and since the short a is inherent in the consonant letter as such there is no special mark for it even in connec tion with the base by.
The four vowels when added to consonants assume the following
special forms respectively :
For example :
ka Akha
ki aku Å khi Ekhu
ke  khe
ñ ko Ãkho

Page #24

xl
3. Consonants. The following are the Nāgari characters with which they are connected:
ཀ
ཁ
kh
ག
19
3
5
པ
70
ส
ལྤ
ཡ
क k
च
त t
प
ts
व
य
C
श
p
V
y
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
51
ś
HR
க
ཐ
A
"If
G
ར
ས
$24
छ
थ th
फph
tsh
ž
ch
र
स
r
E
S
ད
17
བ
416
Π
21
ส
15
ཧ
म
15
ज
द
dz
Z
ल
consonants with the
व b
ho
مه
ह
.1
9
Wy andr following a consonant have the signs
tively; e. g. ky,
kr.
d
h
ப
ཉ
ན
ہو۔
མ
འ.
ཨ
♡
ho
ङ
외
.d
n
and
13
न n
ñ
म m
T
ḥ (or ')
अ a
respec
PRONUNCIATION
4. As regards pronunciation only a short note may be given. While 3c, ch, and Ej are pure palatals, as in Sanskrit,ts, I tsh, anddz are palato-alveolar.is like j in jadis (=zādi, zhadi) 'formerly in French, but with a tendency towards the sound of sh as in shy. (or') is now silent in Modern Tibetan, but in Classical Tibetan it had the sound of the glottal stop, like that heard in German when words begin with a vowel (in writing). It is the substitute

Page #25

A SKELETON GRAMMAR
xli
for h (T) in many Indian languages and dialects, e.g. East Bengali ; cf. East Bengali 54, TOT ( 64, ETC ) hay, hāti= 'ay,' āti'. = 'is or are', and ‘elephant' respectively.
5. The Tibetan language was, as has been said before, first reduced to writing in the seventh century A.D., and it may be presumed (and this is also the opinion of scholars) that the spelling adopted at that time represented the actual pronunciation of the language. But with the passing of centuries, phonetic decay brought in a change of pronunciation. The spelling was not changed as the pronunciation changed : orthography did not keep pace with phonetic development. The result is that at the present day Tibetan is written in a spelling which indicates the pronunciation of a thousand or twelve hundred years ago or more, and there is a vast discrepancy between the modern pronunciation and the unmodified ancient orthography which is current. Letters have become silent, voiced sounds have become unvoiced, combinations of consonants have been assimilated or changed into quite different consonants. Thus 595 dbus 'middle' is pronounced bü (d, b and s lost, u changed to ü):
9755 gdun distress' is pronounced dur (g silent); 55 bod ‘Tibet' is pronounced pö, phö (d lost, 6 becomes unvoiced to p, and even aspirated to ph, loss of d compensated by change of o to ö); ? bkra 'variegated' is pronounced ta ( 6 lost, kr changed to t) ; Band phyogs 'the direction or quarter' is pronounced chok (s lost, g changed to k, phy assimilated to the palatal ch through the influence of the palatal semivowel y).
The result is that Tibetan words pronounced in the modern way would give us no clue to the spelling, and Tibetan pronounced as
1 The same sort of thing has happened in other languages also; e.g. in English we write knight (which indicates the pronunciation of the 14th century, k-ni-kh-t), but now pronounce it as nait ; so enough (old pronunciation e-nukb), now = inal ; plough (=pluk) now = plau.

Page #26

xlii
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
written will not be understood by a Modern Tibetan. The old pronunciation is better preserved in Khams or Eastern Tibet and it is most decayed in Central Tibet. For our purposes in this book, we are not concerned with the Modern Tibetan; we are more interested in the written rather than the spoken word, and our written word is indicative of the spoken word when Sanskrit-Tibetan literary work was in full swing. We therefore ignore the modern pronunciation, and indicate by transliteration the Tibetan orthography not by phonetic transcription.
Nevertheless, it is helpful to know how the transformation of the Classical Tibetan sound-system has taken place in Modern Tibetan. Therefore the main lines of it have been indicated below. Students may at the outset read Tibetan as written, and when dealing with Tibetan Lamas and others, they may gradually acquire the modern pronunciation.
6. Silent Letters. 51, Q1 1 (with one exception, see below), and V8 preceding a consonant are silent ; e.g. i rk, lk, and sk are all pronounced k. But lha, deva ‘god', is pronounced as it is written.
7. The five letters, 48, 50, 96, 8 m, and ņ' when prefixed to initial or basic letters to form a word are silent ; e. g. 4755gdun, tāpa 'affliction is pronounced 55 dun.
Arrangement of the words with Prefix Letters in Dictionaries. These five letters (79; 5 d, Ab, om, and h) are called prefixes. Words the radical letters of which are preceded by them are to be found in Dictionaries not under those beginning with 79, 5 d, etc., but under those beginning with the radicals ; e. g. 5 5 dkon, durlabha 'rare', is to be found not under the words with 5 d at the beginning, but under those radically beginning with Tk.

Page #27

8.
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
xliii
following a consonant is silent; e. g. klu, näga 'serpent'
6
lu; zla.ba, candra 'moon' is ', la.ba; but
ད་བ da.ba.
is pronounced
generally it is pronounced
ཕph,
9. Modifications of Pronunciations. (i) y following
P,
b, and am changes their pronunciations into those of c, ch, c or i, and ny respectively. When not an initial, by is pronounced as j; but if prefixed by d it is pronounced as y. Sometimes the sound of gy changes into that of ; ; e. 8.bstan.hgyur is pronounced tan.jur.
(ii) When རrfollows, ཀ k, ཁ kh, ག ༔, ད d, པ p. ཕph, and བ b are pronounced as cerebrals, i. e. kr and pr as t; khr and phr as th, and gr, 5 dr, and br as d: e. g. bkra (as in , Tashi Lama, lit. Mangala-guru) is pronounced ța. v occurring only in a few words in Tibetan, of which the sign is joined to a consonant, is, in fact, silent, but its inherent Wa is pronounced as a long one; e. g. rtsva, tṛṇa 'grass' is pronounced as tsā.
(iii)
<'
(iv) Similarly sometimes at the end of a word ḥ () is silent. but its inherent W a is lengthened in pronunciation.
10.
Identical pronunciation of different sounds. It is to be noted that according to the above rules a number of

Page #28

xliv
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
different sounds has the same pronunciation ; e. g. k. rk. H lt. སྐུ •R, དཀའ dth, བཀའ bkt, བཀཾ brk and བསྐ bst=all these are pronounced " k. Similarly all the following sounds are pronounced གg: གོr. ལྒ lg, སྒོ sg. དགའ drah, བགའ bruh, བགོ brga, བསྒ bsga, 0949 mgaḥ, 572 ngah.
THE SCHEME OF TRANSLITERATION OF THE SANSKRIT ALPHABET
11. The following is the scheme of transliteration of the Sanskrit alphabet :
Vowels
–
–
ऋ
अ ཨ
आ ཨཱ
इ ཨི
ई ཨཱི
उ ཨ
ऊ ཨཱ
ऋ ཛ
OK
་
)
ल
ल
ए ཨེ
ऐ ཨེ
ओ ཨོ
औ ཨོ
अं ཨཾ
अः। ཨ །
2)
ེ
2
Consonants
–
क ख ग ཀ ཁ ག ट ठ ड ཊ་ཋ ཌ
घ གྷ ढ ཌཱ
ङ ང། ण ཎ།
च ཙ त ཏ
छ ཚ थ ཐ
ज ཛ द ད
म ཛྷ ध དྷ
ཉ། न। ན།

Page #29

A SKELETON GRAMMAR
xlv
य ཡ
र ར
ल ལ
व। ལྔ།
प པ श ཤ
फ ब भ ཕ བ བྷ ष स ह ཥ ་ས ཧ
म མ། क्ष। ཀུ།
For an example of this method of transliteration see pp. 192 A.
NUMERALS
12. Cardinals. 1 ༡ གཅིག gcig
11 ༡༡ བཅུ་གཅིག bcu. gcig 2 ༢ གཉིས gfis
12 ༡༢ བཅུ་གཉིས bcu.ghi 3 ༣ གསུམ gsum
13 ༡༣ བཅུ་གསུམ bcu.gsum 4 ༤ བཞི bet
14 ༡༤ བཅུ་བཞི bcu.bzi 5 ” ལྔ lha
15 ༡v* བཅོ་ལྔ bco.jna 6 ༦ དྲུག drug
16 ༡༦ བཅུ་དྲག bcu.drug 7 ༧ བདུན bdun
17 ༡༧ བཅུ་བདོན bcu.bdun 8 ༤ བརྒྱད brgyad
18 ༡༤ བཅོ་བརྒྱད bco.brgyad ༡༠ དགུ dgu
19 ༡༩ བཅུ་དགུ bcu.agu 10 ༡༠ བཅུ bcu, or བཅུ་ཐམ་པ bcu: 20 ༢༠ ཉི་ཤ ni. ཙu, or ཉི་ཤ་ཐམ་པ་
õi.Page #30

xlvi
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
21 32 g -9*7*784 ñi.bu.rtsa.gcig, or 3.547347 ñer.gcig 30 zo gatsum.cu 31 ༣༡ སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གཅིག •um.eu.rtsa.gcig, or སོ་གཅིག so.gcig 40 ༤༠ བཞི་བཅུ bzi.beu 41 os adag*7*47$a bži. bcu.rtsa.gcig 100 ༡༠༠ བརྒྱ brgya or བརྒྱ་ཐམ་པ brgya.tham.pa 101 ༡༠༡ བརྒྱ་དང་གཅིག brgya.dai.gcig, or བརྒྱ་རྩ་གཅིག brgya.
rtsa.gcig 1,000 ༡༠༠༠ སྟོང stoi, or སྟོང་ཕྲག stot-phrag 10,000 20000 Ñ khri
13. Ordinals. Ordinals are formed from the cardinals generally by adding
pa to the latter ; e. g. gñis. pa, doitiya 'second' ; l' gsum.pa, trtiya 'third'. But for prathama ‘first' we have 55-F dan.po, and not 9789' gcig.pa.
HONORIFIC WORDS 14. In Tibetan there are two kinds of words, honorific and common. The former is used when speaking respectfully to, of, or before a superior ; e. g. for tāta or pits, 'father' wa ab (hon.), as in NA, 6', and pha (com.), as in BC, 106.

Page #31

A SKELETON GRAMMAR
xlvii
NUMBER
dag and
15. The plural signs are generally 5 Sometimes both of them are used together. There is no dual number in the language, but Sanskrit dual is generally rendered by 5 dag (p. 295). See Rule 21.
DECLENSION
rnams.
16. The nominative does not take any affix. The accusative is as the nominative, but sometimes it takes la as an affix. The instrumental is formed by adding, according to the rules (see pp.
226,240) one of the following afixes: ཀྱིས kyis, གྱིས gyis, གིས gis ཡིས yis, འིས his, and ས . The dative is formed by ལ
ར
tu,
la or one of the following particles; 5 5 du, ru, སུ su. The ablative is formed by adding nas or ལས las. The genitive is formed by the instrumental affixes dropping their sibilants, i. e. adding kyi of kyis, gi of ¶ gis, and so on (see pp. 226, 240). The locative is formed by r na and la. The vocative is as the nominative with the particle kye, bhos, aye, etc. 'oh' used before it.
17. Below are given two declensions, (i) one of a noun ending in a consonant and (ii) one of that which ends in a vowel.
(i)
chos, dharma 'religion'.
r, and

Page #32

xlviii
Sing.
Nom. chos
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
Acc.
Instr. ཆོས་ཀྱིས chos.kyis
Dat. ཆོས་ལ chos.la
Abl. ཆོས་ནས chos.nas
Gen.chos.kyi
Loc. ' chos.na
Voc.kye.chos
22
Sing.
Nom. རྒྱལ་པོ rgyal.po
Acc.
Ins.
རྒྱལ་པོས
rgyal.pos
Dat. རྒྱལ་པོ་ལ rgyal.po.la Abl. རྒྱལ་པོ་ནས rgyal.po.nas
Plu.
ཆོས་རྣམས chos.rnams
Gen. རྒྱལ་པོའི rgyal.pohi Loc. རྒྱལ་པོ་ནrgyal.po.na Voc ཀྱེ་རྒྱལ་པོ ོkye.rgyal.po
ཆོས་རྣམས་ཀྱིས chos.rnams.kyis
ཆོས་རྣམས་ལ chos.rnams.la
(ii) 'Ã rgyal.po, rājan ‘king'.
33°47| chos.rnams.nas ཆོས་རྣམས་ཀྱི chos.rnams.kyi
ཆོས་རྣམས་ན chos.rnams.na
ཀྱེ་ཆོས་རྣམས kye.chos.rnams
Plu.
རྒྱལ་པོ་རྣམས rgyal.po.rnams
རྒྱལ་པོ་རྣམས་ཀྱིས rgyal.po-rnama,
kyis
རྒྱལ་པོ་རྣམས་ལ rgyal.po.rnams.la རྒྱལ་པོ་རྣམས་ནས rgyal.po.rnams.nas རྒྱལ་པོ་རྣམས་ཀྱྀ rgyal.po.rnams.kyi
རྒྱལ་པོ་རྣམས་ན rgyal.po.rnams.na ཀྱེ་རྒྱལ་པོ་རྣམས kye.rgyal.po.rnams

Page #33

A SKELETON GRAMMAR
ADJECTIVES
18. Adjectives are generally put after substantives as in French; 121 mi 'man' and nan 'bad', when these are used together we
e.g.
have mi.nan, ‘a bad man'.
Sometimes an adjective is used before a substantive, and in that case it is often put in the genitive case ; e. g. བཟང bzaá or བཟང་པོ bzań. po 'good' and mi 'man', we may put them together as
བཟང་མི bzaá.mi, or བཟང་པོའིི ི་མི bzaáń. pohi. mi 'agood man.’
cag, or
xlix
PRONOUNS
19. Each of the personal pronouns has several forms, only a few of them are given here:
First person: na, bdag, ned (hon.) 'T'. Second person: khyod, khyed (hon.) 'you'.
Third person: kho,
khon (hon.) 'he', 'she,' 'it'.
words as ཉིད id,
20. Reflexive personal pronouns are formed by adding such etc.; e.g.
ང་ཉིད ia. nid, ང་རང་ ia.rai,
'myself'.
21. The plural number of personal pronouns are formed also by adding 34 cag, and 3 cag.rnams; e.g. བདག་ཅག bdag. bdag.cag.rnams 'we'.
53
རང
ran,

Page #34

A SKELETON GRAMMAR
22. The Demonstrative pronouns are 2 hdi 'this and 5 de 'that'.
23. The interrogative pronouns aré su 'who', 975 gan 'which', 'whether' and ci 'what'.
24. The interrogatives V su 'who' and 75 gan 'which are used also in the relative sense. Sometimes instead of V su 975*y that which' or 'he that' is used. 475091 gan, žig 'whoever,' 'whichever, whatever', ji or 475*'that which, what' are other relatives.
VERBS
25. Verbs have the same form in all the persons and numbers.
26. The present participle which may be regarded also as verbal noun or taken both adjectively and substantively and always terminates either in 3 pa or Aba, according to the preceding letter, forms the theme of a verb; e. g. 29991 byed.pa .doing' or 'a doing'. Verbs in a dictionary are found in this form, and it is followed also in these pages.
27. The infinitive is formed by adding 5 ta to the present partii ciple ; c. 8. 99575 byed.par, 'to do'; Baat hgro.bar, 'to go'. Sometimes such particles as 5 tu, 5 du, etc. are added to roots to form infinitives ; e. 8. 2515 byed.du, Skt. kartum 'to do.'

Page #35

A SKELETON GRAMMAR
28.
The present tense is expressed variously:
(a) By dropping the termination pa or 4 ba of the present
ཁོ་ བྱེད, kho.byed, ‘he does` ; ཁོ་ འགྲོ kho.hgro,
participle; e. g.
'he goes'.
(b) By the reduplication of the final letter of the root and adding
the vowel o to it ; e, g.
kho.byed.do, 'he does."
(c) By adding byed or
byed do to the infinitive ; e. g.
ཁོ་འགྲོབར་བྱེད kho hgro.bar.byed or ཁོ་འགྲོ་བར་བྱེད་དོ kho.hdro.bar.
byed.do, Skt. lit. sa gamanam karoti, i. e. sa gacchati 'he goes'. It is to be noted that often the sign of the infinitive is omitted; e. g. kho.hgro.byed, 'he goes'.
(d) By adding to the root
bžin.pa or either of the two
auxiliaries, 5 hdug 'to remain' and snan 'to be' preceded by any one of the following particles : ཀྱིན kyin, གྱིན gyin, གིན gin,
5 hin, and a yin according to the final letter of the root (see
p. 226); e. g. བྱེད་བཞིན་པ byed.bžin.pa, 'he does'; བྱེད་ཀྱིན་འདུག
byed.kyin.ḥdug, 'he is doing'.
29. As regards the form there is no difference between the past is both the past
participle and the past tense; e. g.
participle and the past tense of the root ba 'to say'.
smras

Page #36

lii
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
30. Generally Vs is added to the root to form the past tense; e.g. V smras, ‘said' from smra 'to sayo : 57950 gsungs, ‘said' from A795 gsun 'to say.
31. Sometimes the prefix ḥ of the root is dropped ; e. g. gyur 'is become' from J5 hgyur. 'to become'. Some roots drop their 9 h. and at the end assume Ws; e. 8. ŜV bris 'wrote' from RÀ hbri, 'to write'.
32. Frequently the past or the perfect tense is formed by adding to the root one of the following auxiliaries: འདུག hdug. ཟིན zin. གྱུར་ gyur, ཡིན yin, ཚར tahar, བྱང byui, and སོངོ•on: .. . ཤེས་ཟིན ses.zin, 'knew
For irregular forms see Rule 36.
33. The future is generally formed from the infinitive by adding 395 hgyur ; e, g. 39278Ru5 byed.par.ḥgyur, Skt. karisyati 'he will do. As in Sanskrit, a future participle in 5 bye, or 515 9' par.bya.ba, or 459'9 bar.bya.ba, as the case may be according to the preceding letter of the root, is also used to express the future tense ; e. g. RBS Ķgro.bya, or 1959'a hgro.bar.bya.ba, Skt. gantavyam, but strictly gamanam kartavyam, ‘about to go'.
For irregular forms see Rule 36. 34. The imperative is formed variously : (a) Sometimes the present

Page #37

A SKELETON GRAMMAR
or the past tense is used for it ; e. g. 2597 hdug, do sit ; son (past of BB' hgro ba). ‘go away'. (b) Sometimes the vowel of a root is changed ; c. 8. I zo, do cat' from 3 za or 79 za.ba 'to eat'. (c) Sometimes it is formed from the infinitive by adding to it IT $gyur.cig, 1977 sog, or 77891 sog. cig: e. g. 47°47"] 34 ses.par.gyur.cig, Skt. jānātu, 'let him know'.
35. The conditional is formed by adding ý na to the form of the present or past tense ; e. g. from 35 byed, Skt. kr 'to do 399 byed. na, Skt. yadi karoti “if he would do'; 30 g byas na, Skt. lit. krte sati, 'it being done'. .
36 Verbal roots that are preceded by ḥ and based on the following ten radical letters from their present, past, and future tenses and the imperative differently causing many irregularities : P kh, 8; och, Ej; 9th, 5 d ; 4 ph, ab ; . tsh, dz. The forms are shown in the following ten tables in which the reader is advised to note the changes of the sounds :
No. 1
Present
Future
Imp.
Verb འཁལ་བ
འཁལ
བཀལ་ཟིན
བཀལ
ཁོལ
hkhal.ba 'to spin
hkhal
bkal.zin
bkal
khol.

Page #38

liv
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
khur
འཁར་བའཁརབཀུར་ཟིནབ་ hkhur.ba, 'to carry ḥkhur bkur.zin
bkur འཁྲུད་པ་ འ ཁྲུད་ བཀྲུས ḥkhrud.pa, 'to wash ḥkhrud bkrus
bkru
khrud
No.2
Past
Imp.
བཀུག
ཁག
khug
Verb
Present འགུགས་པ་ འགུགས་ hgugs.pa, 'to call ḥgugs འགུམ་པ་ འགུམ་ hgum.pa, 'to kill þgum འགེགས་པ་འགེགས་
Future དགུག་
dgug དགུམ་
dgum དགག་ dgag
bkug བཀུམ་ bkum བཀག
ཁམ་
khum
ཁོག
hgegs
bkag
khog
hgegs.pa,
'to prohibit
No. 3
Future
Verb འཆག་པ ḥchag.pa, 'to walk
Present འཆག། . þchag
Past . བཅགས་
bcags
བཙག
bcag
Imp.
རྟོག bcag chog
or ཤོག sog བཅང ཆོང་
chog
འཚང་བ
འ ཆང
བཅངས་
hchan.ba, 'to hold' hchan
bcans
bcan
chon

Page #39

འཆིབ
འཆིབ་པ hchib.pa, 'to mount'hchib
Verb
འཇིག་པ
hjig.pa, 'to destroy
འཇིབ་པ
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
Verb
Present
འཇིག
hjig
འཇིབ
hjib.pa, 'to suck'
འཇོམས་པ
hjoms.pa, 'to conquer'hjoms
hjib
འཛོམས
Present
འཐགས
འཐགས་པ
hthags.pa, 'to grind,hthage
weave'.
འཐུང་བ
འཐུང
hthuá.ba, to drink'hthui
འཐོར་བ
འཐོར
hthor.ba, 'to scatter’ hthor
བཅིབས
ḥcibs
N。,
Past
བཞིག
bžig
བཞིབས
bžibs
བཅོམ
bcom
N。,,
Past
བཏགས་
btags
བཏུངས
btuñs.
བཏོར
btor
བཅིབ
bcib
Future
Imp·
བཞིབ or གཞིག ཞིག
bžib or gžig
གཞིབ
gžib
གཞོམ
gžom
Future
བཏག
btag
བཏུང
btun
གཏོར
lv
ཆིབ
chib
gtor
žig
ཞིབ
žib
རློམ
chom
Imp.
ཐོག
thog
འཐུང
hthun
འཐོར
hthor

Page #40

lvi
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
Future
Imp.
གདིང་
thin
Verb
Present འདིང་བ
འདིང ḥdia.ba, 'to spread' ġdin འདུལ་བ་ འདུལ་ ḥdul.ba, 'to subdue' ħdul འདེགས་པ འདེགས་ ḥdegs.pa, 'to lift up' ḥdegs
: Past - བཏིང
btin བདུལ btul བཏེག་
gdin གདལ་
gdul གདེག་ gdeg
bteg
theg
N. 1
Past
Future
Imp.
ཕྲལ་
དབྲལ
ཁྲོལ
Verb
Present འཕྲུལ་བ
འཕྲུལ་ bphral.ba, to separate' hphral འཕྲི་བ
འཕྲི hphri.ba, 'to substract' hphri
phral
dbral
phrol
phri
dbri
phri
No. 。
Past
Verb
Imp.
ཡིག
Future དབག་ dbig
Present འབིགས་པ ། འབིགས་ ḥbigs.pa 'to pierce' ħbigs འབྱེད་པ ། hbud.pa, 'to put off ḥbud
ཡིག
phig
phig ཕད་
འབུད་
དབུད་
ཕུད་ phud
phud
dbud

Page #41

A SKELETON GRAMMAR
lvii
ཐལ
ཕལ
འབུལ་བ hbul.ba, 'to offer
འབུལ Ạ bul
དབུལ་ dbul
phul
phul.
No. 9
Imp.
འཚག
Future བཙག
ཚོག
Past བཙགས་ btsags བཙོངས་
btsag
Verb
Present འཚག པ ḥtshag. pa, 'to sift ḥtshag འཚོང་བ འ མོང htshon.ba, 'to sell' ḥtshon འཚོལ་བའ ཚོལ
tshog
བཙོང
btsons
བཅོལ
btson བཙལ
tshon ཚེལ tshol
htshol.ba, 'to search' htshol
btsoal
btsal
Imp.
gzun
No. 10 Verb Present Past
Future འཛིན་པ འཛིན་ བཟུང་ གཟུང་ ཟུང hdzin.pa, 'to seize' ħdzin
bzun
zun འཛུམ་པ
འཛུམ་ བཙུམ ཟུམ་ གཟུམ་ ཟུམ་ ḥdzum.pa, 'to close ḥdzum bslum, zum gzum འཛེད་པ་ འཛོད བཛོད།
ཟེད་ ḥdzed.pa 'to receive hdzed bdzed gzed zed.
37 verbs with the fve preisen, viz. གg, ད d, བb, མn, and འ ḥ in the above cases sometimes retain the prefixes and sometimes
zum
གཛོད་

Page #42

lviï
A SKELETON GRAMMAR
do not ; e. 8. 978*A gci.ba, to make water', retains its 478 in gci (present). Tên gcis (past), etc., while 98597 gcod.pa. 'to cut' in the present is 735 gcod, but in the past 985 bcad, in the future 955 scad, and in the imperative 165 chod or 4755 gcod.
In most verbs the prefix ḥ is used only in the present tense.
38. Active verbs are formed from the corresponding neuter ones by an addition, contraction, or transformation of a letter in the latter ; e. g. 4 skye.ba 'to be born,' but 5 41 skyed.pa, 'to generate"; RIA'hgrub.pa 'to be accomplished', but at sgrub.pa 'to accomplish' ; 294a ḥbral.ba, 'to be separated', but again hphral.ba 'to separate'.
THE CAUSATIVE The causative is formed by adding 67** hjug.pa 'to command, induce' (pr. 854 hjug. past 1847 bcug. fut. a1947 gžug, imp. 3547 chug) to the infinitive ; e. g. 2:45 hbri.bar 'to write is the infinitive, by adding to it 26T* hjug.pa, we have R43 95751hbri. bar.ḥug.pa 'to cause to write' ; 35:5-4547 byed.du. þcug, Skt. kārita 'caused to do (BC, 29“). ,
It is to be noted that sometimes the sign of the infinitive is dropped ; e. g. from RBTAḥkhyer.ba 'to carry R5 254*31

Page #43

A SKELETON GRAMMAR khyer.þjug pa for R 5595797 þkhyer. du.þjug.pa 'to cause to carry'. Here the infinitive sign 5 du is dropped.
When speaking respectfully a stol.ba 'to send' is used instead of འཇུག་པ for forming a caཐual verb;༤. . ཀློག་ཏ་སོལ་བ klog. tu.stsol.ba 'to cause to read'.
GERUNDS
Gerunds are niade by adding the particles 5 te. I de, and ste in accordance with the preceding final consonant (see p. 222), as well as TV nas to the verb of the present and the past tenses ; e. g. w52 yod de, bhūtuā, 'being': 857" \dug. ste, uşitvā, “having lived' or 'having remained; ag598 brten. nas (99997 rten. pa, āVári 'to hold', 'to have recourse to,' pf. 959 brten) āśritya, 'having
held'.
ADVERBS
Adverbs are formed in many cases by adding such particles as the following to adjectives : 5 tu. 5 du, 9 n, 1 r, 3 ru ; c. g. 1795 kun. tu sarvatra ‘every where'; 55 myur. du, āśu, 'sighram 'promptly'; 57895, nan par, mandam badly'.

Page #44


Page #45

PART I
TEXTS

Page #46


Page #47

ཤེས་རབ་སྡོང་བུ། 11 SES. RAB. SDON. BU 11
t ཏུ་ཚུ: l
མེད་དེ། med.de
ཤེས་རབ་དང་མཉམ་ ses.rab.dan.mñam.
प्रज्ञा- समं རྨོངས་པ་དང་མཉམ་ rmons.pa.dan.mñam.
མིག་ mig. चक्षुः
མུན་པ་ mun.pa.
གd |
མེད །
med i
at
གཞོ T
དགྲ་བ་
མེད །
ནད་འདྲ་བ་ཡི་ nad.ḥdra.ba.yi. dgra.bo. med i གཞག:
ཁ | འཆི་བ་དང་མཉམ་ འཇིགས་པ་
མེད །།་ ḥchi.ba.dan.mñam. hjigs.pa. med i मृत्युः समं
གa l j05 नास्ति प्रशासमं चक्षुर्नास्ति मोहसमं तमः । नास्ति रोगसमः शत्रुर्नास्ति मृत्युसमं भयम् ॥ .

Page #48

PRAJÑADAŅDA
[2
དམ་པའི་ dam.pahi.
* सतः
ཡིན་ཏེ །
འགྲོ་བ་ hgro.ba.
गती
གཉིས་ ghis.
yin.te !
स्तः ।
མེ་ཏོག་དག་གི་ me.tog.dag.gi. कुसुमाना
མགོ་ལྕོགས་བཞིན ། mgo.lcogs.bzin। स्तवक- वत।
འཇིག་རྟེན་ ་ hjig.rten.
लोकेन
ཀན་གྱིས་ kun.gyis
सर्वेण
སྤྱིར་ spyir.
मूर्ध्नि
བཀར་བའམ ། bkur.baḥam i
पूज्यते अथवा ।
ནགས་ཉིད་ད་ ngas.ñid.du
वन एव
དེངས་པར་བྱ༎ dens.par.bya !! विशोर्येत ॥ 26
कुसुमस्तवकस्येव द्वे गतो तु महात्मनाम् । मूनि वा धार्यते लोविशीर्येत वनेऽथवा ॥

Page #49

3]
གང་ཞིག་
gan.žig.
यस्य
དེ་ལ་
de.la.
तस्य
རྔོན་པ་
rnon.pa.
མ[E:
ཡིད་འོང་
yid.hoi.
हृदयङ्गमं
PRAJÑADANDA
ཡིད་ལ་
yid.la.
मनसि
རྟག་ཏུ་
rtag.tu.
सदा
3
གནོད་བྱེད་
gnod.byed
* अपकारम्
སྙན་ ཚིག་
sñan.tshig.
प्रिय वाक्यं
གླུ་ སྙན་
glu.sñan.
गोतं * मधुरं
འདོད །
hdod
इच्छत्
རི་དྭགས་གསོད་མཐོང་ཚེ །
ri.dwags.gsod.mthoń. tshe |
#T- 2u- *ཊུii- ནྭཊེ
བརྗོད །
brjod |
27འ ་
ལེན་པ་ བཞིན །།
len.pa.
bzin ll
गायति
v7| 17
यस्य चाप्रियमन्विच्छेत्तस्य ब्रूयात् सदा प्रियम् ।
व्याधो मृगवधं कर्तु गीतं गायति सुस्वरम् ॥
5
པཱ་

Page #50

PRAJÑADANDA
གཞན་ལ་ gažan.la.
पर.
གནོད་པ་ gnod.pa. सन्तापं
མ ་བྱས་ དང་ ། ma.byas. dan 1
अ-कृत्वा च
དམན་ ལ་ dman. la.
नीच-
འདད་ པ་
Þdud.pa. . नम्रता
མ་བྱས་ ཤིང་། ma.byas. sin 1 གཞt
ལམ་ ནི་
དམ་པའི་ dam.pai
lam.ni
म
མ་སྦྲངས་ གང་ ། ma.spans. gani अनुत्सृज्य यत्
;;
ཉུང་ བ་
དེ་ ནི་ de.ni.
fun.ba
अल्पं
མང་པོ་ ཡིན ། man.po. yin ! གཙུགཞི l 42
तद
अकृत्वा परसन्तापमकृत्वा नीचनम्रताम् । अनुत्सृज्य सतां वर्त्म यत्स्वल्पमपि तद् बहु ॥

Page #51

PRAJÑADAŅDA
5
གང་ལ་
ཞལ་ཏ་བྱེད་པ་ žal.ta.byed.pa.
* नेतारः
མང་། man i
gan. la. यत्र
बहवः।
ཐམས་ཅད་ མཁས་པར་ thams.cad. mkhas.par.
'पण्डित
ང་གྱོལ་མེ། na.rgyal. che i मानिनः * “महा-1
सर्वे
kun. सर्वे
ཀྱང་
་ kyai
अपि
གཙོ་བ ་ཉིད་ gtso.bo.nid.
प्रभुत्वम्
འདོད་པ། hdod. pa इच्छन्ति ।
དེ་ཡི་ de.yi. तानि
ཚོ གས་རྣམས་ tshogs.rnams.
वृन्दानि
འཟིག་པར་ འགྱུར །། hjig.par. hgyur 11
अवसीदन्ति ॥ 53
सर्वे यत्र विनेतारः सर्वे पण्डितमानिनः । सर्वे प्रभुत्वमिच्छन्ति तद्वन्दमवसीदति ॥

Page #52

PRAJÑADAŅDA
གང་ལ་ gan.la. གའ་
བློ་ blo.
@:
ཡོད་ yod. ག་ག
དེ་ de. 4:
སྟོ བས་ལྡན ། stobs.ldan !
ཁགཞ1
བློ་མེད་ blo.med. अबोधस्य
སྟོ བས་ཀྱིས་ stobs.kyis
बलेन
ཅི་ཞིག་ བྱ ། ci.žig..bya 1
किं कार्यम् ।
ཅི་ཞིག་ ci.žig कश्चित्
སེ ང་གེ་ sen.ge. सिंहः
སྟོབས་དང་ལྡན ། stobs.dai.ldan | * बलवान्
རི་བ ང་གིས་་ ri.bon.gis.
གa i
མི་ ni.
སྲོག་དང་བྲལ། srog.dan.bral 11
* ཁིགle: Il 85
बुद्धिर्यस्य बलं तस्य अबोधस्य कुतो बलम् । སྟག ། སའུ་གa: བལྟ་ག Rཞིa: l

Page #53

7]
ཇི་སྲིད་
ji.srid
यावदू
དེ་སྲིད་
de.srid.
तावद्
འཇིགས་པ་
hjigs.pa. भये
PRAJÑADANDA
འཇིགས་པ་
hjigs.pa.
भयम्
འཇིགས་ལ་
hjigs.la.
भयस्य
༢འ
འཇིགས་མེད་ལྟ་བུར་
bjigs.med.lta.bur. अभीत
མ་བྱུང་བ །
ma.byui.ba ·
--|
འཇིགས་པར་བྱ །
hjigs.par.bya |
deuu |
མངོན་དུ་ བྱང་བའི་ ཚེ །
mñon.du.byui.bahi. tshe!
*ཨཽu
ཞrd |
གཞོམ་པར་ བྱ ༎
gžom.par.bya l ncdun 89
तावद्भयस्य भेतव्यं यावद्भयमनागतम् । आगतं तु भयं दृष्ट्वा प्रहर्तव्यमभीतवत् ॥
9

Page #54

10
སངས་རྒྱས་
gañs.rgyas.
बुद्धं
ལྷ་
lha.
देवम्
PRAJÑADANDA
མགོན་པོ་
mgon.po.
नाथं
གཞན་ལ་ ནི་
gžan.la. ni
अन्यम्
བློ་ ངན་
གང་གཱའི་
blo.nan.. gań.gahi
दुर्मतिः
गङ्गायाः
8
སྐོམ་ནས་ ཁྲོན་པ་
skom.nas. khron.pa.
तृषितः
कूप
ཡོངས་སྤངས་ཏེ །
yoñs.spañs.te |
परित्यज्य ।
ཕྱག་བྱེད་པ །
phyag.byed.pa | नमस्करोति ।
འགྲམ་དུ་ ནི།
hgram.du.ni |
ཊིའི |
བྱེད་པ་དང་མཚངས །
byed.dań.mtshuis lt
करोति
Cf. Qane fu ག ཏིཿའ་ཡུས་ཁའི|
तृषितो जाह्नवीतीरे कूपं खनति दुर्मतिः ।।
ソ
་
འོ .།! 100
[ 8

Page #55

PRAJÑADAŅDA
9
བགུ་ཡི་ brgya.yi.
ན ང་ནས་ nan.nas. मध्यात्
དཔའ་བོ་ dpaḥ.bo.
शूरः
skye जायते।
शतस्य
སྟོང་གི་
ནང་ནས་
མཁས་པ་
ston.gi.
nan.nas.
mkhas.pa.
पण्डितो
བྱང་ ། byuri जायते।
सहस्रस्य
मध्यात
མཇིངས་པ་
བགུ་སྟོང་ལས་ ་ brgya.ston.las. शत- सहस्रान्
ནི་ ་ ni
mdzans.pa.
* प्राज्ञः।
ste
གཏོང་བ་
སྐྱེ་འམ་མི་ སྐྱེའང་ སྲིད ། skye.ham. mi. skychan. srid ॥ जायते वा न जायतेऽपि वा॥ 132
gton.ba
दाता
शतेषु जायते शूरः सहस्रषु च पण्डितः वक्ता दशसहस्रषु दाता भवति वा न वा ॥

Page #56

127
བདེ་བའི་ རྗེས་ལ
bde.bahi.
rjes.la.
सुखस्य
अनन्तरं
སྡུག་བསྔལ་
sdug.bsñal.
दुःखस्य
མི་རྣམས་ཀྱི་
mi.rnams.kyi.
मनुष्याणां
PRAJÑADANDA
चक्र
རྗེས་ལ་
rjes.la.
अनन्तरं
འཁོར་ལོ་བཞིན་དུ་
hkhor.lo.bžin.du.
वत्
ནི་
ni.
10
ཏེ །
སྡུག་བསྔལ་ sdug.bsñal.te |
ཝུ:ཊ།
བདེ་བ་
bde.ba.
सुखं
བདེ་སྡུག་དག །
bde.sdug.dag | སུཁ-ཤུ:ཞེ ༔
འཁོར་བར་བྱེད ༎
hkhor.bar.byed w viftadཊེ | 64
सुखस्यानन्तरं दुःखं दुःखस्यानन्तरं सुखम् । चक्रवत्परिवर्तन्ते दुःखानि च सुखानि च ॥
ཡིན །
yin |
auཊི་
[10

Page #57

11]
གང་ཞིག་
gañ.zig.
:
དེ་ནི་
dc.ni.
ཊ་
ཁམས་རྣམས་
khams.rnams.
धातुषु
PRAJÑÄDANDA
ལང་ཚོ་ལ་
lai.tsho.la.
यौवने
ཞི་བར་
zi.bar.
शान्तम्
11
ཅི་ཡིཕྱིར་ན་
ཞི་
ci.yi.phyir.na. ži.
ཊ:
E:
ཞི་བ །
zi.ba I
|d:|
བདག་གིས་
bdag.gis.
अहं
mi.
न
ཡོངས་སུ་ཟད་པ་ན །
yois.su.zad.pa.na |
- aཨིའུ)
ཤེས །
ses |
नवे वयसि यः शान्तः स शान्त इति मे मतिः । धातुषु क्षीयमाणेषु शमः कस्य न जायते ॥
ཡེ །
འགྱུར །
hgyur li
rgཊེ | 126
13

Page #58

14
ཀ་ཏ་ཀ་ཡི་
ka.ta.ka.yi
कतकस्य
ཆ་རྣམས་
་
chu.rnams.
མཡུ
དེ་ཡི་
de.yi
तस्य
PRAJÑĀDANDA
12
རྡུལ་དང་བར་
ཕ
chu. rdul.dai.bar.
वारि
*RGu
དང་བར་བྱེད་
dai.bar.byed.
प्रसाद कं
འབྲས་བུ་ ནི །
hbras.bu.
फलं
མི་
mm.
न
ni |
हि
མོད་ཀྱི །
mod.kyi |
TuIའི ་
མིང་ཙམ་སྨྲས་པ་ཡིས །
mi i.team.smras.pa.yis |
8- F\Z- *5HIR !
བྱེད་དོ ༎
byed.do w
Eaཊེ u 168
फलं कतकवृक्षस्य यद्यप्यम्बुप्रसादकम् ।
न नामग्रहणादेव तस्य वारि प्रसीदति ॥
[12

Page #59

13]
PRAJÑADAŅDA
15
13
སྦྲུལ་གདུག་ sbrul. gdug. सर्पः क्रूरः
སྐྱེ་བོ་ངན་པ་ skye.bo.nan.pa.
दुजनः
གདག ! gdug ।
करः।
སྦྲུལ་ལས་ sbrul.las.
सात
ལྷག་པར་ lhag.par
अधिकं
སྐྱེ་ངན་ s kye.nan.
दुर्जनः
གདག ། gdug! क्रूरः।
སྦྲུལ་ གདུག་ སྨན་ དང་ སྔགས་ཀྱིས་ ཐུབ། ། sbral. gdug. sman. dan snags.kyis. thub i सर्पः क्रूरः औषधेन च मन्त्रेण * शक्यः । སྐྱེ་ངན་ ག དག་པ་ གང་གིས་ ཞི ། skye.nangdug.pa. gan.gis ži 1 दुर्जनः क्रूरः केन * शाम्यति ।। 173
सर्पः क्रूरः खलः क्रूर सात क्रूरतरः खलः । मन्त्रौषधंवशः सर्पः खलः केन निवार्यते ॥

Page #60

16
PRAJÑADAŅDA
[ 14
འདོད་པ་ hdod.pa.
ཀན་ཏ་ kun.tu. सर्वथा
སྤང་བར་གྱིས། span.bar.gyis |
जहीहि ।
काम
སྤོ ང་བར་
མ་
ནས་ན །
གལ་དེ་ gal.te
चेत्
spon.bar.
ma.
nus.na! शक्यते ।
हातुं
न
ཐར་པ་ དག་ལ་་འདོད་པར་གྱིས། thar.pa.dag.la. hdod.par. gyisi
मोक्षं प्रनि कामं कुरु ।
དེ་ ཉིད་ de. ñid.
हि
དེ་ཡི་ de.yi. तस्य
སྨན་ sman. भेषज
ཡིན་ནོ །། yin no 11 भवति ॥ 188
P
कामः सर्वात्मना हेयः स चेदातुन शक्यते। . स मोक्षं प्रति कर्तव्यः स हि तस्य हि भेषजम् ।।

Page #61

PRAJÑADAŅDA
7
15
ཟས་ལས་
ཟས་ལས་
ཟན་གྱི་ zan.gyi. अन्नस्य
ཕྱེ ད་ཙམ་ཡང་ ། phyed.tsam.yani - अर्ध-मात्राम् अपि ।
zas.las.
प्रासाद्
སློང་བ་རྣམས་ལ་ sloi.ba.rnams.la.
अर्थिषु
རྩིས་ cis. किं
མི་ mi. न
སྡེར། ster | दीयते ।
འདོད་དང་ hdod.dai.
རྗེ ས་མཐུན་ rjes.mthun.
འབྱོར་པ་ཡང་་ ། hbyor.pa. yai | विभवः ་བ |
Fན།
अनुरूपः
གང་གི་ཚེ་ན་ gan.gi.tshe.na
འབྱང་བར་ འགྱུར ། hbyun.bar. hgyur
ཞི་གཞི u 199
.
कदा
ग्रासादपि तदद्धं च कस्मानो दीयतेऽथिषु । इच्छानुरूपो विभवः कदा कस्य भविष्यति ।।

Page #62

18
ནོར་ དེས་
nor.des.
धनेन तेन
སྦྱིན་དང་
སྤྱོད་པས་
sbyin.dań. spyod.pas.
---
ཨེu
PRAJÑADANDA
ནོར་ དེ་ཉིད་ཀྱིས་
nor. de.ñid.kyis.
धनेन तेन एव
ནར་གྱེ་
nor.gyi.
धनस्य
16
ནོར་བདག་
nor.bdag.
༢འ- qཞི:
བདག་པོ་
bdag.po.
་d7:
བདག་
bdag.
वयम्
ཅེས་
cis
कि
སྡོང་པ་ཡི །
ston•pa.yi ·
विहीनेन ।
ཡིན་ ན་ གོ །
yin.na.go!
भवति यदि ।
ཀྱང་ དེ
kyai. ni |
ཁི ་
ས་
ma.
न
दानभोगविहीनेन धनेन धनिनो यदि ।
भवाभः किं न तेनेव धनंन धनिनो वयम् ॥
ཡིན །
yin l
3uiu: |! 201
16

Page #63

17 ]
གང་ཞིག་
gan.žig.
:
གསོ་བ་
gso.ba.
चिकित्सां
སྨན་མེད་
sman.med.
निरौषधं
PRAJÑADANDA
དམྱལ་བའི་
dmyal.bahi
नरक
འདི་ལ་
hdi.la.
इह
17
གནས་སུ་
gnas.su
स्थानं
ནད་དང་བཅས་པས
ཅི་
nad.dan.bcas.pas. ci.
सरुजः
कि
ནད་ལ་ནི །
nad.la.ni |
Id:|
མི་ བྱེད་པ །
mi.byed.pa|
ཆ་ཊི |
न
སོང་ནས་
son.nas.
गत्वा
ནི།
ni |
ཊཱི
བྱར་ཡོད །
byar.yod ·
5ftཨཱid | 206
sta नरकव्याधेश्चिकित्सां ने करोति यः । गत्वा निरौषधं स्थानं सरुजः किं करिष्यति ||
19

Page #64

PRAJNADANDA--
[18
___18
18
རྗེ་སྲིད་འཚོ་བར་ གསོད་ ji.srid.htsho.bar. god. यावज्- जीवं प्रतः དགྲ་བོ་ ཟད་པར་ མི་ dgra.bo. zad.par.
शत्रुः क्षीणो न
ཀྱང་ ནི། kyai. nil अपि । འགྱུར་གྱི ། hgyur.gyil भवति ।
.
mi
1
རང་གི་ ran.gi आत्मनः
ཁྲོ་བ་ khro.ba.
क्रोधः
ཉི ད་ ñid एव
བསད་ bsad. हन्यते
ན། na! यदि ।
དེ་ནི་ དགྲ་བ་ de.ni. dgra.bo. तंन शत्रुः
ཉིད་ ñid. एव
གསོད་ gsod. हतः
ཡིན། yin ! भवति ।। 208
न द्विषन्तः क्षयं यान्ति यावज्जीवमपि नतः । क्रोधमेव तु यो हन्ति तेन सर्वे द्विषो हताः ।।

Page #65

19]
PRAJÑADAŅDA
21
19
ཐམས་ཅད་ thams.cad.
सर्व
ཆོ ས་ ནི་ chos.ni. धर्मः हि
མཉན་པར་བྱ། mñan.par.bya /
श्रोतव्यः।
གྲོས་ནས་ thos.nas.
श्रुत्वा
rab.tu.
सं.
བཟང་བྱ་སྟེ། bzun.bya. ste | धारयितव्यः।
གང་ཞིག་ gan.zig.
यत
་ བདག་ ཉིད་
bdag. nid. आत्मनः एव
མི་འདོད་པ། mi.hdod.pa | अनिष्टम् ।
དེ་དག་གཞན་ལ་མི་ ་ de.dag. gzan.la mi. तत परस्य न
བྱའོ །། bya.hot कर्तव्यम् ॥ 2120
श्रूयतां धर्मसर्वस्वं श्रुत्वा व हृदि धार्यताम् । आत्मनः प्रतिकूलानि न परेषां समाचरेत।

Page #66

22
PRAJÑADANDA
[ 20
___20
རིག་པ་བསླབས་ rig.pa.bslabs.
कृतविद्यः
དང་ dai च
དཔའ་པོ་ dpah.po. शूरः
དང་ ། dail च।
གང་ ཡང་ gai. yai. या अपि
གཟགས་བཟང་ལྡན་ gzugs.bzan.ldan.
रूपवती
བུད་མེད ། bud.medi
योषित् ।
གང་ དང་ gan. dai. यत्र
གང་དུ་ gai. du. यत्र
འ གྲོ་འགྱུར་བ ། ། hgro.hgyur.bal
गमिष्यन्ति ।
ir
དེ་ དང་ དེར་ de.dan.der. तत्र तत्र
ནི་ ni. हि
དཔལ་ ཆེན་ ཐོབ ། dpal.chen. thob li श्रियं महतीं लभन्ते ॥ 226
शूराश्च कृतविद्याश्च रूपवत्यश्च योषितः । यत्र यत्र गमिष्यन्ति तत्र तत्र कृतादराः॥

Page #67

21)
PRAJÑADAŅDA
23
21
རིག་པ་ལྡན་དང་རྒྱལ་པ་ ནི། rig-pa.ldan. dai rgyal.po. ni | fagའབ
Int ,
གང་དུའང་ མ ཉམ་པ་ མ་ gan.duhan. mñam.pa. ma.
ན་ ཨ་ཀི་ ཤུལོ1: རྒྱལ་པོ་ རང་གི་ ཡུལ་ན་ rgyal.po. ran.gi. yul.na.
राजा
ཡིན་ ཏེ། yin. te i
༣འི ་ བཀར། bkuri gia I
བ
།
རིག་ལྡན་ rig.ldan.
विद्वान्
ཀན་ཏ་ kun.tu. सर्वत्र
བཀར་བར་འགུར།། bkur. bar.hgyur II
पूज्यते ॥ 227
विद्वत्त्व व नृपत्व व नैव मुल्य कदाचन । स्वदेशे पूज्यते राजा विद्वान् सर्वत्र पूज्यते ।।

Page #68

PRAJÑADANDA
[22
___ 22
གཟགས་
ལང་ཚོ་ lan.tsho. यौन-
ཕ ན་ཚོགས་ཤིང་། phun.tshogs.sin |
सम्पन्नाः ।
gzugs.
dan
रूप-
रूप
(च)
རིགས་མཐོ་རྣམས་ལས་ rigs.mtho.rnams.las.
विशाल-कुल
སྐྱེས་ གྱུར་ skyes. gyur.
सम्भवाः
ཀྱང་ ། kyan |
अपि।
རྒྱ་སྐྱེགས་ཤིང་གི་ rgya.skyegs.sin.gi.
किंशुकस्य
མེ་ཏོག་ལྟར ། me.tog.ltar |
कुसुमम इव।
་
རིག་དང་བྲལ་ ན་ rig.dai.bral. na. * विद्याहीनाः
མཛེས་ མ་ ཡིན།། mdzes. ma. yin il शोभन्ते न ॥ 228
रूपयौवनसम्पन्ना विशालकुलम्भवाः । विद्याहीनाः न शोभन्ते निर्गन्धा इव किंशुकाः ।।

Page #69

23]
PRAJÑADAŅDA
25
____ 23
བདེ་བ་འདོད་ན་ bde.ba.hdod.na. __* सुखार्थी
རི ག་པ་ rig.pa. विद्या -
འདོར ། ḥdor 1 त्यजेत् ।
རིག་པ་འདོད་ན་བདེ་བ་འདོར ། rig.pa.hdod.na. bde.ba. hdore _* विद्यार्थी
त्यजेत् ।
सुखं
བདེ་ལྡན་རིག་པ་ག་ལ་ bde.Idan rig.pa. ga.la. सुखार्थिनः विद्या
འགྲབ ། hgrub i सिध्यति ।
bde 11
རིག་པ་དོན་གཉེར་ག་ལ་ ་ བདེ ། rig.pa.don.gñer. ga.la. विद्यार्थिनः कुतः सुखम् ।। 230
सुनार्थिनः कुतो विद्या नास्ति विद्यार्थिनः मुलम् । सुखार्थी वा त्यजेवियां विद्यार्थी वा त्यजेत् सुजम् ।।

Page #70

26
PRAJÑADANDA
[24
24
རིག་དང་ལྡན་ལ་ rig.dai.ldan.la. ___ सविद्यस्य
གཞན་ ཡུལ་ གང་ ། gan. yull gai |
विदेशः कः।
སྙན་པར་སྨྲ་ལ་ shan.par.smra.la
* प्रियवादिनः
ཕ་རོལ་ pha.rol.
སུ། su ।
परः
कः।
ནས་དང་ལྡན་ལ་ nus.dan.ldan.la.
समर्थस्य
ཁར་ khur. भारः
ལྕི་ Ici. गुरुः
གང་ ། gan | कः।
भारः
བརྩོན་དང་ལྡན་ལ་ ཐ ག་རིང་ ཅི།། brston.dai.ldan.la. thag.rii. ci. ॥ 232 व्यवसायिनः
दूरं किम ।। कोऽतिभार; समर्थानां कः परः प्रियवादिनाम् । को विदेशः सविद्यानां कः परः प्रियवादिनाम ॥

Page #71

PRAJÑADANDA
27
25
སྐྱེད་པར་བྱེད་ skyed.par, byed.
जनिता
དང་ dan, བ
ལེགས་སློབ་ དང་། legs.slob. dani * g-Riaཚ5: བ
དང་ །
གང་ཞིག་ gan. žig.
यः
རིག་པ་སྟེར་བ་ rig pa.ster.ba.
विद्यादाता
dan
ཟས་སྡེར་བ་ ་ zas-ster.ba.
དང་ dan.
མི་འཇིགས་སྦྱིན ། mi.hjigs.sbyin i * ཀཀཤུག |
B-4d
ལྔ་པོ་ འདི་དག་ ཕ་ར བ ཤད །། Ina.po. ḥdi.dag. pha.ru bśad , ཝ ཞེ ཁི འ: * ཆel: ll 237 जनिता चोपनेना च यश्च विद्यां प्रयच्छति । अन्नदाता भयत्राता पञ्चैते पितरः स्मृताः ॥

Page #72

PRAJBADANDA
28
PRAJÑADAŅDA
[26
126
26
གྱོལ་བོ་ rgyal.po.
राज-
བློན་པོ་ blon.po. मन्त्रि-
- ཆང་མ་ chui.ma. पनी
དང་ ། dan |
व
དེ་བཞིན་ de.bzin. तथा
མ ཛའ་བ འི་ ་ mdzah'.bohi.
मित्रस्य
ཆང་མ་ chui.ma.
पनी
དང་ ། dan | च
སྦྱན་ཟླའི་ ཆང་མ་ spun zlņai. chun ma सोदरस्य पनी भ्रातृ
མ་ཉིད་དེ། ma ñid. de i माता एव।
ལྔ་པོ་ lia.po.
पञ्च
འདི་དག་ hdi.dag. एताः
མ་ར་ ma ru. मातरः
བཤད །། bbad ॥ स्मृताः ॥ 238
राजपली गुरोः पक्षी मित्रपसी तयैव च। पक्षीमाता खमाता व पञ्चताः पितरः स्मृताः ॥

Page #73

27]
བླན་ལ་
ܘ
་
blun.la. मूर्खस्य
འཁྲུག་བའི་
hkhrug pahi.
ཆེu
ལག་འགྲོ་
lag.hgro.
भुजङ्गानां
དུག་ འཕེལ་
dug.hphel.
विष वर्धनं
PRAJÑADANDA
27
ཉེ་བར་བསྟན་པ་
ñe.bar.bstan.pa•
उपदेशो
རྒྱུ་ ཡིན་
rgyu. yin.
हेतुः
भवति
འོ་མ་
ho.ma.
:
འགྱར་བ་
hgyur.ba.
भवति
ܘ
ནི་ །
ܘ
ni |
འཐངས་པ་
ཞི་ཕྱིར་
ži.phyir.
शान्तये
htthuns.pa.ni |
पानम्
མིན །
उपदेशो हि मूर्खाणां प्रकोपाय न शान्तये । पयःपानं भुजङ्गानां केवलं विषवर्धनम् ॥
min ·
न भवति ।
འབའ་ཞིག་གོ །།
hbahžig.go. "
CH || 239
29

Page #74

30
PRAJÑADANDA
་
[28
28
མངོན་སུམ་པ་ཡི་ རྐང་གཉིས་ mnon.sum pa yirkan.gñis. प्रत्यक्षः
द्विपदः
ཕྱགས ། phyugs |
གྱུ: |
བླུན་པོ་
ཡོངས་སུ་
blun.po.
* ཞུ:
yons.su. བR.
སྦྱང་བར་བྱ་ ། span. bar.bya
da:|
མ་མཐོང་
ཚེ ར་མ་
ཇི་ལྟ་བུར །
t sher.ma.
ji.lta. bur |
ma.mthoi * ཞ-f;
GPE:
21
ཚིག་གི་ ་་ཟུག་རྔས་ tshig.gi. rug.rfus.
ཀ. fཚཤེའ
གནོད་པར་བྱེད །། gnod.par.byed 1
* RའR u 240
दुर्जनः परिहतंव्यः प्रत्यक्ष द्विपदः पशुः । भिनत्ति वाक्यशन्स्पेन अवश्यः कण्टको यथा ॥

Page #75

29]
བླུན་པོ་
blun. po. *isi
གང་ཞིག་
gañ.Žig.
यत्
དམ་པ་
dam·pa.
साधूनाम्
ཤིན་ཏུ་
sin.tu.
aft
PRAJÑADANDA
ཆ་ཡི་
chu.yi.
ཞཥ
བྱས་
byas.
कृतं
རྡོ་ཡི་
rdo.yi.
fueu
ཆང་ངུའང་
chun.nuḥan
अल्पम् अपि
29
རི་མོ་
ri.mo.
रेखा
དེ་
?
te.
तत्
རི་མོ་
ri.mo.
लेखा
ལྟར །
ltar |
འ ་
མྱུར་དུ་
myur.du
*
द्रुतं
ལྟར །
ltar t
ཐའ|
བརྟན་པར་
brtan.par.
*c་
जलरेखेव नीचानां यत्कृतं तन्न दृश्यते ।
अत्यल्पमपि साधूनां शिलालेखेव तिष्ठति ॥
འཇིབ། །
hjig t
नश्यति ।
གནས །
gnas ་
ifigiཊི tu 234
31

Page #76

PRAJÑADAŅDA
[30
_30_
ཨེ་མ་ e.ma. महो
སྐྱེ་བ་ངན་པ་ ཁས་དང་། skye.bo.nan.pa. dan 1 दुर्जनस्य
च।
བད་ཀན་དག་གི་ bad,kan, dag.gi.
श्लेष्मणः
རང་བཞིན་ ran.bžin
མཚངས། mtshuns : सादृश्यम्।
འཇམ་བོ་ཡིས་ ནི hjam.po.yis. ni.
मधुरेण
འཁྲུག་འགྱུར་ལ། ḥkhrug.hgyur.la i
ཏེ་གཞི།
རྩུབ་པོ་ཡིས་་ ནི་
rtsub.po.yis. ni.
कटुकेन
ཞི་བར་འགྱུར །། ži.bar.hgyuri
གཞི l 245
अहो प्रकृतिसाश्य श्लेष्मणो दुर्जनस च । मधुरैः कोपमायाति कटुफेनैव शाम्यति ॥

Page #77

,
an
།། ཀླུ་ཀུན་ཏུ་དགའ་བ་ ཞེས་བྱ་བའི་ ཟློས་གར །། ॥ नागानन्दं नाम नाटकम् ॥ ཐམས་ཅད་མཁྱེན་པ་ལ་ ཕྱག་འཚལ་ལོ།། सर्वज्ञाय
བa: lua བསམ་གཏན་ ཟོལ་དག་ ཉེ་བར་བཟུང་ནས་ སྐད་ཅིག་ མིག་ ཕྱེ་ व्याजम् उपेत्य क्षणं चक्षुः उन्मील्य
་སུ་ལ་ སེམས་པར་བྱེད །
कां चिन्तयसि। སྐྱོབ་པ་ཡིན་ ཡང་ ལུས་མེད་ མདའ་ གཟིར་ སྐྱེ་བོ་ འདི་དག་ त्राता अपि अनङ्ग- शर- आतुरं जनम् इमं
སྲང་བ་ མིན་ལ་ ལྟོས |
रक्षसि न पश्य । སྙིང་རྗེ་ལྡན་པ་ རྫུན་ཏེ་ ཁྱོད་ལས་ གཞན་ བརྩེ་མེད་ སྐྱེས་བུ་ कारुणिकः मिथ्या त्वत्तः अन्यः निघृणः पुमान
ག་ལ་ ཡོད ། ཚུR: གཞིt

Page #78

34
NAGANANDA--
[2 བདུད་མོ་རྣསས་ཀྱིས་ བྱང་ཆུབ་ལ་ འདེ་ ཕྲག་དོག་གིས་ मारवधूभिः बोधौ इदं सेयं
བརྗོད་ རྒྱལ་བས་ ཁྱེད་ལ་ བསྲངས །
अभिहितः जिनः वः पातु ॥ १ ।। ध्यानव्याजमुपेत्य चिन्तयसि कामुन्मील्य चक्षुः क्षणं पश्यानङ्गशरातुरं जनमिमं त्रातापि नो रक्षसि । मिथ्याकारुणिकोऽसि निघृणतरस्त्वत्तः कुतोऽन्यः पुमान्
सेष्यं मारवधूभिरित्यभिहितो बोधौ जिनः पातु वः ॥ १ ॥ གཞན་ཡང་ །
* अपि च ।। གཞུ་ བཀང་ འདོད་པ་ དང་ནི་ རྔ་ གསང་ བརྡུང་ཤིང་ चापम् आकृष्य कामेन च पटह- 'पटुः “हत
སྒྲ་སྒྲོགས་ བདུད་ཀྱི་ དཔའ་བོ་ དང་ །
* "आडम्बरैः मार- बोरः च སྨིན་འཁྱོག་ རབ་འདར ་ གླལ་ འཇུམ་ ལོགས་སུ་ལྟ་བ་ མཐོ་རིས་ 5. भङ्ग- उत्कम्प- जृम्भा- स्मित- * वलित-दृशा दिव्य
བུ་མོ་ སྐྱེ་བ་ དང་ ། नारी-जनेन च।

Page #79

NAGANANDA
35
2.3 ]
གྲབ་པ་ ཡན་ལག་ མཆག་ འདད་རྣམས་ དང་ མཚར་བས་ सिद्धैः ‘अङ्गः 'उत्तम- प्रह- च विस्ययात्
སྤ་ལངས་ལུས་ཅན་ ནོར་ལྷ་ཡིས །
पुलकित-वपुषा वासवेन བྱང་ཆབ་འཐོབ་ལ་ བསམ་གཏན་ གཡོ་མེད་ ཅེས་ བལྟས་ बोधेः अवाप्तौ ध्यायन् अविचलितः इति दृष्टः
ཐབ་པའི་དབང་པོས་ ཁྱེད་ལ་ བསྲངས །2
मुनि- इन्द्रः वः पातु ॥ २ ।। कामेनाकृष्य वापं हतपटुपटहावलिगभिर्मारवीरेभ्रूभङ्गोत्कम्पजृम्भास्मितललितक्ता दिव्यनारीजनेन । सिद्धः प्रोत्तमाङ्ग पुलकितवपुषा विस्मयाद् वासवेन
ध्यायन बोधेरवाप्तावचलित इति वः पातु दृष्टो मुनीन्द्रः ॥२॥ ཤིན་ཏུ་མངས་པར་འགྱུར་བས།1
अलं बहुना । [ सार । दि २३ ।'
[ नान्यन्ते सूत्रधारः । ]'
དེ་རང་ __ अद्य
དབང་པོའི་ དགའ་སྟོན་ལ་ ཕྱོགས་ སྣ་ཚོགས ་ནས་ इन्द्रः उत्सवे दिग्देशादू नाना

Page #80

36
NĀGĀNANDA
[ 2.12 འོངས་པ་༧ དཔལ་ལྡན་དགའ་བའི་ ལྷའི་ ཞབས་ཀྱི་པ་ད་ཉེ་ བར་བསྟེན་པའི་
आगतेन श्री- हर्ष- देवस्य पाद पन- *उपसेविना' གྱོལ་པོའི་ཚོགས་རྣམསཀྱིས་ ་ གས་པ་དང་ལྡན་པར་ བ ས་དེ ། ___राज-समूहेन'
* स. मानं आहूय བདག་ལ་ སྨྲས་པ །༩ ཇི་ལྟར་ ཁོ་བོ་ཅག་གི་ རྗེ་ དཔལ་ལྡན་ अहम् उक्तः । यथा अस्मत्- स्वामिना श्रीདགའ་བའི་ལྷས་” སྔར་མེད་པའི་ དངོས་པོ་ རྒྱན་རྣམ་པར་ བཀོད་
हर्षदेवेन' अपूर्व- वस्तु- 'अलकूत रचनाརིག་པ་འཛིན་པའི་ སྐྱེས་རབས་ལས་ བརྩམས་པ ཀླུ་ཀན་ཏུ་དགའ་བ་
विद्याधर- जातक- प्रतिबद्धं नागानन्दं ཞེས་བྱ་བའི་ ཟློས་གར་ མཛད་པ་ནི་1༠ ཁོ་བོ་ཅག་རྣམས་ཀྱིས་ नाटकं कृतम्
अस्माभिः ཉན་པ་པོ་བརྒྱད་པ་ལས་ ཐོས་ཏེ །སྦྱོར་པ་དག་ མི་ མཐོང་ངོ ༎1༔ * श्रोतृ- परम्परया श्रुतम्। प्रयोगो न दृष्टः ।।
अथाहमिन्द्रोत्सवे सबहुमानमाहूय नानादिग्देशागतेन राक्षः श्रीहर्षदेवस्य पादपद्मोपजीविना राजसमूहेनोक्तः यथा यत्तदस्मत्स्वामिना श्रीहर्षदेवनापूर्ववस्तुरचनालङ्कतं विद्याधरजातकप्रतिबद्ध नागानन्दं नाम नाटकं कृतमित्यस्माभिः श्रोत्रपरम्परया श्रुतं न प्रयोगतो दृष्टम् ।.12
जातक
नाम

Page #81

2.18]
NĀGANANDA
37
དེའི་ཕྱིར་ རྒྱལ་པོ་ དེ་ཉིད་ལ་ གས་པ་ དང་ ། ཁོ་བོ་ཅག་ལ་
तत् राशः तस्यैव * मानान् चा རྗེས་སུ་བཟང་བའི་ བློས་1• སྦྱོར་བ་ ཇི་ལྟ་བ་བཞིན་ད་ ཁྱོད་ཀྱིས་
अनुग्रह- बुद्धया प्रयोग यथावत् ཟློས་གར་དག་བྱོས་ཤིག་ ཅེས་སོ །། དེའི་ཕྱིར་ རེ་ཞིག་ ཆེན་གྱི་
नाटय इति ।15 सद् यावद् नेपथ्यབཀོད་པ་དག་ བྱས་ནས་ ཇི་ལྟར་མངོན་པར་ འདོད་པ་བཞིན་
रचनां कृत्वा यथा- अभि- लषितं ཡོངས་རྫོགས་པར་བྱའ༽ n1༠ འདས་པའི་ སྐྱེ་བ་ འདི་དག་གི་ ཡིད་ནི་
सम्पादयामि । सामाजिक- जनानाम् एषां मनः ཀུན་ཏུ་ཚིམ་པར་གྱུར་དོ་ ཞེས་བྱ་ བདག་གི་ ངེས་ཏེ །
मावर्जितम् इति मे निश्चयः ।।"
ततस्येव राजो बहुमानादस्मासु चानुग्रहबुझ्या यथावत्प्रयोगेणाद्य त्वया नाटयियतव्यमिति। तथावदिनीं नेपथ्यरचनां कृत्वा यथामिलषितं सम्पादयामि । आवर्जितानि च सामाजिकजनमनासीति मे निधयः ।।
मामी और
कुतः ।।

Page #82

38
.
१११।
NĀGĀNANDA
[3 དཔལ་ལྡན་དགའ་བ་ སྙན་ངག་མཁན་པོ་ མཁས་པ་ འདན་མ་ འདི་དག་ श्री-हर्षः कविः निपुणः पदिषद् एषा
ཡོན་ཏན་འཛིན །
गुण-प्राहिणी। འཇིག་རྟེན་ད་ ནི་ བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའི་ སྤྱོད་པ་ ཡིད་འཕྲོག་
बोधि-सत्त्व- चरित हारि
ཟློས་གར་ བདག་ཅག་ མཁས །
___ नाट्य वयं दक्षाः । འདིར་ནི་ དངོས་པོ་ རེ་རེ་དག་ ཀྱང་ འདོད་པའི་ འབྲས་བུ་ འཐོབ་པའི་ इह वस्तु एकैकम् अपि अभिलषित- फल प्राप्तः
་ གནས་ ཡིན་ ན།
पदं भवति བདག་གི་ སྐལ་བ་ རྒྱས་པས་ ཡོན་ཏན་ ཀན་གྱི་ ཚོགས་ འདས་ मम भाग्य- उपचयाद् गुणस्य सर्वस्य गणः समुदितः
འདི་ལ་ སྨོས་ ཅི་ དགོས །། ____- इह ब्रूहि किं प्रयोजनम् ॥ ३॥ श्रीहर्षों निपुणः कविः परिषदप्येषा गुणग्राहिणी लोके हारि च बोधिसत्त्वचरितं नाट्ये च दक्षा वयम् । वस्त्वेकैकमपीह वाञ्छितफलप्राप्तः पदं किं पुनमंदाग्योपचयादयं समुदितः सर्वो गुणानां गणः ॥ ३ ॥

Page #83

3.8]
NAGANANDA
དེས་ན་ རེ་ཞིག་ ཁྱིམ་པ་མ་ བོས་ཏེ་ གླུ་དག་ལ་ གནས་བར་བྱའོ །།
तद् यावद् गृहिणीम् आहूय सङ्गीतकम ལླུབུ་ཊིgifü | 2 [ ཡོངས་སུ་བགྲོད་ཅིང་ མངོན་པར་ཕྱོགས་སུ་
བལྟས་ནས་ []* འརྷཥྭ71]
[ परिक्रामन
अभिमुखं
འཕགས་མ་ རེ་ཞིག་ འདིར །
आ
तावद् དྷྭཊཿ: [3 [དེ་ནས་ གར་མཁན་མ་ ངུ་ཞིང་ ཞུགས་སོ །། མདོ་འཛིན་པས་
[ de
नटी रुदती
प्रविशति ।
सुत्रधारो
མཐོང་ནས ། ]*
ficeའ\ ]4
འཔགས་མ་ གླ་ཀུན་ཏ་དགའ་ བ་ ཞེས་བྱ་བའི་ ཟློས་གར་བྱ་ཡིན་ན་
आ
नागानन्दे
व्
ཅིའ་དོན་དུ རྒྱུ་མེད་པ་ ཉིད་ ངུ་བར་བྱེད །
* किम अकारणम्
एक ནཱམཱཊེ 15
[ arm ]
[ གར་མཁན་མས ། ]°
[ cm | ]6
ཇོ་བོ ོ ཇི་ལྟར་ མིི་ ངུ་ སྟེ །
आय कथं
ཞ rཨཱཿsfa 17
39
གང་གི་ཕྱིར་ རེ་ཞིག་ ཡབ་ནི
ཊཿ:
तावन
::

Page #84

40
NĀGANANDA
[3.14
ཡུམ་ དང་ འགྲོགས་ནས་ རྒན་པོ་འ དངོས་པོས་ ཡིད་བྱང་སྟེ་ ། अम्बया सहितः स्थविर- भावेन उद्विपमानसः ད་ ཁྱོད་ཀྱིས་ གཉེན་མཚན་གྱི་ ཁར་དག་ འཛིན་པར་ མཛད་དེ་ཝ ཞེས་ इदानीं वं कुटुम्ब [लक्षण] भार- उद्वहनं करोषि इनि ཐུགས་ལ་ བཞག་ནས་ དཀའ་ཐུབ་ཀྱི་ནགས་སུ་ གཤེགས་སོ །། हृदये आरोग्य तपो- वनं गतः ॥
आर्य कथं न रोदिष्यामि। यतस्तातोऽज्जुका च स्थविरभावजातनिर्वेदी कुटुम्बमारवहनयोग्य इदानीं त्वमिति हृदय आरोग्य तपोवनं गतौ।.9
[ 3 ]]
[ सूत्रधारः । ] བདག་ ཀྱང་ ཡོངས་སུ་བཏང་ནས་ ཇི་ལྟར་ ཨབ་ཡུམ་ ནགས་སུ་
माम् अपि परित्यज्य कथं पितरौ वनं གཤེགས །l यातो।।
कथं मामपि परित्यज्य वनं प्रयातो पितरौ।। [पया पाना NI"
[विचिन्त्य।]" ད་ནི་ ང་ ནི་ ཅི་ཞིག་ རིགས་པར་འགྱུར །1 ཡང་ན་ བདག་ इदानों में किं युज्यते ।
अथवा अहं

Page #85

4.2]
NĀGĀNANDA བླ་མའི་ ཞབས་ཀྱི་ རིམ་གྲོ་བྱིན་པའི་ བདེ་བ་ ཡོངས་སུ་བཏང་ནས་ ___ गुरु- चरण- परिचर्या- सुखं परित्यज्य ཇི་ལྟར་ ཁྱིམ་དུ་ འཇུག་པརབྱེད ___ कथं गृहे प्रविशामि 14
अथवा कथमहं गुरुचरणपरिचयांसुखं परित्यज्य गृहे तिष्ठामि ।" ཇེ་ལྟར་ སྤྲིན་གྱི་བཞོན་པ་ བཞིན། དབང་ཕྱག་ རིམ་པ་ས་ འོངས་ བཏང་སྟེ ། यथा जीमूतवाहनः ऐश्वयं क्रम- आगतं त्यक्ता। པ་མའི་ སྲིད་ན་ སྒྲུབ་པའི་ ཕྱིར ། བདག་ ཀྱང་ ནགས་སུ་ འགྲོབར་ བྱ།།4 पित्रोः शुश्रूषां विधातु अहम् अपि वनं यामि ॥
पित्रोविधातुं शुश्रूषां त्यक्तेश्वर्य क्रमागतम्। वनं याम्यहमप्येष यथा जीमूतवाहनः ॥४॥
[सम बापरे ॥
. [निष्क्रान्तो। *आमुखम् ।' [ དེ་ནས སྤྲིན གྱི་བཞོན་པ་ དང་ ། བི་དྲ ་ཥ་ཀ་ དག་ ཞགས་ཏེ ། [ततः जीमूतवाहनः च विदूषकः प्रविशति ।
འདྲེན་པོས །] नायकः।]"

Page #86

NĀGANANDA
[5
रागस्य
ཆགས་པའི་ གནས་ ཞེས་བྱ་བར་ བདག་གིས་ རིག་ འཇིག་
आस्पदम् इति अहं अवमि ध्वंसि
ཅེས་ བྱ་བར་ བདག་གི་ མ་ རྡོགས་ མེན།
इति मम न प्रत्ययः न । བྱ་དང་བྱ་མེན་ རྣམ་པར་དཔྱད་རྣམས་ལ་ ཕྱེར་ཕྱོགས་གྱུར་པར་ कृत्य-अकृत्य- विचारणासु
विमुखं
ས་ལ་ སུས་ མ་ རེག །
क्षितौ को न वेत्ति। པ་མའི་ སྲིད་ཞུ་བྱེད་པ་ བདག་གེ་ ནི་ ལང་མོ་ དབང་པོའི་ पिनरो शुश्रूषमाणस्य मे यौवनम् इन्द्रिय
དབང་དུ་ གྱུར་པ་ འདི།
__वशं इदं གལ་ཏེ་ གུས་པས་ འདི་ལྟར་ ཉིད་ རྒྱར་ན་ དེ་ལྟར་ སྨད་པར་འོས་ यदि भक्तया इत्थं एव भवेत् एवं निन्द्राम
ཀྱང་ དགའ་བྱེད་ འགུད །)
अपि प्रियं भवेत् ॥ रागस्यास्पदमित्यवमि न हि मे ध्वंसीति न प्रत्ययः कृत्याकृत्यविचारणासु विमुखं को वा न वेति क्षिती। एवं निन्द्यमपीदमिन्द्रियवशं प्रीत्यै भवेद् यौवनं भक्तया याति यदीत्थमेव पितरौ शुश्रूषमाणस्य मे ॥ ५॥ .

Page #87

5.4]
NAGANANDA
43
[ IN IIIII
( विदूषकः सरोषम् । ] ཀྱེ་ གང་གིས་ གསོན་བཞིན་ད་ ཤེ་བའི་ རྒན་རྒོན་ འདི་དག་ ___ भोः केन जीवन्- मृतयोः वृद्धयोः एतयोः འདི་ལྟར་ ནགས་ན་ འདག་པ་ལ་ འདི་སྙེད་ཀྱི་ དས་སུ་ སྡུག་བསྔལ་ ईदृशं वन- वासे एतावन्त कालं दुःखम् ཉམས་སུ་མྱོང་ ཡང་ ཁྱེད་ནི་ མེད་དབྱང་བར་ མི་ འགྱུར་ དོ ། དེས་ན་ अनुभवन् अपि त्वं निविण्णः ना
तत् རབ་ཏ་དད་བྱོས། ད་རུང་ ཡང་ རེ་ཞིག བླ་མའི་ ཞབས་ཀྱི་ སྲིད་ཞ་ལ་
प्रसीद । इदानीम् अपि तावत् गुरु- चरण- शुश्रूषाཆགས་པ་ལས་ ཕྱིར་ཟླ གས་ལ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ཀྱི་ བདེ་བ་ ཉམས་སུ་མྱོང་
निबन्धात् * निवृत्य राज्य- सुखं अनुབར་བྱོས་ཤིག་
भूयताम् ॥
भो वयस्य न निविण्ण एव त्वमेतयोर्जीवन्मृतयोवृद्धयोः कृते ईदशं वनवास. दुःखमनुभवन्नपि। तत्प्रसीद। इदानीमपि तावद् गुरुजनशुश्रुषानिर्बन्धान्निवृत्य [इच्छापरिभोगरमणीयं ] राज्यसुखमनुभूयताम् । ..

Page #88

NĀGĀNANDA
[ 6
[འདྲེན་པས་ °
[=Ht: ]5 ཇི་ལྟར་ ཡབ་ཀྱི་ མདན་ད་ སར་ འདུག་ མཇེས་པ་ དེ་ལྟ་ यथा पितुः पुरो भुवि तिष्ठन् भाति तथा
སེང་གེའི་ཁྲི་ལ་ ཡོད་ དམ་ ཅི།
सिंह-आसने अस्ति किम्। ཡབ་ཀྱི་ ཞབས་དག་ མཉེ་བ་ལས་ དྲུང་ བདེ་བ་ དེ་ནི་ तातस्य चरणयोः संवाहनाद् उद्भन सुखं तद
རྒྱལ་སྲིད་དག་ལ་ ཡོད་དམ་ ཅི།
nཀ ག་ཟིa t། བླ་མའི་ ལྷག་མ་ འབྱང་བའི་ དགའ་བ་ གང་ འདི་ ས་གསུམ་ गुरोः भुक्तोभिते धृतिः या एषा भुवनत्रये
སྤྱོད་པ་དག་ལ་ ཡོད་དམ་ཅི།
भुक्ते अस्ति किम्। བླ་ར་ས་ བཏང་བའི་ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ ངོས་པར་ གདང་བྱེད་དག་སྟེ་ गुरुणा त्यक्तं राज्यं खलु आयासः
དེས་ན་ ཡོན་ཏན་ ཅི་ཞིག་ ཡོད །། 6
ཁ ག:་ ཏཏྟཱ གཞ u तिष्ठन् भाति पितुः पुरो भुवि यथा सिंहासने किं तथा यत् संवाहयतः सुखं हि चरणौ तातस्य किं राज्यके।

Page #89

6.71
NĀGĀNANDA किं भुक्त भुवनत्रये धृतिरसौ भुक्तोज्झिते या गुरोरायासः खलु राज्यमुज्झितगुरोस्तेनास्ति कश्चिद् गुणः ॥ ६ ॥ [ Pा | माणा गारदार 1]'
[विदूषकः । आत्मगतम् । ] ཨེ་མ་ འདི་ནི་ སྐྱེ་བ་ བླ་མའི་ སྲེ་ཞ་ལ་ཆགས་པ་ཞིག་གོ ། अहो अस्य 'जन- 'गुरु शुश्रूषानुरागः।'
। चार सय
[विचिन्य। དེས་ན་ འདིར་ ཡང་ རེ་ཞིག་ བརྗོད་པར་བྱའོ།།
तेन इह तु] तावद भणिष्यामि ।' भवतु एवं तावद् भणिप्यामि ।
[ माNIR I]
[प्रकाशम् । ] ཀྱི་ གྲོགས་པོ་ ངེས་པར་ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ཀྱི་ བདེ་བ་ འབའ་ཞིག་ གི་
भो वयस्य खलु राज्य- सौख्यस्य केवलस्य ཆེད་ད་ བདག་གིས་ འདི་ བརྗོད་པ་ མ་ཡིན་ཏེ །༠ གཞན་ ཡང་ कृते अहं. इदं भणामि न।" अन्यद अपि
ཁྱད་ལ་ བྱ་བ་དག་ ཡོད་པ་ ཉིད་དོ།། __ ते करणीयं अस्ति एव ।।'

Page #90

NAGANANDA
[7 भो दयस्य न खल्वहं केवलं राज्यसौख्यम् उद्दिश्य एवं भणामि । अन्यदपि ते करणीयम् अस्त्येव 6.7
| འདྲེན་པས། འཇ མ་ དང་ བཅས །
[नायकः। सस्मितम् ।] བྱ་བ་ བདག་གིས་ བྱས་པ་ ཉིད་ མ་ཡིན་ནམ། ལྟོས་ཤིག ། करणीयं मया कृतम् एव ननु। पश्य ।' རིགས་པར་འོས་པའི་ ལམ་ལ་ བློན་པོ་ རྣམས་ སྦྱར་ དམ་པ་རྣམས་ནི न्याय्ये वर्त्मनि प्रकृतयः योजिताः र.न्तः
བདེ་ལ་ བཞག །
सुखे स्थापिताः। དེ་བཞིན་ གཉེན་གྱི་ སྐྱེ་བ ་ བདག་ མཚངས་ ཉིད་ བྱས་ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་དག नथा बन्धुः जनः आत्म- सम एव कृतः राज्ये
ཀྱང་ བསྲུང་བར་བྱས།
अपि रक्षा कृता। ཡིད་ལ་རེག་པ་ལས་ ལྷག་འབྲས་ སྡེར་ དཔག་བསམ་ཤིང་ मनोरथाद् 'अधिव- 'फल- “दत्त- कल्पद्रुमः
ཡང་ སློང་བ་རྣམས་ལ་ བྱིན ། अपि अथिभ्यः दत्तः ।

Page #91

7.3]
NĀGĀNANDA འདི་ལས་ གཞན་ བྱ་བ་ ཅི་ཞིག་ ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་ སེམས་ལ་ अनः परं कर्तव्यं किं ते चेतसि
གང་ཞིག་ གནས་པ་ སྨོས །7
___ यत् स्थिन कथय । न्याय्ये वर्त्मनि योजिताः प्रकृतयः सन्तः सुखं स्थापिता नीनो बन्धुजनस्तथात्मसमतां राज्येऽपि रक्षा कृता । दनो दत्तमनोरथाधिकफलः कल्पद्रुमोऽथिने किं कर्तव्यमतः परं कथय वा यत् ते स्थितं चेतसि ॥ ७॥ .
[25 PNP
[विदूषकः । ཀྱི་ གྲོགས་པོ་ ཤིན་ཏུ་ཐབ་ནོད་ལྡན་ ཉམས་པར་བྱེད་པའི भोः वयस्य अत्यन्नमाहमिके
* इनके ལྷ་མ་ཏང་ག་ འདི་ མི་མཐན་པའི་ཕྱོགས་ཉེ་བར་གནས་པ་ལ་” གསོ་བ་དང་ देवमनङ्ग एतस्मिन प्रतिपक्षे आमनस्थिने' प्रधानགཉེན་དག་ ཡང་དག་པར་གནས་ ཀྱང་ ཁྱེད་ མེད་ན་ བདག་ནི་ རྒལ་སྲིད་ अमात्य- समधिष्ठितम् अपि त्वया विना अहं. गज्य ལེགས་པར་གནས་པར་ མི་ རྡོག་གོ p
सु- स्थित न * तयामि ।

Page #92

4R
[7.10
NAGĀNANDA __भो वयस्य अत्यन्तसाहमिको मतङ्गदेवहतकस्ते प्रतिपक्षः। तस्मिंश्च समासन्नखिते प्रधानामात्यसमधिष्ठितमपि न त्वया विना राज्यं सुस्थितमिति में प्रतिभाति।'
[3 ]
[नायक । ] མ་དང་གརིས་ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ ལེན་པར་འགྱུར་རོ་ ཞེས་བྱ་བའི་
मनको राज्य ग्रहीप्यति इति । དོགས་པ་ ཡོད་དམ་ཅི།° གལ་ཏེ་ དེ་ལྟར་གུར་ན་ དེ་ལས་ ཅིར འགར ། * आशङ्का अस्ति किम। यदि एवम, ततः किम ।' བདག་གི་ ལུས་ལ་སོགས་པ་ ཐམས་ཅད་ གཞན་གྱི་དོན་ ཉིད་ ཡོངས་སུ་
स्व. शरीग्नः प्रभृति सर्व परार्थम् एव परिབསྲངས་པ་ མ་ཡིན་ནམ །? གང་ ཡང་ རང་གིས་ མ་ བྱིན་པ་ पाल्पते ननु ।' यत् तु स्वयं न दीयते དེ་ ཡབ་ཀྱི་ ངོར་ཡིན་ནོ ། དེས་ན་ དོན་མེད་པའི་ བསམ་པ་ तत नान- * अनुगेवान । ._तत् अवस्तुना चिन्तितेन འདིས་ ཅི་ཞིག་བྱ་ ༎ ཡབ་ཀྱི་ རྗེས་སུ་བསྟན་པ་ ཉིད་ ལྟར་ अनेन किम।" तातབསྒྲུབ་པར་ བྱའོ ni0
* अनुष्ठेया।
.
* आज्ञा

Page #93

7.14]
NAGANANDA
[ བི་ད ་ཥཀས །j10
[ ཞིཞུན8 1]1༠ ཀྱི་ ཡབ་ཀྱིས་ ཅི་ཞིག་ བསྟན །1 भोः तातेन किम् आशप्तम् ।।
[ འདྲེན་ པས །jl4 [ གལp: 1]14
ཇི་ལྟར་ ཉི་མ་ མང་བོར་ ཡོངས་སུ་སྤྱོད་པས་ དཀའ་ཐབ་ཀྱི་ནགས་ __ यथा “दिवस 'बहु परि-भोगेण नपो- वनम् འདི་ ཡམ་ཤིང་ དང་ ། ཀ་ཤ་དང་ | མེ་ཏོག་དང་། ཉེ་བར་མཁོ་བའི་ इदं समित्- ་་- ཅུའུ། ཤཱརྩ་བ་ དང་ འབྲས་བུ་ དང་ སྡོང་བུ་ དང་ རྔད་མང་བ་ དག་ རིང་དུ་བྱས་པར་ འཉ- དན- कन्द- नीवार-प्रायं
dགུར་གྱི ། དེའི་ཕྱིར་ མ་ལ་ཡའི་ རིའི་ གོང་ལ་ བསྟི་གནས་ कृतम्। तत् मलय- पर्वतस्य उपरि आश्रम-पद

Page #94

50
NĀGĀNANDA
[7.19 འགའ་ཞིག་ རྟགས་ཤིག །• ཅེས་ ཡབ་ཀྱིས་ བདག་ལ་ རྗེས་སུ་བསྟན་ཏོ ། ཅ * किञ्चित निरूपय । इति तातेन अह आज्ञापितोऽस्मि । 15 དེའི་ཕྱིར་ རེ་ཞིག་ མ་ལ་ཡ་ ཉིད་དེ་ འགྲོ འོ །།1༠ ་
तद् यावद् मलयम् एव. गच्छावः ॥16
वत्स जीमूतवाहन बहुदिवसपरिभोगेण दूरीकृतसमित्कुशकुसुमम् उपयुक्तमूलफलकन्दनीवारपायमिदं स्थानं वर्तते ।। 8.10
[ का सिर गुर ॥ सैर "P"हा" गत साता ! "
[इति गतौ। विदूषकः अप्रतः विलोक्य । ]17 ཀྱེ་ གྲོགས་པོ་ ལྟོས་ཤིག་ ལྟོས་ཤིག།* བརླན་དང་བཅས་ ཤིང་ སྡགས་པའི་ ་ भो वयस्य प्रेक्षस्व प्रेक्षस्व ।18 सरस- घनཙན་དན་གྱི་ ནགས་ཀྱི་ ཁྲོད་ནས་ ཡོངས་སུ་ བསྐྱོད་པ་ དྲི་ བཟང་ རྒྱ་ཆེན་པོས་ चन्दन- वन- गहन- * परिक्षुब्ध परिमल- 'भद्र बहलབསྒོས་པ་ཅན་ རིའི་ ངོས་ མི་ཟང་བ་ལས་ བབས་པས་ དམ་བུར་འགྱུར་བའི་
"लग्नः * 'पर्वत 'तट विषम पतन- 'जर्जरीक्रियमाणཆ་རྒྱན་ལས་ མགྲོར་པའི་ ཐིགས་པ་ བསིལ་པོ་ འཛིན་པ་ མ་ལ་ཡའི་ རྫོང་ 'निर्भर * प्रकीर्ण शीकर. शिशिर ग्वाही मलय- मारुतः

Page #95

7.24 ]
31
འདི་ནི་ ངེས་པར་ ལམ་གྱི་ ཡོངས་སུ་དུབ་པ་དག་ སེལ་ ཞིང་ །”
परिश्रमं
19
अपनयन्
एषः खलु मार्गདང་པོར་ འགྲོགས་པར་ འདོད་པའི་ དགའ་མ་ལ་ མགྲིན་པན་ བཟུང་བ་
उत्कण्ठित- प्रिया- कण्ठ
प्रथम
सङ्गम
ग्रह
0
བཞིན་དུ་ གྲོགས་པོ་ མཛའ་བོ་ལ་ སྤུ་ལོངས་ རྒྱས་པར་ བྱེད་པ་ འདྲའོ །* इव 'वयस्यं प्रिय रोमाच्चयति * विपुलं
20 इव ।
भो वयस्य प्रेक्षस्व प्रेक्षस्व । एष खलु सरसघनस्निग्धचन्दनवनोत्सङ्गपरिमिलनलग्नबहलपरिमलो विषमतटपतन जर्जरीक्रियमाणनिर्झरोश्चलितशिशिरशीकरासारखाही प्रथमसङ्गमोत्कण्ठितप्रियाकण्ठग्रह इव मार्गपरिश्रममपनयन् रोमाञ्चयति प्रियवयस्यं
मलयमारुतः ।। 18.20
NAGANANDA
1
[འདྲེན་ པས ། ཀུན་ཏུ་ བལྟས་ནས ། ]
[ नायकः ।
सर्वतो विलोक्य । ] 21
ཨ་ཡེ་ བདག་ཅག་གིས་ རི་ མ་ལ་ཡར་ སླེབ་པར་གུར་ཏོ །། पर्वतं मलय प्राप्ताः 1 2 3
अये
वयं
ཨེ་མ་ འདི་ ནི་
अहो * इदं अहो अस्य रामणीयकम् ।
[
23
क्ष्मास कक्ष | jas
[ निरूप्य । ] 2 3
དགའ་བར་བྱ་བ་ཞིག་སྟེ། དེ་ལྟར་ ཡང་ །*
रमणीयम् ।
* तथाहि । 24

Page #96

चन्दना:
;
ཞ:|
NAGANANDA
[3 དགའ་ལྡན་ ཕྱོགས་ཀྱི་ གླང་པོ་ འགྲམ་པའི་ ངོས་ བདར་ मायद्- दिग्. गज- गण्ड- मित्ति- कषणः
ལ་ཙན་དན་དག་ནི་ ཆག་ཅིང་ ཟག །
चन्दनाः भग्नाः सवन्तः। ཆ་གཏེར་ བརླབས་རྣམས་ རབ་ཏུ་བསྣན་པས་ ཕག་ དང་ ། जलनिधेः वीषिभिः आस्फालिताभिः गह्वर
ལུང་བ་དག་ནི་ ཆོ་ངེས སྒྲོགས།
कन्दराणि क्रन्दनेन * ध्वनितानि । གྲབ་པའི་ བུད་མེད་ བགྲོད་པ་རྣམས་ཀྱི་ རྐང་པའི སྨུག་རྩིས་ सिद्ध- अङ्गनानां गतः पाद- अलक्तक
དམར་པ་ མུ་ཏིག་ རྡོ།
रक्त मौक्तिक-शिलः। བསྟེན་བྱ་ རི་བོ་ མ་ལ་ཡ་ འདིས་ བདག་གི་ སེམས་ནི་ सेव्यः अचलः मलयः अयं मे चेतः
རྩི་ ཡང་ སྲེད་ལྡན་ བྱེད ། 8 ནི། མའི་ ཞུ༔ ཆཞི u

Page #97

9]
NAGANANDA
माद्यदिग्गजगण्डभित्तिकषणैर्भग्नस्रवश्चन्दनः
क्रन्दत्कन्दरगह्वरो जलनिधेरास्फालितो वीचिभिः ।
पादालककर कमौक्तिकशिलः सिद्धाङ्गनानां गतैः
सेव्योऽयं मलयाचलः किमपि मे चेतः करोत्युत्सुकम् ॥ ८ ॥
དེས་ན་ ཚར་ ཤོག ། འདི་ལ་ འཛེགས་ཏེ་ འདག་པར་འོས་པའི
निवासयोग्यम्
तद् *इह एहि । 1
2
བསྟི་གནས་ རྟོག་པར་ བྱའོ ༎
आश्रमं
निरूपयावः ।
* इह आरुह्य
[ འཛེགས་ཏེ་ མཚན་མ་ བསལ་བར་ བྱས་ནས ། 】
[ आरुह्य निमित्तं सूचयित्वा । ] བདག་གི་ མིག་ནི་ གཡས་པ་ གཡོ ོ།
मम चक्षुः दक्षिणं स्पन्दते འབྲས་བུ་ འདོད་པ་ འགའ་ ཡང་ མེད །
फल- आकाङ्क्षा * काचिद् अपि न ।
ཐབ་པའི་ གསུང་བ་ རྫུན་ མ་ ཡིན ། मुनि- वचः मिथ्या न
ु
འདི་ནི་ ཅི་ཞིག་ འཆད་འགྱར་ ཀྱེ ༎9
इदं किं
53
कथयिष्यति भोः ॥ *

Page #98

54
NAGANANDA
[9.7
स्पन्दते दक्षिणं चक्षुः फलाकालान मे कचित् । न च मिय्या मुनिवचः कथयिष्यति किं विवम् ॥ ६ ॥
[Pा []
[विदूषकः।। ཀྱི་ གྲོགས་པོ་ལ་ དགའ་བ་ འགའ་ཞིག་ ཉེ་བར་ སྟོན་ནོ ། भो वयस्यस्य प्रियं किमपि आसन्न निवेदयामि ।'
[ INI
[नायकः।] ངེས་པར་ ཇི་ལྟར་ ཁྱེད་ཀྱིས་ སྨྲས་པ་ དེ་བཞིན་ནོ །།
खलु यथा भवान् ब्रवीति तथा।। एवं नाम यथा भवान ब्रवीति ।
[05 म
[विदूषकः । ] ཀྱེ་གྲོགས་བོ་ ལྟོས་ཤིག་ ལྟོས་ཤིག །* ཁྱད་པར་དང་བཅས་པར་ སྡུག་ཅིང་ भो वयस्य प्रेक्षस्व प्रेक्षस्व । सविशेष- घनསྣམ་བའི་ རྐང་འཐང་གིས་ ཉེ་བར་མཛེས་ཤིང་ །་ བའི་ མར་གྱི་ स्निग्ध- पादप- उप-शोभित सुरभि- हविर
नाम
नमस्य ।
।

Page #99

10]
NAGANANDA
55
དྲིའི་ སྙིང་པོ་ཅན་གྱི་ དུ་བ་ དྲག་ཏུ་ འཕུར་ལ ། རི་དྭགས་ཀྱི་ ཚོགས་ गन्ध- गर्मित- 'धूम “उद्दाम निर्गम श्वापद- गणम् འཇིགས་པ་མེད་ཅིང་ ལམ་ད་ བག་ཕབ་དེ གནས་པ་འདི་ནི་ དཀའ་ཐབ་ཀྱི་ _ “अनुद्विग्न मार्ग सुख निषण्ण एतत् तपोནགས་ཚལ་ བཞིན་ད་ མཆོན་ ནོ ། །
वनम् इव लक्ष्यते । ___ भो क्यस्य एतत्खलु सविशेषघनस्निग्धपादपोपश्प्रेभितं सुरमिहविर्गन्धगर्भितोहामधूमनिर्गमम् अनुविनमार्गसुखनिषण्णश्वापदगणं तपोवनमिव लक्ष्यते।'..
[२वारा 10
[नायकः । 10 གྲོགས་པོ་ ཡང་དག་པར་ མཚོན་ནོ ། འདི་དག་ནི་ དཀའ་ཐབ་ཀྱི་
सखे सम्यग् लक्षितम् ।। एतत् तपोནགས་ཚལ་ ཉིད་དེ །1 གང་གི་ཕྱིར ། ། वनम् एव । कुतः।13
གོས་ཀྱི་དོན་ད་ ཤིང་ཤན་རྣམས་ བཅད་ བརྩེ་བ་ཉིད་ཀྱིས་ वासोऽर्थ तरूणां त्वचः कृत्ताः दयया एव
ཤིན་ཏུ་ཆེ་བ་ མིན ། अति-पृथवः न।

Page #100

56
NAGANANDA
[10
རིལ་བ་ རྙིང་པ་ ཚོགས་པས་ མཚན་མའི་ ཆ་རྒྱན་དག་ནི་ "कमण्डलु “जरत् समूह * आलक्ष्य निर्मरः
མཁའ་ ལྟར་ རབ་ཏུ་དང་ །
___ नभ इव स्वच्छः । འགའ་ཞིག་དག་ན་ མན་འཇའི་ སྐེ་རགས་ ཁྱེའས་ कचित् मुज- मेखलाः वटुना
བཅད་ཅིང་ དོར་བར་གྱུར་པ་ མང་ །
त्रुटित- उज्झिताः दृश्यन्ते རྟག་ཏ་ ཐོས་པས་ ནེ་ཙོ་དག་ ཀྱང་ རིག་བྱེད་ ཚིག་ འདི་ निए- आकर्णनया शुकः च वेद- पदम् इदं
རབ་ད་ ཀློག་པར་བྱེད 10 प्र- पठ्यते ॥
वासोऽर्थ दययैव नातिपृथवः कृत्तास्तरूणां त्वचो भग्नालक्ष्यजरत्कमण्डलु नभःस्वच्छं पयो नैझरम् । दृश्यन्ते त्रुटितोज्झिताश्च वटुभिर्मोंजयः कचिन्मेखला नित्याकर्णनया शुकेन च पदं साम्नामिदं पठ्यते ।।10

Page #101

NAGANANDA
57
0.6 ] དེ་ནས་ ཚར་ ཤོག་ རབ་ཏུ་ཞུགས་ཏེ ། ཉེ་བར་མཚོན་པར་ བྱའོ ། [ ] g| གའི་ག * ཁ་བཏགེ་རཀn: |l [ རབ་ ཏ་ ཞགས་ དེ་ གར་དག་བྱེད་དོ ། [प्रविश्य བཞཀe: |
འདྲེན་པས །
བཀན: | ]༄༅
ཨེ་མ་ ཐུབ་པའི་ སྐྱེ་བ་ རབ་ཏུ་ དགའ་བ་རྣམས་ནི་ རིག་བྱེད་ཀྱི་
अहो 'मुनि 'जन * प्र- मुदित ཚིག་ རྒྱས་པ་ལ་ ཐེ་ཚོམ་ རྣ མ་པར་དཔྱོད་པར་བྱེད་ལ ། वाक्य "विस्तरस्य सन्दिग्ध विचार्यमाण । ཁྱེའ་ཡི་ སྐྱེ་བོ་རྣམས་ ནི་ ཇི་ལྟར་ གཤེར་བ་ གཤེར་བའི་ ཡམ་ཤིང་དག་ བཏུ བའ [ ཙཀ ] ག་ཚུ་ག་ཚྭ ཁའི་ག: གཅད་ཅིང་།༩ དཀའ་ཐུབ་པའི་ གཞོན་ནུ་མ་རྣམས་ནི་ ལྗོན་པ་ གསར་པའི་ 'छिद्यमान । तापस- 'कुमारिका 'वृक्षक बाल

Page #102

58
वनस्य
NAGANANDA
[11 ཀྱི་ར་ འགྱེངས་པར་བྱེད་པའི་ དཀའ་ཐབ་ཀྱི་ ནགས་ཚལ་ནི་ 'आलवालस्य * आपूर्यमाण, तपोརབ་ཏུ་ཞི་བ་ དང་ དགའ་བར་བྱེད་པ་ཉིད་དུ ། །
प्रशान्त- रमणीयता ।'
अहो नु खलु मुदितमुनिजनप्रविवार्यमाणसन्दिग्धवेदवाक्यविस्तरस्य पठबटुजनच्छिधमानााद्रसमिधः तापसकुमारिकापूर्यमाणबालवृक्षकालवालस्य प्रशान्तरमणीयता तपोवनस्य । 47
འདི་ཉིད་ན ། इह हि। བུང་བའི་ སྒྲ་ཡིས་ ལེགས་པར་འོངས་སམ་ ཞེས་ནི་ भृम शब्दः स्वागत [किम्] इति
བརྗོད་པ་ བཞིན །
वदन्ति इव । འདི་དག་ མགོ་ནི་ འབྲས་བུ་ དད་པས་ འདད་པ་ བྱེད་པ་ བཞིན།
इमे शिरोभिः फल- नम्रः नतिं कुर्वन्नि इव । མེ་ཏོག་ ཆར་པ་ འཐོར་ཞིང་ བདག་ལ་ མཆོད་ཡོན་ पुष्प- वृष्टिं किरन्नः मम अर्घ्य
སྟེར་བ་ བཞིན ། ददन इव।

Page #103

11.4]
NAGANANDA
59
ཡལ་ག་ལྡན་པ་ཡིས་ ཀྱང་ མགྲོན་གྱི་ བསྙེན་བཀར་ शाखिनः अपि अतिथि- सपर्या
ཇི་ལྟར་ བསླབས །།
___ कथं शिक्षिताः ॥ 11 मधुरमिव वदन्तः स्वागतं भृङ्गशब्दैनतिमिव फलनम्रः कुर्वतेऽमी शियेभिः । मम ददत इवायं पुष्पवृष्टीः किरन्तः
कथमतिथिसपी शिक्षिताः शाखिनोऽपि ॥११॥ དེའི་ཕྱིར་ དཀའ་ཐུབ་ཀྱི་ ནགས་ཚལ་ འདི་ནི་ འདུག་པར་
तत् तपो. वनम् इ निवासའོས་པ་ཞིག་ སྟེ ། འདིར་ གནས་ན་ བདག་ཅག་གི་ སེམས་བདེ་བར་ ___ योग्यम् । इह अवस्थाने अस्माकं निवृतिः འགྱུར་རོ་ སྙམ་མོ r भविष्यति मन्ये ॥
__[45 PM I]
[ विदूषकः । ] ཀྱི་ གྲོགས་པོ་ འོན་ཀྱང་ ངེས་པར་ རི་དྭགས་ འདི་དག མགྲིན་པ་ भो वयस्य * किन्तु खलु हरिणा एते कन्धराः

Page #104

NĀGĀNANDA
[11.12 ཅང་ཟད་ བསྐྱོགས་དེ་ གཡོ་བ་མེད་པའི་ ཁ་ལས་ ཅང་ཟད་ ཟོས་པའི་ 'ईषद बलित निश्चल मुख दर दलित རྩ་ ཁམ་ ནང་ན་ གནས་པ་ ཟག་ཅིང་ ། རྣ་བ་ གཅིག་ རབ་ཏ་བསླང་སྟེ་ * 'दर्भ "कबलाः गर्भ अवसरत् कणः 'एक * "समुन्नमिन བཏང་ནས་ མིག་ ཟུམ་པས་ ཉན་པར་བྱེད་པ་ ལྟ་བུར་ མཚོན་ནོ །། * दत्त 'लोचनाः निमीलित आकर्णयन्तः इत्र लक्ष्यन्ते ।।
भो वयस्य किं नु खलु एते ईषद्वलितकन्धरा निश्चलमुखावसरहरदलितदर्भगर्भ कवलाः समुन्नमितदत्तककर्णा निमीलितलोचना आकर्णयन्त इव हरिणा लक्ष्यन्ते ।-5
[B ER 455 °
[नायकः कर्णं दत्त्वा ] གནས་ཐོབ་ རབ་ད་ གསལ་བའི་ འགྲོས་ཅན་ གདངས་ स्थान-प्राप्त्या प्रकटित- गमकां मन्द्र
སྙན་དག་གིས་ རྣམ་པར་བཞག་པ་ འཇིན་བྱེད་པ།
___ तार- व्यवस्था दधानम् । བུང་བའི་ སྒྲ་ བཞིན་ ངེས་པར་ཡིད་འཕྲ ག་ རྒྱད་མངས་དག་གི་ अलि- रुतेन इव * निहारिण्या विपच्याः
རྒྱུད་མངས་ སྒྲ་དང་ལྡན་པ་ཡི། तन्त्री- स्वनेन मिलितम् ।

Page #105

12.2]
NAGANANDA གསལ་ཞིང་ རོལ་ སྒེག་ རིག་ལྡན་ གླ་ནི་ ཀན་ཏ་འཁྱོག་པའི स्फुट- ललिन- पदं गीत' आजिह्म
ལུས་ཅན་ རི་དྭགས་ འདི་དག་རྣམས །
अङ्गाः कुरङ्गाः एतं । སོའི་ བར་ན་ གནས་པ་ རྩའི་ ཁམ་ནི་ གཅོད་པའི་ སྒྲ་དག་ दन्त- अन्तराल- स्थित- तृण कवल. च्छेद- शब्द
བསྡམས་ནས་ ཉན་པར་བྱེད༎
नियम्य आकर्णयन्ति ॥ 12 स्थानप्राप्या दधानं प्रकटितगमका मन्द्रतारव्यवस्था निर्हादिल्या विपञ्च्या मिलितमलिरुतेनेव तन्त्रीस्वनेन । एते दन्तान्तरालस्थिततृणकबलच्छेदशब्दं नियम्य व्याजिह्माङ्गाः कुरङ्गाः स्फुटललितपदं गीतमाकर्णयन्ति ॥१२॥
[35 PTNI
[ विदूषकः । ཀྱེ་ གྲེགས་པོ་ དཀའ་ཐབ་ཀྱི་ ནགས་ཚལ་ འདི་ན་ སུ་ཞིག་
भो वयस्य तपो- घने अस्मिन् कः གླུ་ལེན་པར་བྱེད nf __गायति भो वयस्य को नु खल्वेष तपोवने गायति ।'

Page #106

[ 12.5
NĀGĀNANDA [२ ]
[ नायकः ।
ཇི་ལྟར་ སོར་མོ་ འཇམ་པའི་ མཐིལ་གྱིས་ མངོན་པར་ བསྣན་པའི་
यथा अङ्गाली कोमल तलेन अभि- * हताः རྒྱུད་མངས་ ཤེན་དུ་ གསལ་བ་ མ་ཡིན་པར་ སྒྲོགས་ཤིང་་ གླུ་ཡང་ तन्यः 'अति- स्फुटं “न क्वणन्ति गानं च སྙན་ཅིང་ཕྲ་བ་ གཙོ་བོར་ ལེན་པ། དེ་ལྟར་ བདག་ རྡོག་པ་ནི་་
काकलो- प्रधानं गोयते तथा · अहं तर्कयामि གནས་ འདི་ན་ ལྷ་དག་ མཉེས་པར་བྱེད་ཅིང་ ལྷའི་ བུད་མེད་ आयतने अस्मिन देवताम् आराधयन्तो दिव्य- योषित् རྒྱུད་མངས་ དང་ ལྡན་ པའི་ གླུ་ ལེན་པར བྱེད་དོ n* ___ उ प वो ण य नि। .. --
यथा कोमलाङ्गलितलाभिहन्यमाना नातिस्फुटं कणन्ति तन्त्रयः काकलीप्रधान व गोयते तथा तकयामि अस्मिन्नायतने देवतामाराधयन्ती काचिद् दिव्ययोषिद् उपवीणयति ।

Page #107

i2 ]
NAGANANDA
53
[ བི་ད་ཤ་ཀས །
[ ཞིབ: 1] ཀྱེ་ གྲོགས་པོ་ ཚར་ ཤོག ། ཡུ་འུ་ཅག་ཀྱང་ ལྷའི་ གནས་
भो वयस्य [इह] एहि ।' वयम् अपि देवता- आयतनं ལྟ་བར་བྱའོn8 གེané n8
[ འདྲེན་པས །j°
[བཀ4:1 ]P là "IITEK5 ° RA"II' gỗ BTS's='ÃN GIÁ T ཤཡཱ ཙཞ 110 ཞཞུ al: nt: {11 [ ཉེ་བར་སོང་སྟེ་ འཕྲལ་ ལམ་ འདག་ནས ]14
उपसृप्य सहसा मार्ग स्थित्वा]" उपसर्पन सहसा स्थित्वा 11 གྲོགས་པོ་ གལ་ཏེ་ན་ སྐྱེ་བོ་འདི་ནི་ ལྟ་བར་ མ་འོས་པ་ སྲིད་དོ ། वयस्य * यदि जनः अयं द्रष्टुम् अनर्हः भवेत् ।।

Page #108

NAGANANDA
[13 དེས་ན་ རེ་ཞིག་ ཏ་མ་ལའི་ གེལ་པ་ འདིའི་ ནང་ད་ འདག་སྟེ་ ལྷ་ལྟ་བའི་ तत् तावत तमाल- गुल्मकस्य अस्य अन्तर स्थित्वा देवनादर्शनསྐབས་ བཙལ་བར་བྱའོ །།14 अवसर प्रतिपालयावः ।
वयस्य कदाचिद् द्रा मनोऽयं जनो भविष्यति। तदनेन तावत्तमालगुल्मेनान्तरितो देवतादर्शनावसर प्रतिपालयावः ।। 3.14
[ དེ་ལྟར་ བྱས་ཏེ།
[तथा कृत्वा। དེ་ནས་ མ་ལ་ཡ་ཅན་མ་དང་། འབངས་མོ ཞགས་དེ་ ས་ལ་
ततः मलयवती च चेटो प्रविश्य भूमो འདག་ནས་ རྒྱུད་མངས་ སྦྲེང་བར བྱེད་དོ།། འདྲེན་མས་ གླ་ལེན་པ།j उपविष्टा वीणां वादयति। नायिका गायति ।]15
གོ་རི་ རབ་རྒྱས་ པ་དའི་ གེ་སར་གྱི
गौरि उत्फुल- कोमल- केसरརྡལ་ལྟར་ དཀར་བའི་ འོད་ཅན་ བཅོམ་ལྡན་མ། पराग- गौर- दाते भगवनि ।

Page #109

13.]
NĀGĀNANDA ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་ བཀའ་དྲིན་དག་གིས་ བདག་གི་ནི །
युष्मत्- प्रसादेन मम མངོན་པར་འདོད་པ་ རབ་ཏ་གྲབ་པར་འདོད།།
अभिवान्छितं प्रसिध्यतु ।। 13 उत्फुल्लकमलकेसरपरागगौरद्युते मम हि गौरि । अभिवान्छितं प्रसिध्यतु भगवति युष्मत्प्रसादेन ॥ १३ ॥
[ २ मा551] [नायकः कर्ण दत्त्वा ] ཨེ་མའོ་ གླ། ཨེ་མའོ་ རོལ་མོ།། अहो गीतम् । अहो वादिनम् ।
[RANI
- [चेटी।] རྗེའི་སྲས་མོ་ ངེས་པར་ ཡུན་རིང་ད་ གླ་དག་བླངས་ནས་ ཁྱོད་ཀྱ་
भर्तृदारिके खलु चिरं गीत्वा ते ལག་ རྩེ་དག་ ཡོངས་སུ་ མི་ ངལ་ལམ ། 'हस्तानां अप परि न 'श्रमः।"
भर्तृ दारिके चिरं खलु वादितम्। न खलु ते परिश्रमोऽग्रहस्तानाम्।'

Page #110

66
NAGANANDA
[ འདྲེན་མས ། ]* [ mív6t ! ]3
བདག་ ག་ལ་ ངལ །
मम ཊ: སྐཊཱ:|4
དྲུང་མོ་ བཅོམ་ལྡན་མའི་ མདུན་དུ་ རྒྱུད་མངས་ སྐྲོགས་པར་བྱེད་པ་ལ་
चतुरिके भगवत्याः བྱུངཝཿ:
वीणां वादयन्याः
[13.7
[ འབངས་མོས་ ། སྨོད་པ་དང་བཅས་པར ། 】 nía@qq! ]5
[ ཟེzt |
ཀྱེ་ བརྩེ་མེད་པ་ འདི་ལ་ མདུན་དུ་ རྒྱུད་མངས་ བསྒྲགས་པས་
अयि निष्करुणाया एतस्याः पुरुनः
འདིu
वादितेन
ཅི་ཞིག་ བྱ་ ཞེས་ བདག་ སྨྲའོ། གང་ཞིག་ འདི་སྙེད་ཀྱི་ དུས་སུ་ fm [ riq] རྫུf@མཿཛུqrfq6 སྐྱེ་བོ་ གཞོན་ན་མའི་ དཀའ་ཐབ་ བསྙེན་གནས་ ངེས་པའི་གནས་པས་
या
एतावन्तं
कालं
་
'जन "कन्यका
'दुष्कर
'उपवास
fuê:
བསྟེན་ ཀྱང་་ ད་དུང་ ཁྱེད་ལ་ དད་པར་ མི་ སྟོན་ནོ །
आराधयन्त्या अपि अद्यापि
प्रसादं ན ཊཱivཊི17

Page #111

13. 13]
NĀGĀNANDA
[ བི་ང ་ཥ་ཀས་ ཐོས་ནས །j°
[ ཞིgབ་ གཞd : ] ཀྱི་ གྲོགས་པ འདི་ནི་ ངེས་པར་ གཞོན་ན་མ་ སྟེ་ ཅིའི་ཕྱིར་ ___ भो वयस्य एषा खलु कन्यका कस्मात् མི་ ལྟ n° न प्रेक्षावहे ।
[ འདྲིན་པས །ji°
[ :: ]1༠ སྐྱོན་ ཅི་ ཡོད། གཞོན་ན་མ་ལྟ་བ་ ནི་ སྐྱོན་མེད་པ་ ཉིད་དོ ni
दोषः कः अस्ति।. कन्यका- दर्शनं हि निदोषम् एव ।। འོན་ཀྱང་ གལ་ཏེ་ ན་ བདག་ཅག་ མཐོང་ནས་ འཇིགས་ནི། ངོ་ཚ་ किन्तु यदि अस्मान् दृष्ट्वा * ससाध्वसा लज्जया གཞོན་ན་མ་ལ་ རྙེད་སླ་བས་ འདིར་ ཡུན་རིང་ མི་ སྡོད་པ་སྲིད་དོ 14
* बाल सुलभया इह चिरं न तिष्ठत् ।" དེས་ན་ རེ་ཞིག་ འཁྲི་ཤིང་གི་ དྲ་བ་ འདིས་ བསྒྲིབས་ཏེ་ तत् तावत् लता- जालेन अनेन अन्तरितो བལྟ་བར་བྱའོ །།
ཡཞ:/13

Page #112

NĀGĀNANDA
[ 13.23
[ གཉིགས་ བལྟོས་སོ །།14
[ གི་ ཀ ཞ: |l 4 བི་ད ་ ་ཀས་ ཡ་མཚན་དང་བཅས་པར j15
विदूषकः । सविस्मयम् । ] ཀྱེ་ གྲོགས་པོ་ ལྟོས་ཤིག་ ལྟོས་ཤིག་ ། ངོ་མཚར་རོ་ ངོ་མཚར་རོ་n1༠
་ བའག གེ འཁུ་ ཤེ་ཐཞུ | ན་བ གaཀཾ། 116 རྒྱད་མངས་ཀྱིས་ རྣ་བའི་ བདེ་ སྐྱེད་པར་བྱེད་ འབའ་ཞིག་ཏུ་ མ་ ཟད་དེ །7
वीणया कर्णस्य सुखं - उत्पादयति केवलं न"। རྣམ་བར་ཤེས ཕའི་ རྗེས་སུ་མཐན་པའི གཟུགས་ འདིས་ མིག་གི་ ཡང་ ___ विज्ञान- अनुरूपेण रूपेण एतेन अक्ष्णाअपि བདེ་བར་ སྐྱེད་པར་བྱེད་དོ n1 དེའི་ཕྱིར་ འདི་ སུ་ཞིག་ ཡིན་ །19
सुखम् उत्पादयति ।18 तत् एषा का भवति । ཅི་ ལྷ་མོ་ འམ །ཐ༠ ཀླུའི་བུ་མོ འམ །71 ཡང་ན་ རིག་པ་འཛིན་པའི་ f, 3གི བཞ༣༠ ག་ག-ཀག ག་རྗེil1 ་གཞག་ ཞིur
བུ་མ་ འམ། ཡང་ན་ གྲུབ་པའི་ རིགས་ལས་ འཁྲུངས་པ་ཞིག་གོ ༧ ཐ ཤུ་ཊིད། | གཡག་ fd%- ཆུན་ འག་ 11 ཐ

Page #113

NAGANANDA
14]
[ འདྲིན་པས་ ། རྣམ་པར་བལྟ་ཞིང་ ཆགས་དང་བཅས་པར ། ]*
[ ལན:|
*ཨོའོཆེ7ཐཱ
ཊཿཡཱུ%u! ]24
གྲོགས་པོ་ འདི་ སུ་ཞིག་ ཡེན་ ཞིས་ སུ་ཞིག་ ཡེན་
ཞིས་ པདག་གིས་ མ་
का भवति
इति
अहं न
वयस्य. इयं རྟོགས་སོ །། བདག་གིས་ འདི་ཙམ་ ཤེས་ཏེ །6
25
* Uཊཿབཱ- TR añ |26
TuTE:Ifa12 5 अहं གལ་ཏེ་ མཐོ་རིས་ བུ་མ ོ་ ཡིན་ན་ འཕྲོག་བྱེད་ མིག་ སྟོང་ལྡན་ यदि et- स्त्री
ཇཱf:
चक्षुः- सहस्रवान
དོན་བྱས་ འགྱུར །
i: |
གལ་ཏེ་ ཀླ་མོ་ཡིན་ ནའང་ འདི་ གདོང་ གང་ཚེ་ ས་འོག་
चेत नागी
अस्याः मुखं
यदा रसातलं
ཟླ་བས་ སྟོང་ མ་ཡིན །
शशभृता शून्यं न ।
གལ་ཏེ་ རིག་འཛིན་མ་ ཡིན་[ན་] གཞན་ རིགས་ལ་ རྒྱལ་
चेत्
विद्याधारी
अन्य- जाति- जयिनी
བདག་ཅག་ རིགས་ འབྲས་དང་བཅས །
འ
HIíཊི: सफला

Page #114

70
[14
NĀGĀNANDA
[14 གལ་ཏེ་ གྲུབ་རིགས་ལས་ སྐྱེས་ དེ་ཕྱིར་ གྲུབ་པ་ यदि सि. द्धा न्व य जा ततः सिद्धाः
- འཇིག་རྟེན་གསུམ་ཏ་ གྲགས་པར་འགྱུར ༎14
त्रिभुवने प्रसिद्धाः ॥ स्वर्गली यदि तत् कृतार्थमभवचक्षुःसहस्र हरेर्नागी चेन्न रसातलं शशभृता शून्यं मुखेऽस्याः सति । जातिनः सकलान्यजातिजयिनी विद्याधरी चेदियं स्यात् सिद्धान्वयजा यदि त्रिभुवने सिद्धाः प्रसिद्धास्ततः ।।

Page #115

༎ ཆེད་དུ་བརྗོད་པའི་ ཚོམས ༎
UDĀNAVARGA
ཀུན་རྟོག་ལས་ ནི་ འདོད་* སྐྱེས་པས” ། འདོད་པའི་‘ རྩ་བར་* ཤེས་བགྱིས་* ཏེ ། ཁྱོད་” ནི་ ཀན་རྟོག* མ° བྱེད་° དང་ ། དེས་ན་‘ ཁྱོད་3* འབྱང་༢༠ 1 རྨི• འགྱུར* ༎
15
काम' जानामि' ते मूलं' सङ्कल्पात् ' काम' जायसे' । ཐ॰ ཊi? སཿ མའིof@8,10 aiu གླེ ཊ15*4ཊིཀྑཊི13,
12 འ༥
2
•
II. 1.
14
འདོད་པ་རྣམས་ལས་à མྱ་ངན་༔ སྐྱེ ། འདོད་པ་རྣམས་ལས་* འཇིགས་པ་༔ འབྱང་༔ ། འདོད་པ་དག”ནི་ རྣམ་སྤངས་* ན །
མྱ་ངན་ མེད་ཅིང་ཟོ" འཇིགས་པ་ མེད'” " I. 2.
།།
कामेभ्यो' जायते' शोकः' कामेभ्यो' जायते " भयम् । saཀེ? ཊིཡཡུ%ti° rfཊིཊ1° i5:? + 5ཀེ1 ཨཱུ l!
12
་

Page #116

72
UDĀNAVARGA
[ 5
མགར་བ་ཡིས་1 ནི་ དངུལ་བཞིན་དི ། བློ་གྲོས་ལྡན་པས་༦ རིམ་པ་བཞིན་ ། སྐད་ཅིགཙཾ སྐད་ཅིགཔཾ རང་ཟད་ཙམ་ །
རང་གི་ དྲི་མ་” བསལ་བར་1" བྱ" །། II. 10. ad* ཚh* འ་ནཾ གེ་? བགེ བགེt | གནགི! ཁའ་ཀིའ° ཁི་ཡིq 10,il འག° (ཀn:* Il
གལ་ཏེ' བདེ་བ་” ཀན་* འདོད་ན་། འདོད་པ་ཐམས་ཅད་ ཡོངས་སུ་སྤོངས། འདོད་པ་* ཐམས་ཅད° ཡོངས་སྤངས་པས་“།
མཚོག་ཏ1 བདེ་བ་13 གོཔ་པར་འགུར 1༎ II. 12. d ཐེ ནུབནཙཧམེa༔ ཞི%ཚ?q གེའ| fpདཞ8འགགt10 མགོi ཅུཁq12 # གཞི13 II
5 འདོད་པས་ངོམས་པར༔ མི་འགྱུར་བས་། ཤེས་རབ་ཀྱིས* གི་ ངོམས་“པ་ སྐྱེད? །

Page #117

ང་
UDANAVARGA
10
ཤེས་རབ་ཀྱིས་ ནི་ ངོམས་པའི་ མི ། སྲེད་པའི་༢‘ དབང་3༔ དུ་ མི’འགྱུར་* རོ ། II. 14,
*ཨེཀགྀ? སལ་° ཊུ་ཊི° ཐཱ° fk »ཡཾÇ! ཁིQཕཊི1 Q1° gw1༠ €a Qu[11 《[13 * oQཊི1+ qཨཽ1° }}
9
14
6
གངས་ཅན་ དང་ ནི་ མཉམ་པ་ཡི༔ ། གསེར་གྱྀ་༔ རི་བོ་* ཡོད་གྱུར་* ཀྱང་ །
ནོར་” དེས གཅིག་ ཀྱང་ མི° ཚིམ་པར࿐ ། རྟོགས་པར་ གྱིས་* ལ་ ལེགས་པར་ སྤྱོད2" [L. 19.
18
पर्वतो ऽपि सुवर्णस्य समो' हिमवतो' भवेत्' ।
7
fqu? Qa° a10 sal2 q%+q° qa@ *RT1° SRIཁཱཊིq1° I/
10
7
བག་ཡོད་ འཆི་མེད་གནས་ ཡིན་ ཏེ ། བག་མེད་པ་༔ ནི་ འཆི་བའི་ གནས ། བག་ཡོད་• འཆི་བར་* མི་ འགྱུར་* ཏེ། བག་མེད་པ་༣༠ ནི་ རྟག་ཏུ་ འརྨི*IV.1。
11
73

Page #118

74
UDĀNAVARGA
अप्रमादो मृतपदं प्रमादो मृत्युनः पदम् ।
མཁr° ཟ8 ཞི'' a d:10 བll d:I
u
8 བརྩོན་འགྲས་༧ དང་* ནེ་ བག་ཡོད་ དང་། ཡང་དག་སྡོམ་་ དང་ དལ་བ་ཡིས། མཁས་པས་* གླིང་ད་”བུས་ནས་* ནི། ཆ་བོ་ ཆེན་པོ་1༠ མངོན་ད་ ཟློག ། Iv.5. dཞེt ཁག་ཞིག༔ ལེག༔ ཆེའ | ##7 *དབོ་ཞི* ཞtཝ ཞ ཟ rfai1:fai il
10 ཞུའ.
འ
དམན་པའི་ ཆོས་ལ་* མི་ བརྟེན་ཞིང་། བག་མེད་པ་ལ་ བརྟེན་ མི་” བྱ ། ལོག་པར་* ལྟ་ལ་° འདོད་1° མེད་་ དང་ །
འཇིག་རྟེན་• འཕེལ་བར་1༔ མི་1• བུའོ 1 ། v. 8. ཇིའཊ1:ག * བའིa༔ གཞ* n? * ཞིའིq| - 889 ཟླll 10 ཟླl # ཞིའ15 1 6:19u

Page #119

དi]
UDANAVARGA
15
l0
དགེ་སློང་ བག་ཡོད་ལ་ དགའ་ཞིང་། བག་མེད་པ་ལ་འཇིགས་ལྟ་བས* ། བདག་ཉིད་* ངན་འགྲོ་ལས་ འདྲེན་* ཏེ། འདམ་རྫབ་ལས་° ནི་ གླང་ཆེན་10 བཞིན1 ། v. 25.
མོས*
༣?
• • གཞི༔ འ: , ཞེsseof + ཞ° ཁ1 དུ:10
, 11 གང་གིས་' ཞི་བ་* འཕགས་༧ ལམ་* ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད་། ལམ་* དྲང་° བསྒོམས་པ་་ དེས་* ནི་ བདད་རྩི་རྙེད10 ། དེ་ལྟར་'' སྤྱོད་པས་1 བདེ་འདོད་1༔ བདེ་བ་I• ཐོབ་ཅི། སྙན་པ་1༠ ཐོབ་ཅིང་17 གྲགས་པ་18 འཕེལ་པར་ འགྱུར 19 XII. 20.
ཀt ཀ འོ ་འ8 Ri•, སོགཞི་ ཀིཾ༔ འབཀ གཤི19 } ཅུfl•ཅུས#1 ཚགཞི15 * ཁཞ14 ཛ༣༠ [ཁགཞི11
་ ལསྨ18 ge]e: u 8 :.inq. 19 a.

Page #120

76
UDANAVARGA
[ 14
ia
དྲེའུ་མོ་ རང་གི་ མངལ་གྱིས་༧ དང་ །་ འདམ་བུ་་ སྨིག་མ་”འབྲས་བུས་དང་ ། ཆ་ཤིང་་ འབྲས་བུས་* འཕང་བ་* ལྟར10 །
ཕོ་ཤལ་༣ བཀར་སྟིས་ འཕང་བར་ འགྱུར ༧ །། XII. 1. #* 4# ° དཞི༔ g• 4༔ ན• སucing a *Sའགft r1༠ L
18 རང་གི་རྙེད་པ་བླང་བྱ་ཞིང་། གཞན་གྱི་ལ་ ནི་ འདོད་་ མི་ བསྐྱེད ། ། དགེ་སློང་” གཞན་གྱི་* འདོད་བྱེད་པ།
ཏིང་འཛིན་1༠ ཐོབ་པར་11 མི་1° འགྱུར་རོ་1 ༎xlt. 7. ཞefi * གཞa ni མ #*་ཙཞུག• སྨགཞིའ | * ལགེ° P:7 ii༠ #1 ག ཞི་11ཐ it
14 གང་དག་ འདས་པའི༔ སངས་རྒྱས་༧ དང་། གང་དག་” མ་བྱོན་༧ སངས་རྒྱས་ དང་ །

Page #121

16 ]
UDĀNAVARGA
གང་དག་* ད་ལྟར་1° རྫོགས་སངས་རྒྱས1:།
མང་པོའ་ི •1 མྱ་ངན་1སེལ་མཇིད་པ14 ༎xxI. 10. ནི་ ག་ བཀའ: * ཝུན་:༠ ཀི བ gi? ཐུགཞ:| འགྲུ° ལེའཛཾ1༠ བཞུགil ་ it ཀན13ཀn:1•
15 བཞུགས་པར་གྱུར་ཞིང་། བཞུགས་པ་” དང་། དེ་བཞིན་་ བཞུགས་པར་འགྱུར་* ཀུན་གྱིས་བ ། དམ་ཆོས་ བླ་མར་ མཇིད་པ་* འདི* །
རྫོགས་སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་° ཆོས་ཉིད་1༠ ཡིན །། XXl. 11. सर्व सद्धर्मगुरखो' व्यहार्पर] विहरन्ति' च। *འཆི༔ ཞིsཊི་ཞ* ག* * ཞུཝེ ° འགi° t
16 སྦྱོར་བ་ལས" ནི་ སྲིད་པ་* འབྱུང་་། སྦྱོར་བ་མེད་པས་་ སྲིད་པ་ཟད་ ། སྲིད་པ་༩ དང་" ནི་ སྲིད་མེད་པའི། ལམ་° འདི1• གཉིས་ཀI ཤེས་ཀྱིས་ ལ །

Page #122

7s
[ I8
UDĀNAVARGA སྦྱོར་ལས་ རབ་ཏུ་འདའ་བྱའི་ ཕྱིར་བ། མཁས་པས་1༠ དེ་ལ་1༦ བསླབ་པར་གྱིས་17XXIX.44. योगाद् भवः प्रभवति' वियोगाद् भवक्षयः । བཞ10 # it1qq' # དག1༔ and Req* བ° , ཞ1༠ m[]17 at15 ཝཱ འ1 * བའིཡིའ14 u
17 ཉེས་པར་སྤྱད་པ་ བྱས་པས་” གདུང་འགྱུར་ཞེང་་ ། ངན་འགྲོར་ སོང་བའི་༔ འོག་ཏུའང་“ གདུང་བར་འགྱུར། ལེགས་པར་* སྤྱད་པ་ བྱས་པས་1༠ དགའ་འགྱུར་ཞིང་། བདེ་འགྲོར་1• སོང་བའི་1༔ འོག་ཏའང་I• དགའ་བར་ འགྱུར1༠ n
XXIX. 45. བཞི༔ * du * དག* ཆེ་ f* * :5) ཞེi1 ཏུཙིཏd° ཁོri° འRi༔ ཅུགd1 འ:14 u
6, 14 གsR.
་18 མ་སྨྲས་ན་ ཡང་༸ སྨོད་བྱེད་ཅིང་་། མང་ད་་ སྨྲས་ན་འང་* སྨོད་པར་བྱེད་ །

Page #123

20]
UDANAVARGA
དལ་བུས་*སྨྲས་ྋ ནའང་༢༠ སྨོད་བྱེད་‘ དེ །
འཇིག་རྟེན་ན་" ནི་ མི་སྨད” མེད* ། XXIX 49.
།།
faxfa° * Quwreu fi«ie 4mfqq° + aceq'am° ¥10 {icfau {a1* oདེ8q1 a{ཊིiRa:13 i
2
2, 6, 10 xf,
1
19
གཅིག་ཏ་ཬ སྨད་པར་བྱ་བྋ དང་ ། གཅིག་ཏུ་* བསྟོད་པར་བྱ་བའི མི །
5
ད་ལྟར་” ཡོད་པ་ མ་ ཡིན་ ཏེ །
བྱུང་བར་༢༠ མ་གྱུར་༔ འབྱུང་༢༠ ང་1° མི་1རྞ འགྱུར ྃ།། XXIX. 50.
2
qoma*ཨཱཊཿ:? g6s:° q%d* * * xdf&d:5 ༔ 11 ཞུ19 1013[ཞིv]ཞེེ 15»15 རྞྞ ཀྵེ14 19 €rcQc? fQuQ° |
7
20
1
ཇི་ལྟར་ ཇི་༔ དང་ བྲག་དག་”ནི །
79
རླུང་གིས་* གཡོས་པར་ མི་* འགྱུར་* ལྟར་` ། དེ་བཞིན་” བསྟོད་* དང་ སྨད་པ་ཡིས །
མཁས་པ་༢༠ རབ་ཏུ་” གཡོ་བ་3 མེད” ། XXIX. 53.

Page #124

80
UDĀNAVARGA
शैलो यथा' अपि *एकघनो वायुना न प्रकम्पते । བུd? Rཞུ°ཁrf ni * དཞི1 ཞི བཞ:1° u
་21 ས་ལ་1 གང་གི་ རྩ མེད་པ་ ། ལོ་” མེད་ ལྕག་ཕྲན་་ ག་ལ་* ཡོད། འཆིང་བ་ལས་1* གྲོལil པརྟན་པ13 དེ་། ཇི་ག་1༔ སུས་ ཀྱང་1 སྨད་1? འོས་1 མིན་ nXXIX 54.
༔ Rམིག#* ft r=* མ་ ག7, #1 #1 ་ལ་ཞ1༠ ནུན11 13 14 + ཞིན་ཞ17 * fai• u
8 ཙd:,9 གR. 16 མཾ. 19 ན.
འཇིག་རྟེན་' འདོད་”བདེ་༸ གང་་ ཡིན་ཙ དང་ ། ལྷ་ཡུལ་* བདེ་བ་* གང་° ཡིན་ པས། སྲེད་པ་1༠ ཟད་པའིu བདེ་བ་1༔ དེའི1 ། བན་དྲག་1• ཆར་15 ཡང་1༔ མི་17 ཕོད་དོ1 ༎ XXX. 32. ཞུ༔ ཤཱནཾ གཞཞུཝུ ནི་ ཁཱ° གའི +ཞི' ཙུན| བུ་10ལllཚོའ14 ཞ1 གཞི15 ཟ17 da14 Aq14
5 གd. 16 གN.

Page #125

25 ]
UDĀNAVARGA
11
23
འཚེ་བ་ཅན་གྱི་ མི་ནང་ན° ། འཚེ་བ་མེད་པར་༔ གནས་པ་* དང་ ། འཚེ་ བའི་ནང་ན་' འཚེ་མེད་པར །
ཀྱེ་མའོ་” ཤིན་ཏུ་བདེ་བར་* འཚོ॰ ༎ XXX 46.
6
सुसुखं' बत' जीवाम' हिंसकेषु स्वहिंसकाः । । fཛུqཏིསྐུ! ཨ@@g° * Rཇུགེ་ u{ཛུet;° l
3
24
མི་ཐི་ལ་ དག་ རབ་ ̈བསྲེགས་ ཀྱང་ ། ང་ལ་༔ ཅི་ཡང་༔ ཚིག་པ་” མེད ། ང་ལ་༔ གང་དག0 རྩི" མེད་ པས༴ ། ཀྱེ་མའོ་ ཤིན་ཏུ་བདེ་བར་༢‘ འཚོ* །། XXX. 49.
gge14 ༢ཊ13 གིarum15 ཀཱིsi10 -? -rfa19 f6a711 | मिथिलायां । दह्यमानायां न नो' दह्यति किञ्चन ॥
7
2 8org. 4 གྷཁི.,
25
གཟང་བར་དཀའ་` ཞིང་ ཡང་བ་° དང་ །
གང་དུ་༸ དགའ་བར་* འགྲོ་བ་ཡི° །
81

Page #126

UDÁNAVARGA
[ 26 སེམས་༄༅ དལ་བ་” ནི་ ལེགས་པ་༸ སྟེ། སེམས་༧ དལ་བ་ཡིས19 བདེ་བ་འདྲེན༔ ༎ XXXI. 1. འོག་གཞུག གཙིཏཁ•Rབ་ག:5 | Rབཀ༔ 7 གg R# ཤུ#t༠ ཁཱl1ག་འག14 u
26
ཆོས་ཀྱི་ སྔོན་ད་༔ ཡིད་༸ འགྲོ* སྟེ། ཡིད་མགྱོགས་* ཡིད་ ནི་ གཙོ་བོ་ ཡིན ། གལ་ཏེ་་ ཡིད་ རབ་དང་བ་ཡིས། སྨྲས་1° སམ་li ཡང་ན་1 བྱས་1 ཀྱང་ རུང་15། དེ་ཡིས་ དེ་17 ནི་ བདེ་བ་* ཐོབ་°།
གྲིབ་མ་༧༠ རྗེས་སུ་འབྲང་བ་བཞིན༔ ༎ xxxI. 25. ཞ:°ཚོག* གit :ཆེན* * ཞ:° | འག* འི འ ° ཞཞི10 rli དགེRi ri | འཁྲ16 * 17 ཙཡའ18 * འིཞི་° ༠ག° ༠ ༩ ཞུ་མིasi l
ལ་གཞི... 14 གཞི. 15 gམཱor shq.

Page #127

༎ སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་སྤྱོད་པ་ ཞེས་བྱ་བའི་ སྙན་ངག་ཆེན་པོ།། ॥ बुद्धचरितं नाम महाकाव्यम् ॥
། ལེའུ་ དྲུག་པའོ།། lag: ཁt: u
དེ་ནས་འགྲོ ་མིག་* ཉི་མ་ ནི། མངོན་པར་ ཤར་པའི༔ ཡུད་°ཙམ་ན། ངན་སྤོང་བུ་ཨ་་ དཀའ་ཐབ་གནས* ། མི་མཆོག་19 དེས་1 ནི་ གཟིགས་པར་གྱུར1 །
ཞl :ནུg#5 ཀུ་ཞིཝེ ཆེ མནེ |
ཞིག”གའ《 ཤll ༼ཞནit ཤf c1༠ u
བློ་ཕཔ་ གཉིད་ལོག་* རི་དྭགས་ དང་ ། རང་གནས་སཾ གནས་པའི་* བྱ་* གང་ཞིག །

Page #128

BUDHACARITA
གཟིགས་ནས་* ངལ་གསོས་” བཞིན་ད་1༠ དང་ །
དོན་ནི་བྱས་པ་ བཞིན་ད་ གྱུར14 །། mའི་འཤg ཞུགཙྪཆི*Rཞུག* | hལོའ° ཁ10 ཀ? r* ནit et all ཨཞཞ1• Il
དེ་ནི། རྒྱགས་པ་མེད་དོན་ི དང་། དཀའ་ཐབ་*མཆོད་པའི་ དོན་ ཉིད་༧ དང་ ། རང་གི་འ༠ རྗེས་ས་ བསྲང་བ་ལ* །
རྡོ་ཡི14 རྒྱབ་ནས་༔ བབས་པར་གྱུར ༎ Rཀ**#ཚུག# s:* #n? འ8 ཟླ4,9 | aft༠ གཞུadall * ཀཱ 1 ༣a184314 གཞུ 15l
མངོན་པར་བབས་ནས་ ཀྱང་ རེག་ཅིང་། དགའ་ཞིང་༔ མིག་གིས་° འཁྲུ་བ་བཞིན ། ངེས་པར་ འཁོར་* ཞེས་° རྡ་1༠ དང་n ནི །
འདུན་པ་ལ་ ནི་ སྨྲས་པ་ལྟོ1 n अवतीय व पस्पर्श निस्तीर्ण मिति वाजिनः ।
# བl1 མཁའiq1 གིe:༔ ཁ ཀཀ རྣཞ° བཅུ་ག° u

Page #129

7 ]
BUDHACARITA
s5
85
འདི་ནི'' མཁའ་ལྡིང་" དཔེར་༸ མགྱོགས་ལ། མགྱོགས་འགྲོ་ལ་° ནི་ རྗེས་སུ་འོངས། ། འདིས་”ནི་ བདག་གི་* སྟོབས་ དང་10 ནི །
ཞི་བ་11 བདག་་ལ་1༧ གས་13 པ་ བསྟན་4 །། ཀ ཀཚi?ཆ*ad! ཚq མའུ:[མar° | ཞྭism14 བ་ཀl1 ཀའ1 2nfན་13 ཞིང་ཁག བl༠ སྨནn? གcའn:* |
ཐམས་ཅད་ནས་ དོན་ གཞན་༧ ཡིན་ཀྱང་ ། ཁྱོད་ཀྱིས་“ སྙིང་ལ་? བཟང་“བ་ སྡེ། ། གང་གི་ ཇོ་བོ་དག་ལ་1༠ དཀའ 11 ། །
འདི་1 ནེ་ དེ་འདྲ་1 ཐ དག་པ་14 ཉིད15༎ ཞུdarl afཀ ཀ*# sfn? gཚུ་གེ ཞn ཟླཞི? | ཞུ་10ཊཛྷ11 ཀ9 འq1༧ ༔ ཛཱིgn:19 ཐུཝཱ14 q15 བ ll
གས་པ་མེད་ལ། ནས་པ་༧ ཡོད། ནུས་པ་མེད་ལ་༔ གས་པ་ལྡནཙོ །

Page #130

85
BUDHACARITA
གས་པ་ལྡན་ དང་” ནས་པ་° སྟེ ། ཁྱོད་འདྲ་o ས་སྟ ེང་༢ རྙེད་པར་དཀའ” ༎
* अभक्तो ऽपि समर्थो ऽस्ति निःसामर्थ्यो ऽपि भक्तिमान् । af%aiq° ཐཱ༩ ༥q R6གཱ° ཐཱ ཙུøaqll cqíaཀེ° * gfa1° !
च
8
4
དེ་ཕྱིར་༸ སྐལ་བ་’ཆེན་པོའི་ ལས །
ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་ འདིས་ ནི་ བདག་” དགའ་འ ོ། གང་ཞིང་ ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་o བསམ་པ་ འདི ། འབྲས་བུ་ལས་ཨཾ ཀྱང་ ‘ གཞན་དུ་ཕྱོགས’ ༎
༎
4
तत्' प्रीतोऽस्मि तव अनेन महाभागेन कर्मणा । 77ཊི H་ཥི HTཀེ11 s71? 6ཊེ7713 sfq14 qགཙུཤུ@15 ||
944.
10 d4.
9
2
3
སྐྱེ་བོ་འབྲས་བུ་ལ་༔ གནས་པའི ། མཐན་ཕྱོཁས་ སྐྱེ་བོ གང་གིས་ མིན” ། ཟློག་ལ་ རང་གི་༔ སྐྱེ་བོ10 ཡང་' །
8
ཕལ་ཆེར་༔ ཕ་རོལ་༢༠ སྐྱེ་བོར་༢༤ གྱར1 ༎
[9

Page #131

11 ]
BUDHACARITA
87
87
ན། འ་ཤ དཙ*བཀ༔ ཟ7 @་ཞུfཞུཊ་4 ཞ: | གོ14 ཞཞི15 སྣའིg'i a°་བ༠ shli huཀ8 |
14 aa:.
.
10
རིགས་ཀྱི་1 དོན་ད་ བུཊཾ བཟང་“ཞིང་ ། གསོས་པའི* དོན་དུ་“ པ་་ བསྟེན་པ* ། སྲེད་པའི་ བསམ་པས་° ཆགས་19 སྐྱེm སྟེ །
ཕྱེད་པ་མེད་པར་1 རང་ཉིད་19 མེད14 །། ཅུནin srrh : ཨེན་ཊོafé ཤིཀ8 ཁm? | ann fནུཀཞི1༠ ཞྭll གl4 iའི་དགil ཆབml3 |
11 མང་བོ་ བརྗོད་ ཅིར་༧ མདོར་བསྡུས་ནས་* ། བདག་གི་༦ དགའ་° ཆེན་” ལེགས་་་ བྱས་ཏེ། རྡ་'༠ བླངས་ནས་ ནི་ ཕྱིར་ལོག་1༧ དང་19 །
བདག་ནི14 འདོད་པའི 15 ནགས་1༠ རབ་ཐོབ་7 །། fན༧ ནr? gl dཞིག་འ༔ d? 29 ཏུཙྪིའཇུའBi% |
ཞdq1༔ འག10 གཞུmll ཀཀ17 siftaal #t |
1:3q.
14 ཀཱq.

Page #132

ss
BUDHACARITA
[ 14
12
དེ་སྐད། སྨྲས་ནས་ ཕྱག་* ཆེན་” དེ། རྗེས་སུ་བསྔགས་པ་“བྱེད་འདོད་པས། ། རྒྱན་རྣམས་* ཀན་ནས་བཏོགས་ནས་ ནི།
གདང་10སེམས་ལྡན་པ་1 འདི་ལ་ བྱིན་༅ །། ཙཞི ནr? ཤ* གཞུག*arཙུའུ་ཞ8Rན་འག7 | བབria8 ཟཞུཏཀ° མགི1༧ བnionབཞིll ཞུ/14
13 དབུ་རྒྱན་དག་ནས་་ ནོར་བུ་ གསལ། སྒྲོན་མའི་༔ ལུས་ལ་ བླངས་ནས་ ནི། ཉི་མ་” འབིགས་བྱེད་ལ་༧ བཞིན་༧ དེས་° །
5-T” 35 AN TB11 B37 555|| ཤུཉྩggl ཞ*བཀfri5 གtm?ཀའn tག | ཆ་བཞ1 བཀགll #1 #i• གཌིཀཱ? འ? * :8 II
107:.
14 འདན་པ་ ནོར་བུ་༔ འདི ་༦ ལོང་ལ་ ། ལན་མང་༦ བཏད་ནས་ མི་”སྐྱོང་ ནི།

Page #133

16 ]
BUDHACARITA ཀན་ནས་གདང་བ་”བཟླ ག་པའི་ ཕྱིར 1༠ །
བློ་ཕེབས་པར་11 ནི་ གསོལ་བར་བྱ་བ། ཨ N* 1 ཀ༔ ཞུགེ ཤཱ?q: | ཞིགl? ཞུན་ཞིrni1 འཁ°Rའིཞུགེi0 l
4 གཟའི.
15 སྐྱེ་བ་འཆི་བ་ཉམས་དོན་དུ། དཀའ་ཐབ་༸ནགས་ཚལ་* རབ་ཐོབ་7 སྟེ ། མཐོ་རིས་* སྐོམ་པས་° ངེས་1༠ མིན་ ཞིང་ །
བརྩེ་བ་མེད་ མིན་ཟེ* ཁྲོས་པ་1༔ མིན8 ༎ བཀག*གཙྪཎཾ༔ * གཞི@is གེ*#* | ཟll ཞུ10 ཁf8ལོག° ma གཤིརྟེགi rl ལུག14 u
16 , དེ་ཕྱིར་༧ དེ་ལྟར་༸ མངོན་བྱང་བཙོ ། བདག་ལ་༔ མྱ་ངན་* འོས་* མ་ཡིན། ། ཡུན་རིང་* འདུས་པར་ གྱུར་ནས་ ཀྱང་ ། དས་ཀྱིས་༧༧ འགྱུར་བ་ མ་ ཡིན་ནོ།།

Page #134

BUDHACARITA
[ 18 3 ་གཞི་བཞའt༔ གཞིགཙོ གཞ6 | ག19 གཤིu ཞི ཞི ཞེས: གཞl r14 ཟཞིགa1916 u
17 གང་ཕྱིར་1 ངེས་པར་༔ འབྲལ་བ་༧.སྡུ། དེ་ཕྱིར་༤ ཐར་ཕྱིར བདག་གི* བློ་།། ་སླར་* ཡང་° རང་གི་1° སྐྱེ་བོ་ལས།
རྣམ་པར་འབྲལ་བ་1 གང་ལས་ མིན༔ ༎ ध्रुवो यस्माच् च विश्लेषस् तस्मान् मोक्षाय मे मतिः' । ཆེ་འ:1 ད#1 • ག་ཝཱ༔ གག་* sh° ཞུlpའགཞིbr:ll u
18
མྱ་ངན་སྤོང་ཕྱིར་༧ ངེས་འབྱང་བ། བདག་ལ་* མྱ་ངན་* འོས་* མ་ཡིན་། མྱ་ངན་རྒྱུ་”ནི་ འདོད་ལ་1° ཆགས ། ཆགས་པ་ཅན་ ལ་ མྱ་ངན་བྱ་༧ །།
शोक स्यागाय' निष्कान्त न' मां शोचितुम् अर्हसि ।
h8g ng10 འགl1 ་གཞ1 ཤུགཁ:1au

Page #135

21]
BUDHACARITA
19
འདི་` ཡང་༸ སྔ་མ་རྣམས་ལ་ གྲགས∶ ། ཁོ་བོ་ཅག་ལ་ ངེས་པར་ གནས །
དེ་ལྟར་༠ སྟེར་བྱར་གྱུར་པས་༠ ན། མྱ་ངན་འོས” མིན་ ལམ་གྱིས་ འགྲོ“ ༎
अयं च ' किल' पूर्वेषाम् अस्माकं निश्चयः स्थिरः' ।
4
8
* པཱd° €Wqrཊིq10 a12 དེsq['I su qT" AsR1 }
20
སྐྱས་བུ་རྣམས་ལ་༔ ཕྱིར་ལག་ཏ° ། ནོར་གྱི་° སྟེར་བྱར་ འགྱུར་བ་ སྟེ ེ ། ས་ལ་° ཆོསཀྱི་” བདག་པོ་* ཡང་ ། རྙེད་དཀའ་༢༠ ཡང་ན་༢ མ་ ཡིན་1' ནོ
भवन्ति' ह्यर्थ
3
1 ཞིའི? }
°cne:4 पुरुषस्य ' gfasui° ud7zrwicr° gørq! d° w!° €Fa13 arI1 II
10
21
གང་' ཡང་༔ འདི་༔ ནི་ དས་མིན་པར་ ། ནགས་སུ་* སོང་བ་ཡིན་” ཞེ་ན་ །
8
91

Page #136

92
BUDHACARITA
8
སྲོག་ ཀྱང་ གཡ ོ་བར་གྱར་པ་ན॰ །
ܘ
ཆོས་ལ་ དས་མེད་'༔ མ་ ཡིན་ནོ ༎
यदु' अपि' स्यादसमये यातो वनम्' असौ' इति । 37omm1 -mftཞུ13 g:|qu hâཊི ཐཱ=ཊེ° qà10 R
8
22
དེ་ཕྱིར་༴ ད་ལྟར་ ཉིད་ད་༸ བདག‘ །
6
8
་ དགེ་བ་ བསག་ ཅེས་” ངེས་པ་ དེ° ། འཆི་བའི་༢༠ དགྲ་༢ནི་ གནས་པ་ན་3༔ ། གསོན་པ་ལ་༢༠ ནི་ བློ་གཏད་14རྩིང་1°
ར་་་་་
23
तस्मादु' अद्य' एव' मे श्रयश् चेतव्यम्" इति निश्चयः । 5གི་ཞིཊི1 འེ15 [g fཁཱིa*གེ11 zeum10 1ufii11 fi? ||
2
ཊཿ:.
#
ཞི་བ་ ཁྱོད་ཀྱིས་ དེ་ལ་སོགས ། ས་འཛིན་*བདག་ལ་ ཞ་བུ་*སྟེ ། ཇི་ལྟར་” བདག་ནི་ མི་ དྲན་པ །
10.
དེ་ལྟར་` ཉིད་དུ་' འབད་པ་ གྱིས ༎
:
[23

Page #137

25 ]
BUDHACARITA
བྱ3
༧ གུའགཞི ཞག ཀt ཞིག་ བཞུག*ག:5| བའarཞ14 url བཞ14 ཀn? nf8 =9 གg1༠ འི l
24
གཞན་1 ཡང་ བདག་ལ་༧ ཡོན་ཏན་མེད ། ཁྱོད་ཀྱིས་༔ མི་“བདག་ལ་སྨྲ་བྱ* ། ཡོན་ཏན་མེད་ལས་” བརྩེ་བ་1༠ འདོར 11། བརྩེ་བ་1 “དོར་ལས་1༅ མྱ་ངན་1༔ མེད16 ༎
ཆི
ག་ ག་ ཁ ་ ག་ཏ| བའ་ཞ" སཞིll ཎའི་:10 གི14ཀའ་༧ ཟླ གཞི་4 m
1 གd.
དེ་ལྟར་' རིག་* འདི་༸ ཐོས་གར་ནས་། , འདན་པ་༸ གདང་བས་༸ རྣམ་འཁྲུགས་” ཞིང་ །
མཆི་མས་ི མདད་པའི་ ཚིག་ཉིད་ཀྱིས“ ། ཐལ་མོ་1 སྦྱར་དེ་'༔ ལན་གསོལ་བl༠ ༎
* ཞི! གན° ཝ* ནུག* : བའ°ཞིཚུལ:?| གཡ*
ཀ ° གl0 ལུགཞl * =l3all il

Page #138

བྱ4
BUDHACARITA
[ 28
26 ་ ་ ཇོ་། ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་ དགོངས་པ་ནི། གཉེན་ལ་* ངལ་བ་*སྟེར་བ་ འདིས་ ། ར་བོའི • འགྲམ་ན” གཉིས་འཐང་1༠ བཞིན།
བདག་གེ 1 ༧ སེམས་1༔ འདི་1༔ འགར་བ་འ1༠ ༎ am? འa aཊིཀ ཀཱའག༔ཀའ་ཁན་ཞིག་° | h:| : ཀཾ༣ihl; l12 in't ཞི་གཙྩ རྣཞli ཞིག:10 it 14 .
27 ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་ ངེས་པ༔ འདི་ལྟ་བུས* ། སུ་ཡི་ མརེ་མ་° འབྱང་བ་ མེད་། ལྕགས་”ལས་གར་པའི་ སྙིང་ལ“འང་11 སྟེ །
བརྩེ་བས་| འཁྲགས་ལ་1༔ སྨོས་ 17 དགོས་ ཎཀཱ་ ཀ7 ༩བཏུ'' iཊིཀའ ཟིl sཀག་ཆ་ལྟ:༧ | ཀ*ཀའིshi གི10 15 A: ཎའི་1༄༅iaཞེ་ u 14 ནAq. 15 fཀཱ, 16 ཀཞ.
28 གཞལ་མེད་ཁང་གི་1 མལ་འོས་པའི། ཤིན་ཏུ་གཞོན་ན་༔ འདི་* གང་ན །

Page #139

30 ]
BUHDACARITA
95
,
ཀ་ཤའི་* མྱ་ག“ རྣོ་བ་ཙིཏན་༠། ་ ་
དཀའ་ཐུབ་ནགས་ཀྱི་1? ས་19 གང་q14 ། ཞིག་འབཀའ*ཝཾ ཇུ ཙག་འ* ཞུ ནུ བ| གtpཚ78at10 གlsའམགོ14 s14 བu
དཔྱོད་ཀྱི་ འབད་པ་ ཐོས་ནས་ ཀྱང་། རྟ་° བ་ང་° བདག་གིས་' བླངས་པ་* འདི° ། མགོན་པོ་1༠ དེ་I• ནི་ སྟོབས་ཀྱིས་I•ནི །
ལྷ་ཡིས་• བྱེད་ད་བཅག་པ• འདྲ18 ༎ ནུག ཀླུ༔ འཁd atཀ༣༧ ཆགེs ཨཱ° ག7 8e: | ཝdIcགས1 ཞll al° * འི=1 +r15 གfག དne:1• u
30 ཁྱོད་ཀྱི' ནན་ཏན་༧ ངེས་པ་* འཇི༔ ། རང་°དབང་° ཤེས་ན་༧ གང་གི་ཕྱིར། ཉེ་བར་ལེན་° དེ་ མགྱོགས་འགྲོའི་1° རྡ11 ། སེར་སྐྱའི་ གཞི་ཡི་1༅ མྱ་ངན་གནས14 ༎

Page #140

96
BUDHACARITA
[ 18
n umsm ཞ7 ཀབ་ཀན d ཀl གཞའིr? གi0 : གཞf4 དགིlatqཞ:14 l
afaq...11 གq.
31 མེད་པ་པོ་ ཡིས་ དམ་ ཆོས་ བཞིན ། རྒྱལ་པོ་” བརྩེ་བ་༦ བགྲེས་པ་” དང་ ། ། སྲས་པོ་“སྟག་གི་1° འདོར་བ་'' ནི།
ཕྱག་ཆེན་1* དེ་| ནི་ འོས་16 མ་ ཡིན17 །། q14 ni aཛn15»l7 int'fཞིgཞུ! ནུཝིན་ཚi | ཁi' '7 བf HH ཞུ*མནོ རྣa* rte:I II
དམ་པའི་བྱ་བ་ བྱེད་་བཅོམ་བའི* ། ཡང་དག་“བསྐྱེད་” པས་ ཡོངས་སུ་*ནི། གང་རད་ གཉིས་པའི་l མ་" དེ་' དང་1*། ལྷ་མོ་་༥ བརྗེད་པར 15 འོས་10 མ17 ཡིནi༅ །།
*ཀh?nt* #» iadmii༠ #1 བ༔ གll, ༧ རྗེn a'7 ཁ10,1s fཞིགཚུ'i m?p* རྩཞ* འRai•u

Page #141

35 ]
BUDHACARITA
97
33 མ་ནིང་གིས་ ནི་ དཔལ་ ཐོབ་ བཞིན་* ། སྲས་པོ་༤ བྱིས་པ་° ཡོན་ཏན་ལྡན། རིགས་“བཙུན་༧ བདག་པོའ་ི -10 བརྡལ་ཞུགས་མ །
ལྷ་མོ་་ འདོར་བར་ འོས་1• མ་15 ཡིན14 །། གཞནུi8 བ་#7 ?qa10afti | རྗེའ1 ཚུRi4 ཀ18 གཞུ1 ཚེa: བཞཞ ༼ཀ༣ ཚིག L
34 བསྔགས་འོས་ སྲས་པོ་ གྲགས་པ་འཛིན། སྙན་གྲགས་* ཆོས་”ནི་ འཛིན་པའི་ མཆོག ། བཞེན་པ་ལྡན་པས་* གྲགས་ མཆོག་10. བཞིནl།
བྱིས་པ་1 འདོར་བར 1 འོས་14 མ་ ཡིན་d །། ཁ' ཀཱནཊ༔ ནnl 4# #* :7| བའ1 *ཛཁ14 15,10 ཀུནi ཀ#* qll #l༠ བལྟ:° il
35 ཅི་སྟེ་ གཉེན་ དང་ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་༥ དག ། ། འདོར་བ་ཉིད་ད་ བློ་གྲོས་༧ མཛད །

Page #142

98
BUDHACARITA
[ 37
བདག་གི་1° འགྲོས་ནི་ ཁྱོད་19 ཞབས་ན།།
ཁྱབ་བདག་14 བདག་15 འདོར :1༩ འོས་17 མ་19 ཡིན།། 1 ཁཞུ' ཤཱ ཀ4 ལོཙུན་5,7 ཞ༧ ག° སཞི: | f15 18 aཚུRi719 @གེ14 ཀོན 1. འའ19གཞit ié fr11 བཀl" ]
ར་གའི་བུ་ ནི་ བཤེས་༸བཟང་བཞན།
ཁྱོད་ནི༔ དགོན་པར་ དོར་ནས་་ སུ*། མེ་ཡིས་“ རིག་པའི10 སེམས་ཀྱིསll ནི།
གྲོང་ད་19 འགྲོ་བར1 ནས་པ་14 མེད། 75 afts and: 19 gian qua 10 đến 1 འ ག་ཀེ༔ བཛqཙཀཱ? ཅུཞིr? འ* di l
8 A particle used afters,
གa.
37 ཁྱོད་ འདོར་” གྲོང་ད་༸ འགྲོ་བ་ན་ ། རྒྱལ་པོས་” བདག་ལ་” ཅི་ཞིག་” གསུང་*། ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་ བཙུན་མོའི་་ འཁོར་ད་' འམ། ། འོས་པl༧ མཐོང་ནས་19 ཅི་ཞིག་!! སྨྲl? །

Page #143

3༠ ]
BUDHACARITA
9
ཎཱ༔ ཞི aཀa བག* #* ཞཞུi * ཞི #4 * d* | བརྟག་ཞི15 Rའ194&cཤཞ1 ཚi༔ ཞ°གཤgང་གི10 ཀll n
38
གང་ ཡང་ ཡོན་ཏན་མེད་པ་༧ ཡང་། མི་བདག་ལ་ སྨོས་༦ གསུང་བ་? ཡང་ ། སྐྱོན་མེད་་ ཐབ་པའི ་ བཞིན་1° ཁྱོད་ ཀྱི། མ་གྱུར་པ་1 དེ་19 ཅི་ཞིག་༔ སྨྲ།།
ཀ༣1 h acu? ཨའི* * གd༔ བཞི འི | རཱ14 ཞུl Rགཞི15 adi ཞིli h ཀ* ཤུའི་° རྣཞ10 u
ངོ་ཚ་དང་བཅས། སེམས་ཀྱིས་ ནི། ལྕེ་ ནི་ ཐོགས་པར་ གུར་པ་ ཡིས། བདག་ནི་༧ གལ་དེ་° ཡང་“ སྨྲ་བ། དེ་ལ་° དད་པར 10 འོས་པ་1 སུ་ ༎
ཚུལེག° འR fཞགr * འཆཀག", ཨཎྜིཏཾ ཀཱཋཱ༔ R7 ག ག#* དཞ1 ཁཱ ཉྙཞུ་ཞུགr0 rfa till

Page #144

io0
BUDHACARITA
[ 42
40
གང་ཞིག་ཟླ་བ་ཡི༔ རྣོ་བར༄༅། ། སྨྲ་བ་ དད་པར་, འཛིན་“པ་ འམ་ ། ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་* སྐྱོན་ཤེས10 དེས་ll སྐྱོན་1 ནི།
སྨྲ་བ་1 དད་པར 14 འཛིན་པ་16 འམ14 ༎ यो हि चन्द्रमसस् तेक्ष्ण्यं कथयेच् छद्दधीत वा' । ཤli བཞ1? ཞ8 ཁཟླ10 དཝཱ1 ཝུའ14a15 rld l
41 རྟག་ད་་ རྗེས་སུ་བརྩེ་བཅས་ དང་ ། རྟག་པར་ སྙིང་རྗེ་ཤེས་པ་ཡི ། ་་ བརྩེ་བ་*སྤོང་བ་་ ཚལ་* མིན་ ཏེ།
ཕྱིར་ལོག1༠ བདག་ལ་l བཀའ་དྲིན་19 མཛོད1 །། सानुक्रोशस्य सततं नित्यं करुण घेदिनः । ཞིq6ག་གེ7 F° བཞུགེs Rad10 འ་ཞ1 1/13 གི11 n
དེ་ལྟར་I མྱ་ངན་ཀྱས་ ནོན་པའི། འདུན་པའ་་ ཚིག་* འདི་༸ གསན་གྱུར་ནས་།

Page #145

44 ]
BUDHACARITA
toi
རང་གནས་ མཆོག་ཏ་° བརྟན་པ་ཡིས10 །
སྨྲ་བའིli མཆོག་གིས་l བཀའ་སྩལ་1༠ དོ།། इति शोक अभिभूतस्य श्रुत्वा' छन्दस्य* भाषितं । ཞུe: ཁག° འr10 གཞl བཞུdl1 :12 J|
d ཙུཊཱ.
43.
འདན་པ་1 བདག་དང་༸འབྲལ་བ་༧ ལ། ཀན་ནས་”གདང་བ་° འདི་ ཐོང་ཞིག། ལུས་ཅན་° འགྲོ་བ་1༠ ཐ་དད་ལ11 །
དངོས་པ་1 སྣ་ཚོགས་19 ངེས་པ་1༔ ཡིན1 །། ཞྭ?Rའདེf nia༔ ཤུ བཞབའཁུ གཙཀགནཙི ཨཀ7 | བག13ཞP12 inf14 Jull arཞིནུ་° lg° l
13 ཞd.
44
གང་ ཡང་ བརྩ་ལས་༸ རང་གི་ སྐྱེ། བདག་གིས་ རང་ ནི་7 མི་ འདོར་ དེ། འཆེ་བས་10 པན་ཚན་l དབང་མེད་པར 1 ། བདག་ཅག་རྣམས་ནི་1༔ འདོར་བར་འགྱུར14 ༎

Page #146

102
BUDHACARITA
[ 46
ཞི༔ *ཀR a བེར་ཚིག་° a* ཀཆེf ནུ་ཀ་ | ཝུའུ10 འག1 གཞ1 ཨཁགཞུl༔ འགཁའིཀ་ཞིt4 u
༦ ཝཱན. 7ཤd.
སྲེད་པ་ ཆེན་པོའི་ སྔག་བསྔལ་གྱིས། ། མངལ་* གང་གིས་* ནི བདག་ བཟུང་ སྡེ། འབྲས་མེད་°འབད་པ་” མ་1༠ དེ་ཡིབ།།
བདག་° སུ་19 བདག་གི་• དེ་15 སུ་1༠ ཡིན་?།། महत्या तृष्णाया' दुःखैर् गर्मेण अस्मि यया धृतः । གu #ཏན8ཀཞག:0 x1 ཚུ13 གཞུ:19 ན14 ག15 ཁ14 |
17 སོགཞི and ཡོན་#.
46
ཇི་ལྟར་1 སྒང་”སྐྱེས་་ གནས་ ཤིང་ལ ། ཡང་དག་“འདས་ནས་་ རྣམ་པར་བྲལ ། དེ་ལྟར་” འབྱུང་པོ་1༠ འདུས་པ་ནི།
ངེས་པར་1 འབྲལ་བའི•1 མཐའ:1• ཡིན་15 ནོ༎ གཞigཨེ° འའཚའ? ཞིa* ཀrt ཝུག:༧ | Radi Rམའགl3ཁུI• ག* ཞion:ll t
15 ཞd.

Page #147

49 ]
BUDHACARITA
103
03
47
ཇི་ལྟར་' སྤྲིན་རྣམས་ འདུས་ནས་ ནི།། སླར་་ ཡང་༸ རྣམ་པར་“འབྱེད་པ་འོ།། དེ་ལྟར་* འདུ་°. དང་'° འབྲལ་བ་11 ནི།
བདག་1༧ དང་19 སྲོག་ཆགས་རྣམས ཀྱི་1• ལུགས1༧ །། समेत्य च यथा भूयो वि अपयान्ति' वलाहकाः । ཚུ་ ཞི གll al བr ཞེi bfi4 ཞ:15 1
5, 13 q.
48 , གང་ཕྱིར་ཕྱིར་ན་༸ འཇིག་རྟེན་° འདི༠ ། བསླས་ནས་ རྣམ་པར་ འབྲལ་བ་ སྡེ། དེ་ཕྱིར་་ རྨི་ལམ་ འདུས་གུར་ལ །
བདག་གི་བ་ཉིད་10 བཟོད་11 མ་ ཡིན1༧ ༎ གཞུt fཞིཏཾ བ ཆེ༔ ཨཱ༔ fའིn + ཙག | ཁca10 rl mll འཚབའ aཀའི* ཞེ° lt
ཤིང་རྣམས1 འདབ་མ་་དམར་པོ་ དང་ ། ལྷན་ཅིག་སྐྱེས་༣ དེ་ རྣམ་པར་འབྲལ* །

Page #148

104
BUDHACARITA
གཞན་ དང་” གཞན་གྱི་° འབྲལ་བར་ ནི།
་བ་10 མ་ཡིན་‘‘ སྨོས་ ཅི་1༔ དགོས” ༎
འགྱུར་བ་
सहजेन वियुज्यन्ते परागेण पादपाः । अन्येन" अन्यस्य विश्लेषः किं पुनर् 15
50
དེ་ཕྱིར་` དེ་ལྟར་༸ གྱར་ན་° ནི ། ཞི་བ་ གདང་བ་ མ་ བྱེད” སོང་ །
གལ་ཏེ་ ཡང་10 ནི་ བཙེ་བ་1
འབབས
སོང་ནས་1༔ ཀྱང་༔ ནི་ སླར་1° ཡང་1༠ ཤོག17 ༎
-12,13 -11 afབཱིsཀྭཊི10 |[
51
.3
ཁོ་བོ་ཅག་ལ་ ལྟོས་”བྱས་པའི །
8
तद्' एवं ' सति सन्तापं मा कार्षीः ' सौम्य गम्यतां । 6ཡཊི? ཀཊཱི॰ ནུ ཟླg!1 Tཊ€[13 3xq14 ཤུ7རྔ16
17 5 3Iaal
16 གྷ「í.
3
12
།
སེར་སྐྱའི་༔ གཞི་ན་༔ སྐྱེ་བོ་ལ° །
9
དེར་” སོང་ྋ བརྩེ་བ་ ཐོང་ཞིག དང་'` །
འདི་ཡི་1° ངེས་ལ་
ཉོན་ཅིག་‘* སྨྲོས་’ ༎
0
[ 51
-

Page #149

53 ]
BUDDHACARITA
io5
ब्रयाश च अस्मत्कृत अपेक्षं जनं कपिल वस्तुनि । ཀsqaft༠ འ?ཞ:* བ :༧ ལྷགail4 all ཀ13 ཞི་n:1༠ t
52 རྒ་ དང་ ° འཆི་བ་ི ཟད་ བྱས་ནས* ། ཡང་ན་“ མྱུར་དུ་” འོང་བའི་ གཏམ། རྩོམ་པ་1༠ ཉམས་1 ཤིང་1? དོན་19 མ་བྱས་བ།
ཡང་ན་ ཉམས་པར་ འགྱུར་བ་” སྨོས་ ༎ fཞིག་ཀ? ཀ#* ar* ཁ་* གབཀུཊྚིག• Pན° | aq4rafts 11 བ གེ་༠»1 Rཞི་ + ག་གཞིl? ཙཞི ar15 n 2q. 18 ཟླ or ཞག:.
53 དེ་ལྟར 1 འདི་ཡིཏྟཾ ཚིག་ ཐོས་ནས་། བསྔགས་ལྡན་° མགྱོགས་°འགྲོའ་” མཆོག་གིས་ཙི ནི ། ལྕེ་ཡིས་° ཞབས་ལ10 རབ་བལྡགས་ii དེ། མཆི་མ་༧ དྲོན་མོ་༧ ཕྱུང་བར་གྱུར བ ༎ ཞི་ཅn? འn:* ནུག* ཏདཞུ° ཀ0ཀོལ: | ཞིག* Rཞོ11 གཞii༠ ཅཞ1 14 ནུབའ14 བll
14

Page #150

106
BUDDHACARITA
54
དྲ་བ་ དང་༔ ནི་ བཀྲ་ཤིས་རྟགས∶ །
འཁོར་ལོ་‘དབུས་ལྡན་ ཕྱག་གིས་” ནི། གཞོན་ནུས་* དེ་ལ་༔ རེག་གྱུར་ཅིང་10 ན་ཚོད་‘‘བཞིན་དུ‘‘ རྣམ་པར་སྨྲས ༎
13
1
जालना ' स्वस्तिक' अङ्कन' चक्र' मध्येन पाणिना ' आममशं 10 कुमारस् तं बभाषे 13 च वयस्य "वत् ' " ? ཏྟཱ,
8
11
[56
55
བསྔགས་ལྡན་༴ མཆི་མ་༸ མ་ འདོན་ཅིག ། དམ་པའི་ རྟ་ཉིད་o འདི་” བསྟན་* ཏོ ། སྲོན་མཛོད་" ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་"" ངལ་བ་" འདིས” ། མྱུར་དུ་ ༸ འབྲས་བུ་༧བཅས་པར་1° འགུར
16
ང་
मुञ्च कन्थक' मा बाष्पं दर्शिता इयं सद्' अभ्वता " ।
4
g«ཊཿi q6:1: ཀཿདིū`13 1ཀྐq11 ཊི10 cཀྶཾ12 a[ལྐོqfཊི16 |/
།།
56
དེ་ནས་‘ རལ་གྲི་༔ རྣོན་པོ་ ནོར་བུའི་ ཡུ་བ་ཅན° ། གསེར་གྱི་“ པྲ་ ནི་ སྣ་ཚོགས་དང་ལྡན་* འདུད་པ་ཡི* །

Page #151

58 ]
BUDDHACARITA
102
ལག་ན་19 ཡང་དག”གནས་པl° བརྟན་པ་1༠ དེས་14 བསྣམས་ནས། ཁང་བུ་དག་ནས་1༦ སྦྲུལ་7བཞིན་18 ཞགས་ནས་19 རབ་ཏུ་**དྲངས91
ཀhtཁཚ' ཙའཛཞ1f11q1
ཞ:1 ཞ1༔ ཞེ13 inkds [ཞུའt 115 གཏྭཱ1༩ གgཀ%nf7ན་8 ia༣1 6 18 air@འི་ཞ17 ཞུ0བའཛ༧1
5i
ཨཏྤ་ལ་ཡེ། འདབ་མ་” སྔོན་པོ་ དེ་' དྲངས་ནས་། སྣ་ཚོགས་” དབུ་རྒྱན་་ དབུ་སྐྲར་ བཅས་པ་" རབ་བཅད་10ཅིང་ ། རྫིང་བུ་དག་ན་" ངང་པ་°བརྟེན་ད་1༧ རྣམ་བཀྲམ་པ། འོད་ཟེར་དང་ལྡན་པར་1༔ སྣང་དག་ལ1 དེ་17 གདོར :19 ར །།
निष्कास्य तं च उत्पल पत्र-नीलं in 10 inn'༦ ཤུ ་ ཤུ 8 | iཊིཀ་ཁr14dཤུགཞ15 གla10 བས18 བ #17 འབཞེil རྩཞ13 ཛཊ12 t
58 མཆོད་པ་མངོན་པར་འདོད་ཕྱིར་༧ རྣམ་མང་བཀར་སྟིའི་ཕྱིར། ལྷ་ན་གནས་པས་རབ་ཏུ་བཀྲམ་པ་༦ དེ་་ བཟང་* སྟེ །

Page #152

108
BUDDHACARITA
60
།།
ཇི་ལྟ་བ་བཞིན་” དེ་1༠ ནི་ ལྷ་ན་ ལྷ་ཚོགས་ རྣམས19 ། ལྷ་ཡི་1*ཁྱད་པར•15 འཕགས་པ་རྣམས་ཀྱིས་16 མཆོད་པར་བྱས
पूजा भिलाषेण च बाहु'मान्याद् ཞིན་དཎཱ༔ f? ng: གཞིg's | ཀa ཞ1༠ ཞིཞི11 རྗེའཁgr12,13 ཞིe14 ཞིའི15 འགཊཾ བ བཞུ:17 u
10 ཀཱ་ཀཾ:.
རྒྱན་གྱི་ བུ་སྤྱད་”ལྡན་པ་༸ རྣམ་པར་སྤངས་ནས་” ཀྱང་ ། དབུ་ལས་° དཔལ་ནི་ རྣམ་པར་རྒྱང་རིང་་ བྱས་ནས་ ནི། ནགས་སུ་” གསེར་གྱི་1° ངང་པའི•11 མཚན་མ་1? གོས་13 གཟིགས་ནས14 ། བརྟན་པ་15 དེས་ནི་18 གོས་དག་17 མངོན་པར ་18 འདོད་པར་གར10 །།
ཞུr* * ཁཀ°qt श्री विप्रवासं' शिरसस् च कृत्वा । g 14 གྲུf13 ན་ཁ10ཛཁiiཁན་14 བཀ9 ཤ16 q@15 sfས16བག་ཆ་ཞུl ཁ:17 u
60 དེ་ནས་1 ལྷ་ན་གནས་པས་ རི་དྭགས་“ རྔོན་པའི་༧ ལུས° ། དགོངས་པ་རྣམ་དག་ཙ འདི་ཡི་ དགོངས་པ་° རྣམ་རིག་ནས །

Page #153

62 ]
BUDDHACARITA
i09
ཁ་བསར་ ངུར་སྨྲིག་གོས་ཅན་" ཉེར་ལོགས་l མངོན་པར 13 འོངས1༧། དེ་ལ14 ཤཱ་ཀྱའི 19 རྒྱལ་པོ་་སྐྱེས་ཀྱིས་17 མངོན་པར 1* སྨྲས་ ༎
ཞ1 ཤུག*ཀ་n:བཅུ་ 5 Rའ་གr? भाव विदित्वा' अस्य' विशुद्धभावः" ནའ་ཀཀ་10 sfiཀཱཀf1 འil1 f14 ལྟག་ཁུl5airaali; sh18ཞ་q1 ]L
61 ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་དགེ་ཡེ༸ ངུར་སྨྲིག་” དྲང་སྲོང་རྒྱལ་མཚན་ དང་ ། འར་བ་བྱེད པའི ་་ གད་* འདི་ རིགས་པ། 10 མ་ཡིན་དེ། དེ་ཕྱིར་1? རྡོ་བ་* གལ་དེ་11 འདིར ་༦ ནི་ རགས་ མེད་11ན། ། བདག་ལ་ རབ་ད་བྱིན་ལ!! འདི་༧༧ དང་1 ཀ ཇི་ སྡོམས་མཛོད །།
ima q% བཀའn? སྐུའིang༦ ཞེ་ ཀll ཀུai0 ཛཁནཱོ ཛྷཏྟཾ? གཞུ* ཀ | འ༧ བཀཱ13 གཞི་4 ཨfའ ཀliབ་དc16 ཀཱ15 a18 བཀགཏུi ཞུན0 f༧ ]ཇུག73 v
21 བ.
རྔོན་པས་ སྨྲས་པ༔ འདོད་སྦྱིན་ འདོད་པ་སྙིང་པོ་ལས་ཅི། འདི་ཡིས་“ བློ་ནི་པབ་ནས་? རི་དྭགས་རྣམས་༦ གསོད་དོ །

Page #154

iio
BUDDHACARITA
[ 42 བརྒྱ་བྱིན་19 མཚངས་པl གལ་ཏེ་13 འདིས་' ནི་ དོན་༥ འགྱུར་ན། ཨེ་མ་18 རབ་ཏ་བཞེས་ལ17 དཀར་པོ་18 དེ19 གསོལ་མཛོད10 །།
व्याधो ऽब्रवीत् कामद' * कामसाराद् अनेन विश्वास्य' मृगान निहन्मि ।
ཞུ14 ཟུ 1x10nll ཀཞི1 གཞ13 རྣཁཞ14 ndl7 ཀ• gཤ18 འal° l
15 གta.
དེ་ནས་་ དེ་ ནི་ མཆོག་ཏ་༧ རབ་ཏ་༣ དགའ་བ་ཡིས་ཅི ། ནགས་སུ་བྱུང་བའི༄༅ ན་བཟའ་་ བླངས་* ཤིང་ གོས་ དོར་ལ10 ། རྔོན་པl ཉིད་19 ཀྱང་1༅ ལྷ་ཡི་1༔ ལུས་15 ཉིད་18 རྣམ་བཟང་7 སྟེ། དཀར་པོ་' དེ་༧ ཉིད་༧༠ བླངས་ནས་༔ ལྷ་ནི་༧ གཤེགས་པར་གྱུར ༄༅།།
ཚིག4,4 ༼སཾག ཞ:1 ཞུ ཨཱ8 ཀཛུ༔ བགེ7 s་ཤུ་ཀ ཙ༩འཁ#t༠ | འགཞུll gl fཞིན14 ཟcl5 als fཞི་ཞ་7 ཁཱl eq18 ཞཀ#1 d ༧ གག་ཞ༧ u
12,20
ཞ.

Page #155

65 ]
BUDDHACARITA
lii
64
དེ་ནས་ གཞོན་ན་༧ དང་ ནི་ རྟ་*མཆོག་ྋསྐྱོང་བ་° དེས་། དེ་ལྟར་༧ གཤེགས་པ° དེ་ལ་༣༠ ཡ་མཚན་ སྐྱེས་ གྱུར་I དེ། ནགས་ནས་བྱང་བའི་1༅ ན་བཟའ1 ཉིད14 དང་15 དེ་ལ་14 ནི། སླར་17 ཡང་18 རི་མོར་བྱ་བ་ མང་པོ་༧༠ སྐྱེན་པར་༧1 མཛད །།
འ:1 ས་ག བཁ7བ ག ཞ -6 ཚགཞུ1༠ བar* གria° Riའ་ཞིli | ག འ81 བཤཞi ཤཱ15 ཞ14 ཁུ .17 འ་ཞ14 ཙན#* • ནུ ༠གའ19 aགུ91u
5. 18 གའི་.
65
དེ་ནས། གདོང་ ནི་ མཆི་མ་་དང་བཅས་༔ འདུན་པé རྣམ་བཟློ གས་ནས ། བདག་ཉིད་་ ཆེན་པོ བརྟན་” དང་10 གྲགས་ པ་ འཆང་བ་ སྟེ། ། མཚམས་ཀྱི1 སྤྲིན་གྱིས་14 གཡོགས་པའི་15 སྐར་མའི་1 ༠
རྒྱལ་པོ་17 བཞིན14 ། ངུར་སྨྲིག་གྱོན་༧༠ ཞིང་ གདུང་གནས་1 གང་༧༧
ཡིན་༧ ༔ དེ་ན་༧ 4 གཤེགས༔ 5 །

Page #156

2
BUDDHACARITA
[ 67
ཛ5 ཞ:1 ཀ༔ * གwཞུ@༧ R69ཀུ7 དཀi9dཞི༣༧༠ ཞ°ག#igའ12 ༩:༢ |
ཀ༧༧ གཞུ 4th༧4 ཀ25 ཞུ་* ག7 བelz14@la15 ཁཱ1 +མ་ཞི18ལྷ:17 l
66
དེ་ནས་1 དེ་ལྟར་༧ ཇོ་བ* རྒྱལ་སྲིད་་ མི་༦ བཞེད་པར། དཀའ་ཐབ་”ནགས་སུ གཤེགས་པ་” མདོག་ཉམས་" སྣང་བ་ ན1 ། མགྱོགས་འགྲོ་14འཆང་1 དེ་1. ཕྱག་ རྒྱས་གྱེན་ད་བསྐྱོད་བྱས་ནས་། ཤིན་ཏ་'7 རྣམ་པར་I ངུ་ཞིང་19 ས་ལ་༧༠ འགེལ་གུར་31 དོ།།
ཞཞུiའar? dha ཀུ༔R:9qཚེi ག་?ad Ti9 Rཁit༠ བ་ཁ་ཁil | གི15 gfRཞཀཱ14 d: ཁ14 rai2:13 i17 18m19 གཞ31 བ fཞིal?0 u
67 རྣམ་པར་བལྟས་ནས་ སླར་༧ ཡང་“ སྒྲ་བཅས་པར་“ ངུ་ཤིང་འོ། བསྔགས་ལྡན་༸ རྟ་ལ་་ ལག་པ་དག་གིས་༸ ཉེར་“འཁྱད་ནས" ། དེ་ནས་'' ཁོ་རད་19 ཡང་དང་ཡང་དུ་1༩ བཟློས་བཞིན་དུ11 ། ལུས་ཀྱིས་'༠ སོང་བར་གར་1༩ ཀྱང 1: སེམས་ཀྱིས་1ཙམ་ཡིན་ 10 ནོ །།

Page #157

68 ]
LALITAVISTARA
113
ཞིམn ༧ བ ཙཞ5 ཤ་ཎཊ4 d? ཀན ཀཀུg10 Faཛ༩ | གིli R12 ཞི་ཁྲ14 ཤུdl4 གi14 ཚིག15 ༩ ri9 བའཁr18 l
68 ལ་ལར་1 རབ་ད་༧སེམས་ཤེང༧ ལ་ལར་“ རྣམ་°པར་ངུ༠ ། ལ་ལར་7 ས་ལ་* རབ་ཏ་འབྲད་ཅིང་ ལ་ལར་1༠ འགྱེལ11 ། དེ་ནས་1༔ འགྲོ་བཞིན་1༠ གས་པའ14 དབང་གིས་13 སྡུག་བསྔལ་ཞིང་འ༠ ། དབང་མེད་17 ལམ་ན་1* བྱ་བ་19 མང་པོ ༣༠ བྱས་པ་འོV1 །
ན་བཞr a Bོནwཙ བ ཆཤིའ་ क्वचित् प्रचस्खाल पपात' च क्वचित् ।
R13 nfiin15 : 14 བད«11 ༧ ༠ ཨཞ4:17 qfr18 fཞིག:19 L
8 གི་ སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་སྤྱོད་པ་” ཞེས་བྱ་བའི༔ སྙན་དངགས་་ ཆེན་པོ ལས་ བསྔགས་ལྡན་ཕྱིར་ལ་བཟློག་པའི་
ལེའུ་༧ སྟེ དྲག་པའོ །། इति श्रीबुद्ध'चरिते महाकाव्ये' * छन्दक निवर्तनं
नाम षष्ठः सर्ग:8-11
15

Page #158

། རྒྱ་ཆེར་རོལ་པ།། ཡིནRའR: u
ལེའུ་བདོན་པ? ། ll ཁམ: :I l
[93.22 དེ་ནས་ དྲང་སྲོང་° [ 94.1 ] ནག་པོ་” སྒོ་བའ:༣ དྲང་ད་” སོང་སྟེ་° འདི་སྐད་ཅེས་་ སྨྲས་༸སོ །། 1 ཀྱི་ མེ་ ཁྱོད་ སོང་ལ་ རྒྱལ་པོ་ ཟས་གཙང་མ་ལ་༧ ཆབ་སྒོ་ན་° དྲང་སྲོང་ཞིག་ མཆིས་ སོ་ ཞེས་10 གསོལ་ཅིགl།།2 དེ་ནས་' སྒོ་བ་ དེས་ དེ་ལྟར་༣ བགྱིའོ' ཞེས་་ དྲང་སྲོང་་ ནག་པོ འི་ ལྟར་ མཉན་དེ''། 3/ Tu = 16:13 TTT13 551 55 315 31516 དང་1༔ ཐལ་མོ་18 སྦྱར་ཏེ་°།་ རྒྱལ་པོ་30 ཟས་གཙང་མ་ལ་༧1 འདི་སྐད་ཅེས་༧ སྨྲས་སོ ༧༅།། ལྷ་༧ ༔ མཁྱེན་པར་ མཛད་ད་གསོལ་ ། ཆབ་སྒོ་ན་༡༠ དྲང་སྲོང་༧7 རྒན་པ་༡ ༠ འཁོགས་པ་ནས་19 གཟེར་བ་༢༠ ཞིག་

Page #159

A 5 ]
།
མཆིས་ཏེ1 ། འདི་སྐད་དུ་ མཐོང་བར་༠ འཚལ་ལོ་” ཞེས་
LALITAVISTARA
3 1
[ 102. 7 ] अथ खलु असितो एवम् आह ।1 गच्छ' त्वं' भोः' द्वारे ऋषिर् व्यवस्थित' इति ॥ 2
प्रतिश्रुत्य 10 येन 13 राजा" शुद्धोदन उपसंक्रम्य 16 च17 * कृत ' ' अञ्जलि' "पुटो आह 23 I यत् खलु देव 24 जानीया' 5 महलुको 30 द्वारि 20 स्थितः 31 | काम 37 इति ॥ 3 38
|
6
एवं 32 च वदति
3 ततः,
33
བདག་ ནི་ རྒྱལ་པོའི་* ཞལ་༠༠
མཆིད
39 " 3
: महर्षिर 2 दौवारिकम्' उप ' संक्रम्य पुरुष' राज्ञः 5 शुद्धोदनस्य' निवेदय । दौवारिको ऽसितस्य महर्षेः 7 12 तेन 14 * उपसंक्रामद्" | राजानं 2
20
शुद्धोदनम् 1 एवम् "
21
ऋषिर् 27 जीर्णो 2"
9
34
9
" राजानम्
9 एवं 35 lit. मुखं.
5
8
15
དེ་ནས་ རྒལ་པོ་ ཟས་གཙང་མས་ དྲང་སྲོང་ ནག་པོའ ི་ སྟན་o འདིང་དུ་” བཅུག་ སྟེ" ༎ མི་" དེ་ལ་" འདི་སྐད་ཅེས་”སྨྲས་སོ༎ དྲང་སྲོང་༢༠ དེ་‘༦ ནང་དུ་འོང་བར་ གྱིས་ཤིག ། 4 དེ་ནས་ མི་ དེ་ རྒྱལ་པོ་འི་༣ ཕོ་བྲང་ནས་ བྱུང་ནས ། དྲང་སྲོང་7ནག་པོ་ལ་ འདི་སྐད་ཅེས་” སྨྲས་༠ དེ ། ནང་དུ་
4 सः, एवम्, 6 करोमि, 6 इति,
115
བཞུད་ཅིག‘ ༎
अथ राजा शुद्धोदनो ऽसितस्य महर्षेर् ' आसनं * पुरुषम् एवम्" आह" । प्रविशतु 15 ऋषिर् 13 इति ॥ 4
*
"
वृद्धो 28
अहं 33 द्रष्टु- 36
5
* प्रज्ञाप्य 7,8 तं 10
अथ स पुरुषः

Page #160

16
LALITAVISTARA
[ A7
aཅུགཞ༴ faཀ༦ འཁd8 * མཛཀཾq? ཞ ཞ10 |གཞིགl1 ¥ཞི མི 5
• 14 ༡:.
དེ་ནས། དྲང་སྲོང་° ནག་པོ་༸ རྒྱལ་པོ་ ཟས་གཙང་མ་° ག་ལ་བ་ དེར་” སོང་སྟེ* ཕྱིན་པ་” དང་10 ། མདན་དI འདག་སྟེ 1° རྒྱལ་པོ་'s ཟས་གཙང་མ་ལ་1༔ འདི་སྐད་ཅེས་15 སྨྲས་སོ13 ༎ རྒྱལ་པོ་16 ཆེན་པོ་17 རྒྱལ་བར་ སྤྱོན་ཅིག་༧ ། རྒྱལ་བར་ སྤྱོན་ཅིག 19 ། སྐ་རེ ༠༠ རིང་ བར་1 སྲུངས་ཤིག ། ཆོས་བཞིན་ད་ རྒྱལ་པོ་” 4 མཛོད་ཅིག་ཙ །6
अथ' खलु असितो' * महर्षिर् येन राजा शुद्धोदनस् तेन' उपའདཀརྫུ| ཁ་དཀ9 10 ཞ:11 གl ཞ14 Aཝ་ཞའq14 བུའ15 ng16 | ཀ18 འ19 གl?cg10 | ཞིའ?1 q:༠ 0 བཀ3 2 |
2 3 * 4 དཀུ དྡྷཞི 6
དེ་ནས་1 རྒྱལ་པོ་ ཟས་གཙང་མས* ། དྲང་སྲོང་ ནག་བོ་ལ་5 ཡོན་ཆ་༩ དང་། རྐང་པ་ལ་༧གཏོར་བའི༔ ཆས་1༠ མཆོད་པ་11 བྱས་ཏེ། །ཤིན་ཏ་1༧ ལེགས་པར་14 ཡོངས་སུ་བཀར་ནས་15 སྟན་ལ་16 བདར་དོ 17 ། 7 དེ སྟན་ལ་༔ བདེ་བར་འདུག་པར ་་ ཤེས་ནས་ ཞེ་ས་དང་བཅས་ ། གས་པ་དང་བཅས་པར་ འདི་སྐད་ཅེས་ སྨྲས་

Page #161

A it ]
LALITAVISTRA
ily
སོ། དྲང་སྲོང་1° སྔོན་ll མཐོང་བར 1 མི་1 དྲན་ན14 ། འདིར :14 ཅི་ལ་16 བྱོན། ཅི་ཞིག་18 བཞེད་° །། ་
q1 ཊ m° གུལེ་ག་ stཁག5 # བཀ༔ ° གཞ8-10 dii བ་ དགོ1༅ བགq1 g14 བ qའིuཟླ15 གཞཞེཤ14 བའིགས་ཀའི གl7 u7 ཁ33བ་ཞི༔ བཞིl གཞrs བགq:7 Admé བཞག གོg° | al གག@14 ཛ ཞ ཁེ1༠ =1 | ཞུ ༧ ཚེal༠ g15 ཨཱཀt17 sཁ | iཏི1 གེ་གཞ19 08
2 ཀཱ་ཁའེ, il ཞི་ དེ་སྐད་ཅེས་སྨྲས་པ་ དང་ ། དྲང་སྲོང་ ནག་པོས་“ རྒྱལ་པོ་ ཟས་གཙང་མ་ལ་༧ འདི་སྐད་ཅེས་་ སྨྲས་སོ། རྒྱལ་པོ་ ཆེན་པོ་10 ཁྱོད་ཀྱིll སྲས་13 ཤིག་ བལྟམས་པར་གྱུར་པ་19 དེ་14 བལྟ་ཞིངls བདག་18 འདིར མཆིས་སོ 1༎ 9
བུའག' ན • staཆེ༔ * འཛ# ཞའ་ འའའ* + བུ༔ ཨའབེབའ* | ཤུཀྐཁུl? hi1 འ10° གཞ1ཐཾ ཀཱ14 ཨ14 * 4 དཞ15 617 ལྷགཞ18 {འི l s
རྒྱལ་པོས་ སྨྲས་པ་བོ། དྲང་སྲོང་ི ཆེན་པོ་༥ གཞོན་ན་ཏཾ ཉལ་ ཞིང་ མཆིས་ཀྱིས་༦ ལངས་ཀྱི་ བར་ད་ ཅུང་ཟད་ཅིག་ གཞེས་ ཤིག་° །། 10 དྲང་སྲོང་གིས་' སྨྲས་པ་ ། རྒྱལ་པོ་“ཆེན་པོ་ སྐྱེས་བུ་ཅི

Page #162

118
LALITAVISTARA
[ A 12 ཆེན་པོ་ དེ་ལྟ་བུ་ནི་ རིང་པོར་ མི་° ཉལ་10ཏི ། སྐྱེས་བུ་ll དམ་པ་ དེ་ལྟ་བུ་་དག་ ནི་ སད་པར་གནས་པའི1༔ ངང་ཚ ལ་ཅན་15 ནོ། ll
གl གཞུ | ཤབཞིནཾ གཞུ་*# ཏུསR ནུgའ9 ཁཀ10 གཞཞུ ཚarཀ་ཞིi ta ll 10 ཀིཊ ཨའ་བན° |
ག%n? གཞུregཆུབ་ལྷ5 བ བག་༠ ཚ140འཁ15 གཤུལྟ:1 བཟླl?gཚགll བnd ju
དགེ་སློང་དག་དེ་ནས་ བྱང་ཆབ་༸སེམས་དཔའ་ དྲང་སྲོང་ ནག་པོ་༧ དེ་ལ་7 སྙིང་བརྩེ་བ་ ཉེ་བར་བཟུང་སྟེ་°། སད་པའི་10བརྡi བྱས་སོ་།། དེ་ནས་ གྱོལ་པོ་' • ཟས་གཙང་མས་15 གཞོན་ན་14 དོན་17ཐམས་ཅད་1*བབ་པ་19 ལག་པ་༧༠ གཉིས་ཀྱིས་11 ལེགས་པར་ཐ༠ བླངས་ཏེ ༧ས། དྲང་སྲོང:45 ནག་པོའ་ི 16 དྲང་ ཁྱེར་ རོ ། 12 * fཞི ཞི faཚེt haང་གོ་༣ sཁཚཀཱཏྟཾ ག ཏཾ * གཤུག870
ཁག10hའི་བགl ཨོག་ཞ13 | གl ཞཅུ ml4 ཐུཝཱ་n:15 བils. གia7Rཝཱ1༠ ཙུགཞ1༠ ཙ་ཀfa1 གག་ཀfa༠ གg བཅུ་ནུ༔ 3 བཤུག་ཊིun34 ཊི་འགi ཝ * པོ་ 5ཡན7 འཁཀའི ཀ? 8 l 12
13 7ཎq.

Page #163

A 13 ]
དེ་ནས་ དྲང་སྲོང་༔ ནག་པོས་ བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའ་༔ བལྟས་ ན་ ། སྐྱེས་བུ་oཆེན་པོའ ི་” མཚན་ སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་"གཉིས་10 དང་ལྡན་ཞིང” ། དཔེ་བྱད་1༸ བཟང་པོ་1’ བརྒྱད་ཅུས་’* ལེགས་པར་3 རྣམ་པར་༢༠ སྤྲས་པའི་ ’ལུས་དང་ལྡན་པ་* ། བརྒྱ་བྱིན་༢° དང་ ། ཚངས་པ་"དང་ ། འཇིག་རྟེན་73སྐྱོང་བ་ལས་༸འཕགས་པའི་༸ ལུས་ཅན* ། ཉི་མ་*པརྒྱ་༦ ཕྲག་སྟོང་ལས་” ཀྱང་ ལྷག་པའི་* གཇི་བརྗིད་དང་ལྡན་པ’ ། ཡན་ལག་༣༠ ཐམས་ཅད་དུ་ མཛེས་པ་༠༧ མཐོང་ནས་** ། ཀྱེ་མ་‘ འཇེག་རྟེན་དུ་° ངོ་མཚར་གྱི་°༠ གངཟག་37 འདི་* བྱུང་ངོ°° །༎ ཀྱེ་མ་*° འཇིག་རྟེན་དུ་‘‘ ངོ་མཚར་*° ཆེན་པོ་ དང་ལྡན་པའི་* གང་ཟག་** འདི་*° བྱང་ངོ་" ཞེས་*" ཆེད་དུ་བརྗོད་པ་**
།
39
6
1
*gfཊ f€àrfqཊཀེ° * aཛུ་ཁཿ? ཊfaeབཱn vཕཨེq° 1finཊt° nཇུT’qoq°#Qགྀ:8 qwamཊu!1 axiffཊེ* 175ཊ12སྐུ15།ཀློ16 {ཀླ5171518 I!ཊྛནཱ?ཎུw?lq[ཎུ22 * ཨཱཊིཛིནཱ3ཀྑུབྷུཙཱ4 fêahr°Iཊ? 68རྫུསྐུ?7अतिरेक''तेजसं29 सर्व ' ' अङ्ग ' ' सुन्दरं " " दृष्ट्वा च उदानम्+ 8 उदानयति
0
30
32
-33
13 13 ༥.
5 1
3
ཆེད་དུ བརྗོད ནས་༠ སྟན་ལས་༠ ལངས་ཏེ ཐལ་མོ་ སྦྱར་ནས་ ། བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའྲི་°* རྐང་པ་གཉིས་* ཕྱག་འཚལ་ཏེ°
། བསྐོར་བ་
ܘ
݁
LALITAVISTARA
2
119

Page #164

[ A 14
བྱས་ནས་’ ། བུང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའ་ པང་ད་ བླངས་ཏེ༠༠ ། སེམས་ཤིང་o1 འདག་པར་"༸ གྱར་དོ* ༎ 13
3 6
39
42
14
41
46
ཊu*L a7°g ྃ།7 *ཊཿ* 78 དཱི5Īgôཊ:3 | ཡྻཀྶཾ+ པཱུརྦཱཊཊེ+ ཊཱལཾ॰ ཨཱཀྶཾ'5 ཊེཎི''ཐཱཝུནཱིa:4"། ཊི+7 seaU°1 ་8-T15.0 *6ཊ ཿཨྰཿལྐརུ། ཊ་བཊ་ཊ་ ་ བ(Q7:55 nfཁི(qeq56 བཎ་oile ཀ ེ་ཕཊཿeབཱ8 མ®ཊ5? qཊིཀྭཟླགླ60 fR 77n 61 7ཝ་སཀེ 5|ཊཿ° ° || I3
52
7
59
120
LALITAVISTARA
3
4
*€T* s
དེས་༸ བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའི་
དེ་ནས ལུས་ལ་༴ སྐྱེས་བུ ཆེན་པོའ ི་ མཚན་’ སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གཉིས་ ཡོད་པ་ མཐོངསྟེ° ། དེ་དག་ དང་ལྡན་པའི་’ སྐྱེས་བ་* གངཟག་༔ དེ་" རྣམ་པ་10 གཉིས་སུ་ག7 འགྱུར་གྱི“ ། གཞན་དུ་” མི་" འགྱུར་“རོ༎ གལ་ཏེ་࿐‘ ཁྱིམ་ན་°༣ གནས་ན་༧ ནི་ མཐའ་བཞི་དབང་བའྀ་༸‘ འཁོར་ལོ་སྒུར་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོར༠ འགྱུར་’’ ཏེ་ ཞེས་བྱ་པ་ནས་’*། སྔ་མ་བཞིན་དུ་" དབང་ཕྱུག་གི་ དབང་གིས་" རྒྱལ་སྲིད་བྱེད་དོ‘ ། ཞེས་བྱ་བའི་བར་དུ་འགྱུར་བ་དང་’° ། གལ་ཏེ་° ཁྱིམ་ནས་** ཁྱིམ་མེད་པར་ རབ་ཏ་བྱང་ན་༦ ནེ་ དེ་བཞིན་ གཤེགས་པར་’ འགྱུར་དེ*། ཡང་དག་པར་’° རྫོགས་པའི་ སངས་ རྒྱས་‘"སུ་ གྲགས་པ་*1 འདྲེན་པ་ གཞན་གྱི་དྲིང་མི་འཇོག་པར་
ན ས

Page #165

B2] LALITAVISTARA
___121 गुरस. मा | R5RIT गया | गई अगा ' 5 पुग-51 23. सुदर
5.... || 14
सो ऽद्राक्षीद बोधिसत्त्वस्य' द्वात्रिंशन् महापुरुष लक्षणानि' * 2:11 समन्वागतस्य पुरुष पुद्गलस्य द्वेष गती भवतो न१० अन्या । सचेद् अगारम अध्यावसति:3 राजा भवति 7 * चतुरङ्गश चक्रवर्ती25 । पूर्वव2 यावदेव2 * ऐश्वर्याधिपत्येन। सचेत्३3 पुनर् अगाराद् अनगारिकां5 प्रवजति:6 तथागतो37 भविष्यति विघुष्टशब्दः सम्यक् . सम्बुद्धः० नेता अनन्यनेयः । स+5 * त6 दृष्टा 7 * प्रारोदोद् अभूणि* प्रवर्तयन्। 9 गभीरं च निःश्वसति स्म ३... ॥ 14
11 अथ, 4 शरीरे, 9, सद्भावम् or अस्ति, 15 तस्य, 28 इति, 31 राज्यं करिष्यति, 44 दृष्टा, 16 तादृशं, 1 स्थितः.
-
༎ ལེའུ་1 བཅོ་ལྔ་པ་° ༎
॥पञ्चदशः परिवर्तः ॥ [ 175 ] ॥ सोश व परोसा འདི་༔ སྙམ་ད་སེམས་་དེ །1 བདག་གིས་ རྒྱལ་པོ་ཆེན་པོ་ ཟས་གཙང་ མ་ལ་° ཡང་* མ་བྱས་ཤིང་ ། ཕས་ གནང་བ་མེད་པར་” མངོན་པར་
16

Page #166

122
LALITAVISTARA
[ B 8
4
འབྱུང་བ་ལཾ འདི་༔ ནི བདག་ལ་10 མི་རིགས་11 ཏེ། བྱས་པ་གཟོ་བ་ མ་ཡིན་པར་1’ འགྱར་རོ་13 སྙམ་ནས* ། 2 དེ་ མཚན་མོ་༔ མི་ ཉལ་ཙམ་ན ། རང་གི་ གནས་ཀྱི་ ཁང་བཟང་ནས་༦ བྱུང་ སྟེ། རྒྱལ་པོ་* ཟས་གཙང་མའི་ྋ ཁང་བཟང་དུ་:༠ ཕྱིན་ནས་ འདུག་ གོ་ ༧ །། 3 བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའ࿐ འདུག་མ་ཐག་ཏུ་༔ ཁང་བཟང་༔ ཐམས་ཅད་ འོད་ཀྱིས་ གསལ་བར་o གྱར་ དོ7 ༎ 4 དེ་ནས་ རྒྱལ་པོ་࿐ སད་པ་ དང་ འོད་༔ དེ་° མཐོང་ སྟེ ། མཐོང་ནས་’ ཀྱང་“ མྱུར་བ་མྱུར་བར་ ཉང་རུམ་ལ་༢༠ སྨྲས་པ། 5 ཀྱེ་ ཉང་རུམ་o རྩི་ཉི་མ་༧ ཤར་ རམ ། གང་གིས་° ན་ འདི་7 འོད་ཀྱིས་ རྣམ་པ་མཛེས” ། 6 ཉང་རུམ་གྱིས་ དགང་° ཕྱེད་ ཀྱང་ མ་”བས་ སོ༎ ”
1
5
1
སྨྲས་པ། ལྷ་* ད་དང་“
ལྷ་ ̈གཞན་༔ ཡང་* ། 8
8
[198] wu° ཝནུ ཊ ཐཱf ཊཊཊ༥° ༥ཊཊ * ཨཤྭཞུ° |1ཀཱུ51 པཿ«R॰ wq॰ e7༊ * ཨཽཏྤཊཿ 1 བཱ བརྡུ བཱ! aufཊི@ཀྭ° * R€TI7:°ཝཱཊེ«q° tde!? ཐཱ fཁིt fཊིཀྵིq 12qTཨཱ0? *97Ileerui (?)3 स्वकाद् + उपस्थान' प्रासादाद्' अत्रतोर्य' राज्ञः शुद्धोदनस्य' प्रासाद 1 " तले प्रतिष्ठितो" ऽभूत् । 3 : प्रतिष्ठितमात्रस्य च पुनर् बोधिसत्त्वस्य' सर्वो ऽसौ प्रासाद' आभया स्फुटो ऽभूत् ' । 4 * तत्र' राजा' प्रतिबुद्धस् तां प्रभाम् ' अद्राक्षीद्' । दृष्ट्वा च पुनस् त्वरितं त्वरितं काञ्चुकीयम् " आमन्त्रया
4
10.

Page #167

B 10 ]
Are11 || 5 f6 at:! %b@62 Qi विराजते । 6 काञ्चुकीय' आह' । अद्यापि ཊ? ཊེ%Iཊ8 17ཨྰཿཁཿ བཱ° ཊིབྷཱུ! སྒྱུ 8
LALITAVISTARA
1 5 xf4rd4༊
s%@° तावद् देव
5
123
7
8
ཊ རྩ? ["
रजन्या' * उपार्धं
2 4 Tfq ༠r q, པོ མཱརཱུ༥, 13 wfus7fa,14fieefaer.
1
5
10
ཉི་མའི་ འོད་༔ ནི་ ཤིང་ དང་ རྩིག་པ* ཐལ་མི་ ཕྱིན ། ལུས་ལ་’ གདུང་བར་བགྱིད་ཅིང་ྋ ཚ་བར་” རབ་ཏུ་བགྱིད ། ནང་པར་ དུས་ན་Ã༔ ངང་པ་༠ དང་ རྨ་བྱ་* དང་ ། ནེ་ཙོ་’ ཁ་བྱུག་‘༦ ངུར་པ་དག་’ ཀྱང་ རང་‘*སྒྲ་༢° འབྱིན∶° ༎ 9
सूर्य प्रभाय भवते द्रुम' कुड्य 'छाया'
6
7
evoid॰ བ ཊཿ? nmhཊི" w° 1 ཇུག1° ཀྐཀཱུ1∶གཏཱ156ff66e!16 2%d[967:1? 4c9༥116I68uཀཱི12 €186ཊ[19 * qཊིཊ(20 | 9
10
འོད་` འདི༔ ལྷ་མི་” ཡིད་ད་མཆི་ཞིང་‘ བདེ་བ་ སྟེ ། རབ་ཏུ་སིམ་བགྱིད་ དགེ་བགྱིད་’ གདུང་བར་oབགྱིད་” མ་ལགས ། ཤིང་1‘ དང་`* རྩིག་པ་1° ཐལ་ཕྱུང་‘‘ སྒྲིབ་པ་'
18
ཡོང་10 མ་7 མཆིས །

Page #168

124
ཡོན་ཏན་ལྡན་པ་" གཅིག་ཅིག་" དེང་༔` ནི
3Printed text wilhi.
LALITAVISTARA
10 16 उत्पन्ना,
[ B 1
4
आमा' इयं तु नरदेव' सुखा मनोशा 2 xulza6 phê a1o do augs I sq[13 ཐཱ1? བྷུ711 a{maq14 a17 m€16 g]-[15 fཨེཀྶཾA UTuཊེ1° དྷྭཊུ2 31U?1 ཤཱཊཿ:༧5 | 10
9
20 ༥༢༥་༢་
4
འདིར་༸༸ བྱོན་ ངེས ཾ་ །། 10
3
རྒལ་པོ་ དེ་༔ ནི་ མི་དགའ་ ཕྱོགས་ བཅུར་ བལྟས་པ་° དང་ ། སེམས་ཅན་དག་པ་” པདའི་མིག་ཅན་ དེ་" མཐོང་ནས” །
མ
16
དེ་` ནི་ མལ་ནས་’ ལྡང་བར་༢༠ འདོད་ན་‘ མ་ ནུས་࿐༠ དེ ། རྣམ་དག་༢༸བློ་ཅན་‘* དམ་པ་° ཕ་ལ་༔0 གས་པ་༔1 སྐྱེད॰॰ ༎
11
सो' प्रेक्षते दश दिशो' नृपती' विषण्णो
दृष्टश् 10 च सो' कमललोचन' शुद्धसत्त्वः' । གེlu sཀཱུཊིལཊུ1° vmfi° ཇཱཧུfཊི4 -16 ortis ཁཿཎུ? 20(1 ཞvཊི q1°ཏྲཱ།ཌཱུ17®íZ:18 || II

Page #169

B 13 ]
LALITAVISTARA
125
དེ་” ནི་ རྒྱལ་པོའ་ི མདུན་དུ་༸ འདུག་ནས་* འདི་སྐད་* སྨྲས། ། ལྷ་ཅིག་་ བདག་ནི མངོན་པར་འབྱུང་བའི” དུས་1༠ བབ་ རིགས༧ ། བགེགས་19 ཀྱང་༔ མ་༦ མཛད་ མ་ དགྱེས་པ་11
ཡང་ མ་19 མཛད་ཅིག༠༠ ༎ རྒྱལ་པོ་1 གཉེན་བཅས་* ཡུལ་འཁོར་བཅས་3 དེ་ ་
བཟོད་པར་༧༔ གསོལ༔ ། 12
सो च स्थिहित्व पुरतो नृपति अवोचत्
ག15 ཞུ ག 1 ༩ =19 ཟླ18 ཞ ཡིན17 | བདཀsཁཚེu༠ ཁ8 འ? ཤུག
ཁ གཞ4,5 འིa1 : :༧ 3 il 12 བྱg#. 11 :: 14 འི. 20 རྒྱུན, རྒྱལ་པོ་ དེ་ ནི་ མཆི་མས་* མིག་ཅགང་° འདི་སྐད་༸ སྨྲས་ ། ཁྱོད་8ནི་ ཕྱིར་ལྡོག་པ་ཡི་ དགོས་པ་10ཙ ་ཞིག་ll ཡོད་ ། བདག་ལi དམ་པ་14 རྩི•1 སློང་' སྨྱོས་ཤིག་17 ཐམས་ཅད་18 སྦྱིནt" ། བདག་༧༠ དང་༧i ཕོ་བྲང་ འཁོར་ ནང་༧4 ཡུལ་ 5
འཁོར་༢ཝ འདི་༧7 ཕན་ཐོགས༔ །། 13

Page #170

126
LALITAVISTARA
[ B 15
བསྐུ*གས°ཀག་ འབཞིl ཀེ་
གiqll ཀ་ཞུ་0 བེg1 Rའིad” * | r15 ཀའཊི་ ཁ1 ni4 ཞ17 བཞུ་ ཞུL 18 བཞཅུའུ ༔ གfa0 q1 ཙྩ༩7 r? 1 ག 15 l 13
༦ བུd, 23 =ftar.
དེ་རེ་ བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔས་° སྙན་པའི་ ཚིག་ སྨྲས་པ་ ། ལྷ་ ཅིག་” དམ་པ་° བཞི་° འཚལ་* དེ་” ནི་ བདག་ལ་l སྩོལ། ། གལ་དེ་1 སྩལ་བར་ སྤྱོད་ན་14 མངའ་ 15 ཁྱོད་ལ་l མཆིས7། འོན་དང་། རྟག་ཏུ་ ཁྱིམ་ན་༧༠ གཟིགས་ཤིང་11
འབྱང་ མི་ འགུར 4 ། 14
तद् बोधिसत्त्व अवची मधुरप्रलापी
རྣམཝི ཞིའ$ བགེ7 ré གཞ» ཆི10 ]Ri | ཀRi Y ཁོ141517འRཞུla ཝ འཁོའི ཀཱ་
ཞུ18 ཟླགཞི1 བཞ19 ཀཱཚེ༧༠ ཀ3, Rn2 3 24 0 14
16 ཞ.
,
ལྷ་ཅིག་! བདག་ ནི་ རྒ་བས་ཚགས་པར་. མི་° འགུར་ཞིང་* ། རྟག་ཏ་” མདོག་” བཟང་” དར་ལ་བབ་པར་10 གནས་པ་11 དང་ །

Page #171

B 16 ]
LALITAVISTARA
137
ནད་1༄༅མ་ མཆིས་པ་1 ཐོབl ཅིང་ ནད་ཀྱིས་་15 མི་1 ཚ
བཏབ་17 དང་14 ། ཆ་དཔག་མ་མཆིས་པ19 དང་༧° རྒད་པར ་ 31 མི ་༧ །
འགྱུར་༧༠ འཚལ14 15 ༣ཏུསེ2 4 འl 9 ཀླུ ཀ ཤིག:5༠
af8ཀཞཞ10Raཆེ11 གཞི Ranཚ7 | ན་ཀlཐ ད 18གཞུl4 ཞི གེ18 བ16 % ཞིའ7 གཅེ1 5
aཆིཝུག ༧༠ འི གི ༧ བ བཞི¥ 3,24 Rའe: 1 v 15 རྒྱལ་པོས་ ཚིག་? ཐོས་༧ ཤིན་ཏ་་ སྡུག་བསྔལ་° ཉམ་ཐག་ སྟེབ ། གཞོན ན་” གནས་མིན་* སློང་བས་* བདག་ལ་1༠ མཐ་1 མེད་1༧ དོ ། བསྐལ་པར:19 གནས་པའི་1• དྲང་སྲོང་རྣམས་15
ཀྱང་'༄༅ ནམ་ད་” ཡང14 ། རྒ་19 ན་༢༠ འཆི་བའ•11 འཇིགས་༧ དང་༢
རྒུད་ལས་24 མ་26 ཐར་ དོ ༧༠། 16 TIST giao quá quý 46510
བཞུ* ཀnta* ཎ1 14 is :ll, riག?cཀུ?iའགm༧ བ ཐ གཞིཀཱ༧ 4 བ བདགladq14 གོ1 ཀ 5 ཞུ་7 ཤུག:༠ ༠ u16

Page #172

28
LALITAVISTARA
[ B 18
རྒ་ན་༔ འཆི་བའི་༸ འཇིགས་་ དང་“ རྒད་པར་ མི་ འགྱུར་བའོ། ལྷ་ཅིག་” གལ་དེ་'° མཆོག་1 བཞི་1༔ འདི་དག་l མི་14 སྩོལ་ན་ཅི། གཞན་1༦ ཡང་'7 མཚོག16 ཅིག་ གསོལ་གྱིས་༧༠ །
རྒྱལ་པོ་1 གསན་དུ་གསོལ། འདི་ནས་༧༠ ཤི་འཕོས་༣ 4 ཉིང་མཚམས་སྦྱོར་བར་༡༠་
མི་༣༠ འགྱུར་མཛོད༠ ༎ 17 ཀRi° ཤུའི ༧ བཞུal rli ཀེi༔ ཞུ་ཞེ15
fla?qཀུཙིཏྟཀའག༔ བ +Rབའག° བ| ཙུའ w9n ༅ གཞི31 ག16 ༩l f10
ག་བ 4 བའཀ24 བཞིབའ15 རྣ༧༠ འི ཀགིnad u 17
8 ཀཞིན, 13 ག་ན, 17 གའི, 20 གྲྭ་ཤག. མི་ཡི་1 དམ་པའི་ ཚིག་” ནི་ དེ་སྐད༔ ཐོས་པ་” དང་། 15” 5* Bao TST SETTIf5| པན་བྱེད་1༔ འགྲོ་བ་ ཐར་བྱེད་14 རྗེས་སུ་ཡི་རང་ངོ 1 ། ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་° བསམ་པ་རྣམས་ནིt7 ཡོངས་སུ་ རྫོགས་གུར་ཅིག1 །། 18
श्रुत्वा' * एव च इम वचनं नर'पुङ्गवस्य'
འགཞཞུ༔ བ ནR ཤུhi #10 | བ་#15 ཚིགt aa14 བགེ#14
གཟི་ཞུl? ཀཱ16 '༧ ཀའ་འིu 18

Page #173

129
B 20 ]
LALITAVISTARA དགེ་སློང་དག་ དེ་ནས་༧ བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའ་ སླར་ སོང་སྟེ༔ ། རང་གི་* ཁྱིམ་དུ་་ ཕྱིན་ནས་” མལ་ན་ འདུག་པ་” དང་1༠། དེ་11 སོང་བ་' འམ་14། འོངས་པར་1• སུས་1 ཀྱང་1༠ མ་17 ཚོར་1 རོ །། 19
བr ཞུ Rམོ་ : གཞིཀ4 བདེ གཞི༠ * ཆེ་སྐུ་ བཀཞི ཁིས་བཞ, ni al ༠ ཀཞུll གཝཱ1 5,14 #1 བr1 ག ཞི14 བr1 ཤོགོའི ག་ ༠ li9
དགེ་སློང་དག་ དེའི་ ནམ་* ནངས་པ་༔ དང་ ། རྒྱལ་པོ་ ཟས་ གཙང་མས་་ ཤཱཀྱའི་ཚོགས་ ཐམས་ཅད་་ བསོགས་དེ॰ ། དེའི-10 ལོ་རྒྱུས་རྣམས་དེI སྨོས་ནས། གཞོན་ན་1 ནི་ མངོན་པར་ འབྱང་14 ན་ ད་15 ཇི་ལྟར་ བྱ་” ཞེས་1སྨྲས་1༠ སོ ། ཤཱཀྱ་རྣམས་་༠༠ ཀྱིས་ སྨྲས་སོ T། ལྷ་༧ བསྲང་བར་* བགྱིའོ བ ༎ དེ་ ཅིའི་ སླད་ད་༧ ༔ ཞེས་ན'' ། ཤཱཀྱའི་ ཚོགས་ འདི་ ནི་ མང་བ། ། དེ་ ནི་ གཅིག་པུར་ གྱུར་པས• ། མཐས་ཅི མངོན་པར་བྱང་ བའི་༠ཝ ནས་པ་༧7 དེ་ལ་ མ་ མཆིས་སོ་བ ། 20
ཟླཞི ཞི འི་ཞགེt #* གྲུཝ་འཁ ག ཀ ཁཡིག༔ ཚ་ ཁ7 iའིབ་ཀ° #1༠ བཞུག1 བ་ཁགཞི གi• | ཞིའི་རའི་གཞི14
17

Page #174

130
LALITAVISTARA
[ B 21
ཆུས་ཁ1 ཞུ ཚ16 དཀཞ:17 | ཀr༧༠ alg: 1, wt 3 ༩༧ དཀཞ:༧ 4 | འ15 དགའ14 | བ མཛུཀཱ31 ལྟ་ཀ༧ 8 : 0 འ83 d a33 | འ14 ན་ 39 འཀ38 37 གཞས“བཞཞྭ35 afའིཅན
34 l[ 20 19 རྫཤུTif, 1s a, 19 ག་ཊ, 27 fR.
དེ་ན་ ཤཱཀྱ་༔ དེ་དག་ དང་་ ། རྒྱལ་པོ༔ ཟས་གཙང་མས་་ ཤཱཀྱ་གཞོན་ན་་ འཐབ་ཆོས་སྦྱངས་པ། འོས་སུ་གྱར་པ། འཕོང་ བསླབས་པ་°། ཚན་པོ་ཆེན་པོའི་ -il སྟོབས་དང་ལྡན་པ་13 ལྔ་1 བརྒྱ་14 བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའ་1༔ བསྲང་བའི་ ཕྱིར་1༠ གྲོང་ཁྱེར་གྱི་17 ཤར་1* སྒོར:19 བཀོད་དེ༔༠ ༎ བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའ:1 བསྲང་བའི་ ཕྱིར། ཤཱཀྱ་གཞོན་ན༔ རེ་རེ་ལ་ ཡང་ 14 འཁོར་༧ ཤིང་རྟ་༧༠ ལྔ་༧7 བརྒྱ་1* ལྔ་ བརྒྱ་བ༠ དང་ ། ཤིང་རྟ་°1 རེ་རེ་ལ་ ཡང་ འཁོར་༧༣ དཔུང་བུ་ཆང་༔ ལྔ་ བརྒྱ་” ལྔ་ བརྒྱ་ བཀོད་༥༠ དོ །། བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་ དཔའ་བབསྲང་བའི་ཕྱིར 4 ། དེ་བཞིན་ད་4 གྲོང་ ཁྱེར་གྱི་་་ ལྷོ་༧དང་ ། ནབ་**དང་ ། བྱང་གེ་47 སྒོར་༥ ཡང་ །།° 21
ཝཱ་ ༣ ཞ sat* གྲུཝའཁེག8 བ༔ བཟླ1 Iགཙུས་འོསྣའh14 *གའ་ཞའིs ནཟཀཅེ་ཀR ཝཱའགགfaah10 འཛུམ(?)11བཞལིarh12 #18

Page #175

c 1]
LALITAVISTARA
131
cligP19 sonh20agའ ཀུ15 r'it |h23 བ31 གཞཅུག:22 བཟླ37བཞ2
63 6གཞ: 5 43 q3 ༔ 31 qqqབཏྟཱ ཞ37qཞ3 4 elཀ40 གཞུ ཆེ་ཤུ་ཁཀ41 raགf12, 8 ཐེགི4 5 གཞི46 ཚེས7 ནc44a18 u° 21 2.j-:30. T a, 38-39 ad.
རྒྱལ་པོ་ཟས་གཙང་མ་ ཡང་ ཤཱཀྱ་གཞོན་ན་༔ ལྔ་° བརྒྱས་ བསྐོར་ཅིང་་། མདན་གྱིས་ བལྟས་ཏེ ། རྡ1༠ དང་11 གླང་པོ་ ཆེ་དག་ལ་13 ཞོན་ནས་1༔ རང་གི་14 ཁྱིམ་1སྒོ་ན་18 མེལ་ཚེ་ བྱེད་དོ 17། 22
tri né :༧ བསེ: གIཀར་༣གd:* ཤsiབe:7 འཁ8: འ:" ཞུནེ11 g1 དྷརྣR18 ལེའུ10 བl1 @g12 བ བཀགེ13 བགཞི གl? | 22
། ལེའུ་| ཉི་ཤུ་རྩ་དྲག་པ? །།
u བདེ་ཚལྟ:༧ qRབd:I u 3:32. 2 ] དགེ་སློང་དག་1. མཐའ་ གཉིས་པོ་ འདི་དག་ནི་ རབ་ཏུ་བྱང་བའི་* འཇག་པར་བྱ་བ་༦ མ་ཡིན་པ་” སྟེ ། གང་* འདོད་པ་

Page #176

132
LALITAVISTARA
[C2
རྣམས་ལ་॰ བསོད་སྙོམས་སུ་༠ སྦྱོར་བ“། དམན་པ་1༸ གྲོང་པའྀ་ཆ་13 སོ་སོ་འི་སྐྱེ་བོ་པ༴ ། འཕགས་པ་ལ་ མི་10 མཁོ་བ” ། གནོད་པ་ དང་ ལྡན་པ1* ། ཕྱི་མ་ལ་10 ཚངས་པར་སྤྱོད་པར་70 མི་*1 འགྱུར་བ7 ། ཡིད་བྱང་བར་* མི་འགྱུར་བ* ། འདོད་ཆགས་ དང་བྲལ་བར་ མི་འགུར་བ** ། འགོག་པར་’ མེ་འགྱུར་བ* མངོན་ པར་ཤེས་པར་༔" མི་ འགྱུར་བ ། རྫོགས་པའི་བྱང་ཆུབ་ཏུ་‘ མི་ འགྱུར་བ’ ། མྱ་ངན་ལས་འདའ་བར་ མི་* འགྱར་བ་* དང་ ། 1
30
33
5
2
[4l6. 16] g m4 [སིmཐཱ:11afccཀྭ ྃ ཨཱཤཿ ཨཱཀྐ ཧཡིཾཝུ॰ ནwGeiy[1"ཀྭ7m11 €m12 m7:13 Tiraཊིn11 avf15 saufqei®ཊ18 ཊཿ21,22 cQi1 a& བཱཀྭï720 ཊཿ विरागाय 25 ą28 fཊི7Iq7 ཤཿ30 ara ཡཱ2 53 Refu3 ཊཿudཊི35 | 1
8
|ག་ན a1617117
fཀྐཊཱི23 726
€ཀེཡྻཱཀློ 31
་
གང་ ཡང་༧ དབུ་མའིི་ལམ་* མ་ ཡིན་པ ། ལུས་oངལ་བར་” སྦྱོར་བ° ། སྡག་བསྔལ་བ° ། གནོད་པ་དང་ལྡན་པ" ། ཚེ་ འདི་ལ་1 ཡང་1༔ སྡག་བསྔལ་བ∶ ། ཕྱི་མ་ལ༔ འང་ སྡག་བསྔལ་རྣམ་པར་ སྨིན་པ་‘6 སྟེ །` དགེ་སློང་དག་ཟྭ7 མཐའ་1‘ གཉིས་པོ་° འདི་དག་༠
15

Page #177

c 3 ]
LALITAVISTARA
133
སྤངས ནས!། དབུ་མའི་ ལམ་༧ ཉིད་ཀྱིས་༧4 དེ་བཞིན་ གཤེགས་པ ་ ༧ ཆོས་ སྟོན་ དེ??། འདི་ལྟ་སྟེ ། ཡང་དག་པའི་༧༠ ལྟ་བ་30 དང་ ། ཡང་དག་པའི་31 རྟོག་པ་**དང་ ། ཡང་དག་པའི་ ངག་༢༥ དང། ཡང་དག་པའི་36 ལས་ཀྱི་མཐའ་36 དང་ ། ཡང་དག་ པའི་ འཚོ་བ་ དང་ ། ཡང་དག་པའི༠ རྩོལ་བ་40 དང་ ། ཡང་དག་པའི་41 དྲན་པ་4 དང་ ། ཡང་དག་པའི་43 ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན་ བ དོ། 2
གrl བ? gའ ཀཀས9,ཏགfའགg4 གIམདཀ°གསྶོབཞུག་ག8 ལྟུ:གེ» Sའཚོའཁཛིགེi0 ༧ ཚཅུ:འག13 1 འགi14 q15 ཙུ་ཞུ་བ་n:1༩ | d2 བ fི་ལྷགེ17 it?dt18 1:|: ཀ21 བཀཆཀr? ༧ བn? ༥ བཀr23 བགེ3 ? ཁ9° Rཀia27 | ཀཞ28 ཤུཀག" 2:3) བཀདྲ31 འགའ:32 ཀག33 ག3 4 ཞཀན35 གཞ:36 བཀག37 3 :38 བཀག30 ཀ་གཞ:40 ཀནཱ11 ཞུཊི:4 ༅ འཀཱནཱ43 འགཊ4 4 {འི ll 2
དགེ་སློང་དག1 བཞི་པོ་ འདི་དག་” ནི་ འཕགས་པའི་ བདེན་ པ་དག་° སྡེ། བཏི ་་ གང་ ཞེ་ན། སྔག་བསྔལ་* དང་ ། སྡུག་བསྔལ་” ཀན་འབྱུང་བ་1༠ དང་ ། སྡུག་བསྔལ་འགོག་པ་་ དང་ ། སྔག་བསྔལ་13 འགོག་པར་14 འགྲོ་བའི་15 ལམ་1༧ མོ། 3

Page #178

134
LALITAVISTARA
[ c 5
qqtR? རྣགཞ3 ཞnl ཀཞུགཞིs | འགགཞི་ བqR* |ཤུ:8 ཁཱ°བཞུཞུགེ་° :ཁཞི་ཆེil #lhal+rifཞིགmts བཞི་ཞ'' lu 3
fx: 8-TTgI” 53 331 332 33T 84དང་ ། རྒ་བ་“དང་ ། ན་བ་་དང་ ། འཆི་བ་” དང་ ། མི་སྡུག་པ་༧ 55 454 5511 1T555 14:53: NTTS 1:13 དང་ ། གང14 ཡང་15 འདོད་པ་1༩ བཙལ་17 དེ་ མ་1 རྙེད་པ་10 དེ་ ༡༠ ཡང་| སྡག་བསྔལ་ ལོ།། མདོར་ན་༧༠ ཉེ་བར་ལེན་པའ 3 4 པང་པོ་35 ལྔ་པོ་དག་ ནི་ སྔག་བསྔལ་༧ དེ། འདི་ 1 8 ནི་ སྔག་ བསྔལ་ ཞེས་བྱའོལོ ཐ༠ ༡ 4
ཀl དཀཞུ :#* | གའི་ཆི༔ :ds iཆི༔ ཤུ:ཀriོའི 《ཚིག་ པའ གའི གཞིqའི་གེi༠ sའི ཀliཞིས་དེshi༧ :ཞུ13| ཀ༩14 dql5
hld འགོ་7 ཀl ཞི་༧ ཁཱ0 ཀq21 3:22 |འགའ?3 ཝཱ26 བ་འmar35 :ཁའ7 | འན8 བུཀཞི༠༠ :ཚ39 It 4
དེ་ལ་། སྡུག་བསྔལ་ཀན་འབྱང་བ་་ གང་ ཞེ་ན | གང་ འདི་༦ ཡང་འབྱང་བའི” སྲེད་པ་* དང་ ། དགའ་བའི་ ་” འདོད་ཆགས་10 དང་ལྡན་པ་li དང་ ། དེ་དང་1དེར་13 མངོན་པར་དགའ་བ་14 སྟེ། འདི་14 ནི་ སྡུག་བསྔལ་" “ཀུན་འབྱུང་བ་'' ཞེས་བྱའོ 1༧།།5

Page #179

c7 ]
LALITAVISTARA
135
འn1 དག་4 ཤུ:ཞུ?ཁཀུ:* | ཀ5 ག༠ ཤུག8 བda7 ཞ9གl”འཛུགll འr13 ཁཱ13 andt14 འག15 6ཀཞི19 《:ཞ17ཞུ《ཀ:18 | 5
དེ་ལ་ སྡུག་བསྔལ་འགོག་པ་ གང་“ཞེ་ན ། གང་° ཡང་ འབྱང་བ་" དེའི ་་ སྲེད་པ་དང་། དགའ་བའི་ འདོད་ཆགས་10 དང་ལྡན་པ་i དང་ ། དེ་ དང་ དེར་ མངོན་པར་དགའ་བ་དང་14། སྐྱེད་པ་19དང་ སྒྲུབ་པ་1༩ འདི་ཉིད་ལ་17 འདོད་ཆགས་18 མ་ལུས་པ་10 དང་ བྲལ་པ་༧༠ འགོག་པ་11 འདི་ནི་༧ སྔག་བསྔལ་༧ འགོག་ པའིPage #180

136
LALITAVISTARA
[C7 गार. २ दि.29 4.43 २८मामावि. सेवामा सा
" ॥ मोहन : ईमग सामा३३° परेवामा 1 2 || 7
तत्र कतमा दुःख निरोध गामिनी प्रतिपत् । एष एव आर्य' अgl० अङ्ग मार्गः । तद्यथा सम्यग् 'तृष्टि15 यावत् सम्यक समाधिर" इति । इदम् उच्यते दुःख निरोधगामिनी22 प्रतिपद23 आर्य 'सत्यम् 25 इति । इमानि भिक्षवश27 चत्वारि28 आयं सत्यानि31 ।। 7
32 इति.

Page #181

། བྱང་ཆབ་་སེམས་དཔའི༔ རྟོགས་བརྗོད་དཔག་བསམ་གྱི་༔ འཁྲི་ཤིང་༎
ཡི་གེ་ཞ༸ཞཞུའོག“འ° །ཀླ་་གཞོན་ནུ་འ* རྟོགས་བརྗོད །།
llཀཅུགr༧ཁའན u །། ཡལ་འདབ་ དྲུག་ཅུ་པའོ།།
] : ཧུའ:l il
འདི་ ནི་ མི་རྣམས་༧ ལུས་དག་ ཉོན་མོངས་ ཕང་པས་ཅི
རབ་ཧ་གདངས ། འཇིག་རྟེན་” པ་རོལ་ཏ་* ཡང་” མི་ཟད་1° དམྱལ་བའིll
མེ་ ཡིས་1 བསྲེགས་1 ། སྐྱབས་1. འགྲའི •15 བསོད་ནམས་1༠ དང་ ནི་ བསླབ་པའི་."
གནས་དག་1* ཐོབ་རྣམས་ཀྱི19 ། ལུས་ལ་ ནམ་ཡང་ སྡུག་བསྔལ་དག་གིས་** སྲེག་པའི་
མཐ་ཡོད་ཟ• མིནཙཙ༎

Page #182

138
BODHISATTVAVADĀNAKALPALATA
[3
ཙཱཚུl * གཞི* ག ག* da ༣ཚུ་ཞིl • གཙིན་ཞེ་ བ ll * ནཎ10ཛི:19 | དཔ14འ15ག16ལ་ཁ19tml?ཞུf18 གཞཞི34 ན ཤུ 10 ཁ ,14:3 ངའ་ཞ11 il
རྒྱ་མཚོའི་ མཐར་ ནི་ ནོར་ྋཞེས་པའི4 ། ཀླུ་* ནི་ གཉེན་༦ མང་ལྡན་པ་་ བྱང། TEEN"T° 331° 55355"I
སྣང་བས་1? སྔོན་མེད་18 ཉིན་མོར ་་• བྱས15། ཞ r• ཞུlའི གེ ཞུ༔ ཞོུགལཞ:4 | དགག°་ཞ10811 དེ་ན12a18dian:14 |l
དེ་ཡི་ཁང་པར་༧ ཉིན་༸ མཚན་ད ༔། བྱེ་* ཚན་དག་” ནི་ བབས་གྱུར་” དེ། གང་གིས་༧ ལག་འགྲོ་ོརྣམས་ཀྱི• ལུས་༠ །
TEST 5T51 52 513 5'| གཞ? ཨ8hf* ml ;ཁཞི? n%ཞུག° | ག* g10 f9 འal?mllsཀml ཞ་4 tu

Page #183

BODHISATTVAVADĀNAKALPALATA
139
ནོར་བཟང་ ཞེས་བྱ་༧ གཅེས་པའི་ བུ། རང་བཞིན་༠ ཉིད་ཀྱིས་7 རབ་ཅགཞོན་པ།
བྱེ་མས་1༠ ཡོངས་སུ་1 གཟིར་གྱུར་པས་1༧ །
ནམ་ཞིག་19 དེ་ལ་14 རབ་ད་དྲིས15 །། ངན་ཊིའ1 ཞུ?ཞེt ཁ མ: བས་ཏ15 #14 ག:4| ཏུཙྪཱཀe:༧ བན་ཤ་ཙི ཞུདrloའིlinཙིa:12 ll
ལྷ་ཅིག་ བྱེ་མ་? ཚ་བ་° འདིས་། བདག་ཅག་* ཅི་སླད་༦ གདུང་བར་བྱེད་ ། སྔགས་དང་* རྩ་བའི་ སྦྱོར་བ་དག་°།
ཅི་ཡིས1 ཉེ་བར་13 ཞི་བར་འགྱུར 1 ། གཅng ཅསཞ° * al གཞི7 ཟཞ°་ཞུན° | འ8འགགསr1༠ ll ཀན གlཀཞིt U
འགའ་ཞིག་བདག་ལས་* ལྷག་པ་༦ དང་ ། གཞན་་ ནི་ བདག་ལས་* དམན་པ་ཡི༔ །

Page #184

140
BODHISATTVĀVADĀNAKALPALATĀ [8
ཀླུ་” ནི་ རྒྱ་མནོ་* འདི་ན་༧ གནས10 །
ཡུl ཉིད་1༔ སྡུག་བསྔལ་གྱིས1 གཟིར་14 རྩི15 ། གཤཞུཉྩཀག: ཆེའི《1 སོགཞཀn: 4 | ག: བཞི་ བཞུཞེ༔ ཆིག” ལྟུ:ཁ13གf14 བའགl1
q14 Rཏན15 U
ཞེས་པ་ བུ་ཡིས་དྲིས་༸ དེ་ལ༴ ། བློ་གྲོས་ ཆེན་པོ ༧ དེས་་ སྨྲས་ བུ? ། ཇི་ལྟར་1༠ གདེངས་ཅན་n གཞན་གྱི་1 ཆོས19 །
ཤེས་པ་14 དེ་ལྟར་15 ཨུ་ཅག་1༠ མིན་? ། at p: ཤ7 ནུབེག་ འན༔ ག* བཀུཀR:S | ཀul༠ གཞི12 གཞill ཤུn? ཚi3ག14 ཀl7 འགl5 ཀནཱld
S་ ཆོས་ཀྱི1 ཉེར་བསྟན་གྱིས༔ དག་པ་༧ ། ཞི་ཞིང་༔ བདེན་པར་* སྨྲ་རྣམས་ལ༔ ། ངེས་པར་” ཉེ་བར་”གདང་” གུར་པ། ལུས་ལ:11 མ་ཡིན་19 ཡིང་ལའང་| མིན14 །

Page #185

10 ]
BODHISATTVÄVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
धर्म' उपदेश' शुद्धानां शान्तानां ' सत्य ' वादिनाम् । sq'mm° qqfཊི!0 rq7 a° Tགི!! ཊཱ11 qIཊ€:13 ||
10
སངས་རྒྱས་ ཆོས་ དང་ རོགས་ ཞེས་པ༔ ། སྐབས་འོས་ བསོད་ནམས་ དཀོན་ཅོག་”ནི །
9
5
2
གསུམ་ལ་* སྐྱབས་” སོང་" མཁས་པ་" གང་∶ ། དེ་ལ་3 ཡོངས་གདང་༔‘ རེག་‘ མིི་" བྱེད7།
16
14
ཊ6 ཀ73 +9iཊི! 15'17 GHq:'༧ ཤུཀཱ'ཝ7q8 :"L ཀཱི འུ@7?8 ཀe7 [ཁq° Ii? TT:I" IL
.
10
གང་གིས་ ཉོན་མོངས་” རབ་ཞི་བའི ། བསླབ་པའི་༔ གནས་རྣམས་ ཐོབ་ གྱར་
5
བདད་རྩིས་” བྲན་པ་* དེ་དག་ལ° །
སྡིག་o གདང་‘ འཇིགས་པ་༸ གང་ལ་3 ཡོད །
fRIRI'CmR» umགི རིག210Hཊཿནཱི ཀྭ:! | ཊེ་བཱ' ཡུaftཊi“ བཱ'ཊq'ཀཱརྟུཤཿ
13
རིང་ །
11
141

Page #186

142
BODHISATTVĀVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
ཤཱ་ཀྱ་ཐབ་པ་ འཇིག་རྟེན་གྱི། ཉོན་མོངས་* ཐམས་ཅད་ “རབ་ཞིའི༠ གཉེན? ། རྒྱལ་བ་༸ རྒྱལ་བྱེད་° ཚལ་10གནས་པ་l1 །
མཉན་ཡོད་ན་1 ནི་ བཅོམ་ལྡན་19 ཡོད་ ། སཞགཞ12 གཞ14 གཞal * འགཞ1927:11 | ཆེའི ཀིའུR: ཚ་ནུག*rsཀ6གཞ: u
སྙིང་རྗེ' ཟླ་བའི་ འོད་ བསྐྱེད་༧ དེ་ ། སེམས་དཔའ་ལྟར་° དཀར་༧ མན་ངག་གིས་ ། འོད་ཟེར་ ཚོགས་ཀྱིས་° འགྲོ་༡༠ གསུམ་དi །
བདད་རྩིའི་19 ཆར་པ་1༔ མངོན་པར་1. འབེབས། བུའི”ལ་གྲུRའ:° འཚོg#t༔ ཞ10ཏེ11 | དང་གདཞུག*གའི༄༅ ཞd1 • sཀེ14ཞི15 u
12.1 གལྟ་བsk,
གང་ཞིག་! རྣམ་པར་མ་ཐལ་བས ། བསླབ་པའི་ གནས་སཾ ཐོབ་* མི་* སྲུང་བ་ །

Page #187

15 ]
BODHISATTVAVADANAKALPALATA
143
དེ་དག་* དམྱལ་བ་° མི་ཟད་པས་“།
གདང་བ་ དྲག་པོས་1 བརླག་པར་1༔ འགྱུར་བ། ཤུer ° ཐུའ7 བཀ5 R་འr°ཞུའི* ཀིt | གིalའ ཁi #* ཆེg? n:10 41:l l
14 qR.
14 ཞེས་པ་| པ་༧ དང་༸ མ་ཡི་༔ ཡང་། རིག་དག་ཐོས་ནས་? ལག་འགྲ* ནི། མེ་ཏོག་ མཆོག་དག་" ཡོངས་བཟུང་ནས །
དག་པའི་l རྒྱལ་བྱེད་1 ཚལ་ད་14 སོཇ16 ། གྲྭའི སུཊག་ གི་ བག་ འག་ག༔ བདs :8 | ཞཀl Rཏགl9gཁག་ག* ལན་13 ཞ3#14 ཀhis u
16 ཆོག་ཤེས་ སྐོར་ ནི་ མངོན་ཕྱོགས་” དེས ། བདེ་བར ་༦ གཤེགས་པའི་ གནས་? ཕྱིན་ དེ༄༅། དེར ་ རེ་” ཆོས་དག་1༠ ཉན་པ་ལ། །
ཚོགས་པའི་1༧ འཁོར་ དག་ མཐོང་བར་འགྱུར 1 ། འུཀའ'araཀཨ་བq* གlའག!!བའ་ཞ°| འའwi11འཁཱ་| འa' ཞ! ཤའགེལ་ཞུཞབུལ་ཞུག? t

Page #188

144
BODHISATTVAVADĀNAKALPALATA
[18
16
བཞིན་རས་ མཇེས་ ཤིང་ སྤྱན་བི ཡངས་པ་བ། ཟླ་བ་ཉ་ དང་༦ པད་ཚལ་དག ། འགྲོགས་པ་” བཞེན་ད་1༠ བདེu སྟེར་བའི1 །
རྒྱལ་བ་1༧ དེར་14 ནི་ མཐོང་བར་གུར དེ༎ ཞ14 ཡག་ཤུལ་ཝཱ15 #1 དཀབ་ཞ1 ཚུi*ཉེབཀ| རྣ*ཁཞུག?འ8 རྣi° ཡིགi°ཞུཞུliqགl.il
17 ཉེ་བར་སྟོན་ བྱེད་ མཆ་ཡིས་ནི། ། ཆགས་ལྡན་ རྣམས་ཀྱི་༦ དམར་བ་ཉིད ། རབ་རྒྱས་ དམན་པ་ཉིད་བྱས་° ཤིང་ །
གསལ་བར་* ཟིལ་གྱིས་གནོན་པ་1༠ བཞིན། ། उपदेश कृता व्यक्तम् अधरेण अधरीकृताम् । ཚ་ག་° ཞl1
3 7 གགི* * གཞn
1s རྒྱན་དང་བྲལ་བའི་1 མཛེས་སྡུག་གིས ། རྣ་བའི་ ཞགས་པ་ རབ་བརྒྱན་ ཅིང་ །

Page #189

20 ]
BODHISATTVAVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
145
སྒྲིབ་པ་ དང་ བྲལ་* སྟོང་པ་ཉིད། ། རབ་ཏ་རྒྱས་པ་* སྟོན་པ་ བཞིན་° ༎
निराभरण'लावण्य कर्ण पाश विभूषितम् । दर्शयन्तम्' इव० उत्सितां निरावरण"शून्यताम्' ।।
19 དཔུང་པ་ཆོས་ཀྱི༔ གཉིས་འཐང་ ལག་ ། སྦྱིན་པས་༦ མཛེས་པ་༸ རྣམ་པར་ འཛིན་ ། ནས་མཐའི་ཝཾ ཁང་པ་དག་གི ནི །
ཀ་བ་བ༠ གསེར་གྱི་རང་བཞིན་ བཞིན་ ༎ ཚ?ཞིག་༣ གrg ཊི་ལྷ་ག7 ཞཏྣཀfd4 | ཁ8; #i sdrii ཁཱ14 l
20 ཆོས་གོས་་ རྒྱན་དང་ལྡན་པ་ཡིས། ཞབས་ཀྱི་༸ གྲིབ་མ་༔ སྤྲོ་བྱེད་པ་ ། ས་ག་ རྟོགས་པ་ ཐོབ་པ་ལ། པདའ་ གྲོགས་རྣམས་ཀྱིས་ བསྒྲུབས་l བཞིན1༅༎

Page #190

146
BODHISATIVĀVADĀNAKALPALATA
* ཞིནdt ངགཙམni4 :1 བང་གིr e:༧ | ཀPག R་ཛིའ་ཞll ཁ12 =9འིRཞི:1༠ ,
21 ལུས་ཀྱི་ མཛེས་པ་༧ རྒྱས་པ་ ནི། སྤྱན་གྱི་“ བདད་རྩིའི་* ཆར་འབེབས་པས ། དམ་པ་རྣམས་ཀྱི་་ འཁོར་བ་ཡི*།
མྱ་ངན་” ཡོངས་གདང་19 བཟློག་པ་11 བཞིན༄༅ །། ཞིgna?ཞིའn གཞ༣ཞཞཡོr* | འཁ** ཚཙིའཚ10 གཞོil བའ? བྷཊ l
22
,
དེ་་ མཐོང་༧ ཉིད་* ན་ ཀླུ་ཡི“ བུ* ། ཡོངས་སུ་གདུང་བ་* བཏང་བར་གྱུར་ ། བདག་ཉིད་ཆེ་རྣམས་* མཐོང་བ་༧ ཉིད°།
གདུང་བའི་ སྐྱོན་ ཀུན་ ཞི་བར་བྱེད་ ༎ #t Rཞེ་ཀཱ ཀ un7 འ * ག*ཀཞུག:51 བdi3ཀiའ13ཁ#14 # #10 ཞུ་ཁགq* u

Page #191

25
- BODHISATTVAVADĀNAKALPALATA
147
23
སྙིམ་པ་། མེ་ཏོག་གིས་༧ གང་བ་ ། དེ་ལ་༔ གཏོར་ནས་༦ དེས་༧ ཕྱག་འཚལ7 ། དེ་ཡི་* ཞབས་°པད་10རེག་པ་ཡིས1 །
འཕྲལ་ལ་1༔ བསིལ་བ་ཉིད་ད་1༠ གྱུར 14 ༎ བཞ7 ཤ* #༔ * friའཁiཅུའ༧གཞི:1| ཞགཞག10བall ཤn:14 ldeft ཞ:i• il
24 དེ་ནས། བཅོམ་ལྡན་འདས་ཀྱི་ ནི། བསླབ་པའི་ གནས་* ཐོབ་° མཁས་པ་* དེས ། ཐལ་མོ་ སྦྱར་ནས་* དེ་ལ་" ནི་ །
ཇི་སྲིད་1°འཚོ་བར་1 ལྷག་གནས་1 བྱས༅༎ ནts བཞe: ཀ d:I fགི་ལྷr°བཞུ་ཞི༔ 4:7 | བན 1 ཚའབཞིའ* ཀ9 ཁཙ10hall Rཁ་ཁའཁཱ12 I
25 དེ་ལ་བཅོམ་ལྡན་གྱིས་” གསུངས་པའོ ། ཐམས་ཅད་་ རྗེས་སུ་གཟུང་བྱ་ལ།

Page #192

14
BODHISATTVĀVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
(27
26
གཅིག་ཉིད་* ཁོ་ནའི་* ལྷག་གནས་* ནི །
ཇི་སྲིད་འཚོ་བ་° ཇི་ལྟར:19 འོས་1 །། तम् आबभाषे भगवान् एकस्य एवं अधिवासना । ཨོའུས་ཁྲུ° འཚོལུ་
ག ° * =10 ཤུའིll il གས་ལ་་ དགྱེས་པས་“ དེ་° བརྗོད་ནས་ ། དེ་ལ་* བརྩོན་པས་* བཅོམ་ལྡན་” དེ༄༅།། གདེངས་ཅན་° རྣམ་པར་བརྟག་པ་1༠ ནི།
ཡོངས་རྫོགས་མཛད་ཅིང་l1 དལ་གྱིས་14 ནས1༅།། * ཞི ཙན༔ * གཞི་ནི༔ ? * ཚ ཙa:* | R:1 ཚ1 བའt༠ གཞ:༠ བ ཞཞུའི II
5 A. 8 4:.
27
དགེ་སློང་ ཚོགས་ཀྱི་ སྣ་དྲངས་ནས་། ་་ རིམ་གྱིས་ བྱོན་པ་* དེ་ལ་ ནི། ཀླུ་ཡིས་” མཐ་ལས་* གནས་༧ དང་ གནས10 །
མཐོ་རིས་1 ལྟ་བུར་1 མཛེས་པ་1 བསྒྲུབས14 ། क्रमेण* आगच्छतस् तस्य भिक्षु सङ्घ अग्रयायिनः । ཨཁཞུ Rནི14 ག:7 ཞགumf14 བཞི བཞེ1༠ it
12 ཀer.

Page #193

301
BODHISATTVAVADĀNAKALPALATA
149
28
རིན་ཅེན་ གསེར་* འོད་ི བཀྲ་བ་ཡི། མཆོག་གི་༸ སྐྱེད་ཚལ་ མཛེས་པ་” དང་ ། ལོངས་སྤྱོད་ འཛིན་པས་° བྲེལ་བ་ཡིསt༠ །
འབངས་དང་ འབངས་མོའ་ི •1 ཚོགས་1 རྒྱས་དང་1• ༎ གཞlq°གཞཞན་ ཞིཀའགའ་ན་ཞ| བག8ཁགཙུཀn10ན་ཁIན་#14གugབཞ1* jt
29
ག་པུར་ ཙན་དན་ རྒྱ་ཆེ་ཡི། དོ་ཤལ་འཕྱང་བས་° བརྒྱན་པ་ཡིས། གནས་” དང་ གནས་སུ་° གཙུག་ལག་ཁང་།
བཅོམ་ལྡན་འདས་ལ་1༠ དེ་ཡིས་li བྱས་༎ aclarquos Costcogiaotrao 1 ཞི7 8ཀེ ཁ་:10 ཤ1 R ° འཚོགཞཞ14 lt
30 དེ་ནས་་ ཀ་ལན་ད་ཀའི་ཐ ་ གནས་། ཞེས་པ་༔ འོད་མའི* ཚལ་ད་” ཕྱིན* །

Page #194

150
BODHISATTVAVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
( 32
དེ་ཡིས་° ལོངས་སྤྱོད་1༠ ཚོགས་1ཀན་གྱིས།
བཅོམ་ལྡན་འདས་ལ་ མཆོད་པ་བྱས་14 ། དཆཚུནRའཁ*ག• Inཙ་ གིqqd' ཞ:1| བ* སྦnioའགil ཞཞ14 །ཞ14 il
དེར་ ནི་ དེ་ཡིས་* ཟླ་༧ གསུམ་ད་ ། དགེ་འདན་དང་བཅས་་ བདེ་གཤེགས་” མཆོད་ ། དོ་ཤལ་* རིན་ཆེན་འོད་ཀྱིས་10 བསྐོར 11 །
ཡ་མཚན་19 ཀན་དགའ་ལྡན་ལ་1༠ གསུངས་• ༎ đạo việoat (3HHT: RIG:ê ra: མ14 ཁྲི་ཆིགཀ་ འ1 ཚ*ཞུ་མི10 ཞ:ll t
32 གདེངས་ཅན་ འདི་ ནི་ བསྐལ་པ་” བརྒྱར་༔ མི་གཡ ་ ། བདེ་བའི་༦ ལོངས་སྤྱོད་”ཀན་གྱི་༸ སྣོད་ད་” འགར 10 ། འོན་ཀྱང་'1 སྐྱེ་བ་1༔ གཞན་ལ་'༔ བྱང་ཆབ་' ཀྱང་1 ། རབ་ཏུ་འབད་པས་1༠ གསལ་བར་1? བྱེད་བར་འགྱུར 1 ༎

Page #195

33 ]
BODHISATTVĀVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
एष' कल्प' शतम्' अच्युतः 5 फणी'
सर्व भोग सुख भागू' भविष्यति 10 1
बोधिम् 14 अपि 15 अपर" जन्मनिं" स्फुटां"
किञ्च" सुप्रणिहितः 10 करिष्यति ॥ 8 ॥
11
16
18
151
ཞེས་པ་ དགེ་བའི་ དབང་པོས་༸ བྱས་པའི་ བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་ དཔའི་* རྟོགས་པ་བརྗོད་པ་❖ དཔག་བསམ་’ འཁྲི་ཤིང་ལས་ྋ ཀླུ་གཞོན་ ནུའི་༸ རྟོགས་པ་བརྗོད་པའི་༢༠ ཡལ་འདབ་“སྟེ་ དྲག་ཅུ་པའོ༎
इति
बोधिसत्व 'अवदान 'कल्प' लतायां
क्षेम ' इन्द्र' विरचितायां ' नागकुमार अवदानं 10 नाम षष्टितमः 12 पल्लवः" |

Page #196

༼ བཅམ་ ལྡན་འདས་ཀྱི་ གླུ་དབྱངས་།།
བཞུ་ཡིག l | ལེའུ་* དང་བོ།།
l འགེ གཞ1 u ཀན་ཏིའི་བུས་ ནི་ དེ་ བལྟས་ི ན ། ཐམས་ཅད་ གཉེན་*ད་ རྣམ་པར་ གནས* ། མཆོག་ཏུ་༦ བརྩེ་བས༔ ནོན་བ་ཡིས* །
GIẤT CŨNo & Aff5:1° " | 27 तान्' समीक्ष्य स कौन्तेयः सर्वान् बन्धून् * * अवस्थितान् । ག7ག8 * གའི + Rཞུ ༸ ག19 ཆབཞl L ཁྱབ་འཇག་ གཉེན་རྣམས་མཐོང་བས་ོན ། འཐབ་པར་འདོད་ དེ་° གནས་པ་ལ ། བདོག་གི་” ལུས་ནི་* ཞམ་གྱུར་ཅིང་ །
ཁ1༠ ཡང་11 ཡོངས་སུ་སྐམ་པར་བྱེདT ༎ 28 दृष्ट्रा' * इमान् स्वजनान् कृष्ण युयुत्सून् समवस्थितान् । བཞུའིa° ཁ7 གཅི* ཤུཚ1༠ བl ཊིཤུགཞིl l
༧

Page #197

BHAGAVADGĪTĀ
153
153
ང་ཡི༔ ལུས་* མི༄༅ འདར་” གྱུར་ཅིང་་ ། སྤ་* ཡང་༸ རྣམ་པར་ལྡང་བར་་ འགྱུར* ། གཞ” ནི་ ལག་ནས་19 ལྷུང་གྱུར་ཅིང་ ། པགས་པ་1༔ འང་1༔ ཡོངས་སུ་དྷཱཚིག་པར་གྱུར '5 །།
བགག བ གP Riཆ*fག7 བ* | པཚf° འབཞིti Kཞཞ° འཚ1 19 'སཞི15, L
4 གqR.
ང་ཡི1 ཡིད་ ནི་ རྣམ་འཁོར་བས །
གནས་པར་བྱ་བར་“ ནུས་* མ་ གྱུར་ ཀཎཾ བ རྣཚ་ཞི5,7 ཟཎཞུགཞི ཙུའ བ མིt ཞ:* u
གང་གི་༧ དོན་ད་ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ དང་་། ལོངས་སྤྱོད་ བདེ་བ་༦ འདོད་གྱུར་པ? །
20

Page #198

154
NYAYABINDU དེ་ ཉིད་ སྲོག་° དང་ ནོར་རྣམས་1• ནི།
སྤངས་ནས་1• ང་1* དང་18 འཐབ་པར་1༩ གནས1732 येषाम् अर्थे काहित' नो राज्यं भोगाः सुखानि च । ཟ8 འི འཊིའ17 ཝུཝཱ14 བག་ཁ19 ཀནr14 ཞིl all u
9 ཞ. 14 ཀ་. 15 ཊ་
།རིགས་པའི་1 ཐིགས་པ་” ཞེས་བྱ་བའི་༧ རབ་ཏུ་བྱེད་པ་ ༎
འཁཤུ་བཀ°བཞག་ ཡང་དག་པའི་ ཤེས་པ་ ནི་ སྐྱེས་བུའི་ དོན་ ཐམས་ཅད་ཅི འགྲུབ་པའི༔ སྔོན་དུ་” འགྲོ་བ་ཅན་༦ ཡིན་པས་ན་” དེ་1༠ བསྟན་ དོ།།1 ག ཞ?d=778 ཐུf ཚག#*#%8
༩l༠ ཅལ་མའིll 1
ཡང་དག་པའི1 ཤེས་པ་ ནི་ རྣམ་པ་”གཉིས་ དེ༎ 2
ཊི•ཁི ཀག ཀ 02 མངོན་སུམ་ དང་༧ རྗེས་སུ་དཔག་པརོ །། 3

Page #199

༡]
NYAYABINDU
155
155 ཞག གd བྷ u3 དེ་ལ་l མངོན་སུམ་* ནི་ རྡོག་པ་ དང་ བྲལ་ ཞིང་ ་ མ་འཁྲལ་ བའོ ། 4
ཞi nགཞན hཤ་ཀགེ་ཀཱ༔ ཨག་འ14 རྡོག་པ་ ནི་ ཤེས་པ་ལ་ བརྗོད་པ་༸ དང་ འདྲེར་ རུང་* སྣང་བ་ སྟེ། 5 །
མལེཀཊ་ཀའinཁགིའི:༧ ནང་གl u5
དེ་' དང་ བྲལ་བའོ ། རབ་རིབ་་ དང་ ། མྱར་ད་ནི བསྐོར་བ་༦ དང་་། གྲར་”ཞུགས་པ་་ དང་་ ། འཁྲུགས་པ་ ལ་སོགས་པས་1° འཁྲུལ་བ་ll མ་བསྐྱེད་པའི་1༔ ཤེས་པ་1 ནི་ མངོན་ སུམ་མོ 1• ། 6
གl g#* Rhn མག%?གཞ*daarཞི10འka11. ཀi1 ཞ1 བཀའ14 l 6
4 བ་ དེ་ ནི་ རྣམ་པ་བཞི སྟེ ༎7་
འi བཞུdཀu 7

Page #200

156
NYAYABINDU
[ i2
དབང་པོའ་ི། ཤེས་པ་ དང་།། 8
ན? l8
རང་གི་ ཡུལ་གྱི་* དེ་ མ་ཐག་པ་* ཡུལ་* ལྷན་ཅིག་“བྱེད་པ་ཅན་ དབང་པོའི་ ཤེས་པ་* མཚངས་པ་དེ་མ་ཐག་པའི་ རྐྱེན་གྱིས་10 བསྐྱེད་པའི་n ཡིད་ཀྱི 1 རྣམ་པར་ཤེས་པ1 དང་14 །།
ཞཞིག *#གཞུང་གr* ག?rཞེའ8 འཁ9མལམིའt༠ adi1 བན འགོ1 •ཞི་ཞ1• I,
14 :
སེམས་* དང་༔ སེམས་ལས་བྱང་བ་* ཐམས་ཅད་ཀྱི་་ རང་ཅི རིག་པ་ཅི དང་་ །། 10
#*#ཤ་བའq ཁབཞིའའའ* u 10
ཡང་དག་པའི1 དོན་བསྒོམས་པའི་ རབ་ཀྱི་ མཐའ་ལས་ཅི བྱང་བའི་° རྣལ་འབྱོར་པའི་7 ཤེས་པའོ༔ ། 11
ཞldanག་°གདནཾ*བཞ5#* གཞི'ཞ ཟེའི ཡི 11 དེའི་ ཡུལ་ ནི་ རང་གི་༸ མཚན་ཉིད་༔ དེ༎ 12 ཀུ་ ཞིག: ཞུགས་གནཙ it 12

Page #201

19 ]
NYAYABINDU
དོན་ གང་༔ ཉེ་བ་༔ དང་་ མི་ཉེ་བ་དག་ལས་" ཤེས་པ་ལ་༔ སྣང་བ་”
ཐ་དད་པ་ དེ་༔ ནི་ རང་གི་མཚན་ཉིད་༢༠ དོ །། 13
यस्य' अर्थस्य सन्निधान' असन्निधानाभ्यां ज्ञान' प्रतिभास 'भेदः 8 dq° ༥oarq10 || 13
དེ་ ཉིད་༸ དོན་ དམ་པར་* ཡོད་པ་° སྟེ ༎ 14
ཊཞུ! qq॰ qw ཀྭ+eཊ° |} 14
དངོས་པོའི ི མཚན་ཉིད་༧ ནི་ དོན་༸ བྱེད་ ནས་པ་ ཁོ་ན་ ཡིན་པའི་ ཕྱིར་རོ ༎ 15
wift+w1°སྐུ་ཀཿ་ཞུ པཱ€C7∶! i| 15 གཞན་ ནི་ སྤྱིའི༔ མཚན་ཉེད་° དེ ། 16
།།
འཊབ་འ་འཆལྐུ[ཡཱ° || 16
དེ་ ནི་ རྗེས་སུ་དཔག་པའི་༔ ཡུལ་ ཡིན་* ནོ ། 17
ཊཊེ sguinu° fsq∶3 | 17
མངོན་སུམ་གྱི་
སྡེ ༎ 18
།།
157
ཤེས་པ་༧ དེ་༔ ཉིད་ ཚད་མའི་“ འབྲ་བུ་
3
तद् एव च प्रत्यक्षं 'ज्ञानं * प्रमाण' फलम् ॥ 18
1
.8
དོན་ རྟོགས་པའི༔ ངོ་བོ་ཁོ་ན་ ཡིན་པའི་ ཕྱིར་ རོ༎ 19
ཨཾlnཊཿཊི25ས-༥° || 19

Page #202

158
NYAYABINDU
[ 25
དོན་་ དང་ འདྲ་བ་ཉིད་༣ དེའི་° ཚད་མ་“ སྟ ། 20
''བ་ནའ? * ཨཀ བཀའ 20 དེའི་ དབང་གིས་༧ དོན་་རྟོགས་པའི“ འགྲབ་པའི་ ཕྱིར་་ རོ།། 21
ཞུ་བར་ཞུ༔ afarཞི་ཞཝ* ཞི l 21
རིགས་པའི་༧ ཐིགས་པ་༧ ཞེས་བྱའི་༧ རབ་ཏ་བྱེད་པ་ལས་་ མངོན་ སུམ་གྱི་* ལེའ:༩ སྟེ་ དང་པོའོ།། 22 fའི ཀའRབཞུ°[=ཁ8]=ད་གེ༔ མཁཞག་ཉེQ:8 [:?] u 22 རྗེས་སུ་དཔག་པ་1 ནི་ རྣམ་པ་གཉིས་ དེ༎ 23. ཞུགཞl Rerr? II 23 རང་གི། དོན་༧ དང་གཞན་གྱི་ དོན་དོ །24 ཤl ཝཀ༔ a n 24
དེ་ལ་་ རང་གི་དོན་གྱི༔ རྗེས་སུ་དཔག་པ་° ནི་ རྗེས་སུ་དཔག་པར་ བྱ་བ་ལ་“ ཚལ་ གསུམ་པའི་ རྟགས་ལས་ ཤེས་པ་༧ གང་° ཡིན པའ10 7 25
གl ཋཙྪནུབIཞུ༔ ཞིཞུ? འུའི༔ སྣཞ8 འ [ an ] ཞ༥༧ u 25
10 བཞR,

Page #203

159
29 ]
NYAYABINDU འདིར་ ཡང་ ཚད་མའི་ འབྲས་བུ་* རྣམ་པར་བཞག་པ་ ནི་ མངོན་སུམ་ དང་ འདྲའོ་26.
प्रमाण फल व्यवस्था अत्र अपि प्रत्यक्ष वत्' ।। 26
ཚལ་གསུམ་པ་ཉིད་ཀྱི་ རྟགས་ ནི་ རྗེས་སུ་དཔག་པར་བྱ་པ་ལ་ ཡོད་པ་༔ ཉིད་༦ དང་༦ ༎ 27 रुप्यं पुनर् लिङ्गस्य अनुमेये सत्त्वम् एव ॥ 27
6 མཐན་པའི་ ཕྱོགས་ ཉིད་ལ་ ཡོད་པ་༔ དང་°། 28 འqa ཞ° འཚང་ག་28
མི་མཐུན་པའི་ ཕྱོགས་ལ་ མེད་པ་ ཉིད་ད་༔ ངེས་པའོ༎ 29 མཁin@ བ བཤག ཞ• མཚིག་° u 29

Page #204

།། རིགས་པའི་ ཐིགས་པའི༔ རྒྱ་ཆེར་ འགྲ ལ་པ༎
l ant@ཤུའིn*
སྐྱེ་བའི་ གདང་བ་* རྒྱན་༸ རབ་འབྱང་ རྒྱ་ཅནཊཾ། འགྲ ་ལ་༸ རྣམ་པར་ རྒྱལ་བ་འདོད་ཆགས་ལ ། སོགས་བའི་ དགྲ་ལྡན་1° བདེ་བར་གཤེགས་པའི་ གསུང་1 ། ཡིད་ཀྱི1 མུན་པ་1• སྦྱོང་བར་15 མཛད་པ་18 རྒྱལl? ། 1 གཞ17 གཞི་ཀཞཀ4-
3་་ འའི*འ8 གm8 ཞིའིg:7 | ག8ག་ཞི*བའི:10 ཅུ་གll al1
འཁྲ18འཁ14 འག15 ཞག:14 l 1 ཡང་དག་པའི་ ཤེས་པ་ ནི་ ཞེས་བྱ་བ་ ལ་སོགས་པས་་ ནི་ རབད་་བྱེད་པ་པོ་འདིའི་ བ རྗོད་པར་བྱ་བའི? དགོས་པ་ཅི བརྗོད་དོ ། 2 རབ་ཏུ་བྱེད་པའི་ ལུས་ ནི་ རྣམ་པ་གཉིས་། ཏེ། སྒྲ་༸ དང་༦ དོན་་ དོ།། 3 དེ་ལ་༔ སྒྲའི་ དགོས་པ་ཅི ནི་ བརྗོད་པར་ བྱ་བ་* བསྟན་པ་* ཉིད་ ཡིན་གྱི། གཞན་” མ་ཡིན་པ*། དེའི་ཕྱིར་

Page #205

6]
NYAYABINDUTĪKĀ
དེ་༢༠ མི་‘ དཔྱད་༔ དོ ༎ 4 ཅི་སྟེ' བརྗོད་པར་བྱ་བ་* ཡང་3 དགོས་པ་མེད་པ་* ཉིད་༔ ཡིན་ན་ ནི་ དེ་ བསྟན་པའི་ཕྱིར་ སྒྲ་ བཀོད་པའི'༠ རྩོམ་པ“ ཡང་I༔ མི་ བྱ་བར་ འགྱར་ དེ། དཔེར་ན་༢༠ བྱ་རོག་གི་༢’ སོ་1 དགོས་པ་° མེད་པའི་ཕྱིར རྟོགས་ པ་༧` དང་ ལྡན་པ་༧༧ དེ་° བརྟག་པའི་* རྩོམ་པ་༸° མི་° བྱེད་པ་77 བཞིན་ ནོ ༎ 8
सम्यग् 'ज्ञान' पूर्विका सर्व इति' आदिना अस्य' प्रकरणस्य' अभिधेय'ཀེr 3ཋ4ཊི? |2 f@@u* f€° 6'vrཊིཊ° vs5 siT7 ཟྭ6 इति ॥ 3 तत्र' शब्दस्य ? स्व-अभिधेय ' प्रतिपादनम् एव प्रयोजनम्" । ཟླ8 *7ཊ? ! acq॰ ཊq10 ཊ11 ཊི6ཡཊི1? ། 4 fཀྐེཏྟིཀཿ? བྷུ° ཀྭཊཱི! ཊིཡགིnd! ཕ་{° ཊཊ?ཊིqeQ° sཊཱ°q@af10 sfq12 #13 [ཨཽ0[[Q∶11’14 4614517-8185wa(197ud〔q2 20 26 གླེa71-21
12
5
4q° Qr16, 28
°ཀཽ་ནྭ? 2
ཊཊ?3ver?4
*TIrHཁc5
2 27
115
161
5. 5 ༢.
དེ་བས་ན་à རབ་ཏ་བྱེད་པ་ྋ འདི་༔ བརྩམ་པར་བྱ་བ་ཉིད་དུ་
འདིས་° བརྗོད་པར་བྱ་བའི་
བསྟན་པའི་ཕྱིར དགོས་པ" བསྟན་༸ དོ༎6 འདིར་ ངག་གི དོན་ ནི ། ྋགང་གི་ཕྱིར་ ཡང་དག་པའི ཤེས་པ་ ནི་ སྐྱེས་བུའི་” དོན་༸ ཐམས་ཅད་o འགྲབ་པའི༠ སྔོན་ད”

Page #206

162
| 9
NYAYABINDUTĪKA འགྲོ་བ། ། དེ་བས་ན་19 དེ་4 བསྟན་པའི་18 ཕྱིར་1༠ དེ་ བརྩམ་ མོ་18 ཞེས་བྱ་བ་ ཡིན་1ན ༎7
ཁག་འ1 ག གན་གཙ ་ག་ལ་ཝཱ༔ imar raགེག7གའ་འཁ8 མོའིn8 ཀR° ]16 ཀཆགས་ཞུ༔ གགan•ཞིགll,1 f?qཚཀ7%- 8 ཁ:10 འགཞ1 བཞ14qཞིའq15q1 ཁ17 ག་ཀཞ18 ཞི19 འཊ an an a: t7
འདིར་1 ནི་ རབ་ཏུ་བྱེད་པའི༧ བརྗོད་པར་བྱ་བ་༧ ཡང་དག་པའི་མ ཤེས་པ་༦ དེ་ སྐྱེས་བུའི་ དོན་ ཐམས་ཅད་° འགྲབ་པའི་ རྒྱ་ཉིད་ ད་༧ བསྟན་པས་ དགོས་པ་29 བརྗོད་པ་ ཡིན་14 ནོ ། །
ཀཱl བ བདག་°་ཟེག བཀག༔འ་ཅག ཁ*gཉཀ?nf8fa.10 རྗེའུdl1 འབའཁ13 ཙཀ14 u8
ཙ ཁ. 11, 1 རྗེའུ་ཞfལྷ་ཞེi. དོན་། འདི་༔ བརྗོད་པ་ན་༦ ཡང་་་ འབྲེལ་བ་ཅི དང་པོ། དགོས་པ་ དང་༦ ། བརྗོད་པར་བྱ་བ་ རྣམས་” བསྟན་པ་ ཡིན་1° དེ། འདི་ལྟརll སྐྱེས་བུའི་1༧ དོན་ལ་19 ཕན་པའི་14 ཡང་དག་པའི་ ཤེས་པ1༠ རབ་ཏ་ བྱེད་པའི” འདིས་18 བསྟན་པར་བྱ་བ་ཡིན་པར་T སྨྲ་བ་ན༠ ། ཡང་ དག་པའི•11 ཤེས་པ་ ནི་ སྒྲ་བཀོད་པ་ འདིའི་ 14 བརྗོད་པར་

Page #207

9]
NYAYABINDUTIKĀ
-26
བྱ་བ་ཡིན་5 ལ ། དེ་༸" བསྟན་པ་༸7 ནི་7 དགོས་པ* ཡིན་ནོ།
རབ་ཏུ་བྱེད་པ་༔" འདི་༠༠ ནི་ དགོས་པའི་ ཐབས་སུ་ སྨྲས་པ་* ཡིན་3* ཏེ། དེ་བས་ན་" བརྗོད་པར་བྱ་བའི་" དགོས་པ་7 བསྟན་པའི་* ཤགས་ ཀྱིས་” འབྲེལ་བ་‘oལ་སོགས་པ་*‘ བསྟན་པ་** ཡིན་ ནོ ༎ 9
20
अस्मिंश्' च' अर्थ' उच्यमाने सम्बन्ध प्रयोजन' अभिधेयानि उक्तानि uaff-10 ཊཿ[ fཊཱི196q1237[1°ཁུqqfགིı+ qqT15 ཟླ716 52ཊNཞུ{7ཊs7q0 3wཊེཥྭ18 qe6གིཊ17 ཧྲུfཊེ *ཊུའdr0 qཡT°1||ཊཿམ༵° ཨq* शब्दसन्दर्भस्य 23 afrE75 ཀཎ་ེ༠ཊིqཊཿལྐ27 འ་728 1 20 བ༩༥༠ ཙ༥༢༽༠༠ *ཤཱུPage #208

164
NYAYABINDUTIKA
[ 10
དང་31 ཉན་པ་རྣམས་ ཉན་པའི • དགོས་པ་བ༔ ཡང་༠༠ འདིར་བན བསམ་པར་བྱ་་” སྟེ། འདི་ལྟར་3* རྟོགས་པ་དང་ ལྡན་པ་° ཐམས་ཅད་ ཀྱི4༠ འཇག་པ་41 ནི་ དགོས་པ་༔ བརྟགས་ནས་༣ འཇག་4• གོ ། དེ་བས་ན་* སློབ་དཔོན་གྱིས་༥༦ རབ་ཏུ་བྱེད་པ་༥7 ཅིའི་ཕྱིར་ས༔ བུས་་ ། ཉན་པ་རྣམས་ ཀྱང་°1 ཅིའི་ཕྱིར ་༠༧ ཉན༧ ། ཅེས་༔ ཐེ་ཚོམ་ད་ ཙ གྱུར་པ་ལ་ཅ༠ བསྟན་པ་ནི་57 དགོས་པ་5 ཡིན་ ནོ་ ཞེས་༠༠ བརྗོད་ དོ 61 10
न तु इदम् एकं वाक्य सम्बन्धम् अभिधेय प्रयोजनं च वक्तुं' གཞཙ ཁམིགll, f1༧ ཟུ བཞུ13 q14 བཀཞུ15 ༩ཀཞ14 | ན17 ཞུ18 fཞི19 Rའ0ཞཀ21, ཤུལ་ཞ9° fཞི43 གཞ-4
ཀ 5, འ་ཞི༠ ཟ1 ཞ༠༩ 6 བདག་ག8ཀཀཀ 9 | ཁགཞེ37 ཞུག33 བ35 ཞག3༔ བཀ34, Mr R3 @t༠ ཡེ་ཤ:30 ཞུR41གsཀ4 ཀ4 3 བཀd@44, 45 བ
a@4 6 ཁན་ག°47 ཞིག#48 44 0 ཞིབ། 50 51 R༔ 5 an=59 ཞིs༔ འགའིཅ 5 འུག་ཞཞིs? ང་འཁཱ5 8 aཆེའི་གཞི63 | 10
s6 གཞེ, 59 ཞR. 6༠ ཙཱའི. ཡང་དག་པའི་ ཤེས་པ་༧ ཁོང་ད་ཆད་པར་བྱེད་པ་རྣམས་ཀྱི་ སྟོན་པ་པོར་་ བདག་ཉིད་་ བྱ་བའི་ཕྱིར་ རབ་ཏུ་བྱེད་པ་་ འདི་

Page #209

12 ]
NYAYABINDU TĪKA
165
is5
བྱས་° ལ། སློབ་མ་རྣམས19 ཀྱང་ll སློབ་དཔོན་གྱིས་1• སྦྱར་བ་13 བདག་ཉིད་• ཁང་དུ་ཆད་པར་ འདོད་ ནས་༢༠ རབ་ཏུ་བྱེད་པ་7 ཉན་ པས་1* ན། རབ་ཏུ་བྱེད་པ་19 མཛད་པ ༧༠ དང་1 ཉན་པ་ གཉིས་ ཀྱི་ དགོས་པ་ ནི་ གོང་ད་ཆད་པ་3༔ ཡིན་ ནོ །། 11
सम्यग् मान व्युत्पाद्यमानानाम् आत्मानं' व्युत्पादक कर्तुं प्रकरणम्'
d8 མིག10 བll finཤུགཞ14 *འ་14 ལུག་གཅ * ཛཱ :1༠ ཆ་ཁྲ17 ཞུ བཀའ དཞི1 19ར་ག•བྷཱཁག་: 4 འda བ ཨུའའཁྲ14 l 11
21
4.
འབྲེལ་བ་༣ སྟོན་པའི ཚིག་* མེད་༔ དེ ། ཤགས་ཀྱིས་ཏཾ གོང་ད་ ཆད་པར་ བྱའོ།། འདི་ལྟར་ ཡང་དག་པ༎ * ཤེས་པ་ བསྟན་པའི་ 3519 518 554 553 555 354 353 རྩོམ་པ་14 ནི་ འདི-15 ཉིད་1༠ ཐབས་? ཡིན་1* གྱི། གཞན་10 མ་ཡིན་ པར་ བསྟན་པ་ ཉིད་ཀྱིས་ རབ་ད་བྱེད་པ་ དང་༧་ དགོས་ པ་གཉིས་ ༦ ཐབས་༩ དང་34 ཐབས་ལས་བྱང་བའི་17 འབྲེལ་བ་** ཡིན་ ནོ།། 12

Page #210

166
CATUHSATAKA
[ 22
सम्बन्ध' प्रदर्शन ' पदं तु न विद्यते । सामर्थ्याद् एव तु स प्रतिपत्यव्यः । प्रेक्षावता '' हि सम्यग् 'ज्ञान' व्युत्पादनाय 10 प्रकरणम् 1 2 इदम् 1 3 आरब्धवता 14 अयम् एव 10 उपायो 17 न2° अन्य इति दर्शित " एव 22 उपाय " उपेय 27.
5
भावः प्रकरण ' ' प्रयोजनयोः
सम्बन्ध" इति ॥12
तथा हि. 18 भवति, 24 च
7
༎ བཞི་ ̈བརྒྱ་པ༔ ༎
॥ चतुः शतकम् ॥
1
9 2
བསོད་ནམས་ ཆང་ང་༔ ཆོས་° འདི་ལསཾ ། ཐེ་ཚོམ་ཟ་བ་° ཡང་ མི་” འགྱུརཎཾ ། ཐེ་ཚོམ་ཟ་བ་" ཙམ་ ཞིག་གིས་∶ །
སྲིད་པ་‘‘ ཧྲལ་པོར་‘’ བྱས་པར་3 འགྱུར་* ༎XIII, 5
अस्मिन् धर्मे ऽल्प' पुण्यस्य' सन्देहो ऽपि न जायते ।
3
भवः 11 सन्देह' मात्रेण 10 जायते 11 जर्जरी12 कृतः 13 ॥
4

Page #211

CATUHSATAKA
167
1
ཆོས་! གང་ཞིག་ལ་ ཐབ་པ་ཡིས ། ཐར་པའི༔ བར་ད་ཏཾ འཕེལ་བ་༦ ཉིད་ ། གསུང་༔ དེར་” གང་ལ་19 གས་l མེད་པ།
དེ་1• ནི་ གསལ་བར་1• བློ་ལྡན་15 མིན་14 VIII. 6 * གེ་ཤགཞུ་ ཀ ཤ ཀ ཞུ7 Rཞ* R: | ཞ° གll ala ག10 གཞིt * ཙུགཚ1• ཤུག་ཞ15
al, s:14 l
བདག་ནི་ མྱ་ངན་འདའ་ འགྱུར་ ཞེས་ ། སྟོང་མིན་* སྟོང་ལྟར་ མཐོང་་ མིན་* དེ། ལོག་ལྟས་° མྱ་ངན་1° མིl འདའ་བར་• །
དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ་རྣམས་1 གསུང་1• ངོ །། XVIII. 7 ཟླཙི ག གཞཝུ ཆུ'' ཞིnfor la ཞུ༸ #*, ཞིག་ཉrP ཀI Rའག*10,1 གཡོ་4 ཞ:1༠
གང་ལས་ འཇིག་རྟེན་ བསྟན་ འབྱང་བ་། དེ་ལས་* འཇག་པ་༧ གསུངས་པ་” སྟེ།

Page #212

i6s
CATUHSATAKA གང་ལས་ དོན་* དམ་1༠ བསྙད་ll འབྱང་བ• ། དེ་ལས་ ལྡོག་པ་1༔ གསུངས་པ་1༔ འོ༎ VIll. 8 लौकिको देशना यत्र प्रवृत्तिस् तत्र वर्ण्यते । ཁ19fཏགur Rཞུསཞུ་• ཆl this t
4, 12 .
ཀན་་་ ཡོད་མ་ཡིན་ ནི བུ་ ཞེས* ། ཁྱོད་ལ་* འཇིགས་པ་་ སྐྱེ་འགྱུར་* གང་ ། གལ་ཏེ་1° བྱ་བ་" ཡོད་ན་་ ནི། ཆོས་1༔ འདི་'' ཟློག་བྱེད་'* མི་1• འགྱུར་17 རོ ༎ VII. 9
6 དཊི• པོའ འ ཞིs ཝ ཀའི ཁ? | ཞིཞི1 གཞི1༠ དd1 ཟ14 14 ft R :15 u
。. འ. 17 ལོafའི.
བསོད་ནམས་མིན་པ་ དང་བོར་ ཟློག ། ་་ བར་དུ་་ བདག་* ནི་ ཟློག་པ་ དང་ ། ཕྱི་ནས་* ལྟ་*ནི་ ཀན་1° ཟློག་པu ། གང་གིས་I• ཤེས་1 དེ་I• མཁས་པ་18 ཡིན་ ༎ VIll. 15

Page #213

CATUHSATAKA
i69
* ག གཙུགཤེ* གཔན༧ གོ་༩:5 | ཚནi° གil ཝུགེI dཞི་ ཤ• གླུནས་ཟླ་5 l
7 བ, ༠ ses Notea. 18 འའི
དངོས་པོ་ གཅིག་གི་ ལྟ་པོ་༧ གང་་ ། དེ་* ནི་ ཀན་གྱི་* ལྟ་པོར་ བཤད ། གཅིག་གི་ སྟོང་ཉིད་1° གང་1• ཡིན་པ། དེ་I• ཉིད་1༠ ཀན་གྱི་14 སྡེ ང་པ་ཉིད་* ༎ VIII. 16 གཡག ཀ་• ན 4a7 ཀ ཤུ* རྟཞ:8 | དག° ཀའtt༠ rli ག• དུnl༔ བ་གl• གནils l
s བསོད་ནམས་འདོད་པས་' སྟོང་པ་ཉིད ། ཀན་ཚེ་ བརྗོད་པར་བྱ་༔ མིན་* དེ། གནས་མ་ཡིན་པར་* སྦྱར་བའི་7 སྨན ། དག་ ཏུ འགྱུར་བ་1༔ མ་ ཡིན་ནམ* ༎ VII. 18 शून्यता' पुण्यकामेन वक्तव्या* नैव सर्वदा ।
f8 ཤུགཞ? ཨuཞེ* dl1 ཞུ་ གཞི་༧ t
22

Page #214

170
CATUHSATAKAN
1
9
ཇི་ལྟར་། ཀླ་ཀློ་* སྐད་” གཞན་གྱིས་། བཟང་བར་* མི་༦ ནས་ དེ་བཞིན་དུ ། འཇིག་རྟེན་པ་ཡི་ མ་གཏོགས་པར 10 ། འཇིག་རྟེན་li བཟུང་བར་14 ནས་1༠ མ་ ཡིན་ཐོn VIll. 19 ཙ ག* སོག ཞི: ག” གཞཞུ6 | སྒ1 མེད་ན° ཞི་ ཉེe: གོi༔ ཀན་ཞུl r* u
ro ཡོད་་ དང་༧ མེད་” དང་ “ ཡོད་མེད་” དང་། གཉས་ཀ་མིན་ ཞེས་ ཀྱང་1༠ བསྟན་ ཏེ། ནད་ཀྱི་ དབང་གིས་1• ཐམས་ཅད་1• ཀྱང་1• །
སྨན་1༠ ཞེས་བྱ་བར་17 འགྱུར་1༔ མིན་ནམi ༎ Vill. 20 གཞུl ཞ འ ཁུ་ ཐད༠ ཞི ཀ* འ7 ཟླi° a དགai | ཞུl. lའགའ འག༔ #t༔ ཞ17 འཞི་8
in ཡང་དག་་ མཐོང་ན་༔ གནས་མཆོག་ལ་ ། ཅུང་ཟད་༸ མཐོང་ན་༦ བཟང་་ འགྲོ་ སྟེ།

Page #215

13 ]
CATUHSATAKA
དེའི་ཕྱིར་༔ ནང་ བདག་༢༠ བསམ་པ་ལ” ། མཁས་པས་∶༔ རྟག་ཏུ་ བློ་ཀྲིས་‘‘ བསྐྱེད’ ། VII
8
ཨrgg? ཊ* Ji° faཝུ° @g6 qu? ག{d: } ཊ€FIཞུ॰ AQIeu!°ficiwt11 -6tqf1s fRu'15 nfཊིr14 ཡཱུ་5:19 H
10
-
12
2
3
ཇི་ལྟར་ ས་བོན་ མཐའ མཐོང་ ཞིང་* །
7
དེ་ལ་ ཐོག་མ་ ཡོད་ མིན་° ལྟར॰ །
དེ་བཞིན་༠ རྒྱ་ ནི་ མ་ཚང་ཕྱིར∶* ། སྐྱེ་བའང་‘‘ འབུང་བར་* མི་ འགུར་རོ'。 ༎ VIIl. 25
un! lau° t+ sa:° a + m@q ཊཡ॰ ཁཱིཔཊི ། ཊཿqq10 %full-6c4la12 aw13 cfq13 རྞྞ16 qaq:15 1|
9
2I
13
གང་ཚེ་ ནང་བདག་ བུད་མེད་° མིན །
2
སྐྱེས་ མིན་” མ་ནིང་” མ་ཡིན་པ° །
དེ་ཚེ་ མི་ཤེས་o འབའ་ཞིག་ལས∶ །
ཁྱོད་3༔ བདག་3 ཕོ་ཡོ1
སྙམ་ད་སེམས* ༎
21
x.།
अन्तरात्मा' यदा' न स्त्री न पुमान्' न' नपुंसकम् ' । I॰ 64q2 1-ITR20 yeQ ཊི12 s€13 5WTq1+ [ཊི15 L
171

Page #216

i72
CATUHŚATAKA
[16
4
གང་ཚེ་་ འབྱུང་བ་༔ ཐམས་ཅད་ལ། ཕོ་* མོ་* མ་ནིང་༧ ཡོད་ མིན་བ* ། དེ་ཚེ ནི་སྡེ་1༠ དེ་དག་ ཉིད།
བརྟེན་ནས་I ཕོ་1• མོ་ མ་ནིང་ཟ༠ ཡིན x. 2 g' ago go ao tao cuage 1 ° ༩ ཁ1༠ གཞིu ཞུl• གt #15146*བྷ14 U
15 ཁྱོད་ཀྱི་ བདག་ གང་ངའི༔ བདག་* མིན ། དེས་” དེ་* བདག་° མིན་1° མ་ངེས་ཕྱིར། དངོས་པོ 1 མི་རྟག་པ་རྣམས་ལ །1 རྡོག་པI• སྐྱེ་བར་འགྱུར་18 མིན་ནམ་བ ༎X. 3
ཁ གོགཀ༔ མོའ་ཀ5, R? ག° གའི་ཁ་ནi
ni
s:8 |
ཞུt༠ བའི་ཞུ་ཐ བཞེཅུ༔ ཆཁགl༔ ཞ བཀཞེ15 U
16 གང་ཞིག་ གཏི་མག་* འགའ་ཞིག་གིས། བསྒྲིབས་་ ཞིང་ དེ་ཉིད་° གེགས་ བྱེད་པ་ ། །

Page #217

18]
i73
CATUHŚATAKA དེ་ལ་* དགེ་ལེགས་° འགྲོ་བ་1༠ ཡངli།
མེད་ན་1• ཐར་པ་1 སྨོས• རྩི13 དགོས་* ༎ XIl. 10 ཆིག་° འག* :1 སg? g• ག་ཉེས འཁོན་, གིr°་ཞིགམིའ1༠ ག* གཞ1༔ གཟ1༔ རྒྱུ དl5
* གr1.1༠
it
ཚལ་ཁྲིམས་ལས་1 ནི་ ཉམས་° བླ་”ཡི། ལྟ་ལས་་ ཅིས་ ཀྱང་* མ་ ཡིན་ནོ། ཚལ་ཁྲིམས་ཀྱིས་? ན ་མཐོ་རིས་* འགྲོ །
ལྟ་བས་1༠ གོ་འཕང་l མཆོག་ ཐོབ་འགྱུར1 ༎ XII. Il རྣམིགg ཀའི ཀ་ ཁ་གེ ཀ° འུ :༔ དuཐn°| shཡིག7 ཀཞེ° ཞུ༎ གl༠ གཞི1 ཚ1༧ བཞགll l
18 ཞི་ སྒོ་ གཉིས་པ་མེད་པ་ དང་ ། ལྟ་བ་ངན་༸ རྣམས་ འཇིགས་བྱེད་ ཅིང་། སངས་རྒྱས་ཀུན་གྱི་* ཡུལ་° འགྱུར་བ་°། བདག་མེད་11 ཅེས་ནི་1 བྱ་བར་བརྗོད་༎ XII. 13

Page #218

i74
CATUHśATAKA
120
analdo fan 'an sát",8 x H 1 विषयः सर्वबुद्धानाम् इति नैरात्म्यम्। उच्यते ॥
10 Taཞེ་
ས 19 ཆོས་ འདི་ཡི་ནི་* མིང་ལས་ ཀྱང་་ ། དམ་པ་མིན་པ་° འཇིགས་པ་༸ སྐྱེད།་ གཞན་ལ་ འཇིགས་པ་° མི་: སྐྱེད་ པའི11 ། སྟོབས་ལྡན་1 ཞེས་བྱ་| གང་ཞིག་14 མཐོང་15 ༎ XII. 14
ག* ག་ གི༔ འབ མའི་ ཁགཞ| བ འ1 ཚ19 དེ14 15 ཀ ཟླ10 ཀཚད:11 l
20 དེ་ཉིད་ད་ལོ བདག་མེད་” སྙམ་ད་ ། དེ་ལྟར་༸ གང་ལ་* དགོངས་༦ གནས་པ་ ། དེ་ནི་༧ ཡོད་པས་༧ ག་ལ་1༠ དགའ1 །
མེད་པས་1༔ འཇིགས་པར་1• ག་ལ་• འགྱུར 13 ། XII. 17 བཞཞེ་ ལནཞི གཤ*#* a7 ཞི: | ག* ཁཞ? $4:19 iའིll a་གl ཅུ༔ འགl 1:
15 na.

Page #219

22 ]
CATUHśATAKA
j75
ཆོས1 ནི་ མདོར་ན་ མི་འཚེ་བར ་ ། ་ དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ་རྣམས་ཀྱིས་། གསུངས? ། སྟོང་ཉིད་* མྱ་ངན་འདས་པར་ དེ། །
འདིར་“ནི་ དེ་གཉིས་10 འབའ་ཞིག་11 གོ །། XII. 23 धर्म समासतो ऽहिंसां वर्णयन्ति तथागताः । ག•གཞཔཾཞུ Raint? ཆེd11 བཞུ9 ཛྷཞུ གཞ10 t
རིགས་པའི་ དོན་ ནི་ གཞན་ལས་པཾ ཀྱང་ ། བློ་ལྡན་ཅ ལེགས་པ་འདོད་པས་“ བླང་། ཉི་མས་* སྟེང་” མིག་ལྡན་པ་ལ་° །
ཀུན་གྱི་ སྤྱི་མཐུན་1༔ མ་ཡིན་ནམl ༎ XII. 25 i? sཀཆེ ཤུགེit ཀཾ༔ ཐེགན་ཞིག༔ ཀའ་པོ| ན? # དེའཚ1༠ ཤiབས་ཁm1 ཞུl

Page #220

།། དབུ་མ་རྩ་བའི༔ཚིག་ལེའུར་བྱས་པཎཾ ། It Hot Heafcao . ༎ རབད་བྱེད་པ་1 དང་པོ །།
lཚ* མཆoa n གང་གིས་་ རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་བར་འབྱུང་༔ ། འགག་པ་མེད་པ་༸ སྐྱེ་མེད་པ། ཆད་པ་མེད་པ་* རྟག་མེད་པ། འོང་བ་མེད་པ་7 འགྲོ་མེད་པ* ། ཐ་དད་དོན་མེད་ དོན་ཅིག་མིན 19 ། སྤྲོས་པ་ll ཉེར་ཞི1 ཞི་1 བསྟན་པ་བ ། རྫོགས་པའི་སངས་རྒྱས་15 སྨྲ་རྣམས་ཀྱི་༩ །
དམ་པ་17 དེ་ལ་ ཕྱག་འཚལ་ལོ1༎ ག rn ཤུགཞག༔ ཤུཏཆེནཙི འབ* | अनेकार्थम्10 अनानार्थम अनागमम्' अनिर्गमं ॥ 7 པའི་འཁཞུགཞི ཐབསྒྲl ཀའཚl Ri | ཞིག་གས་ཁ14 གཞུཝཱཎཱ་• #1 གཞ1 བཞུda༠ f17

Page #221

MOLAMADHYAMAKAKARIKA
inz
བདག་ལས་ མ་ཡིན་ གཞན་ལས་* མིན་ ། གཉིས་ལས་* མ་ཡིན་* རྒྱ་མེད་” མིན° ། དངོས་བོ་* གང་དག་ཟ° གང་ན་ ཡང་ །
སྐྱེ་བ་14 ནམ་ཡོང་I• ཡོད་མ་ཡིན་• ༎ न' खतो न अपि परतो न द्वाभ्यां न अपि आहेतुतः' । ལ ༔ ཞུ་ + Rཞི་༔ ཞག:° ཞཞ1 གt༠ u
རྐྱེན་རྣམས་ བཞི” སྟེ་ རྒྱུ་* དང་་ ནི། དམིགས་པ་* དང་༔ ནི་ དེ་མ་ཐག ། དབང་པོ་་ ཡང་* ནི་ དེ་བཞིན་” དེ།
རྐྱེན་བ° ལྔ་པI• ནི་ ཡོད་མ་ཡིན་། चत्वारः प्रत्यया हेतुश् च* आलम्बनम् अनन्तरं । ག° ཞ * 7 ཟླ* འགོi° གོR འགill u
དངོས་བོ་རྣམས་ཀྱི་ རང་བཞིན་ ནི། རྐྱེན་ལ་སོགས་ལ་༧ ཡོད་མ་ཡིན་།

Page #222

[5
MOLAMADHYAMAKAKARIKA བདག་གི་དངོས་པོ་ ཡོད་མིན་ ན ། །
གཞན་༧ དངོས་* ཡོད་བུ་མ་ཡིན་ནོ 1༠ ༎ •t aft ལག་ཞིག• Ra, ཞི ཞི་ * * * * ཟླ་༠ གཞི་༠
བྱ་བ་ རྐྱེན་དང་ལྡན་པ་* མེད། རྐྱེན་དང་མི་ལྡན་༤ བྱ་བ་* མེད་ ། བྱ་བ་མི་ལྡན་” རྐྱེན་” མ་ཡིན །
བྱ་བ་ལྡན་བ༠ ཡོད་། འོན་ཏེ་ན། ། क्रियान' प्रत्ययवती* न अप्रत्ययवती किया। प्रत्यया न' अक्रियावन्तः क्रियावन्तश च सन्ति। उता ॥
རྒྱ་ འདི་དག་ལ་ བརྟེན་* སྐྱེ་བས་” ན ། དེའི་ཕྱིར་༔ འདི་དག་* རྐྱེན་ ཅེས་” གྲགས* ། ཇི་སྲིད་” མི་1° སྐྱེu དེ་སྲིད་དུ། །
འདི་དག་1༔ རྐྱེན་མིན་14 ཇི་ལྟར་18 མིན་བ།། उत्पयन्ते प्रतीत्य इमान्' इति इमे' प्रत्ययाः किल । གཞའ9 10 སུགaཀའll #1 གཞའ1 ཀ1༠ གསཞག:14
15 l
7 རྒྱུའི་

Page #223

MOLAMADHYAMAKAKARIKA
7]
བྱ
179
མེད་”དམ་ ཡོད་པའི་ དོན་ལ་༔ ཡང་། རྐྱེན་ ནི་ རུང་བ་” མ་ཡིན་ ༧ དེ། མེད་ན་༸ གང་གི་1° རྐྱེན་ད་l འགྱུར 1 ། ཡོད་ན་1 རྐྱེན་གྱིས་1. ཅི་ཞིག་བྱ།།
न एव असतो न एव सतः प्रत्ययो ऽर्थस्य युज्यते' । གཞ:* མགll དགt° འ1 ཐ • f15 t
2 ག, 5 ཀྱི, 1 སོའR.
གང་ཚེ་ཆོས་ ནི་ ཡོད་པ་དང་ ། མེད་' དང་་ ཡོད་མེད་་ མི་གྲུབ་པ* ། "gs° F 35° 3" (ss' | དེ་ལྟ་1 ཡིན་ན་1༔ མི་15 རིགས་སོ 16 །
न' सन् न' असन् न' सदसन् धर्मो निवर्तते यदा। དf Rda༠ Byll ཚུ་ བཞི༔ འི ཀཞེ་༠ t
12 ནུR. 15 =.

Page #224

1c0
MOLAMADHYAMAKAKARIKĀ
[9
ཡོད་པའི་ ཆོས་” འདི་ དམིགས་པ་་ ནི། མེད་པ་* ཁོ་ནར བ ཉེ་བར་བསྟན་ ། ཅི་སྟེ* ཆོས་° ནི་ དམིགས་མེད་བ་° ། དམིགས་པ་II ཡོད་པར་ད ག་ལ1༠ འགྱུར1• ༎
अनालम्बन एव अयं सन् धर्म उपदिश्यते' । * འགཞི1༠ d° ཞ1 ཚ# སྡུག: l
12,14 ཨའR
ཆོས་རྣམས་སྐྱེས་པ་* མ་ཡིན་ན༄༅ ། འགག་པ་་ འཐད་པར་* མི་* འགྱུར་་ རོ། དེ་ཕྱིར་* དེ་མ་ཐག་° མི་10 རིགས། འགགས་ ན་ རྐྱེན་1• ཡང་I• གང་ཞིག་15 ཡིན་བ༎
འུ་ཆུ• I• ཀ* ཞེj7, ཟླ10 ག ཞP ཚ ན་i1 Rཝཱ14
q14 ཟླ14
15 1
16 ཞིའི

Page #225

12]
MULAMADHYAMAKAKARIKA
11
དངོས་པོ། རང་བཞིན་མེད་རྣམས་ཀྱི། །
ཡོད་པ་༧ གང་ཕྱིར་ ཡོད་མིན་ནཙོ། ། འདི་ ཡོད་པས་ན་༑ འདི་* འབྱུང་” ཞེསto །
བྱ་བ་ འདི་1 ནི་ ཐད་1༔ མ་ཡིན་བ །། སf R་འོ་འt? ཟ བག* Rཞེ་ ཀའ:4| འR? གཙི བ ཞ༧ གཞི° ཞི10 11 བུའ1 ཀ14 ཞ སཞེ་n
རྐྱེན་རྣམས་༧ སོ་སོ་* འདས་པ་ལ༔ ། འབྲས་བུ་* དེ་ ནི་ མེད་པ* ཉིད ། རྐྱེན་རྣམས་ལ་* ནི་ གང་” མེད་པ* །
དེ་ ནི་ རྐྱེན་ལས་1༠ ཇི་ལྟར་ll སྐྱེ་ ༎ न च व्यस्त समस्तेषुप्रत्ययेषुः अस्ति तत् फलं' । nཀའི་ཤ:i° དཀ*1 ཁ བ ཞེན་ ཤ* n@q* གའ? n
ནི་སྡེ་ འབྲས་བུ་ དེ་ མེད་ ཀྱང་། རྐྱེན་༦ དེ་དག་ལས་ སྐྱེ་འགྱུར་ན* ། ཤདུན་མིན་ལས་ ཀྱང་10. འབྲས་བུ་ ནི། ཅི་ཡི་ཕྱིར་ན་ སྐྱེ་1༔ མི་14 འགྱུར15 །།
12

Page #226

182
MOLAMADHYAMAKAKARIKA
(14
འ11 མཁན་ གའི འ* ཆེ:7 བཀའིལ:༠ བཞdཞེ* | ཁཀའི་ག• sའི༠ དགའ1 ཞl• སེedཞི1415 དཞིll t
19. འབྲས་བུ་* རྐྱེན་གྱི་རང་བཞིན་ན ། རྐྱེན་རྣམས་༸ བདག་གི་རང་བཞིན་མིན་། བདག་དངོས་མིན་ལས་* འབྲས་བུ་* གང་་།
དེ་* ནི་ ཇི་ལྟར་ རྐྱེན་རང་ བཞིན་° ༎ फलं च प्रत्ययमयं प्रत्ययाश् च अस्वयंमयाः। བ ཀ° གཞ' ཞ* མd10 དཀ°
14 དེ་ཕྱིར་ རྐྱེན་གྱི་རང་བཞིན་ མིནé རྐྱེན་མིན་རང་བཞིན་༤ འབྲས་བུ་* ནི། ཡོད་མིན་° འབྲས་བུ་ མེད་པས་ན།
རྐྱེན་མིན་༸ རྐྱེན་དུ་“ ག་ལ་° འགྱུར། ། तस्मान् न प्रत्ययमयं न अप्रत्ययमयं फल । འཁཞེt ཏཁའ? མཁཀ-མའག:8 འ:10 |
11 ad.

Page #227

[། འཕགས་པ་ འོད་སྲང་གི ལིའུ་* ཞེས་བྱ་བ་
ཐེག་པ་* ཆེན་པོའི མདོ་ ༎ l 3@་བཞུག°Radf? བཞ° བཞུག°ཀའ་ཤུཏྟའu
1 འོད་སྲུང་། འདི་ལྟ་ སྟེ། དཔེར་ ན༔ སྔགས་* དག་ སྨན་གྱིས་ ཡོངས་སུ་ ཟིན་པའི༔ དུག་གིས་” ནི་ འཆི་བར་བྱེད་ མེ་ ནས་1༠ སོ། འདོ་སྲུང་ll དེ་བཞེན་དུ་19 ཡེ་ཤེས་1 དང་ ཐབས་14 མཁས་པས་15 ཡོངས་སུ་ཟིན་པའི14 བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའ་17 ནི་ ཉོན་མོངས་པའི •18 དྲུག་གིས་10 ཀྱང་ ལོག་པར་ལྡང་བར་བྱེད་༧༠ མི་31 ནས་༧ སོ།1 དེ་ལ་ འདི་སྐད་ ཅེས་བྱ་ སྟེ།2
དཔེར་ན། སྔགས་ཀྱིས་ ཡོངས་སུ་ཟིན་པའི་ དྭག་ ། སྐྱེ་བོ་རྣམས་ལ་ ཉེས་པར་༧ བྱེད་་ མེ་ ནས ། དེ་བཞིན་° བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའ:1༠ ཡེ་ཤེས་ཅན1 ། ཉོན་མོངས་རྣམས་ཀྱིས་1༧ ལོག་ལྡང་བྱེད1 མི་14 ནས་15 ༎ (48)

Page #228

184
KĀSYAPAPARIVARTA
[2 तद्यथाऽपि नाम काश्यप' मन्त्र औषध परिगृहीतं विषं' न° विनिपातགཞི ཞའ1 ཞུ དགll ཞl•ཁ12ཀུlldis 8, འབའ་གl7 རྨུགts@#19 =1 nཆེ་ཞིa 3 thའི་འའིཀ་༧ ༠ u 11 * རྩོན་ ཙR | 2
བགa ཞིn• བཙགཉིས་ जनस्य दोष क्रिययासमर्थ । to fỀ airt 8 here to. ཆེའ1 #l༔ ཙ15 འའ1 u3
1.2 ཏུན་, 10 ཆེའི.
འོད་སྲུང་ འདི་ལྟ་ལྡེ ། དཔེར་ན་* གྲོང་ཁྱེར་ ཆེན་པོ་རྣམས་ ཀྱི་° ལུད་༧ གང་་ ཡིན་པ་ དེ་ ནི་ བུ་རམ་ཤིང་གི་10 ཞིང་དགll དང་ རྒན་གྱི་ ཞིང་དག་ལ་14 ཕན་པར་ གྱུར་པ་1༦ ཡིན་ནོ1༣། འོད་སྲུང་ དེ་བཞིན་དུ་ བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའི་བ༧༠ ཉོན་མོངས་པའི་༧ ལུད་༧ གང་ ཡིན་པ་༧༔ དེ་༧༠ ཡང་༢༠ ཐམས་ཅད་མཁྱེན་པ་ཉིད་ལ་༧7 ཕན་པར ་ 3 གྱར་པ་༢༠ ཡིན་ནོ ༠༠ །། | དེ་ལས་ འདི་སྐད་ ཅེས་
བྱ་སྟེ ། 2
དཔེར་ན་ གྲོང་ཁྱེར་རྣམས་ཀྱི་ མི་གཙང་° ལུད༔ ། དེ་ནི་ བུ་རམ་ ཤིང་གི་ ཞིང་ལ་༧ ཕན །

Page #229

iss
3] ། KĀŚYAPAPARIVARTA
དེ་བཞིན་༸ བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའི་1༠ ཉོན་མོངས་1 ལུད ། དེ་ནི་1• རྒྱལ་བའི•1• ཆོས་ལI• ཕན་བར:1• བྱེད་༩ ། 3 (49) ཞུ གra༔ འི ལ དགའi ཀ་? ན་ བ** ཁཞི* 99 inཝེ་ཁེའུli xགཞིའིཞུ ཀཞིགl@ཞིg14 བla བདh18@14 སdཞིl7 འ1 ཚ དགl གེ གཅེཁག༠ ནུ:ཐ1 ཚa 5 འའའའ17 ག* 8ཨེs7 ཞཞི40 11 ཀཀ * | 2
1. 22 s:, 24 Hའི, 28 གa. ག7:གཞཟཀག ཅུའཨོབ བ་• ཝཚུ་ ཁག་གིR*
ཞུ ཆེmiu ཅnཚ14 ཞིa7 གེ ཆེ་ཁགl༠ འ་ཞl• it I 3
3. 12 གང:, 13 ༩.
འོད་སྲང་ འདི་ལྟ་ སྟེ། དཔེར་ན་༧ འཕོང་རྩལ༔ མ་བསླབས་པ་ ལས་* མཚོན་ཐབས་” སློབ་པ་ དེ་བཞིན་དུ་“ བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའ་ ཐོས་པ་ཉང་བ་ལས་1༠ དམ་པའི་ ཚེས་1༔ རབ་ཏ་རྣམ་པར་འབྱེད་པ་14 དང་ ། དཔྱོད་པ་1• དང་ ། དོན་1༠ འཛིན་པའི་1• ཤས་པར་11 བལྟའོ 1༠ ༎ 1 (50)
24

Page #230

ies
KĀSYAPAPARIVARTA
[ 4
ཞུ m: འི ཁ° དགགཞཚ4 +shཚེག ཁ* གསན། एवम् एव काश्यप अल्पश्रुतस्या० बोधिसत्त्वस्य [ सदु"] धर्म प्रविवय-13 གསatག་བཙུ1༔ ཞུག16 #17 *4ཙ18, 1
༧ GA.
འོད་སྲུང་། དེ་ལྟ་བས་ན། བྱང་ ཆབ་ སེམས་ དཔའ་ དཀོན་ མཆོག་ བརྩེགས་པ་་ ཆེན་པོའ“. ཆོས་ཀྱི་ རྣམ་གྲངས་7 འདི་ལ སློབ་པར ་ འདོད་པས་1༠ ཚལ་བཞིན་དུ་'i ཆོས་ལ་1༧ རབ་ཏུ་སྦྱོར་ བར་1 བྱའོ་ བ 1 འོད་སྲུང། དེ་ལ་" བྱང་ཆབ་སེམས་དཔའི་ ཚལ་བཞིན་དུ་༔ ཆོས་ལ་༦ རབ་ཏུ་སྦྱོར་བ་་ གང་ཞེ་ན་། འདི་ལྟ་སྟེ༔ ། དབུ་མའི་ ལམ་1° ཆོས་ རྣམས་ལ་11 ཡང་དག་པར་13 སོ་སོར་རྟོག་ པའོt༅།། 2 འོད་སྲང་1 དབ་མའི་ ལམ་༧ ཆོས་རྣམས་ལ་༔ ཡང་དག་ པར་* སོ་སོར་ རྟོག་པ་གང་”ཞེ་ན ། 3 འོད་སྲང་། གང་ལ་ བདག་ མེད་པར་ སོ་སོར་རྡོག་པ་་ དང་ ། སེམས་ཅན་མེད་པ་ དང་ ། སྲོག་མེད་པ་ དང་ ། གསོ་བ་མེད་པ་” དང་ ། སྐྱེས་བ་མེད་པ་ དང་ ། གང་ཟག་མེད་པ་”དང་ ། ཤེད་ལས་སྐྱེས་མེད་པ་ དང་ ། ཤེད་བ་ མེད་པརl སོ་སོར་ རྡོག་པ་' སྡེ། འོད་སང་' འདི་ནི་ དབུ་

Page #231

187
5]
KĀSYAPAPARIVARTA མའི་13 ལམ་1* ཆོངས་རྣམས་ལ་17 ཡང་དག་པར་18 སོ་སོར་ རྟོག་པ་10 ཞེས་བྱའོ༔༠ ། 4 (52) __ तस्मिन् तहि काश्यप इह महारत्नकूटे धर्म पर्याये' शिक्षितु कामेन
ཁའིa Rཚེ11 ཚt༧ཀུཆེ#1 གཞིའཚ14 | 1 ཀ༔ མ་རྟགག་ haito gia sư gan to ga Hatalorill gear18 | 2 कतमा' च काश्यप सर्वधर्माणां' भूत प्रत्यवेक्षा । 3 यत्र' काश्यप
ག ཞཞིག* འབཞ5- ad- -ཞུན9-tgཚ10-ཀཞཞ-l1 མཁལེག14 | རྣགན14 ཏག༠༠ ད་རྟག14 བཀག15 བཞི་ཝ14 ཁtail7 ཞུatཀ་གl | 4
1. 3 Gན. .. 3 =faཆའཁ, ) གགན་, 10 nfའི་འ. 3. ༧ གག་, 3 naqའ.
4.8
364.
འོད་སྲང་ གཞན་ ཡང་“ དབུ་མའི་ ལམ་ཅ ཆོས་རྣམས་ལ་ས་ ཡང་དག་པར་ སོ་སོར་རྟོག་པ་*ནི། གང་° གཟུགས་ལ་1༠ རྟག་ པར 11 ཡང་ སོ་སོར་1 མི་1 རྡོག4 ། མི་རྟག་པར་15 ཡང་ སོ་སོར་1༠ མི་17 རྟོག་པ་1°དང་ ། འོད་སྲུང་19 དེ་བཞིན་ད་༧༠ ཚོར་བ་དང་༧1 ། འདུ་ཤེས་ དང་ ། འདུ་བྱེད་རྣམས་༧༠ དང་ ། རྣམ་པར་ཤེས་པ་ལ་༧• གང་ རྟག་པར་༧༠ ཡང་ སོ་སོར:47 མི་༣

Page #232

KASYAPAPARIVARTA
[ 6
རྟོག་པ་སྟེ།
རྟོག° ། མི་རྟག་པར་༣༠ ཡང་སོ་སོར་‘ མི་ འོད་སྲུང་༠‘ འདི་ནི་༠༠ དབུ་མའི་༠༠ ལམ་’ ཆོས་ རྣམས་ལ་༠༠ ཡང་དག་པར་༠ སོ་སོར་རྟོག་པ་o ཞེས་བྱའོ↓1 (53)
188
11
5
22
पुनर्' अपरं ' काश्यप' मध्यमा प्रतिपद् धर्माणां भूत' प्रत्यवेक्षा' या ' 6vQ10 a13 fivq! ཊི Q@1°14 {!7 afi6cq! fi ༩༢ཀྱེཀླ[16’18 | [25 མུQIWT:21 € WT:2 Gwuri RInQ4728 fi༥q༠རྙfཊིཕལ་ཇེ་བ[27’20 ཊ° wi@Qq༠ ཛཱཊི ཕམ@131 ཙགཊི41 6Qq°4 wSecur༠ niཊིvཊཱ7 €qwfvri ཊྭཱོཊxཁ་
6
31,33
ཛཱ༢°5
ཀྵུn* ] 1
40
19 +༢༢༢, 20 rú.
8
1
6
.6
3
འོད་སྲུང༔ གཞན་༔ ཡང་༔ དབ་མའི་“ ལམ་* ཆོས་རྣམས་ལ་o ཡང་དག་པར་” སོ་སོར་རྟོག་པ་* ནི ། གང་` སའི་༔ ཁམས་ལ་ རྟག་པར་ ཡང་༔ སོ་སོར་ མི་ རྟོག ། མི་རྟག་པར་༔ ཡང་10 སོ་སོར་” མི་2༔ རྟོག་པ་° དང་ ། 2 དེ་བཞིན་ད་` ཆའི་ ཁམས་ དང་ ། མེའི་“ ཁམས་* དང་ ། རླུང་གི་" ཁམས་” དང་ ། ནམ་མཁའི་• ཁམས་༔ དང་ ། རྣམ་པར་ ཤེས་པའི་༠ ཁམས་ལ་” རྟག་པར་2 ཡང་1° སོ་སོར་∶* མི་2* རྟོག་`0 ། མིི་རྟག པར་∶” ཡང་3༔ སོ་སོར་30

Page #233

19
7 ]
KĀŚYAPAPARIVARTA མི་° རྟོག་པ་**སྟེ།3 འོད་སྲུང་། འདི་ནི་༧ དབ་མའི་༧ ལམ་་ ཆོས་རྣམས་ལ་* ཡང་དག་པར་” སོ་སོར་རྟོག་པ་ ཞེས་བྱའོ ། 4 (54)
r! gachasའc༧ ཀ? Rཁག་ འི དགའrs #l* གཞིའ° ཞི སའཚl11 | 2 ག ཝ་འཁུ གི*ra q*འ=7 གou8
འRཞ19su #15 Rq14འི ་ཁའ1451༠ ཟླ༠ གཞི་གl? འི མཁག19, 11 |3 ཀན ཀའི དགགl བཀའ* གའི་ཞུ་ sds ° བཀའ་ག7, 4
1. 1གལ, ༧ གr; ཤུn:, 4 གཤག་, 6 , གii, 7 r, 8 nཤཞིཞ, ༔ 5, 10 གས. ༅ 1 ཞ, 13, 18 གཞི.
འོད་སྲང་ གཞན་ ཡང་༧ དབུ་མའི་ ལམ་ ཆོས་རྣམས་ལ་ ཡང་དག་པར་” སོ་སོར་རྟོག་པ་* ནི་ གང་° མིག་གི་1༠ སྐྱེ་མཆེད་ལ་'' རྟག་པར་1 ཡང་1༅ སོ་སོར་14 མི་15 རྡོག་བ། མི་རྟག་པར་17 ཡང་1༔ སོ་སོར་19 མི་༧༠ རྟོག་པ་༧l དང་ །1 དེ་བཞིན་ད་" རྣ་བ་ དང་། སྣ་དང་། ལྕེ་དང་། ལུས་”དང་། ཡིད་ཀྱི་ སྐྱེ་མཆེད་ རྣམས་ལ་༑ རྟག་པར་* ཡང་° སོ་སོར་1° མི་11 རྟོག:1•། མི་རྟག་ པར་1༔ ཡང་1• སོ་སོར་1༠ མི•1༔ རྟོག་པ་17 སྟེ ། 2 འོད་སྲུང་

Page #234

i90
KAŠYAPAPARIVARTA འདི་ནི་༔ དབ་མའི་༧ ལམ་་ ཆོས་རྣམས་ལ་ ཡང་དག་པར༔ སོ་སོར་ རྡོག་པ་ ཞེས་བྱའོ༎ 3 (55)
ཙུག་ ག༔ དགl ཨག་• གའི་ཞུགtiཝ ཞ བཀའག* ཀr° བའ10 གཡའའགུl ཞ15 R༩ཀl fཞིབའཁེ་ཞགl471༠ ཀ༧༠ ལོའིཞ17 इति प्रत्यवेक्षा 1 | 1 इयमुच्यते काश्यप मध्यमा प्रतिपद् धर्माणां भूतप्रत्यवेक्षा। ཞུ་ ཞཅུa?arsq*དཞུདྡོགཞཙྪཡའའག7 ཟླll Rཁན {འི ཁr10 1 ཀl༠ གཞིཀཱl༠ ཙR Iམཁག15.11,2 རྣལཱ ཀR8 ནགབl གག° བdཞུ༔ གd ཞ*ཁཞག°, 3
1. 18 གཞི.
འོད་སྲང་། རྟག་ ཅེས་བྱ་བ་ འདི་་ནི་ མཐའ་° གཅིག་༧ གོ ། མི་རྟག་” ཅེས་བྱབ་* འདི་” ནི་ མཐའ:10 གཉིས་I སོ །། 1 མཐའ:1 དེ༔ གཉིས་ཀྱི་ དབུས་ གང་ ཡིན་པ་“ དེ་”ནི་ དཔྱད་དུ་མེད་པ* ། བསྟན་ད་མེད་པ། རྟེན་མ་ཡིན་པ་° ། སྣང་བ་མེད་པ། རྣམ་པར་ རིག་པ་མེད་པ ། གནས་མེད་པ་1༔ སྟེ། འོད་སྲུང་I• འདི་15 ནི་ དབ་མའི:10 ལམ་1? ཆོས་རྣམས་ལ་1༔ ཡང་དག་པར་1 སོ་སོར་ རྡོག་པ་" ཞེས་བྱའོ། ། 2 (56) .
नित्यम् इति' काश्यप' अयम् एकोऽन्तः । अनित्यम्' इति काश्यप ཀ་° ཚིག་li s:19 1གནཙ *ནག་ ༩ ཡིག་ཞིག་ ཀ་• l?

Page #235

19
10 ]
KĀŚYAPAPARIVARTA अरूपि अनिदर्शनम्' अनाभासम्॥ अविज्ञप्तिकम् अप्रतिष्ठम् अनिकेतम् । རྣག15 ཏགཞི11 ད་རྟག14 གl༠ འིཞུl? གil ཊi° བཞག༠༠ | 2
.. 1 ཀ་:, ༠ འh, 10 གགན.
འོད་སྲང་ བདག་ ཅེས་བྱ་བ་ དེ་ ནི་ མཐའ་ གཅིག་* གོ ། བདག་མེད་་ ཅེས་བྱ་བ་* དེ" ནི་ མཐའ:10 གཉིས་ll སོ །། 1 མཐའ་ དེ་༔ གཉིས་ཀྱི་ དབས་་ གང་ ཡིན་པ་༦ དེ་ ནི་ དཔྱད་དུ་ མེད་པ༄༅ །།2 (57)
སོག་གi ་ཞི བརྟགབl ཀཀཀ མོའ:*, འག7 ia *ག་° @གོi0 ya:ll | 1 ཞ༧ འགའ་ ཀ' ཞུ? a l。 2
.. 1 :, ༧ གེ་, or གླའགl:, ༠ འའི. འོད་སྲུང་ ཡོད་ ཅེས་བྱ་བ་ དེ་ ནི་ མཐའ་༧ གཅིག་༧ གོ ། མེད་་ ཅེས་བྱ་བ་ དེ་ ནི་ མཐའ་བ༠ གཉིས་སོ།1 དེ་' གཉིས་ ཀྱི༔ དབས་ གང་་ ཡིན་པ་* འོད་སྲང་° འདི་” ནི་ དབ་མའི་ ལམ་ ཆོས་རྣམས་ལ“ ཡང་དག་པར་I སོ་སོར་རྟོག་པ་ཞེས་བྱའོ1༅།། 2 (60)
གཅི ཆི༔ དཞགt ༧ག་• དེབའ:5༑ ཞ ཞི* *ག་° མིགེi sའ:10,1 ཞུ༔ ག: གི: ཀ ཁ? ས@i རྟའགཙ གག* གའི་བནུ གdi0 ཁil བཀག | 2

Page #236

༄༅། སྙན་ངག་ མེ་ལོང་༔ ༎ ll %lsvatcai:° u
2
། ན་མ་ ཨརྻ་
ཨཱརྻ་མཉྫུ་ཤྲཱི་ཀུ་མཱར་བྷཱ་ཏཱ་ཡ །
IL #w! cm°7sg°rt+oH°dm° ][
༎འཕགས་པ་* འཇམ་*དཔལ་* གཞོན་ནུར་ གྱུར་པ་ལ་
ཕྱག་ འཚལ་ལོ༔
ཙ་ཏུརྨ་ཁ་ མུ་ཁཱམྦྷོ་ཛ་ བ་ན་ཧཾ་ས་ བ་ན་ཧཾ་ས་བ་དྷརྨ་མ ༎
།།
चतुर्मुख' मुख' अम्भोज' वन'हंस' वधू' मंम' ।
གདོང་བཞི་╚གདོང་གི་ པད་ཚལ་གྱི ། །ངང་པའི་oབ་མོ་ ཐམས་ཅད་དཀར * ༎
ང་
11
མཱ་ན་སེ་ ར་མ་དཱཾ་ དཱིགྷཾ་ ས་་ྦཤུལླཱ་ ས་ར་སྭ་དཱི ༎ ? ༎
༎
wird॰ wci॰ ཚཱ10 qsc05tI! Q<&ཊི1? [ 1
2
དབྱངས་ཅན་མ་‘* ནི་ ཁོ་བོ་ཡི’༎ཡིད་ལ་ རིང་ད་° གནས་པར་མཛོད༅༎

Page #237

13
p
KÁVYĀDARśA བྷུཉྫུ་ཤཱསྡུ་ཎི་སཾ་ཧྲི་ཏུ། །པྲ་ཡོ་གཱ་ན་པ་ལ་ཀླུ་ཙ༎་
पूर्व शास्त्राणि संहृत्य प्रयोगान् उपलक्ष्य च । བསྟན་བཅོས་”སྔ་མ་རྣམས་དེ་བསྡུས་ཤིང་།། སྦྱོར་བ་རྣམས་
ཀྱང་* ཉེར་མཚོན་ཏེ* ། ཡ་གྲྭ་ས་མཐོ་ཨམྦྷ་བྷི ། །ཀྲི་ཡ་དེ་ ཀྭ་བྱ་ལཀྵ ཎཾ n༢༎
ཀ་ཁའ? བརྟགཞི:8 གཞི° གོ་ཤཱ1°གun 2 ཇི་ལྟར་ནས་བཞིན་? བདག་གིས་* ནི། ། སྙན་ངག་དག་གི་10
མཚན་ཉིད་11 9° །༢ ཨིཧ་ ཤི་ནུ་ཤིཏྟཱནཾ ། །ཤི་ན་མ་པི་ སརྦ་ཟླ །
gt Req=f མིའའ༔ ཏིཏཾ བཞ8 | འདི་ན་ ཀུན་ཏུ་མཆོག་རྣམས་ཀྱིས། །རྗེས་སུ་བསྟན་ཅི
དང་ ལྷག་མའི• ཡང་6 ། བ་ཙཱ་མེ་བ་ པྲ་ས་དེ་ན ། ། ལོ་ཀ་ཡཱ་ཏཱ་ པྲ་བརྡདེ་ །༣།།
གཞཞ? ཁ* གབ་ཞིག° ཀ19 མndཞིn3 ཚིག་རྣམས་་ ཉིད་ཀྱི་“དྲིན་གྱིས་” ནི། ། འཇིག་རྟེན་ལུགས་ལ་10
འཇག་པར་བྱེད11 །༣

Page #238

14
KĀVYADARSA
[5 ཨ་ང་མནྟན་མ༔ སྲིད་སྣ །ཛཱ་ཡ་ཏེ་ བྷ་བ་ན་ཏ་༎་
ཚུན་ མཁ:༄༅ རྒྱཁ* ཁའི* ཤུབའག༠ | གལ་ཏེ་” སྒྲས་“བོད་” སྣང་བ་ཡིས1° ། །འཁོར་བ་11
གསལ་བར་1༔ མ་ བྱས་ན• ༎ ཡ་དི་ཤབད་ཧྥ་ཡཾ་ ཛྭ་ཏི། ར་སཾ་ས་རཱ ན་ དྭི་པུ་དེ n༤༎
ཞི7 ཞ* ་ཚ ག་ཚོi° ག་ཁ་འགt #1 འགཞི31• i།4 འཇིག་རྟེན་གསུམ་པོ༔ མཐའ་དག་་ འཇི ། ། སྨྲག་རུམ་ མན་པ་
ཉིད་དུ་ འགྱུར* །། ༤ ཨ་དི་ར་ཛ་ཡ་ཤོ་བིམྤ། །མ་དཀཾ་ བྲུ་བུ་ བདྨ་ཡཾ n
आदि राज यशो बिम्बम् आदर्श प्राप्य वाङ्मयं' । སྔོན་གྱི་རྒྱལ་པོ་གྲགས་པའི་གཟུགས་། ། ངག་གི་རང་བཞིན་
མེ་ལོང་༔ ཐོབཙ །། དེ་ཤཱ་མ་ས་ནི་དྷ་ནེ་པ། ། ན་ སྦ་ཡམྤ་ཤུ་ ན་ཤ་ཏི ༎ ༄༅ །། ཟིnཆ་ བའoཞེ°གི༠ #ll 1 བཀ1༔ གཞི14 u5 དེ་དག་* ཉེ་བར་མི་གནས་° ཀྱང་1°། །རང་ཉིད་1• ཉམས་པ་14
མེད་ལ་ལྟོས༔ * ༎

Page #239

195
KĀVYĀDARŚA གོ གོ ཀཱ་མ་དུ་གླུ་ ས་མྱཀ ། ། པྲ་ཡུཀ་ མ་རྨཏེ་ བུ་དྷེ༔ ཀ་
ཚt :* དཞཙུག་° འདུ༔ ཤུག* ཁཞི༔ 2:7 \u མཁས་པས་ཡང་དག་ རབ་སྦྱར་བའི* །། ངག་ ནི་1 །
འདོད་འཇོའི་ • བ་རུ་༧ *བཤད །། དཀྵ་ཡུཀ་ པུ་ནགོ་དཾ ། ། པྲ་ཡོཀཿ སེ ་བ་ ཤཾ་ས་ཧི ། །
ཤུགr* གc° ཞ10 གེ་ཞུ:I གI• འཁ1༠ གཞི14 us དེ་1• ཉིད་བ༠ ཉེས་པར་སྦྱར་* ན་ སླར། ། སྦྱོར་པོ་13 བ་ལང་ཉིད་1༠
བརྗོད་བྱེད་• s ད་དཝ་མ་ཡི་ ནོ་པེཀཾ། །ཀཱ་ངེ་ དུཊྚ་ ཀ་ཐཉྩ་ན༎ gt ཁཀ ཀ ཀ༔ གེག ད་ཆེ༔ ཙ7 དག* , དེ་ཕྱིར་' སྙན་ངག་དག་ལ་* སྐྱོན ། ། ཆང་བར་གྱུར༔ ཀྱང་* རྩི་
ཞིག་ལྟར༔ ༎ སུདྭ་པུ སུནྡ་ར་མ་པི ། །ཤྲཱི་ཏྲེ་ཎ་ཀེ་ན་ དུ་དྷགཾ n༧།།
གཞུ° 10 འཁ1 གི1 1༔ #i༔ #15 u7 བཏང་སྙོམས་* མི་“ བྱ་* ལུས་1° མཛེས་བཟཀྱང་1 ། | *སྐྱོན་ཐ
གཅིག་ གིས་14 ནི་ སྐལ་ངན་18 འགྱུར །།།།

Page #240

16
KĀVYĀDARÍA
[9 ག་ཎ་དོ་ཥཱ་ན་ཤས་ཛྷ ། ། ཀ་ཐོ་ བི་བྷ་ཛ་དེ་ ཛ་ན།
ག•གེཞ 1: 44 ཊི་ཞེ=: | སྐྱེ་བོ་° བསྟན་བཅོས་མི་ཤེས་པས། ། ཡོན་ཏན་' སྐྱོན་དག་
ཇི་ལྟར་༔ དབྱེ་ ༎ ཀི་མནྡྷ་སདྷི་ཀཱ་རོསྟི ། ། ཆུ་པ་བྷེ་ད་པལ་དྷཱི་ཤུ། ༨།།
hn? མག* གanm°si° གu ཞ14 བའ1༠ in 8 གཟུགས་ཀྱི1 དབྱེ་བ་19དམིགས་པའི་ སྐབས །། ལོང་བ་དག་ལ་
ཡོད་དམ་10 ཅི* ། - ༎ ཨ་ པྲ་ཛྙཱ་ནཾ བྱཱ ཧྥདྷི། །མ་བྷིསནྡྲ་ཡ་ སུ་ར་ཡ། ། अतः प्रजानां व्युत्पत्तिम् अभिसन्धाय सूरयः । དེ་ཕྱིར་l མཁས་པས་* སྐྱེ་དག་རྣམས* །།བྱེ་བྲག་རྡོགས་ལ་༧
མངོན་དགོངས་ནས༔ ༎ བ་ཙཱ༔ བི་ཙི་དུ་མགྲྭ་ཎཱ'' ། ། ནི་བ་བནྡྷ༔ ཀྲི་ཡ་'“བི་དྷི་མt'།། ༄༅།།
གཞis Rཛིའ?ndnf ཞིའི་འ:༧ ihn10@quu9 རྣམ་བཀྲ་”ལམ་ལྡན་ཙ ཚིག་རྣམས་ཀྱི༄༅ །། བྱ་བའི་1༠
ཆོ་ག་• ངེས་པར་སྦྱར༄༅ །ཁ།
ཛ
ནཾ
arr
0)c

Page #241

Is7
KĀVYĀDARÍA དེ ཤ་རི་རཾ་ ཙ་ ཀཱ་བྷ་ནཱ།། ་མ་ལཾ་ཀཱ་རབྷ་ དརྱ་ ༎་
at th' ད་ཆག་ཞ༔ ཚོནg* ༔ ནུ#r:7 | དེ་དག་གིས་* ནི་ སྙན་ངག་གི་ ། ། ལུས་ དང་༸ རྒྱན་*
ཡང་བ རབ་ཏུ་བསྟན་ །། ཤ་རཱི་རཾ་དཱ་བ་དིཥྛ ཐོ ། ། བྱ་བ་སྨིན་ པ་དྲ་བ་ལི ། ༡༠།།
གིr བཞ༩༧ g10 niu m14 ཞami u 10 ལུས་ནི་ཙ རེ་ཞིག་° འདོད་པ་ཡི་° ། ། དོན་གྱིས་II རྣམ་བཅད་11
ཚིག་གི་ཕྲེང་1༅ །། ༡༠།། པ་དཾ་ ག་དུཉྩ་ མི་ཐ ཉྩ།། དདི་དྷེ ་བ་ བྱ་བ་སྨྲེ་དམ།།
ཁ1 ན བ འི་ བ ཞ* ཆིགཁ7 ཀ་ཁིས། | དེ་ ཡང་ ཚིགས་བཅད་། ལྷག་པ་ དང་༅ །། སྤེལ་མ་སོ
རྣམ་གསུམ་° ཉིད་དུ་་ གནས* ༎ པ་ཏུ་ཉྩ་ཏུ་དི་ དཙྩ །། བྲིཏྟཾ་ ཛཱདི་རི་དི་ དྭ ་ི་དྷ༎ ༡༡ ༎
'° བཤུul1༠ ཁu rl g#1 བག1༔ ཞི1 ཚིགiཝ u 11 ཚིགས་བཅད་རྐང་བཞི་པ་1༠ དེ་ ཡང་1 །། བྲིཏྟཾ1
ཛདི་1• ཞེས་ོ རྣམ་གཉིས་༦ ། ༡༡ །།

Page #242

KAVYADARSA
[ 12 སྨནོ་བི་ཙིཏི ་ས་ཀ་ལ ། ། སྡུ་ཏྲཔ སྦྱོ་ ནི ད་རྙི5 །།
ཞེ•Rཞིof ཉན༔ ཙ Rཞia: | དེ་ཡི༔ སྦྱོས་པ་* དེ་དག་ ནི ། ། སྡེབ་སྦྱོར་། གཞུང་དུ་
ངེས་པར་བསྟན །། ས་ བཏུ ནོ བ་བི་ཀཱ་ཎཾ།། གམྦྷཱི་རཾ་ ཀྭ་བྱ་ས་ག་རཾ། ༡༢ བ་ ཞིག* * Rའིf9 གl1 དཞ1༔ གri u 12 རིག་* དེ་' སྙན་ངག་རྒྱ་མཚོ་ ནི། ། ཟབ་མོར་18འཇག་
འདོད་རྣམས་ཀྱི་1° གྲུ ། ༡༢ །།

Page #243

།། གཟུགས་ཀྱི་ཉི་མའི་༸ རྣམ་ཐར ཐོ །།
l ༤ག་གཞིqཏar°u
THE STORY OF RŪPĀDITYA. དང་པོ་ གཟུགས་ཀྱི་ ཉི་མ་ རྒྱལ་པོའི་ ཕོ་བྲང་དུ་ གདན་ འདྲེན་པའི་ First Beauty- sun king's place in marriage
प्रथमः रूप- आदित्य- राजस्य प्रासादे विवाहལེའུ་ འ ཆད་པ་ལ། | དེ་ ཡང་ རྒྱ་གར་ གྱི་ chapter (is) described. That and (in the) India of परिच्छेदः वर्ण्यते। । तत् च भारत
ཡུལ་ གྲོང་ཁྱེར་ སེམས་ཀྱི་བློ་གྲོས་ ཞེས་བྱ་བ་ན ། 2 country, (in the) town of Mind-understanding named. देशे
འR i n- na- བriན | 2. ཡབ་རྒྱལ་པོ ། ་ རྒྱ་གར་ སྐད་དུ། ཙནདྲ་སེན ། The father-king of India the language in Candrasena. भारत- . भाषायां
चन्द्रसेनः, བོད་ སྐད་ དུ། ཟླ་བའི་དེད་དཔོན ། 3 '་ Tibet of the language in Zla.baḥi.ded.dpon. The mother གེe
भाषायां जल्.व'इ.देद. दपोन। 3
माता

Page #244

200
RŪPĀDITYAKATHA
[6
རྒྱ་གར་ སྐད་དུ། དེ་བ་ཤྲཱི། བོད་ སྐད་ དུ། of India the language in God-beauty. Tibet of the language in भारत- भाषायां देवश्रीः, भोट- भाषायां ལྷའི་དཔལ་མོ ། 4 སྲས་ ཆེ་བ་རྒྱ་གར་ སྐ ད་དུ། lhaḥi.dpal.mo. The son elder of India the language in द'इ. दपल. मो। 4 पुत्रो ज्येष्ठो भारत- भाषायां ཙན་དྲ་སེང་ཧ། བོད་ སྐད་དུ ། ཟླ་བ་སེང་གེ །5 Candrasimha, of Tibet the language in Zla.ba.sei.ge.
བཀd:, ཀ-- ཤIག་ཀi ཤུ ,4.q.འི་ཚ 15 སྲས་ ཆུང་བ་ རྒྱ་གར་ སྐ ད་དུ། ཙནདྲ་ཀུ་མ་ར། Son younger of India the language in Candrakumāra, पुत्रः कनिष्ठो भारत
चन्द्रकुमारः, བོད་ སྐ ད་དུ། ཟླ་བ་གཞོན་ ན།6 Tibet of the language in Zla. ba. gžon. nu. ale
ཀུ.6. q. Tལེa. ཤུ u 6 ཁོང་ལ་ མངའ་ཐང་གིས་ ་དབང་ད་བྱས་ན ། འབངས་
by power right of possession in subjects ___ तस्य शक्तया अधिकृते
भाषायां
iའ་
भाषायां
His
तस्य
qn:

Page #245

14]
RŪPADITYAKATHĀ
གྲོང་ཁྱེར་ འབུམ་ཚོ་ སུམ་ཅུ་སོ་དྲུག ། 7 ནོར་བུ་
towns
lacs
नगराणां लक्षाणि
བང་མཛོད་ སུམ་
treasuries three
कोशानां
ཁཱི
gold handle with,
स्वर्णमुष्टीनि, 9
ལྷུང་བཟེད ། 10 རྟ་
alms bowl,
fNuvui, 10
རབ་
གསེར་གྱི་ཡུ་བ་ཅན ། 9 འདོད་དགུ་
very
सु
E
རེན་པོ་ཆེའི་
thirty-six, of precious stones and gems
པཱཎÄR, 7
ཀ་
रत्नानां
དཀར་པོ་
white
श्वेतानि
བརྒྱ་ དྲུག་ཅུ །8
hundred sixty,
-HTE:, 8
26
horse naturally
མ: स्वभावेन
གདགས་
umbrellas
छत्राणि
desired things producing
-
प्रदं
ངང་པ་
ཕར་ཤེས ། 11
བརྟན་
སྣ་
strong (with) nose
གdc
འབྱུང་བའི་ བསམ་གཏན་གྱི་
201
ང་
m:
ལི་ཁྲི་ལྟར་
དམར་བ ། 12
vermilion-like
red, ཨེ་ཛིཝ॰,
Q:
सिन्दूर--
འདོད་འཇོ་བའི་ བ །13 མཧེ་ ཞོ་མོཆེ་ སྨྲ་མཁན་ ནེ་ཙོ །14 desire-yielding cow,13 she-buffalo milch,talking
ཞུ,13
महषी gཡཱཝཊ་ི, lh:
flying-knowing,
ssddt:, 11
yoga of
ག
གླང་པོ་ཆེ་
elephant
12
parrot,
36:, 14

Page #246

-202
RŪPĀDITYAKATHĀ
སྒོ་ ཁྱི་
འཛིན་
door-dog that
to catch
-་་;
ग्रहण
དྷ་
ཤེས ། 15 རྫ་འཕྲུལ་གྱི་ ཞགས་པ །
but does not know how to let go, miraculous noose |
ATIR:, 15
ऋद्धि
T:,
ཕག་པ་
boar
[6:
གཏོང་
ཕལ་ཁ །
white,
འེཊཿ:,
མི་
Aponage,
{HT:, 17
འདོད་པའེ་
desired
[20
འཕེལ་ འགྲི་བ་མེད་པའི་ མེ་ཏོག་གི་ ལྡུམ་ར །16 བློན་པོ་ རིག་པ་ཅན་
learned
growing not fading flower garden, minister वर्धमान SEIཊཿ, 16ཎུfRE:
अग्लान
ཨ་པོ་ན་གེ །7 རེགས་ རེགས་
g64
ཤས་
knows,
विद्वान
རྔོན་པའི་ བུ་ལ་སོགས་ཏེ ། 18
-
ངན་
caste
low
hunter's
331:6
हीन व्याध- सुतादयः
དྷྭ 18
ལོངས་སྤྱོད་ བསམ་གྱིས་མི་ཁྱབ་པ་ ཡོད་པ་ལས ། 19
enjoyments unthinkable
सम्भोगाः
अचिन्त्याः
sons, etc. and
were.
-
273:|19
དས་ རེ་ཞིག་གི་ ཚེ ཡབ་རྒྱལ་པོ་ ཟླ་བའི་དེད་དཔོན་ ན་ རེ ། སྲས
ང་
So
काल
once the father-king Candrasena said to the son
एकस्मिन
राजपिता
चन्द्रसेनः
आह
पुत्रं

Page #247

203
21 ]
RŪPĀDITYAKATHA ཆེ་བ་ ཟླ་བའི་སེང་གེ་ལ ། 20 ཀྱི ་རྒྱལ་བུ ། elder Chandrasimha : 20 O prince, ज्येष्ठ चन्द्रसिंहम। भो राजपुत्र,
འདབ་ཆགས་ གཤོག་པ་ ཆགས་པ་ དང་ ། A bird (with) a wing broken, and पक्षी
पक्षः' भन्न' च སྟག་ལ་ རི་མོ་ མེད་པ་ དང་ ། A tiger stripes without, and व्यात्रः ་བཤla: སེངགེ་, གངས་ དང་ བྲལ་བ་ དང་།། A lion Himalayas deprived of and सिंहः हिम- . वियुक्तः च ཉ་མོ་ མཚོ་ནས་ ཐོན་པ་ དང་ ། À fish from the pond come out, and གོ་n: सरसो निर्गतः च རྒྱལ་པོ་ རྒྱལ་ རིགས་ མེད་པ་རྣམས །། Kings
royal family राजानो राज- कुल- हीनाः ।
without

Page #248

204
RŪPADITYAKATHA
[ 25
you
དཔེ་དོན་མཚངས་པས ། 21 གྲོ ང་ཁྱེར་ སེམས་ཀྱི་བློ་གྲོས་ཀྱི་ are in comparison equal. So the town Mind-understanding of
उपमार्थेन समा इति । 21 ... 'नगरस्य चित्त मति མངའ་རིས་ འདི་ ཁྱོད་ལ་ འབོག་རན་ འདག་པས །22 dominion this to you to make over time is. TIsq- ཟག་ བྷཟེ གin? དཆེ་བཞིའི ཙྩཞ1 22
ང་ རྒས ། ལྷ་ གཞོན ། རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ ཁྱོད་ཀྱིས་ I am old, you are young. The kingdom अहं जीर्णः। त्व तरुणः। राज्यं
त्वं । སྐྱོང་ ཞེས་ གསུངས་པ་ དང་ ། 23 ་ སྲས་ ན་རེ ། protect, this said. And the son said: पालय इति आह च। 23 पुत्र आह དང་པོ་ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ མེས་ཁ་གཉིས་ཀྱིས་ བསྐྱངས།།24 First the kingdom by two forefathers was protected. प्रथमं राज्यं पूर्वपुरुषाभ्यां पालितम् । 24 བར་ད་ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ ཕ་ཇོ་གཉིས་ཀྱིས་ བསྐྱངས། 25 In the middle the kingdom father and grandfather protected. मध्ये
ཁིglའཁཛུཀ་ ག@q | 25
राज्यं

Page #249

205
29 ]
RŪPĀDITYAKATHA ད་ནི་ རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ བདག་ལ་ གདོད་པ་ལ།། 26 Now the kingdom to me is given. इदानी राज्य
《| 26 རྒྱལ་སྲིད་ འ དི་ལ་ འཛིན་ ལུགས་ རྣམ་པ་གཉིས།། Of the kingdom this in holding the policy is two-fold,
राज्यस्य अस्य धारणे नयो ཞིཞིus,
ཕྱི་ ནང་ ། 27 གང་ དགྱེས་ ཡབ་ ཡུམ་ outside (and) inside. Which is choosable father and mother
གg: གོའ: | 27 1: བགq: hའ་ བའ་ བཀའ་གྲོས མཛོད །། 28 ཞེས་ ཞུས་པས ། ཡབ་ ཡུམ་གྱིས་
This asked father mother उपदेशं करोतु। 28 इति पृष्टे पिता माता
ཁྱོད་ ། ཟེར་ བ ཞིན་སྐྱོང་ན་ ཚེ་ འདིར་ (said) by you what is said according to if protect then here
उक्तम् अनुमृत्य पालयसि चेत् तदा इह བདེ་ཞིང་ སྐྱིད་པ་ ཕྱི་མ་ འབྱས་བ་ ཆེ །29 ཕྱི་པའི་ happiness happiness and after fruit great. Outside सुख
ཐེ་ བ ཞའ་ ཡཱནཾ མཛྷའུ | 29 གང་
advice
do.
त्वया

Page #250

206
RŪPĀDITYAKATHA
[ 32
and
ལུགས་ ལྟར་ སྐྱོང་ ན་ མཐ་ ་ དང་ རྫ་འཕྲལ་ way according to protect if power
miracle བཀ- གཤུག་ག་ གཞཀའི ཤེའག ;
__ अद्भुत ཤིན་ཏུ་ཆེ། མངའ་ཐང་ དཔུང་ དང་ ཡན་ལག་ very great might army with members
अतिमहत्, पराक्रमः बल सह अङ्गन འཛོམས་ 30 ད་ལན་ འོ་སྐོལ་ སྙིགས་མའི་ approaches together. 30 This time (for) us impure ... समागच्छति।
इदानीं अस्माभिः अविशुद्धདས་ ཀྱི་ འགྲོ་བ་རྣམས་ ཞི་བས་ འདལ་བར་ དཀའ་བས ། 31 time of people peace with to discipline difficult. कालस्य (कलियुगस्य) जनानां शमेन विनयनं दुष्करम् । 31 དྲག་པོའི་ ལས་ལ་ བརྟེན་ ནས་ ལྷ་དབང་ཕྱག་ Terrible deeds having recourse to Mahādeva having उग्र- कर्माणि आश्रित्य महादेवं སྒྲུབ་ པས་དེ ། རེ་ཞིག་ ཕྱི་པའི་ རྗེས་ སུ་འབྲངས་པར་བྱའོ ། 32 propitiated just the outside one is to be followed. साधयित्वा
གཞུnda:132
तावत्
བe:

Page #251

34]
RŪPĀDITYAKATHA
207
བཞིན་
नय
ཐ་མ་ ནང་ པའི་ ལུགས་ At the end the inside (Buddhist) way according to अन्ते आन्तर
अनुस.रेण སྐྱོང་བའི་ སྨོན་ལམ་ དང་
རྟེན་འབྲེལ་ of the protection supplication and dependent origination पालनप्रणिधानं च
प्रतीत्यसमुत्पादम् སྒྲིགས་ ཞེས་ གསུངས་ནས་ རྒྱ ལ་སྲིད་ བུ་ལ་ ཕོག ། 33 arrange this having said the kingdom to the son gave. उपकल्पय इति उक्ता राज्यं पुत्राय ददौ। 33
དེ་ནས་ རྒྱལ་པོ་ ཟླ་བ་སེང་གེ་ དེས ། གླང་པོ་ཆེ་ Then king Candrasimha that elephant अथ राजा चन्द्रसिंहः सः हस्तिनं
ལི་ཁྲི་ལྟར་ དམར་བ་ གཅིག་གི་ ཐོག་དྲངས་པས། with the trunk vermilion-like red one नासं सिन्दूरसदृश लोहित- एक
नेतेति གླང་པོ་ཆེ་ དང་ ། རྡོ་ དང་ ། མ་ཧེ་ དང་ ། 34 ཤིང་རྟ་ elephant and horses and buffaloes and chariots हस्तिपु च अश्वेषु च महिषेषु च 34 रथ
leader

Page #252

RŪPĀDITYAKATHĀ
[34
སྣ་ཚོགས་ དང་ བཅས་པ་རྣམས་ལ ། སྤུ་རྩེའི་ཆར་རྐྱེན་ བསམ་གྱིས་
various
together with
requisite things (?)
unthink
विविध "
208
द्रव्याणाम्
མི་ཁྱབ་པ་ བཀལ་ ནས ། གཞན་ཡང་ ཤ་ གསར་པ་ དང་ །
able
having loaded,
meat fresh
and
नवं
अचिन्त्यानां भारं निधाय, ཁྲག་ དྲོན་མོ་ དང་ ། ལྤགས་པ་ རློན་པ་ དང་ ། 35
skin
wet and
blood warm and शोणितम् उष्णम् च
चर्म
k་ -35
moreover
अन्यच च འt
Ahu. rion.paand ཨཊྛཀཱ- प्रभृतिभिः
च
ཤ་ཁྲག་གི་
flesh-blood with
रक्त-मांस
མཆོད་སྦྱིན་ གཏོང་ གཏོང་ རྒྱུ་ སྲོག་ཆགས་ སྟོང་ཕྲག་ མང་པོ་དང་ བཅས་ཏེ །
in sacrifice offering for animal thousand many with (took). यज्ञ उत्सर्ग- हेतु प्राण ༥ཊཿཔཱ'བརྟུ ཊཿཎཱུཊཿq (HTIt) !
རྒྱལ་པོ་ རང་ རྟ་ ནག་པོ་ སྤྲིན་གྱི་ཤུགས་ཅན་ ལ་ ཆིབས །36
rode !
The king own horse black cloud-powerful on स्वकीये अश्वे कृष्णे ཨེཏྟཱ
राजा
शक्तौ :IeG:| 36
ཨའུ་རྔོན་པ་
ལ་ སོགས་པའི་ འཁོར་ བསམ་གྱིས་མི་ཁྱབ་པས་
other attandants
unthinkable by
परिवारः
अचिन्त्यैः

Page #253

RUPĀDITYAKATHA
209
39 ] བསྐོར་ཞིང་ ། ཁྱད་པར་ རི ག་པ་ཅན་ ཨ ་པོ་ནག་གེས་ surrounded, specially learned
Aponage by परिवृतः विशेषेण तु विदुषा
अपोनगेन རྟ་ སྣ་ཁྲིད་དེ། གྲོང་ཁྱེར་གྱི་ ཤར་ ཕྱོགས་ན་ ཤིན་ཏུ་ the horse guided the city of east direction in very अश्वः परिचालितः नगरस्य पूर्वस्या दिशि अतिའཇིགས་སུ་རུང་བའི་ གནས་ ཆེན ། དག་ སྦྲུལ་ འཁྲིགས པའི་ fearful place great poison snake mingled भयानक
स्थानं महत् विष- सर्प- मिश्रितནགས་ཚལ་ ཞེས་བྱ་བ་ན ། 38 ཕྱི་རོལ་ ལྷ་ དབང་ ཕྱག་ཆེན་པོའི་ forest called. (went) 38. Outside god _Mahadeva's वनषण्डं नाम (गतः)। बहिः देवस्य महादेवस्य སྐ་ རང་བྱོན་ རྡོ་ ལས་ གྲབ་པ་ ཞིག་ ་ image self-evolved stone of made one on the earth मूर्तिः स्वयम्भू-' पाषाण- सिद्धा काचिद् གོ་ མི་ འགྲལ་ བར་སྣ། ང་ལ་ གནས་ཡོད་པ ། 39 དེ་ལ་ not gone in the sky remains. There
आकाशे तिष्ठति । 39
ས་ལ་
अगता
27

Page #254

2i
210 ROPĀDITYAKATHA
[ 42 མཆོད་པ་ ཕལ་ཏེ་ དབང་ དང་ བྱིན་རླབས་ཞུ་བའི་ཕྱིར་ worship having offered power and magnificence पूजां प्रदाय अधिकार
महिमा ཆས་སོ༎ 40
went away. me:| 40
དེར་ བྱོན་པའི་ ལམ་ ཁ་ཞིག་ ན། རིགས་ ངན་གྱི་ There coming of way one on family low of
तत्र आगमनस्य पाथ एकस्मिन .. कुल नीच' བུ་མོ་ མཇེས་མ་ ཟླ་ བཀྲས་ཤིང་། རྒྱན་ ད་མས་ woman beautiful hair washing, with ornaments various
स्रो सुन्दरी केश क्षालयति भूषणेन विविधेन བརྒྱན་ ནས་ མཛེས་པའི་ གར་ སྒ ར་ ། 41 དགའ་བའི་ བྲོ་ being adorned nice dance performs pleasant dance
अलङ्कृत्य शोभनं नृत्यं करोति 41 रमणीयं नृत्यं དང་ ། སྙན་པའི་ གླུ་ལེན་ཞིང་ འདུག་པ་ ། 42 དེ་ ཤིན་ཏུ་ and sweet song singing remains She very च मधुरं गानं गायन्ती स्थिता । 42 सा अति

Page #255

43 ] ROPADITYAKATHA
2ii མཛེས་ཤིང་ ལྟ་བས་ ཆོག་ མི ཤེས་པ། འཛམ་ བག་གི beautiful a look by sufficiently not known. A smile little शोभना दर्शनेन पर्याप्त न झाता। स्मित ईषत གཞ་ མོ་ལ་ ཟུར་མིག་གི མདའ་མོ་ སྐྱོ ན་ནས་ of bow onside-look arrow having put (so she did as) धनुषि कटाक्ष- शरं आरोप्य (तथाकरोद् यथा) རྒྱལ་པོའི་ རྣམ་ཤེས་ རི་དྭགས་ ཕྲ་ག་ གར་ king of the mind (like) wild beast young ones where राज्ञो मनः . ག
ཞ: སོང་ གར་ སྡོད་ཏ་བྱང་བ་ལས །43 goes where lives. गच्छति यत्र वसति । 43 རྒྱལ་ པོས་ ཨ་པོ་ན་གེ་ལ་
སྨྲས་པ། The king to Aponage
said · राजा
अपोनगं ཨ་པོ་ན་གེ་ བུ་མོ་ དེའི་ ཕའི་ མིང་ལ་ ཇི་སྐད་ ཟེར ། Aponage, of woman this father's name how is said ? अपोनग लिया अस्याः पितुः नाम कथं कथ्यते ।
u

Page #256

2i2
ROPĀDITYAKATHA
[ 45
མའི་ མེང་ལ་ ཇི་སྐད་ ཟེར། མོ་ རང་ མིང་ ལ་ ཇི་ལྟར mother's name how is said Girl's own name how मातुः नाम कथं कथ्यते। कन्यकाया स्वं नाम कीदृशं བཏགས ། རིགས་ དང་ ཚངས་ བརྒྱད་ ཇི་འདྲ་ཞིག ། འཁོར་ is given. Family and pure liniage how ? Attendants दत्तम्। कुलं च शुद्धा परम्परा कीदृशम्। परिवारः དང་ ལོངས་སྤྱོད་ ཅི་ དང་ ལྡན །44 and enjoyments what connection. བ བm:
1:| 44 ཞེས་ གསུངས་པ་ དང་ ། ཨ་པོ་ན་ གེའི་ བསམ་པ་ལ་ This being said. Aponage's thought in इति
उक्त अपोनगस्य चिन्तायां རྒྱལ་པོ་ འདི་ རིགས་ངན་གྱི་ བུ་མོ་
འདི་ལ་ the king this caste low of girl
this re d ཆུerni* དེབ• ག་ཀ་
अस्यां ཡིད་ཆགས་པར་གནས། ཨ་པོ་ན་གེས་ འདི་སྐད་ ཞས་སོ།། 45 loves.
Aponage thus said : मनोऽनुरागं प्राप्तः। अपोनग
| 45
thus
एवम

Page #257

RŪPADITYAKATHA
ཁྲིད་མཁན་གྱི་
མཛེས་མ་
འདི །
With understanding and instruction beautiful woman this.
शिक्षावती
सुन्दरीयम् ।
མ་
46]
བློ་
बुद्धिमती
ཕ་ཡི་ མིང་ནི་
Father’s
पितुः
མ་ཡི་
Mother's
ཥཿཞུ:
རིགས་
Family
कुलं
འཁོར་
Attendants
name
नाम
མིང་ནི་
name
नाम
དང་
and
च
དང་
and
परिवारा:
ཞེས་ ཞུས་
ནས །
This having said (he)
इति
च
उक्ता
ཞ
not
न
མ་
not
མ
རུས་ནི་
lineage
गोत्रं
ལོངས་ སྤྱོད་
འཚལ་ལོ །
desired.
རྟཨཱཊེ |
འཚལ་ལོ །
213
desired.
ཨཱཊེ |
དམངས་རིགས་ ཡིན །
Śüdra.
शूद्रः ।
དེ་ཡི
མཚོན །།46
enjoyments
her
characteristics
arm:
dl:
Õལྐུrfa ll46
རྒྱལ་ པོའི་ རྟ་
ཐུར་ནས་
the king's horse with the bridle
:
་
रश्मिना

Page #258

214
RŪPADITYAKATHA
47
བཞུད་དོ།། 47
ཁྲིད་ དེ། དབང་ཕྱུག་ཆེན་པོའི་ སྐུ having taken, Mahādeva's image
महादेवस्य मूर्ति-
དྲུང་ དུ་
near समीपं
went.
नीत्वा
TA: 1147
Free Translation The first chapter clescribes the marriage of the king Rūpāditya (Sun of Beauty). And it was in the town Cittamati in the country of India. The father of the king was called Candrasena in the language of India, and Zla.bahi.ded.dpon in that of Tibet. And the mother was called Devasri in the language of India and Lhaḥi.dpal.mo in that of Tibet. The elder son was Candrasimha in the language of India and Zla.ba.seng.ge in that of Tibet. The younger son was Candrakumāra in the Indian language and Zla.ba.gžon.nu in the Tibetan language.
By his power he (the king) possessed the following: the subjects of thirty-six million towns, three hundred and sixty treasuries of precious stones and gems; white umbrellas with golden handles ; an alms bowl received through yoga yielding desired things; a horse that naturally know to Ay; an elephant very strong, with trunk red like vermilion; a cow that yielded desired things; a milch she-buffalo; a parrot that talked'; a white boar; a dog at the door that knew how to catch and did not know how to let one go;

Page #259

RŪPĀDITYAKATHA
215
a miraculous noose; a growing garden the flowers of which did not fade; a learned minister named Aponage; and sons of low caste hunters. His desired enjoyments were unthinkable.
So once the father-king Candrasena said to his elder son Candrasimha: “O Prince,
A bird with a broken wing, and A tiger without his stripes, and A lion removed from the Himalayas, and A fish that has come out from a pond, and
Kings without a royal family are equal in comparison. It is therefore the time to make over to you this dominion of the city Cittamati. I am old, you are young. Rule this kingdom
Said the son: "First the kingdom was ruled by our two forefathers, secondly by the grand father and the father, and now it is given to me. In holding the kingdom there are two policies, outside (non-Buddhist) and inside (Buddhist.) Let my father and mother advise me as to which of these two is to be chosen.'
Being thus asked, the parents said: “If you rule according to what is said by you (i.e. inside policy), pleasure and happiness will increase here and great will be the consequence hereafter. But if you rule it following the outside policy, there will be power and very great miracles; there will be prowess, and an army with its members will approach you. This time it is difficult for us to discipline the people of this impure time (Rali-yuga) with peace. So having recourse to terrible deeds and having propitiated Deveśvara (Mahādeva) you should so far follow the outside policy. And,

Page #260

216
ROPADITYAKATHA
at the end according to the inside policy, do supplication for protection (prasidhāna), and meditation of the 'Dependent Origination (pratityasamutpāda).' Having said so, they gave the kingdom to their son.
Then the king Candrasena took his great elephant with the trunk which is red like vermilion, as a leader, and loaded immeasurable things(?) on elephants, horses, buffaloes, and various chariots. Moreover, he took fresh meat, warm blood, and new skin, together with many thousands of animals for offering in a sacrifice that is performed with flesh and blood.
The king mounted on his own black horse named 'Cloudpower' (Meghasakti). And the horse surrounded by immeasurable attendants, such as Ah.mon and others, and guided specially by the learned (minister) Aponage, went in the east of the city to a great place, a forest which is fearful, and called. 'Mingled with Poisonous Snakes'. Outside there was a self-evolved (svayambhū) image made of stone of Mahādeva. It did not touch the earth, but remained in the sky. Having offered there worship for power and magnificence he went away.
On his way he saw a low-caste but beautiful girl that was washing her hair. She was adorned with various ornaments. She could act beautifully, dance pleasantly and sing sweetly. She was very beautiful. And she could not be sufficiently known by a look. Having put the arrow of her side-long glance on the bow of her slight smile, she made the mind of the king like a deer and its young one, as wherever the latter goes the former follows it.

Page #261

RŪPĀDITYAKATHA
217
The king said to Aponage: “Aponage, what is the name of the father of this girl? What is the name of her mother ? What is the name of the girl? What are her family and lineage ? Who are her people, and what are her charms." When this was asked by the king Aponage thought that the king loved the girl belonging to a low family. He said :
'Beautiful is this woman with intellect and instruction. Her father's name is not known. Her mother's name is not known. Her family and caste are Śūdra.
Her people and her charms show her character.' Having said this, he took the horse of the king by the bridle, and went near the image of Mahādeva.

Page #262


Page #263

PART II NOTES

Page #264


Page #265

PRAJÑADAŅDA
1
1. The Skt. version as given here could not be traced. Similar verses are however many, for instance, MB. 6557 as quoted in IP:
नास्ति प्रज्ञासमं चक्षुर्नास्ति सत्यसमं तपः ।
नास्ति रागसमं दुःखं नास्ति त्यागसमं सुखम् ॥ 2. a. 55 dan. It is a conj. generally signifying (i), ‘with', Skt. saha, or ‘accompanied by', Skt. sahita ; e. g. NA, 3.8 : WW" 5 BATU yum.dan.ḥgrogs, Skt. ambayā sahitaḥ ‘with or accompanied by the mother' ; (ii) ‘and", Skt. ca; e.g. PD, 21: 479179" 55Far Et rig.pa.ldan. dan. rgyal. po, Skt. vidvān rājā ca 'a learned man and a king'; (iii) sometimes when followed by words meaning deprivation it is translated by 'without' or 'from', etc. ; e. g. 255598 55 301 ḥdod.chags.dan.bral, Skt. kāmarahita 'free from or separated from lust'.
3. a. 25 med. In fact it is Al-ma, Skt. na 'not', and w5 yod, from the verb W5*yod. pa 'to be,' asti ‘is”. Thus 55 is nāsti, "(it) is not.'

Page #266

222
PRAJÑADAŅDA 4. a. Ŝ de. 5 te (used after & n, 51, at 1, and w/ s), 9 de (after 5 d), and a ste (after 198, 5n, 8 b, c m, 3 ḥ, and vowels) are conjunctive ptcls. Being annexed to verbs of the present and past tenses they form present and past participles respectively or gerunds ; e. g. 925 gnas.te, sthitvā ‘remaining”; 5155 g gton.ste, dattvā ‘giving' ; 455"} btan.ste, dattvā “having given’; WEH'Y85175 (PD, 84), yons.su.span.ste, parityajya 'having abandoned'. Sometimes they are used also after the verbs of the future tense or gerundives ; e. g. Aas' (PD,19"), bzun.bya.ste, dhārayitavya 'to be held or accepted'. In such cases it simply introduces what follows, or implies that in the following sentence something is going to be said with regard to what is mentioned before. And in this sense it is used also after nouns, adjectives, and numerals; e. g. pag ganità: ཕང་པོ་ ལྔ་པོ་དག་ ནི་ སྔག་བསྔལ་དེ། འདི་ནི་ སྡུག་བསྔལ་ཞེས་བྱའོ །། (LV, C, 423-80) mdor.na. ñe.bar.len.paḥi. phun.po. Ina.po.dag. ni. sdug.bsnal.tel hdi. ni. sdug. bsnal. žes. byaḥo II failaigratori gani yoza gitti 'In short, five aggregates (skandhas) springing from strong attachment are misery. This is said to be misery;' གང་ སྲེད་པ་དང་། དེ་དང་དེར་ མངོན་པར་དགའ་བ་སྡེ ། འདེ་ནི་

Page #267

1]
PRAJÑADANDA
223 39-99m 9554 an gi! (Op. cit. 55-18) gan.° sred. pa.dan ! de.dan.der. mnon.par.dgah.ba.ste i ḥdi. ni. sdug. bsnal.kun.hbyun.ba. žes. byaḥo gio 2011 ag anfaatreat 30yun ginaga: 'that attachmento, here and there rejoicing, this is the cause of misery; རྐྱེན་རྣམས་ བཞི་ སྟེ་ རྒྱུ་ དང་ ནི (MK, 29) rkyen.rnams. bži. ste. rgyu. dan. nio, Tait: 972 ga: 'there are four conditions, namely (or as,) cause, etc.'. It is to be noted that sometim 2s after a verb they have the last sense mentioned above and not that of the participle or the gerund ; e, g. Angk: (BAK, 36), byabs.gyur. te, papāta 'fell'. So in some cases they may be translated into English by such words as 'when', 'as', 'since', 'after', 'and' etc. In the present case ş may be translated by ‘and'.
5. b. Spa and a ba. Of these two particles the former is used after གg, དd, བb, མ m, and སs, and the lattar after 5 ng 3 ḥ, 5r, 21, and vowels. They form (i) roots or infinitives, (ii) participles, (iii) verbal nouns, (iv) substantives, and (v) adjectives; e.g. 74 klog.pa, path to read' or pātha ‘reading;' 24°21 ses.pa, Viña, 'to know' or jānat ‘knowing', or jñana 'knowledge' ; ZENT (PD. 16) rmons.pa, moha 'igno rance' 'illusion"; 377°41 mun.pa, tamas 'darkness”; 25'9 (c) ḥdra

Page #268

224 PRAJÑADAŅDA
[1 ba, sama 'equal; Rea șchi.ba, mộtyu 'death'; gênal 4 hjigs. pa, bhaya 'fear'; 955"På gruġ (NĂ, b«) btań.baḥi. rgyl. srid tyaktam rājyam the 'abandoned kingdom.'
It is to be noted that in many sabstantives and some verbs
pa is used after any consonant. This is specially when it implies the sense of belonging to', or 'of'; e.g. 3541 lun.pa upatyakā 'a valley.'; 119941 mthaḥ.pa, anta- (or pratyanta-)vāsin 'one dwelling on the boundary of a country.' ; 295.00 śar.pa, pracya 'one of the east'; gall yul.pa, jānapada'a country man’; 75991 bod.pa, Bhoțiya 'one belonging to the country of Bod or Bhoța, 'a Tibetan' ; 95 41 gyur.pa, bhūta “became', 'actually happened.
These affixes are, however, not essential in all cases, for many substatives, verbs, or adjectives are found without them.
These particles as well as Š po and Ābo (see below note 7,) sometimes indicate the masculine gender, while ma and K mo the feminine gender ; e. g. FraŽE "91 rnal.ḥbyor.pa, yogin ‘one who practises yoga', fem. FARŠEH mal.ḥbyor. ma; J'Ñ rgyal.po, rājan ‘king' and sharif rgyal. mo, rājñi 'queen'

Page #269

225
2]
PRAJÑADANDA 6. c. 35'9" hdra.ba.yi, sama ‘equal'. For W yi which is a ptcl. denoting the gen. case see Note PD, 2.4. In Tib. adjectives are generally put after nouns, but when they are before them they are put in the gen. case.
7. c. Z po and å bo are two ptcls. They are regarded as the definite articles (see Note 5, last part.) The former is used after consonants and the latter after vowels. Sometimes z po denotes an agent, and in that case it is used also after a vowel. E. g. 57ă dgra.bo, satru 'the enemy'; g19 mig.po, cakşus 'the eye' ; 5 bí sin.po, vrkṣa or dāru 'the tree' or “the wood'; 211a hgro. ba, Ngam 'to go' ; but Bota bgro.po (the fuller form being a hgro.ba.po), gant; ‘one who goes.' See Note, PD, 2. 6.
1. Skt. version HU, I. 101.
2. a. The literal equivalent in Tib. of mahātman 'one with a great soul' i༔ བདག་ཆེན་པོ bdag.chen.po, or བདག་ཉིད་ཆེན་པོ་ bdag.ñid.chen.po, but here is figuratively used 5879 dam.pa, s.t 'good', 'wise'.
3. b. 57 dag. It is a ptcl. generally signifying the plural number (=FA rnams). It is a sign also for the dual
29

Page #270

226
.
PRAJNĀDAŅDA
[2
number with regard to translating Skt. works. But sometimes it does not express any number. It is therefore may be regarded as a general 'number particle' which can signify equally the plu. and the sing. núin., or which is employed preferably there where not so much a particular number as rather the indefiniteness of the number is to be expressed, or where no account is taken of the number.
4. b. ah gi. kyi ( used after 5 d, ab, and ys), gyi ( after on , m, = r, and 21 1), gi (after 27 g, and 5 n ), s și (after a vowel) and yi (after vowels when an inter-syllabic stop (.) called a tsheg is put after them) are ptcls. indicating the gen. case.
6. c. Vit 1973 mgo. Icogs. mgo, mastaka 'head', and Tay"al lcogs. pa, or ģist*51 Icog. pa, v kamp 'to be agitated, to tremble'. Thus these two words mean 'one that shakes on the head.' With the word •57 me.tog, kusuma 'flower the phrase wa mgo.lcogs is used here figuratively to mean stavak ‘a bunch of flowers.
6. c. g7955' hijg.rten. kun.gyis, sarveņa lokena “by all the people.' ġar" kyis, ajav gyis, kis gyis, aw his, when yis, and sometimes simply y s (after 'vowels) are the ptcls.

Page #271

2]
denoting the instrumental case. corresponding gen. signs dealt with
They are used just as the in Note, PD, 2. 4.
It is to be noted that in Tib. the instr. case sometimes serves both the nom. and instr. cases of Skt. in both the voices, active and passive.
PRAJÑADAŅDA
locative cases, also to a
7. c. སྤྱིར spyir. སྤྱི spyi is a shortened form of སྤྱི་བོ pyi. bo, murdhan, 'head', agra 'top.' Note here that for metrical grounds or brevity sometimes fuller forms are shortened as in the present case, or hgro.po, gantṛ ‘one hgro.ba. po. See Note, PD, 1.7.
who goes' for
ris a ptcl. generally forming the dative and the infinitives, and adverbs. Sometimes it is added predicative adjective (see PD, 5:
mkhas.par). 8. C.
227
In the present case it is in the locative sense. bkur.ba.ḥam. In fact we have here
bkur.ba and 2 ham, but owing to the metrical
❤
ground, i. e. in order to leave out a syllable which is not required (for here we want only seven and not eight syllables) they are put together.
ham is a ptcl. signifying vā (athavā, etc.) 'or,' as in the present case, and interrogation. In the last case the first letter of 2 ham when used after a consonant takes the form of

Page #272

228
PRAJÑADAŅDA
[ 3
that consonant; in other words, that consonant is reduplicated taking the syllable a in qoy ham ; e.g. Anggoy med.dam, na bhavati “is not ?' Here 558 med.dam is in fact 25 go med ham ; 257976 ḥdug.gam, kim vidyate 'does (he) remain ? འདག་གམ hdug.gam is in fact འདག་འམ hdug. ham, though it is never used.
•9. d. 5 du is a ptcl. ( used after 5 , 5 d, In Nm, 5 1, and / 1) signifying dat. or the loc. case, as in the present instance, and sometimes forms an inf. ; e.g. 255 byed.du, kartum to do.' Mark here that 5 du is used after 5 ñid, eva 'a ptcl. denoting assertainment', though in fact, according to Skt, it is to be taken with 90 nags, vana 'a forest.'
10. d. 5 bya is fut. of 95°37 byed.pa, kr 'to do." Mark the use of the future tense which denotes here the sense of the optative (vidhi-lin).
3 1. Skt. IP, 3,367 ; SP, 1,428. . 2. a. GHI Lig. 6) 84| cig, (i) ig, and I sig are the modified forms of spa gcig, eka 'one'. They are indefinite articles and are added to substantives and pronouns. Of

Page #273

3]
PRAJNĀDAŅDA
229
these three words (i) ཅིག is used after ག g, ད d, བ b, and sometimes after the inherent a; 997 žig after vowels and ངi, ན n, མ m, འ h, ར t, and ལ 1; and ཤིག sig after ས ; e. g. 817°84 lug.cig, kaścin meşaḥ 'a certain sheep' ; 597 rta.cig. 'a horse.' 457 [an.zig, yaḥ kaścit 'whoever', 7 gos.big, kaścit paricchadaḥ a garment.'
They form the imperative mood when used after verbs; e. g.613 @9 ma.smra. žig, mā kathaya 'say not.'
In the present case 975 97' is used in the gen. case, the case sign being not used owing to the metrical ground.
3 a. 24 la. It is a ptcl. denoting the accusative, dative, genitive and locative cases.
4. a. 9735.25 gnod.byed, lit. apakāra-karana ‘making
evil.'
5. b. 5 tu. 5 tu (after 48, and ab, sometimes also after on, 5 r, and a l), and 5 du (after 5ń, gd, of n. Hm, 5 r and 11) are dative, adverbial, and infinitive signs, signifying 'to' ‘for’ etc. + e. 8. 575 rtag tu sadā 'always'
6. c. 459771575 v Kā ri.dwags.gsod.mthon.tshe is

Page #274

PRAJÑADANDA
[4
for the figurative sense of Skt. mṛgavadhe, the Tib. phrase lit. meaning at the time of seeing the killing of a deer (or a wild beast).'
230
4
1. Skt. SA, 2660; SP, 307.
2. a. do, the ft. being
byas is pf. of the vb. byed.pa, √kṛ ́to
bya.
3. a. ma, byas, lit. akṛta 'not done.' It is, however, used here for '' ma byas nas, akṛtvā 'having not done, the gerund sign a nas which is originally a sign of the abl. case being dropped for the metrical gerund. The case is the same with ' ma spans, anutsṛjya ‘having not abandoned' Note in such cases & nas is used after a verb in its pf. form,
3. c. སྤངས་ spais, pf. of the verb སྤོང་བ spoi. ba ( or སྤང་བ span ba), √tyaj‘to abandon,' fut. span, imp. spon
5. d. ni is an expletive ptcl. and often corresponds to Skt. hi
6. d. ཡིན yin· ཡིན་པ yin. pa, vb., 、/bhu ‘to be.` ཡིནyin is often found also in the past sense.

Page #275

PRAJÑADAŅDA
231
1. Skt. SA, 1467.
2. a. 995357 žal.ta.byed.pa. qu žal is an honorific term for mukha ‘face'; 5 ta is for Ita or ga Ita.ba, Vluk to look :'975 žal.ta which is the same as q'3'(a) žal.Itaíba), lit. 'to look at one's face' means 'inspection'; and 5 byed.pa karty doer' ; thus the compound word means an 'inspector,' fig. 'a leader or chief.'
3. a. 55 man, bahu 'many'. Mark that an adjective or a pronoun in Tib. generally comes after the noun. See Note 6 below.
4. b. མཁས་པར mkhas.pat. ར ra as well as རུ tu both used after 3 ḥ or any vowel are ptcls. being the signs of dative, adverb, infinitive, and gerund. Often, as in the present case, it is added to a predicative adjective. See Note. PD. 2.7.
5. c. .is for the Skt. suffix - tā and-tva forming an abstract noun. It corresponds also to Skt. eva, a particle for emphasis.
6. d. de.yi. When a noun is preceded by an adjective or a prɔnoun the latter is put in the gent. case. Or it may be, as usual, in the sense of tasya 'its.'
7. d. འཇིག་ང་ hiig.pa, vb, (pf. བརྙིག btig, ft. གཏུག gžig, imp. 97 sig) 'to destroy, dissolve' 'to decay; perish.'

Page #276

232
PRAJRADANDA 8. d. འགྱུར་བ hgyur.ba, vb. (pf, གུར་པ gyur-pa, imp. གུར་ 997 gyur.cig ). bhū 'to become, grow.'
1. Skt. HU, 11. 108 ; PT, 1. 246. 2. a. 5 yod, vbhū 'to be.'
3. a. 27 Idan. It is a suffix corresponding to the Skt. secondary suffix -vat (-mat) denoting 'possession.' jan stobs, bala 'strength', yan 35 stobs.ldan, balavat ‘strong'. Its fuller form is an '55'95 stobs.dan.ldan as in c of this stanza.
4. c. sen.ge, simha ‘lion.' The Tib. word is taken as a loan from Skt.
5. d. #BEAN ri.bon. gis, śaśakena 'by a hare.' Mark here the nom. is put in the instr. case. There is no difference between of the active and passive voices in Tib.
For av gis, see Note, PD, 2.6.
6. d. srog, jivana, prāņa “life,' 55 dan a conjunctive ptcl. meaning here 'from'. See Note, PD, 1.2.994 bral and Ža brol. pf. of equaḥbral.ba, vi-yuj or vi - rah, 'to be separated' ; thus these three words together mean 'separated from life', fig. nipātita, ‘killed'.

Page #277

PRAJÑADAŅDA
233
1. Skt. SA, 1,306.
2. a. 55'9 byun. ba. It is the pf as well as imp. form of 2554 hbyun.ba, Vjan 'to come forth, arise;' /gam 'to go.' *1*359 ma. byun. ba, anāgata 'that which has not yet come.'
3. b. BTW45'9 hjigs.par.bya, bhetavya 'to be afraid of. Mark here the formation of the gerundive or the future participle.
4. c. g5 pa š buyn.baḥi.tshe, lit.(ā)gatakāle for Skt. āgate. As in such cases the time is implied, in Tib. the word ā tshe, kāla 'time' is employed though not in its original Skt. See PD, 3. c.
5. c. གཞོམ is ft. of འཇོམས་པ hjoms.pa (pf. བཅོམ bcom or atay bcoms, imp. FHN ) 'to conquer, subdue, root out.'
8
1. The entire original Skt. is not traced, but see the following in the MT, II. 18:
विश्वान्तरं परित्यज्य देवान्तरमुपासते । तृषितो जाह्नवीतीरे कूपं खनति दुर्मतिः ।।
30

Page #278

234
PRAJÑADAŅDA
9
1. Skt. SR, pp. 100-1.
The following variations may be noted : In c Skt. daśa, Tib. śata; and in d Skt. vaktā, Tib. prājñaḥ.
Its Prakrit version is found in the Vāsudevahindi by Sanghadāsagaṇin ed. Caturavijayamuni and Punyavijayamuni (Atmānanda Jaina Granthamāla Series), p. 105:
सतेसु जायते सूरो सहस्सेसु य पण्डिओ वत्ता सयसहस्सेसु दाया जायति वा ण वा ॥ इंदियाण जए सुरो धम्मं चरति पंडिओ।
वत्ता सञ्चवयो होइ दाया भूयहिए रओ ॥ 2. a. f nas is the sign of the abl. case and after a verb forms a gerund or participle.
3. a. skye for ga skye.ba, w jan 'to be born,' 'to become”; pf. ha skyes. aga skye.ba is used also as a noun meaning 'birth'. g skye.b), jana, jantu ‘a general name for all living creatures.'
4. c. w las is a sign of the abl. case and expresses the degree of comparison.
5. d. 5 srid for 53 srid.pa used both as vb, and n., sam- bhū 'to be possible,' sambhāvanā ‘possibility.' In the present case it indicates 'possibility'

Page #279

12 ]
PRAJÑADAŅDA
6. d. For 2 ham see ante, pp. 227-228.
1. Skt. MB, 3. 15,582.
2. c.
10
rnams is a sign of the plu. num.
adj.
is used after the n.,
11
1. Skt. SA, 666.
2. a. ži.ba, vb, sam 'to be peaceful or calm;' adj. śānta 'peaceful;' siva 'tranquil or calm; n. sama, śānti, 'tranquility.' 3. c. Mark here the loc. case sign na is put only after the yoǹs. su. zad.pa, parikṣina ‘exhausted' which
and not after each of them. The ptcl.
235
na. is a sign also of the conditional sense.
4. d. Mark the use of the above ptcl. na in the phrase ci.yi.phyir.na, kutaḥ 'why.' Cf. des.na, ataḥ 'therefore'; de.bas.na, ata eva ca ‘and therefore'.
12
1. Skt. MS, VI, 67.
It is a loan word from Skt. The
2. a. ཀ་5་ཀ kataka. fruit or nut of the tree called Kataka clears muddy water. It is still used in the villages of this country.

Page #280

236
( 12
PRAJÑADAŅDA 3. b. 55'9 dan.ba, vb. Všudh 'to be pure', used also as adj. śuddha, pavitra ‘pure, clear.'
4. b. 35 mod. kyi is...a phrase meaning yady api ‘although, though'.
5. c. yy'smars.pa, pf. of a smra.ba, Vvad 'to speak, say’; imp. V smros. It is to be noted that a pf. form of a verb is often used in the present sense and also as a verbal noun.
6. d. 5593 rdul.daņ.bar. En is dhūli 'dust' and 559 is suddha 'pure ;' thus it lit. means “pure from dust,' i. e. 'clear.'
7. d. 95 5 byed.do. Often when a sentence terminates in a consonant, that consonant is reduplicated and takes the vowel o. So 5 do has here no value other than showing that the sentence ends here. See also PD, 27. d, where we have ཞིག་གོ tig.go, ག g of ཞིག tig being reduplicated and taking the vowel o. This o is, in fact, of Ž (Cf. Qol ham, pp. 227-228), a terminating ptcl. See PD, 19. d, gå byaḥo.

Page #281

14 ]
PRAJÑADANDA
237
13
1. Skt. C$, 26.
2. a. 9759 gdug is sometimes used for 547 dug vişa 'poison
3. 6. སྐྱེ་ངན skye.ian is the shortened form of སྐྱེ་བོ་ངན་ skye.bo nan in a
4. c. qa thub, as n. it means a muni 'sage', e.g. 99.99's śākya.thub.pa, sākyamuni ; as adj. it means 'capable' ; in the present case 'capable of being under one's influence (vasa). 99'i thub.pa is a vb. 'to be able', 'to be capable of'. 5. d. ĝ ži, vb. for ži.ba. Vsam 'to be peaceful or calm.'
14 1. Skt. IP, 1,653, 6,674.
2.4. སྤང་བར་གྱིས span.bar. gyis. སྤོང་བ spoi.ba or སྦྱང་བ་ span.ba is a vb. meaning tyaj 'to leave' ( pf. 950 spans, fut. སྤང spat, imp. སྦྱོང spoi); and གྱིས gyis which must not be confounded in such cases with the inst. case sign of the same form is the imp. of the vb. g5bgyid (pf. Da bgyis, ft. a bgyi), an elegant form of the vb. 52 byed.pa, vk! 'to do.' Thus gsakay lit. in Skt. is tyāgam kuru ( tyaja) ‘leave'.

Page #282

238
PRAJNĀDANDA
Skt. IP, 2.211.
15
1.
2. 6.
slon.ba.rnums.la. According to Skt.
la is here the sign of the loc, case; it may also be that of
the dat. case.
3. c. Mark here the adj., though it precedes the n. is not put in the gen. case in spite of the general rule.
cases.
16
1. Skt. IP, 2,768.
2. b. 5 bdag, ātman 'self' is here for
[ 17
bdag. po,
pati 'lord,' 'owner', as in d. For the metrical ground po is here dropped.
3. b.go. In such cases it is a ptcl. indicating a con
dition (?).
17
1. Skt. SA, 362.
2. a.
gan in Skt. is for both the prons. yad and kim.
3. c. su as a pron. is in Skt. kim, and as a ptcl. when
used afters is a sign of an infinitive, adverb, dat. and loc.

Page #283

2] PRAJNĀDAŅDA
239 4. c. W son is both pf. and imp. of the vb. BFS hgro.ba, v gam 'to go'.
5. d Mark Skt. words with sa- ('with') at the beginning is generally translated into Tib. by A5'' bcas.pa or simply qov bcas annexed to nouns with the conj. 55 dań.
6. d. g5 byar ( 3 bya and conj. 5 r) is the fut. of 2519? byed.pa, /kr 'to do'.
18 1. Skt. SA, 359.
2. a. È ji is sometimes the correlative form (Skt. yad) of the pron. I ci 'whať, and sometimes they are of the same significance; e. g. dz'n ji Ita.bur, katham ‘how' ; JH ji.tsam, kiyat 'how much’; £85**4 ji. skad. smras.pa yathāvādin 'as one says;' ÈÑ5 ji.srid, yāvat ‘as long as.'
3. 4. གསོད gsod for གསོད་པ gsod.pa (pf. and fut. བསད bsad, imp. 315 sod), Vhan 'to kill, murder.'
4. b. 359 zad.pa (pf. of 265 27 hdzad.pa), v kşi to come to an end.'
Construe 5575 zad.par with QJk hgyur which follows.

Page #284

PRAJÑADANDA
[ 19
5. b. gyi. This as well as gi, kyi, yi, and hi are, as already stated (p. 226), the terminations of the gen. case; but when they are used after verbs where two sentences are in contrast to each other they serve the purpose of a gerund and may be translated by 'but', or 'though', as in the present case; or de.ru.hons.kyi. ma.bžugs ́(he) came
240
there, but did not stay'
6. c. Lit. 5 bsad fut. of gsod (see Note 3) would
give the Skt. equivalent haniṣyate.
19
1. Skt. MB. quoted in PT
2. a. 35 mñan.pa, √śru 'to hear'. Here the gerundive is made simply by adding to it the fut. from ( bya) of the verb byed.pa, kr 'to do'. See, however, b where in bya is added to the verb in its pf. form hdzin.pa, ✓grah or √dhṛ, causative, 'to lay bzun orzuń, and fut. 5 gzuń.
is lit. in Skt. dhārita kartavya.
making the gerundive
of the vb.
hold of;' the pf. is
Thus

Page #285

22 ]
PRAJÑADAŅDA
241
20 1. Skt. IP, 2,619.
2. a. agan bslabs, śikṣita 'taught, pf. of a 41 slob.pa “to learn,' 'to teach?; fut. aya bslab, imp. an slobs or a slob.
3. b. qay 925°35 gzugs. bzan Idan, lit. uttamarūpavati. Note here how in Tib. the true sense of the original Skt. (praśyasya rūpa, 936 bzan meaning praśasya 'good') is expressed.
4. b. According to Skt. strictly one should read rūpavatyo yoșitaḥ instead of sing.
5. c. Here the vb. Bg5 hgyur 'to grow' being added to the vb. Rota hgro ba gives the sense of the fut. tense.
21 1. Skt. CŚ, 3.
2. d. ama bkur.ba may be taken as a vb. (*to pay reverence'), or an adj. ; in the former case ani A5 395 will fig. mean will be respected,' and in the latter will become respected.'
22 1. Skt. IP, 5,796 ; CŚ, 7. 2. a. Às sin (after y s), i cin (after 7 g, 5 d, and a b),
31

Page #286

242
PRAJNADANDA
[ 23
and ĝ= žin ( after 5 n, s n, s m, 3ḥ, I r, I, and vowels), form with verbs a kind of participle, present when used after a verb of the present tense and past when after that of the past tense ; e. g. y ĝ= smra. žin 'saying'; v smras. sin ‘having said'. Put between two adjectives they have the sense of the conjn. ‘and' as in the present case.
3. b. w as skyes. gyur, lit. sambhūta 'born'. Here is skyes (pf. of #'to be born') is quite sufficient to give the meaning of the past tense, yet 75 gyur (pf. of 275:hgyur.ba 'to become)', is added to it superfluously. Like 375 gyur, such words as af zin (pf. of Be h dzad.pa 'to terminate', 'to be at the end'), v son (pf. of Bata hgro.ba 'to go) are added to vbs. to signify the past tense.
4. d. 2755921 rig.dan. bral.na, lit. vidyāviruhe 'in the absence of learning'.
1. Skt. SA, 260.
2. a. 59.355:7 bole.ba hdod.na, lit. sukhakāme sati 'in the desire of happiness'. So is 2593555 rig.pa ḥdod. na ‘in the desire of learning' in b.

Page #287

24 ]
PRAJNĀDAŅDA
243
3. b. 355ḥdor or 3.559 ḥdor.ba (pf. and imp. Fi dor). 'to give up'.
4... བདེ་ལྡན bde.ldan, the fuller form being བདེ་བ་དང་ལྡན bde.ba,dan,ldan, lit, in Skt. sukhavat or sukhin 'possessor of pleasure'.
4. c. 97'21 ga.la. In such cases Aga seems to be connect. ed with 75 gan, yad, kim 'what, which,' la is the dat. or loc. sign ; the Skt. equivalents being katham 'why,' yena (in the sense of loc., i. e. yatra) 'whither,' kutra where,' kutaḥ 'from where' 'whence.' See d.
6. c. 3.99 hgrub, 399 41 hgrub.pa, Vsidh 'to be accomplished’. Pf. 95 grub, siddha ‘accomplished'.
7. d. £99771713= rig.pa.don.gñer. £A27 rig.pa, vidyā •learning;དོན don, artha *object; and གཉིར gher from གཉིར་བ་ gñer.ba 'to seek for', 'to take care of'; thus the phrase means ‘one who seeks after the object of learning'i. e. vidyārthin ‘a student'.
24 1. The Skt. śloka (CŚ, 73; IP, 1,836) is wrongly printed here in the text, it should be as follows:
कोऽतिभारः समर्थानां किं दूरं व्यवसायिनाम् । को विदेशः सविद्यानां कः परः प्रियवादिनाम् ।।

Page #288

PRAJNADANDA
[ 25
The order of the padas of the sloka according to Tib. is c. d, a,. and b. It is to be noted that for the sake of convenience the order of the successive two halves of a verse is often changed in Tib. translations.
2. a.
gžan.yul, anyadeśa 'other country' i. e.
244
videśa 'foreign land'.
3. b.
pha.rol, para 'the other'. It means also paraloka 'other world,' and adverbially (5 pha.rol.tu) 'beyond,' 'outside'.
1. Skt. IP, 2,328.
2. a.
who makes procreation.'
while
25
skyed.par.byed.pa, lit. jananakartṛ ‘one
skey-ba, √jan ‘to be born' int.,
skyed.pa, jan caust., 'to procreate,' trans.
X
3. a. ལེགས་སློབ legs.slob, the fuller fromis ལེགས་པར་སློབ་པ legs.par.slob.pa 'one who teaches properly'. S legs.par, samyak ‘properly'; slob.po, adhyapayati 'teaches'. By this the Tib. translator has tried to express the meaning of Skt. upanetṛ 'one who performs the upanayana ceremony and teaches the sacred lore', the Acārya.

Page #289

27]
PRASADANDA
...45
26 1. Skt. IP, 5,743.
2 a. atží blon.po. This is the reading in both the editions of S. C. Das and Campbell. It cannot be reconciled with the original Skt. according to which one should read here 55 bla.ma, guru for at blon.po, mantrin 'a minister.'
3 c. 19a spun-zla or simply 99 spun means bł:rāt‘a brother'. This reading is not supported by the Skt. version.
4. c. In Skt. text omit bhrāt, which is wrongly printed.
5. d. & ma, mātı ‘mother' evidently one's own ( sva ) mother (<5 a Hran.gi. ma).
6. d. Mark the actual significance of Sk.. smặta in such cases. It is expressed in Tib. by 9-95 bśad, ukta 'said'.
27 1. Skt. IP, 1,287.
2.c. ལག་འགྲོ lag.hgro. ལག lag or ལག་པ lag-pa is the honorific form of 39 phyag, hasta, bhuja 'hand', ‘arni' ; and Bð hgro or Bota hgro.ba means, Vgam 'to go'. Thus the Tib. word is actually what Skt. bhujangama is, of course, as it is understood by the Tib. translators. But, as the

Page #290

246
PR. JNĀDAŅDA
[ 29
orthodox Skt. scholars would say, bhuja in bhujangama means kauțilya 'crookedness', and not ‘hand' or 'arm,' so bhujangama lit. means 'one that moves crookedly.'
3.c. འཐངས hthuts( another form འདུངས htuis ) pf. of 3959 hthun.ba., Vpā 'to drink'. Mark the pf. form of the vb. is used here as n.
4. d. gal phel is pf. of gas hphel.ba, Vvrdh 'to increase.'
5. d. For at go see ante', Note PD, 12.7.
28
1. Skt. PT. II.107.
2. b. ag'blun.po or 392 blun.pa jada, mūrkha “stupid' is not in fact what Skt. durjana is, for which in Tib. we have སྐྱེ་བོ་ངན skye.bo.ian.
3. c. According to Skt. adựśya is st'A5 mi-mthon. bar.bya.
4. d. 9735*23 95. gnod.par.byed means bādhate 'pains' 'troubles
29 1. Skt. IP, 7,524.

Page #291

1 ]
a
NAGANANDA
30
1. Skt. SR, 82.63 (old ed.).
2. b.
6
མཚངས་ ཉིད་ mtshuis.ñid.
mtshuns, sadṛśa 'equal'. In Tib. sādṛṣya is
In such cases
stood, though it could not be put owing to the metre.
II
NĀGĀNANDA
247
5 is to be under
times in translating into Skt. not add anything; e. g.
1. a.
lit. upagṛhya and not upetya.
2. la. is imp. and pf. of 254 'to opn'. Here it is
used for ཕྱེ་ནས or ཕྱེ་སྟེ ‘having opened', ནས or
being
omitted for the metre.
3. 16. seems to signify here acc. referring to the meaning of the preceding sentence. See KA, 5d. Somewhen used after a verb it does 2 (BC. VI. 63c), amśukam

Page #292

248
NĀGĀNANDA
(1
utsasarja 'gave up the cloth' ; sometimes it is put between two imparatives and means 'and' ; e. g. 959' 59'59 B 55 BS. WHE5 (op.cit. VI. 61c) mahyam prayacchedam idam gyhāņa, ‘give me this and take this.' See UV,6.
4. 1d. FTT H lit.irsyayā 'with jealousy.' . 5. Id. B5 lit. tvam 'you,' sing. num., the sign of the plu. num. is omitted owing to the metre. The case is the same also with 2d.
6. 2a. rāvana, n. 'screaming,' 'crying,' 'roaring;' but here considering the Skt. metre one may read rāvana in same sense. We may, however, read ādambara which means among other things 'a kind of drum,' and 'the sounding of a trumpet as a sign of attack.' Undoubtedly the last sense is suitable here. In Skt. version the reading is āvalgibhiḥ, āvalgin means 'jumping.' It has no connection with Tib.
7. 26. Nga valitadışā ‘having the eyes turned towards. The reading calita or lalita found in different editions for valita as suggested here from Tib. are obviously not good. For valita see N. 11. 4. where a n is used for it.

Page #293

249
3.5 ]
NĀGĀNANDA 8. 2. 2. 579.95'925 nāndyante, lit. nāndim krtvā ‘after the recital of the benediction (nāndi)'.
9. 2. 4. 395:agg: 1 lit. upasevin 'attending on', 'doing homage'. The original reading upajivin means 'living on', 'subsisting by.'
10. 2. 7. ÀŽJA. AZ first pers. (asmad), 597 termination of plu. of pers. pron.; ÀÃ 37 asmākam. See 2.11.
11. 2. 17. godt 'to be contented'. 7555*95 'satisfied'. Skt. āvarjita 'gained over', 'attracted' or ‘pleased'.
12. 3a. 5 is a sign of loc. and cond. Being added to a verb, as in the present case, it may be translated by “when'.
13. 3a. 4917°25'is, in fact, fut. though in the original Skt. there is the use of pres. Sometimes in Skt. pres. is used in the sense of the near fut. (bhavisyatsāmipya). Accordingly fut. is here employed in Tib.
14. 3. 2. In Tib. zz for Skt. nepathya ‘retiring-room is omitted.
15. 3. 5. Få 375 lit means kimartham 'for what,' 'why.

Page #294

250
NĀGĀNANDA
4.1) 16. 3. 7. The other form of É Š is . In the same sense Q and & 43 are also used.
17. 3. 8. 5135 is the reading in the X. This is found also in other places in che sense of nirvinna or jātanirveda 'disgusted with’, "loathing'. Elsewhere in the text 55°55'9 is used for visāda “dejection', 'sadness”; e.g., 55°35'4'5595N savişādam. We have also
51535-9, udvignamānasa ‘anxious", disquieted'. 535 is regarded as a form of 797 'to turn out'. Accordingly in such cases 35 seems to be the pf. of 535'9 'to turn out. 35 is also the pf. of 355'9 'to go forth', 'to come forth', 'to arise', 'to appear'.
18. 3. 14. For 259'21595, praviśāmi, Skt. reads tisthāmi.
19. 4. 1. 992'59a lit. means in Skt. prakaraņa- or prakrta-unmilana 'the opening of the subject which is proposed', and as such it is what in Skt. is āmukha 'prologue or prelude to a drama'.

Page #295

7]
NĀGĀNANDA
251
20. 5. 2. After the first word there is, in fact, in X 975115, but it hardly gives any appropriate sense. In the sense of yadā or kadā we should read 95 F, but it cannot be construed properly. We may therefore read here simply 175. omitting 5 meaning thereby kena 'why'.
21. 5. 2. Ž is a terminative ptcl. used after f, 5, and c. 22. 5. 3. 59'5'55. Jy lit. prasādam kuru.
23. 5. 4. gis adv. from gì 'backward,' and 7 pf. of ཟློག་པ tto cause to turn'.
24. 5. 4. 997, , and gq, all ptcls., used after verbs denote the imp. mood.
. 25. 6c. Lit. 1981 avaśeșa ‘remainder', and 3959 'that which comes forth'; thus lit. the two words together mean that which becomes remainder (after the father has taken his food)'.
27. 7a. Here prakrtayaḥ in Skt. is in the sense of ministers of a king and this is quite clear from Tib. པོ་རྣམས.

Page #296

252
NĀGĀNANDA
[7.13
28. 79. Lit. pr9' is manaḥsamuid coinprehension of the mind.' Skt. manoratha in Tib. is 9955 lit. 'the wooden horse of the mind' ; here 5'5 'wooden horse is for 'a chariot (ratha)':
29.7. 7.381°315 352 lit. vināšaka ‘destroyer'; while hataka means 'cursed', 'wretched'.
30. 7. 7. Want a lit. tāta-mukhe asti ‘is in the mouth of the father.' It seems to imply that if his father says he would do so. Thus figuratively it corresponds to Skt. tātānurodhāt for the sake of the father'.
31. 7.9. 1993 lit. kim kartavyam.
32. 7.10 After this add : Ajaft Tri Efeszalfa 78 i garai ततः किं स्यात् । ननु स्वशरीरात्प्रभृति सर्व परार्थमेव मया परिपाल्यते। यत्तु स्वयं न दीयते तत्तातानुरोधात् । तत्किमनेनावस्तुना चिन्तितेन । वरं तातासँवानुष्ठिना ।
33. 7. 10. ENX925 lit. anuśāsanam 'instruction, ‘precept', 'command'..
34. 7. 10. 19:25*3 is generally vidheya, here to be carried out'.
35. 7. 13. Evidently there is some confusion in the Tib.

Page #297

7.20 ]
NĀGĀNANDA
253
version, as dūrikrta ( 55 9545 J5 ) should have been used with samitkuśa'. In Skt. text there is no sūnya ‘vacant', Tib. 199. It is to be noted that while in Skt. upayukta is used in the sense of consumed'in Tib. it (3.95EA) means 'necessary' or 'desirable'.
36. 7. 16. After the Skt. passage (p. 50) ending in Fira वर्तते add : तदितो मलयपर्वत गत्वा किञ्चित्तस्मिन निवासयोग्याश्रमपदं निरूपयेति । तदेहि मलयपर्वतमेव गच्छावः ।
37. 7. 19. Às, vrkșa 'tree'. 38. 7. 19. RĒTA lit. grāhin 'takıng'.
39. 7. 19. WE'N'R$55 pariksobha ‘shaking about'. For this in Skt. we have utsarga 'association'.
40. 7. 19. For 935, bhadra 'good', there is nothing in Skt. 41. 7. 19. V is pf. of a 'to rub with', 'to apply on'.
42. 7. 20. For Skt. utkanthita ‘anxious' in Tib. we have འདོད་ཅན་ ot འདོད་ལྡན, but here we have simply འདོད་པ evidently in the above sense.
43. 7. 20. Strictly weg is in Skt. snigdha ‘affectionate', 'friendly', and 5979:1 is priya 'dear'.

Page #298

254
:
NĀGĀNANDA
[ 10.1
44.7. 24.
དེ་ལྟར་ཡང
tothd cd and not totha hi as given
above.
45. 86. 552755. & jala 'water', and 975 5 nidhi, kośa "treasury' ; thus 5755 lit. ‘repository of water', e.g., "the ocean'.
46. 9a. 255 generally 'to explain' (vyākhyā).
47. 9. 7. (so in X) is for guš (see 7. 19) ghana 'dense.' Or the reading should be p95.
48. 9. 8. Skt. surabhi means 'sweet-smelling', 'fragrant', as well as 'a cow'. Its Tib. equivalent 9 (as used here) means 'a cow'. Accordingly surabhihavis is taken by the Tib. translators to mean ‘ghee made of the cow milk'.
49.9. [2. ནགས་ཚལ. In Tib. ནགས is simply a pand 'forest,' and 9911*taruşanda 'a ġrove' or ‘a grove of trees'.
50. 10d. For ཀློག་པར་བྱེད the X has སྒྲོག་པརཾ .uccdruate, or pathyate. In the Tib. text the latter reading is to be retained.
51. 10. 1. 24 H 275 gå lit. upalaksayāvaḥ is in the
same sense.

Page #299

13.2 ]
NĀGANANDA
255
52. 10. 7. j = in the sense of Skt. alavāla 'a basin for water round the root of a tree' is not in the dictionary of S. C. Das. The other word for it is 5'9.
53. 11. 2. Lit. A t a is citta-sukha 'happiness of the mind.
54. 11. 4. According to Tib. f 25*5*** 47580 is kabalagarbha(madhya)sthita darbha 'the kuśa grass that remains in the mouth'.
55. 126. Episc519 nirhāriņi, lit. means that which surely takes away (the mind),
56. 13d. Adding 355 kāmaye ‘I desire' Tib. here amplifies the text. Lit. the last line means in Skt. : abhivāñchitaprasiddhim kāmaye.
58. 13. 2. Evidently the reading 7573 vigy gitvā having sung' in the Tib. text is wrong, for due to singing there cannot be any fatigue of the finger. The Skt. text gives us the actual reading ciram khalu vāditam. The word vādita means “(you) have played on a musical instrument'. Accordingly one may read here རོལ་མོས་ udditend, for གླ་དག་བླངས་ནས་

Page #300

256
UDĀNAVARGA
(1
59. 13. 12. Skt. tişthet is expressed by šíg*"5. 3547 V sthā 'to sit', 'to stay'. Mark that the potential mood is made here by using the word À5 lit. meaning 'possibility'
57. 13. 17. 35, krtsna ‘all', kevala 'only'. In the sense of na kebalam 'not only' we have the following phrase with it, which is often used : 273 & 415*81*35.
60. 14. For Skt. sakala ‘all' Tib. reads 294°55'AIN, saphala 'fruitful', 'successful. This shows that the Tib. translators misread sakala for saphala. It can be inferred from this fact that the MS. before them was either in Nagari or Bengali script.
III
UDĀNAVARGA
1. b. ཤེས jiana, པགྱིས(pf. of བགྱིད་པ, elegant form of 35*41. Wkr 'to doo) kyta; thus amingja is lit. jñāta 'known'.
2. d. Read or after 55. Lit. the Skt. of this line is tava udbhavo na bhavisyati.

Page #301

8 ]
UDĀNAVARGA
257
1. d. In Tib. there is nothing of Skt. kutaḥ. BÈAN g5 lit. na bhayam.
1. d.
995 305 lit. prāpto bhavati or prāpsyati ‘attains'
or 'will attain,' and not edhate 'increase.'
1. b. This line in Skt. would be janyate prajñayā tặptir, and not śreyasi (text śreyasi) prao, 5 meaning Vjan (causative) 'to produce'.
2. c and d. Lit. in Skt. prajñayā tịptaḥ puruṣaḥ tịşņāvašo na bhavati.
1. d. 2*215 LN ( SH is here imp. of 5557 for 5951 'to do,') lit. means jānihi ‘know'. For the use of 21 here see Note, NA, 3.
1. c. 387 krtvā and not karoti as in the original Skt.
2. d. is often used in the sense of viparyāsa ‘over turning', nivārana 'keeping back' ; as a verb it also means
33

Page #302

258
UDĀNAVARGA
[ 13
'to cause to return', 'to send back,' etc. Here with 5
'abhi'- it means 'to devastate'.
9
1. c. Lit. this line is in Skt. pramādasevanam na kuryāt. 2. d. lokavardhanam na kuryāt 'should not increase the worldly affairs'.
11
1. d. འདམ་རྗབ་ལས is paikūdt ‘frommud pankasanna 'sunk down in mud' as in the text.
13
and not
1. a.
, ādadita '(one) should accept'. This line means that one should accept one's own gain, i. e. what one can gain. The Skt. reading navamayeta seems, according to the Tib. translators, to imply ādadita.
2. b. For the use of after Î note in his edition of the text. I think གཞན་གྱི anyadiya or parakiya 'belonging to other', as བདག་གི
atmiya 'belonging to the self', or mamaka 'belonging to me'. The pcl. 2 used after it is in the loc. case. Lit. the line b in Skt. parakiyeṣu spṛhām na utpādayet.
see Beckh's
means
means

Page #303

17 ]
UDĀNAVARGA
259
15
1. b. In the printed text the reading is moswa but as the inst. case cannot be construed here the reading should be où gent. In Xylographs inst. and gent. signs are often confounded.
2. b. E go is tathā and not atha. It seems that either the Tib. translators read athāpi of the Skt. text for tathāpi or their MS had the wrong reading.
3. d. ÉANNEN HV is Sambuddha and not Buddha (55W).
16 1. b. This Skt. text is translated figuratively there being much difference, for while in Skt. there is bhavāya vibhavāya ca (c), Tib. has bhavasya vibhavasya ca (c); for Skt. dvaidhā (c) Tib. reads ubhaya, or dvaya (d); for Skt. yogān (1) Tib. yogāt (e); for Skt. atikramet (1) Tib. atikarmāya (e);and for Skt. śikṣeta (e) Tib. śikṣasva (f). Read jn in d for ÎN which is wrongly printed.
17 1. 4. ཉེས་པར་སྤྱད་པ lit. ducaritan. Similarly ལེགས་པརསྤྱད་ (c) is sucaritam.

Page #304

260
2. b. For socate the word gata being reads in Skt.: sugatim
UDĀNAVARGA
[ 21
Tib. tapyate, strictly tapo bhavati, put in gen. (4). Similarly Tib. gatasya ānando bhavati (d).
18
According to Skt. would give the
1. a. reading abhāṣaṇam, lit. abhāṣite.
1. b.
19
1. a. 5 and 4 n. adhikṣepa, nindā ‘blame, slander'; and also v. adhi-/kṣip, nind 'to blame, slander'. སྨད་པ is also pf. of སྨོད་པ V/nind One may thereforeread here སྨོད་པར་བྱ་བ for སྨད་པརཾ
'to slander,
blame'.
in the Text and also in Beck's edition. The phrase lit. means nindaniya 'one who deserves to be blamed'. Similarly 44, stutya 'one deserves to be praised'.
20
as
1. a.
Skt. ekaghana 'consisting of a mass of solid stone.'
2. d. Tib. here amplifies Skt. writing prakampate (54*5*
) for kampate ‘moves'.
'rock'. It is evidently used here to imply
21
is for a (cf. Skt. loman), parṇa 'leaf.'

Page #305

261
26 ]
UDĀNAVARGA 2. d. means 'if looked into,' ‘when examined.' 3. d. 15 BV nindārha 'blamable.'
22 1. b. For Skt. divija divine' Tib. lit. deva-vişaye or deva-deśe ‘in the country of gods' (Zuni).
23 1. a. 95 madhya 'middle.' *75*7 lit. manusya-madhye 'among men.' Seec.
2. b. Strictly. Agra is tişthāmaḥ in Skt., and not viharāmaḥ for which we have a@ 09. See UV, 15a.
3.c. འཚེ་བ is for འཆ་བ་ཅན as in 4.
25 1. b. For Skt. kāma- 'desire' Tib. actually prīti- or ānanda- (597995). In the Skt. text for nipātinaḥ there is, in fact, nipādinaḥ in the edition.
26. 1: 6. ཡིད་མགྱོགས་ suggests manojapa, མགྱོགས meaning java 'swift' or 'swiftness But we require here manobhava

Page #306

[2
or manomaya as in the Pali version. The Tib. translators
read -bhava for -java.
262
BUDDHACARITA
2. e. In Skt. text one should read tam for te. Tib. 4, pra-/ap 'to get,' does not convey the sense
or
of Skt. anvefi 'follows.'
IV
BUDDHACARITA
1
1. a. muhurta 'a moment' or 'a period of 48 minutes' is taken in Tib. as muhūrtamātra (5) just measur
ing a moment or a period of 48 minutes'.
2. c.
ངན་སྤོང་སྐྱེས or ངན་སྦོང་བུ.
3 d. lit. narasamūha ‘a multitude of men'.
or Bhargava or Parasurama we have sometimes
2
1. a. Generally for visvasta 'full of confidence' 'trusted' and viśvāsa 'confidence' we have in Tib. 55
or

Page #307

263
3]
BUDDHACARITA dườha- or sthira-manas ‘firm-minded'. The lit. meaning of Žua. is prajñāpatita ‘one who is thrown into wisdom,' there meaning prajñā or buddhi and 29 pf. of BÀAN'II 'to throw down.'
2. 5. The printed text read གནས་པར for གནས་པའི་
3.c. གཟིགས་པ is the hon. form of མཐོང་བ and ལྟ་བ་ (avalokana, darśana) 'to see.'
4.c. ངལ་གསོས. ངལ་བ ཙrama *fatigue', and གསོས another form of pf. of ANS, poșana 'to nourish' and pratividhāna, cikitsā 'to cure'. Here qřN is used in the last sense. Thus 521*984 means viśrānta ‘reposed.'
-
3
1. a. Lit. 55 šā is abhāvārtha, for the absence', and not nivsttyartha 'for the cessation.'
2. b. Lit. 599.99 is duşkara “difficult to do'.
3. c. Generally wil is the Skt. prefix anu- (see BC, 16), though it is used here for anuvartitā 'the state of one that follows,' the Tib. equivalent to which is any

Page #308

BUDDHACARITA
264
2694795. It is only owing to the metre that this fuller form could not be used here. Such cases are often found.
1. a. 595 is generally for the Skt. prefix abhi-, while ava- is variously expressed, for instance, by 15, 785, m8 qH, etc. See Foucaux, p. 171.
2. b. Mark here the use of ĝ5.
3. b. 35'9 'to bathe', here it is in the causative sense.
5 1. a. spagogic lit. one that soars (high) in the sky.. 169 ākāsa ‘sky', and his utpatana 'going upwards'.
2. a. R TV BTT is the lit. translation of turanga 'going quickly, i.e. a horse' ( for the first part of the word cf. Vt? and /tvar), V(51) meaning 'swift' and also ‘swiftness,' 'speed (java) as in a, and Q1a, Vgam 'to go.'
3. b. རྗེས་སུ་འོངས is lit. བno@gada. འོངས is pf. of འོང་བ 'to come (āgamana).'
4. c. ggy is here anena 'by this', and not ayam 'this”.

Page #309

BUDDHACARITA
265
1. a. 9HN*55is sarvataḥ lit. 'from all sides and not sarvathā ‘in every way' for which we have qan*555.
2. b. 25 and 25 are pf. of pzg''to seize, grasp", Skt. Vgrah. Its ft. is 925. But sometimes this form is taken as pf. The form༔ གཟུང་བ. བཟུང་བ, and ཟིན་པ are found in all tenses.
3. d. For 557'51, Skt. suddha ‘pure', the actual reading in the printed text is 59'2, but it does not give any appropriate sense.
4. d. '25 lit. tādrśa‘like that,' while 38 95 is idịša 'like this.'
1. a. and b. Lit. 51872 55 24 means in Skt. Bhaktyabhāve 'in the absence of devotion', 949 meaning bhakti *devotion and 35.04 abhāve ‘in absence'. According to Skt. གུས་པ is here for གུས་པ་ལྡན as in b and c meaning bhaktimdf or bhakta 'devoted' or 'devotee. Similarly ga', Skt. sakti ‘ability', is to be taken as 57°21*215 as in c meaning śaktimat or śakta ‘able.'
34

Page #310

266
BUDDHACARITA
[10
2. d. * (bhū) gs (tala) lit. bhū-tala 'the surface of the earth.'
1. a and b. Mark here the use of the gen. 550, tava ‘your.' It should have been employed before the adj. Nasa
ཆེན་པོའི་ odhibhigend. འདིས should also have been used just after an.
2. d. 1955. (qnyatra 'in another place or direction") 3194 (mukha 'face ') lit. means ‘one whose face is turned in another (direction)', i.c. prārmukha 'having the face turned away.'
1. b. For abhimukha lit. 'with the face turned towards', i.c., 'friendly disposed' we have in Tib. 39, but here is མཐུན་ཕྱོགས in the same sense. མཐནor མཐན་པ means བnukula 'favourable', and a diś or mukha direction'.
10
1. a. 435. See note, BC, 6.2. In Tib. pf. forms are often used where in Skt. there are present ones.

Page #311

12 ]
BUDDHACARITA
2. b. For
suggested by me according to Skt.
Weller reads
which with the preceding word
would
suggest in fact pita janayati 'the father produces'.
3. c. This line in Tib. is translated very freely. Lit. it would mean in Skt. āśā- or tṛṣṇā-cintayā sango jāyate 'attachment comes into being through the thought of expectation or desire.' For āśayā śliṣyati Johnston reads āśayāc chli.
4. c. There is nothing in the Tib. text for Skt. jagat.
5. d. 55. Strictly it means niskaraṇa 'without action' and not niṣkāraṇa.
1. d. Weller reads the reading padam vanam we require here
1. a. དེ་སྐད in Skt.
In Tib. kāraṇa is j
11
'place.'
in Tib.
12
267
or
བྱེད་རྒྱུ་
after 25. It would give
But according to Skt.
evam, fig. iti. See for iti,
BC, 19c.
2. 6. Ê3⁄4yyq' is Skt. anusamsa (Divyāvadāna,

Page #312

268
BUDDHACARITA
[15
p. 92, etc.) and is the same as ānisamsa in Pali, meaning 'privilege', 'comfort', 'reward'. Accordingly the reading ānțsamsa in Cowell's edition cannot be maintained and Johnston has rightly corrected it.
13 1. c. på An51 ( Weller reads Q for 51 ) is used also for the Vindhya mountain. The Tib. root på 90's in meaning is Skt. Vbhid 'to pierce.' The Tib. translators appear to have taken the last part (i.e., -dara) of Mandara as connected with or derived from / di 'to picrce'. In fact Mandara is from mand 'to rejoice, bc glad' mcaning ‘pleasant, agreeable, charming.'
14 1. a. Here & is to be construcd as , Skt. anena.
2. d. ã aan fig. for amuklaviśrambham . 2190 is pf. of 24:3, an hon. verb for 'to come, arrivc'. Cf. ĀDA (BC, 2a) for viśvāsa.
1. a. According to Tils. aga there should be cithcr jātior janma- in Skt., and not jarā as in Cowell's cd. for which we have རྒྱ་བ

Page #313

23 ]
BUDDHACARITA
19
1. b. According to Tib.
Skt. sthitaḥ for sthirah.
2. c.
269
one should read in
lit. evam or tathā (BC, 23) and not iti in Skt.
See BC, 25°.
3. c. For dāyāda 'heir' we have here . The verb means 'to grant, give', and is the ft. or gerundive of lit. means 'one to whom (some
'to do'; thus
thing) is to be given'.
20
1. c. བདག་པོ lit. means in Skt. pati 'lord, master, owner', not strictly dayāda 'one entiled to a share of patrimony, an heir'.
23
1. a. For evamādi in Skt. Tib. has which lit. means tadādi.
3. d. The verb ཞུ་བ is chiefly used in addressing one's superiors and also in politeness between equals, signifying 'to ask, to request, to beg, to petition.' As a subst. it means

Page #314

270
BUDDHACARITA
[27
'request, petition'; or 'enquiry, question'. after is ft. of
ฐ
• བྱེད་པ, vær 'to do.'
3. d. གྱིས is imp. of བགྱིད་པ elegant form of བྱེད་པ 'to
do,' meaning kuru 'do.'
25
1. d. For kṛtāñjali Tib.lit. yuktāñjali reading qa's y ́s, lit. añjalim yuktvā 'with folded hands'.
26
1. c. For Skt. sidati 'sinks into distress, becomes dejected' Tib. simply 24 (d) which may mean vikriyate 'undergoes unnatural condition'. The rendering ཡཻད་བསད་པར་འགྱུར, Skt. viṣidati, would have been very clear.
9
27
1. b. Note here that the verb
Skt. jayate or
འབྱུང་བ,
utpadyate 'to come forth, arise' though intransitive is used here as transitive meaning janayet or utpādayet 'would produce'. Or taking as instr. one may construe the sentence thus: anena tava niścayena kasya bāṣpaṁ notpadyate.
2. d. Mark how the significance of Skt. kim punaḥ is ex

Page #315

271
29 ] BUDDHACARITA
271 pressed in Tib. by vizan lit. kathaya kim prayojanam ‘say what is the necessity (of speaking of the heart affected by love)'.
28 1. a. For w Weller reads WH, Skt. mārga ‘a path' taking it in the sense of gamana-, 'going'. According to Skt. the reading seems to be 50, Skt. sayana- 'bedstead'.
2. b. 995"-15, Skt. sukumāra 'very delicate or soft is to be taken here for 9550765995, Skt. saukumärya 'the state of being very delicate'. The word 5 which means certainty', Skt. eva, and is often used to make nouns from adjectives is omitted here owing to the metre. It is found that in Tib. sometimes 5 is omitted though it is absolutely required, and sometimes it is inserted though t is not required at all. See BC, 40°.
29
1. d. pa lit. devena.
2. d. 255.284:51, Skt. kāríta got done. Note causatives are generally formed by adding འཇུག་པ (pf. བཅུག, ft.

Page #316

272
[32
9. imp. ) to put, cause, make' to the root of the
infinitive.
3. d. For Skt. eva Tib, reads iva. (35).
30
1. a, c and d. The Tib. text is somewhat amplified: In a, Skt. niścita,, and in c 5, Skt. aśva are added. In d. Tib. śokasthāna (5) is for Skt. śoka.
ཉེ་བར་ལེན་ཏེ (lit. upaniya orupániuawhich
2. c and d. seems to have been for upānaye 'ham for the actual reading upānayeyam in the text) being put before the adjective followed by the noun (5), the Tib. construction is rather peculiar.
BUDDHACARITA
31
1. c. 4, Skt. ista, kānta, priya ‘agreeable', 'dear', 'lovable' is used here for -lalasa 'ardently desirous of' in b.
2
2. c. is a ptcl.
32
1. 6. 5 is Skt. utpādana 'production or generation', but it is used here in the sense of -vardhana 'growing up'.
2. d. Tib. reads devim (1) for deva in the Skt. text.

Page #317

37]
BUDDHACARITA
273
34
1. a. 90gžg may mean simply Yasodhara 'maintaining glory', and not Yāsodhara 'the son of Yośodharā, Siddhārtha's wife.
2. c. The Tib. reading Tà 941 as given by Weller is doubtful. Skt. vyasana 'bad practice, evil habit is translated into Tib. variously according to different shades of its meanng; e.g., in BC itself (III. 46a) we have fq. 5 og for it,
meaning asakti 'attachment;' in NA, I. 2, 955'9 'lust, exces.
sive desire'; in Mahāvyutpatti, ed. Sakaki, 6956, KEN' vipad `danger’ ( HN (?) Žd'A5, Skt. dharmavyasana-).
36 1. a. For Rāghava Tib. lit. Raghu-putra (apa's).
2. a. Mark that Tib. reads Sumitra ( 49841'935) for Sumantra well-known in the Rāmāyaṇa.
3. b. As a ptcl. y is a sign of the gerund used after v.
1. a. For Skt. ste 'without' Tib. 255 in the sense of lyakıvā “having left'.
35

Page #318

274
BUDDHACARITA
[ 41
2. c. 1837 is an hon. term for a woman of rank, queen, rājñī, and ză means parivāra attendants' ; both the words taken together mean the queen and her attendants, and for this the Skt. word is antaḥpura 'harem' meaning thereby those who live in the harem, i.e. the queen and her attendants.
38 1. b. f (imp. of y'a 'to say)' lit. kathaya 'sayo, and not vācya 'to be said.'
39
1. d. Note here that the pron. Y, Skt. kaḥ is used at the end of the sentence, and here is a case which is rare.
40
1. a: FA is Skt. tiksņa 'sharp, hot'; taiksnya in Tib. is 1935, but 5 is omitted here. See note, BC, 28. 2.
41 1. d: angiĝo, Skt. prasāda 'favour'; and 5x5, Skt. kuru, is imp. of we5 hon. form for 5:21, Vkr 'to do.' Thus བཀའ་དྲིན་མཛོད is prasida in Skt.

Page #319

44 ]
BUDDHACARITA
42
བཀའ Skt. śāsana, ājñā 'order,
1. d. བཀའ་སྩལ. command,' and sometimes simply vacana 'speech.' It is an hon. form.And སྩོལ་བ (pf. སྩལ) means dā 'to give'. Thus 4 though generally vad, √gad, etc. 'to say,' in fact means śāsti or ājñāpayati 'orders', 'commands', and is used when the speaker is a honoured person. Hence the speaker being the Buddha is the equivalent to
the phrase
jagada 'said.'
2. d. is a terminative ptcl. used after
ན,
and 5,
44
1. c. is Skt. yad and not yadi, Tib.
2. b and d. Mark that 3 or
while it is not so in b.
275
ལ.
43
1. b. imp. of 5, Skt. √tyaj, ut-√srj 'to give up.' ཅིག, ཞིག, and ཤིག when usedafterverbs signify
the imp. mood. It may, however, be noted that they signify rather the subj. present or precative mood. See BC, 51c; 55a. For their use see Note, PD, 3.2.
'if'.
4 in d is caustative,

Page #320

276
BUDDHACARITA
3. b. Skt. mumukṣayā is omitted in Tib.
[49
45
1. d. Here for Skt. kva used twice there are kah and kā
(y) in the Tib. text.
46
1. a. For Skt. aṇḍa
'egg' Tib. is in fact
and not
; so andaja should be in Tib., but here we have
སྒོང་སྐྱེས་
This is simply owing to the metre.
47
54, Skt. unmilana 'to open' for
2. b. Weller reads
25 'to disappear' amended by the present author.
2. d. According to Tib. the construction is me prāṇinām ca mataḥ, but in Skt. one may construe: tathā prāṇinām samyogo vipragogaś ca me mataḥ.
48
1. b. For Skt. parasparam Tib. seems to read punaḥ punaḥ (). In fact it has punaḥ, but owing to metre it is to be taken to mean punaḥ punaḥ.
49
1.
a. and b. Mark the slight change of the expression
in Tib.

Page #321

BUDDHACARITA
277
54 )
2. d. Tib. translates here the text figuratively: ni bhavisyati (iti) kathaya kim prayojanam ( 295 'A'!" $# 5ATN ), the laet part of which (i.e. a fi gata) is also for Skt. kā kathā in the Catuḥśataka, 285d. is nf. and imp. of g'a 'to call, remark, or assert.'
50 1. c. Weller reads Baan as in the text, but what it means is not quite clear. Skt. lambate yadi tu snehaḥ may be taken to mean 'But if (your) attachment (or love) rests (on me)'. In Tib. 39999 (pf. 99 or 99 ) is used in the sense of Skt. V pat 'to move downwards,' 'to come down,' *to fall down'. We may therefore read here and and not pand taking the former in the sense of Skt. patati as an equivalent to lambate for which in Tib. we have 235 or འཕུངས.
54
1. 4. དྲ་བ, jala ·web* is to be taken here for དྲ་བ་ཅན་ Similarly in d 235, Skt. vayas 'age", is to be taken for gamb 395, lit. 'of equal age', i.e. a vayasya 'friend.'

Page #322

278
BUDDHACARITA
57
[ 65
1. d. Weller wrongly readsབྱེད་ for ཁྱད. ཁྱད་པ is
viśeșa 'distinction' in Skt.
'', āryaiḥ; which
is not in the Skt. text is added in Tib.
61
1. d. Note here the employment of 2. In double im
perative or precative expressions is used after the first verb, and it has the force of 'and'; e.g. སོང་ལ་ལྡོམ་ཤིག gaccha pasya ca go and look'. See BC, 62d: 45 N , praticcha, ānaya (ca) ‘take and bring'.
62
The reading འདོད་པ་སྙིང་པོ་ལས lit.
1. a. kāmasārāt 'owing to the essence of desire', is not better than kāmam arād found in Skt. text, the latter meaning 'according to desire (kāmam) near (or far)."
2. d.
lit. prārthanām kuru ‘request,' but here
it gives a different sense, anaya 'bring.'.
65
1. b. Read, as in the edition of Johnston which reached

Page #323

67]
BUDDHACARITA
279
the author after the text is printed, sambhrd for samuid as in Cowell's edition, and dhịti- for dhịta-. Both the readings are supported by Tib. In b 259 'firm' is apparently to be taken for a57 95 firmness' answering to Skt. dhịti; and 2,859 means 'to hold', 'to keep' corresponding to Skt. ✓bhr. In d 5 (1) meens pari-vdhā ''to put on,' 'to dress' ; this sense is expressed in Skt. by using -bhịt from ✓bhr. 'to hold, wear.'
66
1. b. For -vāsasi Tib. -bhāsasi ( $595).
67
1. c. 35 for Skt. nirāśa 'helpless' is a doubtful reading. Is it 2085 ? means āśā “hope' and 45 chinna 'destroyed'.
2. . ཟློས(wrongly printed བཟླས)is pf. of ཟླ་བ or 29 jalpana, “to call' ; atât, Skt. vilapan ‘uttering moarning words’, ‘lamenting'. :o
3 d. Tib. omits puram and adds punar (ms).

Page #324

280
LALITAVISTARA
68
[A, 1
1. a. Tib. reads in fact viruroda (5) and not
vilalapa as in the Skt. text.
or
2. b. For papāta the Tib. equivalent may be 44 from 34', ✓pat 'to fall down'. Tib. 2 འགྱེལ་བ both 'to fall' and 'tumble down' corresponding to Skt. pat and/skhal (Nāgananda, IV. 1) respectively. In the Tib. text འབྲད or འབྲད་པ (pf. བྲབ) means, as says Sharat Chandra, 'to search', 'to scrape,' 'to tear with claws,'
Note that in the colophon for Chandaka in the Skt. text Tib. has Kanthaka for which word see the author's note in the Indian Historical Quarterly, Vol, XII, No. 3, 1936 (The Horse of Sakyasimha).
V
LALITAVISTARA A
means
1. 19. 55, rsi 'sage'. The word, if analysed, will show the idea behind it according to the Tib. translators, which is not to be found in Skt. 55 means sarala 'honest' 'straight-forward' (Cf. 5534 which lit. means 'one that

Page #325

A, 6]
LALITAVISTARA
281
goes straight,' and hence 95g, Sara ‘an arrow”), and 5 or Ván is 'straight' 'righteous'; thus 55ý5 is ‘one who is honest and righteous'. In the Tib text mahā- is omitted.
2. 35, བགྱིའོ is the ft. form ( བགྱི)of the verb བགྱིད་ which is used as an elegant form of 954, v kr 'to do,' with the terminative ptcle ž, meaning Raromi 'I do'. For karişyāmi here karomi 'I do' is used to denote the near future (bhavişyat-sāmīpya).
3. 395.857475. 8655 lit. 'requested to know.' 17is hon. for 90's, Viña 'to know,' or jñāna knowledge,' Here it is used as a noun and not as a verb. 5555 is inf., kartum 'to do', and in prārthayata 'requested.' Lit. the phrase in Skt. is : jñānakaraņāya prārthayata.
4. 329. GBAN 4, jūņa 'worn out,' 'very old' is to be taken here as a noun, Riayat 35. jurņatva ‘the state of being worn out.'
5. 341. མཆིས is pt. of མཆི་བ, elegant form forཡོད་པV/bht, sthā “to be”, “to remain.' 6. 337. BOH(-A), paryeșaņa 'to seek', 'to look for'.
36

Page #326

282
LALITAVISTARA
[A, 12
7.389. HBŽ. See note 5 above. Here it means tişthati ‘remains,' and not vadati 'says' as in the Skt. text. See note LV, A, 23.
8.57-8. §5A, 01-/str 'to spread on the ground.' 454 (pf. of འཇུག་པ) makes the verb causative. Thus སྟན་འདིང་ད་ 4879 lit. means 'having got the āsana 'mat' spread.' This is what the Tib. translators understood by prajñāypa lit. 'having got understood.' Here the sense and not the word is translated.
9. 415. Lit. 555, abhyantare “inside': Žiakaja āgamanam kuru, āgaccha “come. hy is imp. of 5 elegant form for 25:51, Vkr 'to do. For the use of 9 see BC, 436.
10.55. šas prāsāda 'palace,' as well as kula 'family'. The palace where the kula 'family of a king lives is also called kula.
11.511. a@5(21) is hon. of 2534, Vgam 'to go,' 'to start.' For $97 see BC, 436.
12.615. IN, iti, is added.

Page #327

A, 18 ]
LALITAVISTARA
283
13. 618-19. Lit. glas, jayam 'victory', og āgaccha i. e. prāpnuhi "come i. e. get'. imp. of 9 or 18:41 which is hon. of 3, pf. and imp. of 25157091, a gam 'to come, arrive.'
14. 7o4. garzí, rājan ‘king' is to be taken here for agar í 35 rājya ‘kingdom.
15. 635. Here Skt. kāraya is in form causative though not so in sense, for it means kuru as quite evident from Tib. pag. 7 which exactly means kuru.
16. 78. 5 is dakşiņā ‘a present that is given to a priest.' The lit. means 'the water that is offered to a priest or a guest as dakşiņā, signifying what is called arghya consisting of water and such other things as dūrvā grass, etc. In Nāgānanda, 1. 11°, we have wag W5 for Skt. arghya.
17.7o. The Tib. equivalent to Skt. pādya which means the water meant for washing one's feet is translated by *15*21*21*7554 which lit. means 'the water that is thrown on one's foot'.
18. 713. For sādhu in Skt. text there is ati- (85) in Tib. But see note 28. .

Page #328

284
LALITAVISTARA
[ A, 24
19. 715. For parigṛhya Tib. has paripūjya or satkṛtya
(ཡོངསུ་བཀར་ནས).
2
20. 86. Supratisa. Lefmann reads supratisa. In Divyāvadāna (333, 16; 484. 15; 485. 20) there is sapratīsa, Pali sappatissa, 'respectful,' Tib. ''5'43'. The word ' means śraddhā, ādara, bhakti 'respect,' 'reverence, 'devotion.'
21.933. བལྟམས་པpf.ofལྟམས་པ(ft. བལྟམ) 'to be born’ ( འཁྲངས་པ ), hon. of སྐྱེ་བ of the same meaning.
is ft. of 4 (pf. 2, imp.
22.915. ) 'to look,' with it gives the sense of Skt. drakṣyat, and hence draṣṭukāma 'desirous of seeing.
23. 918. མཆིས pf. of མཆི་བ which is in fact ཡོད་པ ་to be' in sense. It also means āgataḥ 'come, arrived.' See note LV, A, 7.
24. 106. Lit. 3
means Skt. supto bhūtaḥ
'remains sleeping.' The word here and in such cases
Thus གཞོན་ནུ་ཉལ་ཞིང་མཆིས་ཀྱིས
implies a cause. 'because the prince sleeps.'
means

Page #329

285
A, 30 ]
LALITAVISTARA 25. 10°. 55289. Lit. 55*25, işat, kiñcit a little, ‘slight,' also ‘a little while.' Îy is the modified form of 19T, eka, and means 'some.' The phrase signifies Skt. muhūrta 'a moment' and not its strict sense 'a period of 48 minutes.'
26. 122. ETV is tataḥ or atha 'then' in Skt., and not iti hi. See LV, A. 131.
27. 128.9. For anukampayā Tib. lit. anukampām ( gs: PFPA) upādāya (2959 ).
28. 12°?. 995 is used for Skt. āti- ‘very, and also su- or sādhu 'good'; e. g. sudarśana is 955*85. See note 18.
29. 1323. 22489 generally for Skt. ārya 'exalted,' ‘sublime,' 'raised up,' and also for visişța 'excellento; here for atireka 'excellence' which is to be explained as atirikta 'excellent.'
30. 1356. 39, hasta ‘hand,' and gol(-a) 'to beg,' *to show,' 'to offer'; thus 3990. lit. means 'to show hands',. i. e. to show the (folded) hands as a token of paying respect. And so with the ptcl. § it means praņipatya 'having saluted'.

Page #330

286
LALITAVISTARA
[ A, 36
31. 141. For yaiḥ Tib. taiḥ with them' ( 597).
32. 1416. The word Forgt in such cases means gatior prakāra 'manner'.
33. 1417. Têm or 987 is for Skt. ubhaya 'both'. Agar is also of the same meaning.
34. 1494. As the Tib. reads (9199 anta ‘end', pê catur 'four', and 985'a adhikāra or ādhipatya ‘power' or 'sovereignty”) for Skt. caturanga 'having four members (of an army) one should read caturanta- taking it as the first member of a compound with the following word cakravartin, caturanta implying the 'four ends of the earth'.
35. 1428. CH'S'AJNityataḥ 'from this' is to be construed wtih awiga a'5 lit. itiparyantam, idiomatically yāvat'up to this'. This refers to a passage which is fully given before (Skt. text, p. 101, 11. 12-19 ; Tib. text, p. 93, 11. 3-13).
36. 14*0. y is one of the additive (395) pctls. (5, 5, 5, 5 and v) used after nouns and pronouns (and sometimes also after adjectives, e. g. WEN' Y, pari,- 'entirely,' 'completely") ending in N, and denotes motion, progression to, or change,

Page #331

B, 3 ] LALITAVISTARA
287 or promotion into another state, and thus sometimes implies the loc. case ; e. 8. q *y, daksine 'to or on the right side'. Accordingly won'JN'T798 lit. means 'renowned as the Buddha'; here a change to Buddhahood is implied.
36. 1446. ''s, lādịśa‘like that'.
B.
B 1.145. 31 vb. and subst. 'to think' and 'thought’, here subst. ; DAN subst., cittu 'mind'. Volis Dan is a phrase meaning abhiprāya 'thought.' As vb. it is for manyate 'thinks'. Sometimes it expresses the real implication of the word iti, etad, or evam by which one is to understand the thought referred to. In the present case $85 DN is vb. and means manyate or cintayati.
2. 25. Here 95(+51) the pf. of which is gv is in Skt. vvac or ✓ kath 'to say', and not kr 'to do'. And so Signs is anuktvā or akathayitvā 'having not said' for aprativedya in the original text.
3. 28. 015714753954 is rather abhinişkrameyam than nişkameyam as in the text. baigs is used mostly for the Skt. prefix abhi- and sometimes for ā-. ,

Page #332

288
LALITAVISTARA
[B, 9
4. 38. The actual reading is aśāntāyām. Evidently it is to be construed with the preceding word rātrau. But the Tib. text reads here are so the lit. Skt. equivalent to which is asuptamātra. It is to be taken with 'he' (sa) and means that he did not sleep at all.
5. 4o. 357.89-75 lit. pratiştfhānantaram. 359(+91), pratişthā ‘resting, remaining’; 99, antara 'intervention’; 1999, anantara or samanantara ‘non-intervention' or 'immediately'.
6. 38. A5'425 lit. su-gļha 'a good house', and as such it means prāsāda ‘a palace'.
7.51 For Skt. tatra Tib. reads tataḥ (EJN).
8.510. The word kāñcukiya or kañcukin is an attendant or overseer of the appartment of women, a chamberlain. For this in Tib. we have ཉང་རུམ which is the same a ངུག་རུམ, or ངུག་རུམ་པ, kliba ‘eunuch'. Lit. it means 'the testicles cut out’, i. e. ‘one whose testicles are removed.' In ancient India attendants for royal women in a harem included eunuches, too.
9. 76. Tib. simply ardham (95) "half,' and not upārdham 'first half.'

Page #333

LALITAVISTARA
B, 16 )
289 10. 78. བས occurs for བྱས pf. of བྱེད་པ mostly in the sense of a thing quite done.or accomplished. It is used here for Skt. atikrānta 'passed'.
11. 9d. Rogo visarjana 'to let proceed', 'to send forth'.
12. 1015. For g'al, chāyā “shade', we have sometimes Hl.
13. 1117. For śuddha- in Skt. there is visuddha- in Tib. (58759).
14. 1229. The Tib. translators take sajana 'with the people' in the sense of sa-svajana 'with kinsmen or relations,' mga meaning bandhu, bāndhava 'kinsman' or 'relation'.
15. 13a. Mark here according to Tib. Haz will be in Skt. soon;pati, 5 being construed with gari.
Here WE may be regarded as another form of 25(A), āgamana 'to come. 99 W & NÊN lit. means chāyā āgatā nāsti. . 16. 136. Tib. 98731, Skt: vara (uttama ) is in fact in the sense of 'excellent, superior, best,'' but here it is used
37

Page #334

290
LALITAVISTARA
[B, 21 to mean ‘a boon. Here the Tib. translators have translated simply the word not taking the sense into consideration. See the verses 148, and 1718 where for vara is used 939.
17. 1325-26 walioša lit. rāştracakra 'province of a
realm'.
18. 14c. $5*2 lit. caryā, ācaraṇa, ‘practice.' Here it is simply an amplification. ¥195 955 means in the actor practice of giving'.
མངའ eleg. for དབང, sakti *might and མཆིས pf. of མཆི་བ eleg. for ཡོད་པ, bhu to be; thu མངའ་ ནི་ ཁྱོད་ལ་ མཆིས་ lit. means “if you have the power and this is expressed in Skt. by śakyase (saknoși) ‘if you can'.
19. 1517. 459 pf. of Bğan'a 'to cast, throw'.
20. 1519. āyus 'life', and 9519' (or 991975g) amita ‘immeasured' or 'immeasurable'. N'HI is for bhavi in the sense of bhavet in the Skt. text.
21. 1534. 38, lit. icchāmi 'I desire'. This desire is expressed in Skt. by the use of the present optative in bhaved;

Page #335

B, 27 ]
LALITAVISTARA
291
but in Tib. that expression is given employing the word
22. 178. Generally 25.9 is vyasana ‘misery', 'decline' and so 'death."
23. 1718. See note, LV, B. 16.
24. 1730. ahn. qal'a as a verb means 'to ask for', 'to beg foro; and also 'to give' (see S. D's Dictionary) and as subt. adhyeşanā, prārthanā ‘request, ‘prayer'. av is imp. of བགྱིད་པ, the elegant form of བྱེད་པ to do'. Thuཐ གསོལ་གྱིས་ lit. means dehi ‘give'. In Buddhacarita, VI. 62, WHÉS is used for ānaya ‘bring', so MARIÁN may also be for Skt. ānaya.
25. 172. 9877(+81) is resp. for 39.91 vśru 'to hear, listen', and i'a āvedana, prārthanā 'to ask for', 'to beg for’, or *request', 'entreaty'. Thus 4184957 , śrņuşva lit. ‘pray, kindly listen'.
26. 18“: For Skt. eva Tib. reads evam (@N5). 27. 1811. To chindati Tib. adds before it pari-(WEN'N')

Page #336

292
LALITAVISTARA
[ B, 35
28. 194. x is generally for punar ‘again,' but sometimes also for prati- as in '939 pratimā ‘representation, image'. 9394 means rūpg, ākrti, bimba, etc. ‘outward form of anything".
29.197. go to arrive,' Skt. Vgam, pra - Vāp; thus gaigh lit. gatvā, prāpya 'having arrived'.
30. 1915. y is instr. of the pron. y, kim ‘who.'
31. 204. g4 lit. means 'to-morrow when the night is over'; but practically signifies the day after to-morrow'. g 'at 'on the day after to-morrow'. Hence gay (rātri ‘night) 954 is for Skt. rātryā atyayena ‘after the night is over.'
32. 2018. jaga lit. in Skt. ārocya 'having said.' 33. 2016. Egy lit. katham ‘how.'
34. 2037189, In Skt. text. kā saktiḥ means in fact na śaktiḥ and this is translated into Tib. by qaror qr HÀN'Ñ śaktir na asti.
35. 218. Skt. krtāstra means 'armed' or 'trained in the science of arms'. For this Tib. has here lit. sodhitarañadharma

Page #337

B, 38]
reading འཐབ་
LALITAVISTARA
293
(rana 'fight,' 'war')
(pf. of ' 'to clear, wash, purify'; śodhita).
36.2111·
···☎
(dharma 'law')
is for Skt. mahānagnabala
as found also in the Mahāvyutpatti ed. Sakaki, 8210.
'a great many,
bahu; and
mahat, great.
à ̃â
appears to have been used here for nagna in the Skt. text. But what is the meaning of the word nagna- here? Is it for nāga ‘elephant' for which we have in Tib.
or
གླང་ཆེན?
37.2135.དཔུང་བུ་ཆུང. The word དཔང meansbala, send
'force', 'army'; and, patti or padāti 'infantry' (or
, pada 'foot';, śiśu, putra 'child, son'; 5, kṣudra, laghu 'small, little'. From this it appears that infantry soldiers in an army are regarded as little children being compared to its other three members, viz. elephants, horses, and chariots). Thus instead of we have simply added to
དཔུང་
38. 228.9. For puraskṛta Tib. hás puro valokita (855°ÎN བལྟས).

Page #338

294
LALITAVISTARA
C
anupagamnya.
[C, 3
1.13. གཉིས་པོ. In such cases theptcl. པོ is used in the sense of a definite article, and so གཉིས་པོ doau ‘the two,' 'both'. See LV, C. 32. It may be noted in this connection that the ptcl. added to the cardinals forms ordinals;
༤. g. གཉིསdui 'two', but གཉིས་པ,doitiya'second'; གསུམ, tri 'three,' but, tṛtiya. 'third.' Prathama 'first' is, however, དང་པོ and not གཅིག་པ.
2.113., grāma village
, grāmiņa a villager';
☎, amsa, bhāga 'part, share'; thus
lit. means 'apper
taining to a villager,' Skt. grāmya 'low,' 'vulgar.' 3.26. Tib. simply -kaya 'body' omitting ātma-. 3. 211. . ‚āyus 'life' or janman 'birth ;' so the phrase lit. means asmin ayuṣi 'in this life' or asmin janmani 'in this birth'. The Buddhist term dṛṣṭadharma has this meaning, i. e. 'the present life.
3. 2o1. ' lit. tyaktvā ‘having abandoned,' and not

Page #339

VI
BODHISATTVAVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
1. la. For kaşati (from V kaş lit. 'to rub,' 'to scratch,' fig. 'to injure,' 'to destroy") Tib. pratapati (54°5975501) giving the intended sense.
2. 16. For krūra 'cruel,' 'terrible,' 'destructive' Tib. asahya- (e935).
3. 2c. རིན་ཆེན is another form of རིན་ཆེན ratna *gem'. For this we have also རིན་པོ་ཅེ and རིན་པོ་ཆེ. རིན, mulua 'price'; and 25. mahatégreat', so 253 or 27°35 lit. means mahāmülya 'very costly'.
4. 2c. Printed text reads ay for a.
5. 4a auga. On or ayu (see BAK, 7a, 14a) and ཅེསor ཤེས, according to the last letter of the word after which they are employed, means - iti 'thus' ; and 99 is ft. of 959 meaning in such cases not /kr 'to do,' but vuac, etc. 'to say, style, denominate etc. Thus either que simply

Page #340

296
BODHISATTVĀVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
[8
or followed with g'a is used for iti. It is to be noted that aniga lit. is for sākhya (see ślokas 9a, 306) or ityākhya, ucyate, kathyate, etc., and fig. for nāma, -samiñaka, etc.
6. 5a. In Skt. tāta is a term of respect and of endearment. So it is used both to a superior or a junior. is deva ‘god,' but kings and nobles or persons of greater rank, such as Buddhas and Bodhisattvas, are addressed by it. In Tib. a prince is also addressed by it (see RA, p. 204, 23). Here the Nāga addresses his son with the word
7. 6c. y, or 3, aham 'l', but it is meant here to be taken in plu., vayam 'we,' the fuller form being w'g*34. In the following śloka (7d) we have ey*347 in the same sense. 547 is the sign of plu. of personal pron. (=f5H), e. g. 5*34, vayam 'we'; E5*34), yüyam 'you'; řsal, te 'they.' The following forms are also for 'we': 9:34, 3:34, 3:9*39), and 3 397.
8. 9b. དཀོན་ཅོག, another form is མཆོག for ཅོག. The word 505 means durlabha 'rare, scare, hard to acquire', and Ja

Page #341

12]
BODHISATTVĀVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
or parama, uttama 'the best, the most excellent.' Thus
lit. signifies 'the most excellent thing which is very difficult to acquire,' i. e. ratna 'gem' or any precious
object. It is to be noted that the form
is older than
དཀོན་མཆོག·
9. 10a. Print. text reads དང
ing to Skt.
11. 12a. Print. text gives here any sense. གིས.
for
གདུང་
38
297
10. 10a. For
which is, according to Skt., expected to be the actual reading in the sense of asti 'is' understood, there is. If that is the true reading it may be explained in the following way: It is used both as a subst. and a vb. meaning in such cases bhoga, upabhoga 'experience' 'and to experience' respectively. Here it is a vb. in the passive voice meaning upabhujyate 'is being experienced'.
as emended accord
for . The former hardly In b we should like to read for
12. 125. Actually it means sattvavat like a (spiritual) mind,' the meaning of the compound being thus explained in Tib.

Page #342

BODHISATTVĀVĀDĀNAKALP ALATĀ
[17
1. 13c.Print.text མི་བཟད for མིི་ཟད which. lit. means
akṣaya 'free from decay'. 45 is for 5, Skt. ✓ sah (=sabh) 'to resist', to overcome, also 'to bear'. So 5 is asahya 'that which cannot be endured'.
298
14. 1410. Mark that Skt. divya is not used here, according to the Tib. translators, in the sense of 'divine', but in that of 'excellent' as evident from the word
15. 1412.5
which means fuddhi 'purity' and also śuddha 'pure' is employed here for punya 'holy' and also 'pure', this word being derived from pū 'to purify'. Generally for punya 'meritorious act, or religious merit' we have in Tib. བསོད་ནམས•
16. 15. In the Skt. text (d) there -sukha- for -mukhain Tib. (སྒོར ).
17. 167. 415
is for 45 (20d), padma 'lotus.' See infra,
མ
2310.
18. 179. The Tib. translators take maitri (4) here in the sense of samāgama ‘association' ('). ), tejas splendour'; §‹
19. 1710.
(or

Page #343

24 )
BODHISATTVĀVADĀNAKALPALATA
299
tejasā 'with splendouro: 477777, akramaņa, parābhava, abhibhava 'to attack,' 'to overcome, subdue, conquer.' So here Jag 97554 lit. in Skt. is tejasā parābhavantam, and fig. tarjayantam (tar'to threaten).
20. 20%. In a the printed text reads 95 for 55 emended by the author. 59*35*215 is sābharaṇa ‘with ornaments' and not āvaraña as in the printed text.
21. 205. řa5 corresponds to disantam (diś to show"). Ý or 'a, utsāha ‘energy;' utsahate becomes energetico; prapañcayati, vistārayati 'expands, displays.'
22. 2010. In Tib. text one should read according to Skt. jivita, and not aya.
23. 218. Printed text for .
24. 21". '59 is soka, duḥkha ‘misery, affliction,' and also maru 'desert' (Mahāvyutpatti ed. Sakaki, 5278).
25. 237. SD aww which gives no appropriate meaning here for འཚལ.
26. 241. SD ; for the former being a misprint.

Page #344

300
BODHISATTVĀVADĀNAKALPALATA
[ 26
27. 248 garšta u ga lit. anjalim yuktvā “having folded the hands.
28. 25?. Po answering to Skt. eva is used both as an adverb and an adjective meaning respectively ‘only, exclusively,' and 'just,' 'the very. In the present case it is adjective. Sometimes added to an adjective it forms a noun ; e. g. 481*31 samartha ‘able”; but '?Ã's, sāmarthya 'ability": FĂ rūpa; 52 ša, rüpatva (NB. 155; 199).
29. 2510, P5, yathā ‘as.' In Skt. text na 'not' can hardly be construed here.
30. 267. g87(+81) means both bhakti 'devotion,' śraddha ‘reverence,' etc. and bhakta 'devout,’ ‘respectful. It is used here fig. for Skt. praņayin 'a loving or affectionate one.' For praņayin one may also write pág: (pranaya) 95*29.
30. 263. , tad 'that' fig. for iti . 31. 266. In Tib. text satata (5475 ) is omitted.
32. 2613. IN originally pf. of 49, pra-vsthā 'to go away,' but used as a seperate verb.

Page #345

29]
BODHISATTVĀVADĀNAKALPALATĀ
33.27a. SD for ǹ.
301
34. 273.
5, netṛ leader' (agrayāyin).
seems to
be for སྣ་ཚོགས ་various,' and དྲངས་ is pf. of འདྲེན་པ 'to attack,"
'to lead'; thus the phrase lit. means 'one who leads variously (according to necessity).'
35. 277. SD for N.
36. 2712. For svarga-sobhā Tib. reads explaining the meaning svarga-sadṛśa-śobhā.
37. 285. See supra. 14. 1410
38. 287.
', sobhana, sundara 'fine, beautiful.' It conveys the meaning of manohara, no doubt, but it is literally (manas ‘mind')
translated by ཡིད་ཀྱི་འཕྲོག or simply
(hara 'one that robs)'.
39. 281*. By writing for avṛta 'covered' in the Skt. text the Tib. translators seem to have read astṛta for avṛta meaning thereby 'scattered'. Or it may be that as a-str signifies also 'to cover' the Tib. word is used for avṛta and not for āstṛa.
40. 291-9.ག་པུར་ and ཙན་དན are two loan words from

Page #346

302 BODHISATTVAVADĀNAKALPALATA [i29 Skt. for karpūra 'camphor' and candana 'sandal' respectively. Mark here Skt. c is pronounced by Tibetans as ts (5), and 80 ; as dz (), e. g. javā és a kind of red flower, the China rose'.
41. 29o. 454' 'As. 984, cūdā, sekhara 'crest, crown'; 4, pāņi ‘hand;' 98414 together mean ‘sciences, scared literature', the explanation being as follows : "that which has come out of the head of the most holy; i. e. the result of his intellect and has been placed in the hands of the inquirer," as says SD. AS is grha, sālā, ‘house,' 'building.' Thus 5921945 means a vihāra ‘monastery (where those sciences are kept)”.
42. 2910. AFApg'g5v, bhagavat, generally translated as 'the Blessed One'. In Buddhism this epithet is for the Buddha. Agh (or Afb) pf. of QEHN'A, unmūlana, vināšana, etc. 'to conquer, subdue, suppress.' As subst. it means the victory ibhaga) that is achieved by conquering. šaling a victorious one', one who has become victorious by conquering Māra. 358, pf. of 399:9 'to pass away', gata, atita 'passed'.

Page #347

2]
BHAGAVADGĪTĀ
303
Thus N 25°250 means 'one who having subdued the host of Māra has passed away (from misery)'.
43. 309. SD for N. 44. 3110.11. SD གྱུར for འགྱུར and འོད for འོན.
VII
BHAGAVADGĪTĀ
1. 18. *45*9gy suggests the Skt. reading vyavasthitān and not avasthitān
2. j8. ནོན་པ is a variant of གནོན་པ «to subdue, suppress,' and as such it is rather abhibhūtā 'overwhelmed', than āvişta 'entered, possessed' in Skt.
3.1'. garagroga, vişādena ‘with sadness'.
4.24. BA'2547 lit. Vişnu. 593, vi-Vāp, Vviş 'to penetrate, pervade, and also vyāpin ‘one who pervades”, as well as vyāpta 'pervaded'; and 25741, pra-/viś 'to enter",

Page #348

304
NYAYABINDU
praveśa ‘entrance,' and praveśin 'one entering into.' The Tib. equivalent for krsna in the sense of 'black' is 79951.
5. 37. F5/°975 '25'4. lit. vyutthita 'particularly rising.' With #. roman or loman hair,' used before the phrase it means roma- or loma-harşa bristling of the hair' for which we have generally སྐྲ་ལོང. The verb ལྡང་བ་ is in Skt. ut-/sthā to rise.' Sometimes 75'95 205 has the causative sense, utthāpayati 'raises.'
6. 3' Ang is a general name for a dhanus 'bow,' not of the particular bow (gānđiva) of Arjuna.
V'U NYAYABINDU
1.1. ain't lit. bhavafiti. Mark here the use of the ptcl. of which is generally a loc. case-sign added to substantives. It is added also to the instr. case and verbs and signifies a reason ; e. g. 25 Farg'for the reason, there

Page #349

1 ]
NYAYABINDUTĪKĀ
305
fore'; Få 'for what reason, why.' As regards its use after a verb note the present case.
2. 11. 5 is a ptcl. used after 5, 5. oral and terminates a sentence.
3. 99. After -vişaya- Tib. adds. -tad- (ə).
4. 10%. For caitta Tib. lit. translates its actual meaning as cittotpanna (HN'AN'Z).
5. 114. Mark 5a is generally used (with or without 5) as a prefix (mostly pra- as well as ati-, ut-, and sam-) as well as a subst.
6. 155. See note, BAK, 28.
IX
NYAYABINDUȚIKA 1. 18. SB 2 for 24.
2. 115. 59 (pf. gs and yet), vb., v budh, causa. tive, 'to purify, cleanse, wash off'; subst. sodhana 'cleansing',
39

Page #350

306
NYĀYABINDUTIKA
praksālana washing off' ; but tānava lit. means 'thinness,
meagreness.
3. 46. w . We have already seen (PD, Note 4), that ', etc. are the signs of gen. But sometimes they are used after verbs when there are two sentences in contrast to each other, and may be translated by 'but' or 'though'; e. g. 283 REVÙI 1997 'he came there, but did not stay; weg áha 1 51.5'29 though he said “friend”, he became an enemy'. Similarly in the present and similar cases etc. answers to Skt. tu 'but,' expressed or understood. Note the present sentence na[tv] anyat (9998""I), and CŚ, 178: silad api varam śramso na tu drsteủ ( ht av 30'a I'an See NBT, 1218-19; Ibid., note, 9.
4. 5102. Mark that the phrase དཔེར་ན་...བཞིན is for yothd as. We have also དཔེར་ན་...ལྟ་བུ for it. དཔེ drstanto, upamā ‘example, simile, illustration'. The word also means 'a book”; e. 8. 7:58 'k book' i. e. A-B-C Book, a primer. ago or på75 in such cases means iva 'as, like, according to.' Cf. g3 p...with È za...N5, CŚ, 121,9

Page #351

307
10 ]
NYAYABINDUTĪKĀ 5. 5 21- 29. Lit. it means prekṣāvantas tatparikṣām vārabhante.
6. 711,12. Mark -pūrvikā is explained and translated as purvagāmini ( 55267A ).
7.931. Instead of 995(vyutpādanasya) there is wrongly štv (prayojanasya).
8.938. 995) is for both pratipādana and abhidhāna. 9. 1011. For ij in full see note 3, supra.
10. 108. 5'lit. vastutaḥ ‘in fact' is used here for sākṣāt (lit. 'with eyes*) "evidently', 'actually', 'directly', for which we have generally མངོན་སུམ or མངོན་སུམ་ད ( pratyaksa).
11. 1034. Tib. cmits -vyāpāra and unlike Skt. repeats prayojana (5371/).

Page #352

х
CATUHśATAKA
1.1'. For alpa ‘small, little there are both 55 and $55.
2. 15. ཐེ་ཚོམ and ཐེ་ཚོམ་ཟ་བ both mean samdaya *doubt'.
3. 214. Tib. only vyaktam (72145 ) and not suvyaktam ‘very clearly'..
4. 39 ལོག་ལྟས is instr. of ལོག་ལྟ mithuddrsti *one who holds a wrong view.' 214(21), viparita 'inverted', mithyā 'wrong', and 3(-a) darśana, drști 'view'.
5.41. Note that win, a ptcl., though generally a sign of the abl., sometimes signifies also the loc. as in the present karika གང་ལས, yntra •where twice in བ and b), and དེ་ལས༔ tatra 'there' (twice in b and d).
6.6o. E is a word akin to ma, iva ‘as', 'as if'. But, sometimes, so far as a Skt. text is concerned, it does not add any special sense : e. g.
z z 42105 (Madhyamaka

Page #353

309
8 ]
CATUHSATAKA kārikā, XVII. 30), bhoktā kuta cua bhavisyati; gešiem
5 (Catuḥśatakavrtti, 828), sāram asti ; 59134352121 gi (Kāśyapaparivarta, § 125), kaḥ punar vādoo ślokaḥ; 957213 25 h. Foi (Ibid, § 141), kaḥ punar vādo mama. The present case, too, supports it.
7.78. 4-95 lit. ukta, bhāṣita, kirttita, etc. The word smộta (57'-1) in such cases signifies the above meaning, and as such is translated by 9-95. For the first half of the kārikā cf:
je egam jāņai se savvam jāņai i je savvam jāņai se egam jāņai il
Acārāngasūtra, 1. 3. 4. 1, eko bhāvaḥ sarvathā yena dụstaḥ sarve bhāvāḥ sarvathā tena drstāḥ | sarve bhāvāḥ sarvathā yena dịştā
eko bhāvaḥ sarvathā tena dịştaḥ || Both the passages are quoted in the Syādvādamañjari, Ch. S. S., pp. 4, 112, and Gunaratna's commentary on the Şaļdarśanasamuccaya, BI, p. 222.
8. 818. The real sense of the ptcl. nanu (na and nu) is 'is it not ?' but often it is overlooked. By translating it by grug the Tib. translators express the real meaning.

Page #354

310
CATUHSATAKA
(11
garalam nanu jāyate means 'does it not become puison ?' See CŚ, 10. c (Tib. d).
9.910. 15979°91, antar-5 gam, antar- bhū 'to be included'. As an adj. it is for antar-gata or simply gata, NB, 54. 2 ; antar-bhūta, ibid., 23. 16 ; with the negative A, as མ་གཏོགས་པ adj.) or མ་གཏོགས་པར (adv.) it conveys the meaning of such words as the following: vinirmukta 'excepting' (Madhyamakakārikā, II. 1); aparyāpanna (575771278pca) ‘not included' (Kāśyapaparivarta, § 135); na anyatra (Ibid, § 98 ; NB, 96. 2, 12); tyaktvā (NB, 176. 4), rte 'excepting' as in the present case ; etc.
10.10?. Another form of 'm, ubhaya 'both is ATÂTV*47. The ptcls. M, F, and are a sort of defnite article, and are used after ག, ད, བ, and ས; ན,། 5, and 24; and 5, 5, and respectively. Yet there is the form 4*7 as shown above.
11. 114. མཆོག་ལ when the ptcl. ལ is used after an adjective it signifies 'being'.
12. 1115 95('s) lit. utpādayet ‘should produce'.

Page #355

11]
CATUHSATAKA
13. 129. For the use of
... discussed in Note, NBT, 4.
311
... (a and b) cf. 5555°
14. 135. (1) lit. jāta, utpanna ‘born', and so means 'a man, person. For pums we have specially C$. X. 4 (229), as well as as in d and 14. 4, 14. 15. 1313. 12, pums 'male,' and a terminating ptcl. used mostly at the end of a sentence signifying the sense of the verb, bhu 'to be'. It is to be noted that the consonant that precedes is reduplicated (as in the case of 3 discussed above, pp. 227-228,236); e.g. ¬¬ (for ཞིག་འེ), PD, 27༧ ; མཐོང་ངོ ( forམཐོང་འོ), NA, 2. 12; དེ་བཞིན་ ནོ (for བཞེན་ འོ), NA, 9. 4. The vowel preceding འོ is not reduplicated, e. g. འཛིན་པའོ( for འཛིན་པ་འོ), NA,2.2.
16. 1120. སྙམ་དུ་སེམས is a phrase used for different words
in Skt. such as abhiprāya 'purpose, intention' (Madhyāntavibhāgaṭikā, 6. 7 (for the same Skt. word there is
5 in the Candrakirtti's Vṛtti on the Catuḥśataka, 163); manyate 'he thinks,' or mata 'thought'. Sometimes
as in

Page #356

312
[ 17
CATUHSATAKA it is simply for iti which implies an opinion as in the present case (see Kāśyapaparivarta, § 71). Mere you' is sometimes used to mean iti (loc. cit. § 124). Al'H vb, man 'to think', also subst. mata 'thought'. www, as subst. citta, cetas ‘mind', cetanā 'power of moral volition”; JAM'Il. cintana 'to think'.
17. 16o. 5 sq. 58(a), kalyāņa 'happiness, welfare'; 294 su, sat, somyak, śreyas, śubha 'good, excellent, proper'. But both the words are employed here to mean the same thing.
18. 1610. B a, gati 'to go' and ‘movemento; but following Skt. it is used for thigati 'attainment'.
19. 1614:16. Mark how i kathā of Skt. is expressed in Tib. by NSFĀTA, lit. vada kim prayojanam 'say what is the necessity’; imp. of y'a, Vvada 'to say'.
20. 1711. IT and 37q25 both mean pada 'place, rank, position. གོ་འཕང་ and གོ་གནས are synonyms.

Page #357

XI
MOLAMADHYAMAKAKĀRIKĀ !
1. 114. For vidyante in Skt. text Tib. wrongly na vidyante (@garcia).
2. 28. Tib. lit. tad-anantaram ( 997) for Skt. anantaram. So in 99.
3.715. In the Tib. text na (Q) is not required. 4. 111. lit. jāyeta ‘may generate', and not bhavet.
XII
KAŠYAPAPARIVARTA 1.11'. The Tib. naine 75 95 of Kāáyapa means 'a Bright Protector' as 35 is kāśa for kāšya from Vkās 'to shine' and ys, pa being from pā, to protect'. 2. 1190. Note that sometimes the Skt. prefix oi- is
39A

Page #358

314
KASYAPAP ARIVARTA
[8
ལོག་པར when somethingwrong or
translated by ལོག bad is implied (meaning viparyaya viparita, 'reverse, vinipata 'falling down, ruin’.
wrong)'; e. g.
(fut. and pf. 5) ✓pat 'to fall, fall down'; as subst. apatti 'moral fall'. See 313.
ལྟུང་བ
3. 3. 15. According to Tib. which undoubtedly follows here Skt. grammar (Panini, I. 4. 39) one is to read aśikṣitāt for tasya.
4.4.19. དེ་ལྟ་བས་ན, ta@ha 'thus, so'. It is occasionally that this phrase as well as དེ་ལྟར་ན are used for tarhi 'then, in that case, which is generally translated by 25.
5. 4. 113,14
5 lit. prayogaḥ (see 2o) kartavyaḥ, and fig. samprayuktena bhavitavyam.
6. 8. 111. In fact, for dvitiya 'second' Tib. is 3', and not mere 4 which means dvi 'two'. See also 911, and 1011.
or
7. 8. 22. in reality is tad 'that, but is used also in the sense of 5, ctad 'this'. They are often interchanged; e. g. see 9. 1° and 10. 19, 21.

Page #359

XIII
KĀVYĀDARśA In this lesson readers will see the method of transliteration adopted by Tib. translators for Skt. words.
1. [12. Sarasvati in Tib. is Svaravati 'possessed of a vowel' (59511*.; 59501 svara). The word svara may, however, be taken here to mean sabda 'sound' or 'word' in general, or ‘musical tone or tune', thus Sarasvati being the presiding deity of sabda in the above sense may be called Svaravati. Her connection with music is wellknown from the fact that she holds a viņā 'lute'.
2. 22. 5. sista ‘wise, learned’; by adding m55. vi(prefix) the Tib. translator amplifies the text, śişğa becoming visişta 'superior, best excellent'.
3.48. instr. of 1, śabda ‘word'.
4.42. XT50 and 59' (=4597) both mean tamas ‘dark, darkness'; but the former signifies here that kind of darkness which makes one blind (andha).
5. 4. བོད or བོད་པ is the same a འབོད་པ, ahodnd to call'.

Page #360

316
KAVYADARSA
[12 6.718. For śvitra 'white leprosy'. Tib. has simply ša, doşa 'defect'.
7. 122. viciti 'search, investigation'; chando-viciti ‘examination of metres', i. e. a work in which metres are discussed.' For viciti Tib. has 9995 which means a grantha or śāstra 'a literary work'.

Page #361

PART 1,1 VOCABULARY

Page #362


Page #363

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
the mother of five
757, 77, m. a kind of tree,
Strychnos Potatorum ; n. its fruit, its seed rubbed upon the inside of water-jars precipitates the earthly particles in the
water, PD, 12o. M99, FH, m. a post, BK, 194. m*2955, Fact57, m. a squirrel,
BK, 30 m-9, a kind of grass, 1 5527, m.
NA, 7.13 ; 27, m another
name for kuśa, BC, 28o. 79, 8, all, Cś, 5*, 6o, 7o, 224 ;
etc. 193979.39, , m. happi
" ness, joy, BK, 314. ma g, Flaata, m. the son of
Kunti,
Pāndai3, BG, 1o. 195, 1.:, on all sides, NA,
7.21. 2 azt, every where, PD, 214; 3 ani, in every way, PD, 14. 795 RBATA, Arfste (anfaat), crooked or turned completely,
NA, 12o. 4754767, FE, learned, wise, KA, 3".
35, afia, inclined, bent down, NA, 2. 17. 1537. agra, m. thought, ima
gination, UV 1". 795735, 742/89, caus. to imagine, herufeYIH UV, 1o.
TV, 94, pref. expressing completeness, BC, 43o.

Page #364

320
VOCABULARY
ཀུན
गुरु वसवमा कक्ष, अवमुच्य
having taken off, BC, 12°.
gd.
Ng*g*55', #alq, m. dis
tress, BC, 14°.
गुरु, समुदय m. cause,
LV. C 310, 53'18
,, ind. always, CŚ, 8°.
5,1f, ind. too. even, very, moreover, BC, 8; BK, 32°; CS, 19; KA, 5°; MK, 12" ; LV, B 12; etc. 2, ind. and, BC, 4*; CS, 10'; 2b; NA, 10d. 3 g, ind. but,
BC, 29, 59, 60".
·2
Oh, 1, ind. NA, 5. 2, 6. 6, 7. 2, 11, 18, etc. 2 af, ind.
NA, 13. 6.
དཀའ
for water round the root of
a tree, NA, 11. 6.
,, ind. expresing joy or wonder, UV, 23, 24; LV. A 1334,40
,, n. a basin or trench
, ind. oh. RK, 21a.
श, म्लेच्छ,
m. a barbarian (one not speaking the Sanskrit language or not conforming to Hindu institutions), CS, 9a.
,, m. serpent, BK, 2o, 6o, 22, p. 137, etc,
गुगुरुपुर|२'८, नागानन्द, n
Serpent -joy, p. 32; NA, 01, 2, 10; 3.5.
૧
KA,,, f. a she serpent.
lit.
ཀླུ་གཞོན་ནུ, शुभ्र्तेववु, नागकुमार, m. the son
of a serpent, p. 151.
ཀླུའི་བུ་མོ,
नागकन्यका f. the daughter of a serpent, NA, 13. 21. 53, 14, n. religious
austerity, penance, BC. 3, 15, 28, 66.; NA, 3. 9, 10. 7. 2 , difficult to do, NA,
13. 7.

Page #365

321
31.
VOCABULARY
321 དཀའ །
བཀོད་ ༤ཀའ་ཐུབ་ཀྱི་ནགས, དེའn, n. 。 བཀའ:གྲོས, 3བཞེTI, m. advice,
penance grove, NA, 7. 13. I RK, 28. དཀའ་ཐུབ་ཀྱི་ནགས་ཚལ, an, ། བཀའ་དྲིན, ༩༩, m. favour.NA,
13. n, a_penance grove, NA, 9.9, ། 12, 11. 1, 12. 2.
བཀའ་དྲིན་མཛོད, imp. (see མཛད), དཀའ་ཐུབ་པ, ཁ, m: an ascetic. འ༩༩, do favour. NA, 10. 6
བཀའ་སྩལ, pf. TG, said, BC. དཀའ་བ, , diiicult to do, RK. 42ad.
བཀལ་ནས, ༩ འི་TA, having དཀར, ཀུན, white, Bk 2 124.
loaded, RK, 35.
བཀུར, 14ཀཞེ, is respected, PD, དཀར་པོ, gཎ, white. BG, 624, 63, །
2je. RK. 9.
བཀུར་སྟི, 1 7, respectable, དཀར་བ, it, while, NA, 13).
_BC. 58-; 2 ༩༩ནrt, m. respect, དཀོན་ཅོག, ཞ, n. a gem, BK. 95. UV, 120.
བཀུར་བ, ན to honour, revere, དཀོན་མཆོག་བརྩེགས་པ, ཞཚུལ་, m,
ཀེ, PD, 2°. a heap of gems, lit. gems piled
བཀུར་བར་འགྱུར, {ཙཀཞེ, is respeeone upon another, KP, 4.1.
| ted PD, 2id. བཀང (pf. of འགེངས་པ, to fll. |
བཀོད, 1 , f. a composition, fut. དགང, imp. ཁོང) *མ་ནm,
_NA, 2. 8.16; , sra, kept, having drawn or bent, NA, 2•. [ arranged, LV, B 21 2༠,4༠.
0

Page #366

322
añ5*9, uti,
NBT, 5. 3.
བཀོད་པ
BC, 54".
,, variegated, BK, 28".
-स, स्वस्तिक,
VOCABULARY
m. a composition,
9.7.
, f¶, one having two feet, biped, PD, 28".
5395,, m. a tree, NA,
, a leg, foot, 1, n. LV, A 7; 2
, . NA, 8°.
རྐང་པ་ལ་གཏོར་བའི་ཆུ, ru,
n. prosperity, ́¿¡, naqua,
ing a condition, MK, 4°.
n.
ting of a
13, 14.
the water for (washing) one's feet, LV, A78-10.
'9', gem, a quadru
སྐབས
ped, KA. 11°.
,,m. a cause, condition,
MK, 2, 5b, 60'd, etc., etc; NB, 9. 2.
ममबैक, प्रत्ययमय, consis -
condition,
,, having no condition, MK, 5, 12, 14.
शेर ८ वेव, अप्रत्ययमय,
not
consisting of a condition, MK, 14.
m. LV,A 135; 3, प्रत्ययमय, consisting
of a condition, MK, 13.
लैव, प्रत्ययवत्, having a
condition, MK, 4".
MK,
not hav
,, the condi
tion and others, MK, 3".
,, f. a language, CS, 9o; RK, 3,4,5,6.
8° ; 2 अवसर, m. nity, NA, 12. 14.
,, m. an instant, a moment, NA, 1; UV, 3°.
HAN, 1 afam, m. right, KA,
an opportu

Page #367

VOCABULARY
སྐབས
སྐྱེ་བ
HAN'Ì'A, my¶, n. a prologue,, n. happiness, RK,
or prelude of a drama, NA, 4, 1.
སྐར་མའི་རྒྱལ་པོ,༄gr༥,
m. the
king of the stars, i. e. the moon, BC, 65°.
,, unfortunate, KA,7a.
,, n. luck, fortune, NA, 3d.
highly virtuous, BC, 8*.
H', vya, n. life, duration of
life, LV, A620.
¶, àal, f. a girdle, NA, 10°.
,, thirsty, PD, 8". मध, तर्ष,
BC, 15°.
m. thirst, desire,
AN,, n, refuge, BK, 1°,9°.
HAVN, a, fit to protect,
a protector, BK, 96.
29.
[प, जन्, उत्- /पद् to be born, to originate, pf. ] 1 उत्पद्यते, MK, 5°; 2 जायते, PD,9© ; UV, 2; 3 may be, MK, 11; 4, n. the world, BC, 10°.
སྐྱེ་དགུ
,, illustrious,, 1ð,
ܡ
323
,, f. the people, KA, 9a.
comes into
being, CS, 5; 2, proceeds, springs, MK, 12b; 3, proceeds, springs, MK, 12.
ले, खल ( दुर्जन ), PD, 13bd.
"
m. wicked,
,, n. tha six organs
of sense and the six objects. of sense, KP, 7. 1, 2.
1, originate, MK, 5; 23, came into being, MK, 1"; 3, n. birth, origination, BC, 15; BK, 32°;

Page #368

324
VOCABULARY
CŚ, 124; 4 fifa, f. birth, LV, C4* ; NBT, 1*. ****005, stred, originates, CŚ, 154.
ta, m. a man, BC, 98*b*oed, 17° ; KA, 8" ; KP, 1. 3 ; NA, 1°, 2°, 6. 2, 10.4, 12. 13, 13. 7 ; etc. S MET', ET ( gofa), a wicked man, PD, 13.
FHN, (plu.), a, a man, NA, 10.5. 935751, agua, having no
origination, MK, 04. $5, 1 grad, comes into being ; l
cs, 196 ; Gard, produces. LV, B11”; UV, 56(*). 5991, 1-, that which causes or makes, CŚ, 19; 2 ufaran
that which produces LV, C645. $5:45.35, 1 sanitafa, NA, 13.
17, 18; 2 afar ( 5774), m. father, BK, 28.
1
5 TRI, JUTA, n. a park, BK,286. $991, 41, quick, BC, 64o.
V, 1 -57 (ara ), born, BC, 46o; 2 9a, m. origin, BC, 60"; 3 gh, m. male, CŚ, 136.
95, ALC, born, MK, 9". **21, Fre, you are born, UV 1. Hypą, apca, not originated, MK, 9. 15, a man, 1 g H, NA, 1o; 2 994, BC, 20° ; LV. A 11%, 139, 145, etc ; NB, 1. 1; NBT, 7. 2, 8. 2, 9. 2.
TAN, 509, n. a story of the former birth of the Buddha, NA, 2. 9. 15*8591, 9-954, m. no man, KP, 4.4. F, JT, Ja, to protect, 1-4, protector, BC, 14"; 2 qera, RK, 23; 3 qrafe 29, 30.

Page #369

VOCABULARY
325
FA, protector, 1 ota, BC,
having gone round from left
to right (as a mark of respect), 64": 2 914 LV, A 1322; 3 97678,
LV, A 1357. protection, RK, 33. 9,197, n. a fault, defect, KA,
ANEH, (cf. En, pf. of a 7° ; 2 gła, a fault, BC, 40° ; . 91, 966, to save), afeta, BK, 224 : KA, 2o ; NA, 13.11 : 1 protected, RK, 24, 25. 3 *f97, n. white leprosy, 195, 1 **ref to be done (Tara, KA, 74.
to be produced) CŚ, 11" ; 19899, faktor, free from harm, 2 ofera, produced, NB, 9. 3 ; BC, 38° ; NA, 13. 11.
3 *ach, should be ( curta, 991, ar?, saviour, NA, 1". should produce), UV, 136;
4 *arfa, bringing up. BC, 32" ; ANAIS, Fry, m. a fabulous
5 afà, f. production, BK, 12". period of time, a period of 432 |
073, (pf. of 191 ° to turn). million years of mortal measure in the duration of the world,
afeta, turned, NA, 11. 4. BK, 32" ; LV, B1613. 955, surrounded, 1 a, BK,
21° ; 2 qfga, LV, B22”. Bye, mouth, BG, 2“; NA. 11 4. 1959, sau, n. moving, NB, FAN 555 $971/*37, #19196. 6.
qa, with a cloth dyed of agNgTV, safari, gd.
reddish colour, BC, 60°.
v p1613

Page #370

326
VOCABULARY
ཁང་པ་
ASS, 1999, n. a house, BK, 3", A, , personal pronoun, 19o.
first person, I, BC, 19, 51" ; 25*235, MT, a palace, LV,
KA, 10 B 36, 10 ; 4".
ARAT, *** (2017), *1 (we),
NA, 2. 7, 14. POI, FA, m. n. a mouthful, NA,
AŽ 3*FAN, PA, we. NA, 11. 4, 12o.
2. 11. FAN, 1, m. element, essen
ÁS (hon.), 79, he, RK, 7. tial wogredients of the body, KP, 6.3; PD, 11o.
55859, 1 ayefet, f. perfect F99), fat, m. a cuckoo, LV, proficiency, NBT, 15 ; 2 aynures, B 916
explaining, NBT, 11.6. RES, farct, a hole, BC, 56*. 155 55 55 5, afagra, to be,
explained, NBT, 12. 1. A5, HT, m. a burden, NA, 3. 8;
ÁS585*45*355), achaara, PD, 24°.
being explained, NBT, 11. 1. 85, faceret, devoid of hope. B59975, fata, m. distinction, BC, 67o.
BC, 584. Ág, ca, ptcl. expressing certain.
B5521555PIN', afazte, with ty, BK, 25o.
speciality, NA, 9. 7. Args, ga, see po above, BA 269, go, a proper name, MK, 8.
| BG, 24.

Page #371

VOCABULARY
327
ཁྱིམ
མཁས་པ B9%899), fary, lord, BC, 35°. B925, afgy, like you, BC, 74. Ê, F431, m. a dog, RK, 15. 57, zifura, blood, RK, 35. @W, 1 m, n. a home, house, BA, #2, anger, PD, 18o. LV, A 1423, 34 ; 2 Tk, n. LV, B
ÉAGFAJN', eta, with 1420, 2215 ; NA, 3. 14; 3 STIC, m. a palace. LV, B 196.
anger, NA, 5. 1.
55, 67, dense, NA, 7. 19. garglift, fext, the mistress of a house, NA, 31.
65*21, 24, a well, PD. 8°. , far, f. house- #151, fag, wrath, BC, 154. lessness, LV, A1485.
26953, (gofa ) sfaat vafà, B5, personal pronoun, second
becomes angry or gets dispers. (hon.), 1 gha, NA, 14, ordered. 2v, 5. 2, 7. 3, 13 7; 2 997,
267295, fata, m. agitation, NA., 49.
NB, 6. 2. B3, P, a boy, NA, 10°, 5.
365591, 929, m. birth, born, 35, yo, personal pron. second
NA, 13. 23. pers. (ordinary), BC, 86, 35°,
B92A, fareth, m. an error, CŚ, 50 ; NA, 1°, 3. 8, 7. 3; etc. etc.
NB, 6.3. BS 1359, Vak, Jat, 10 DVR, 77, n. the sky, NA, 10".
carry], उपनामयति स्म, brought HEB 5, maf, m. Garuda, the or carried, LV, A 1228.
king of birds, BC, 5*.

Page #372

328
VOCABULARY
འཁྲག
QAN, , expert, NA, 30. LV, B 1323, 24, 2125,94; 2 Tafe,
f. an assembly, BK, 154. HANS, 1 afara, expert, learn- BATA, 1 ATETT, till the sam.
ed, BK, 24"; 2 BTU (evi- sāra KA, 4o; 2 part, the course dently མཁས་པ is E | of the worldly life, BK, 1o.
i n ā5, NTT, to turn for JANT95), skilfulness,
round, ofiara, turns round, KP, 1. 1; 3 farge, skilful, PD, 10%. NA, 3* ; 4 afica, a learned BŘET, 14, n. a wheel, PD,10“. man, PD, 50; UV, 20°; 5 greha, wise, CŚ, 64; 6 TH, BÁEZTEN 59, Taafiz, an emlearned, KA. 6*; CŚ, 11o ;
peror, sovereign of the world. BK, 9° ; 7 ha, wise, UV,
LV, A 1425. 8°, 16'; 8 af, a learned man, KA, 94.
R$598, ogu, 8", having emHAA. JH, sufficient for, LV, I braced, BC, 67'. C 1"?
337, #F, m. bent (or contrac1694, VET, to know, LV,
tion). NA, 20.
269V, fama, overcome with, A 325
BC, 270 1139*45 "WE55A, starter
GIỜ G5, đen, f. a creeper, pp. ( Cara), one should know,
137, 151 ; NA, 13. 13. LV, A 325.
3599, Ema, causing to take B S1 far, m. a retinue, 1 bath, BC, 46.

Page #373

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
འཁྲུག
གང་བ
1, m. anger, morbid, the river named
Ganga, PC, 8°.
འཁྲུག
irritation or disorder of the humours of the body, PD, 30°; 2, m. anger, PD, 27".
ག
,, where, whence, UV,
12b; CS, 20",d; NA, 1,13. 4; PD, 23°; MK, 8, 14a.
,, by which (in the
sense of, where), LV, A 313, 66. मा.शुरू, कर्पूर,
m.
41
n. camphor,
BK, 29".
, who, what, which, 1 fa, MK, 6; BC, 9, etc.; NA, 5. 2, etc.; 2, LV, C 3', 43,54, etc.; 3, KP, 2. 1, 7. 1, 8. 2; CS, 20, etc.; LV, C 3, 4, 5, etc.; 4 यदि, BC,
44.
, why, 14, BC, 30; NA, 3. 8; 2 कुतसू, NA, 2. 18, 9. 13.
́ ́ ́,, when, PD, 15a.
मारा, 1 केचन some, MK,
1°; 2, who, what, which, UV, 14a-o.
329
म|555"म|55, यत्र यत्र, wherever,
PD, 20o.
55,, where, UV, 25'; PD,
21.
,, where, BC, 286,c.
1o.
གང་ཕྱིར,
,, anywhere, MK,
यस्मात्, for, because,
BC, 17; MK, 10°.
,, full, BK, 23a.

Page #374

330
VOCABULARY
གང་རེ
གུས་པ་ 4753.71, when, CŚ, 13", 14" ; 91517'35. feHash, the mountain NA, 14" ; MK 7*.
Himālaya, UV, 6o. 957, who, what, which, 1 975 MAT*, 727, a dancing girl,
FEA, Cś, 2", 16", 19°; 2 26, NA, 2. 6, 3. 4. BC. 2°, 8°, 40*; BK, 13", etc. 575 5795, teafa, one acts, etc. ; NA, 7", 137 ; PD, 3*,
NA, 10.2. 11°, 290, etc. etc.
qarğı if, 1 #, NA, 14”, o ; PD. 45099, ( sfa or for ta).
14"; UV, 4" ; 2 fe, BC See གང་ཞིག, KP, 4. 2, 3. 39o. 500, 61, 62° ; CŚ, 5€ ; KA, 17539, 9KG, a person, man,
4" ; LV, B 14", 1710 ; NA,
54, 7. 6, 12. 13, etc. ; UV. 4* LV, A 134, 1414.
26° ; 37, LV, A22,3%. 45*27**5), ayks, not a per
IV, sufera, affectionate, BK, son (man), KP, 4.4.
26. 47521, 1 Bath, where, BK, 10° ; , 1 vitra, n. respect, LV. 2 77, where, KP, 4. 4; PD, B1121; 2 af, f. devotion, BC,
54, 640; C5, 2°; NA, 54; 3 ATT, 475'RIN, 1 $74, why, BC, 174 ;
m. respect, NA, 2. 13. 2 me, where, CŚ 4,•. 9 955'958°SI, pia, with 975, fH n. ice, (Fehrer, m. the dignity and honour, LV,
mountain Himālaya), RK, 21.1 A8'.
54.

Page #375

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
331
གྱུར་པ་
གུས་པ་ J'A1'70, +947, one with devo- AT, that, f. a goddess 5. of the tion, BC, 76,..
name, NA, 13". N°2155*219931. FATA, with res- à), ptcl. g, but, PD. 18o. pect, NA, 2. 6.
གྱིས (imp. of བགྱིད་པོ, eleg. of . 91725, , one without
35'5", 15), 56, do, PD, 14. devotion. BC. 7". 97*245246, m. n. the filament of
75 (pf. of 895), i (1114, to a flower, NA. 13°
go to) ta, gone to, BK, 23" ;
2 (51 to be, become) (i) 98, fan, m. an obstacle, cś,
strid, BG, 39 ; (ii) sia, NBT, 16'.
10. 12; 3 (V4, to be, become) rel, Te, n. a clump or
(i) yafa, BC, 911; (ii) *492, cluster of trees, NA, 12. 14. BC, 2" ; BK, 34; (iii) ta, À, 1 ptol. after 7, PD. 27°; LV. A 1365, B 4. 2 a ptcl. PD, 16".
959, 1 an, may be, NA, 5“; 1945, 6, n. position, cś, 2 afa, (this) being, BC, 50“. 174.
957N, 1 year, having been, ATN, xya, n. cloth, BC, 59“, 636.
| BC, 16. VD 355, areitse, adv. for 353, 1 ora, become, NBT, a cloth, NA, 104. . 10. 12: 2 Hafa, is, BK, 8° ;

Page #376

332
VOCABULARY
གྱུར་པ་ 3 xa, being, BC, 19o ; KA, p.
192 ; KP, 2. 1. J5*219, erfa, being, BC, 21. 15, *, putting on, BC, 65“. 998, fame, 1 tilfell, f. UV
114: 2 qua, n. BC, 34°; 3 farm, ptcl. assuredly, possib
ly, BC, 192 ; MK, 56. 7510 , 1 alfef, f. fame, BC, 650 ; 2 4x4, fame, glory, KA, 5* ; UV, 11"; 3 fargeproe, with the fame that is proclaimed, L.V, A1441 44°215*35, afere, renowned,
celebrated, NA, 14". 1973 TRĒT, great, the son
of Yasodharā, Siddhārtha's 'wife, BC, 34". Žaid, gri, shade, BK, 20°;
UV, 26.
ཁྲོལ་ 1, #, f. a ship, boat, KA, 12" ; NB, 6. 2. 9°N, 1 fap-VTT, to be accomplished, freda. MK, 7o; 2 v feret, fre, accomplished, a semidivine being supposed to be of great purity and holiness, NA, 89, 1323, 14"; LV, A 1229. JA RAWWW , feel 444. born in a family of Siddhas, NA, 144.
1, n. life, BK, 209.
1987, que, a companion, NA.
6.6, 7. 2. 20, etc. 015, 56, n. a town, BC, 36", 37o. 565, 1 Arit, n. a town, KP, 2. 1, 3 ; LV, B 2147,44 ; RK, 22.
4d3, pp, low, vulgar LV. C123 THI, #, free, UV, 21°.

Page #377

གླལ
,, f. yawning, NA, 2o.
ठेव, कुञ्जर, m.
UV, 10".
གླང་པོ, t༥,
NA, 8".
གླང་པོ་ཆེ,
m.
I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
m.
an elephant,
an elephant,
an elephant, 1, LV,
B 221; 2, RK, 12, 34.
an island,
, द्वीप, UV, 8°.
n.
, a song, 1, n. NA, 12. 5 ;
2
2 गीत, n. NA, 12, 5; 13. 2; PD, 3; 3, NA, 3. 1.
,, a song, BG, p.
152.
¿ ̈¡', '√ (†) to sing, mafa,
NA, 12, 15.
གླུ་ལེན་པར་བྱེད, V/m (t), to sing,
mafa, NA, 12. 2.
53, 1 f4, n. pleasure, BC,
དགའ་བར
11; 2, pleased, BC, 8°; 3 fa, f. pleasure, CS, 20°; 4, m. affection, BC, 6°.
57339595, varą, to delight,
, one delights, UV, 17°. 53,, a festival, NA,
2, 3.
हार, माद्यत्, being mad,
NA, 8a.
र ूप, 1 आनन्द, pleasure, UV; 2 fa, f. pleasure, NA, 6°; 3, f. joy, rejoicing, LV. C, 5; 4 fЯ, n. pleasant, NA, 9. 2; 5, m. pleasure, BC, 63; NA, 2. 4.
53,
A king of
m.
the name, NA, 2. 7.
དགའ་བར་འགྱུར,
333
√, to
light, नन्दते UV, 19".
དགའ་བར་བྱ་བར་ཞིག,
enjoyable, NA, 7. 24.
de
रमणीय,

Page #378

334
VOCABULARY
དགའ་བར
सोमभ्रे, रमणीयता,
the state of being enjoyable, NA, 10. 7.
5939, (lit. arest Heal
having recited the benediction),, f, a monk, BK, 27a, नान्द्यन्ते, after the prologue,
LN. A 32'; B 3', 391, 20',
NA, 2. 2.
CI, 2, 2', 727, UV, 10a, 16°.
5735, 14, pleasant; NA, 5.5, af, f. view, thought,
53, f, f. a beloved wife,
NA, 7. 20.
535, 1, pleased, BC,
4; 2 a, delighted with, or fondly attached to, UV, 10". 55,, f. night, LV. B75,
55,, propitious, LV.
B 107.
དགོས་པ
एप, श्रेयस्, virtue, or religious
merit, BC, 22.
एमोसमास, कल्याण,
CS, 16°.
དགེ་འདུན་དང་བཅས,
ससङ्घ, one
with the fraternity of monks, BK, 31'.
5, fa, auspicious, BC, 61a.
n. good,
CS, 20".
དགོངས་པ,3,
BC, 28°, 60°. एम एम, विशुद्धभाव,
366.
m. intention,
one
with pure disposition, BC, 60°. ,, n. a forest, BC,
,, n. necessity, NA,
3.; NBT, 8. 0, 10, 12.
5, 1, n. necessity, object, purpose, LV. B 1010; NBT, 2. 2, 4. 8, 5. 4, 6. 2,
etc.

Page #379

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
335
335 དགོས་པ་
འགག་པ་ 501413541, forogaritsa, without 75*9. Ta, n. walking, NA, 8“. any object, NBT, 5. 2.
1959, tape, m. an artisan, 55H, acuita, to be chosen, blacksmith, UV, 3*. RK, 28.
gat, fru, n. the head, NA. 11". 50511, sftfa, f. pleasure, BK,
GATAN, , m. a cluster, 26".
PD, 2". 59. garfja, m. hostile, an ene gaan. #TT, lord, master, promy, BC, 224.
tector, BC, 29^ ; PD, 8*. 5979, aifa, m. an enemy,
JAN, 59, m. speed, swiftness, | NBT, 1.
BC, 5“. 599, ya, m. an enemy. PD, 0983, a horse, 1 g, m. 19, 186,
BC, 30° ; 2 gk, m. BC, 5"; 951,V, to make, do, fifa, 3 afstal, BC, 66°. LV, B 10.
CV991, the neck, 1 , m. ada, (A05, V, to make, do), NA. 7.20; 2 FETT, f, NA, 11.4.
Forfa, LV. A ; Filia, LV. Vaja, ufafa, a guest, NA, 1I'. B 10°; 7 1:, LV. B2024.
399151, fazte, m. suppression, 9 97, fan, m. hinderance, cessation, MK, 9". LV. B 123.
399778951, aforte, one with14/, Ta, old, BC, 31.
out suppression, MK, p. 176.

Page #380

336
VOCABULARY
འགགས
འགྱངས་པར 3979N, free, suppressed, MK,
aa), LV. B 1924 ; (iv) wag, 9..
CŚ, 34; (v) xfacufa, BC, 164, 3978, #lfara, a certain (woman), 554 ; BK, 32; LV, A 1438 ; NA, 9.
NA, 11. 2. 3979997, certain, 1 afara, cś. GUTA, 1757, to come into
16"; 2 ffen, NA, 7. 14; 3 being, to become, spa, BC, Fehf, NA, 9. 2 ; 4 afera, BK, 524 ; CŚ 8", 18° ; 2V4, to be, 6* ; 5 mfan, NA, 10.
to become, (i) Hafa, PD, 27" ; 297951, farta, m, suppression, (ii) Hafa, BC, 200; LV, C
cessation, LV. C 1o, 312, 14, C 19; (iii) pac, LV. B 178 ; 69, 73, 7etc.
(iv) qoufa, BC, 169, 494 ; LV.
A 1498, B 213 ; 3N* 295, 1739, to be, afa, BC,
, to go,
reach, यास्यति, BC, 52' ; 4 सद् 62° ; PITA, KA, 74; NBT, 5.
to sink down, fitafa, BC, 264. 3 ; 21 577, to become, to come into being, frà, BG, 30; 29521, V2, to be, aaa, LV. CŚ, 1", 2°, 104, 20"; KA, 4" ; B 1523_24 PD, 110 ; 317, to be, to be
25754*25*35*4, * argámu, come, (i) Hafa, BK, 134, LV. A 1421 ; MK, 69, 14" ; NA, 7.6; being filled up, NA, 10. 6. UV,51 (* grad), (ii) Haa: LV. A 2 JH, FAIT, tumbled down, 1418 ; (ii) ( 5) 24 (for BC, 68o.

Page #381

I, TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
337
འགྲེ་
འགྲོགས་ Rhaps, qura, fell, BC, 66". ) Raja JKT, afacarea, they 395, 198, m. n. mud, 26° ; I will go, PD, 20“. 2 ste, n. a shore, bank, PD, 8o. host Pogo 21A, 1 fefa, f. attaining,
CŚ, 16° ; 2 sra, went, BC, 57o ; Patry, ORIE, m. the cheek,
3 fa, f. course, PD, 2*, 4 NA, 8".
Tifheit, f. one who goes LV. Bajag , #919, not fading,
C 345, 74,22; 5 Floral, the RK, 16.
world, LV. B 1813 ; 6 58, 999, Vferu, to be accomplished,
m, people, RK, 31 ; 7 Fifa fesztfa, is accomplished, PD, f. the course of birth, BC, 43'; 239
8 Farifa, falling, UV, 25". 39921, faf, f. accomplishment, 2015, 104, inf. to go, BC.364.
NB, 1. 2, 21. 1 ; NBT, 10, 7. BATAS 3, JH, (for freIfA ) 2. 8. 2.
I shall go, NA, 4". 3, 1714, to go, (i) testa,
BOTT, , the eye of NA, 7. 16; Thia, CŚ, 17° ; 2 -- one who goes, BC, 536;
the world. BC, 1". 3 ufa, f. movement, cś, 11" ;
27-3919, affa, one without BC, 35° ; 4 - TH, one that goes,
going out, MK, 08. UV, 26* ; 5 947, n. going, BK, 31999, ata, pr. pl. going, 1°; 6 ma, n. the world, BK.1 BC, 68o. 12° ; 7 asta, going, BC, 194. 3195, 1 Hat, f. love (fig.
42

Page #382

338
VOCABULARY
འགྲོགས
for T, m. association), BK,
m. coming to
16; 2 सङ्गम, gether, 7. 20; 3 af, accompanied, NA, 3.8. Q’उन, गमक, m.
musical note of which there are seven, NA, 12a.
,, f. the old age, BC, 52: (for) LV, B 153, 16, 17', C 45.
a kind of, n. India, RK, 2, 5,
, old, 1, NA, 5. 2; LV. A; 2 far, NA, 3.8, ,, worn out, RK, 23.
15, faufa, f, misfortune, adversity, LV. B1624
1, fauf, f. adversity, disaster, LV. 15,21 17.
རྒྱན
well-known tree, otherwise called Palāśa. Its flower is red and very beautiful, but it has no odour, PD, 22°,
,, f. a vine or bunch of grapes, KP, 2. 1.
I'§¶¤°à¤, fags ( ta ), m. a
6.
H', 1 Jπ, beautiful, BK, 29';
2 fa, m. detailed description, LV, p. 119. ', abundant, NA, 7.19. 'हे'Q'ঘ, टीका, f.
mentary (lit.] विस्तृत टीका, copious commentary), NBT, p. 160.
རྒྱ་མཚོ, the ocean, 1 समुद्र, m.
BK, 2, 6; 2 π, m. KA, 12o. ¶'4', faw, m. (in the sense of), arrogance, BC, 3a.
རྒྱན,
com
, an ornament, 1,
BC. 59; KA, 10";
n. BC, 12°.
m.
2 भूषण,

Page #383

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
339
རྒྱན་དང
རྒྱས་ 1955*215*, aneu with orna
pers. sing. ) be victorious ments, BK, 20%.
(5219, 74, m. victory : 15 5755921a, formarea, without
hon. form of 35, imp. and ornaments, BK, 18*.
pf. of R3551, to come, 5778121, 157, adorned, NA,
arrive: thu༔ རྒྱལ་བར་སྐྱོན་ཅིག 2.8.
lit means 'may you come to 72, 1V fot, to be victorious,
victory'). LV. A 6'*.!". stafa, NBT, 14 ; 2 sparait, f. vic- 195, ta, (for it), one torious, NA, 14° ; 3 TTTT,! who conquers, a proper name, m. a king, RK, 214.
BK, 11", 14". gara, a king, 1 tafa, m. LV. 286, 47, m. a flag. #
BII', etc. ; 2 1972, m. BC, flag staff. 316, 37, 604; KA, 51; LV; TV , a kingdom, 1 1154 n. NA ; RK.
BC, 35“, 66* ; NA, 5.4,6, 7", zarar gití, HEITA, a great
etc. ; RK, 23, etc. ; 2 (154, king, LV. B 22.
NA, 6". 21:, fata, m. the conquer, i.e a 505, 750 Efrata, one the Buddha, BK, 110, 164 ; KP. | will reign, LV. A 14". 23 ; NA, 14.
1. * Ana, surrounded. BK. stalas 89], 54, (imp. 2nd 28^.

Page #384

340
VOCABULARY
jna5 535i, -
fraai, gd. having raised, BC, 66o. I'V'. 1 Farera, m. details, NA,
10. 4. 2 feara, m. spreading out, BK, 21*. 3 3977, m. accumulation, NA, 34. 4 faya, extensive, much, NA. 7. 20. , a cause, 1 , n. CŚ, 12°; 2 e, m. BC, 18° ; MK, 24 7o ; NBT, 1" ; RK, 36. 525, not a cause, the absence of
a cause, without a cause, 1 FÈT, MK, 10; 2 712T, NA. 3.5. 5050. 1 garnt, f. a string, NA, 12", 12. 4; 2 the (Indian) lute, (i) fayet, f. NA, 120 ; (ii)
atu, f. NA, 12. 15, 13. 4, 6, 17. རྒྱུད་མངས་དང་ལྡན་པའི་ གླ་ལེན་པར་
35. gaeftarefa, one is play.
སྒྲ་བཀོད ing on a viņā (Tib. lit. singing with a viņā), NA, 12. 5. 17, aru, m. continuity, NBT, 1*.
187, n. a door, CŚ, 18*; LV B 2140 48, 2276 ; RK, 15 ; 2 ya, n. the face, BK, 15*. 5, starfia, m. a door-keeper, LV. A 1°, 3. 5, pus, m. n. an egg, BC, 46o.
V, se, m. a bird, BC, 46". H. 198. n. a sound, LV. B 910;
NA, 12° : 2 yow, m. (i) a word, KA, 4" (W, instr. of H); NBT, 3. 2, 4. 1, 5. 2 ; (ii) a sound, NA, 11", 12°; 3 , m. a sound,
NA, 124. N'91154, request, m. the com
position of words, NBT, 9. 5.

Page #385

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
341
4.
སྒྲ་སྒྲོ གས་
བརྒྱན་པ་ , * 915, m. a drum
sound, call, declare, pf. ), used in a battle, NA, 2o.
ufa, are sounding. NA, 12. NAJN, gear, with a sound, BC, 67".
1909, $19; m. a lamp, BC, 13". W, 5994, imp. arrange, AT, ta, n. hundred, BK, 32" ; RK, 33.
LV. A 132, B 21" 28, 31, etc. ; As, Fri, f. a shade. LV. PD, 7a. B 10'
935, TAHE, one hundred 9 5578, farracu, free from thousand or a lac, PD, 9. covering. BK, 18".
597*0, Tapfe, one hundred il fallait, (f. faafan ), that and sixty, RK, 8. which completes, MK, 7° ; LV. 4 , ya, n. a century. CŚ. C6'".
p. 166. 915. auftral, having pro- | 4595, T4, m. Indra, the king pitiated, RK, 32.
of gods, BC, 62° ; LV. A 13"". TV, safata, sounded. NA, 8". | 45 , xifa, f. eighty, LV. A 9 452574, 271747, (f. 21 134.
tratt), pr. pl. sounding, NA, 45541987, ( lit. EH, eighth), 13.4.
eight, LV. C 70. Manĝo [94, /*u, to 455*4, ofera, adorned, BK, 29o.

Page #386

342
VOCABULARY
བརྒྱུད
,, f. a succession,
NA, 2. 11.
བསྒོམས་པ, (pf. of སྒོམ་པ to་ me་
ditate), 1 भावना, f. meditation, NB, II, 1; 2, meditates, UV, 11.
,, sticking to, NA,
one
7. 19.
n. playing
पण ঘ, वादित, on a musical instrument, NA, 13.6.
བསྒྲིབས (pf. of སྒྲིབ་པ, mV/g, to
cover), 1, covered, CS, 16"; 2 afta, covered, NA, 13 13.
བསྒྲུབས (pf. of སྒྲུབ, ཁཱི/'T, to
make), 1 fa, made, BK, 20; 2 विहित, made, BK,
27.
བསྒྲུབ་པར་བྱ(བསྒྲུབ ft. of སྒྲུབ,
O
55
to complete, perform),,
to be done, NA, 7.10.
C
,, pers. pron. 1st pers.
BG, 3, 4, 5; NA, 3. 13 ();
RK, 23; UV. 24.
"JN • मानिन्,
proud, PD, 5.
, a speech, word, 1 m, f. KA,
6°; 2 वाक्, f. LV. C234; 3 वाक्य, n. NBT. 7. 1, 10. 2.
ངག་གི་རང་བཞིན,
considering
वाङ्मय, consist
ing of words, KA, 5.
55, 1, m. nature, RK, II; 2 g, m. a swan, BC, 57°, 59°; KA, 1; LV. B 913.
°°°, having the
.
natural disposition of, LV. A 1115.

Page #387

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
343
ངན
།
ངེས་པ་ 55, bad, low, 15, CS, 18" ; 2 Eta
Fete, wept, BC, 67o ; 3 ani,
f. pr. pl. weeping, NA, 3. 4. RK. 18.
5521, 14917, m. the ruddy 591250, 1 gof, n. difficulty, ad
goose. LV. B 917, versity, UV, 10° ; 2 quifa, f.
misfortune, trouble, UV, 170. 51 , 579 , n. a red or 55555, Hría, m. a name for reddish yellow cloth or garment
as for monks, BC, 61°. 654. Paraśurāma, BC. 1o. 52, or 5219, fatigue, 1 A,
519V, mięta, wept (lit. afecall, m. BC, 55° ; NA, 132,4; 2
having wept. "EW is pf. of EFT, m. BC, 260 ; 3 , LV,
5'9, q. v.] C 2?.
Es, 1 ay, a ptcl. meaning 5219X, fara, rested, re. certainty, BC, 15° ; 2 fa277, posed, BC, 2".
m. certainty, BC, 514; NA,
2. 17; 3 fazila, without doubt. 59, Jan Vay (for fo an)
Egyp, sure, certain, certainty, to cry, weep, 1 tresna, NA, 3.7 2; Telly, (for facto), BC, 68*.
1 na, BC, 17° ; 2 farra,
BC, 434, 464; 3 fatty, m. 59535, Vog, to cry, weep.
BC, -196, 22", 27° ; 4 farfema, ad, NA, 3. 5.
BC, 30° ; NB, 29. 1. 595, (5', 5, #2, to cry. EVPia 978121, (lit. fathfarge, f.
weep). 1 712, cried, BC,66“; 2 rigid observance of penance),

Page #388

344
VOCABULARY
ངེསཔར
*f, m. a religious obser
vance. NA, 13, 7.
24, certainly, 1 g, a ptcl,
emphasizing an idea, BK, 8°; 2 खलु, NA, 64, 6. 6, 9. 4, 11. 4, 12. 11, 13. 2, 9.
देश पर, निदर्शित, shown, KA, 12".
देशरर निबबन्धुः, wrote
down, KA, 9d.
28455, freifeft, f.
one that carries out the mind, i.e. agreeable, NA, 12". 2395, fd, came out,
૭
BC, 18.
≈, ya, n. mouth (5•&q_lit. मुखे, in the mouth ; fig अनुरोध, consideration, obedience), NA, 7. 8.
m.
ངོ་བོ་ཁོ་ན་ཡིན་པ, ༠༤༥༢, n. form,
natural state, NB, 191.
2*,
དངོས་པོ
लज्जा,
ty, NA, 13. 12.
55'8,, with bash
fulness BC, 39".
f. bashfulness, modes
,,marvellous, LV,
A 133; 42: NA. 13. 16.
C~~, ¿f¶, f. satisfaction,
tentment, UV, 5b,c.
con
মৈষ''प,√तृप् (वि/तृप्),
to become satisfied, वितृप्यते, UV, 5".
EN, 1 π, m.
19; 2 fuf, f. a wall, NA, 8".
55,, n. silver, UV, 3a.
n. a side, NA, 7.
thing, matter, substance, 1, m. BC, 43a ; CŚ, 7°, 15°; MK, 1o, 3,; NA, 3. 8; 2, n. NA, 2. 8, 3o, 3. 8; NB, 15. 1.

Page #389

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
345
དངོས་སུ་ 56'y, areta, ind. directly,
NBT, 10. 8. 253, fen, f. power, might, abi
lity, LV, B 14. 2169:95, power, 1 21+, m.
RK, 30 ; 2 xafen, f. RK, 7. 259N, TFTAT, m. domi
nion, “in a wider sense the whole country round the sources and the upper course of the Indus and Sutlej, together with some more Western parts ; the Cashmere, English, and most Western Chinese provinces where Tibetans live." --Jaeschke's Tib.
English Dictionary; RK, 22. 4521, Taf, m. the womb, an
embryo, BC, 456 ; UV, 12". 01573215, af**114, gd.
having in view, KA, 96
མངོན 2555, afat-, a prefix meaning
'towards,' NA, 12. 4 ; PD, 7o ;
UV, 84. F7975, ft, a prefix meaning 'towards', BC, 57°, 60°; BK, 124 ; NA, 12, 4. 670375597989, afirafcat,
f. rejoicing at, LA. C 544, C6". 046704152550, 1 fuma,
m. desire, BC, 584 ; 2 sfat
afea, desired. NA, 134. 027745 255278T, fit
alisega, like what is desired,
NA, 2. 16. 557975397, farge, with
the face turned towards, NA, 3. 2. 50:*'9AN TV, Antet, gd.
having come down, BC, 4*. 19571948*255, affareffet,
43

Page #390

346
VOCABULARY
མངོན་པར
སྔར་མེད་ will go out, i. e. renounce the
abundant nivāra, a kind of rice world, LV. B 20o.
growing without cultivation, Basis 2959, 1 topy, n. NA, 7. 13. renunciation, LV. B 12°; 2 25757, 278, m. a hunter, BC, 60“, fabbt24, I should come out. i.
63° ; PD, 34 ; RK, 18. e. renounce the world, LV.B2°;
31,991, five, LV. B 2113 27, 20, 3 Kap Fogh, to renounce
30,36, 22%. the world. LV. B 2036 075975270, fun, experi
2'47, qara, five hundred, LV. enced, LV.C 12
B 2129,40,38,50 &*319, gaya, raising the
390, 499, fifth, MK, 24. face, looking up. BK, 15°. I 2021, 497, five, LV. C 425 ; 0169.554. fifaolcagone PD, 254. 264.
out, i.e. renounced the world, WWV, ge, previous, old, BC, 19o ; BC, 16*.
KA, 2", 2.3 VW, 127, n, 1 perception, S'HAQ15, gear, as before,
NB, 3. 1, 4. 3, 6. 3, 16. 2, 18.1, LV. A 1420 22. 2 ; 2 evident, evidently,
191V, Hre, m. a charm, spell, PD, 28*.
BK, 5° ; KP, 1. 4; PD, 13'. E, 928, m. a war-drum, NA, 2.
5815, aget, not preceded, E5 415. marsira, one with quite new, NA, 2. 8.

Page #391

1. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
347
ཅི་ཡང་
Mg, 1 fa, first, KA, 5* ; 2
ged, before, LV. A 8". 355. get, adv. before, UV, 26* 155'RITA, oqet, f. gfiat,
coming before, NBT, 7. 11-12. D55'R D'A*35, ogen, ofta, f.
coming before, NB, 1. 2. 35 at, ater, blue, BC, 57".
, qe, not preceded, BK, 24. AN 25, ph, lit. a praised
one, the name of the horse of
Siddhārtha, BC, 536, 55*, 676. AYAN RV, Falaq, praiseworthy
BC, 34.
(*., 47, f) who, what, which ; (ii) ind. a particle of interrogation ; BC, 274 ; BK, 5o, 6o; CS, 5*, 16"; KA, 8« ; LV. B6', 1315 ; NA, 34, 6*,!., 7.5, 8«, 13, 11, 20; PD, 240 ; 2 forma, anything, UV, 24
, 174, (i) then, MK, 8o; (ii) if, MK, 12°; 2 F ATA, why, cś, 14°; 3 ufa, if, BC, 35o; NBT, 5.1.
l, fa, interrogative pronoun ( Hoferta, Forfarah farfar, fartetc.), BC. 376,4,38"; LV. A 818, B'S ; NA, 3. 13, 64, 7. 11, 94, 13. 6 ;
PD, 60, f935, 9, on any
account, some how, KA, 76. TOTS, FL, (lit. Fa prih),
MK, 64. NA, 7.9. 905, fanta, anything, UV, 24".
f
37, -22, a possessive suffix, BC,
28°
, 177, (i) interrogative pronoun,

Page #392

348
VOCABULARY
ཅི་ལ་
གཅིག ། FRW, * aria, why, LV.A 81.
NA, 11. 4; 2 fferta, CŚ, 110 ;
377, NA, 11.4. F*XX5, a (lit. Pas fafanta), | 3635-f97a
553 $4, yati, m. n. a while,
m na why, BK, 5o.
an instant, LV. A 10%. 34], g®, one, LV. B 17.
55°391H, Flat (lit. Ha ), 32595, fant (lit. f*4), why. little, UV, 30. $935, why, 1 *HI, MK, 12o;
IN, fa, ind. it is used to report NA, 13. 9; 2 F L, NBT, 10.
the word spoken or supposed
to be spoken; besides, it 48, 52,
implies a cause, purpose, etc., $.350$a:, why, wherefore, BC, 22°; CŚ, 18°; MK, 50; NA, PD, 114,
24, 15, 7. 15 ; NBT, 10, 54. 955, Ta, (lit. F# faft) | INS, said, (it) is said, KP, 1. 2, why, LV. B 202
2. 2. 85, Faatwhat, why, BC, 114,
INJ', fa, see IH, KP, 8. I,
9. 1, 10. 1; NA, 5". 224 ; NA, 7.6.
IN99, fa, LVC. 7o ÈN, 1 (lit. #H), how, PD, 156 ; 2 fet, why, PD, 164. 959936, fetara, being cut, NA,
10.5. ÈN 05, $49, on any account,
9789, 57, one. CŚ, 7","; KA, 7a somehow, CŚ, 176.
KP, 8. 1, 9. 1, 10.1; NA, 11.5; 55'25', a little, slight, 1 $ta, NBT, 10.2 ; RK, 34 ; UV, 6o.

Page #393

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
349
གཅིག་ཅིག 41848, afera, certain, some 48°57, neut, sixteenth, UV. 224. one, LV. B 1020
að mat, qazfifteenth. LV. 434985, 59, one, BK, 25.
B. p. 121. 9718475, *94764, exclusively, UV, RFA, -AT, one who kills, BC, 32". 199,00
85 29, uh, a blessed one, 97847°5", gantit, alone, LV. BK, 114, 25", 26". B20%
Afr9958, ra, a blessed 9789V, 5*, NBT, 10.2.
one, glorious, BK, 24*, 294, 954°9, fsre, dear, BK, 44. 304; BG, p. 152. 785951, m. cutting, NA, 124.
AFTV 21928, at, f. glorious,
NA, 136, 4. 435, a, cut, NA, 10%.
$948, 49, n. iron, BC, 27o. 45585, afea, broken, cut, NA,
Î, Te, heavy, PD, 24°. 10° AIN, 1 - (before a compound 735, 7a, f. a creeper, UV,
word), with, BC, 65* ; 2 area, 216. with, RK, 36.
, forkl, the tor.gue, KP, 7. 2; 95051, - (before a compound BC. 39', 53'.
word), with, BC, 554, 57o. 43, , ten, LV. B11'.
, Fall, f. a part, UV, 224.

Page #394

350
VOCABULARY
1
85'5 Bay (pf. of 2899, 149, to 853, efe, f. rain, BK, 12°; NA,
break), H7, broken, NA, 8. 11°. 69N, 1 (V free to stick, cling). 'QAN'', afofa, raining, famoufa, BC, 10°; 2 m, atta- bestowing, BK, 216. ched, BC, 18°; 3 afer, f. attach- SV (pf. of 8°N, AV FM, to go ment, BC, 16o.
away), gafy, went away, BK, $94.95°45N, HETE, with eager
26 desire, NA, 13. 24.
EAN, 166, mounted, RK, 36. 841*35, gtfora, full of love,
, water, 1 99, f. KP, 6. 3; 2 RK. 176.
*y, n. PD, 12"; 3 578, n. PD, 918), 1 Fadlan, m. intentness,
29°; LV.A76, 10. insisting upon, NA, 5. 4; 2 74,
594755, tafafer, m. the sea, NA, broken, RK, 21; 3 FAE, affec
8. tion, LV. B1810. 391 ligt, tifora, full of love, 819, farsit, m. n. a spring, BC, 184.
NA, 7. 19; 106. 65 5 591, 1928, mi without $99, 1 12, m. a flood, UV, 8^; destruction, MK, p. 176.
/ 2727, f. a river, BC, 26°. 89 Kane, n. a door, LV.. A 2°, $55, 49, small, little, Cs, 1" ;
PD, 294.
326

Page #395

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
351
ཆུང་བ
ཚེས་
859, fare, younger (youngest),
RK, 6. 55°45'95, 44, small, little,
KA, 7. 855, gert, f. a wife, PD, 26",!,.
, HET, great, PD, 50; RK, 29. WT, she, elder, RK, 5, 20. 6515, 5d, ind. for. NA, 6. 6. 355968559H, Ferra, gd. having
breathed forth, i e. having uttered the emotional or in
spired speech, LV,A 134o. 2515985 . gata. n. an in-
spired or emotional speech, LV.A 1346. 25, HET, great, BC, 11•. BERT, HEL, great, BC, p. 113,
45*, 650; BK, 7", KP, p. 183. 2. 5, 4. , LVA. 617, 910, 104, 114,', 134, 14', etc. ; UV, 84.
5*, fafar, m. a rule, the way
or method of duing a thing,
KA, 94. SEN, Dwaal, n. shedding of
tears, lamenting, a cry, NA, 8o. 59790, H419, m. contentment,
BK, 15*. SV, rf, m. 1 religion, duty, 2
element of existence, a thing, BC, 209, 214, 314, 346, ; BK, 7o, 8", 9°, 156, 17° ; CŚ, 1", 2° 54, 199, 21”; KP, 3.1, 4.1, 4, 5.1, 7. 11,2,3, 8.2, 10.2 ; LV.C 226; PD, 19° ; MK, 7°, 86,0; UV, 94, 26*.
1, (lit. 72a, 'a cloth that is put on in practising dharma), aften, n. a dress of a mendicant, particularly of a Buddhist one, BK, 20%.
iar 5V 35, stat, f. nature, UV, 154. 60FAN, Harh, m. see GNV, KP,
4.3.

Page #396

352
VOCABULARY
མཆོད་
SVA955. (lit. a ), #, 14°, 28"; (iii) RT, BG, 1°; CS, 11",
according to justice, LV.A 62. 174 ; (iv) TCA, BC, 42° ; (v) re, No. 27, m. the lip, BK, 17". I BC, 14, 346, 42°, 64" ; 226, m.
a boon, LV.B 1711, 18. gea, 4709. m, n. a tear, BC, 27°. 4795. adv, best, excessively, 1 H), a tear. (i) , n. LV.A
Ta, UV, 44; 297, BG, 1°; 144, B's; (ii) 2759, BC, m. n.
3 TCH, BC, 42°. 25°, 65°; BC, 27°, 534, 55".
1625*305, 7, adv. best, BC, Hob, are to say), qafa, says, LV.A 3".
Hig, fira, worshipped, BK, HÄR, 1 (pf. of FB A 551,
310. JAJA, to be), afa, is, LV 65.. 1 worship, reverence, B 1048, 20“. 2 (pf. of H S
respect, #, n. LV,A 7"; 2 (i) 17-V14, to come ; (ii) V FIT, GEIT, f. BC, 3, 58". to stand or to remain, (i)
465*34. worshipped, 1 wqa4a, STa, come, arrived, LV.A 918 (ii) fra, standing or remained,
BK, 304; 2 ETU*:, BC, LV.A 331; (iii) papra, remain
584. ed, LV. A 2°.
m. a sacrifice, RK, 9), 1 best, (i) SFH, BC, 34° ; 36. 535; NA, 2°; (ii) for, BK, Nog '05, saf n. a respectful

Page #397

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
འཆང
offering consisting of water, dūrvā grass, and rice, etc. NA, 11°.
,, bearing, carrying, BC, 66o. 35,, bearing, carring,
BC, 65°.
འཆད་པ(V༥Ú་, वर्ण्यते, is
RK, 1,
to describe),
being described,
འཆད་འགྱུར(འཆད.v.r, to say),
ff, will say, NA, 9".
,, dead, UV, 7a.
', death, 1TM, n. BC, 15a; LV.C 48; 2, m. BC, 22°, 44, 52; PD, I; LV.B 1621, 173; UV, 7b.
38°45'295, faurà, die, UV, 7o.
·
355, (lit. kills,) * fafaपातयति, one causes to fall down, destroys, KP, I. 1.
44
353
ཇི་ལྟར
२ळे शेर्पास, अमृतपद,
state of immortality, UV, 7a
शेर्, अहिंसक, not mischie
vous,
कैम, बन्धन, n.
dage, UV, 21°.
E
n. the
a bond, bon
,, ind. a particle having an interrogative force, UV, 21.
,, ind. pro
perly, BC, 58°; NA, 2. 15. ,, ind. as, PD, 28°. ई'बर, 1 किम्, what, (lit. कथम्, how), LV. B 2016; 2, ind, how, KA, 8; MK, 5, 7°. 11", 13; NA. 3. 7, 10, 14, 10. 5, 11"; 3*, not, BK, 25; 4, ind, as, BC, 23, 46, 47; BK, 7° ; CS, 9a, 12"; NA, 2. 7,16, 4, 6a, 7. 13, 9. 4, 12. 4; UV, 20.

Page #398

354
VOCABULARY
འཇིགས་ Eg53N'Tài, TT Hoà, adv. | BỀ345, diff, worldly. CS,
according to the ability, KA, 2o.
93922 , mwauta, one È 95, 196, ind. as far as, BK,
who increases worldly affairs, 24° ; MK, 5° ; PD, 72.
UV. 94. E5R CA, 91901a, as long as
32959394, 14, f. the the life, BK, 24", 254 ; PD, 18o.
course of worldly life, KA, 34. EÃ, a lord, master, 1 art, m.
B 739*9791H, faryan, n. the NA, 3.7; 2 p{', m. BC, 60, 26",
three worlds, NA, 14. EH, #35, beautiful, KĄ. p.192. 32959791818, yanay, n. the REN'S), FHT, soft, NA, 12. 4. three worlds, KA, 4. 25*1*ZT, ATT, sweet, PD, 30%.
O G 9'45'995, (99-, to RÈ4. 1 safera, perishing, NA, 5";
sink down, fail or come to an
end), Aquitefa, PD, 54, 2 Arafa, vanishes, PD, 296.
BÈAN, #7, n. fear, LV, B16-2. B2959, 1 o*, m. the people,
PD, 7o. 2 hah, alarmed, world, BC. 48", BK, 16, 11“;CS,
frightened, NA, 13, 12. 4*, 94; LV.A 1321,35,41 ; NA, 30 ; PD, 2° ; UV, 94, 189, 22°; BE439, 72821*, one who 2 milf , worldly, CŚ, 4*. sees fear, UV, 100.
66.

Page #399

1. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
355
འཇིགས་
ཟེས་སུ་ gè961, 79, n. fear, BK, 10";
not to be followed, LV.C 10,'. CŚ, 5. 195,0 ; PD, 14, 7*;°;
257°45'35. 1 1 8-v faz, to UV, 2".
enter), afama, NA, 3. 14; 2 PÈ921875, afh, not anxi- (11-1 TT, to act), gadā. KA, 34.
ous, not frightened, NA, 9,9. È, FIFT, m. a master, lord, È 9N459, had to be NA, 2. 7. feared, PD, 76
Ei ya , E1f247, f. the daughRÈAV.5. ET, terrible, Cs, ter of the lord, NA, 13. 2. 180.
EN, ugafia, one who follows, BÊ AV555', mitad, like BC. 3o. one who is not frightened, PD, | EN:895, 1964, corresponding,
equal, PD, 15o. BET (9-VII. to proceed ; 57-V | EN'AV, tre, n. after, or imविश, to enter), प्रवर्तन्ते, NBT, |
mediately after, PD, 10^,', 10. 44.
EN T'H9991, 1964, corres267355, fafar, desirous of
ponding, equal, NA. 13. 18. entering, KA. 12o.
EV VANAV, Rih, m. 26974, afa, f, taking an active
praise, i e. that which is compart in worldly life, activity, mendable, profit, merit. BC,
CŚ, 4" ; NBT, 10.41. 269*915'9'9*&*
c al, #, ENV'499. 1 ngfere, instructed,
74.
120.

Page #400

356
VOCABULARY
རྗེས་སུ་
བརྗོད་པ་ KA, 3^ ; 2 ugfia, ordered, EN VRE7,#, pr. pl. (lit. NA, 7. 15.
agora), following, BC, 5o. EvY99999, E, f. (lit.
N 5, galerit, approget f.), an order, NA, 7. 10.
ving, causing pleasure, LV,B ENV5315779, Hra, n. in
1895. ference, NB, 3.1, 17. 1, 23. 1, Jal. , m. a small tree, NA, 25. 1.
10. 6, ENV5797415g'a, 1984,
5, to say, denote, 1 ( suf-V that which is to be inferred, NB, 25. 1. 27. 1.
ET ), (i) aforated, NBT. 10. 61; ENV'8959, afira, a
(ii) fafea, said, NA, 14, 2 (
a), pra, PD, 36; 3 (172), follower, following, UV, 26'.
(i) car, said. NA, 12. 10; (ii) ÈNVR5514°45'3, agura,
JFT BC, 11" ; (iii) getd, NBT, that which is to be followed,
2.9. RK, 32. ENYA AIN, Fablet, kind,
359,1 (aft-vaq, to talk, to BC, 41o.
say), zafaty, m.an, expression,
NB, 5. 1; 2 (VHTT to say), ENV EJ, 4341u, fit to be
Wh; NA, 6. 6; 3 ( Nae to favoured, BK, 256.
say), 3EXHA, NBT, 9. 3. EXYZEA, The, a favour. |
RÉG*TWI, ea, said, NBT, 8.4. NA, 2. 14.

Page #401

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
357
357
བརྗོད་པ་ 75*27* ', 1 sfofa, I shall say ; 2 gay, to be said, CÁ,
86. AĚ5 45'9', aforeta, to be mentioned, NBT, 2.7, 4.4, 5.2,
6.7, 8.3, 9.9, 25,36, 10,6,20. RÉS (Vete, to say), stafa,
KA, 6*.
1o.
ཉལ 3999777, stą, cne who hears,
NA, 2. 11. 39797539, artefaa, (they) are
listening, NA, 11. 5, 124. 380997, wia, afflicted, pained,
LV, B160. 398, 1 a, m, falling. CŚ, 17o ;
2 Arzt, m, destruction, BC, 159;
3 fore, without, BC, 52° 3511°, 1 (Vazt, to be lost, dis
appear), frufa, KA, 5“; 2 faceta, m, n. destruction, death, BC,
52. 39:48 DK97, (lit. a killer), an,
miserable, wretched, NA, 7. 2. 30'V' 5, 1977, pr. pl. feel
ing. NA, 5. 2. ZANT'AN, FLH,
let fit) be felt, NA, 5. 4. 300 (31A, 4 , to sleep, lie
3, gv, full, BK, 16o. 3āt, fta, m, a fish, RK, 21". 39, (v2, to hear,) and, NBT,
10.53. 39951, 1 yarul, n. hearing, NBT,
10. 33 ; 2 otd, NBT, 11. 18; 3 xatı, one who hears, NBT, 10.
32, 50. 39*9*47347°), xauret, of the
two ears, NBT, 11: 22.

Page #402

258
VOCABULARY
ཉི་མ
down, imp. ; n. a bed),
ufa, (they sleep), LV, AIL,
, 1 the sun, (i), m. CŚ, 22°; (ii) आदित्य m. BC, 13° ; (iii) दिन
, m. LV.A 1325; RK, P. 119; (iv) सूर्य, m. LV. B6, 71; 2 दिवस, n. m, the day, NA, 7. 13.
ཉི་ཤུ་རྩ་དྲུག་པ,
षड्विंश,
twenty
sixth, LV. C, p. 131.
ॐ मমৰ'ब्रॅर्न, प्रतिसन्धि, m.,
rebirth, transmigration, LV. B1724.
5, exactly, certainly, only, indeed, 1, ind, BC, 3, etc.; BG, 5°; BK, 4, etc; CS, 26, etc; KA, 3°, etc.; LV. C22,
etc.; NA, 3. 5, etc.; NB, 18. 1, etc; NBT, 4. 6, etc.; PD, 2, etc.; 2 f, ind, BK, 22" ; PD, 14".
$55, 49, ind. (see 5), BC, 22a,
एव,
ཉེ་བར
23; KA, 11'; NA, 7. 16;
NB. 29. 1.
ཉིན,
,, n. a day, BK, 3°.
,, m, n, a
35, not many, little, PD,
4d.
day, BK, 2d.
35, काश्चुकीय, m, a chamberlain, LV, B 51o, 62, 71. 34, 1, near, NA, 9.2;
2 af, n, proximity, vicinity, NB, 13. 1.
345, 3-, a prefix, ind. meaning
near, etc.
''Ã, y, consumed,
useful, NA, 7.13.
5, 1 (39-√fax to instruct), उपदिश्यते, MK, 88; 2 उपदेश Im, instruction, PD, 27",
लेवरदेवम, उपसेविन् serving,
NA, 2. 4.

Page #403

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
359
359
ཉེ་བར
ZGORN 345* 19, Jada, m. instruction, 35 ( 3 and 5) 34, a prefix, BK, 17.
(see 3.45), BC, 67", 2459773191, afera, stand
35997, FT, BK, 8". ing near, NA, 7. 2. 295)4751, Auftra, n, not
25.( 34. Jate, to look at,
observe), 34814, gd., KA, 2". near, KA, 5o. I'AT.HITS, (99-Vete, to see,
ZFQ, zura, m, cessation. MK,
p. 176. look at), 549817414, NA, 10. 1.
ZF R19N, 1879, n. near, BC, 60°. ZAKHEV 5, guardfira, decorated, NA, 9.7. .
31/', ita, m. a falt, defect, 39543598 (AZS is pf. of
KP, 1. 3. RĒTS, VE to take), stat,
3425'15, gana, n. misdeed, gd. having taken, NA, 1o.
UV, 17o. 29525 (391-Vat, to lead near), 30*215 55, guyah, wrongly, 341904, BC. 30°.
used, KA, 6o. 2:45 2159139121a, n, holding,
30*697 ( 3994, , to hear, attachment, clinging to exis- imp. 31.) let it be tence, LV, C4.
heard, BC, 514 35991. aar, f. pain, BK 34. 1 37785V, CT, m. misery, trouble,

Page #404

360
VOCABULARY
གཉིད་ལོག་ passions, BK, 1", 104, 11" ; KP,
1. 1, 3, 2.1, 3. 178919, 9, sleeping, asleep,
BC, 2". 1792, both, two 1 (i) 92, LV. A
132 ; NA, 13. 14; (ii) FHZ, CŚ. 104, 214; (iii) 64, KA, 10. 2; (iv) fa, KP, 8. 2, 9. 4 ; LV. A 1310 ; MK, 1" ; NB, 2. 1; PD, 2°; 2 fata, second, KP, 8.1,
9. 1, 10.1. 5734, 1 387, both, CŚ, 104 ;
2 (fa, two), *two-fold ;
UV, 16'. AŠEVA95, fav, m., an elephant,
BC, 26° ; BK, 194. 14°41, facta, second, BC, 32°.
grâ595, festa, without the second, C$. 18o. 992 , f, two, LV. CI', 2".
མཉམ་པ 1997, fa, two, LV. A14". 9739, 1 hiy, m, a companion
of king, minister NA, 7. 3; 2 a, a friend, BC, 2°; BK, 2, 11° ; 3 a relative, (i) any, m. BC, 35*, BG, 10;
(ii) a, m. BG, 2". 5739999N, 1999 (for peata),
with men (lit. with kinsmen),
LV. B 1222 97139°Wong, greta (20) n. a
kinsman, NA, 3. 8. 2395, afara, gd. having pro
mised, LV, A 310 34399975 3, 124, to be heard,
PD, 19". 837*05, sakit, f. a city of that
name, BK, 11. 1381, 94, equal, PD, 14,•.•,4. 51381°FT, equal, 1 Tru, PD, 21;
2 TH, PD, 1* ; UV, 6*.

Page #405

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
361
361
མཉེ་བ
སྙམ་དུ་ 8399, TEA, n. shampooing, $957, +124, n. (lit. a speech
gentle rubbing, NA, 6". . which is agreeable), poetry, 534'45'95-95, arteriet, f.
p. 192; BC, p. 113. KA, 2*,
7", 10", 12°. worshipping, paying respect, NA, 12. 5.
9544, fa, m. i poet, 52, , old, NA, 10".
NA, 3*.
9955'4, F9eft, f. a low and 5, sh, f. attainment, UV, 11".
sweet tone, NA. 12. 5. 5572, get, difficult to get. difficult to get.
941, mifa, f., fame, glory, BC, 20.
UV, 11. 5:45:59, gala, difficult to
Ng10:57. Atelfah, one get, BC, 74.
who speaks sweetly, LV. B14". 59. (WTH, to get), mà, LV.
745), falfen, speaking C4%.
kind or pleasing words, PD, N'A, ETH, easy to get, NA, 24". 13. 12.
NH, (VAA, to think)pi, NA, No, 1 fete, agreeable, pleasant, 11. . .
PD, 3" ; 2 AYT, sweet, PD, 31. | $575, fa, a particle used to *9*998, 9, n. fame, BC,
report words spoken or sup. 34".
posed to be spoken, CŚ, 20".
45

Page #406

362
VOCABULARY
སྙམ་དུ་སེམས་
ཏ་མ་ལ་ NagłHN, (lit. india, CETE*** Aag. ag. thought), 1 * * , was, LV.
491, with compassion (lit. gBIS ; 2 xfa, (see the preceding
कम्पामुपादाय, having taken com. word), CŚ, 134.
passion). LV. A12®,. NAVIANAN IN, fafarat, gd. galil, qufa, m. the hallow of
having thought, NA, 6. 3. the hands joined together, NagN, ferestreet gd, having
BK, 234. thought, LV. B2”.
985, #4, f. a talk, speech, 988, aface, impure, RK, CŚ, 4. - 31.
aşiq ama, agaf, f, veneration, 5, 4, n. the mind, heart, worship, NA, 11". BC, 6", 27°.
29789758, syara, fasting. NA, F'È, 1 ou, kind, BC, 410;
13. 7. 2 FEU, f, kindness, BK, 12”. FE*21999), #efur, kind, NA,
5*81*21, The, m. a kind of tree, , ar, m. the essence, BC, dark-barked but white-blosso
med, Xanthochymus pictorius,
NA, 12. 14. 25g, tfia, filled with, NA,
graget, farfar, m. intense 9. 8.
62".

Page #407

1. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
363
ཏིང་འཛིན
བཏང་སྟེ contemplation, profound medi- ) 27756'. IJ, m. a doner, PD, 94.
tation, LV. c 24,717. ཏིང་འཛིན,
གཏོང་མི་ཤེས, གུTT, one who གts, m. profound །
does not know how to let go, meditation, UV, 13".
RK. 15. དེ, ha, a ptel., see p. 222. PD,
གདོད་པ, (༧r to give, deliver, 2• ;etc. གཏད་ནས(གཏོད་པ. /fr, to give.
pf. བདད or གཏད, fut.
གཏད. imp,གཏོདor བཏོད), , pf. བདད or གཏད, fut. གཏད,
given, RK, 26. imp. གཏོད or བཏོད ), ga. |
གཏོར, 1 ཞེས, threw •cattered. Gral, having given, NA, 11. 6,
BC, 57“. 2 , scattered. BK, j3.1.
23). གཏམ, , ind. ཐ ptel. expressing| གཏེར་བ, ཤེལ, n, throwing, LV. 'verily', 'indeed', 'assuredly, I A7'. '80 reported', BC, 52".
བཏང (pf. of གཏོང་བ, •ce above). གཏི་མུག, , n. delusion, ign༠•
27, given, NA, 11.5. rance, CŚ, 16".
བཏང་སྙོམས་བྱ, བགེག, t༠ be ༠ver གཏོང, (pf. བཏང, fut. གཏང. imp.
looked, KA, 7o. ཐོང), ཙཁ', m. giving up, ofer. ། བཏང་སྟེ, ཞུན།, sd. having given ins, RA, 36.
up, NA, 45.

Page #408

364
VOCABULARY
བཏང་བ་
955'4, 25, given up. NA, 6*. 1 59971999, fast eternal, BC, 41" ; KP. 455'45 l)*, cela, gave up.
5.1, 6.3.7. 1,2. Bk, 22"
5972997, m4a, not eternal, བཏབtpt. of འདེབས་པ, to cast,
MK, h. 176. throw) * #ha (lit. afan, cau
5981, 1 4, m. a mark, BC, sed, effected), LV. B 1517.
54* ; 2 fet, n. the inveriable 95598, UR, gd. having salut
mark which proves the existen
ce of anything in an object ed BC, 14".
(i.e. hetu). NB. 25. 2. 27. 1. 5. a horse, 1 4, m. BC. 3". 11", agaras 295, ster30, 64" ; RK 11, 34, 36 ;
tycyra, m. the Law of Depen2 qform. BC, 4o; 3 87, BC, 67o;
dent Origination in Buddhism ; LV. B 22.
MK, p. 176. 585, , the state of a horse. 59:9 , (the shortened form BC, 550.
of the above), प्रतीत्यसमुत्पाद, m. 597, farce, eternal, KP, 8. 1. the Law of Dependent Ori.
gination, RK, 33. 575, adv. always, 1 fara, Cs.
97**" 11°, NA, 109; 2 facara, LV.
, pappa, unsupporB 15'; 3 Haa, BC, 41"; 4 ted, KP, 8. 2. LV. B 1+""; 5 FTET, PD, 3"; UV, 57, ( Vard, to think ), haifa, 7.
NA, 7. 3.

Page #409

1. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
365
རྡོག་པ་ 5799, 1 Femall, f. creating in
mind. imagination, cś. 15“; NB, 5. I. 2 sata, m. opening. blowing, BK, 20"; 3 774, m. definite determination. LV.C2 ; 4 IA, I think,
NA, 12. 5. 59859, (5975, fr-VKY
to examine, search, ascertion),
NA. 8.3. 5784, 1 (vb. 94-Vie to under
stand), # azifa, NA, 13 25 : 2 apprehension, knowledge, understanding, (i) gafa, f. 19.
1; (ii) 774, m. 5. I. 59NAĚ5, 4961a, 11. a great or
glorious act. BK. p. 137. I 599819, apprehension. under
standing, knowledge, 1 pra, n. UV, 6'; 2 malfa, f. NB, 21, 1; 3 gert, f. NBT, 5.4.
ལྟ་བར་བྱ་ 390 PAĚ9:41, gera, n. a
great or glorious act. BK, p. 151.
9021055*24521, data, wise, NBT, 10. 8. 12. 3. 391699 (imp. of an or
$947, fa- veq. to examine, search, know). fa&44, NA,
7. 14. g. subst, 1 eft, f. a view, Ul. 95. 2 vb. (-Vf. to see, look).
PraỆ, NA, 13. 9. pop, te, one who sees. C$, 7",". Pa, fa, f. seeing. a view, CS, 17" Na. 1 seeing, a view, (i) sata,
NA. 13. 11: (ii) efę, f. CŚ, 174. 18o; LV, C2*743; 2 x, f.
the eye, NA, 2". Pag (see above. 5 fut.. of
39137, 78, NA, 12. 8.

Page #410

366
VOCABULARY
ལྟ་བར་
75, 52775 m., a tiger, RK 21".
1, n. a seat, LV. A
3*,
95. inf. oh, to see, NA, 12. 13. 38, like, as, 1 7, NA, 11. 5;
2 AFT, BK, 27". PAN, EE, seen CŚ, 17".
5. 1 uger, according to RA, 30; 2 57, like, NA, 10"; PD, 22°, 29"; 3 gan, thus, LV. À 3' ; 4 701, as, CŚ, 12“; UV,
12°, 206. ལྟོས (imp. of ལྟ་བ, to /, to
° look, see), 1 अपेक्ष (for अपेक्षा), consideration (The Tib form is to be construed with some diffi
culty); 2 924, KA, 54. NA, 16. ལྟོས་ཤིག (imp. of ལྟ་བ to look see above), 1 089, NA, 6.9.6; 2 sata, NA, 7. 18, 9. 6, 13. 6,
46, 816, 1350. 39*35. Ea, thick, NA, 9.7. . a conjunctive ptcl. see §
PD, 9, 19'. etc. 35, 37, n. above, in the upper
region, CŚ, 22o. gha, (*:9,727 to give ; jf.
and fut. 495 ). 1 , NA. 7°; 2 sted, PD, 15'. g=9, 1 vb. (, to give). (i)
qad, NA, 11• ; 2 (i) fra, one who gives, BC, 26"; (ii) -2, one who gives, BK, 16o.
9, 191, an heir, BC, 19, 20°. 5, ( for 6), m, void,

Page #411

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
367
367
སྟོང་ཉིད་ 1 empty. NA, 140 ; 2 ha, n. thousand, PD; 196. 15. Taa, voidness, Cś, 7",
བརྟགས་ནས་ 1, agency, one who makes one proficient in science, NBT, 11. 2. 9N, 1 Tan, n. strength, PD, 6": 2 Talca, m. violence, BC. 29° : 3 f2967, m. power, BC,
211.
5.
35,77491, ind. like the void. CŚ, 3" 5*215, 99, possessing a thousand, NA, 14". 6:9, foreta, devoid of, PD, 16*. 95435, bad, f, voidness,
BK, 189; CŚ, 74, 84. 5997, hea, n. a thousand,
RK, 36. FRI, 2757, not void, CŚ, 3".
(5', to show, indicate, display, to teach. instruct, pf. and fut, 987). 1 parafa, NA, 13. 7 ; 2 fargeaifa, NA, 9.2.. 5. see above, 1 qutara, BK, 18“; 2 gezfa NBT, 12. I.
VAN '55*29991, reitta, endowed with strength, LV. B 21'. an gi9, 1997, strong. CŚ, 194,
PD, 6",•. 459791, atel, t. examination,
investigation, NBT, 5, 5. a5 1 gav ( 5 A540*(547°21 to consider.
examine, search, pf. 959, imp, 59 or 598), gd. having investigated or ascertained; 1 faqa, NBT, 10.9; 2 farena, NA, 7, 23.

Page #412

368
VOCABULARY
བརྟེན
།
བལྟས་པ་ 959. 18, strong, RK, 12; 2 iya, An', (aga fut. of Man firmly held, BC, 65".
VETI; 5 fut. of 959, ), 453957, 17, firm, PD, 29'; 2 ette,
Prera:, MA, 13. 13. resulute, wise, BC, 56", 594; 1 UV, 21" ; 3 fa, f. firmness, A365, TEATA, desirous of resolution, BC, 42.
seeing, LV,A 915. ager@ HDI, -1, f. devoted, AYHR45 J5 , a, born, BC, 33o.
LV.A 913 959 (pf. and fut. of 59997 to AZN, 1 * pa, done, made, LV, hold, lean on, imp. 75), seter,
B22° ; 2 z, seen, NA, 2“; 3
appa:, NA, 13. 14 ; 4 mily, gd. depending, MK, 5*.
gd. having seen, BG 1". 255998 (see above), 1 fakt,
Agvg, anat (lit. annland), gd. having recourse to, RK, 32; 2 974, gd. having got, CŚ, 144. |
gd. having seen, LV.A 135. 255-9. (lit. arata one should I q , having seen, 1 qalitat,
resort to), * piatto one should " NẠ, 3. 2; 2 fastley, NA. 7. 17,
live together, UV, 96. 1995; da, one should! aga'si, dad, one looks, LV.B
practise, UV, 9.
21.
11',

Page #413

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
བསྟན
བསྟན (pf. and fut. of སྟོན་པ, to
show. display; to teach, explain), 1, ordered, NA. 7. 11; 2, NBT. 2.9, 6.9; 3 कथ्यते CS, 10°; 4 दर्शयति, NBT. 10. 16; 5, shown, BC, 5", 55; 6, f. teaching, CS, 4a: 7 व्युत्पाद्यते, being explain - ed, NB, 1. 2; NBT, 10. 22. a religious
བསྟན་བཅོས, r8, n.
or scientific book, KA, 2a.
Ņণ'ঘঘ"ম'ßষ'ঘ, अशास्त्रज्ञ, one
who does not understand a śāstra, KA, 8a3.
हो, अनिदर्शन, that
which cannot be pointed out, KP, 8. 2.
, 1, n. a statement, saying, NBT, 9.9; 23, said, NBT, 9.10; 3, n. saying, statement, NBT, 8. 12; 4, showing, NBT, 6, 5;
46
369
བསྟོད
5 affa, shown, NBT, 12, 21; 6 देशयामास, one taught, MK, p. 176; 7 faufa, f. ascertainment, knowledge. NBT, 5.8, 7. 15; 8 fac, n. setting forth, NBT, 4. 5, 9, 27; 9 व्युत्पादन, n, explaning, NBT, 9.31, 10.37, 11. 24, 12. 10.
वरपर, व्युत्पादयितव्य, to be
explained, NBT, 9. 19.
ईमा, आश्रमपद, n.
tage, NA, 8. 2.
पर, आराधयन्ती f. worshipping,
NA, 13. 7.
a hermi
(√, to attend, serve),
सेव्यते, BC, 10°.
བསྟེན་བྱ, 8ཡ, to be attended,
NA, 8".
,, f. praise, UV, 20o.
(lit., praise

Page #414

370
VOCABULARY
434.
ཐ་དད་
ཤལ་ བྱུང worthy), * szifera, praised, 1381, B 44, 1318, 20% ; NA, 7.7 ; UV, 196.
NB, 1. 1, 10.1; NBT, 7.9, 8. , 9, 10, 40; PD, 50, 19"; UV, 46,•.
gHN°35'505, , f. all 955, g*, ind, different, BC,
white, KA, 19.
qHk*55680997, da, omnisci955'35*35, wataref, having not ent, NA, O. 2, p. 33. a different thing, MK, p. 176.
qHNO3568894785, nanat, f. 9:55:41, #, m. difference, NB,
omniscience, KP, 2. 1. 13. 8.
qHW*35*98, de, ind. in every 98, 4-2, m. end, RK, 33.
way. BC, 6*. 995, T, distant, PD, 44.
95, 1 , free, LV.B1626 ; 2 95*85, tra, wearied, tired, 1 , m. emancipation, libera. pained, BC, 32°.
tion, BC, 176 95 (39-19€, to be reasonable), 95-91, #, salvation, m. CŚ, 2“, J9, MK, 104
164; PD, 14. 991, 3912, m. means, KP, 1. 1; 9595, THIET, m. freedom, libeTBT, 9. 32, 12. 17, 26.
ration, LV,B18". gan 35, , all, BG. 10 ; BK, gali35, afariki, gd. having over
11°, 25o; CŚ, 10", 14; LV.AI powered. LV.B10“.

Page #415

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
371
ཐལ་མི་
gard, 191, f. shade, LV.B9%. DATA, 1 afara, doubtful, garit, sfer, m. the open hands NA, 10. 4; 2 e, m. doubt,
| CS, 1°. placed side by side and slightly hollowed, BC, 254 ; LV. A318,
999, Ta, n. a vehicle, KP, p. 1352.
183. garay, nuisfet, one who has *555*31, 2, a leader, RK,34.
joined the hollowed palms (in reverence), BK, 24o.
0908, alf, m. beginning, ts, gal, a drop, 1 fans, m. NB, 12o.
p. 154 ; 22. 1; NBT, p. 160 ; 2 90°95 €5, Tall, f. 31996, m. NA, 7. 19,
| sticking, BC, 39", 9910, 64, n. the mind, heart, , Gyar, imp. let it be NA. 3. 9.
given up, BC, 43", 51o. 98, 279, capable of being effec- fãsl. fasta, come out, RK, 21". ted, under the control of, PD,
9, 1 *rafa, follows, UV, 26°; 2 991, fat, m. a sage, BC, 38° ; sra, attained, BK, 1o ; BK, 33"; BK, 11“; C$, 2 ; NA, 24,9€, 10. 3 $164, to be attained, attain
able, BK, 136, 24; 4 à g. 55, #tal, m. doubt, NBT, 10, attains, receives, PD, 204 ; UV, 55.
11° (a).
13o.
4.

Page #416

372
: VOCABULARY
ཐོས་པ་ ་ ་ ་ མཐུན་པ་ '95. 1. 2017, attained. BK.
292, 1 , m. an extremity, 106; 2 mia, goes, CŚ, 174. BC, 464 ; CŚ, 12* ; KP, 8. 1,2, 4*85, analfa, attains, UV.H*:
9. 1, 2 ; 10.1; LV.CI’ ; 2 qua,
m. circuit, circumference, NA, 5421, 4701, attained, BK, 20. 11.1. FA'ATRIB, i afrreefa, gets, 89957, , all, KA, 40.
UV, 134; 2 * gud, becomes weg td er 985-A, 1966, fourhappy (lit, alfa, attains), fold, (lit. agarferfa, the lord UV, 44.
of the four ends i, e. of the N, 1 na, heard, NA, 2. 11 ; 2 earth), LV. A1424
furca (in the sense of strat), (loc. of 899 ), ya, at gd. having heard, LV.B16". the border, BK, 2*.
JN, a gd. having A, TI, n. surface, level, NA, heard, BC, 25* ; BK, 14",
12. 4, íky TV, gd. having heard, 1 HD, power, 1 tra, m. BK, 27o ;
mei, NA, 13. 8 ; 2 9771. BC, 2 ta, n. LV. B20** ; 3 xfs, 29', 53" ; LV. B18" ; PD, 19", f, LV. B16"; RK, 30. IN II. ATHUGIT, f. hearing, NA, | wg w5 (414. to be able). 10".
Tafa, BK, 14. ŠV 35'4, Apa, one who w9797, 7- (in the sense of 47917),
has not studied much, KP, 3.1.) egual, NB, 28. I,

Page #417

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
མཐུན
g, afg, turned to
wards, friendly disposed, BC, 9b.
মर्वे, विशाल,
PD, 22".
m. n. the heaven,
মÑইN, 1 स्वर्ग, BC, 15; BK, 27; CS, 17°; NA, 14"; 2 fa, divine, NA, 2.
མཐོང (མཐོང་བ, v[, to see),1
fa, n. seeing. PD, 3°; 2 दृश्यन्ते, NA, 10 ; 3 दृष्ट, CS, 3, 11",", 19"; NA, 2, 12; 4 fata, gd. having seen, BK, 22".
ম-Ç, 1 अद्राक्षीत्, saw, LV. B5; 2, gd. having seen, LV, A141o,
सर्वेक्ष, 1 दर्शित्वात्, owing to
the state of one who sees, BC, 37; 21, gd. having seen,
high, lofty, great,
seen.
འཐབ་པ
LV. A1333, 144, B 5',
1110
( दृष्ट ) : NA, 13, 12; 3 विलोक्य, gd. having seen, NA. 3. 4. म, 1 दर्शन, n. seeing, BK,
22°; LV. A812; 2, LV. A1447.
*,, inf, to see, LV.
A336.
མཐོང་བར་གྱུར,
saw,
373
1 अपश्यत्,
BK, 16; 2, BK, 15a.
,,gd. having seen,
(lit. a, by seeing), BG, 2". ,, seen, CŚ, 12".
२शर्་पर तूम्गुर, उपपद्यते, becomes
reasonable, MK, 9".
འཐབ་ཆོས་སྦྱངས་པ,5818,
in the science of arms missiles, LV. B21.
3,, n, war, BG, 5a.
trained
or

Page #418

374
འཐུངས་པ
འཐུངས་པ (འཐུང་བ,VT, to drink,
pf. བཏངས and འཐུངས), ༥r7, n.
VOCABULARY
drinking, PD, 27° 39, af, f. obtaining, NA,
2.
3o.
a
,, f. obtaining, NA,
,, scattered, NC.
7. 19.
འཐོར་ཞིང (འཐོར་བ,、, to scatter, pf. 5, fut. 5, imp.
), f, scattering.
NA, 11°.
ད
,, ind. now,
NA, 3.8, 13; RK, 26.
5, 1, ind. to-day, BC,
LV.B20;
22: 2 gaf ind. now, UV, 4, 19".
དང་བཅས
555, f, ind. even to-day,
LA. B 7'; NA, 13. 7.
535,, now, ind. NA, 5. 4
,, ind. this time, RK, 31.
5, ind. 1 simply the sign of a number, PD, 14, 19; 2 the sign of the dual number, PD. 10; 3 the sign of the plural number, PD, 2".
1पुरारा, holy, sacred,
BK, 14. 2, pure, BC, 6'; BK, 8".
55, 1, ind. and, BC; BG; BK;
CS; KA; KP, LV; MK; NA; NB; NBT; PD; RK; 2 with () BG, 5; PD, 1".", etc.; RK, 30; 3 a, ind. or, UV, 19". 553, afea, together with.
RK, 35.

Page #419

དང་ལྡན
དལ
55,-, f. together with, 5' (5 and 2), ind. π,
associated with, LV.C61
MK, 6*.
55, 1-fafa, mixed, NA,
endowe with
12°; 2 -समन्वागत, LV. A1412. 3, accompanied by, LV.C 5".
-समन्वागत, endowed
with, LV.A 1311 55, 9, first, BG, p. 152;
MK, p. 176; NA, 7. 20; NB, 22. 2; RK, 1, 24.
,, before,first, CŚ, 6a.
clearing,
I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
55:35:35, 13,
rendering clear, PD, 12".
55, 1, faith, BC, 40"; 2
m. favour, NA, 13, 7.
55,
3, inf. to have faith
in, BC, 39.
परम
श्रद्धधोत,
should put faith in, BC, 40",".
one
375
19,
or,
52, H, good, BC, 31a. एম'शब', सद्धर्मगुरु, the teacher of the good religion, UV, 15o. 54, 1, highest, most
cellent. CS, 4; NB, 14.5; 2 ga, a bull, (at the end of a compound) the most excellent, LV.B 182; 3 a, a request, a boon, excellent, LV.B 1119, 1314, 146; MK, p. 176; 4, good, wise, excellent, honest, BC, 32, 55"; BK, 21°; KP, 3.1: NA, 7"; LV. A 11; PD, 2", 45 साधु, good or virtuous PD, 29,
man,
,, unwise CŚ,
ex
''',, n. youth, LV, B 1510.
,, ind. slowly, BK, 26".

Page #420

376
VOCABULARY
དལ་བུ་
དེ་ཉིད་ 5mg, #4, little, UV, 18. 5. 1 * sfa (lit. 76 ), a ptcl. that
refers to a speech, BK, 26* ; 52*JV YV, ATHIfern, one who
2 *CH, (lit. Og, that), this, speaks little, UV. 18o.
KP, 9. 1, 2, 10.1; NBT, 59, qh, m, smoke, NA, 9.8. 7. 17, 9. 35 ; 3 * gag, ( lit. 57. poison, 1 teat, n. CŚ, 8“; 2 TG) this, BC, 57, 58°, 62°; far, n. KP. I 1,3; PD, 7'.
KP, 8.2: 10,2 ; LV. B20" ;
UV, 22° ; 4 , BC; BK ; 55%, an, bent, NA, 11".
CŚ; KA; KP ; LV; MK; 581'35 RJS, Fhaf#maiT, NB : NBT, PD ; RK ; UV. being made into pieces, NA. 5, a conjunctive ptcl., see p.
222, PD, 14. 52197.1 FA, m. subduing passions 555, 1 sfa, ptcl. refers to a UV, 8°; 2 TH7, n. control, UV,
speech, this, BC, 12°; 2 * ga 25°; 3 7-a, controlled, UV. 25.
for gat, ind. thus, LV. B184 9 V, , m. time, BC, 16' ; LV.
985 IV, 5ah, ind. thus, in this B91, 122, NA, 52 17. 7; RK, 10, 31.
way, LV, A9'. 51 , *444, untime, BC,
535, 1 n, that, NA, 2. 13;
137, 1 ta, that, 22.
2 ara, n. real state, truth, 5V 215, 16, m. a wrong or CŚ, 16'. bad time, BC, 214
5253, 1994, in truth, C$, 20o.
7. 19,

Page #421

དེ་ལྟ
. 14, ind. thus, in this way, MK, 7; 2, ind. in that way, NA, 6".
that case, KP, 4. 1.
नु, 1: तद्, that, (lit. तादृश, like that), LV. A1416; 2, like that, LV. AII.1.
7.6.
I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
, af, ind. then, in
:
, 1 sf (for н), a ptcl. that refers to a speech, BC, 25a, 42 2, ind. thus, BC, 16a, 50, 66 BK, 7; CS, 20"; LV. A3'; NA, 5", 7.6; UV, 11o; 3, ind. like that, BC, 23", 47; NA, 12.5, 15. '25'5'5, 994, ind. thus NA.
G
, fe, for so, for thus,
NA, 7. 24.
47
*¶, #, all, KA. 12a.
དེ་དང་དེར,
तत्र तत्र,
in those pla
377
དེ་ཕྱིར
ces, in every place, PD, 20.
5 35, ईदृश (lit. तादृश, like that),
like this, BC, 6".
,, there, LV. B21'.
, 14, after this, then (lit. ततस्, then), BC, 68; 2, LV. Al', 4', 5', 6', 7', 12", 14', BI, 19; RK, 34; 3 fa हि, so, LV. Al2, 13' ; 4 तद्, therefore (lit. ततस् ) : 5 ततस् ind. then, NA, 10. 1; BCI", 56", 60, 63, 64, 65, 66"; BK, 24", 30; NA, 3.4, 12. 15; 6, ind. there (lit., then), LV. B5'.
, 1, ind. for this, therefore, KA, 92; NBT, 4.9; 2, ind. therefore, NA, 14; 3, ind. therefore, BC, 8", 16", 22". 50; KA, 7; NA, 11.1; 4, therefore, BC, 17; 48; MK, 9°, 14".

Page #422

378
VOCABULARY
དེ་མ་ཐག
དེངས
ऐश-श], अनन्तर (lit. तदनन्तर ), ऐप्पे, 1 तस्य, its, PD, 12°; 2 तेषाम्,
their, PD, 5,
having no interval or pause, MK, 2, 9°; NB, 91,
ind. at that time,
8, at C$ 13°, 14°; LV. B14' ( a ).
, 14, ind. thus, KP, 1.3, 2. 3; 2, ind. in that manner, so, thus, CS, 12°; MK, 2°; NA, 7, 9. 4; PD, 26"; UV,15b ( * अथापि ).
'खेल' 5 1 एवम्, 1.1, 2.1, 3.1, 5.1, 6.3, 7.2; B2143; 2 तथा, thus, CS, 9".
ind. thus, KP,
5*95*9-9984, ama,
Buddha, CŚ, 21o, 3o;
A1437, C225.
26°.
the
2, 1 fa, therefore, MK,
5b; 2, therefore, NA, 2.13 (F), 2.16, 714.16, 13. 19; 3 , therefore, CS, 11°.
. ind. thereby, UV,
,, ind. to-day, NA, 2.3. तव,
there, KP, 1.2, 2.2,
4.2; LV. C4', 5', 6'; NB, 4. 1, 25. 1; NBT, 4. 1, 10, 4; UV, 16'.
ངེ་ལ,
LV., 1a, then, NA, 7. 6 ;
there, CS, 4b,d.
ই''र्मोस, * एवमादि, beginning with such one (lit. तदादि), BC, 23".
2 तल,
55, a, so long, MK, 5o. LV.,, to-day, L.V. BI0a1. དེངས་པར་བྱ( དེང་བ or འདེང་བ
fa-√, to waste away, or va
nish, pf. དེངས འདེངས, imp. 355), faza,
would
or

Page #423

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
379
དེར
21.
waste away or vanish PD, 24.1 ; NBT, 3. 2, 7. 1, 2. 8.
2, 9. 1, 3 ; 2 77, BC, 6*. 55. 78, there, BC, 51° ; BK, 150, Zha o, #rei, having no 16", 31" ; CŚ, 2°; LV. C".
one thing, MK, p. 176. TV, 1 97, therefore, NA, 3. 1,
553, pi, for the purpose of, 8.1 ; 2 da, by that, PD, 16",
BC, 10“," 3 98, he, BC, 1".
IT'JH'', af, one who has IV 3, therefore, 1 7, NA. 5. 3,
attained the end, NA, 14". 7.9, 12. 14, 13.13; 2 TAH, NBT, |
375g St, Hary, that in which 10.45 ; UV, 14; 3 da, NA. 6“.
there is nothing substantial ; 5. a terminating ptcl., ã after
NA, 7. 9. 5 (see p. 236). PD, 12". དོར [pf. and imp. of འདོར་བ, 51921, Er m. a necklace, BK, 37-VW, V2, to give up,
throw out, cast out), 1 SAHSİ, 29", 31o.
cast off, BC, 16'. 2 FIT, 571091, AMIT f. fear, NA, 7.5.
m. giving up, BC, 24". 55. an object, purpose, 197, 55 TV afryry, gd, having gim. BC, 36, 6. 15", 52, 62" ;
ven up, BC, 36". CŚ, 4€, 22" ; BG, 5* ; KA, 10"; KP, 3. 1 ; LV.A 1217 ; MK, 6"; FATOS Y, Effna, left. abNB, 1.1, 11.1, 13. 1, 20. 1, 21. andoned, NA, 10o.

Page #424

380
VOCABULARY
12
12
59, 1 l, n. a net, (fig. ä 37-1. VFII, to remember, 1 Fata,
collection), NA, 13.13; 2 , 1. BC, 23" ; 2 Fæfa, f. rememwith a jāla 'net', i. e. with web
brance, LV. C24?. or membrane; the finger and
5, smell, 1 1771, m. NA, 9.8 ; toe membrane of divine beings and god-like personages are 2 OTA, M, NA, 7. 19. said to be so, BC, 54'.
Hi, m. n. dirt, impurity, 37, seif, unrestrained, NA, 9.8. UV. 34. 5731. accute, severe; 1 ha, 57, 7112, m. favour, KA, 3*.
BK, 36, 13'; 2 34, RK, 32. Fal (pf. of 7, V17, to ask). 35, 137, direct, UV, 11".
92, asked, BK, 74. 5555, a sage, 1 æfa ( Azii, 571'91, qf278, sixtyeth, BK,
a great sage). BC,61' ; LV, pp. 137, 151. Al", 2*. 37,27 41,1%, 57, 6*, 81",
xth, BC, p. 113. 11', 126,1 ; 2 gfa, LV, A10* : 554 (fut. 55. imp. 55 or 53, 35, af-ak, near. LV. A12".
pf. 55" or 3571 of 3352 353, adv. near, 1 afrai, LV. to draw, to conduct), aa (with A12** ; 2 37-, LV. AL.
27,195 ) drew out, BC, 56, 551, aftur, i. cleaver. 5577V (see above), aspirat, 53951, A4art, f. a young she
gd. having drawn, BC, 57'. mule, UV, 12".

Page #425

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
381
དྲན་མོ་
4756 55"HT, soul, hot, BC, 53" ; RK, m. burning (lit. affliction). LV, 35.
B108 ; 5 799, n. a calamity, 975501, #2, deep, grave, NA,
NBT, 1"; 6 77019, m. aflic
tion, BC, 255, 50". 12" 57578579, fare, m. marriage.
9755'95 205 25, 4-8797fa, one RK, 1.
tortures, LV. B9%. 4757, , wicked, cruel, PD 13,
1755'95 2J5, glad, one grie
ves, UV, 178. -7575, ga, n. an umbrella,
475575.35, arad, one oppreRK, 9,
sses, troubles, BK, 5". 9755. 1 am, m. affliction, BK,
475525, 41418, m. pain, NA, 8", 10'; 2 Hran, afflicted, BC, 124.
f, the hood of a 755'9JF Q5, rted, one grieves,
snake, BK, 2o. UV, 17*. 4555150, 1, m. a hermi-
97854*, a snake, 1 qfa, m.
novog, a snake, 1 tage, BC, 65".
BK, 7°, 32" ; 2 alfora, m. BK, 51559, 1 zifa, f. pain, BK, 22“;
1.9755, ye, n. the face, KA, 1" ; 2 ar, m. heat, BC, 43" ; BK, 34; 3 anh, consisting in
BC, 65* ; NA, 140 affiction, BK, 13.4; 4. *776, 5755-99, agte, m. one with
26o.

Page #426

382
VOCABULARY
བདག་
བདག ། four faces, i. e. Brahman, the 759155V , 2A1, nonself creator.
possessor, MK, 13". 497), 1 sfera, m, lord. BC, 23" ;
19737, personal pron, first 2 67, personal pron., first person ( 464, 1; 294, we : pers. plu. 1 EA, we, NA. 3". etc.), BC, 54, 8", 11",", 16", 17", .. 7. 22. 13. 12, 14" ; 2 74 (AFAI18". etc ; BG, 20 ; C, 3'. 13; FH), our. NA, 14. KA, 2° ; LV, A3*5, 916, B 2",", 3575 , self, BC, 65" 12%, 1313,3", 14"etc. etc.; NA, 3., 5",", 6. 6, etc. ; PD, NBT, 11. 2, 4; UV, 106. 11", 16°. etc. ; RK 26 : 3 fH 357 95W5V, rata, I am, BC 450 ; 4 A, self, to one's self, aside, NA, 6.1. BC, 5o; CŚ, 60; 154,0 ; KP.
:7795, HETAT, high-souled, 9. 1 ; NA, I. 6 ; PD, 196; 5 qfa, lord, BC, 24" ; 6 a, BK. 22o. one's own self, MK, 19, 34; 357 ,1 FITTF, an heir, BC. NA, 7. 7.
i 20“; 2 ata, m. lord. BC, 33" ; 798935, Anca, n. the feel- PD. 169. ing of HH ‘mine', affectionate a
te 797.817, Hardt. not self, C$,
ga regard, BC, 484. 457935759, najaa,
15". non-self-possessor, MK, 136. 957515, 1 ATHI, non-self

Page #427

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
383
བདག་
བདེན་པ་ KP, 9.1 ; 2 Åtra, n. the state ag 355. gaiffa, desirous of of non-self, CS, 18', 20".
happiness or comfort, UV, 11o. 9597519 21, ATH7, not self, KP,
2 89, raftin, desirous of com4. 4.
fort, PD,23€. 997, 1 sqfahaayfa FA, invited,
9, 1 ge, n. happiness, comrequested, LV. A 7?; 2 FU,
fort, adj. pleasant, BG, 5" ; BK, n. rubbing, NA, 8*.
32" ; LV. B10S; NA. 3. 14, 255, Ar, m. the personified
5. 4: 13. 16. PD, 60","; UV, evil principle, the evil one (F:17 49,4. 66°, 22",", 25, 269 ; 2 FİNET, or #21), NA, 2“.
n, happiness, NA, 6.6. 7555, HTTP, f, the nymph of Ag 9955. gafft, desirous of Māra, NA 14.
comfort, PD. 23. 2557, 59a, n. nector, BK. 10. 9957, gerae, conducing to
12.6. 21"; UV, 11" (immortality). happiness, UV, 20‘. 959:51. , seventh, LV, p. 595, adv. 9-, well, BK, 65"; 114.
LV. A8”. 95, ye, n. happiness, comfort,
5:25..998, gwa, m. the BK, 169; NA, 13. 17; PD. 10, 23" ; UV, 22" ; RK, 29.
Buddha. BK. 31°; NBT. 1o. 91. gola, f. a happy condi- 5999), Hi, n, truth, BK, 8" ; tion, UV. 174.
| LV. C34, 724,31

Page #428

384
VOCABULARY
མདའ་
འདས་པ།
4158, 7, m. a shaft, arrow, 475348, facut, discoloured, NA, 6.
BC. 66". 41552, afora, strung, composed, va ay77, sat917, in brevity, BC, 25.
BC. 11. 5579N, gra, ind. before, in 1550, briefly, 1 pat917, LV. front, LV B22.
C4" ; 2 Antal, CŚ, 21". 51575, adv. before, in front. 359°571, 461, m. a bird.
1 774, NA, 7. 17; 2 8274, RK, 21". ind. LV. A6". B12" ; NA, 13.
359*81, 9a, n. a leaf, BC, 57". 4,6; 3 grą, ind. NA, 6“. 875, 7a, n. (a thread), a parti- 3500, T4, m. n. mud. UV, 10' cular kind of works, KP
3507', 75, m. a specis of reed, p. 183.
UV, 12. SĒTA, qaal, m. “the Gorka, , m. n. mud (in thread-holder,' a stage mana
fact #ny, m. swamp) UV, 10". ger who takes a prominent part in the prelude to a drama,
395, why, m. trembling, treNA, 2. 2, 3. 4, 10.
mor, BG, 34. 957, trd, m. beauty, LV. B15'. 2574, e-mata, past, UV, 14".

Page #429

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
385
འདི་ལ PE, 1 44, that (lit. 544, gag, 35, 1 $744, thus, NA, 54:
this), BC, 21" ; 2 h, ga, 2 Şen, such, NA, 5, 2 ; 3 ay this (in different genders, num- fę, for so. as for instance, bers, and case-endings). BC; 1 NBT, 9. 2 ; '0.8, 12.7. BK; CŚ; KA; KP : LV;
3333, Sex, such, BC, 27". MK ; NA ; NBT ; RK : 3 ,
35 57, this, these, these two, that (lit. C4, ça ), BK, 6". GR 85, 1 * CH, this (lit. gan,
that, those, 1 xht (lit. # ),
NA, 11"; 2 TH, LV. CI, thus), BG, 1" ; KP, 1.2, 2.2;
720; 350g, LV.C* ; NA, 5. 2 *99€, this (lit. gan thus) LV.
2, 9. 12; 4 ga NA, 11. 4; A9? A32 ; 3 594, thus, KP,
PD, 25'; 5 gar, NA, 2. 17, 2. 2; LV.A3:2, 4", 5°, 615,
6'", 7, 8°B12". 3335, se, here, NA, 10. 8.
3977'70, çà, these, NA,
12“. 3 35, 1 *gaç, this (lit. garga,
Big, here, 1 FH, NA, 12. so much); 2 garaa, so much, NA, 13. 7.
2; 2 ca, KA, 3*. Bir', zga, for example, LV.
358, , his, NA, 12, 14. C28
35 21, 1 T, here, KP, 4. 1. B 2557, TET, for exam• NA, 3'', 8. 2; 2 parts, her, ple, KP, 2. 1, 3.1,
NA, 13. 6.
34.
48

Page #430

386
386
VOCABULARY
འདི་ལས་
འདུག་མ་ཐག BŽAN, :, from this, NA, 74. 355), 1 fara, remaining, standR55987, ca, gd. having ing, NA, 6* : 2 afafya, situamade known (fig. having got
ted, remained, LV. B3?. spread), LV. A4”,',
gd. having remainBģ5, 129, here, BC, 61o ; NB, ed, LV. A612 ; NA, 12. 14.
26. 1 ; NBT, I. 1, 8.1, 10.7; 1 359997, having remained, 1 2 TH, NA, 3. 3 ; 3 5E, CS,
forcat, NA, 12. 12 ; 2 ferfecal 21"; LV. A717, 815, B1022 ; etc. NA 3“, 6. 4, 11. 2, 13. 12 ;
(for ferear), LV.B 124. RK. 29.
35799, 1 afera, stood, remainBƏN, 1 #74, this, BC, 5°; 2 ed, LV. A 1362; 2 sqfaz, seada, by this, NA, 7. 9, 13, 13;
ted, LV.A 8^;3 fatura, sat 3 gda, by this, NA, 13. 18. down, LV.B 19' ; 4 ada,
remains, RK, 22 ; 5 914, m. 35, viete, m union, BC, 47o.
living, NA, 5.2: 6 fa917, m. 3535, Fre, m. one of the
dwelling, NA, 11. I. five skandhas in Buddhism,
357°45'35l, Fararapida, fit coefficient of consciousness, KP, 5. I.
for dwelling. NA, 8. 2. 25, , f. one of the five 3578*947'5, afafaha, adv. as
skandhas in Buddhism, per- / soon as (he) was situated, LV. ception, KP, 5. 1.
B4?.

Page #431

I. TIBETAN SANSKRIT
387
འདུད
འདོད་ཆོགས་ 355, 96, inclined, bowing hum- 35121, 1 44, combined. MK, bly down, NA, 2".
11' ; 2 FAITH, m. union, 955. 1 afa, f. salutation, NA,
BC, 46" ; 3 pha, m. union, BC, 11"; 2 paa, f. submissiveness,
16o ; 4 Athift+, m. a member humility, PD, 4".
of an audience or assembly,
NA, 2. 17. 35799, 30 or 3=97, m. (lit. long
355. 1 EZT, f. desire, PD, 15"; ing one or who longs), Siddhār- 1
2pfa, one desires, LV. tha's charioteer, BC,4", 14",
C 19 ; 37, one may 25", 42, 43“, 56", 65".
desire, NBT. 11. 4 ; PD, 35790, afera, f. an assembly,
3*; UV, 4* ; 4 418, m. desire, NĄ. 34.
BC, 18“; PD, 14"; UV. I", 22" ; · 35219, fapta, n. discipline,
5 jaa, one should be pleased
with, UV, 9"; 6 FIET, desiRK, 31.
rous,. UV, B". 35V, agfaa, collected together,
3559959), *isti, desired. NA, 34.
BG, 5". 35195, FAITH, m. union, BC,
desired, RK, 10. 48o. 250*90, 1 urna, gd. having
3553478), 111, m. paunion, loint. come, BC, 46" ; 2 Ana, gd. LV.C 5", 6'"; NBT, 1". having come together, BC, 47*. 299 30g591 farm, absen

Page #432

388
VOCABULARY
འདོད་ཆགས་
འདྲ ce of desire or human passion. 355359fat, m. desirous, LV.C 1**, 6'.3"
UV, 13". 353, FATH, yielding all BT-7, gu, inf. give up. BC. desires, KA. 6",
55". 35528°9, 1489, f. a cow yield- sší (vh, to give up), 1 ing all desires, BK, 13.
, ind. without, BC, 37" : 359, 1 afarafea, desired. 2 475 , inf BC, 35" : 3 usta,
NA, 3" ; 2 #8T, f, desire, PD, 23","; 4 57H, BC, 44"; NA, 9, 6 ; 3 / I, desire, LV. | 5 qsd, BC, 24. CH"; 4 zfa, desires, PD. B E , faziah, inf. to give up. 54 ; 5 , desired, KA, 10", BC, 31%. RK, 19 ; 6 fara, desired, 35 55, 74, inf. to give BC, 11" ; 1 sikfesa, anxious,
up. BC. 35". NA. 7. 20: 8 414, m. desire
97578, 274, inf. to give up. KP’, +. 1, LV. 01" : UV, 1".
BC, 34", 35". 2.".. +","5".
256 25.2.35, atafutafa, one 255-71, 7.147, m. one who
will make one give up, BC, gives the desired thing. BC,
44. 62".
25, 1 , ind. as, like, NA, 7,20: 357959375, 46, (of of
2 :rra (actually a ), as, EC. Villud sire). desired.
29': 3 - la suffix). like, BC:, 59,
NB, 26. 2.

Page #433

1. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
389
འདྲ་བ 357, 44, cqual, like, PD. 1. 321569 ma, clear, PD, 12“. 35'935, A J, n. similarity, | 215, 47, a possessive suffix, NB, 20. 1,
BC, 59" ; NBT, 5.5. 255, 15196, one that brings
gais, J917, n. a garden.
RK, 16. about. UV, 25“; 2 gard,
21, farfa, f. abstaining from, one draws out, saves, UV, 10".
CŚ, 4". 35751, 1 da, m. a leader. LV. 39, 914, n. sin, BK. 10'.
A14" ; 2 ar*, the hero of 9, 1 q:8, n. misery, sorrow, a drama, NA, 4. 2, 10, 5.5, 6. PD, 10°; 2 dia, ardently 8.7.4, 12,21, etc.
longing for, BC, 31o. 257, A1 , the heroine of a TASH, q:a, n. misery, sor
drama, NA, 12.15, 13. 3. row, BC. 45* ; BK, 14, 6" ; 35, Farf, m. relation, NB, 5..1.
LV. B16*, C2°, 13, 38, , ", ">,
4*, 5, 13, 29, 20, 52,46. 69, etc.; NA, Ž, fereni, f. ptone NA, 8" ;
5. 2 ; PD. 10“," PD, 29".
34'agafar 415 98, gie521, m, m. the pollen of a
fars, m. that the consequence Mower, NA, 13".
of which is misery. LV. C2". 5*35, privat, ifike parāga, Tagas, gifera, sorry, BC.
pollen, NA, 13".
680

Page #434

390
VOCABULARY
སྡུག་པ་
ནག་པོ སྡག་པ, faཀ, dear, LV. C41.
bring together. pf. བསྡུས, fut. སྡེབ་སྦྱོར, =4ཏུ, metre, KA, 12°. བསྔོ), tgཀ, gd. having brought སྡོང་བུ, =, m. n. a bulbous root, together, KA, 2".
NA, 7. 13 ; 2 ༣ཀུའུ, m. 4 stalk, PD, p. I. སྡེད་པ་སྲེད, faཚེa, opt. one mayན. 1»tcl. qf=, if, PD, 16". J8.22": stay, NA, 13. 12.
2 qrfr, u. diseasc, LV.B 16:". བརྡ, f#fan, n. a sign, LV, A12". { 177. བརྡང ( རྡང, Va, to beat., pf. ན་བ, eqifa, In. discusc. LV.t:49.
བརྡངས. fut. བརྡང. imp. རྡང ན་ཚོད, ༢༥7, In. l:in of the or 935N), preferably ako! same age, a friend, BC:. 54'.
ན་བཟ༢, འlཀ7, 11. cloth, B., (63. ཞ, beaten, NA, 24.
64. བསྡམས་ནས, (སྡོམ་པ, fa-Vཀཱu,
༡ ན་རེ, Ig, vl. saicl. RK, 20, to restrain, to bind, fasten.
24. pf. བསྡམས or བསྡོམས, fut.
ནག་པོ, black. 1mfna, a ]»roper བསྡམ or བསྡོམ, imp. བསྔོ or
Inamc, LV.A 1,39, 4“. 5", G, སྡོམས), faq=1, gd. haviiig 7, 9., clc; 2 ནག, RK. 36.
restrained, NA, 12". ནགས, 17n, u. a fcorrat, I3C.. ||. བསྔས་ཤིང, ( བསྔོ་བ, ཀq-Vཚ, to, 2". 28!, 66";NA, 3.༡. Il, 4.

Page #435

ནགས
5. 2; PD, 2; 2, betonging to, growing or produced in a forest, BC, 59.
জনাম*জ'J, आरण्यक, produ
I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
4
ced in a forest, BC, 64°.
জमासळी, वन, n.
15b; NA, 10. 7.
रात बुघु'य, वन्य, produced in
a forest. BC, 63b.
a forest, BC,
, inside, 1, n. RK, 27; 2, m. inner part, NA,II. 4; 3, n. PD. 9a,b.
55, a, inside, NA, 12. 14. 95*5·85'45'Ò3·¶¶1, afarg, let
m.
..
one enter, LV.A 415.
वरण 1 अध्यात्म, concerning
the self, CS, 11; 2 अन्तरात्मन्, the inner self, CS, 13a.
८, आन्तर,
internal ( (Buddhist),
upp. to externak, i. e.
391
ནང་བ
non-Buddhist, RK, 33;
m. day-break, morning, dawn, LV.B 911.
,, m. passing away,
LV.B 201.
54, a disease, 1, m, PD, I"; 2f, m. CS, 10; LV.B 151; PD, 17. 5'5'पउषध, सरुज, diseased, PD, 17". 54, ad3, n, freedom from disease, LV,B 1513. 55, व्यवसाय, m. determination, BC, 30".
, fa, f, the night, LV.B 20".
FR, R, m. n. the sky, KP, 6. 3.
,, ind, ever, LV.B 161. q, fa, ind. ever, BK,
4d.

Page #436

392
VOCABULARY
ནམ་ཡང་
ནོར་བདག Jor*5, ever, 1 197, BK. 1; 1 91495*, , able, PD, 240. 2 517, MK, 14.
98°N, 1 able, capable. (i) za, 5W, a ptcl. indicating the abla- BC. 7°, 364 ; (ii) FAX, BC, 7" ; tive case, and gerund when
21fm, f. power, ability. ĽV. used after a verb in its pf.
B 2097. form.
frieš 95, Hazal, n. of, an expletive ptcl, often an capability, NB, 15. 1.
swering to Sanskrit fę. Jaroslag, faianazei, incapable, 79, afera, west, LV,B 21**
BC, 7.
1903, , m.a parrot, LV. B9' ; q1V. (1317, 9-V7, to be able).
NA, 10'; RK, 14. 1 प्रभोति ( for प्रभवति ), LV.A
F, the terminating ptcl. Ő after op 116; 2 Tifa, KP. I. 2; 3 779, capable of being done.
599, overcome, 1 fata, BC. C$, 96; 4 vità, it is capable 42* ; 2 *afar, BG, I'. of being effected, PD, 14”; KP. 5, wealth, 1 , m. !, 3; 5 , able, NBT. 10.2.
BC, 204 ; 2 79, n. BG, 5° ; 5435, vandfa, I am able, BG,
BK, 2*, 4* ; PD, 16".0,"; 3 far,
n. UV, 6. qving, staa, m. power, BK, 15.957, wafa, m. the lord of
wealth, PD. 160.
4.

Page #437

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
393
གནས ། གནས་པར་བྱ་ 55', afu, m. a gem, precious! CŚ, Il"; PD, 17"; 13 fyr,
stone, BC, 134, 149,56* ; RK, 8. | firm, BC, 19". FF , ara, m. Indra, the king m91499, Catifa, of gods, NA, 2o.
a place, NA, 12". 773591599, #gura, not per- 96 , 1 7177, m. a resting mitted, LV. B2?
place, BK, 11'; 2 faqa, seated, 75V, 1 29afa, one resides,
NA, 9. 9; 3 gaa, onc remains. LV. A1494 ; 2 patea, remain. CŚ, 20"; 4 FETTA:, we move on, ed, BG, 5o; 3 1779, n. a place, remain, UV, 23" ; 5 4471977, house, NA. 12. 5. 8; 4 1974,
standing or remaining firm, BG, m. a hermitage, BK, 154 ; 5 2" ; 6 1, one who stands, HIFT., n. a place, receptacle, BC, 56°; 7 fva, remained, NA,5“; 6 JTETTA, n. attendance, BC, 2", 22° ; LV. B15": NA, a place, LV. B35 ; NA, 11. 2; 7', 12; 8 farfa, f. remaining, 7 fagra, one stands, remains, LV. B16". PD, 29' ; 8 fary, m. dwelling, 971333715, pr. pl. 47911, BK, 30' ; 99, n. position,
falling down, NA, 11, 4. a place, 27“, BK, 1", 10", 24",
7995, agfafa, I do. NA, 27°; NA, 3o; UV,7"; 10 914, m. dwelling, BC, 46 ; 11 zafera,
3.1. arranged, settled, KA, 119; 35395, 2014, inf. to 12 Pia, n. a place, BK, 29o ; : remain, BG, 4".
49

Page #438

394
གནོད་བྱེད གནས་པར་མཛོད,imp.
रमताम्,
let one remain, let one take
delight in, KA, 1a.
གནས་མ་ཡིན་པ,
,, n. an im
proper place, or object, or occasion, CS, 8°.
VOCABULARY
मानस मैर, अस्थानु (for अस्थान ) n. an improper place, LV. B16. 55, afaÿ, not firmly fixed, KP, 8. 2.
,, m. distress, PD,
4a.
གནོད་པ་དང་ལྡན་པ,
harmful, LV, CI18, 210.
55, frafa, vb. one cuts
into parts, cuts asunder. PD, 28".
मार्कऐरु, अपकार,
harm, PD, 3a.
m.
frefea,
རྣམ་གཉིས
, the ear, 1
m. BK, 18";
NA, 11. 5. 6, 13. 1. 17; 2,
n. KP, 7. 2.
, fa, a prefix meaning 'distinction', etc. BC. 65, 68. , fafaa, variegated, KA,
9o.
कू, विकीर्यमाण, pr. pl that which is being scattered, BC, 57°.
Ã, vb. (fa-)uafa, one
moves round, BG, 4".
, fama, affected by,
overcome with, BC, 25"..
इस, पर्याय,
thod of proceeding, KP, 4. 1.
कम उर्, व्यवच्छिन्न, distinguished,
KA, 10'.
mischief,, fa, ind. in two ways,
KA, 11".
m. course, me

Page #439

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
395
395 རྣམ་པར་རྒྱལ་བ ། རྣམ་པར་དཔྱོད་ *H*95, #, f. a story. RK, 91050579,49c, m. wish, p. 199.
desire, BK, 26°. #97, ya, pure, LV. BI!". FH1°015 ABS, ATETAPI, pr. pl. Fan, 1 fa, f. way, manner, seeing, NA, 13, 24. LV. A1410 2 -fau, kind, P&P 515 930 IV, farli, gd. NB, 2. 1.
having seen, BC. 67". ***9730V, 1 fui, ind. in two FR15 91H, vafera, remainways, NB, 23.1; 2 fefact, ed, BG, 16. of two kinds, two-fold, NBT,
F8°275*15*9, , m. (lit. zyc417, 3. 1 ; RK, 27. Tag, agfaa, of four kinds,
n). rising up, BG, 36. NB, 7. 1.
FE! 315 9501 , 91, gd. *****HEW, farad, one shines,
having given up. BC, 59“. LV. B 6".
Fal* *555, faanu, f. reflec: F1215, fa, a prefix meaning
tion, consideration, NA, 5". distinction,' etc. BC, 47", 66". V VII, fafara, variega. 58/221573525, fanath, m. stay
ted, LV.A 13:0,". ing abroad, BC. 59".
Fol*45*555*45-95, faarejara, Farl ara, fası, m. conguer, pr. pl. being considered, NA, victorious, NBT, 10.
10.4.

Page #440

396
VOCABULARY རྣམ་པར་རིག་པ ། རྣམས་ 201238, famsafa, they go without intimation, pure cons
ciousness, KP. 8.2. away, BC, 46".
Fault s, fagia, n. skill, F1*215999, fayF4-a, they are
proficiency. pure indefinite separated, BC, 49".
sensation, pure consciousness, F 15'29219, 1 zifa, one goes
KP, 5.1, 6. 3 ; NA, 13. 18;
NB, 9.3. away, BC, 48°; 2 fagen, m.
56 55 54 535, ffq4, gd. separation, BC. 17'.
having thought, NA, 3. 12. 581%215 gal'a, grazia, ill-beha
581315 858V, faraga, free from, ved, badly educated, BK, 13“.
UV. 24. 125 VV, arī, said. BC, 54'.
FV815, arg , much, a xreat, BC, 581452ET, faxra, pr. pl. 58". holding, BK, 19.
T1, pr. pl. holding, FIV15A9789, 570741, f. settle
13C, 63€. ment, NA, 11. 4; NB, 26. 1. 1998, fafecar, gd. having 5*215 DŽTO ( TO ? ) Fb, known, BC, 60". faxF4, gd. having disinissed. F1A7NH, faar, ind. in three sent away, BC, 65".
ways, KA, 11". 5819591415, anfaafia, FW, 1 a word enoting the

Page #441

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
- 397
སྣ་ཚོགས་
བསྣམས་ནས་ plural number ; 2 got, m, a $5597, parte, n. the sky, BC, class, group, collection, BK, 17" ; etc.
*5*7, light, flash, 1 1 FRIRE 2, afora, m. one who
, m.
BK, 2" ; 2 fufah, n. KA, 4"; practises yoga. NB, 11.2.
३ भासस् ( in Skt. text wrongly 89, 1 a, sharp, BC. 28" ; 2 THA ), n. BC, 66" ; 4 CHIA, dar, n. acuteness, BC. 40 m. appearance, NB, 5.1, 13. 1.
NET5watara, without re1971, fafara, sharp, BC, 56".
flection, KP, 8. 2. , the nose, the trunk of an
ani pall, fansat, oily, NA, 9.7.
alat far oily. elephant, 1 gu, n. KP, 7. 2; 2 arar, f. RK, 12, 34.
$15, -+157, having, enjoying, BK,
32". *555, 7777, m. a leader,
Şiky vš5 (şiival, Vae, to BK, 27" 59V, various, 1 FAT, BC,
take up. pf. T9 , ft. Aiod, 57" ; 2 Arar, ind. BC, 43" ; NA. imp. 315 or gave ). imp. 2. 3 ; 3 fafar, RK, 35.
Tem, take, BC. 61". på4855*21, fee, bright, aparit, vetar, sd. having
variegated, BC, 56". ! taken, BC, 56

Page #442

398
VOCABULARY
འཔའ་པོ་
དཔེར
52101, xf, f. beauty, grace, pros1994 , 172, f. skin, BG, 3".
perity, dignity, magnificence,
BC, 335, 590; KA, p. 172 ; NA, 215. , m. lap, LV. A1339 2. 7 ; PD, 204 215, a lotus, 1 , n. KA,
521719, xif(-4a), one with śri, 1" ; 2 98, n. BK, 16".
see above, NA, 2. 4.
ga19549'9, vei, m. a 21901, a lolus, 1 FA, NA,
king of the name, NA, 3*. 13a ; 2 99, m. n. NA, 2. 4 ; 3
555, 6, n. an army, RK, 30. 75ta, n. BK, 20'. 21905 4*55, FST27, one
55567, 218, m. the upper part
of the arm, BK, 19“. with the eyes like a lotus, LV. BILS.
555*3°85, , f. an infantry, 5019749VE, F, m. thought, a foot-man, a foot-soldier, LV. wish, BK, pp. 137, 151.
B2135 9999999
52 59790850°C, 3970 4:, , Faga, m. the wishing tree, the divine tree
in comparison equal, P.K, 21. that fulfils all desire, NA, 7o. 5295, 294, secondary, 5819 zí, a hero, 1 ate, m. NA,
marks LV. A1312 2° ; 2 , m. PD, 20%. 1 7915,-397, like, BC, 5".

Page #443

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
399
སྤང་བར་གྱིས་
སྤོང 5275, as, 1 Jan, ind. KP, CV), [ *FEIFT ], imp. 2nd
1, 1, 2 THI, KP, 2, 3, 1. 3. pers. sing. give up, PD, 14". 5:15.79219, 72, ind. as, NBT,
N5V 9V, 7, 1, gd. having given 5.4.
up, BG, 5'.
X50VIN, (lit. gja, by aban595 (fa- veq, to determine, as
donment), fig. **TI, gd. certain), faeuta, NBT, 4. 3.
having not taken, LV. C2a 5555551, Hefon, that which w. hat. n. the hair on the
is not determined, not ascer- body, BG, 3".
tained, KP, 8.2, 9. 2. NFÀ55719, (?), na 5315991, (pf. and fut. of 595991, requisite thing, RK, 35.
fa-vat, caus., to investigate, ! 352, net, m. a uterine brother, fa-V Eq, to ascertain, in fact, PD, 26. faart, m., faetu, n., but the Y'ACN, 1 gafa, having the text has) ÀRTTHVAIHT, f. inves- hairs of the body erect, thrilled tigation of cleverness, KP, 3.). with joy, NA, 2 ; 2 daraufa,
vb. makes the thrill of hairs, NH, 247, n. skin, RK, 35.
NA, 7. 20. 45:45H, ( 9549 or a , fax, mixed, KA, 11".
VTT, VET, to give up ; pf. (see 85'95 H), am, m. $, fut. 95, imp. 35' or abandonment, BC, 4°, 18“.

Page #444

400
VOCABULARY
སྤྱོད་པ
ཕ་མ
(pf. of 5,-), the cloud, 1 o, n. BC,
1, a deed, UV, 17".
, the eye, 1 नयन, n. BK,
21; 2, BK, 16"
སྤྱི,
1 (§). m. the head,
PD, 2; 2, n. common, NB, 16. 1.
,, common, CS,
65; 2, m. RK, 36; 3 बलाहक, BC, 47",
चैवमपर्तेर् प, जीमूतवाहन, a proper
name, NA, 4, 4. 2.
,, m. details, creation, the expression of conceptually differentiated reality in the word, MK, p. 176. KA, 12a. See, #fa, (lit. spreading),
showing, BK, 20".
22.
,, m. a practice.
Note, LV. B14'4
སྤྱོད་ན་མངའ་ནི་...མཆིས,
शक्यसे,
are able,
( for शक्नोषि ), you (lit. if you have the ability in practice), LV. B1414,15,17.
a practice,
$54, 1 afta, n. life, BC, p. 113, NA, 3o; 2. ¿1⁄2, fqq-f¶714€, m. the father and
the grand father, RK, 25,
, enjoyed, used, eaten, NA, 6; 3 भोग, m. enjoyment, PD, 16; 4 m, pt. pl. practising, UV, 11.
, f, m. the father, BC, 10 BK, 14: LV. B2, 1120 PD, 25
, fq, m. dual num. the parents, NA, 4

Page #445

I. TIBETAN SANSKRIT
401
པ་རོལ་
པོད
4371. T, alien, stranger, other, 317, a, n. recess in a rock, BC, 9'; BK, I" ; PD, 24". I cave, NA, 8".
3521, a collection of, mass, 21912, Tp, m. a boar, RK. 15.
heap, 1 ttfet, m. BK, I 2 7771 215 (34-V, to help, serve). '4717
m. LV. 24**. gáfa, (=3977 Fifa ), serves,
39**TV, F1, endowed with. KP, 2.3.
PD, 22". 5:33, AT ( =PITEIT ), 3 WN, Jana, one who imp, do treat with kindness,
knows how to fly. RK, 11. do favour, LV. B13*.
V, 942, m. a male, CŚ, 13 1931, 1 3971, m. help, KP, | 14",". 2. 3 ; 2 3971f7, helping, KP,
15, a palace. family castle, 2.1; 3 sqft, fit, favour
1 gia, n. LV, A5 : 2 177, able, NB I, 9.3.
n. LV. B13* ; 3 1 , m T35, fant, doing a kind act,
RK, 1. favourable, LV. B18'?.
5. 71=1, one another, temptible fellow, UV, 124. BC, 44".
19, FEI, vb. pf. gave, RK, 33. F, Faa, white, RK, 15.
215 V (=va!. ), to deserve, 9933, 418, most, BC, 9! ! Foffa, UV, 22“.
TET, ma mean con
50

Page #446

402
VOCABULARY
ཕྱག
ཕྱེན་པ
(hon. for ), the hand,,q, afterwards, CS, 6".
"arm (from the use made of the
,, external, RK. 32.
also, fa, f, the future time,
hand in salutation by orientals the word means salutation), 1 fm, m. BC, 54; 2, m. BC, 65; 3 , m. BC, 12", 31".
the future, LV. CI12, 214; 2 q, afterwards, later, RK, 29.
,, adorable, to be (√, to go, come), 1, NA.
saluted,
respectfully
12. 11.
gd. having come. BK, 30"; 2 (*√, to be),, is, LV. B9". 35, (-√, to salute),,, gd. having reached, नमस्करोति, PD, 80. 336, 147, n. salutation,,
BK, 15".
KA, p. 192: NA, 02; 2(√
to salute),, I salute, MK,
p. 176; 3(-, to salute), , vb. pf. saluted BK, 23". 35, f, gd. having, 39, gd. having gone,
LV. A31", 6".
*परस्पर, one another, BC,
*f, gd. having
ascended (lit. having arrived), LV. B19; fafgaisa, was situated (lit. Ta or आगत्य, having arrived), LV. B3".
saluted, LV. A1356.
,, outside, external, i. e.,
non-Buddhist, RK, 27, 30.
48'.

Page #447

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
ཕྱིར
रमन, विनिवर्तन, n. turning
back. return, LV. B13".
रौহ'समरन, विमुख, having
the face turned back, clined, NA, 5",
¶, fa, ed. having
turned back, NA, 5. 4.
शु, निवर्तन,
back, BC, p. 113.
n. turning
disin-1 fa, f. direction, cardi
nal point, LV. BII; NA, 8" ; 2 fa, m. a distant region
or country, NA, 2. 3; 3
m. the subject of a syllogism (the minor term), NB, 28. 1. 29. 1.
, fa, imp. turn back,
BC, 11, 41".
' (निस्- ( श्वस्, to sigh), निःश्व
afa, sighed, LV. A145.
,, m. a beast, PD, 28“.
,, vb. pf. set
འཕགས་པ
उद्- √मील्, to open ), उन्मील्य.
having opened, NA, 1".
5, 1 af,
m. n. half, PD,
15; 234, m. n. half, nearly half, LV. B7".
403
,, f. decoration, embellishment, BC, 56".
साम, सहस्र,
LV, A13.
NA, 1".
n. a thousand,
,, f. envy, jealousy,
free, sheded, BC, 53".
(pf. and imp. of 255,, m. union, associa
tion, LV. C4"".
འཕགས་པ, 1 * प्रतिरेक, excess,

Page #448

404
VOCABULARY
འཕགས་མ
བ་ལང surpassing. LV. A136"; 2 311, 3 9 , wa fwfaa. noble, fine, excellent, BC, 587";
trained in archery, LV. B21". KA, pp. 183. 192 ; LV. C1'., 3*, 7o.34,*" ; UV, 11".
235-7, a. m. a garland 32998, pi, f. noble, NA,
hanging down to the breast. 3.3, 5.
BK. 29". 2267 (Vea, to kill), xia, 235, faith, m. conuing out. one kills, UV, 12".
(lit. ascending). NA, 9. 8. 325995995, giza, (see above) 299, 1997, ind. in the very UV, 12".
nioment, just iminediately. , 1 qua, causing to in- |
BK, 23.1 ; 2 TEAT, ind. suddencrease, PD, 27" ; 2 quara,
ly, NA, 12. 12. growing, RK, 16.
m. Indra, the lord: using to in
of gods, NA, 14". crease, UV, 9'; 2 fa, f. growth, CŚ, 2".
, a cow, cattle, 1 sit, m. I. KA. RĪVITRIJS V(94, to grow,
increase. [ Tajā 1, UV, 11. 65; 2 st, f. RK, 13. REFN, Ja, 1. that with 9:1535, vita, n. the state or
which an arrow is thrown, characteristics of a cow or a bow, KP, 3. 1.
cattle, KA, 6'.

Page #449

བག་ཕབ
,, a n. ease, comfort,
NA, 9.9.
नमा शेर्, प्रमाद, n.
UV, 7".", 9", 10".
I. TIBETAN SANSKRIT
नना,
carelessness,
अप्रमाद, vigilence, UV. 7", 8", 10". 55, à, m. a treasury.
, श्लेष्मन्, m. the phlegmatic humour (one of the three humours of the body, i.e. kapha), PD, 30o. བབ (pf. of འབབ་པ, to
carefulness,
move
down words, descend), arrived, LV, B12".
བབས (pf. of འབབ་པ )གུར, rHIཞ,
fell down, BK, 3".
'], पतन, n. falling down,
NA, 7. 19.
र, अवातरत्, vb. ipf.
ང་
came down, BC, 3".
བུ་སྨད
पर, अन्तराल, n. intermediate
space, NA, 12".
45, 1-, ptcl. up to, CŚ,
2"; 2, middle, RA, 25: 3, ind. till, LV. A 10*. C718.
405
བས (for བྱས, pf. of བྱེད་པ ),
afa, passed, LV. B7.
मैमुख, विदूषक, m.
བུ,
a humours
companion and confidential friend of the hero of a play, NA, 4. 2, 5. I, etc.
a son, 1 नन्दन m. BK, 22* ; 2
ya, m. BK, 4, 7", ", 10".
, art, f. a woman, NA, 2". J ̈Ã, 1 æfTMTM, a girl, NA, 13. 22; 2, a wife, KA, 1"; 3 at, a woman, NA, 14".
'ब, क्लब, n. wife (the Tib.

Page #450

406
VOCABULARY
4
,
བུ་རམ་ཤིང word generally means family. 6" ; (ii) FI, NA, 5' ; 5 faena, children), BC, 591.
m. a bird. BC, 2". 35815, , m. sugar-cane 39, falt f. action, BC, 68". KP, 2.1, 3.
1 what should be done. (i) J'aura , gaifa, m. the son
FTWTZ NA, 6. 7, 9; (ii) 72,
CŚ, 5, NA, 7' ; 2 far, action, and others, RK, 18.
BC. 32", 68'; KA, 9'; MK, 359, a bee, I a b:e. 1 afa, m. NA, 12" ; 2 12, m. NA, 11".
J'9'35, #7177, with action, 59625, a wife, woman. 2 FI, i
MK, 4'. f. NA, 8o; 2 zifa, f. NA, 12. JTF5,=1#4177, not with ac5; 3 at, f. CŚ, 13".
tion, MK, 4. 25 1 167, called, KA, 4'; anaia *
4:1 gia 5, , inf. to do. 2 *112, m. Tibet, RK, 3, 4,5.
NBT, 11. 2. ÍN (pf. and imp. of G252195,
99505, uzuā, is being said. 167, gd. having called, NA,
CŚ, 18' 2.6, 3. 1. 5 (pf. of 35°37, to do), 1 #ff- JRT, AKA, what should not be 671A, CS, 54 ; 2 #
f as. LV. done, NA. 5". B20"?; 3 what ought to be. Ja (I with ), 1 an done, NA, 13. 6, (i) Ff, PD, what should be done, PD,

Page #451

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
བྱ་རོག
19' ; 2 कुर्यात्, one should do
( * भवेत् ), UV, 9.
शुरेमा, काक, m.
5. 4.
,, the north, LV. B21^.
a crow, NBT,
35, af, m. f., wisdom,
supreme knowledge, BK, p. 137, 32; LV. A12"; NA,1, 3".
J'¶Ñ3⁄4¶‍593, fraca, m. an aspirant to bodhi, wisdom, supreme knowledge, BK, p. 151; KP, 1. 1, 3, 2, 3, 3. 1, LV. A131,54, 14, 153, B4','4, 193, 211,21,41, NA, 36.
etc.
*, *fafa, fut. will do, PD, 17".
བྱས (pf. བྱེད་པ, to do, √),
afa, produced, BK, 2a.
བྱས (pf. of བྱེད་པ,
to do, v),
produced. done, did, does,
1 अकारयत्,
ipf,
caus.
བྱིས་བ
caused to do, BK, II"; 2 करोति, ptl. UV 26" 3 कलित, BK, 2 4 ; कृत, BC, 11'; NA, 7°; 5, pf. BK, 24'.
407
,, gd. having done, LV. A712; NA, 12. 15. J', ar, gd. having done, BC, 52, 59"; NA, 2. 16; UV, 8° (f), BC, 51; NA, 6.9; CŚ, 1".
', did, done, doing. 1 7, 2, pf. did. BC, 68' : 3(), UV, 19"," ( *कृत्वा ) 4 विरचित, ( made ), BK, p. 151.
JN
imf. made, LV. A12"*.
(SN and ), azùa,
བྱིས་པ,
,, to give, 1 zu, given,
NA, 7; 2, gave, BC, 19'.
,, vb. is given.
, m. a child.

Page #452

408
VOCABULARY
55
བྱོན་པ་
3 (pf. of 235-7, to be, Va, 19; 4 [a]arit:, BO, 50" ; 5
u PK 2.! şa, BC, 32" ; BK, 17 ; O etc.), 1 47, was, BK, 2" ; !
faftà, PD, 12"; 7 fø, NB, 2 ama came, PD, 7" ; 3 gga,
15.1. came into being N.4,6" ;3 frta, is born, PD, 6": 5 grua,
2572549, mafia, caused to appeared. LV. A139",".
do, appointed, BC, 29'. FFF, paatai, gd. having come 259359, faxinai, f. desire of down. LV. B3".
doing, BC, 12". 35'56, fq, gd. having come
259, Vč, to do, 1 Frifa, PD, out, LV. A5".
17" ; 2 pula, CŚ, 16" ; 3 357, 5, arising from, NB, 11.
greifra, NA, 11" ; 4 f?, F. ac
tion, KP, 1. 3. 375....15, 47, was, UV,
35735, -Fafea, doing, bringing 9.
about, NB, 9. 1. I, 4141, f. sand, BK, 3";
3 g575993, Faculty, without a 775-75, syafet, f. perfect
cause, BC, 10. proficiency, KA, 9".
35*25*295, fufa, will do. 3:5l, alg, sand, BK, 49, 5".
BK, 32". 35 (39, VF, to do ), 1' 35.1 arrived, FAIT, LV, A8'';
Fifa, NA, 864 ; UV 19 ; 2 zeifa, 2 M, LV.B, 10** LP, 2. 3 : 3 feqfa, UV, 379, #Maka, came, BK: 27"

Page #453

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
བྲག
3, lit. a rock (
solid mass), UV, 20".
one
, f, sprinkled, watered,
BK, 10".
,, removed. NB, 4. 2.
', 1 fe, free from, NB, 6. 12 fa, m. separation, LV. C41; 3 faga, separated. deprived of, RK, 21o.
,, eagerly or intently
,, acceptable, CS, 22.
51
བླང་བ་ཞིང, lit.
( *न अवमन्येत one should not
བླུན་པོ
contempt, i. e. should accept). UV, 13".
བླངས ( pf. of བྲང་བ, Va, ༢༑
√, to take; ft., imp
),, pf. took, BC, 63" बस, 1 अनुपरिगृह्य, gd. having
taken favourably, LV. A12** 2 afrua, gd. having taken. LV. A1360.
इस,
occupied, BK, 28.
,, n. rather or better than,
CS, 17.
बम, गुरु, m. a teacher, parti, å3, pt. ptcl. causing
cularly a religious teacher;
to roll (lit. having caused to roll), LV. A14".
the father, NA, 3. 14, 5. 4. 6",", 6. 2.
,, m. foolish, stupid, PD.
.ܢ
409
आदाय, gd. having
taken, BC, 11, 13", 93".
,, taken, BC, 29".
27
to be accepted, a,, vile, foolish,
PD, 27, 28".

Page #454

410
VOCABULARY
དབང་ ă, fa, f. intellect, thought, 35, 1, devoid of intellect, BC, 17".
foolish, PD, 6". TAV, afa, f. intellect, thought, ci, a minister, 1 gafa, f. NA, BC, 35" ; BK, 7" ; CŚ. 114. 7° ; 2 afrah, PD, 26* ; 3 afaq,
25. Hufaa, intelligent, m. RK, 17. wise, UV, 3".
v ( and intr. V), DEN, 759, páfa, foolish, PD, 8o. by intellect, NA, 2. 14. TJ. afs, one with intellect, 595, 97, m. influence, subject LV. BI1*.
to, under the influence of, BC,
30", 68“ ; CŚ, 10°, NA, 5“, NB, 755, faxin, m. confidence,
21. 1. BC, 22.
595.51, 1 zafrada, ruling or 215, intelligent, 1 a, CŚ,
determining, MK, 2° ; 2 gri, | 22"; 2 GHz, C5, 2.
m. lord, BK, p. 151; NA, 24; A i za JW, farea, gd. having 3 slog, n. an organ of sense,
caused to believe, BC, 62". I NA, 5o; NB, 8. I, 9. 2. 29, fata, confident, fear- 995949, datat, n supremacy. less, BC, 2“.
sovereignty, NA, 4". 2984), Syafast, without 98539781595, Dzifirma, abandoning confidence, BC. ! the (state of being) lord of 119.
supremacy, LV. A1430

Page #455

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
411
84.
དབང་མེད
འབབས 99505, 4an, not having one's 5950*5701, areat, f. speech,
own will, helpless, BC. 68' the presiding deity of learning. 9955158, , not having KA, 1o.
one's own will, BC. 44o. 55, fq. VHF, to distinguish, 53, ferca, n. the head, BC, 59'. fotota, KA. 8". 59'8( hon. for the hair). / 599, , m. distinction, KA,
#21, m. the hair, BC, 57". 5551, 192, m. a crown, tiara. |
2960, 1 719, m. a servant, BC, 134, 27".
BK, 28' ; 2 al, . subject,
RK, 7. 59*8, middle, 1 H=74, KP, 4.
1 29 h, a maidnervint, 1*21, 2, 3, 4, 5.1, 6. 1, 4. 7. 1, 3, 8. 2, 10.1 ; LV. C222 ; 2 47,
NA, 12. 15, 13. 1.5 ; 2 till, MK, p. 176.
BK, 28". 59°3à " si, 49-791
pag1 797., to ondenvour. 1 ( 4.74 ), not middle (path).
dar:, you should onenvour. LV. C23...
BC, 23'; 2 a, m. endenvour,
BC, 45" ; 3 31714, m. per 53N ( 59 and instr. V) ,
severance, BC, 29". middle, KP, 8. 2. 10. 2.
299N, pra, reals on. Ser notre 59027, , middle, BC, 54". BC. 50".

Page #456

412
VOCABULARY
འབའ་ཞིག ། འབྲས་བུ 393.97, #19, n. only, CS, 135,
will be. UV, 19'; 3 57fa, 21" ; NA. 6. 6 ; PD, 27. 1. you will be, UV, 1". 373.975, 99, n. only. N:1. 335-51, wa, n. a bring. BC. to 13.17.
3959, 1 wafa, is, cś. t'i 3935, #F8T, 11. id moun- 2 yarifah, f. leading to re
tain of the name in l'uranas, birth. LV. C"; 3 -42, produ BC. 13.
cing, RK, 10; 4 Arha, m 3392, ai, 11. a lac. one hund
possibility, C$. 12. red thousand, RK. 7.
| 335 45 1235, varafa, will be. Pav, tila, rains, 1K, 12". 13C., 47". 37451, unifaza zia:, the time
BİR I, faha, m, treasures, for
tune, PD, 15“. to make over to. RK, 22.
gara, separation, 1 faggio, m. 33, * 64f-a, vl. cry. sound (in
BC, 46, 47° ; 2 fazla, BC. general). LV. 1920
43" : 3 farah, m. BC, 17", 49". 335. 1 ppia, originates, UV,
290, 487, n. a fruit, NA, 7. 2“ : 2 mafa, comes into being, UV, 16* ; 3 Hafa, is, 95 95 90N, 47, fruitsul, MK, 10".
NA, 146. 395995, 1 falsifot. shall 234°3, 74, 11. a fruit, BC, 84,
go out, LV. 114*9,74; 2 ufafa, 55". MK, 11". 12",", 14": NA,

Page #457

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
413
འབྲས་བུ་ 3*, 7. 13.9": NB, 18. I, 26. ! ;
PD. 12" ; UV, 125,9 ; RK, 29. av 9315991, anura, m. t'e
absence of the fruit, MK. 144. 3959V70, , partak-
I ing of the reward. BC, 9. 3905, face, fruitl ss, futile,
BC:. 45". 2 012, 46471, m. connection,
NBT. 9.5, 10. 4. 12. 1. 28. 5, 1:a, made (lit. yz, join cc!). BC. 25' ; LV.A319,53 ;
2 viilga, employed, NA, 74. 5 9, 1 4 , arising from or
produced by, NBT, 11. 13 : 2
Jah, lised, employed, CS. 86. 1. 1 qra, n. giving, sitt. P. 166 ; 2 CIF, I shall give. LV. B13". 1991, 317, n. giving, gift, BK, 19".
2, 1 * 91a9, thinness (lit. 2 tua, n. cleansing), NBT, 1". , 41, m. connection. UV, 16. I , 14, m. one who em
ploys, an author, KA, 6'. 159, 1 4941, m. application,
attachment. Jevotion to. LV. CI". 28; 2 calor, m. application, performance, BK. 5". KA. 2" ; NA, 2. 12, 15; 391, in. connection, UV, 16*.
'A85, fagit, m. separation UV. 16". A, a snake. 1 sifar, m. BC, 56"; 2 af, m. PD, 3*.",". 595.35, a1eafa, plays with an instruinent, NA, 12. 15.
, 1:17,4 ( 71 ), what
(im

Page #458

414
VOCABULARY
plying 'no'), LV. B2048 ; 2 not, 25. eunuch, 1 #1a, BC, 33" ; (i) a, BC, 16", etc. ; BG, 4" ; 2 7097., CŚ. 13", 14",". KA. 4"; LV. B7', etc. ; C4" ;
94, 94, unable, KP, 1.3. NA, 54,", etc. ; PD, 14", etc.; UV, 1o; (ii) #1, BC, 50', 554 : 1 350, (lit. az, not given 3 mother, (i) gaat, BK, 15" ;
up). gui, gd. having not (ii) HIĘ, BC, 32°, 45°; PD. 26°,4. given up. PD, 44, 19950, zaifect, not produced. NIN, 1 a, not done, BC. not effected, NB, 6. 3.
52 ; 2 cai, gd. having not
dune, PD, 4",". FR6219, 1a, not mistaken,
མ་བྱས༔ (pf. of བྱེད་པ, to tt:ll. mcu NB, 4, 1.
tion). h5 uffia, ko. hav. WDS), 4a, non existent,
ing not told. having not in BC, 384.
formed. LV. B2". FEN, aga, m. uncertainty. 95A, Hanna, not come or C$, 15".
arrived, PD. 7". *555, 77, m. a man of the
HÍ, sauna, future. UV. 14". name, NA, 7. 3, 5.
NV, qumarata, keeping si **97759111 , ua, ind. without,
lent, UV, 18“. excepting, CŚ, 9.
255, **, n. imperfection, *H05, 22, not seen, PD, 28. deficiency. CŚ, 12".

Page #459

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
415
415
མ་ཡིན་
gaga, afgifga, not trained, Gwa, 7 ( stafa), not, BC. 16",
KP, 3. 1. 18", 21", 32, 34". 48^, 61',| 67'; BK, 81; CÁ, 94, 170 MK.05, afeg, m. a buffalo, RK, 19,1, 4C, 6", 10° ; NA, 9o ; NBT, 14, 34. 12. 5.
15, , many, much, PD, 5"; gw97.789, 79, not ? is it not ?
UV, 186. CS, 84, 22" ; NA, 6.6,9, 7.7. | 25*21599, ae, many, BK, 2". Ju999, , not, C5, 15°; NA, 258, ag, many, much, BC, 114, 17.4 ; NbT, 4. 2.
64", 684 ; NA, 7. 13 ; PD, 44; F21W, Haty, m. a mountain of
UV, 44 ; RK, 36. the name, NA, 7. 14, 16, 19,
415-9, HET, great, LV: B20%. 22, 84.
55597, 3qda, m. instruction, 'WITH, Atract, f. the advice, BK, 12. name of the heroine of the 015, fen, an oblation, clarified drama, NA, 12. 15.
butter, NA, 9. 8. 51219V, a (vafà ), not LV. 21, ra, n. sleeping, a bed, B1010
BC, 28* ; LV, 1112, 196. ABVVT 4ta, without remain- 1 not, (i) , BC, 24", etc. ;
der, whole, all, LV. C6". I BR, 9", etc. : CS, 2°, etc. ;

Page #460

416
VOCABULARY
KA, 7', etc. ; KP, 1. 1, etc. : LV. A8'", etc. : NA. 2. 12, etc. : MK, 54, etc. ; NBT. 4.3, etc. ; PD, 9', etc.; UV, 1.', etc. ; (ii) a, LV. B159 ; 2 a man, (i) , m. BC, 24"; BK, 1" ; (ii) ?, m. BC, 1“; (iii) 974, m. LV. A22, 5°; UV, 54, 19;
(iv) A954, PD. 20°, UV, 22. N979, faqat, cast-down, LV.
BIT. À 5VS, a, m. distress, de!
jection, LV. 12"? ži 2595", 7, not, CS, 12".
295 9, 7, not, LV, C120,25, 26,
་ མི་སྨད་ 39, gafara, absence of vicinity, NB, 13.1.
575, aface, not eternal, CŚ, | 15°; KP. 5. 1. 6. 2, 3, 7. 1, 2, 8. 1. À 24, fafazar, f. a town of the name. UV, 24". 292:34!, 1797, an instance on the other side, a dissimilar instance, or one in which the mejor ter is not found, NB, 29. 2; 2 71777, m. an adversary, foe, WA, 7. 2. 257, oía, 10. i bile, BC, 38".
255, aíaz, uneesirablo, II), - 19".
271, 2117, not pleasing, not agreeable, LV. 0,45 35 faizi, not blamed. UV. 18“.
hogê AN ÀI, #42917, m. one who gives the assurance of safety, PD, 25. 31TV, AGH17, adv. as soon
as he did not sleep (see Notes), LV. 3.

Page #461

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
417
མི་གཙང
མིན་ནམ་
â755, +977, very impure, 290, 31a, n, ignorance, Cs, KP, 2.3.
13o. Q&T, FE, f. not killing, on , the eye, 1 =, NA, 13. CS, 21"
18 ; 2 794, n. BC, 4" ; KP, 95.91, farfar, free from long- 7.1 ; NA, 1", 99, 14' ; 3 TRA, ing. BC, 66".
n. LV. 13* ; 4 277, n. NA, °35, 74, undecaying ( **T,
11.5.
5192721, 222, one with the °55V 21, pernicious), BK,
eyes, CŚ, 22. ]" 35:, , undecaying, BK,
35, 7147, n. a name, CŚ. 19" ;
PD, 12. 134.
5, 1 a, not, BC, 1", 9", 15“.“, 35, fata, uneven, rough, ! NA, 7. 19.
19', 41° : BK, 7", 86: CS, 2',
3", 10", 135,5, 15"; MK, 1", 55', B7VII, , not fit, NA, 12. 14" ; NA, 1", 5“, 10, 27" ; UV. 13.
21" ; 2 770, but not, BC, 1" ; TW, 77, not giving way, 3 a Rita, may not be, BC, 17"; imperishable, BK, 32".
47a, certainly not CŚ, 8o. TN ay, not right, Lv. 190907, 79, is it not, Cs, 10', B2".
52
154.

Page #462

418
VOCABULARY
མིན་པ་
མེལ་ཚེ་བྱེད་ 15:51, 7, not, CS, 14".
4,5; UV. 9, 20", 24" ; 37 999, sf, n. a pearl, NA, 8'. ! faqa, NBT, 12. 1; 4 area,
BC, 10'; KP, 10.1; PD, 1999), qaq, n. darkness, NBT,
19,1,C," ; UV, 2", 18", 21","; 1";PD, 16.
5 faar, ind. without, NA, TORE, , m. a kind of grass 7.3. (of which the girdle of a Brah
55 95, wifer, is not, UV, 2". min is made), NA, 10. 5. heat, fire, 1 fet, m. BC, ! 2555, *facci, for the disap
36° ; 2 dst, KP. 6. 3 ; 3 ale, pearance. BC3a m. BK, 10.
mg , is not, absence, non51-57, a flower, 1 ggf, BK,
existence, 1 4919, CŚ, 20" ; 239 ; NA, 7.13 ; PD, 2", 22" ;
NBT, 5.4; 2 #479, NB, 29. 2 709, n. BK, 14" ; NA, 11;
1; 37, CŚ, 2° ; MK, 11"." ; RK, 16.
4 atlea, CŚ, 16"; UV, 24o ; 15, aff, m. a looking glass,
5 fta. tute or deprived of, KA, 5".
RK, 21". 55, not, is not, does not exist
55 51, 71f77, m. an unnon-existent, 1 , CÁ, 10“,
believer, BC, 31". MK, 6",", 7", 12°; 2 7, BC, 24", 27", 36', 61°; KA, 54;! Jos 35, trofa awoke, LV. B161?; NA,9"; MK, I kept watchful, LV. B22"7.

Page #463

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
419
མེས་ཁ་
1
28°
དམན་པ་ FINA, gayen, m. fore-fathers. 959 3V, zły, deplorable, BC, RK, 24.
191 B, at, f. a woman, CŚ, 140,4 59'57'210958, fatatur, n. the
name for the final liberation in 55Ò, gufu, even though, Buddhism, LV, C1o3. PD, 12".
J'59, , m. a desert, BK, 91°. 3:58, 1 gitti, m. sorrow, grief,
$9, 461, m. n. a sprout, BC, BC, 18“,•. 42“ ; UV, 24, 4, (alfa14, inf. to regret), BC, 18" ;
359, adv. quickly, 1 y, 2 peza, affliction is felt.
NB, 6. 1; 2 fan, BC, 52" ; BC. 24".
3 a, PD, 290; 4 pita, BC, 5159.998, frau, see next, CŚ, 3".
Yay a5, adv. afta, in HE7:3539, faaiz, n. CŚ. 3o. quick manner, LV. Bo.
59'59950's, farafu, C$, 21. 5805, 12, m. a low, man, PD, 498956, 214, m. sorrow, (lit.
58179, low, inferior, 1 tea, FRITA, n. a cause of sorrow). I
BK, 64; 2 Eta, LV. C1"?; BC, 304
UV9a. '57'3, 11=2, deplorable, BC, 580578598, quina, made 184.
low, BK, 17o.
see next,
554.

Page #464

དམར་པོ
420
VOCABULARY །
སྨུག་རྩི་ 987bt, ya, m. red colour, $758181969, 144, n. darkness, BC, 49o.
KA, 4". 50759, red 1 59, NA, 8o; 2 $5, faragt, (*fafeph), f. blame, maifea, RK, 12. 34.
UV, 214 50159 85, f. redness, $5751, facel, f. blame, UV, 20. BK, 17.
$5445999, (lit. faccata, to be g&941, 1 14-a, n. suppor- blamed), fafea, blamed, ting, MK, 2°, 8"; 2 sqafen, UV, 194 f. perception, understanding, 35-45 RN, fara, deserving KA, 8o.
blame, NA, 5'. 59 2 5-91, zalettera, with
$9, medicine, 1 199, n. CŚ. out supporting, MK, 8^,.
89, 10; KP, 1. 1 ; PD, 130 ; 2 5521A, 7*, m. the hell, BK, 96, n. PD, 14", 1", 15° ; PD, 19o.
$975, farcima, without medi#, werk, m. a peacock, LV.
cine, PD, 17". B914
n. a Lamboo, UV, BIH, ana, being like a 120 dream, BC, 48“.
ÀI, 4, f. Úrow, NA, 2". VO, ATE, m. delusion, PD. 10.
alam, m. red lac used

Page #465

སྨོད་པ
by women to dye the soles of the feet, NA, 8°.
I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
5*9°55′933°9, afara, with
reflection, censure, NA, 13, 5.
farfa, UV, 18".
18,0.
√fare to blame,
fa, to blame, UV,
,, n. supplication,
RK, 33.
སྨོས( pf. and imp. of སྨྱོ་བ, to
call, assert, VT, to say), 1 आरोचयति स्म, said, LV. B2022 ;. 2, imp. say, NA, 7".
- उमेस, 1 का कथा, what word (lit. say what is necessary), BC, 27" ; CS, 16; 2 fga:, how much more, BC, 27", 49"
Va, Va, to say, speak),
སྨྲའོ
if, I shall speak, BC, 37, 38; 2, pt. pl. speaking, a speaker MK, p. 176; 3 af, a speaker, BK, 8". मान, पाठक, reading, talking, RK, 14.
421
;
√ √ Va, etc. to say, speak, pf., imp. N, 1 कथयेत्, opt one may say, BC, 40, 2, pt. pl.. saying, NBT, 9.4; 3 ब्रूयाम्, opt. I may say, BC, 39; 4 , pt. pl. speaking. a speaker, BC, 42; NBT, 10. 3.
སྨྲ་བ་པོ, 2༞, m.
10. 6.
10. 2.
,,inf. to say, NBT,
a speaker. NBT,
NA. 13o.
, to be said, BC, 24". (and 2), uf, I say,

Page #466

422
VOCABULARY
སྨྲས་
. 152 9, said. 1 wma, BG, 1 ; WW *mes, say (imp.), to be said, 2 saa, LV. B12" ; 3.-57,1 BC, 38". LV. A510, B20'' ; 4 916:, LV. a, e, imp, say. LV. B B20! ; 5 JA, NA, 2.6; 6 1317. 09r. BC, 60“, BK, 70 ; 7 THÀ, EV, B13' ; 8 xfurn, one who says, speaking. talking. UV,
$950 967, m. n, sandal, BK, 186 : 9 art, speaking, talking. UV, 186.
29* ; NA. 7. 19. 84.
. 1 -Ara, an affix in the sense $196, 197, BC, 12%.
of measuring, as much as, NV, said, 1 gata, BC, 4", BC, 14; NA. 13. 26 ; 2 ma,
62* ; 2 want, LV. B 14" ; mere, only, PD, 12° ; 3 Aren, 3 atra; LV. A Il”; 4 amheten a measure, PD, 15". ATA, addressed, LV. B" ; 916, JH09, ha, n. mere, only, Cs, LV, A 32), 4", 6", 8, 98, 10%, B7o ; 5 ga, LV. A92, NBT. 9.7 8 A, mention, PD, 120 84225, fakit, m. a mon1 alfa, NA, 9.4 ; 8 t, pt. astery, BK, 29€. pl. saying, BC, 13" ; 9 427, 477 Juta, n, (i) the chief you should say. BC, 51“; 10 a fe minister of a king, NA, 7. 3 ; imp. say, BC, 52" ; NA, 34. i (ii) main, NA, 12. 5.
1o.

Page #467

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
-
423
423
གཙོ་བོ་
བརྩོམས་པ
175235, mea, n, authority, l 59, 67, pungent, unpleasant, supremacy, PD, 5".
PD, 304 7521953, afananai, we two
F, 49, the uppermost part, wait (in the sence of afa
point, top. NA, 13. 2. qrafia:, we two shall wait ). | 599, 1 17491, one that has NA, 12. 14.
begun, NBT, 12.4; 2 ARTEH, 989, para, praise-worthy, BC,
m. a beginning, BC, 52" : 339.
3 Arauta, to be begun, NBT,
5.3 ; 4 27197, m. action, NBT, ASTIÀ Rás, 4:59, n. the
10. 6. harem, inmates of the female
9851939:45, ARFFT, apartment, the ladies taken together, BC, 37o.
the state of what is to be be5, , n. a root, UV, 21".
gun, NBT, 6. 1.
AFAN (or FAYD, pf. of Farsi FA, Ta, n a root, origin, basis, text, BK, 5o ; MK, p. 176 ; UV. AVTH, to begin, ft. AF HV, imp. 10.
FAVD) Ad, is begun, NBT, F, pi, m. the kuśa grass, NA.
7. 18. 11.4; 1 qu, grass, NA, 12%.
FAH!, afaqa, bound, con9191,964, n. a wall, LV. B 9*,
nected with, (lit. ETTET, begun), NA, 2. 9.
1013

Page #468

424
VOCABULARY
བརྩེ་བ་ Afa, f. love, affection, kindness, affectionate. 1941, f. BG, |
$4,1 4, m. heat, LV.B 9o ; 2 1° ; 2 FI, NA. 109; 3 feet, BC, 41° : 4 , m. BC, 240,41 JH, not, BK, 5". 27", 316, 44*, 509, 51°.
SERV*1, 407, m. the creator. AF985, arte, m. the want of 61°275 85951, agraf, n. celeaffection or love, BC, 15“. bacy or the duties of a religious 25farebu, unkind, cruel,
student, LV.C 120. NA, 1o.
65 W, mro, n. evidence; the A*, fango, unkind, NA.
means of arriving at correct
knowledge, NB, 18. I, 20.1, 13.6.
26. 1. 9891916, FATA, n, activity, 65, ag, hot, BK. 30. assiduity, UV, 8“.
• .
SM, 97, n. a forest, BK, 11', 27555*29, qanfra, energetic,
144. 16°, 30°, KA, 1*. diligent, PD, 24".
79), a sentence, speech, word, 985801, (+#aa) ja, ( always ).
197, n, NA, 10“; NBT, 10.4, active, BK, 26,
5, 12. 1 ; 2 aifea, n. BC. 42° ; I VET, to give, 1 Eife, LV.
3709, n. LV. 162, 18* ; 4 2771, 1725; 2 dfe, LV. 14”.
n. BC, 134. 25° ; BK, 14" ; NA, , vat, to give, reg (for
10. 4. 12°; PD, 36, 284 ; 5 ar, FIT), to give, LV. B 14". i f. BC, 25° ; KA, 34, 9.

Page #469

425
I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
425
ཚོགས་པ་ 57°25, 9219at, f. a series of Va, zita, n. religious or words, KA, 10",
moral behaviour, CŚ, 17",". 599, VE, passive, to be 327975, afast:, adv. wisely. burnt, 1 gafa (passive), UV,
properly, KP, 4.2. 24" ; 2 TTATA, being burnt, BC. 369.
4790735, gera, n. being $7:4575, quà, is being burnt of three kinds, NB. 27. 1. BG, 34.
5, 9, m. time, PD, 34, 76. RK, 579135*35°4, #f*T, f. the 20, 29.
concise statement in verse, g1985, afharra, unmeasurMK, p. 176.
ed life, LV. B 15". 3914957, ga, n. a verse, KA.
TH, FRITA, m. thorn, PD, 28". 114,6 *, 474, ind. sufficient, UV, 59N, a group, multitude, 1 tu,
m. BK, 284, LV, B 209, NA,3''. $99*952JT @5, 42T, 9. 9; 2 farqe, m. BK, 12°; 35,
i
n. PƏ, 54; 4 may attack, LV. B 154,
, m. BK, 99,
27o ; 5 YAR, m. BK, 30". 65, E, here. NA, 8. I, 10. 1. 12. 7.
414, 1 ura, collected, BK, 33, 164, n. form. kind. NB. 15“; 2 AE, a multitude, NA,
25. 2; 2 HET, like. BC, 41. 2. 5, 10.
6.

Page #470

426
VOCABULARY
འཚལ་ 5. Agea, n. decoration, dress, H65A, fafiri, m. wonder, surparticularly of an actor, NA, prise. NA, 2o. 2. 16.
H EN, 1 ga, ind. like, PD, 80 ; 35, sala fi, perceived or felt,
2 ##, equal, like, NA, 7" ; LV.B 1918
3 FETT, n. (lit. HeX ), re. SA, 1, f. feeling, KP, 5. 21. semblance, PD, 306. got, 1 faxr, f. the night, BK, SENSI, -347, like. BC, 62o. 3; 2 , n. a mark, charac
46738*9475, 7447 teristic, LV. A 138, 14.
immediately contiguous, NB, go95, 1 , n. characteris- 9.2. tic, KA, 2“; NB, 16. 12. 1.
15, na, n. a lake. pond, RK, 16. 1 ; 2 truca, n, the state , n. a lake. of characteristic, NB, 15. 1. I 21“, 66781, 1 *#467, visible, NA. | 59, 1 afga, noticed, perceiv10"; 2 fere, n. a mark, BC, ed. NA, 9, 11 ; 2 Tak, is 599 ; 3 fafael, n. an omen, NA noticed, perceived, NA, 9. 9, 8.3.
11. 5. HÁTB, urfa, f. the night, Lv. 16g*994, Ta, n. a weapon.
KP, 3. 1, Hás. 2, joint, evening, $I, V , to wish, desire, BC, 65.
(also to beg, beseech). (in con
B3.

Page #471

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
འཆ་བ
nexion with other verbs it denotes the sense of Sanskrit potential mood, vidhi-lin.] 1f, I desire, LV. B 148; 2, m. desire, LV. A 337. m. mischievious,
, हिंसक, UV, 23.
२ळें व उल, हिंसक, m. injurious, mischievious, UV, 23.
འཚེ་བ་བྱེད་པ,fa,
cruel, BC, 61".
injurious,
'', af, not injurious, not mischievious, UV, 22.
38 ̈Â5′4, afg'az, m. not mis
chievious, UV, 23°.
35 (38, vata, to live, pf. and imp. ), :, we live, UV, 23, 24".
,, m. subsistence, LV
C 23; 2, m, life, BK,24".
མཛེས
427
,, wise, PD, 9o.
མཛད ( མཛད་པ is hon. for བྱེད་པ √, to do, imp. 5), 1 af, you do, NA, 3.8; 2
, aorist, 3rd pres, dual, they two did, BC, 64"; 3, imp. do, LV. B1220; 4, done, BC, 35; 5 if, imp. 2nd pers. sing. do, LV. B 121o.
, 1, creating, producing, NBT, 1. 16; 2, n. making, NBT, 10. 28, 11.20; 3, done, NA, 2. 10; 4
, a leader, guide, UV, 15. 2,1 f, dear, NA, 7. 20; 2 f, n. a friend, PD, 26°. HEN, 1 beautiful, (i),
BK, 16; (ii), KA, 7°

Page #472

428
VOCABULARY
མཛེས་པ
2 gitara, look beautiful PD, 22. ENSI, 1 #fa, f. beauty,
... BK, 21" ; 2 fa, vb. shines, NA, 6" ; 3 HATET, pleasing. BK, 28"; 4 ETAT, beauty, BK, 27" ; 5 gifra, decorated, beautiful, BK, 197; 6 957,
beautiful, LV. A1322 HEY'N, Fang, n, beauty,
BK, 18“. མཛོད (imp. of མཛད, to do), Preta, vb. let (him) do.
RK, 28. KG 8, tree, imp. let one
get it done, (here the causative sense is not intended) lit. do (imp); (with rājya) rule.
LV. A625. BETH, 79, n. fear, CŚ, 20“.
འཇུམ་ REI, holding, catching, 1 AET,
n. RK, 15; 2 ETU, n. RK,
27. BETY, 11 Ja-Vae, to hold,
support), Jan, n. holding, supporting, NA, 2.8; 2 (39FH-V E, to collect), JTHITE, m. collection, BK, 28° ; 3 (VE, to receive, take), BT, n. taking, KP, 3.1; 4 ( 271, to hold), puta, one should hold, BC, 400," : 5 (Vy, to bear), , bearing, having, BC, 34°; 6 (Vaz, to carry), afeca, carrying, NA, 7. 19. gĚT359, (W21, to hold), fun,
pt. pl. holding, NA, 12*. BEW, fa, n. a smile, NA, 2". R$ 55"AJN, afara, with a
smile, NA, 6. 8.

Page #473

1. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
429
T
འཇོགས་དེ་ BEAN 5 (E27 pf. of
59777, 91-V FF, to climb up. ascend), su, gd. having
climbed up. NA, 8. 2, 3. :- - BENN, ( pf. of RÉF, 94-91
V77H, to come together). HAT
Tefa, RK, 30. 29, 98, m. n. mud, UV, 10'.
LV. A14""; MK. p. 176 ; UV, 14.
N551 TN, xaa, (for Arya), m. UV, 15".
ÈS I. FH, n. a lake, pond,
BC, 576. 992, a miracle, 1 nga,
RK, 30 ; 2 #fa, f. RK, 16. 15, faqezi, ind. falsehood, false
NA, 14,9%. 988 9589, Hafa, f. perfect wisdom, LV. CI".
1 KATU EQ 250°HV, mote, m.
fully awakened or enlightened;
IV, TT, m. a noose, BK,
180; RK, 16. qan, the leg. 1 cm, m. n.
BK, 20" ; NA, 3. 14. 5. 4,6" ; 2 977, m. BC, 35, 53€, BK,
23° ; NA, 2. 4. QA, the face, mouth, LV. A345. Q2153577, da, m. a leader,
PD, 5". Â, (277, to be peaceful or calm).
1 mafa (fararefà, is kept off), PD, 134 ; 2 A, m. calmness, absence of passions, PD, 11"; RK, 31 ; 3 d, adj. calm,

Page #474

430
VOCABULARY
ཞི་བ
m. one who has subdued one's passions, BK. 8; 4, f. tranquility, calmness, PD, 27; 5 f, n tranquility, adj.
tranquil, auspicious, CŚs, 18";,, gd. having en
tered, NA, 12. 15.
MK, p. 176; 6, gentle. BC, 61°.
बु| ঘ, यान, n. a vehicle, NB.
6. 2.
q, çfa, sink down, BG, 2°.
q, fa, pt. pl. being cast
down, BG, I".
ཞུ་བ,
G
( pf. of to ask. request, petition), , asked, RK, 29.
fa, a ptcl. generally used to report the very words spoken or supposed to be spoken by some one, BC, 21°, LV. B 2027.
Q''55'988, audia, respectful
LV. A8".
§, 1, calmed, PD, 11a,"; 2 f, propitious, auspicious, UV, 11; 3, gentle, BC, 5", 50".
ཞི་བར་འགྱུར;
, (शम्, to become
quiet), M-fa, BK, 5'; PD, 30. **,, quelling, allaying, BK, 22d.
5, 1 ptcl. See PD, 22a, p. 241 ; 2, n. a field, KP, 2. 1, 3.
9, fa, to be informed, re
quested, BC, 236.
,, m. n. a case, BC,56".
ཞེ་ས་དང་བཅས
(pf. and imp. of 254,
-√fat, to enter. ft, 49 ),
afaifa, enters, NA, 3. 4, 4. 2.

Page #475

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
ཞེས
གཞན
ཞེ་ན. above, BC, 4°; ཞེས་བྱའོ( བྱའོ i བྱ and འོ, )
, fa, see BK, p. 151; CS, 3, 5, 10".; KA, 11; LV, A 210, 36,38, 131, B 2018; NA, 3, 9, 7. 17, 11, 13,25; NBT, 10. 12; RK, 23, 29, 33.
बेश ণ, 1 -आख्य,
called, BK, 30";
2 इति, BK, 7 14 : 3 नामन् n. a name, BK, 2a.
', 1 fa, MK, 7o; NA, 2. 17; 2, ind. by name, indeed, BK, 4; CS, 19; NB, 22. I; RK, 2.
'', 1 fa, LV. A 1428; MK, 10; NA, 7. 5; NBT, 2. 1, 10. 4, 5; 2, ind. by name, BC, p. 113; CS, 10. KP, p, 183; NA, p. 33, 2. 10, 3. 5; NB, p. 154.
431
ཞེས་བྱའི་བར་དུ་འགྱུར་བ, (rfa) wrw
a, till this, LV. A 1432.
1 इति, LV C 726 2 उच्यते, (it is) said, KP, 4. 4, 5. 1, 6. 4. 7. 3, 8. 2, 10. 2; LV. C 40, 519.
,, f. milch, RK, 14.
(√
to ride, mount), f, gd. having mounted, LV. B 2213. 9. other, 1. BC, 6", 24". 49°; LV. A 1419; NA I. 6. 7. 14; NBT, 4. 2, 12. 4; PD, 8": UV, 13; 2, BK,32°; KP, 5. 1, 6. 1, 7. 1; LV. B 1716; 31, moreover, besides, LV. B 82; 4, NA, 7a, PD, 4a, 191.
9, 74, m. the interest of another, adj. intended for another, NA, 7. 7,
གཞན་གྱི་དྲིང་མི་འཇོག་པར་འགྱུར་

Page #476

432
VOCABULARY
གཞན་ཡང་
a, atata, not to be led or 199, deu, m. young, R.
guided by others, LV. A 14**. 9059, gare, m. a prince, BC 999505, besides, moreover, !
5to, 64* ; BK, p 37 ; KA. p. I.
LV. A 5,0...'OB 1 977, RK, 35. 2 $11977, NA, 1. I.
@ga, a girl, an unmarried 999 W, faszt, m. another girl, 1 F79FT, f. NA, B. 7, 9, country, PD, 24".
2 HIFT, f. NA. 20. 6; 0799*29, from other, 1 ma,
3 an (T), NA, 31 22 CŚ, 22" ; 2 gara, MK, 1o.
978993, 9417, m. with 54,
99HT, m. very delicate, BK, 492125 R5, fahrat, m. n. the castle in the air, a palace with
Agar 95 3, sedan, to be struck, seven stories, BC, 28".
PD, 74. 99,9h, n. residence, home,
| བཞག ( pt. of འཇོག་པ, to place. BC, 30, 516
put, fut. གཞག, imp. ཞོག), 119, a bow, 1 trista, m. n.
fulfia, established, NA, 87" (here the bow of Arjuna), BG,
AQT98, artan, gd. having 30; 2 979, m. NA, 2o ; 3 99,
placed, NA, 3. 1. n. BC, 610
Aq, four, 1 uge CS. p. 166; qui , mai, imp. wait, | LV. B 142, 2712 ; MK, 1 ; LV. A 100
2 Taifa, LV 728, . 3. C?,

Page #477

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
433
433
བཞིན་
ཟས་གཙང་མ་ aqq, 1 4742, aparta accor- ag76°45 T5 $5. FETTE,
ding to, RK, 29, 33; 2 dwelt, UV, 15". 57, ind. like, BC, 4", 13°, 26",
995, 1 25a, n. purpose, LV. 31", 32", 34°, 35", 36", 38, 56",
A81' ; 2 -FE (FEET), longing, 65°; BK, 17", 18", 19", 20", 21";
desire, BC, 66". NA, 7. 20. 9.9, 114,6,9, 12"; UV, 3*, 10. 26' ; 3 TUT, PD. 3'!; 4
a@g(@")=1*21599. Hafta, -17, an affix denoting resem
addicted to any vice, BC, 3.4". blance, PD, 26. 9375, like, 1 5, BC, 2°,", 54',
29, 91, pr. pl. oozing, NA. 8". 57" : BK, 169 ; 2 -27, PD, 10'.
35941, 1774, m. loss, UV, 22" ; pa *, 47, n. the face,
2 tu, exhausted, PD, 18". BK, 16*.
35, , n. cooked food, food, བཞུགས་པ (hon. for སྡོད་པ and PD, 15..
357°29, to sit), farefa, dwell, / 39*), straste, deep, KA, 12'. reside, UV, 15".
30, TIF, m. a mouthful, fooil. 9978*45*45, desit, remained,
PD. 15*. BC, 13",
352, **17, m, one who 1971'4995, fafccn.ca,
gives food, PD, 25o. will dwell, UV, 15".
9 75501, Talc, n. the name
54.

Page #478

434
VOCABULARY
ཟིལ་ ཟློས་གར of the father of Gautama; ཟླ་བའི་དེད་དཔོན, ཞགཤིའི་6, m. • Buddha, LV. A 2•་ 321, 4°, 61.. |
proper name, RK, 20. 7,9*, j21:, B 24. 33, 12.20*, 2it, 227.
ཟླ་བའི་འོད, མི་ནུའt, f. moonlight; ཟིལ་གྱིས་གནོན་པ,ཀའ་, pr. ptcl. BK, 12.. threatening, BK. 17.
ཟླ་བའི་སེང་གེ, =fཞིg, m, a proཟུག་རྔ, Iལ, n. pain, a spear, per name, RK, 20. shaft, PD, 28.
ཟློག( ཟློག་པ, to drive back, ཟུམ་པ, hlཊིའ, closed. NA. 11.5.
prevent, pt. ཟློགས, ft. བཟློག ) ཟེར, said, called. RK, 29. 1 ཚགffe, overcomes, ( #drid ཟོལ, Am, m. pretext; pretence,
prevents), UV, S°; ༣ ནང་, NA. It.
prevention, s, 6°; 3 ཞིཞིག་, ཟོས་པ (ཟླ་བ, to eat, pf. བཟསand
m. reverse, change, BC, 9'. ཟོས, imp. ཟོས), {fee, crushed,
ཟློག་པ, མ་, n. prevention, Cs, NA, IL 4. ཟླ, ཞ, m. ཐ month, BK, 3I.. | ཟློག་བྱེད, R , ceasing to cease, ཟླ་བ, the moon, 1 , m.BK, | C, 5". 16•; 2 ཁ, m. BC. 40° ;| ས་གར, 1གཞན, n. a drama • འ, NA, 14.
NA, p. 33: 2 .j0 ; , མ, n: ཟླ་བ་སེང་གེ, , n: proper | dranatic representation, NA. name, RK, 34.
35.

Page #479

ཟློས
I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
श, नाटय, imp.
NA.
represent dramatically,
2. 15.
श, नाटयितव्य, to be
represented dramatically, NA, 3. 5.
ཟོས་བཞིན ( ཟླ་བ རློ་བ, ཟློས་པ, t。 བཟླས and བཟློས, ft. བཟླ,
say, tell, pf.
imp. 4 ), विलपत् pr. pl.
saying, lamenting, BC, 67.
मात्रै ९८"भूम, -तेजस, bri
llant, LV. A1329.
or
གཟིགས་ནས( གཟིགས་པ, ༧༥, अव-√लुक्, to see, hon. for མཐོང་བ and ལྟ་བ ), egt, gd,
having seen, BC, 2°; 59°. 3⁄4'', d, pf. saw,
BC, 1".
བཟུང
, afflicted, troubled, 1 M,
NA, I"; 2, BK, 6".
གཟིར་གྱུར་པ,
BK, 4.
435
C
fifa, afflicted,
, 1 fa, m. n. a reflection, KA, 5; 2, n. colour, beauty, KP, 5. 1 (physical elements); NA, 13. 18; PD, 22* ; RA. 1, p. 1991.
मानुभव, रूपवत्, beauti
ful, PD, 20".
मातुर, दुर्निग्रह, difficult to control, UV, 25".
', a, m. old, aged, LV. A31.
, good, nice, excellent, 1, CS, 11'; 2, LV. A1313; NA, 7. 19; 3, LV. BI5'; 4 सु-, BC, 36"; BK, 4".
བཟུང (འཛིན་པ,Vམཛཱ,Vg, to hold,

Page #480

436
VOCABULARY
བཟུང
seize, pf. བཟུང or ཟུང་
གཟུང་
while occurs in all tenses), 1 :, pf. held, BC, 58; 2, held, BC, 6"; 3, being held, BC, 10"; 4a, held, BC, 45".
,, m. holding, NA, 7, 20.
5', mefaga, inf. in order to make one hold, CS, 9",". पशु, धारयितव्य, to be held,
accepted, PD, 19".
བཟོད, ཝ༥,
48d.
ft.
bearable, proper, BC,
, विनिवृत्ति f. removing, BC, 14, pf. pl. warding off, preventing, BK, 21".
བཟློགས་ནས, with the prefix
, fa, gd. having dismissed, sent away, BC, 65".
འོང་བ
འ
35, 1 af, ind. and, also, too, moreover, besides, sometimes indicates possibility (sambhāvanā), BC, 27; CS, 12',; PD, 9, 21, 29; UV, 18; 2, ind. and, also, too, BG, 3"; UV, 18.
2, 1, ind. or, PD, 2; 2 or, NA, 13. 21; 3
आहो,
ind.
, ind. 13. 20; 4, ind. or,
BC, 37, 40","; LV. B 1913; NA, 13, 12; PD. 9".
लाभ, अस्मद्, pers. pron. we, RK, 31.
, 94, n. milk, PD, 27o.
शर्मा'नु, अनन्तर,
179,0.
2.535, अनन्तरं च, and after,
2
adv. n. after, UV,
UV, 17b,c.
འོང་བ (pf. འོངས, imp. ཤོག),

Page #481

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
437
འོང་བ་
འོས་པ་ 21-V774, to come, ofa, ft. 2535, F18219, n. a proper will come, BC, 52".
name. K.; l. 1, 2.1, 3. 1. 4. BE95501, HATTA, without 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. 1, 6. 1, 4, 7. 1, 3. coming, MK. P, 176.
8. 1, 2, 9. I, 10. 1, 2, p. 183. 35V, 1 siva, come, arrived, - 37*05,1 fare, ind, moreover,
2. 3, NA, 4"; 2 Tit, went; BC, and again. BK, 32" ; 2 ffing, 60%.
ind. but, NA, 11, 4, 13. 2. GEV, 1 ra, come, arrived. 2955, , ind. (in the sense of
NA, 2. 3 ; 2 Alha, n. coming, Tel, afé, ), then, LV, B14'*. LV. B 191
2555 3a, ind. and, also, yet, 25. a ray, beam of light, 1 siy,
never the less, MK, 4'. m. BK, 28“; 2 ziya, m. BK, 31o; 3 H, f. LV. B4", 10'; 4 THT,
Žy, 1 (V me, to be worthy of, f.LV, B5*, 68, 9".
to deserve), (i) fa, UV, 21". 35*35, fa, f. (one with) lustre, (ii) Efe, BC, 16", 184, 316, 32". NA, 136
33", 34'' ; 2 (Nyct, passive, to 350, ay m. a bamboo, BK,
be fit), grua, BK, 25". 30'.
ZAVO, (VSTÉ , to be worthy of, to 3525, xg, m. a ray, lustre, deserve); 1 af, deserving, BK, 12.
BC, 28°; 2 sefa, BC, 394 ; 352555*25*, -*T, having 3 sfera, fit. BC, 37" ; otra, fit, a lustre. BC, 574.
NA, 11. 1.

Page #482

438
འོས་ཡིན
रेश. ((अर्ह,, to be ht). अर्हसि,
BC, 35".
'देश''मर्, कृतयोग्य, one who has
done what is good (lit. योग्यभूत, one who has become fit or worthy), LV. B21".
W
VOCABULARY
P
ཡང་དང་ཡང་དུ
etc.; LV. B21, C212, etc.; MK, 9; 3, ind. BC, 20°, 50°; NA, 6. 4, 7. 8; NBT, 5. 3; PD, 15,
20°; RK, 2 ; 4 पुनर ind. KP,
5. 1, 6. 1, 7. 1; 5, a prefix, with. together with-, thoroughly, very much, etc., BC, 46", 56"; ind. thoroughly, completely, C$,
11 KA, 6".
W ̈NG3⁄4 ̈ÂN'¶5, fafafennà, (pf.
of fa-fe, 2nd to wonder, pers. du), wondered, BC, 64". W*H3⁄4°55'3', afat, with surprise, NA, 13. 15.
WC, and, also, too, again, but; 1 f, ind. BC, 9o, etc.; BK, I", etc.; CS, 2", etc.; KA, 3", etc.; KP, 2. 1, etc.; LV, etc.; MK NA, 5.
B171, C 415, 2, etc.; PD, 15a
ཡང་དག་པར་གནས,
समधिष्ठित,
29, etc.; NB, 26. 1; NBT, 5. 12, etc.; UV, 22; 2, ind.
governed, guided, NA, 7. 3.
BG, 2o, 3o; BK, 1o; KA, 11, 55, 99'87, ind. fre
5, 4, m. restraint,
UV, 8;
, 1, right, KP, 4. 2, 3, 4, 5. 1, 6. 1, 4, 7. 1, 3, 8. 2, 10. 2; NB, 11. 1; 2, per fect, right, correct, LV. A 1439, C229, 31, 33, 35, 37, 39 41, 43 714, NB, 1. 1, 2. 1; NBT. 2. 1, 7. 6, 8. 4, 9. 21, 11. 1, 12. 8.

Page #483

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
ཨང་ན
quently, repeatedly, BC, 67".
or, 1, ind. NA, 3. 14, 13. 22, 23; 2 a, ind. BC, 20', 52","; UV, 26".
W5'395'3, Maria, ( oafat, f. ),
leading to re-birth. LV. C5. WN,, long, BK, 161.
ཨན་ལག, ཐཱཝཱ, n· a member or part or portion, a limb, LV. A 130, C78; NA, 2°; RK, 30.
, af,
fold, UV, 11.
439
WA, (hon. for ), father. 1, m. NA, 3. 8, 6, 7. 8, 10, 11, 15: 2 f, NA, 6; RK, 28, 29. W’H‍Ã, uafqz, m, the father
king, RK, 3.
Wq, faą, (du. num.), parent, the father and the mother. NA, 3. 11.
w¶, af, f. fuel,specially
ཡིད་ནི་གཙོ་བོ
sacrificial sticks for the sacred fire, NA, 7. 13, 10. 5. w', afe, m. lit, one with branches, i.e. a tree, NA, 11.
57, पल्लव m. n. a sprout. twig with leaves, BK, pp. 137 151.
, used after a vowel it indicates the genitive case, PD. 9".
eight, the mind. 1, n. BG,
4 KP. 7. 2; NA, 2. 17 NB, 9. 3; NBT, 1". PD, 3"; UV, 26","; 2 मानस, n. KA, ".
सै মर्मोাस,
मनोभव, mind
born, but lit., swift as the mind, UV, 26".
the ́ ́, ma, beautiful,
LV. BIO'.
मार्के में, मनःश्रेष्ठ, that of which the mind is pre-eminent.

Page #484

440
VOCABULARY
ཡིད་འཕྲོག , ་་ ཡུད་ 52317.gifer (lit. HateFG) 21", 22", 27" ; (ii) vafa, NBT, (heart-) stealing, pleasing, NA: 1
9. 43, 10. 59 ; (iii) #19: PD, 3".
16''; 3 v far, faaa, UV, 19. 5:35, ERHATH, depressed in 1915. 1 afa, pr. pl. of Ha, loc, mind, anxious, NA. 3. 8. (this) being, MK, 7'; 2 FE, 5'35'9. 1 afaz, disgust or opt. 3rd pers. sing. of V#4, weariness of the vanities of the to be, NBT, 5. 15. world, LV, C1 ; 2 fafaru, , (, to be), vara, KP. disgusted, NA, 5. 2.
2. 1. 8. 2, 9. 2; NB, 25. 2. 5.SE, GIKA, heart- stirring, a 9 , fa, ind. indicating a pleasant, PD, 3.
cause, because, lit. (it) being 5501, HTH, belonging to the (so), NB, 1. 2. mind, BK, 8".
. (personal pron. Ist pers., see waar? 7°N, HATT, W A, HATTET, ma
m. a next). 274, we, BK, 6'. desire, desired object, NA, 7*. W*34. (347is a plu. termination w to be, to exist, 10 27, (i)
of pers. pron.), 274, we, BK.79. fra, UV. 22°; (ii) =ff, BC,6";
WA, , m. the hilt of a sword, PD, 2° ; (iii) efa, BC, 20°; 2
BC, 56". N 4, (i) safa BC, 434,454, 46o.
W 937), 274, we. NA, 12. 8. CŚ, 64 ; KP. 2. 1; MK, 9'; NA, 36, 13. 19, 25 ; NBT, 9. 34, 12. 05. gadi, m. an instant, a very 18 : PD, 44, 10", 14", 16", 18", small portion of time, BC, 1".

Page #485

1. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
441
ཡུན་རིང་
ཡོངས་སུ་བཀུར་ནས་ wg fare, a long time, BC, fora, one who gives up, 16° ; NA, 13, 2, 12.
UV, 4o. wor (hon. for 3 ), the mother ; | WEVEH ( N is imp. of
1 4541, f. NA, 3. 8 ; 2 hĘ, f. 57, VHF, to abandon ), RK, 4, 28, 29.
परित्यजेत्, one should give up wal, a country, place, 1 itt, m.
(lit. qfar, give up). UV. 4". PD, 21" ; RK, 2; 2 faqe, im. WEAVE A399, Fifafa, CŚ, 18° ; NB, 9. 1, 12. 1, 17.1.
I am fulfilling. NA, 2. 16. yang 'AIN, AI, along
wvZAWRES, afegua, pr. with the kingdom, LV. B122.
pl. making perfect or comwan, sa, n. knowledge, wis- / plete. BK, 26. dom, KP, 1. 1.
WE'A3595, Agra, gd., w qariga, mifera, wise, KP, 1. 3. į having taken, BK, 14o. W5, Hei, capable, LV, B10". WEN'V, qf-, a prefix, fully, w51.455, 419, m, heat,
round, excessively, BC, 32" ;
BG. 34; BK, 4o ; NA, 7. 7, torture, BK, 9. 214.
13. 4 ; PD, 28". w y575, fecita, gd, wvY9°9'5 (afe v. having given up, PD, 8*.
Tu, to be thoroughly dried up), wad Y521°21. (FN is pf. of fagafa, BG, 2“.
59 V47, to abandon), afe-Wanyama 98 (WEVY'
55

Page #486

442
VOCABULARY
ཡོད་གྱུར
ཡོངས་སུ་བསྐྱོད་པ ། ams, afe-n gul, to pay WE'V'95959, aferen, to homage). *9feug, gd. having be avoided, PD, 28". received (in the sense of oft WENN $599, fator, m. en459, having paid homage), LV | A75.
joyment, NA. 7. 13. WEWY7959, afeget, very
WHVĚVAT84), afeges, agitated. NA, 7. 19.
let it be fulfilled. LV. B1878. WENY91575, qfarna, pr.
W HY'y'=575, qfata, exhauspl. walking about, NA, 3. 2. ted, PD, 11. WEHY'785. (afe V fee, to
WE'Nàqs, 1 qfaat, m. takcut completely), fexrefa (lit-qft
ing, KP. I. 3; 2 qfekta,
taken, KP, 1.1. fezafer ), cuts, LV. B18".
w5, to be, 1., (i) #fear, WENY'45570 (955, is pf.
BC, 7^ ; BK, 11"; CŚ, 14" ; of 1755.V 49, to abandon).
KA, 84; KP, 10. 1; NA, 14, afectiva, gd. having abandoned, 69,0,0,", 7.5, 13. 11; PD, 6" ; NA, 3. 11, 14.
UV, 21"; (ii) aa, pr. pl. exis
ting, MK, 6'; (ii) afra, CŚ, WEVH59', 4x4, m. fatigue,
10* ; MK, 4"; 2 V4, pac, exhaustion, NA, 7. 19.
LV. B1312; UV,6"; 3 V fac, WEW*V755, 414, m. heat,
faza, CŚ, 59, 12".
W5495, , UV, 6". torture, BK. 22".

Page #487

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
443
ཡོད་པ
གཡོ་བ W5957 (799, V, V force, to be, w5625, aha, existing and not
exist). 1 fee, LV. A14" : NA, existing, CŚ, 10° ; MK, 70. 6,7 ; 2 #1, m. existence, CŚ, WZO, qani, water offered at 200 ; 3 faad, exists, UV, 19o ; the respectful reception of a 4 ha, pr. pl. existing. MK, guest, LV. A7o. 6", 7", 8; NB, 14. 1 ; 5 ANI, w1959, Tu, m. merit. good, f. existence, MK, 10" ; 6 , advantage, KA, 80; NA, 34. n. existence, NB, 27. I, 28. 1.
W55929, Juan, endowed w5 , a faud, does not
with good qualities, BC, 33". exist, MK, 3".
757*31999, TUTO, possessing 215275905, Hafa, MK. 8". I
qualities, meritorious. LV. B
1019. w55107, afa, pr. pl. loc. (it)
559.215, date, absence of being. MK, 10.
good qualities, BC, 24o. w979q, 1 h, not exis
W559*85*31, da' me, absence of ting, CŚ, 54 ; 2 a (lit. wafa),
good qualities, BC, 38*. not, MK, 30; 3 affect, does not exist, MK, 24 ; 4 *faed ( lit. 5:59 985; THIS, apprecia
a facra ), do not exist, MK, 14. ting the merits (of others). w52g, 1 afara, not exis
NA, 3*. ting, MK, 34; 2 7, not, MK, Wa, 1 44-d, shake, UV. 14° ; 3 a faad, does not exist, ..-204; 2 727, inconstant, unMK, 106.
steady, BC, 21°.

Page #488

444
VOCABULARY
གཡོ་མེད་ W R15. fafera, not gone
away, steady, NA, 24. 9 92 , fata, covered, cloth
ed, BC, 65'. 971°315995, swyd, shakes. UV, 20.
à 9, raa, m. the son of Raghu, i. e. Rāma, the hero of the Rāmāyaṇa, BC, 36“. 15, self, own, one's own, belonging to oneself. 1 ATHI, BC. 30" ; NB, 10.1 ; PD, 186; UV, 34; 2a, BC, 30, ge, 174 ; LV. B.918 ; NB. 9. 1, 12. 3,1 24. 1 ; PD. 21° ; UV, 12°; 3
7, LV. B 34 ; 4 stel, RK, 36 ; 5 94, BC, 44"; NA. 7,8. 55", w, m. a kinsman,
relative, BC, 44".
59 5541259, anis, m. one's
own gain, UV, 13". 55.91°59, arsi, m, one's own in
terest, self-interest, one's own
object, NB, 25. 1. 35"B5, EU, n. one's
own characteristics, NB, 13. 2. 5505, 1 an, ind. of one's
self, by oneself, for oneself, BC. 104; 2 474, ind. oneself, in
one's own person, KA, 54. 55-979, ae, self-dependent,
confident, BC, 2, 42o. 559995. own state, nature, 1
tofa, f. BK, 4" ; PD, 30" ; 2
Eura, m. MK, 3*. 55.255, famura, without
nature, MK, 10%. 59, 1 57., ind. a prefix meaning
good, well, intensity, excellence, etc. UV, 26* ; 2 , m. excellence. NB. II. 1 ; 3

Page #489

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
445
རབ་ཏུ་གདུངས་ 59'5'5573-
9 80, fa. delighted, happy, NA. 10. 4. 195405, 9mifa, makes, LV.
B910 FA 5 *V*), slap, raised, in
creased, BK, 18". 59.5485, afera, s'own, KA,
10"
3, very clear. NA,
རབ་རྒྱས་ g, ind. a prefix expressing
excellence, well, BK, 4". SA 1, 1 399, opened, fully
blown. NA, 13". 2 sfha, raised, increased, BC. 36*. 59', farga, adorned, BK,
186. 599955 (955 pf. of 94735941,
v lete, to cut off). ferasta, pf.
cut off, BC, 57". 59'5' 1 37., ind. a prefix, up,
upwards, BC, 56" ; 2 1-, a prefix, good, well, very, excessive, BC, 68* ; 3 74, a pre
fix, thoroughly, PD, 196. 59'5 *Á*7*21505, [a]gand, is
being read (well), NA, 10". ***5ama , afas, cast away,
thrown away, BC, 58". 59579515855, afga, imp.
let it be fulfilled, NA, 13".
10". 59*5*55-58, meite, imp. be gra
cious or propitious, NA. 5. 3. རབ་ད་དྲིས ( དྲིས pf. of དྲི་བ་
Tere, to ask), 1998, pf,
asked, RK, 4". **75*7550V (9795 pf. of 9755'9, Vaq, to torment ),
#fa, drags away (lit. caufa, torments). BK, 18.

Page #490

investigation, examination, KP 2.1.
446
VOCABULARY རབ་ཏ་འདའ་བྱའི་ཕྱིར ་ རབ་ཏུ་སིམ་བགྱིད *95*998'g'ga, fata, 54°5*295'5, gafafea, well deopt. one should pass over,
termined or decided. BK, 32“. UV. 16°.
***FRPRIS, , pf. fell 59°5*34***35*91, afaraa, m.
down, BC,68".
315 5 A, sett, m. applica59'593751, miehifeta, Alapped,
tion, practice, KP, 4. 2. NĂ, 80.
50*5*5 A5 'JR, 94, (lit. 1A5'99, 9483, imp. give, BC, 921909), to be applied. KP, 61".
4.1. 59'5'350, wafa, pr. pl. loc. *95'', a, calmed, tran(lit. safta ), having renounced
quilized, NA, 10.7. the world.
54°5*9915, afara, gd. having 59'5'35'A, safsta, turned a re
entered, NA, 10. 1. 2. cluse, a religious mendicant, 59'54@, matea, imp. 2nd LV.CIS.
pers. sing, take, 62. 39.5 55 91, , n. a treatise F 59'5'
9 9, dshakes, UV (esp. introductory). MK, p.
204 176 ; NB, p. 154, 22, 1 ; NBT. 3. 1, 6. 1, 8.1, 10. 6, 10, 11. 2.
1. 2. 20°5"&"A 5, SETETÎ, delight4, 5, 12. 3,5.
l ing, LV, B 10“.
V

Page #491

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
-
447
447
རབ་ད་གསལ་བ
རི་མོ་ 3954021, #fa, manifes- 5 A, 47 , n. cessation, 'exted, NA. 12o.
tinction, BK, 10%. 595'995, wafaa, raised up, 59 599971, 9941, m. very deliNA, 11. 5.
cate, BK, 4". 59:59, 1 afaz, entered, BC,
5929, fafat, n. darkness, NB,
6. I. 15"; 2 pian, gained, obtained,
521, afir, m. a sword, BC, BC, 11".
56". 59 559, 997, pure, UV, 26“.
, a mountain, rock, 1 qaa, m. 598955, JEFF9, m. tremor, agi- NA, 7. 14, 19, 22 ; UV, 6" ; tation, NA, 2".
2 šia, m. UV, 20". 5959370, farge, pf. of 5914, a deer, a wild beast, 1
V face, to lick, licked, BC, 53'. $k, m. NA, 12" ; 2 a, m. 59.995, 35a, bright, BK, 2".
BC, 60“, 62" ; PD, 34 ; 3 Efra,
m. BC, 2" ; NA, 11. 4 ; 4 4197, 39*935, æfa, f. appearance, m. NA, 9.9. production, NBT, 1".
, 4a, m. a mountain, NA, 29959, T, employed, 84. KA, 6".
EDS, TX7, m. a hare. PD, 6“. 59 , ITH, m. cessation, ex l, a line. 1 tar, f. PD, 29" ; tinction, BIL".
2 later, PD, 296

Page #492

448
VOCABULARY
རི་མོ་མེད་པ
́ ́Â, and, without stri
-
རིགས
རིག་པ་དོན་གཉེར, faurfer
sirous of learning, PD, 23".
pes, RK, 21'.
·′,, m. honour, BC, farfar (lit. farar64a.
H), m. desirous of learning, PD, 23°.
ইभूक, विद्वस्, m, a learned
man, PD, 21".
(√fa,
to know), 1 af, NA, 5; 2 afa, NA, 5" ; 3 far, f. learning, KA, 12o.
ईमा'८८"भन, विद्वस्,
learned man, UV, PD, 24".
m. learned, a
fa, learned, PD, 21a.
learning. perception, knowledge, 1 far, f. PD, 23. 2, n. NA, 10.1.
2412'35, fat,
m. learned,
RK, 17.
25, fata, devoid of N, gafau, learned,
learning, PD, 22".
29'4'§5'8, faalqıą, m.
who gives learning, a teacher, PD, 25b.
one
m. de
ईमाप'वर्हेर्, विद्याधर, m.
of semi-divine beings, NA, 2. 9, 13. 22.
a class
धर, a semi-divine
NA, 4°.
PD, 20'.
ईमासे, सामंन् ( वेद ), the Veda,
NA, 10. 4.
ईमाम, विद्याधरी, f. of विद्या
being,
རིགས,
a family, caste, , n. BC. 10, 33°; NA, 13. 23; PD, 22; RK, 18, 21; 2 arfa, f. NA, 14; 3, proper, right,

Page #493

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
449
རིགས་པ
རེ་རེ་ལ་ LV. B12+2 ; MK, 9° ; 4 grud, I ET 5 1 , frauf, f. service, is right, MK, 74.
attendance, NA, 3. 14. 29 , 121, m. the science Collago. ute, a regular of logic, NB, 22. 1, p. 154.
order, UV, 3". NBT, p. 116 ; 2 y, right, CŚ,
ang, FHET, m. n a water-pot 22" ; 3 goud, is right, BC, 610.
(generally used by ascetics). 247° 295 (v ga, passive. NA. 10“.
to be right), gud, is right, NA, 55, 1 TFF (or gfara ), right, pro3.13.
per, UV, 26; 2 , fit, 247575 R5V 9, 7217, just, NA,
capable of, NB, 5.1.
5549, grà, is right, MK, 6". 25, 1 nafte, deep, LV. A 1452 ; 279, long, KA, 1".
3 7. 1 arth, so much, that 255'34*, riba, removed to
much. KA, 109; NA, 3. 8. 6.
4, 12. 14, 13. 13. 14. 14 ; 2 a distance, removed away,
7796, as much as, NA. 3. I, 5, NA, 7. 13.
16. 7. 16. 5:9, fare, long, LV. A6?'.
12:55, e., one by one, NA, *35, ta, n. a gem, BK, 2", 3". 284. 31" ; RK, 28.
F RI, 1 BATH, each, LV. B. FAI, #, m. a course, order, BK, 21" ; 2 giaxe, ind. singly, 27". NA, 4".
LV. B2193 56
7a.

Page #494

450
VOCABULARY
རེག་གྱུར
ལག་འགྲོ * T'JT 95, frunzt, pf. touched. troy, pf. 4575, fut. 237,
laid hands upon, BK, 54. imp. 397.) BK, 13". 577*55, neret, pf. touched, or 95355 AJN, TH, fresh, MA. laid hands upon, BC, 4*.
7. 19. 29. l, fazl, m. touch, RK, 23". agan, alfa, m. f. a wave, NA, 29:35Fazifa, touches, lays
hands upon, BK, 7": So , afeta, pleasing, char- 21. 1 ptcl. denoting the sense ming, NA, 12.
of 'where as’, PD, 30; 2 afa, TRUDI, afera, n. (atent, f.) sport, ind. meaning with regard to,' LV, p. 114.
‘about', BC, 434. Bount, afzal, n. a musical instru
21215, afz, ind. in some cases, ment, NA, 13. 2:
BC, 68",". 35, wind, 1 arga, m. NA, 7. 19 ; 1 7 . see a
2 aty, m. KP, 6. 3, UV, 20". 219, the hand, arm, 1 4, m. F'S, r, wet, RK, 35.
BK, 194; 2 , m. BC, 569;
BG, 3o ; NA, 13. 2. 43991, 71, m. an abode, resi- 21973, a serpent, 1 yar, m.
dence. (Tib. lit. destruction, BK, 3"; PD, 27° ; 2 FAFA, from རྨོག་པ or བརླག. to des་ | BK, 147.

Page #495

1. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
451
ལག་པ་
ལུང་པ
21972. the arm, hand. 1 4F, NA, 7. 19. 9.9. 12. 12 ; UV,
m. BC, 67" ; 2 fm, m. LV. 11",", 16"; 4 247, n. NA, 7" : A120.
PD, 4o. 215-5, 196, n. youth, NA, 50 ; ! 28. 1 , n. work, deed, PD, 11", 22".
BC, 8" ; RK, 32 ; 2 a post2500*25*, nagcarefa, till position generally indicative he will get up (25:9, JE VEST,
of the ablative case, PD, 9";
etc. to get up ; pf. 268, n. Fieta,
nj 299, Fja, m. the comgetting up; 95 5. 7197, till),
pletion of a work, occupation, LV, A107-8.
LV. C236 3985, TEXA, ind. frequently,
BUNJEN, -49, an affix indioften times, BC, 14".
cating 'made of', 'consisting 2177837 (215, feqqa, n.
or composed of,' BC, 27o. answer ; Ba= NV, M,
à 35, FARSHext, vermilionsaid). syara, pf. replied, BC,
like, RK, 12, 34. 25". qa, a way, 1 afar f. KP.
1975V, 1 72, m. a policy, way. 4. 2, 3, 4, 5. 1, 6, 1, 4, 7. 1, 3,
RK, 27, 30, 33 ; 2 ha, thought, 8. 2. 10. 2 ; LV. C24,23. 316, 75,
considered, BC, 47". 23 ; 2 ofera, m. BC. 194. 68o ; 3 35.91, #97, m. n. a cave, NA. Atif, m. KA, 9o ; LV. C78 ;| .8".

Page #496

452
ལུད
VOCABULARY
manure,
ལེན་པ
KP. 2. 35, wishing bliss, CS, 22".
गुरु, सङ्कर, m.
1, 3.
ind. LV. A1315; 3
;
, a limb, body, 1, n. BK, 3° 2 आत्मकाय, LV. C26 काय m. KP 7.2; 4 गाल, BG, 2; 5, f. LV. B97; 6 देह,m. BK, 1", 21* : 7 वपुस् n. BC, 60, 63; KA, 7; 8, n. BC, 13; 9 Û, n. BC, 67; BK, 8; BG, 3"; KA, 10. LV. A14; NA, 7.7; NBT, 3. 1.
n.
3, with the body, 1-, NA, 12°; 2 -वपुस्, LV. A134; NA, 2; 3, BC, 43°.
,, with the body, LV. A1318.
মা-মদ, अনন্ধ, m. body-less,
cupid, NA, 12°.
., a ptcl. good, excellent, much, very much, BC, 11°; PD, 25*.
, well, good, 1 सु-,
NA, 11"; UV, 17°; 2, n. NA. 12.10; 3 g, ind. LV.A711, 12. Âqa'45'958'", gføra, being in a good state, NA, 7. 3.
ལེགས་པར་སྤྱད་པ, རྩཞ, n.
any
good or virtuous act, UV, 17.
ལེགས་པར་སྤྱོད,
समाचरेत्,
should practise, UV, 6".
one
ལེགས་པར་འོངས, स्वागत, n.
wel
come, happy arrival, NA, 11".
,, m. a preceptor who performs the upanayana ceremony, Acārya, PD, 25a.
√, to take; with
9
गान, a song, √, to sing). 1 गायति, PD, 31; 2 यते,
B
NA. 12. 5.

Page #497

ལེན་པར་འགྱུར
ལེན་པར་འགུར (ལེན་པ, Vམཛཱ, to
take). f, NA, 7. 5.
, a chapter,. 1, n. BG, p. 152: 2 af, m. NB, 22. 2; RK, I: 3d, m. KP. p. 183, LV. A, p. 114. B. p. 121. C. p. 131; 4, BC, 113.
p.
,,n.a leaf, UV, 21".
ལོ་རྒྱུས་,
1. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
fa, f. story, account,
news, LV. B2011.
214. fayửa, verse, BC, 20".
CS, 3°.
m. contrariety, re
,falf, f. wrong view.
, fa, ind. false, UV, 9".
595, fafayıala
, inf. to cause to throw down, to destroy, (lit. fafaqa, throwing down, destruction). KP, 1, 1.
ཤཱཀྱ
ལོག་ཞྭ
595, fafaqia, m. falling
down, destruction, KP, 1. 3. , afa, slanting, NA, 2". ,, m. opportunity, occasion, a proper or opportune time, BC, 14".
ལོང་བ,
अन्ध,
453
m.
a blind man,
KA, 8".
ལོངས་སྤྱོད,
enjoyment, 1,
m. BG, 5 BK, 28, 30, 32": 2 सम्भोग, RK.
19.
√9
स, मांस, n. flesh, meat, RK. 35.
n. flesh and
सण, रक्तमांस, blood. RK, 36.
91, uprisen, LV. B6; 2 q, the east, LV.B21
नूD, शाक्य, m. the race to which
the last Buddha belonged,

Page #498

454
VOCABULARY
ཤཱཀྱ་གཞོན་ན
978 BK, 11"; BC, 60': LV. B 12.4 ; PD. 29'; 2 ITA, LV. 20* 2*, 21.
B16* ; 37, BC, 66". ; 4 ery, 9999999, FHM. m. the rightly, LV. A73, 1222. prince of the sākyas, LV. B 1 9952. TART, very great, 21",", 22.
RK, 30. 90 E91, mara, m. the 952', afaty, very broad, Sakyians, LV. B20'.
wide, NA, 10“. gån, ya, gono, dead, LV.
995*99*35*29, antirefes, B17”.
very violent, very daring, NA, g'a, ya, dead. NA, 5.2.
7.2. 95, a tree. 1 76, 'm. NA, 109; 955*215019, 74, ind. enough 2 CA, m. LV. B9* ; 3 464, m. of. no need of, NA, 2. 1. BC, 49o ; 4 TP, m. BC, 46": 1 995959, gga, very happy. LV.C 10" ; PD, 22.
UV, 234, 24", 955, m, m. a chariot, LV. Qg5 91657, Igaunis, n. tenB21","? ; RK, 35.
derness, (lit. ggur, very deliFy4HV, 94, thick. (lit. Ta
cate), BC, 28". . thick tree), NA, 7-19.. 1.9918. 1 am, m. force, LV. A 995, exceedingly, excessively,
141: 2 aamat, n. power, capawell, 1 sfa-, ind, a prefix, NA, city. NBT, 9. 39. 10. 15. 12.5.

Page #499

a
I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
གཤེགས
998*35, afx(41), powerful,|,, gd. having known,
RK, 36.
95,, f. bark, NA, 10",
वेरु'नु'भेर्य, न-मानव, m.
man, KP, 4. 4.
वेलेस मेय, न-मनुज,
not a man, KP, 4. 4.
q, 1, one who knows, BC, 40; RK. 15; 2 √, to know,, pr. pl., BC, 30" ;
, CS, 6; 3 √, to consider, H, PD, 11'.
ཤགས་ཅན
6
not a
455
m.
LV. A85.
ཤེས་པ, 1 -ཟླ, m. one who knows.
BK, 7; 2 knowledge, (i) A, n. KP, 3. 1; NB. I. 1. 2. 1, 6. 3. 8. 1, 11. 2, 13. 1. 18. 1, 25. 2; NBT. 2. 2, 7. 6, 8.5, 9. 16. 11 2, 12.9. (ii) fifa, f. NB, 5. 1; 3 af, one who knows, BC, 4b.
,, f. wisdom, PD. p. 1. 1; UV. 5".
ཤོག, (imp. of འོང་བ, - गम्.
,, having known, (lit. f, imp. know), UV, 16".
to come), 1, come, BC. 50; 2 gf, NA, 8. 1, 10. 1,
12. 7.
ཤེས་བགྱིས, ( ཤེས, it, n. know- གཤེགས, (itrepresenta both pre
ledge, བགྱིས is pf. of བགྱིད,
sent and past tenses, but mostly in the past tense, and means
√, to do), f, I know, UV, I".
, to go), 1 ₪π, NA, 3. 9 ; BK, 15; 2, BC, 63"; 3

Page #500

456
VOCABULARY
གཤེར་བ
སར Tait, BC, 654; 4 ara, NA, 3., 1:29. Tarca, n. the nether 11 ; 5 qfa, BC, 64", 66". I
world, one of the seven regi997:9, ure, moistened, wet. ons below the earth, NA, 14" NA, 10.5.
r a, yery, n. the three. 9.9971, , m, a wing, RK, worlds, (i. e. heaven, earth, 21*.
and the lower region), NA, 6'. 4-95. 1 foaia, it is remembered, 45NH, the Lord Buddha, 1 said, KA, 6o ; 2 pa, remem- , BC, p. 113, BĄ. g* : PD. bered, said, declared, CŚ, 7" : ! 6" ; 2 *#46; UV, 14*. PD, 25. 26.
15:21, 1 RU, n. awaking, 9N, faa, n. a friend, BC, 36".
LV. A13" ; 2 sfaga, awak
ened, LV. B5. the earth, lifafa, f. BC, 66"; 1196454796, ar, m. awaking NA, 5“; UV, 21" ; 2 gferat, (05039, awaking : 999975 f. BC, 20" ; KP, 6. 2 ; 3 fa,
AJN, arafetfa, f, or fiir, m. f. BC, 68"; 4 #et, f. BC, 28“.
awaking state), LV. AII”. 25, ata, n. seed, CS, 12".
YOU ( +389 ), ai, ind. or, UV, XRËS. agat, f. the earth. 26". BC, 236.
9, loc, fa, on the earth. NA, 'ng, , f. the earth. BK, 206. 1 6*.
IN

Page #501

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
སེམས་དཔའ
, the mind, 1 fa, n. BC,
1
, f, interrogative pronoun, who, BC, 39; NA, 5" ; PD, 24"; UV, 21" (N); 2 काम्, whom, NA, 1 3 कस्य,
26; NB, 10. 1; UV, 25."; 2 चेतस्, n. BC, 36, 67; NA,
7, 8; 3, n. BC, 39a.
(སུ་ཡཻ) BC, 27 ; , ind., fafa, Mind
understanding, a proper name,
where, BC, 45".
RK, 2, 22.
སུ་ཞིག, interrogative
pronoun,
who, 1, NA, 17. 2; 2‍9',
T, NA, 13. 19, 25.
gem,
with a pure mind, LV. BII'.
སུམ(for གསུམ), ཝི, three. '', a-am, m. not a
RK, 8.
being, KP, 4. 4.
बुम सुङ मार्कस, द्वात्रिंशत्, thirtytwo, LV. A139,10, 148.
सुम'ड'अॅ'5मा, षट्विंशत्, thirty-six, RK, 7.
N', af, a certain man, LV. B1915, 16.
, f, m. the lion, PD, 6o ; RK, 21°.
NA, 6".
57
457
, fegr, n. a throne,
one
སེམས་ལྡན་པ,( གདུང་- ), ( vrཊ༥-)
, one with a mind (which is afflicted), BC, 12.
Â3⁄4'', fag'fa, f. bliss, happiness (lit. happiness of the mind), NA, 11. 2.
སེམས་དཔའ, ༥༥,
'' (√fa, to think), farafa, you are thinking, NA, 12.
n. (i) a brave

Page #502

458
སེམས་ལས་ ས་བྱང
VOCABULARY
mind; with, fa, f.
perfect spiritual enlightenment, before it, it means
a
Bodhisattva, an aspirant to bodhi, BK, p. 137 ; LV. A12; (ii) the first of the well-known three gunas,
सत्त्ववत्,
( སེམས་དཔའ་ལྟར,
like सत्त्व ) BK, 12.
,, that which
has sprung from the mind, related to mind, NB, 10. 1.
9, 1, pondered over, BC, 68; 2 far, pr. pl. pondering, LV. A13"1. ÂY, «, m. a sage of the name, BC, 30, 51'.
,, removing, causing to perish, UV, 14".
क्षें-, अपनयत् pr. pl. remo
ving, NA, 7. 19.
Ñ,
སོང
दन्त, m. tooth, NA, 12" ;
NBT, 5. 18.
, separated, MK, 11".
स स लेर्वेप, पार्थग्जनिक, belonging to a worlding, natural or unsanctified man, LV. CI1.
9
'',
à¶, knowing precisely, 7 KP, 4. 3, 4, 5. 1, 6. I 2, 3, 4, 7. 1, 2, 3, 8. 2, 10. 2.
སོགས (often with ལ before it), आदि, beginning or beginning with, NB, 6. 3; NBT. 2. 1.
སོགས་པ, beginning,beginning with, and others, 1 f, m. NBT. 1° 2 fa, f. NA, 7. 7.
(pf. of RÃa, √, to go),
-
went, reached, came, 1
मत्, LV. A68; 2, BC, 51°; BK, 9; 3, imp. (let

Page #503

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
459 སོང་སྟེ
སྲེད་ལྡན་ one go). BC, 50" ; 4 pait (pf. 59, 79, m. transmigatory exisVAT, to go), BK, 14".
tence, birth, samsāra, CŚ, 1" ; N E, P1, gd. having gone UV, 16o.
or approached, LV. A6'. 5:5135, 1992, m. the des6TH, tal, gd. having gone, truction of birth, UV. 16'. BC, 504 ; PD, 17.
525 597, fata, m. the absence VESA, 1 ta, went, arrived. UV. of birth, UV, 16.
174 ; 2 Taa, n. going, LV. 59, TX, f. service. NA, 46, B1912.
5. 4, 6. 2. REA'J5, came out, went, 1
59392, yugur, pf. ptcl. fasoara, NA, 4. 1; 2 pet,
serving, NA, 5o. BC, 674.
YEA, (Vra, V912, to protect). VE 1, Tess, imp. go, LV. A24.
1 pfa, BK, 136 ; 2 tafe, V RT, Arnt, f. a finger, NA, 12.4. NA, 1". NV, get, m. a son, LV. A912 ; | 951997 (95N pf. of $5) RK, 5, 6, 20, 24.
914, imp. protect. yvä, ga, m. a son, BC, 31, 1979, 78, m. burning. BK, 1“.
5239, gigt, anxiously desi5, 1 n, it may be, NA rouse
rous, eagerly expecting, NA, 12. 13 ; 2 a1, ind. or, PD. 9'. 1 84.
334.

Page #504

460
སྲེད་པ
Î5', Tour, f. thirst (lit. and
fig.), strong desire, BC, 45" ; LV. B18, C5, 68; UV, 54, 22°.
སྲེད་པའི་བསམས་པ, STRIT, f. ex
pectation, BC, 10°.
, life, 1 ffa, n. BC, 21°; 2 प्राण m. BC, 50.
VOCABULARY
'89, 1 u, m. life, RK, 36; 2 प्राणिन् m. a living. being, BC, 47a.
55, farfaa, killed (lit. deprived of life), PD, 6".
,, m. not a living
being, KP, 4. 4.
,, imp. let it be
endured BC, 55°.
NA, 7. 22.
√
शेर्डे, प्रतिक्रम्य, gd. having gone back, LV. B19'.
གསང
, arrived,
√f, to beg, ask),
, LV. B1316.
', 1 f, a suppliant, NA, 7° ; PD. 15° ; 2 याचसि, you solicit, LV, B16".
झप, शिक्षक ( श्राचार्य ), a teacher, PD, 25".
,, n. taking, here in the sense of शिक्षा, learning,
KP, 3. 1.
2".
', fafag[], inf. to learn,
KP, 4. 1.
m. a teacher,
शेर, आचार्य, preceptor, NBT, 10. 46, 11.12.
, again, 1 g, ind. KA, 6o;
BC, 50'; 2, BC, 17°, 47, f, m. a disciple, pupil,
64d, 67".
11. 10.
, sharp-sounding, NA,

Page #505

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
461
461
གསན
་ གསོ་བ 91195AR, spyca, imp. lis- (at the end of a compound). ten, LV. B17".
called, BC, 38°, 94521, new, 1 72, RK, 35 ;
75V (see 973457), 1 57, 2 ara, NA, 10.6.
pf. said, BK, 31".
99 9V, , gd. having 9 21, Hrar, bright, BC, 13".
said, RK, 33. A ra, bright, clear, very V', 1 said. (i) aura, clear, open, 1 417, NA. 6.5 ;
pi. BK, 25" ; (ii) Nik, RK. 2 4*, BK, 17'' ; 3 *34, CS, 23; 2 pareja, is being said, 2"; 4 F952, BK. 32": LV. Cs, 4"." B 4".
INN, 1 , three-fold. BK. ANQ A5 IN, sà, il shines.
12", 31" : NBT, 10. 14: 2 fa, KA, 4".
three, BK, 9": NB. 25. 2. WWWês, fye, clear. NA. 12". 7815, gold, 1797, n. BC. 56". 795, (vaa, vant, etc. to say.
59" : 2 yari, n. UV. 6": 3 41,
BK. 28" talk, speak). 1 397, ('$. 2":
Vais, vaigie. with a 2 arifa, BC:, 37" ; 3 anafaa,
golden handle. RK.9. C$, 34; 4 ara, f. wpeech.
a . FTHAT, NBT, I'.
- Indre of gold. 136. 19'. 1959, (Vaa, etc. to sny. pfit
2. faftn. f. medical treat995, imp. 795), -STEA, ment, curing. I'D. 17".

Page #506

462
VOCABULARY
. 184.
གསོ་བ་
བསལ་བར་བྱ 7 92999, 7-479, not a thriv- | 999 (pf. ANAN), #pay, to be
ing one (in the sense of an accumulated, BC, 22". man). KP, 4.4.
985, , is being killed, PD, 45, 1 pa, pt. ptcl. of ve 18°
killing, PD, 18“; 2 farefah, I kill, awah 59:31, fand, unBC, 62"; 3 77, m. killing,
ling, thinkable, RK, 19, 35. PD, 34; 4 , killed, PD,
AV814759, 1 sa, n. medita
tion, NA, 1* ; 2 sypia, pt. pl. 51715772), oifaa, n. life, BC, 22".
meditating, NA, 24; 3 , yra paq, stan, pt. pl. living, concentration, m. RK, 10. NA, 5. 2.
ANN, intention, thinking, a AN N , 9179, imp. bring, (lit. thonght, 1 af 94, m. LV. gee, ask), LV. B1720
B1819; 2 farii, f, CŚ, 11°. 3 R$, faraca, imp. inform, fafica, n. NA, 7. 9; 4 HTT, m. LV. A2".
BC, 8o. q 'a's fantaa, to be in- ang59, farea, (pt. in the formed, BC, 14.
sense of the near ft.) is being NĖS, 79, imp. bring, thought, NBT, 10.37. BC, 62“.
Avaig J, Ferrata, should remaintaining, move completely, (lit. should BC, 106
blow out), UV, 34.

Page #507

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
463
463 བསལ་བར་བྱས་ནས་
བསླབ་བར་གྱིས་ *3JNIH, gafucal, gd., N5 (ft. of 95,v at, VTET,. to having indicated, NA, 8. 3.
protect, pf. 956), , imp. Ja, fafara, cool, NA. 7. 19. 3rd pers. sing. NA, 1". TH1735, rtceat, f. coolness, AN59. (see above), 1 ta, BK, 23.
pr. pl. keeping, BC, 34: 2 TETI, 15, fanta, gd. having f. protection. LV. B20** : .NA,
7". got assembled, LV. B 20o. 955, gra, n. religious or moral
ANSPR35, fute, for guardmerit, BK. I, 9” ; CS, l". | ing LV. B 21" 35 MHD, pagal kr, f. over
9950 (see 995), 95, NA, 2". enjoyment, LV.CI". ANCH (see 2015), qed, is pra 150'2359, graha, de being protected, NA 7.7.
sirous of religious merit cś, 995 (pf. of 9999. VTEN 8".
to burn), 1 zafa, BK, 1": 2 - 985990377, wyre, the ab
ST, UV, 24". sence of religious merit, cs. Avast (pf. av), fai, f. 6.
training, culture. BK, 1", 10, Sygv (pf. of agg:), to make 13', 24'. .
or become less), ng, thin, less, 9 5 JH, frate, one should LV, B18%.
learn, UV, 16 f.

Page #508

464
VOCABULARY
བསླབས
ANAN, fafa, trained, NA, 11a.
བསླུས་ནས(བསླུ་བ,fan-V[T!
deceive, pf.
imp. ),
4
fa, gd, having deceived,
BC, 48°.
to
2. 4, 7.2; (in the sense of
a king PD, 8; 4, f. a
ལྷམོ
for 2nd pers to show respect,
RK, 23.
ཧ
5,, broken to pieces;
shattered.
5''शुश'न, जर्जरीकृत, made broken to pieces, shattered, CS, 1'.
1 fag, f. the heaven, BC, 58;
2 f, divine, NA, 17. 5; 3 , m. a god, lord, LV. A324,
B 7, 8', 12". 14, 202; NA.,
god or goddess, NA, 20. 11, 17. 5: 5. दैव, 19 6 युष्मद्,
:
1, a term of respect applied to elders or other venerable personages. (It is also a term of endearment usually used to inferiors or juniors. देव, a god, applied here to the father who
ལྷ་ཅིག lit, means
is regarded as a 'god), Bk, 5a; 2a, m. a god, lord, LV. B15', 179.
, ali, n. to see a god, NA, 12. 14.
क्षमा, दिवौकस्, 58, 60".
a god, BC,
Helda, m. the
Great God, Śiva, RK, 32.
,, a king, LV. BI03,
n. destiny, fate, BC,,, a goddess, BC, 33a
used figuratively
NA, 13. 20.

Page #509

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT 465 ལྷ་ཚོགས་
ཨཏྤལ BLAN, dare, m. a multitude 393, 174, n. prose, KA, 1i". of gods, BC, 58o.
50s, aed, vb. drops, falls Now, feat, divine, BC, 584, 636. down, BG, 3.
down, BG, 36.. . E URI, *ffarsi, divinn (lit. dant 25:225, fregret, n. an alms
faqe), belonging to the domain bowl, RK, 10. of gods), UV, 22".
i feu, south, LV. B21“. 314, afa, more, NA, 7o. 3997198, ufugtet, assent, ac
w ah), ytan, a king of the ceptance, BK, 244, 25,
name, RK. 29.9. 1 after, m. excess, wo 9, ind. a vocative ptcl. LV. A1328 ; 2 ufa, more,
or a kind of gentle address, PD, 130; 3 mafun, higher,
NA, 7. 22. greater, BK, 6* ; 4 fare, m a
N, 1 md. a word showwise man, KA, 36.
ing surprise or wonder, NA, 39*8*995'9, yana, rem
6.2. 7. 24. 10. 4, 13. 2 ; PD, nants of the food eaten, 30* ; 2 gra, ind. a ptcl. imNA, 6o.
plying joy, surprise, or grief, 0989, Fe, ind. with, NB, 9. I. |
BC, 624. B A SH, T, natural, in- 45A, 3am, n. a lotus, blue nate, BC, 49'.
lotus, BC, 57o.
--- 58
.

Page #510

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
done.
siy, m. 25995, a ray, beam of cal, gd. *, having not light.
, 1 (i) n. Kív, a cloth, (ii) m. 47, 2574155'9" 37, not འོད, a ray:2 འོད་ཟེར་དང་ལྡན ། ་ to be followed. with a ray.
*41947, 5'9"79, without serta, vb. 38, made.
any action.
4974 ( **I), 1925, exempt **TCU, R5991, without a cause.
from decay, 41447, vb. IV, got (it) made. i afa, n. 814, the eye. **1984, vb. Weg gley two did. ne, n. @W, a home. me, m. 51755, a wrong or afw, m. fire. bad time.
1974. ind. 29995, in front of, 257, 9N, not done, not gained.
ynfera, m, 550, a leader. amar, f. 58514 Augai, ungratefulness.
ATA, Qİ A*9*88, n. not fading. 492, 5'85, that which is not ay, m. 1570, a mark; 2016, to be done.
| the lap.
before.

Page #511

अङ्कुर
, m. n.
', a sprout, shoot.
n. 1ཡན་ལག, 2 ལུས, the body, a limb,
5451,
ཡཿཛྙ་T, f. བུད་མེད,
gl, f. ', a finger.
རཾ་བོ
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
thinkable.
n.
अचल m.
अचिन्त्य, सম::‍
a woman.
, m. n.
a mountain.
un
अदृष्ट
अतिक्रमाय ( *अतिक्रमेत् ), १९९
, for stepping beyond.
fore.
afa-, prefix, 955, exceedingly.
fa,, passed.
fafe, m. མགྲོན, a guest. ་མ་ཨ་ཡཛཝ, ཤིན་དུ་ཆེ.
big,
fat, m. 1 24', lit. arf,
,, not perishing.
अज्ञान, ✩, ignorance. མ་རྩ་fཝེ, m. 1 ཐལ་མ, ༔ སྙིམ་པ,
the hollow of the hands joined, m., passing away.
together,
, ind., here.
སྒོ་ང,
an egg.
, ind. 1, 2, then, and, if, supposing,
अतस्,
ind. ༔ དེ་ནས, 2 དེ་ཕྱིར,
3 དེའི་ཕྱིར, 4 འདི་ལས, there wein, ind. 1 ཡང་ན, ༧ འམ, or.
अदस्,
pron. , that (lit. this).
མ་མཐོང,
467
very great or
noble ; 2, excess.
gy, adv. Nỗ¶'5, excessively. མ་ཅུ་=ཨ༥Cfus,ཤིན་དུ་ཐུབ་ཆོད་ལྡན,
very bold or adventurous.
अदृष्ट,
not seen.

Page #512

468
अद्भुत
अद्भुत n.
རྫུ་འཕྲལ,
a miracle.
ཨཚ༷, ind. ༔ ད་ལྟར, 2 དེ་རིང, ཉྩ དེང,
3
to-day.
af, 5'55,
la, vb.
अद्वितीय, मार्केसमे
VOCABULARY
even to-day.
9
without the second.
saw.
m.
अद्वितीय,
अधर m. , the lip.
མ་ཝའི་ན, དམན་པ་ཉིད་བྱས,
sed, beaten down.
*f*, adv. 2, more,
surpas
अधिकार m. སྐབས, right.
fr, d. 555', having possessed.
affa, f. 24, attaining.
wfarvwf6, vb. ཐོབ་པར་གྱར,
བདག, a lord.
अधिप, afa¶à¤, 55°Ã, ruling or deter
mining.
gets.
अनन्यनेय
afar, f. ', assent,
acceptance.
,, concerning the
self.
अध्याय m. ལེའུ, a chapter,
fa, vb. ', resides.
༄wevrfem, f. ཁྱིམ་མེད་པ, home
less (life).
अनङ्ग, ལུས་མེད,
i. e. cupid.
ཡཨཿgrཊཿ, གནང་བ་མེད་པ,
mitted.
m.
body-less,
not per
, adv. 1 ÈTM,
2 དེ་མ་ཐག,
༔ དེ་མ་ཐག་པ.4 འོག་5,5 འོག་ 535 (F), after.
a, n. #N,
food.
MREIN, IN'L'A,
food.
अनन्यनेय,
one who gives
གཞན་གྱི་དྲིང་མི་འཇོག་

Page #513

अनर्थोपसंहित,
अर्थोपसंहित
པར་འགྱུར་བ, not to be led or
guided by others.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
mischievous, harmful.
xt, མི་འོས, not worthy.
w7rra, མ་བྱུང་བ, not come, fu
ture.
xtrrw, འོང་བ་མེད་པ, without com
ing.
अनात्मन्
अनुगामिन्
varfes, མ་བསྐྱེད་པ, not produced. nfau, མི་རྟག་པ, not eternal. གནོད་པ་དང་ལྡན་པ,|fr༢༢ia, བསྟན་དུ་མེད་པ, that
which cannot be pointed out.
not blamed.
1 བདག་མེད. 2 བདག་མིན,
reflection.
not self.
wnrt, ཐ་དད་དོན་མིན, having not
different things.
अनाभास, སྣང་བ་མེད་པ, without a
अनालम्बन, 1
དམིགས་མེད་པ. ? དམིགས་པ་མེད་པ, not depend.
support.
469
ཨfafr༢༥, མི་སྨད, wiegཝུ, ཤིན་ཏུ་ཆེ་བ,
གྷfuu, m. certainty.
wfཔེx, འགག་པ་མེད་པ, without
very wide.
མ་ངེས, absence of
ing on, or resting upon.
Taw, རྟེན་མ་ཡིན་པ, without any | rqTrfau, རྗེས་སུ་འབྲང་བ,
lower, following.
suppression.
wfafu, འགྲོ་མེད་པ, without go
ing out.
wfer, མི་འདོད་པ, undesirable. མཱཧུ༣q7I, f. 3rd.case, སྙིང་བརྩ བ་ཉེ་བར་བཟུང་སྟེ, withkind
ness. See p. 362.
མཱཞུ75Z pr. pl. (lit. གླུgrཊཿ ), རྗེས་སུ་འོངས, following.
a
fol

Page #514

ing.
470 VOCABULARY
अनुवतिन् yr, imp. 2574N,do treat agră, 3rd case. Forslag, in with kindness.
- regular order 494, m. ÈN YAZ), a fa-4949, pr. pl. 35N V°55, feel
vour. 49410, EVY755'. fit to be your art, imp. 3 Y DEAK favoured.
9. let (it) be felt. ugeot, 5512751995, without des- ha, n. NX50149°5, intruction.
ference. agfagia, vb. 97989915g. I do.
aya, d'1°5219*345 . inferATTA, Vwq, not ori
able... ginated.
galerit, NV*=5, approAcara, 29581, having no ori- ving, causing pleasure. gination.
apeta, m. A, applying one*agnary, gd. 1951, having not
self to given up.
ager, m. 896*, love. agfah, 931985, not
agen, 1 NY'Ngg. 2 END anxious, not frightened.
1 998. corresponding, equal, **9417, gd. 95119, having not approached, (lit. Agur, m.). Aute, m. 5, consideration, obe
dience (lit. Te, n. mouth). aggfonu, gd. A 15, having re
Agafáz, EN, one who follows. ceived.

Page #515

अनुव्यञ्जन n.
dary marks.
अनुशंस,
m.
अनुव्यञ्जन
དཔེ་བྱེད, the secon
རྗེས་སུ་བསྔགས་པ,
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
praise, profit.
ague, 'y'¬y, instructed.
अन्त,
,, to be done.
ཨཧུ༥ཊཿཡ, རྗེས་སུ་འབྲངས་པར་བྱ,t。
be followed.
- अनुसार, m. 1 བཞིན 2 ལྟར, in
accordance with.
ugu, gd. 499, having persued,
according to.
wཊེwrú, དོན་ཅིག་མིན, having no
one thing.
, 3rd case,, by this.
m. མཐའ,
an extremity,
end.
अन्तरात्मन्, ং‍া, the inner
self.
rafa,, covered.
अन्तराल, n. བར,
space or time.
अन्तरे,
अपयन्ति
, n. 5, the sky..
555, inside.
f, 55, near.
अन्ध,
a
, 7th case, 9, near.
ལོང་བ, blind.
,, other.
अपकार,
,, each other.
afa, gd. 5, having considered or searched for.
*afa, vb. 4, follows
gets).
f., water.
471
intermediate
harm,
35, mischief,
pr. pl. Âa°§, removing.
fa, vb. 354, go away.
m.
(lit.

Page #516

472
VOCABULARY
aft
etc.
ritorious act.
foolish.
अपर 99,5799, other.
****, og g5.8129 not con24484n, vb. HÍK-AT"5, saw. 1 sisting of a condition. xfy, ptcl. 1 g5, 2 25. 3 W5,
44an, to'g*5'pàg. not it denotes emphasis, also, too,
having a condition.
HTC, m. 99w5, carefulness, agora, a q uæq, deme- / vigilence.
ufsre, 349. not dear. ra, vb. N6g 150, wor- gale, ã 5, devoid of intellect,
shipped. Agg, 1 5 55, 2 x 25:51. rata, vb. 1 NH; 2 ****, not preceded.
said, -102. BV, expectation, hope. 978181815. one without 9910, 92, removed.
devotion 9147, VB19'), a proper name.
#PETĘ, og margq, one who
gives the assurance of safety. *#afgaa, gd. 30. having
1897, vb, 95, was. not informed (lit. 457). anfare, 498189191, not firmly
*7479, m. 1 35 : 2 25081 fixed.
absence. Hey, g o, having no condi
sfot-, prefix, 1 655 2 Byza
པར, towards.
tion.

Page #517

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
473
अभिज्ञ
अभिसन्धि
ced.
ing.
joicing at.
#fan, 69195ņN, experien- sfarza, 55131. overcome.
sferica, ed. gar:35. having over TET, n. 949. a statement, say- i
powered, zfateffend, vb. aĚ5, is being said.
warga, 1 1973-W. 2 vš" afira, 15:259'9. to be
པར་ཕྱོགས. turned towards, mentioned, the subject matter.
friendly disposed. sufararferat sagt: 920 * fitu, gd. 399vhaving
ascended (lit. Teal, having
gone). afafasafagy, inf. 655°45'35*A, to go out, to renounce the
aftafia, 3557, desired.
afirefoan, 35753577 afaristea, 55 35'4, went out, sê, like what is desired. or renounced the world.
affany, m. 35, an expression. afafafanufa, vb. 575*25*235, will go out, will renounce the fly, m. 076795357 9. de
sire. world. afatada, vb. RIS, springs, faleza, 7595R355, deproceeds.
sired. famg, (for off ), m. Anal, farefaa, m. 46555H, a purintention.
pose, object.
world.
59

Page #518

474
VOCABULARY
अभिहित
अरण्य
these).
ufafea, TĚ5, said.
, f. Yo, mother. , adv. g. 42253'95, #aft, pron. & 57, those (lit. fit, like one not frightened, anta, 5°5°4, non-existent, what wafaxit, adv. Ž"240015, not has not been.
having lost the confidence. qua, vb. 1 95. 2 35, 3 **, n. 3. water.
55*45 95, 4 Valgan , n. 9358, nectar, immor(lit. Anda ), was.
tality.
quan, n. Room 1790, the wata, 358791, past.
cause of immortality. fara, 37'4, higher, greater. 11, n. 415, a lotus ma, 39, arrived.
427, pron. 1 , 2 , this. wgfen, ováğ°4150959, risen.
*78, n. 98, iron. YET, 195, uprisen.
Tafa, ind. D, a vocative particle, #1, n. 9, a cloud.
oh. tra, RB21A, not mistaken. wym, &°340, not right. HATA ( gfare ), ova (wa)par , ind. Cyw, a vocative ptcl, o.
99997, not middle (path). ry, no 515*07, a forest.

Page #519

I. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
475
अराति
अवगच्छामि alfa, m. 59'89, an enemy. Hefe, vb. 38°(21), deserves." Tefta, 555555, that which is WETET, vb. R11°(), you deserve.
not determined or ascertained. TER, m. $78, red lac used 1, m. ISH, the sun.
by women to dye their feet. golfa, vb. 315. deserves.
494, ind. 1 581, 2 HÁA, 3 to, n. 1 WED, 2 MT WB.
995*863*, sufficient, en
ough, water with such other things as flowers offered in worship wak, m. t. an ornament, a of a god or in reception of figure of speech. a guest.
987, 1988), adorned, orna#fa, n. 65997, worship. mented. fofa, 265, worshipped.
afel, m. 354, a bee. Hei, m. 155. object, purpose,
479, 1 $55, 2 $545 JR. 3 necessity ; 2 15, wealth. 35-9, 4 gang. small, little, fift, A, one who begs. de FETHIO, TRVOINYM, speaksirous, a suppliant.
ing little. f, m. n. 95, half, half porn, terra, ÍTV 135-4, not learned. tion.
9128ff, vb. 3 I underA, V, deserving.
stand.

Page #520

476
VOCABULARY
अवची
अविज्ञप्तिक
remain.
xerat, vb. aor. ***91, said. at, m. 1 NIH, 2 RS, occa
sion, opportunity. saatf, gd. 1 6 G*a 'SAV'IN, 2 55". having come down.
que, pt. pl. 9771*11*3485
falling down. 99979, n. 1 ŽATV'DĚT", 255767"
Aariela, vb. È945RJF, 1' 5(51). a great or glorious they come to an end. act.
1941, 3727591 a worthless 294a, (a) vb. opt. 55'), one
thing. should not contempt, i. e.
**APITH, inf. 981 g'a, to should accept (Tib. lit. should accept).
9811, n. 975V, remaining. 449z4, gd. mata 05911071, having taken off.
afea, 1357°29,2 97198, 3 94194ą, pt. pl. 725 93 95, A5154756, remained. looking, seeing.
A91922, vb. JAN 15 Ja. *e#yra, vb. '45 HT"), let they came down us two look at.
299, F 5, attained. ATTİPA, gd. 1 93198.2
a1fy, f. , attainment. of (lit. afd), having faafera, 970515. unmoved. seen.
afaafia, F15 41551, yazi, 1 59581591, dependent. without intimation.

Page #521

अविद्यमान,
existing.
wfaru, སྙིགས་མ. impure.
vb., I understand.
, n.
11. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
विद्यमान
pr. pl. ཡོད་མིན,
, vb. aor. 1, said.
not eternal.
་མ་ཕ་༥༢འ, རྟག་མེད་པ, བསྟན་བཅོས་མི་ཤེས་པ,
अशास्त्रज्ञ,
one who does not understand a śāstra.
affe, '', not learned.
fa, f. ', eighty.
अशून्य,
སྟོང་མིན,
not void.
xv, མ་ལུས་པ, all.
Wव, m.
མནྜི་མ, a tear.
5, a horse.
,, a she mule.
अश्वता, རྟ་ཉིད, the
horse.
not
nature of a
Afa
,, (lit. 2, eighth),
eight.
ཕཱi:, ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད, eight-fold. མ་འ, 1 (i) མེད. (ii) ཡོད་མ་ཡིན, not existing ; 2 དམ་པ་མིན,
bad.
असत्त्व n.
, non-existence.
असन्निधान, n. 1ཉེ་བར་མི་གནས,2 མི་ཉེ་བ, absence of vicinity.
མི་མཐུན་པའི་ཕྱོགས,
असपक्ष m.
477
,, unable, unfit.
2
dissimilar instance or
one in
which the major term is not
found.
རལ་གྲི, a sword.
name.
afe, m.
xfte, ནག་པོ,black,
མི་ཉལ་ཙམ,
श्रसुप्तमाल, not slept.
ཨཱfe, vb. 1 འགྱུར, z མཆིས,
a
a proper
as soon as
3

Page #522

478
478
VOCABULARY
No. 4
प्रस्थान 5. 5 w5*. is.
exists.
1916 7, n. 35, day. PRAE, 25935, not injurious,
not mischievous. FEHT, f. ggoda, abstaining from killing or giving pain to others. , *25, without the cause,
ind. , a word indicating surprise.
ARTA, 7717 ** Wa"=1, an impro
per place or occasion. ATT, Väg, an improper place.
( ZEH), personal pron. Ist pers., 1 AA, 25, 3970 ( ཅག like. རྣམས added to them denotes the plu. num. ), 4
B . I, we. pfen, vb. 1957. 2 5. am. AFFA #Ifda:, 355443791, I was
made do. fHT, pron. loc. RX19, here. He, per, pron. gen. 135, 2
འདིའི.of this separa, 4578°35pàgration,
non-self-possessor. €44, 9575ERVão, non-selfpossessor.
11, ptel. 93 5, a word expressing
the limit inclusive or exclusive. rezfar, f. Žra, hearing, lis
tening. **, pt. pl. 39997 *3531,
listening. wafara, vb. 35*45.357, are
listening. oppret, gd. Žviga, having lis
tened. 47414771, f. 27591, desire.

Page #523

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN 479 12T
I had rel=74 *1*1T, m. n. 98/MAR, the arota, m. RD'a, livelihood. sky.
TH, 939, ordered. 1364, gd. 995, having drawn or bent.
TIET, f. ÈH'V'99994, an order. 71421, vb. opt. 1915 paa, vy997. ordered. By 5. may attack.
1578, 55, direct. -Fren, axral, called
Arrat, m. Pa, a drum mest, vb. 3799, came. used in a battle. ama, 1 KÊN, 2 55A, 3 BEN 4151, 45, afflicted. come, arrived.
, vb. 2nd pers. sing. 97957, AMHA, n. 250V, coming. ANTAP, vb. imp. 47994199
144, 1957, 2 95735, 355, wait (Tib. lit. go).
self. AITA, gd. 519v, having
114417, m. 315V, the body (Skt.
lit. one's own body). #rare, m. HI, practice. af, m. 195715, a teacher
Alama, adj. adv. 25795.jar
na 215. aside. or preceptor. 21f9a ( aqifta ), 79542784791, raderarrate:2H, * IV,
crooked or turned completely. the middle of the states of āt
you say
come.

Page #524

480
VOCABULARY
प्रादधान
__ आरण्यक man and anātman (Tib. lit, sulfa, vb. A's, obtains.
gazh, the middle of the two). ATTYTA, pt. pl. 865*, creating.
#raat, vb 9781554°51, said. Arzt, m, 501a mirror.
ANA, f. 25. light, splendour. 241914, gd. 1 Q5V*JN, 2 WETV |
a Thetara, vb, pf, $4', 'ad
dressed. བཟུང་ནས, having taken.
Heef, vb. pf. 54°9585. rfa, 1 (i) š5, (ii) 171*88. first ;
touched. 2 (i) I'V9VA, (i) VW, ya, n. 90 55'9 a prologue beginning with.
or prelude of a drama. sifca, m.ZN, the sun. . 1977, n. 1 *H85, the six or
gans of sense and the objects TR, m, 107995479°29, happy,
thereof ; 2 97986. place, a proper name ; 2 5579:2, house. happiness, joy.
rfa, f. $ , the future time. HRT, vb. imp. 1 V (lit. rifa, vb. 295, comes, gets. yea, ask), 2 ÁRVÉS.
arra, m. 1 5R19,2 975535. bring.
pain, fatigue. Arck, 1 55. 2 5521, internal
Arga, n. ***, life, duration of (Buddhist). efaru, pt. pl. 295.775
1947, 4781*7735, produced 25:21, being filled up.
life.
in a forest.

Page #525

राधयन्ती
आराधयन्ती, f. pr. pl. 1 अभ्रे བྱེད་ཅིང, 2 བསྟེན, worshipping,
paying respect.
u, gd. R¶N'S. having
mounted.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
आरूढ,
, mounted.
आरोग्य, n. ནད་མ་མཆིས་པ freedom
from disease.
आरोचयति स्म, Ă, said..
xrtཡ, gd.བཞག་ནས,
placed.
xri, 1 ཉམ་ཐག, 2 གཟིར, distress
ed, afflicted.
having
ཕཱrfä, f. གདུང་བ, pain.
ཨ1ཎྷཾ, རློན་པ,
*7, 1 ཇོ་བོ, འཕགས་པ, lord,
master, noble.
आर्या f. Q. See आर्य.
wet.
60
,, visible, apparent.
आशु
དམེགས་པ, resting
आलम्बन, upon, or that upon which one
rests.
, n. ́, a basin or trench for water round the root of a tree.
n.
, m., light.
ཡmཞf3ན, ཀུན་ཏུ་ཚིམ་པར་གྱུར.
clined, bent down.
- 259,
481
about.
Trfar, ནོན་པ,
,
in
one that brings
,, surrounded.
, imp., come back.
overcome, entered.
TIrx1, f. དོགས་པ, fear.
EXTENT, f. སྲེད་པའི་བསམས་པ, hope,
expectation.
शीविष m. སྦྲུལ, a snake.
1 སྐྱེན་པར, 2 མྱར་དུ, quick.

Page #526

482
VOCABULARY
ག་ཁུལ་
ཙཱའི གad, n. ངོ་མཚར, wonder. གཙུག, m. བོད, a name, appellaག་གIG, n. 1 བསྟི་གནས, 2 གདུང་
tion. གནུས, 3 གནས. a hermitage.
|གt, ind. འམ, an interjection ex
pressing doubt, or. ག་༥, m. གནས་པ, a resting place. གrn, gd. བརྟེན་ནས, having re- རྣ, m. བུ་རམ་ཤིང, sugar-cane.
course to. ག་ཚགt, འཁོར་བ, till the world.
sezona, pr. pl. 255. desiring. གྲྭ་ཞའི, n. སྟན, a seat.
ཚུནa, vb. 1 འདོད, 2 འདོད་པ
desires. གྲྭ་ག་ཝཱ, ཉེ་བ, near.
རྩོr, 1 འདོད, 2 འདོད་པ. desire. གང་ཞnten, ཉེ་བར་གནས་པ, standing | gqIR, འཚལ, 1desire. ག་ཀ་ག, gd. ཕྱིན་ཏེ, having reached. 481
ཙྩཉེa, འདོད, one may desire. ལྷག་༩, n. གནས, a place.
རྩོའཝ, ind. འདིར, here.
| ga, 1 ཅེས, 2ཅེས་བྱ་བ., ༔ ཅེས་སོ, གIཎ་ཆTiའིe, རབ་དུ་བསྣན་པ, Rapped.
བ སྙམ་དུ, s སྙམ་དུ་སེམས, ༠ བདེ, གI, གི་ཚུ:, vb, 1 ན་རེ, 。 སྨྲས (པ). ༔ གསུངས་པ. saya, |
དེ་སྐད, ༔ དེ་ལྟར, 。 དེ་ནས་, say, said.
i༠ དེའི་ཕྱིར, i ཞེས, ༢༣ ཞེས་ གཙུའུ, gd. བོས་ཏེ, having called. པ, 13 ཞེས་བྱ, 14 ཞེས་བུའོ, 15
near

Page #527

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
483
उक्त
इदम् 'g'7, 16 augaqv, 17 a, ind. 1 25.2 WEN, 3 75, aagaw, 18 5*40*7, al 43*35, 575.6 Tậ15, ptcl. generally used to re- like. port the very words spoken or 2, 1 355597.2 355644. desupposed to be spoken by sired. some one ; besides it has vari- a, n. REF21that by which ous senses, such as cause, an arrow is thrown, a bow. purpose or motive ; thus, so, of
szaffera, QZANAH', trainthis nature, illustration.
ed in archery. 567, pron: 1 I (lit. Ta, that ), sind. 1 §, 235, 3 aÃ. 23. 3 +
3 55 (lit. 594), 0,4 BQ CV, here, in this thus, this. Franta, ind. 1 5; 25'55, 35.
217, now, this time. FERT, 1 BRE, 29935, of this 57, m. 585-, lord, the king kind. of gods.
žfiaga, 255-51, desired. faza, n. 99521, an organ of , ind. 35*35, slightly. sense.
stai, f. 7737, envy, jealousy. keit, pron. 23°57, these two." 574, pron. f. Bg, this.
34, 1 RÉG. 2 947(), 3
world.

Page #528

484
VOCABULARY
उक्तवत्
उत्पादयेत्
tremor.
Aygarca. 4 (5) 5 crafted, 355*), anxious. ཟེར, said,
3449, m. 54°955, tremor. Faqa, 4795, one who said. 57. 1, gd. 1 5 or 991, 2 97, 35, the north. NEVJW, having said.
scura, gd. 2605, having got up. 3a, 577, acute, serve.
Ferrafa, urae, 2153/*9*, till afara, 55, fit.
he will get up. 374d, vb. 1 149. 2 (5). Tepad (orel), vb. 1 5, 2 ,
3 999, 4 J'AI DĚ5. 5 come(s).into being.
IN'S, 6 Qayisə, it is said. sydna, 35796, one who knows JEUA, pr. pl. pass., Dial how to fly.
JETA, A, came into being. Jovaa, 54°945, bright. Fiya, n. 1954, a blue lotus. sfsha, F**45*45, left, aban- zarufa, vb. $5*21595, makes, doned.
produces. J5C1H, m. NTV Tanat, the
Saureata, optative, 1 5, 2 Ja, ind. 1 900, 227957, and, R559, may or should proalso, or.
duce.
that which is being said.
moon.

Page #529

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
485
485
उपदेश
उत्फुल्ल YHT, 5*5V, opened, fully | 5fၓ, 15:35, disgusted.
blown. catal, m, 4155, offering.
59E7, n. gĒGH, holding, sup
porting. 969, m. 529 , a festival.
JHÍCH, gd. 3), having opened. Scrust, vb. pf. F'Ol, gave up, cast off.
saya, 8175*34, looking up. sfat, 15'5, 2 59'556°N,
34., prefix. 1 295, 295, 3 raised, increased. Fella, 05*79, anxiously desirous,
དྲུང་དུ, near, ete. eagerly expecting.
397794, imp. 91, arrange. Je, prep. 595, up.
34416, 217(), help. gara, m. 05547587, an ins
3976, 279, helping. pired speech. *Jeraufa , vb.651597x5*FH, 3974, m. JAV !, accumulation. uttered an inspired speech.
zaferad, vb. 45499, being gere, h2, beautiful.
instructed. 3E1A, 59, unrestrained.
gada, m. 1 ama ITV. 2 357, 35, came into being.
.245 35, 3 7'45*999', 3917, n. 1 5 N, 2 Way,
30 a 23:999.5 579*549, advice. a park, garden.

Page #530

486
VOCABULARY
उपनिमन्त्रयति
उपा Eyfat-ayfa FA, vb. aga 5. in on a Viņā (Tib. lit. is singing vited.
with a Viņā.) Suda. QANDA, a preceptor 1974, m. 35, cessation.
who performs the Upanayana epzifua, 3195.WEBÀS, decoceremony, Ācārya.
rated. squad, vb. 195, 2 2957 adfer. 39599595, serving. འགྱུར, becomes reasonable.
397EH, gd. 999, having ap-374, 19275, 2 DELV*ZT, like.
proached. 2791A 17HT:, 51 35 *, in JT15THT, vb. 1 VS, 2 111 comparison equal.
approached, went. gpilfara, 279, favourable.
Trink, m. RĒTS, a collection. 39764, yd 35+2655, having
FREITA, n. 4777, attendance observed. grafen, f. 590'S), perception, 1917, n. 34521981, holding, understanding.
attachment. 34214, m. 035*758, fasting. 3917974, optative, 3'47"gier
I should bring near. eyfaz, 257(5), seated.
3974, m. 990, means. statuafa, vb. 55215315527
3911, m. n. 55, half, nearly པའི་ གླ་ལེན་པར་བྱེད, is playing halt.

Page #531

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
487
487 उपेक्ष्य བུའི་ཀ, བཏང་སྙོམས་བྱ, to be over
looked. བའི་ཞ, gd. ཉེ་བར་བཟུངས་ནས, having
༣, 1 གཅིག, ༣ གཅིག་ཉིད, taken.
3 ག ཅིག་པོ.one བཀ, ཐབས་ལས་བྱང, to be afee- | gra, བྲག, one solid mas. ted by means.
Gཟིགས་, གཅིག་པུ, alone. , གཉིས, both.
Gན་འ, གཅིག་ཏ, exclusively, in3a7, 1 གཉིས, ༣ གཉེས་ཀ, both.
variably. ཅཤIn, vb. pf. སྨྲས, ཐaid. gཆེན, 1 རེ་ར་དག, 2 རེ་རེ་ལ, བ་, དྲོན་མ, hot, warm.
singly, a single one.
ཤུ༩༢, 1 དེ, 2 འདི, ༔ འདི་སྐད, མའེ, vb. pf. གདུངས, said. ག@, སྟེང, above, in the upper
afé, ind. ད་ལྟར, now. gཤ་ཟ, 1 དེ་ཉེད, 2 འདི་སྙེད, so
this.
region.
much.
ཞི, m. དྲང་སྲོང, a sage, seer.
*ཚུལེ, vb. ཐོབ་པར་འགྱུར, ( གITra ཟླཝཱ, f. རྫུ་འཕྲུལ, miracle. |. or ག་གའི ), will obtain (Skt. མའེ, ind. 1 མ་གཏོགས, ༔ འདོར, lit. increases). without.
g, ind. | ཁོ་ན.... ངེས་པར, ,

Page #532

488
VOCABULARY
एवम्
कथश्चन
Strychnos Potatorum. Its seeds
ཉིད, ཉིད་དུs • འདྲ, an em
ओ phasizing or ascertaining, ptel.; | གa, m. ཆུ་བོ, dood.
exactly. དུ་q, ind. 1 དེ་སྐད 2 དེ་ལྟ,
ག7, n. སྨན, medicine. 3 དེ་ལྟར, , དེ་ལྟར་གྱུར་ན, 。 དེ་བཞིན, 。 དེ་བཞིན་དུ, 7 འདི་ སྐད, ༔ འདི་སྐད་ཅེས,。 འདི་
རྗེ, [, 1 གང. ༧ , ༔ སུ. ཐ སུ་ཞིག,
who, what. སྐད་དུ, thus.
ན, m. ཀ་ཏ་ཀ a kind of tree, ཏུག་ཞི, དེ་ལ་སོགས, such and the like.
rubbed upon the inside of water , Ar, pron. འདི, this.
jars precipitates the earthly
particles in the water. ad, vb. འོང་བ. will come.
ཀ, pron. 1 གང,。 གང་ཞེ་ན, ཤུཛི, vb. imp. ཤོག, come.
བཞ, ind. གང་གི་ཕྱིར,2 གང་
ལས, , ཅིས, , ཇི་ལྟར, how, @ad, n. དབང་ཕྱག, supremacy• ། sovereignty.
རqgn, ind. ཅིས་ཀྱང. ༧ ཅི་ཞིག་ @aisin, n. དབང་ཕྱག་གི་དབང, ལྟར, on any account, sorne
lordship with supremacy. how.
which.
supremacy,
why.

Page #533

कथन
༣༥n, 1 བསྟན་པ, 2 སྨྲས་པ, a state
ment.
, imp.,
Tuffa, vb. 355395, will
say.
कथा..
, say.
, optative,
1 བསྙད་ རྣམ་ཐར, a story
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
may say.
a talk, speech; 2
, vb. pass. said.
ever.
is being
कदली, f. हुसै८,
, ind.
5 ́ ́ ́, when.
6cffབེེན, ind. 1 ནམ་ཡང,∶ ནམ་ ཞིག.
fay, 54, youngest.
a plantain tree.
कन्थक m. བསྔགས་ལྡན, lit. a praised one, the name of the horse of Siddhartha.
རྒྭq, f. གཞོན་ན་མ, a girl.
61
कन्द m. n.
, a balbous root.
4, a cave.
, f., the neck.
སེར་སྐྱ,
कन्दर, m.n.
कपिल, m.
name.
करिष्यामि
कमण्डलु, m. n.
རིལ་བ,
generally used by ascetics.
489
a sage of the
कमल, n. པདྨ, a lotus. *ཡ་ཨཿཨེ་, པདྨའི་མིག་ཅན,
lotus-like eyes.
', m,, the hand.
a water-pot
ft.
one with
,, that which produces.
ཅཱ《07, n.1བྱས་པ, 2 མཛད་པ, du
ing.
,, that which is to be done.
fifa, vb,
will do.
ff, vb. 5, I shall do.
བྱེད་པར་འགྱུར,

Page #534

490
VOCABULARY
कषण
thought, wish.
करिष्यामः #fata:, vb. ft. 190K, 29. FET, n. 5*85, a wife. we shall do.
79147, m. 72495', a squirrel. *, C'È, kind.
#, f. , a part. HEUT, f. Î='È, kindness. afera, 50, produced. Fifa, vb. 35(5), does, or is Ferna, m. 1 ANNI, a fabulous doing.
period of time ; 2 5814 ANAI, Frig, vb. imp. HE5, let it do. maifa, vb. 9, 1 do. HTYEA, m. 529'9295, the Frifo, vb. 5, you do.
divine tree that fulfils all Farf, m, $(9), the ear.
#nar, f. 57°59, creating in mind, ndan, 5'9, to be done.
imagination. ra, inf. 972 35, to do. Pataru, n. 57°27 , good. agt, m. n. 47*35, camphor. 798, m. n. ARA, a mouthful. FI, n. 21W, work, deed, action. afa, m. n. 955976165, a poet. Faira, m. 400*4199, the com- afera, pron 1979.9, 2.8 pletion of a work, occupation.
Q. 3 434*347. 4 9'05, Fifa, vb. **4*5*7550, drags a certain person.
away, (Tib. lit. torments). 74, n. 99, rubbing.
desire.

Page #535

का,
%eHTZ, pron, 1 ཅིའི་ཕྱིར, 2 ཅི་སླད | ཅིའི་ཕྱེར,。 ཅིའི་སླད་དུ, why.
3
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
कस्मात्
, pron. ', whose.
1 སུ་ཞིག, 2 མ (lit.
pron.
no, not), who, what.
,. pron. f., whom.
བྱ་རོག,
a
कापुरुष, m.
काक m.
.1༣d1, f. སྙན་ཅིང་ཕྲ་བ,
sweet tone.
wrfཙི.ཅཱཊཿ, འདོད་གུར་པ, desired.
fa, pron. f. 373, a certain (woman).
काञ्चन, n. གསེར, gold.
crow.
a low and
beauty.
काश्यप
འཇོ་བ, ( -ཅུ་༢, yielding ) 3 འཚལ,
desire.
*7༣, འདོད་པ་སྦྱིན,
a mean con
the desired things.
कामदुघ,
desires.
muyafamı, f. ¶Ñ‍'ÑAN,
enjoyment.
, m., the body.
कारण, n. རྒྱུ,
काञ्चुकीय, m 35, a chamberlain. **,
कान्त,
beautiful.
མཛེས, wIfཥིཊ, f. མཛེས་པ,
-,
one who gives
ཕོ་ཤལ,
temptible fellow.
, m. 1 (5). 234, m.
འདོད་འཇོ, yielding ali
काल, m.
491
, vb. imp. 53⁄4, let one
get it done, do.
काव्य, n.
a cause.
**, doing. *È'', kind.
ཧrཡཾ, 1 དོན, 2 བྱ, 3 བསྐྱེད, object,
work, to be done,
དུས, time.
· སྙན་ངག, poetry.
འོད་སྲང,
over
a proper name.

Page #536

492
VOCABULARY
काषाय
by monks.
1974 1972, n 55 $99, a red or reddish fama, anything, 19, 2 & 45, yellow cloth or garment used
f&fen, ind. 1379. 2 g&a. *7472999, n. pag 55 g 9 3 55"25, some, a little, slight. གོས་ཅན, with a cloth dyed of
forg, ind. ŽE"ys, but reddish colour.
frafa, 2477 9. certain leffi, vb. imp. 35. don't do. Femein, få g5, for what. fe pron. 1 515, 2
2 8. 3 faca, pr. ptcl. 255 ĝS, scatter
3 @ 7,48 @ 73, (lit. Farei), ing. 5 R 155, (lit. Praefat), what, fact, ind. 1 , 2 9507, for what?
assuredly, possibly. fá 774, F. why.
*atel, 9155 JH. scattered. fx gare GPS TV, how much
alfa, f. 1 46°31, 2 999, more (lit. say what is neces- |
fame, glory. sary). Fáy ute, m. TNT À5, a well F, ind. 59, bad.
known tree, otherwise called goat, m. Ê, a dog. Palāśa (Butca Frondosa). Its
gue, m. 599, an elephant. fue, but it has no odour.
Gra(TTT), -73974. a kinsfame, 25905, moreover.
flower is red and very beauti
man.

Page #537

SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
493
grass.
कुतस्
कृतिन् རྒྱ, 1ག་ལ, ,གང་གི་ཕྱིར, ཆུI, m. ཀུ་ཤ, a kind of sacred གང་ལ, ༔ ཅིའི་ཕྱིར་ན, where,
ཆུ་ཅུན, n. མེ་དོག, a Rower. wherefore, whence. ཆུཞ, གང་དུ, where.
རྒྱུན, m. ཁྲོན་པ, a well. ཆུt, m. 1གཞོན་ན, ༡ གཞོན་པ, d, 1 ་བལྟས, lit. looked), , a prince.
སྤྱད་པ, ༔ བྱེད་བ. lit. ང་, n ནུག་ཟིa, f, གཞོན་ན་མ, a princes. doing). • བྱས་(པ), 5 བྱས་པར་ ཆུ་*, m. རི་དྭགས, a deer.
གྱུར, ༠ སྦྱར lit, ཤུན, joined),
, མཛད, ༔ མཛད་པ, done. ཆ, vb. imp. 1གྱིས, 2 མཛོད་
made, performed, a deed. ཅིག, d༠.
ཆdཞིཀ, རིག་པ་བསླབས, learned. ཆan, vb.opt, 1 བྱའོ (but once a, ཐལ་མོ་སྦྱར, one who has actually for ཞིའ, should be),
joined the hallowed palms (in 2 བྱེད་པ, should do.
reverence). ཆུའིa, ཆུའི་[, vb. བྱེད་པ), is or are རྣག་ཀཾ, 1 དོན་ནི་བྱས་པ, 2 དོན་བྱས. doing.
one who has attained the end. ཆུ, n. 1 ཕོ་བྲང, 2རིགས; a family,
ཆུབ་, འཐབ་ཆོས་སྦྱངས, trained in
the science of arms or missiles. caste, a palace or family
ན་འ, མཁས་པ, learned. expert,
palace.

Page #538

494
VOCABULARY
ht
ed, ind. 3515. for Eifel, m. F'3, a cuckoo. 97, 989, cut.
19, m. 367, anger. Frey, . to be done.
alyet, f. al på 35, moon-light. mai, gd. 1 9N, (lit. ga, done). #Ha, E81 l, soft.
2. 585.3 571, 4 . IN FIT, m. 95H5, a treasury. 218, having done.
19, 99, a case. Sca, 99:57. all.
Firda, m. 1958-9, the son of
Kunti, Arjuna. HU, 1 BA967. a prope name ***TET, apparel, skilfulness. (lit. Vişnu, a pervading one); 2
FIREYHTHIET, f. [ARNY35] ནག་པོ, black.
དཔྱོད་པ, investigation of cleverafaa, 9789, some
ness. *, 75.49N, by whom or what. Hala, n.
tona, n. 56N, shedding of tears,
lamenting, a cry. *wada, d'why.
#H, m. g!' (), a course, order. $441, 1293941.2-2299975, feed, vb. 25 , is made. only.
FT, f. 1 9'1, 2 35, action. zi, m. 5549, the hair. here, m. ***5, the filament of
fyr9a, 3'**37, with action. a flower.
HT, 515916), wicked, cruel.

Page #539

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
495
कोध
गच्छ
anger.
ness.
HTT, m. 1 Á'A, 2 257'4, faq, -755'9, to throw.
fern, 95, quick. FHU, m. 5219, fatigue. anter, op Q5, an eunuch.
1, 352, exhausted. FITT, m. 3536V, misery, pas
#ta, n. Â S, a field. sions.
aw, n. 1 59, 2 557', happi, 1 975$, 2 V, where. *74, 175*1*015, anywhere.
ar, 39, sharp afera, 1 299T, 2 , in some cases.
Na, 159, 2 69, wicked. Fufra, vb. 9 5 , are soun- ag, ind. 1 .al. 2 237°015. a ding.
particle emphasizing an idea, Ft, m. 85.99), an instant, mo-l certainly. ment.
2, m. 31°5949, distress. 94, 935, bearable, proper.
IT grua, vb. imp. a35475-47 ,
-T, 301, one who goes. forgive. 177, 1 350(5), 2 A 1 , 49, f. 975), the river named
| Gargā. fara, f. V, the earth.
rez, vb. imp . go.
an abode, destruction, loss.

Page #540

496.
VOCABULARY
गच्छाव
गायति
ison.
ཁགཞ, འགྲོའོ, let us both go. གཞn, n. འགྲོ,2 སོང་བ, going. a, m.| གླང་པོ, 2 གླང་པོ་ཆེ་ an | riའིo[P, འགྲོ་འགྱུར་བ, will go. elephant.
TEUTA, vb, imp. XV, let one go. ཙ, m. འགྲམ, the cheek.
Toad, vb. pass. 2.1. one goes. གཞ,1 གྱར. 2 བགྲོད་པ, ༔ འགྲོ་བ་
གཤེགས་(པ), 5 སོང་(བ). 。་, - དུ• P༠༠༠་ སོང་བར་གྱུར, went, gone to,
d m. 1 མངལ, 2 ནང. the womb, arrived at.
an embryo, inside. TR, f: 1 འགྲོ་(བ), , རྣམ་པ, གa, སྙིང་པོ་ཅན, flled with.
༔ འགྲོ, way, course. བ་རྟa, ཁྲོད. dense. ཞt, ga. 1 ཕྱིན་ནས, ༧ སོང་ནས. གཙc, ཕུག, a cave. having gone or arrived.
གཙla, n. གཞུ, bow, that of Arjuna. ག, n. ལྷག. prose.
In, | ལུས, 2 ལུས་དང་ལྡན་པ༔ T, m. དྲི, smell.
the body (with the body). གསལ་, 1 ཟབ་མོ, 2 རིང, deep. Ta, n. ཀླུ, a song. m, འགྲོ, going.
Trant, f. འགྲོ་བ, one who goes. གཞན, འགྲོས་ཅན, a kind of musical THR, vb. 1 གླུ་ལེན་པ, ༢ གླ་ལེན་
note of which there are seven.། པར་བྱེད, one eings.

Page #541

गीत
a song..
गीत, n. གླུ, mar, f. གླུ་དབྱངས,
ar, གླུ་དག་བླངས་ནས, having
sung.
गीते, vb.
II. TIBETAN-SANSKRIT
sung.
གླུ་ལེན་པ,
is being sung.
गुण, m. 5, merit, good,
, 1, heavy; 2, a spiritual guide.
गुल्मक, n.
གེལ་པ,
cluster of trees.
O
of a house.
,, taken.
Ta, gd. N', having taken.
गोत्व, n. བ་ལང་ཉིད, the
advantage.
nature of a cow.
TUrrfཛིrt, f. ཡོན་ཏན་འཛིན, appre
སྐྱོང་བ.
ciating merits of others.
J. 5, possessing, f. 4, cow, cattle.
qualities, meritorious.
2, f. 5, speech. गुणवत्, f. 5. possessing, 5, white. qualities.
a clump or
,, having embra
G
ced.
TM, n. È, house, home.
62
f, f.
गोप,
ग्रहण
, vb. imp,
', take.
'', the mistress
a protector.
497
n.
, n. ', respect.
གིཊི, f. གོ ོ་རི, a goddess of the
name.
state or
fa, 55, strung, composed.
, m. 4, holding.
ग्रहण',
sense of learning).
སློབ་པ, taking (in the

Page #542

498
ग्रहण
चतुर्मुख
96W3, n. 1 RE3⁄4, 2 REG, taking, |, vb. pf, QN'4', did.
catching.
nglufa, vb. ལེན་པར་འགྱུར, he will
take.
,, low, vulgar.
, m., a mouthful.
fg, inf, in order
to make one hold.
, acceptable.
ग्राह्य,
घन,
VOCABULARY
thick
घ
347.
-,, that which kills.
घ्राण n. the nose.
च
चक्र n, འཁོར་ལོ, a wheel.
चक्रवर्तिन् m. २र्मर थे স འཁོར་ལོ་
and, also, ae, vb, pf, 55, de
sired.
སྒྱར་པ.
emperor, sovereign of world.
चक्रवाक m. ངུར་པ.the ruddy
goose.
, vb. pf. JN, did.
चक्षुस् n.
a, ind. I 5,2 5,3 5, 45, af, f. 55', clever.
an
མིག, the eye,
, ¶Ã¶, unsteady.
aafe, §, four. བཞི, four. *G., མཐའ་བཞི་ལ་དབང་པོ, four
चतुर्,
fold, Tib, lit. the lord of the four ends (of the earth).
the
agya, m. གདོང་བཞི.
one with four faces, i. e. Brahman, the
creator,

Page #543

चतुष्पद, m
ped.
चतुर्विध
agfầu, 8'4'49, of four kinds.
चन्द्रसिंह, m
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
, m., the moon.
ཟླ་བའི་སེང་གེ,༔
ཟླ་བའི་དེད་དཔོན, a pro
name.
चन्द्रसेन, m,
चुक्रोश
fan, n. སེམས, the mind.
རྐང་བཞི་པ, a quadru- fix, n. 1 སྣ་ཚོགས, 2 སྣ་ཚོགས་
55, bright, variegated.
སེམས་ཀྱི་བློ་གྲོས,
Mind-understanding, a proper
a proper
fannfa,
499
m.
name.
faraufa, vb. 3⁄43⁄43⁄4'q'5, you
are thinking.
per name.
चरण m. n. 1 རྐང་པ.2 ཞབས, | feecfvewr,gd. སྙམ་ནས, having
a foot.
thought.
aft, n., a practice, life,
farar, f. ', thought. fafad, n. 4, thought.
a. n., skin.
चाप m. 9. a bow.
fa, vb. pass. ', is being thought.
faf, f. ¶Ã¶, a medical treat
ment, curing.
fewtri, f. བྱེད་འདོད་པ, a desire to
f4c༥, adv. 1 ཡུན་རིང.2ཡུན་རིང་དུ, ❖ རིང་པོར. 4 རིང་བར, long. fa, n. མཚན་མ, a mark.
do.
fa, vb. pf. 5, threw.
, n. a dress for a monk. er, vb. pf. 595, cried.
fa, vb. pf. 4'485, cut.

Page #544

500
चेटी
བེi, f. འབངས་མོ, a maidservant.
VOCABULARY
,, to be accumulated.
⇒, n. ÑÂN, the mind. ཟེz, གལ་ཏེ, if.
,, gone, dead.
Â, Â3⁄4''', that which
springs from the mind.
छ
an umbrella.
gཝཱ, n. གདུགས, छन्द ( or छन्दक ), m. འདུན་པ, (lit.
one).
Siddhartha's
longing Charioteer.
དྷ༠༢༥, n. སྡེབ་སྦྱོར,
छन्दस्,
छाया,
a metre.
जनयते
frzfa, vb. ཡོངས་སུ་གཅོད,
(Tib. lit. affeafa ).
, m., cutting.
ज
-ཕ, 1 སྐྱེས, 2 བྱུང་བ, born. འགྲོ་མིིག, the eye
of the world, i.e. the sun.
, n. 1., 23, the world.
m.
, vb. pf., said.
, vb. pf. 995,
went.
, vb. pf. 4, took.
, vb. pf. N, took.
སྐྱེ་བོ,
जन, m,
cuts
a man.
f. 1, 2, 3, f., the mother.
shade.
fa, vb., produces.
ཐལ་མི, fa, pr-pl. 48585, being cut., vb., produces.

Page #545

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
501
जनिका
जानीया
Seife, vb, imp. 9595 , give
up.
FAXI, f. 53, that which pro
duces. afea, m. 5, produced. wfaq, m. 5*31*35, the father.
#, n. 9', birth. : 32, vb. imp. Ha'AjT34, be
victorious. Fara, vb. , they get victo
rious.
aferit. f. 62, victorious. FT (FPT ), f. 5(9), old age. su, pr. pl. 69), old. Aftaa, 53•* J3 ), broken
into pieces. sofaffeithiu, 55135 QJ59, be
ing made into pieces. 7, n. , water. Hafafer, m. 59755, the ocean. 37a, m. 1943, speed, swiftness.
FrT7, m. 15:15 455, the awak· ing state. FTTTTTM, n. 95, awaking. profá FM, vb. g s5, kept
watchful. Ara 195*21, 2 FEAN 25'975,
born. . FITX, n. 1598, the story of
the former birth of Buddha. Afa, f. 1 7.229.3 298,
family, caste, birth. FIT, ind. 1 755, 2 55°095,
ever. . 514a, pr. pl. 1, knowing arafat, vb. HAN, I know. maitat, vb. , he knows. Tratat (:), vb. 07:35"NET.
WWW, one may know.

Page #546

502
Graffe
fe, imp., know.
af, vb. q, I know.
ཨr7འེ, vb. 1 སྐྱེ, 2 སྐྱེ་འགྱུར, 3 གུར 4འགྱར,5 འགྱར་བ, 6 འབྱང
is born, comes into being. , n. 54, a net.
VOCABULARY
2
afa, 54, with a net, i. e. web or membrance.
faa, m. རྒྱལ་བ, the conqueror,
Buddha.
fe, f., the tongue.
m.
via, m.
འཚེ་བ, life.
, pr. pl. ¶Ã¶g, living.
जीवामः, vb. २ð,
जीवित n. 1 གྲོགས. ༧ སྲོག, 3 གསོན་པ, life.
queror.
टीका
| ཝཿm, f. གླལ, yawning.
ཨེཊ, རྒྱལ་བྱེད,
-ཐ, ཤེས
or
we live.
a proper name, con
जीमूतवाहन,
སྤྲིན་གྱི་བཞོན་པ, a
proper name (one whose con
veyance is the cloud).
arj. 1 འཁོགས་པ. 2 རྒས, old. | ཀེfaų, སྣང་བ, light.
worn out.
ཤེས་པ,
knows.
, gd. ', having known.
mentary.
ज्ञान, n. 1 རྟོགས, 2 ཤེས་པ, ཡེ་ཤེས, knowledge.
aifaz, ཡེ་ཤེས་ཅན, wise.
à, Ì', elder.
one who
ट
གི་རྨ, རྒ་ཆེར་འགྲེལ་པ,
3
a com

Page #547

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
503
तपोवन
tion.
ततस्
༩༥T', ind. འདི་ལྟར, for so, as བ་ཟ་ཁུ, ind.1 དེ་ནས, ༔ དེ་ཕྱིར, ༔ for instance.
དེ་བས་ན དེ་ཡིས , དེ་ལས་ 。 བt, m. ངས, a side. དེས་ན, thence, there, then, བ་༣, pron. 1 ཁོང, 2དེ, དེ་ལྟ་བུ. therefore.
དེ་ནས, 5 དེ་ཕྱིར,。 དེ་རེ, 7 འཛa, n. དེ་ཉེད. truth, true condi-|
དེའི་ཕྱིར,。 དེས,。 དེས་ན, 10. བFབ་ལ, ind. དེ་ཉིད་དུ in fact. in
འདི, 11 འོན་ཏན, then, theretruth or essential nature.
fore, that, there, *like that. འགIn, vb. pf. བཏང་བར་གྱུར, gave qI, ind. དེ་ཆོ, at that time. ཞ, 1དེ་ན, 2 དེ་ནས,3 དེ་ལ | བལ་qI, 1 འདི་ལྟ་སྟེ, 2 འདི་ལྟ་དཔེར་ དེ་ལས, དྷ དེར, there.
ན, 3 དཔེར་ན, for example. བཞ ཞ, དེ་དང་དེར, in every place. གཞུ, f. 1 ལུས, the body;2 བསྲབས, བཞ, m. 1 ཡབ, , ལྷ་ཅིག thin, less. (lit. da), the father.
drdl, f. རྒྱུད་མངས, a string, a ཞTI, ptel. 1 དེ་ལྟ, 2 དེ་ལྟར,3 lute (Indian). དེ་བཞིན, ཐ དེ་བཞིན་དུ, like that.
ཤqན་, p. དཀའ་ཐུབ, religious austeབས , --
rity. འ་ཤགཞ, m. དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ,།
ཟག་དེའn, n. 1 དཀའ་ཐུབ་ནགས, 2 དཀའ་
up.
Buddha.

Page #548

504
तमस्
ཐུབ་ཀྱི་ནགས་ཚལ,
grove.
तमस्,
n.
name.
m. 95,
तरु m. v a tree.
མུན་པ, darkness.
तमाल m. ཏ་མ་ལ, a tree of the ताप m.
,, young.
1 མུན་པ,2 སྨག་རུམ་ | (7╗, n.
, pr. pl.
threatening.
case.
VOCABULARY
a penance
तल, m, n.
(4), I think.
4, m.
. thirst, desire.
afé, ind. ́ ́, then, in that
̈¬3⁄43⁄4 ̈¬‚
, a surface, level.
ì, vb. pf. I, mained.
pron. 1
re
1
शोधन, 'cleansing).
གདུང,
therefore.
, pron. 1, 2, his (her, its).
fayfa
, like that.
, thinness (Tib, lit.
तार्य,
or
affliction.
4, 55, consisting of afflic
tion.
rrཁ, དཀའ་ཐུབ་པ,
,, loud.
m.
གདུང་བ. heat,
king of birds.
an ascetic.
མཁའ་ལྡིང, CGaruda, the
much, so long.
དེ་ཕྱིར,2དེའི་ཕྱིར,「fafat, n, རབ་རིབ, darkness.
faya, pr. pl. 35, standing.
fayfa, vb. (), stands.
ཊrཞན, ind. 1 དེ་སྲིད, 2 དེ་སྲིད་དུ, 3
just, so much, that

Page #549

II. SANSKRIT TIBETAN.
505
तिष्ठेत्
are faedt, vb. opt. š57À5. one at, pron. 1 TV, 2TVV, 3 should stay.
2019. therefore, by that. ate, n. 3981, a shore, bank. data, n. 0559, acuteness ata, 57*, acute, severe. 47, 4559, given up. I, ind, 1 05. 2 . 3 w5,but. 269, inf. 1 355, 2 RIET ger, m. SIATKI BT, a horse.
355, 3 255 , in order
to give up. TO, m. 1 951. a horse. 24T, gd. 1 955"}. 2 950.98,
having given up. gry, N351°4, equal.
with, opt. 355, one should gautareita, pl°¥W, keeping silent.
give up. afh, f. BONN, satisfaction, con atten, opt. 255, I should give
up. tentment. afra,
), aruar, vb. imp. pass. Ž , thirsty..
lit. let it be given up. Taun, f. 5:41, thirst, strong
an, m. 1 55, 2 F"(©). desire. :
giving up. à (Ta), pers. pron. 1 650, 2
caram, 1155219, not knowཁྱེད་ལ, your.
ing how to let go. doel, 1.. fire, heat ; 2 4, n. Ya, three-fold. ÈPÈ555*29981, brilliant. rę, m. 93), saviour.
63

Page #550

506
far
fa, གསུམ, three.
f, ind. ', in three ways.
faryan, n. འཇིག་རྟེན་གསུམ, the
three worlds.
of three kinds.
VOCABULARY
gfa, 435 ̊85, broken, cut.
त्रैरूप्य n.
दर्भ
༢༥, 1 བཏད, 2 སྟེར, ༔ ག5ད་པ, 4 བྱིན, given.
, gd. 55, having given.
pr. pl. 4, giving.
, vb. pf. 1, 2 §, being, vb. pf. 195*95*295, མཐོང་བར་འགྱུར, 2 གཟིགས་པར་གྱར,
saw.
aa, f. 1 44, 295, skin,
७
bark.
त्वद्,
"
( युष्मद् ), 2nd pers. pron. 1 ཁྱེད, z ཁྱོད,
you.
>
cafa,, like you.
त्वरितत्वरितम्, adv. शुरःपशुपर, दन्त, m.
quickly.
,, expert.
दक्षिण, 1 WN, right side,
2 south.
दण्ड m. སྡོང་བུ, stalk.
gave.
17, pr. pl. 54, ing, making.
qua, vb. opt. RỄ,
hold.
ì, vb. pf. 3⁄43⁄43⁄4¶, thought. སོ, a tooth.
creat
one should
दम m. དུལ་བ, subduing the pas
sions.
CH, n. 5, control.
दर, n.
5, a little, slight.
, m. q, a kind of grass.

Page #551

दर्शन,
n. 1, 2
दर्शन
qiqa, pr. pl. 1
showing.
ཊizfཞི, vb. 1 སྟོན, 2 བསྟན,
is showing.
9
burnt.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
, pr. pl. pass.
दातृ m.
༢fia, 1 བསྟན, 2 བསྟན་པ,༔ རབ་ ཏུ་བསྟན shown.
-afafara, 'q, owing to the
state of one who sees.
fa,, crushed.
*4, 24,
, 48, ten.
fa, vb., burns.
(), seeing., m.
one
བསྒྲེགས, being
གཏོང་བ, donor.
,, giving, gift.
,, controlled.
༢T༥T༥, 1 སྟེར་བྱ, 2 བདག་པོ,
heir.
an
སྟེར་བ,
fm, f. J'Ã, a girl.
दास, m. 25, a servant.
FaRT
दिनकर m.
, f. 5', a maidservant.
¿ïà, vb. ft. §, I shall give. ༢IE, m. 1 གདུང་བ, 2 སྲེག་པ, burn
ing, affliction.
दिग्देश, m, ཕྱོགས, a distant region
or country.
fq, f.
दिवस, m.n.
one who gives,
ཉི་མ, the sun.
the heaven.
507
ཉི་མ, the day
fafa, *, divine.
fed,, a god.
(ཡ, 1 མཆོག, best ; 2 མཐོ་རིམ,
3, divine.
fax, f., a direction, cardinal
point.

Page #552

508
दिशत्
दिशत् pr. pl., (Tib. lit. spreading).
दीप m.
sense of, bright).
दुःखविपाक,
à, vb. shines.
ཊའི་rཊེ, vb. 1 སྟེར་(བ), 2 བྱིན་པ,i
given.
ཝཾ, 1 ཡངས་པ, ༡རིང, long. ཝུ་ཝཱ, 1 སྡུག, z སྡུག་བསྔལ་(བ), mis
ery, sorrow.
दुर्ग n.
VOCABULARY
སྒྲོན་མ, a light (in the
sity.
སྡུག་བསྔལ་རྣམ་པར་
སྨྲེན་པ, that the consequence
of which is misery.
ཅུ:faa, སྔག་བསྔལ་ཞིང,
gradil, f. Ã ̃Â ́Â ̧
showing, m., a bad man. ཅུfär, གཟུང་བར་དཀའ, diffcult to
control.
,, unfortunate.
རྩུགྀfe,f.ངན་འགྲོ,
trouble.
'', it fa, 5, foolish.
sorry.
milch.
difficulty, adver
misfortune,
दृढ
༊ཊེ་ན, 1 རྙེད་དཀའ, 2 རྙེད་པར་
53, difficult to get.
ཅུfäགིa, རྣམ་པར་མ་ཐུལ, ill-behaved,
badly educated.
༊t, : དཀའ་བ, ཋ དཀའ་ཐུབ,
difficult to do.
ཅུ68, n. ཉེས་པར་སྤྱོད་པ, misdeed.
,, faulty, defective.
རྩ་ཡལཱུཆ,
दुष्प्रयुक्त,
दृढ,
ཉེས་པར་སྦྱར, wrongly
used.
दूर n. ཐག་རིང, distant. x0ra, རིང་དུ་བྱས་པ, removed to
a distance.
45(), strong, firm.

Page #553

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
509
509
द्वय
ET, f. 29, the eye. afen, m. 34*3q, one with.a
body. Epaire, vb. HÍS, are being seen.
ala, m. 1 , 2 BWF, fault, 22, 1 AFN, 2 HÍS, 3 ocês, defect. seen.
da, n. , destiny. . . eft, f. *'(), a view. . stafa, m. 1, ataifea, a doorgeçi, 8d. 1 HÍ=, 2 HEJA. keeper. 13 * ŽE*AN, 4 à aigh,
-qfa, f. 25*39; (one) with lustre. having seen.
kert, vb.ft. -7996, you will see. da, m. 17, 2 3*$9. a god, lord. 124,(?) n. I'F& to, a re
quisite thing: dat, f. Bat, a goddess.
1904, 95, to be seen. daar, f. , a god or goddess. 94, inf. FEA5, to see. dant, m. LN, a multitude HH, arĝ5. desirous of of gods.
seeing. det, m. WQ, a country. TE., m. IIT, one who sees. anal, f. 935, teaching. ka, y, quick. daterare, vb. pf. 989591, taught. ) (, m. 95, a tree. de, m. gV, the body. . . 3*, TĚH, two-fold.

Page #554

510
VOCABULARY
two.
གཉིས, in tw༠ ways,
སྣ་་ཞི་བ་, སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གཉིས, thirty- 4 མ་ལགས, 5མི, ༠ མི་འགྱུར་
(བ),1 མིན་(པ), ༔ མེད་(པ), རྣt, n. 1 སྒོ, , ཆབ་སྒོ, a door. R, 1གཉིས, 2 གཉིས་སུ་ག, ,
བྱ ཡོད་མ་ཡིན, 1༠ ཡོད་མིན, not གཉིས་པོ, two.
གr, n. 1 གྲོང, ༣ གྲོང་ཁྱེར, 。
town. ཞིar, ind. 1 རྣམ་གཉིས, ༧ རྣམ་པར་
ཀa, m. སྲོག་མེད་པ, not a lis
ing being. *r, ind. གཉིས་ཀ, in two ways, , f. གར་མཁན་མ, a dancing (Tib. lit. two, both).
girl. . fu, 1 གཉིས,་, གཉིས་པ,
ཙ, m. འདམ་བུ. a species of reed. second. Ri, m. གཉིས་འཐུང, an elephant. |
R, t. འདུད་པ, salutation. fRI, m. རྐང་གཉིས, having two གཞུ, ind. མན, but not. feet, i. e. biped.
བའི, f. ཆུ་བོ, a river. རྗེa, རྣམ་པ་གཉིས, of two kinds.
གཞུ, ind. 1མ་ཡིན་ནམ, 2མིན་ནམ, fr, n. n. གླིང, an island.
is it not.
འབེ, vb. 1 དགའ་འགྱུར་ཞིང, ༧ a, 1མ, 2མ་ཡིན, ༔ མ་ཡིན་པ,། དགའ་བར་འགྱུར, delights.

Page #555

नन्दन m. བུ,
m.
person.
a, f. 5. joy, rejoicing.
नपुंसक, མ་ནིང, eunuch. न- पुद्गल m. གང་ཟག་མེད་པ, not a
नन्दन
man.
a son.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
न पुरुष m. སྐེས་བུ་མེད་པ, not a
न-मनुज, m.
न- पोष m. གསོ་བ་མེད་པ, not
thriving one (in the sense of a man).
, n., the sky.
a
not a man.
༥-༥་༢༥,ཤེད་བུ་མེད་པ,
not a man.
नागकन्यका
, m., policy, way.
avཝ, n. 1 སྤྱན, 2 མིག. the eye.
नर, m.
མི,
नरक m. དམྱལ་བ, the hell.
, ind., salutation.
auenfa, vb. Y¶°5'4, salutes.
नम्न,
དུད་པ,
bent.
, f. 554(5), submissiveness, humility.
, m., the king.
नरपति,
4, གསར་པ, new,
m.
ཤ fཞི་r་ཊེ, vb. 1 ཡོད་པ་མ་ཡིན. ཡོད་མེན, does not exist.
ཤེད་ལས་སྐྱེས་མེད་པ,avafཝེ, vb. ཉམས་པ, disappears,
vanishes.
སེམས་ཅན་མེད་པ, not a
a man.
न सत्त्व m.
being.
नाग, m.
མིི་བདག, the king.
ཀླུ་
511
a serpent.
2
41, f.. the son of a Nāga.
नागकन्यका, f. ཀླའི་བུ་མོ, a girl of a
Nāga.

Page #556

512
VOCABULARY
नागानन्द
निःश्वसिति स्म
drama.
drama.
Fiatal, n. 9795579'9, the 7747, ão a name.
serpent-joy, name of a drama. 1 774, ind. 1 ,2 N 9. 3 atot. Tāt, a she-serpent.
@ng'a, by name, indeed. 712x, 14°475, a drama.
FR97, m. 25991, the hero of a 7724, vb. imp. °7557ŽAI
1919), represent dramatically. Iffet, f. 35984, the heroine of a azafa, vb. 959735. represents dramatically.
are (728), m. 5574, the hell. STEFATH, N4599, to be re-i7rt, f. got a female. presented dramatically.
7T2, m. 35W, destruction. atal, n. 19, a dramatic representation.
72A, m. n. OWNE5-. remov
ing, causing to perish. ArchT, 95735*31, not self.
are (TTTT), f. , the nose, trunk. 719, 5217., lord, master, pro
0 Ffet, 1 preť2. 2.315, 3 35, 4 tector. Trat, ind. P234TH, various.
59 9,5 WG org, is not,
does not exist argad, 5979993*345. after the
I the aifera, 5527*, an unbeliever. prologue (Tib. lit. having recited the Nandi).
faefefa F1, vb. 35 A, sighed.

Page #557

ways.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
513 नि:संशय
निराभरण. fazeiktu, EN, undoubtedly.
farqirra, 1755'99, killed (Tib. far: Prapezi, TN 115, incapable. 1 lit. made deprived of life). frientra, T agung, without fagfern, BB9, falling. nature.
fagu, ASV, skilful. fata, 597(51), eternal.
faqat: vb. pf. 21075, farma, m. 59, eternal time, al
wrote down. farefira, Evy 15'955. shown. : PPAT, 1 A5. 2 H TV, any sign. fatera, m. n. 38111°S, destruction.
faalfea, za!"41. closed. faparan, pr. pl. DHW'95, think- Parera, Erl, sure, certain. ing.
fah, m. *EN Sã4711', a relifrasfra, vb. 1 $5*215 35 25
gious observance (Tib. lit. 95,3 525 1, they revile, fazafatet, f. rigid observance of blame.
penance. faxat, f. $5. blame.
farm, gd. Asian TV, having refaraça, *5445°9'9, blamed strained.
(Tib. lit. farçaita, blamable). | farz-, prefix. 3011, without. fafaega, inf. *$5. to blame.
FARCTICUT, 195592A, without fara, $5:473 ŽV, to be blamed.
an ornament.
64

Page #558

514
VOCABULARY
defect.
निरावरण farracu, ga:g5.981, free from fareta, 9575 , free from harm,
covering. farrer, Á 89, devoid of hope. Farefata, vb. opt. ANKAR95, Force, 9974, suppressed.
one should remove completely.
faldna, m. 891°), intentness. fareta, m. 129751,2 2017,
suppression, cessation, nirvāņa. Pasida, 1995, that which comfreya, vb. imp. 3989, exa- pletes. mine, ascertain.
fatida, 99, becomes accomfr69yra:, vb. 37445*9. we two plished. ascertain.
farafékt, f. 997, that which Foreca, gd. 959 , having as- completes. certained.
faafar, n. 1 599959'9, 2 sy' faced, vb. 555. is being ascer
ངན་འདས་པ, ༔ མྱ་ངན་ལས་ tained, examined.
འདས་པ, nirvana. fadira, 9725. devoid of medicine.
fafanu, 5*555*A, disgusted. farfa, 55141. came out. fafara, f. 65.954, disgust or faria, m. *335. coming out
weariness of vanities of the (Tib. lit. ascending). Forest, m. n. 59. a spring farffa, f. w ag', bliss,
world.

Page #559

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
515
निर्झरिणी
• . filosten happiness (Tib, lit. happiness farangal, *ggia, for the disof the mind).
appearance. farlfrunt, f. EN 45"53319. farateyl, vb. imp. ATVIRI FAT, in
one that carries out the mind. form. agreeable.
fara gafa, vb. * , I inform, francia, 1935, causing to cease. show. farosat, sl, turning
pafera, 57°21, sharp. back.
fatera, m. 231°(5), certainty. fuerte, vb. imp. 214, turn faraa, STO , steady.
farfeca, 24", certain. farchna, 55859, with abun
fque, 7711°81, seated. dant nivāra, a kind of rice
growing without cultivation. facena, vb, pf. 257°3, sat down. farate, m. 1 359791, 2 ag, fanita, 3557894, without a
dwelling. fatarazita, 25745 ŽIVII, fit for fasarea, gd. 55979N, having dwelling.
drawn. frafai, f. 1979, turning back. fase godt, vb. ft. 295*295, 1
shall go out. farza, gd. g , having
facent24, vb. opt. 267*315.995, turned back.
baco.
cause.

Page #560

516
VOCABULARY
निष्कम्य
non-self.
I should come out, i.e. re- dq, m. 1 3578, 259'554, nounce the world.
3 ཤལ་ད་བྱེད་པ༔ a leader... Frame, gd. 55999, having come out.
tama, *25*31. one with the faalaa, 1 VAR JS, 2 Enviat
eyes.
derera, n. 957315. the state of འབྱུང་བ, came out. farosataa, 563/27995, without auta, n. 16.590315 (). the any object.
absence of good qualifications. fronet, 295°55, fruitless, futile. ta, ind. 5, certainly not. faentel, 2013 , passed
, n. 69752958, rethrough, fulfilled.
nunciation. Farfan, vb. 97115, 1 kill. . , f. . a ship. boat. ofta, 1 29, 2 595, a low man,
27.1. a low man, 2014, m. EATH'SI, the science of vile, foolish? ste, pg"T, blue. 3, È 4. a ptcl. having an interro
78, m. 1 31911, the subject of a gative force.
syllogism; 2 45492, a wing. Į, m. , a man
qf972, m. 358*871. a bird. Tufa, m. Veľ, the king. 98, m. n. 1* 9918, (lit. bank,
logic, justice.

Page #561

पड़सन्न
ahore), a འདམ, ཉྩ འདམ་རྫབ, 4
E4, mud, swamp.
《 སམ,*འདམ་རྗབ, sunk down
in mud.
, 12, 22, five.
पश्ञ्चदश,
,, fifth.
II. SANSKRIT TIBETAN
བཅོ་ལྔ་པ, ifteenth.
,. five hundred.
, m., a war drum.
पर्ण,
,, violent, sharp-sounding.
n. 1 འདབ་མ, 2 ལོ, a leaf.
', learned.
fs,
,, ', falling down.
rfa, m. 1 བདག, 2 བདག་པོ, lord.
an infantry, a
vf༥, f. དཔུང་བུ་ཆུང
footman.
qet, f. 5, a wife.
परतस्
पत्र, n. འདབ་མ, a leaf.
q, m. 2, a way.
༥༢, n. 1 རྐང་པ, the leg; ? གོ་འཕང,
a position ; 3 གནས, C
517
a cause,
place, position; 4 ཚིག,
tence, speech, word.
ལཿ, n. 1 པད, 2 པ་དྨ, a lotus.
पपात,
ཁྭvie, vb. pf, ༔ འགྱེལ་གྱར,༔ བབས་
1
a
n.
sen
གྱུར.༔ རབ་ཏུ་འབྲད་(འབྲང་)ཅང
fell down.
पत्र
q, vb. pf. 5'53⁄4, asked. पयस् འོ་མ, milk.
π, 1 (i) HXT, (ii) 435, good, beat ; 2 (i) ཕ་རོལ, (ii) གཞན, other, alien; 3 adv. (i) Hö'5, (ii) ̊5, pre-eminently.
, ind. 9, from other.

Page #562

518
परित्यागिन्
4, 154, highest, best; 2 af, ''3', exhausted.
adv. (i) མཆོག་ཏུ, (i) (i) ཤིན་ཏུ,rའི་ན,ཡོངས་སུ་བསྐྱོད་པ, very
extremely.
agitated.
rfཊིrgre, ཡོངས་སུ་ཟིན་པ, taken. परिग्रह m. ཡོངས་སུ་ཟིན་པ, taking
परस्पर, * *ཕྱིར,
one another.
, m. 52', power.
पराग m. རྡུལ, the pollenof a
flower.
परागवत् ind.
རྡུལ་ལྟར,
pollen of a flower.
पर्याय,
परम
m.
VOCABULARY
synonym.
vrསུཝ, གཞན་དུ་ཕྱོགས, having
the face turned away.
རྣམ་གྲངས,
ing for.
परार्थ m.
like
the
, pr. pl. 2, search
གཞན་གྱི་དོན, the intereat
a course, a
of others.
qft, prefix, 'N, round, ex
cessively, fully.
¶ftama, pr. pl. Ñ ́аз $5, walking about.
qf, gd. 15, having received; 2 ཡོངས་སུ་བ་བཀུར་
, having paid homage (Tib. lit. परिपूज्य, having worshipped).
afa, f. £'*', service,
attendance.
परिच्छेद m.
ལེའུ, a chapter.
afesa, vb. opt. Wa'y ̈3⁄4a,
one should give up.
rfteue7, gd. 1 དོརནས,༠ ཡོངས་ སྤངས་ཏེ, ༔ ཡོངས་སུ་བཏང་ནས.
having given up.
परित्यागिन्,
ཡོངས་སྦངས་པ,
gives up,
one who

Page #563

ment.
परिपूरयत्
पादप
qfqq¶A, pr. pl. ÎNɶ¶¶, t. 95, examination.
f.
making perfect.
q, f., assembly, atten
&'y'¶'
, vb. imp. གྱར་ཅིག, let it be ful6lled. परिभोग m. ཡོངས་སུ་སྤྱོད་པ, enjoy
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
परिमल, m. དྲི,
smell.
परिवर्त, m ལེའུ, a chapter.
afada, vb. 35, turns
round, revolves.
परिवार m. Rä, train, retinue.
,, surrounded.
परिशुष्यति, vb.
'म घर བྱེད, it is being thoroughly
dried up.
परिश्रम m.
exhaustion.
¶¶, f. 25, an assembly. vRed༥, ཡོངས་སུ་སྤང་བར་བྱ, to be
avoided.
dants.
पाव m. n. ཡལ་འདབ, a sprout,
twig with leaves.
पशु m. ཕྱགས, a beast.
2
519
, ind. 1, 2, after.
west.
पश्चिम, बुन, ༥༥, imp. 1 ལྟོས, ༡ལྟོས་ཤིག,
पश्यतः, vb. 4, they two are
seeing.
qf, vb. pf. 5, touched.
see.
पाठक m.
पाणि, m.
hand.
'', fatigue, 13, vb. imp. 45 (preferably
), let one protect.
पादप m.
སྨྲ་མཁན, talking.
1 ཕྱག,∶ ལག་པ, the
, m. 1, 2 QAN, the leg.
ཤིང,
a tree.

Page #564

520
yanffaast
पाच, n. : རྐང་པ་ཆུ.2 རྐང་པ་ལ་ | fių, m. i ཕ, a ཨཔ, the father. གཏོར་བའི་ཆུ, the water for पितृ-पितामह m. ཕ་ཇོ, the father and
washing the feet.
the grandfather.
¶¶fa, VN, belonging,, pained, op
to a worldling.
पान, n. འཐུངས་པ, drinking.
སྡིག, .in: སྐྱོང་བ,
पाप, n.
पाल, m.
VOCABULARY
पाय
a protector.
पालन, n.
སྐྱོང་བ, protection.
vre", vb. imp. 1 སྐྱོང, 2 སྲུངས་
Я, protect.
पालयसि, vb. ८, you protect.
fa,, protected.
pressed.
ya, m. 5, best, most excellent. Oringinally pungava means a bull, but at the end of a compound it gives the above sense.
k, m. 3, a person, man.
5.༥, ༔ དག་པ,2 བསོད, holy, a
cred, religious or moral merit.
བསོད་ནམས་འདོད་པ, desi
पुण्यकाम,
rous of punya.
,, being protected.
སུཝ, 1 བུ. 2 སྲས, ༔ སྲས་པོ,
, m., a noose.
alms bowl.
पुनर्, ind. 1 W, 2, and, also, again, but.
पिण्डपाल, n. ལྷུང་བཟེད, fret, m. 1 ཕ་མ,2 ཡབ་ཡུམ, the watsi, f. འབྱུང་བ, leading to
parents,
rebirth.
a son.

Page #565

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
521
521
पुम्स्
प्रकम्पते yup, m. 194,2 43, 3 , a reggu, m. N'F, the forefather. male, person.
yeah, ind. D***993, as before. gt, n. 615, a town.
- far, f. 'QT9.1 g gee, ind. 0595, before, in front of.
དུ་འགྲོ་བ་ཅན, coming before. 944, m. 1 9. 2 , a person, man.
927, ind. 9'55, different. gafa, N'A5N, having the hairs gferat, f. 7, the earth.
of the body erect, thrilled with E, 1 ŜN, 2 gV*, asked. gar, n. 21°59, a flower.
TP, n. 59, the back of the body. qar, f. 265*37, worship.
ate, m. VPS, maintaining. youd, vb. 1 a 5 (a), 2
tastat, f. WER35', leading to བཀུར་བར་འགྱུར, is worshipped,
-, prefix, 595, good, well, very, respected.
excessive. quf, 1975,2 3, full. g&, 1 ', 2 ģ5. previous, old,
wafea, 545421a, mani(adv. 353, before) : 3-97, 7d, vb. brak 295,
joy.
rebirth.
fested.
the east.
shakes.

Page #566

: 522
VOCABULARY
प्रकरण
प्रतिपादन mano, 545*35*7, a treatise (esp. supera, *IN, affectionate. introductory).
sfareta, n. 'Ma, supplication. fifa, vb. 54°535, makes.
sferici, gd. 39215, having gmaile, vb. imp. NE5, do.
saluted. year, m. 54, excellence.
stą, m. 2699, a leader, guide. AIRTA, adv. TW2195, openly.
safe, vb. pf. IN, went away. auf, ', scattered.
sifa, ind. 21, with regard to, safa, f. 554&o, nature. about. SERANT, 24, tumbled down. f , gd. NT NEW, having te, f. 1959.2 3950, the
gone back people, subjects.
sfare, m. g!"Ngga8 3191, an asi, f. 92°54, wisdom.
adversary, foe. Igra, gd. 3&55*257', (Tib.
ÎN TIL Sfantas, Ásg85°45'3, to be
understood. lit. having got spread) having |
afaeft, f..987994, ascertainment. made known. suara, vb. pf. 34 ROBRI, saluted. knowledge.
sfane, f. Dlat, a way. fyras, gd. 955*98, having sa
aff41ca, n. 959981, setting forth.
"1&dom.
luted.

Page #567

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
523 प्रतिबुद्ध sfage, 1991, awakened. Sa, 255"YH, (n.) perception, sferare, m. 35A, appearance.
evident. sferica, gd. 839.5, having pro- ra, m: 1 t5, a cause, condimised.
tion ; 2 398, apprehension, sfarga, 357, situated, remained. knowledge. afafyatra, adv. 257*#*975, as
steller, 1999**5'4ào. 2 soon as (he was) situated.
རྐྱེན་རང་བཞིན, consisting in ཐ sfanfaa, m. EHSANA, condition.
rebirth, transmigration. Fernan, 99 55*29951, having a setten, vb. imp. 2nd pers. sing. ! condition. 1985*@, take. Serenife, '
o n , the condivalfa, f. 1 5978°(5), 2 981's,
tion and others.
teatefan, 59, an enemy, hostile. knowledge.
sadar, f. = 5975), knowing rata, gd. 999, having depended
precisely. on, depending.
gara, vb. pf. 217172A, resateregcma, m. 1 99*88 99
AFR95,2 55995, depen- raka, m. 95-9, day-break, mordent origination.
plied.
ning, dawn.

Page #568

524
प्रथम
VOCABULARY
94, 55, first.
-8༞, 1 སྟེར,2 འབྱང་བ,
gives, producing.
sefameu, ¶Ã3'4'98', hav-fa, f.
one who
ing gone round from left to right (as a mark of respect).
, n.
4, showing.
प्रपञ्च m. ', details, creation,
2
|प्रभोति ( = प्रभवति),
able.
the expression of conceptually differentiated reality in the प्रमाद m.
world,
[5]vཨཱཿཨ་à, vb. རབ་ཏུ་ཀློག་པར་བྱེད,
is being read well.
प्रबन्ध m. , continuity.
प्रबोध m.
प्रभव m. JN, origin.
wwwft, vb. 1 མཐུ་ཡོད, ༔ འབྱུང་བ,
becomes, able,
into
being.
प्रयुक्त
TH, f., a ray, beam of light,
lustre.
ཝཱ, m. 1 ནས་མཐུ, 2 མཐུ, power.
', beginning, but
རྟོགས་པ, understanding.
comes
at the end of compounds it means 'beginning with', 'and others.
vb. ནུས,
བག་མེད, carelessness.
ཡུ་t, རབ་ཏུ་དགའ་བ,delighted,
happy.
, m., freedom.
, vb. imp., 2nd pers. sing.
རབ་ཏ་བྱིན་ལ,give,
प्रयुक्त,
becomes
, vb. opt. 2nd pers. sing.
3454, you should endeavour.
ployed.
1 སྦྱར, 2 རབ་སྦྱར་བ,
em

Page #569

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
525
प्रयोक्त
प्रशम
news.
film, m. Zi, one who em- farfa, 69744599, 1 enter. ploys, an author.
sfera, gd. 59'5991V 5, having reita, m. 1 A, 2 5455 ,
entered. application, performance. taitaa, n. 1 51°(5), 2 na
fae, 6a, entered. purpose, object.
Safet, f. 1 2594taking an sada, vb. 1. 205,2 254, active part in worldly activity :
3 257:45. 95. proceeds, 2 BHV, a story, account,
springs. sarina, pr. pl. 2965, causing nafta, 24*5*55A, turned a re
to roll. fa4, m. 34*5**45*25*27
cluse, a religious mendicant. investigation, examination. Jaafa, vb. 595935, renounces fas, 54*5*87a/, cast away,
the world. thrown away.
txier, f. a 5. praise. afar, vb. imp. 955429584, +axifaa, 45545J'a, praised. enter.
(Tib. lit. pirata, praiseafarifà, vb. gyd, enters. afara, vb. imp. 951592595 GITA, m. 54 . cessation, extinc
s, to let him enter. I tion.
worthy).

Page #570

526
प्रशमन n.
tinction.
प्रशान्त,
प्रशमन
VOCABULARY
རབ་ཞི་བ, cessation,ex
xf,
རབ་ཏུ་ཞི་བ, calmed,
tran
quilized.
7ew,: རབ་དང་བ,2 རྡུལ་དང་བ,
pure, clear.
58Iཊཿ, m. 1 དད་པ, 2 དྲིན, favour.
555 clearing,
celebrated.
, vb. imp. 1 ¶¶¶HẾ ̃, 2 རབ་ཏུ་དད་བྱོས, be gracious or
propitious.
,, to be struck.
1ཇུIcགི,f. རབ་ཏུ་སིམ་བགྱིད, de
lighting.
fa, f. 25, appearance,
production.
,355, inclined, bowing hum
bly down.
adv., before, first.
प्राकू,
प्राज्ञ m.
प्राण,
rendering clear.
life.
af, vb. imp. 5'9'' mfu, m.
འདོད, let it be ful6lled.
being.
',
प्राप्य
མཛངས་པ, wise.
m.
1 སྲོག. ༠ སྲོག་ཆགས,
renowned,,, appeared.
སྲོག་ཆགས,
a living
r8, 1 ཐོབ, 2 ཕྱོན, ༔ བབ, ༔ སླེབ་ 45, attained, arrived.
rft, f: 1 རྙེད, 2ཐོབ་པ, attainment. བྷཡ, gd. 1 ཐོབ,2བརྟེན་ནས,
, having come, got.
3

Page #571

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
527
बत
प्रारोदीत् srdata, 5V, wept.
gat, f. 37618, apprehension, sa, 3359, a garland hanging
understanding. down to the breast.
dæmè, vb. 3*953, we look. frare, m. 1 25935, 2 ŜHV, 3 aar, 59112195*29, wise. ཕོ་བྲང, a palace.
garaż, vb. , we two look. fxa, 1 579.(6), 2 59235, 3
99.4 4'1,5 HEQ A, 6 ur, f. 47552V*M, the hood of a HER Ž, dear, beloved, plea
snake.
fera, m. 972514*39, a snake. sing.
. fataifach, m. :99*275', speaking fet, n. 1 394. 2 BIN'], a
kind or pleasing words. fant, f. 597901, a beloved wife.
1961, qu'7'21979, partaking
of the reward. sita, 1 572, 25979., pleased.
Ha, m. 395*78914, the siffa, f. 1 5973. 2 5947°21. plea- absence of the fruit.
sure. had, vb. Azal, looks.
*, ind. J®, an expression of
fruit.
joy, satisfaction, or wonder.

Page #572

528
VOCABULARY
new.
arm.
बन्धु , m. གཉེན, a relative. TT=qa, m. གཉེན, a relative friend. བཝ༦, (with ཙ༢)vb. pf. དྲངས; a, 1 བྱིས་པ. a child, 2 གསར་བ, drew out.
new. བགེ vb. pf. 1 སྨྲས, 2 རྣམ་པར་ #Ter, f. གཞོན་ན་མ, a girl. སྨྲས, said.
T, m. n. མཆི་མ, a tear. ཡོབ་, n. 1 སྟོབས, མཐུ, strength,
གཙུ, m. 1 ཕྱག, 2 དཔུང་པ, the 3 དཔུང, an army. ཝཞཞཞ, སྟོབས་ལྡན, strong.
ཞིགཙུ*, རྣམ་མང, much. a great. antar, m. violence.
T, 1ཕྱི.2 ཕྱི་པ, outside, ex. སོག་རྫུན, m. སྦྱིན, the cloud. ternal. ཐའ་འིa, སྟོབས་དང་ལྡན་པ, strong
| Rad, pr. pl. 1 རྣམ་པར་འཛིན, 2 ཝཙུ, 1 མང, ༣ མང་པོ, 3མང་ལྡན་པ། རྣམ་བཟུང, carrying, holding.
• ཤིན་ཏུ་མངས་པར་འགྱུར་བ.s fཝིཤུ, m. ཐིགས་པ, a drop. མང་དུ, many, much.
ཞིག, n. གཟུགས, a relection. 《གཞུ, ind. ལན་མང, frequently,
fཞིན, n. ཁང, a hole.
, n. ས་བོན, a seed. བཞེ, vb. གདུང་བར་བྱེད, oppre88es, troubles.
ཁ, n. མཁས་པ, learned.

Page #573

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
529
भद्र
tion.
go, m. NVTN, awakened, the a:, vb. opt. ÍN, you should Buddha.
say (Tib. lit. imp. say). Tre! f. Š. intellect, talent. fe, vb. imp. ÝV, say. gfa. Ž 34one with intellect. gfgha, 1 AAROS, 2 Ő 29. wise. fr, f. 1 4171, devotion ; 2 , atfer, m. f. 35'89, wisdom, su- | decoration, embellishment. preme knowledge.
Afgha, 1845. one with devoafetra, m 55 8A THR G510,
an aspirant to bodhi, supreme paral, i šal 29, 2 st 25 knowledge.
390, a blessed one, glorious. aifa, vb. ****l, says.
Horaret, f. AFGV2958. glorious. Hard, n. 62°45" 7'4, cele
HA, 1 57985,2 578, broken. bacy or the duties of a religious student.
*, m. 259. bent (or contrac, pr. pl. 13 A, 2 \V'ngl. tion).
unfa, vb. 1 PĚ59), 2 $. I say. 1917, vb. opt. 5, should say. #fuckf, vb. ft. 5-959, I 1914, vb. opt. a. I should shall say.
HB, 1935, 2 9351, good, nice.
saying.
say.
66

Page #574

530
VOCABULARY
भय
༥༥,
འཇིགས་(པ), fear. wwxc, འཇིགས་བྱེད. fearful.
avcrv, འཇིགས་ལྟ་བ.
n.
one who
मान्
74g, vb. imp. འགྱུར, let it be. arཊེ, vb, *ཕྱིན, is (Tib. comes).
sees fear.
xཊུ་, m, ཇོ་བོ, lord, master. ཞུrཊིw, རྗེའི་སྲས་མེ, the daughter
of the lord.
ཨཽཥྭ, m. སྲིད་པ, transmigatory exis
tence, birth, samsara.
༥ཝཱí, n. ཁང་པ, a house.
༥Crfཡོ, vb. 1 ཡིན, I am. aན་fགི་ཨ་༠༥, རབ་ཏུ་སྦྱོར་བར་བྱ, to be,
भवितव्य,
(Tib. lit. to be applied).
*qfauqf@, •fra, vb. ft. 1 འགྱུར, 2 འབྱུང་འགྱུར,、
༣༢%༢, m. སྲིད་པ་ཟད, destruction
of bhava, or samsära.
འབྱུང་བར་འགྱུར, will be. ཤའེའོ, vb. opt. 1 སྐྱེ, 2 གྱུར, ༔ འགྱུར་ (བ),4འགྱར་འཚལ,。 ཡོད, ཡོད་གྱུར,z སྲིད, may be.
*it, peraonal pron. 1 ཁྱེད, ? ཁྱོད,
ཕ
you, thou.
6
rwfa ༠fPཨཱཿ, vb. 1 གྱུར་(པ), a འགྱུར,| w@r (for aat ), vb. opt. འགྱུར་ ༔ འགྱུར་བ,4 འབྱུང་བ་ཡིན་(པ) 5ཡོད་པར་འགྱར,is, are ; be
མཛོད, may be.
comes, become.
7ཝཊཿ:, vb. འགྱུར, they two are.
འབྱང་བ,
ܘ
ܘ
ܡ
-Mཁq; n. སྐལ་བ, luck, fortune.
སྣོད, having, enjoying.
भाज्,
arfrt, སྨྲས speaking, talking.

Page #575

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
531
fa alfa, vb, WEYSI, shines. Hre, m. 5, a load, burden. HTC farura, amalig, having
n. 59, light. HTT, m. ÅH, the sun.
at, 77121, bright. for, m. 91195, a monk. faffet, f. Záv, a wall. foafer, vb. 978545 35, cuts into
loaded.
Area, n. 99975, India. profa, m. 59*35, the sun of
Bhțgu.
parts.
#Ta, m. 1 587 1,2 5647, 3 4 , 35941, enjoyed, used, eaten.
597.4 4WV*), disposition yasha, 395995, remnants of mind, idea, thought ; and of the food eaten.' object, thing ; existence ; dis
YF, m. 1 2197981, 2 317, the position of the mind.
arm, hand. 1991, F. A VV', meditation. , m. WARÓJ a serpent. araufa, vb. a NVS, meditates. yak, m. 49'91, a serpent. 31Tf. 95, a language. y9aera, n. 1 947.59778, 2 ard, vb. XV, speaks.
1995, the three worlds. *1977, , speaking, talking.
4 f. 1 , the earth (45, rfa, HTETE, (wrongly area in Skt. text). on the earth), 2 95, ( lit.

Page #576

532
VOCABULARY
भतल
मता
ground.
right.
Yare), n. the surface of the #, m. 1955*4,2 59'a, discarth, 3 vnt. ( lit. tjeret), tinction, difference."
ora, n. $9, medicine. 4a, 1 5*4, (a) being, (b) be- 17:, ind. , a vocative particle, O.
come; 2 (i) 955BÍ, (ii) 235 | 310, m, 1 $5. 2 EVİK, enA, being ; 3 Wagat'a, joyment,
afora, m. 76531*34, a serpent. Hall, gd. 45 , having been.
212, 25, Tibet. afat, f. , the earth.
997, n. 9 A, moving. Hery, adv. 15, again.
stufa, vb. fara á A, moves afforg, Tvl 5, most
round. muo, n. 59, an ornament. 7, f. 99, the brow. fora, 977, adorned. m. 959, a bee.
HOT, ER, beautiful. ?, 1 95°41, 2 GË59, bear-aft, m. 59, a gem, precious ing, having. carrying.
stone. TUT, adv. 995, excessively. Ha, 398, considered, thought. #ray, FÈMIA '9, to be feared. Haar, m. 87°55*4), a proper name.

Page #577

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
533
मन्द्र
nent.
beautiful.
B
मति afa, f. 1 STEV. 2 (1) Ř (ii) 794, m. i, a man.
, view, thought, intel- HA:TO, W5971-, those of lect, thought
which the mind is pre-emiArfa, f. 957'21N, devotion to me.
Haga, ( *#14a, born or being afecte, m. 457552749, se- in mind). W ow , swift as paration from me.
the mind. HYT, 1 255, 2 $4, sweet. nata, 55 Niqa (lit. IoT, HET TAIT, m. 29:39, speak- that which goes to the mind), ing sweetly.
#atu, m. 124, desire, 94, 195, inside ; 7. 75, middle
desired objeci. (955, *) ; 3 ;IV, middle: galer. FEV, pleasing. 4 590' 5, within the , m. 975, a charm, spell. middle.
afat, m. atij, a minister. #77, 59*81, being in the middle.
#97, m. 9935. a moun24, f. 59'89, the middle.
tain of the name (l'ib. means #99, n. 1 15.2 W 819 (778,
Vindhya). with the mind), the mind. Ha, hoy, deep, grav
.

Page #578

534
· VOCABULARY
महाराज
मन्यु pay, m. ÉNS, wrath e n, m: 1 3,2 37, 3877, 4 tant, vb. 1 NW, 298, I con- 269, great. sider.
#49%, 'vb. pf. 967475., 44, pers. pron. 1457, 2 4597
worshipped. 31,3 457'; my. Hefi, m. *55°Ý5, a great sage 449, n. 95731985, the feel (Tib. lit. afy, m).
ing or notion of #H, mine. E#, * 'A, old, aged, (Tib. -44, W 9 91, an affix indi- lit. -107, suffering).
cating 'made of', 'consisting. | 481, 12, 2 6917), great. or composed of '.
HECHT, m. 857952highHTT, m. ', a peacock.
souled. AKU, n. REA, death. HETTA, m. 3945*34, the great 46, m. 9° 587.
God, Śiva.
HETTH, 677 , the great 471, m. n. Ŝ R, dirt, impurity.
naked (?). HAT, m. law, a mountain of Heart, m. art.921, illustrithe name.
ous, highly virtuous. Apract, f. &*p!**39*81. a pro- HERIA, SIV, a great
king.
per name.

Page #579

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
535
महिष #fen, m. 79, a buffalo. #feet f. 815, a she-buffalo. HET, f. V, the earth. HT, ind. Æ, not.
HIH, n. 9, meat.
HTĘ, f. 151, 2 way, the mother.
HTETA, pr. pl. 979 345, being mad
(Tib. 1997, with joy). H17, m. 1 8,2 g'a,
honour, respect. HITH, n. 1 5. the mind, 2 adj.
ཡིད་ལ, belonging to the mind, Allah, m. 552. having a high
opinion of oneself. 912, 75Ŝ, respectable. #r, m. 357, the personified evil
principle, the evil one, kāma.
मुकुट Hrau, 455937, the nymph of
Māra. Atea, m. 55, the air. Ari, m. 28, a way. Apoiaca, 2181*2!5, with the way.
14, m. a, a month. fare, n. 1 R52:9,2 954. a
friend. feft, ind. 1 9,2 149. false.
falsehood. fazzrefè, f. 21.9, a false view. faferat, f. 21, the name of a
well known city and country. -fufera, 95*29, mixed. F#s, 1H, mixed. #1, 353, a fish. 992, m. n. 53' , a crown, tira.

Page #580

536
मुक्त
free.
VOCABULARY
नियतु Ya, 1 ST. 2 95, free. ya. 19 , 2 -9, dead. yet, gd. f37*43*35*7*, having Ty, m. Rea, death.
given up. ya, n. 1 . 2 9755, the face.
Estat, f. 55, a vine or a bunch of
grapes. gfa, f. ga'at, 2 55-5, a sage.
704814, vb. imp. VTV5, par gata, vb. pf. 954*35, set don. ya, vb. imp. 277891, give up.
#, pers. pro. 15,2 957. my.
Detall, f. 246, a girdle. ys, m. jg a5, a kind of grass of
which the girdle of a Brahmin #2, m. 5, the cloud.
religious student is made. hifen: 1 AFXV*), 2 TT" YET'Fi, ind. 076 57°06'5, frequ
| 1999, intelligent, wise. ently. ged, m. 35*35*34.2 45. an
årt, f. 219V, love. instant, a very small portion of Ha, m. 95(5)), emancipation. time, a while.
HTE, m. 1.975*44), 2 51 5°F, atel, m. 1 39.2 3911, foolish.
ignorance, delusion. , m. , the head. (ale, À5). A n. 5 ŝa), a pearl. *W, **5976, a deer. Fored, vb. R&'Ak 295, is dying.

Page #581

SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
537
याचसि
ཤེན་ ཤེན, m. ཀླ་ཀློ, a barbarian.
ག་ག་ཞའ, བdv. ཇི་ལྟ་བ་བཞིན, pro
perly. 《, relative pron. 1 གང, ༔ གང་
གuTཁ་གཡཾ, adv. ཇི་ལྟར་ནས, accord
ing to the ability. དག, ༣ གང་ཞིག, who, what, which, , ག་ལ་བ | ༩I, ind. གང་ཚ, when. sense of te, where.
aft, ind. 1 •གང, 2 གལ་ཏེ, ཅི་ ན, m. མཆོད་སྦྱིན, a sacrifce. སྟེ, • ན, if. ཁ, ind. གང་ཕྱིར, 2 གང་གི་ཐུར | ཀa, ind. འདི་ལྟ་སྟེ, for example. for, because.
བཀའི་, ind. མོད་ཀྱི, even though. གཞ, m. འབད་པོ, endeavour.
གིt, vb. pf. 1 འོངས, 2 སོང,。སོང་ ཀཞ, 1གང་དུ, 2 གང་ལ, ༔ གང་
བར་གྱུར, གཤེགས, went. ལས, where.
གཞ, n. 1 གྲགས་པ, 2 སྙན་གྲགས་ ཞ གཞ, གང་དང་གང་དུ, wherever.
fame, glory. གr, ind: 1 ཇི་ལྟ་བ་བཞིན་ད.་ ཇི་ | ག་ག་ཞ, relative pron. གང་ཕྱིར, for, ལྟ་བུ. ཇི་ལྟར, 4 ལྟར, 5 དཔེར་
because. ན, ༅ དཔེར་ན་བཞིན,1 བཞན,།
གལ་, relative pron. གང་ཞིག, wh༠༠༤. like, as.
གཞཞི, ༠༧ vb.1 སློང་(). you ask. 67. 68

Page #582

538
VOCABULARY
gone.
योजित གa, , གཤེགས, སོང་བ་ཡིན, gཚ, ་ སྦྱར་བ, used, employed ;
i) རིགས་(པ) (ti) རུང, proper. གཞི, vb. 1 ཐོབ་འགྱུར, gets; 2 རྣམ་ ། right. པར་འབྲལ, goes away: ༔
ཤུགེ, vb. 1 རིགས་(པ), 2 རིགས་ གཤེགས་པ, goes.་
པར་འགྱུར, ༔ རུང་བ.. འོས་ གrn, n. 1 ཐེག་པ, ༣ ཞུགས་པ, 。 པ, is right. vehicle.
ཤུg, n. འཐབ་པ, war. rth, vb. འགྲོ་བར་བྱ, I go.
ཤུqཞུ, འཐབ་པར་འདོད, desirous of ག་ཞt, ind. 1 ཇི་སྲིད, 2 རེ་ཞིག.。
fighting. བར་དུ, 4 བར་དུ་སྟེ, up to, tilb
yang, pers. pron, šķ, you. just, etc. qཞala, ཇི་སྲིད་འཚོ་བ, a long ཐབ | , m. 1 སྦྱོར, connection: 2 the life is.
སྦྱོར་བ, attachment, applicaགཞཛིན, ཞེས་བྱ་བའི་བར་དུ་འགྱ tion:༔ བསམ་གཏན, meditatill.
tion. c, n. གྲགས་པ་འཛན, the ༠༠n | nam. རྣལ་འབྱོར་པ, one who of Yośodharā, the wife of Gau
practises Yoga. tama Buddha.
གa, iའོས་པ, 2 རུང, ft. ག་ཁའི, vb. ft. *འགྱུར, wil_go. | (Tib. སཞིne).
ཀེཤིa, སྦྱར, employed.

Page #583

II. SANSKRIT TIBETAN
539
राग
योषित् atfern, f. 59215, a woman. staa, n. 1 55'R'AN'I, 2 2165,
youth.
Teatqoy A, red. Temat; f. 985-935, redness. CEHTE, n. -9°59), blood and Alesh, Target, n. 985 98 55, for
guarding. 7972, pr. pl. 995 keeping. Tanfred ofêt, vb. 15°4 they pro
tect, you protect. TFT, F. ANFA, protection. 1741, f. 1575), composition. cata, n. 55%, silver. kutaft, f. 595, night. ta, 579.95, delighted with,
fondly attached to.
Ta, n. 1 507-54, 2 &q=20. 3
ETC, a gem. KABE, 511545409ANSI, a
heap of gems, (Tib. lit. gems piled upon one another) ; a
work of the name. 19, m. 1955, a chariot. THATH, vb. imp. 954°415 ,
let one remain, let one take
delight in. zhutua, f. 59799933575,
the state of being enjoyable. whefta, 5979°4159'
4 97, enjoyable. Tarca, n. 924), the nether world,
one of the seven regions below
the earth. tren, gain, free from. Tr, m. 1 6911 , attachment ;

Page #584

540
रागिन्
VOCABULARY
235, passion, lust;, m. ༉ དམར་པོ, red colour.
heap.
, n., a kingdom.
rfrt, m. 1 ཆགས་ལྡན,2 ཆགས་ 43, full of love or attach
ment.
rw, m. ར་བྷུའི་བུ, the, aon of
Raghu, specially Rāma.
-UM, UT, HaÃ, a king.
, n. 5, the royal family,
the royal palace.
,, father-king.
राजीव, n.
a lotus.
པདྨ, ༢row, n. 1 རྒྱལ་པོ་[ཉིད],2རྒྱལ་ སྲྀད, a kingdom.
राज्यं करिष्यति, vb. म्रुথঔদ,
will reign.
ww‰, n. Ha ̈3⁄45, a kingdom. rfa, f. 1 མཚན་མོ, 2 ནམ, the night.
Zandta
*Ã, a collection, masş,
रुत n. , a sound.
रुदत्, रुदती, f. pr. pl. 55,
ing, crying.
vud, vb. passive, 577
weeps.
, vb, pf. 5', wept.
• रूपत्व n.
weep
, n., colour, beauty, physical element.
afa, vb., cries.
one
ངོ་བོ་ཁོ་ན་ཡིན་པ, form,
natural state.
€སྭ4r, f. གཟུགས་བཟུང་ལྡན, beauti
ful.
t, f., a line.
ཊེurglw, རི་མོ་མེད་པ, without
stripe.
a

Page #585

रोग
रोग, m. 35, disease. đưa vợ. 955
with.
ff, 5, I shall weep.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
लक्ष, n.
may be pleased
, 34, rests on.
,, the hair of the body.
9
,, makes the, vb. pf. 5, wept, lamented.
thrill of hairs of the body.
afaa, ༔ རོལ་སྒེག,
pleasing, charming; 2, sport (atar).
ल
', lac, (one hun
>
dred thousand).
མཚན་ཉིད, characteristic.
लक्षण, n.
afa, H, noticed, perceived.
đạt, vb. đến, is noticed.
लग्न,
བསྒོས་པ་ཅན, ༔ticking.
,, light, swift.
f., bashfulness, mo
लज्जा, desty.
༄m, f. 1 འ།ཁྲི་ཤིང, 2 ལྕུག་ཕྲན.
creeper.
a
लोक
लब्ध,
, attained.
ཨཱwa, •rཊེ, vb. 1 རྙེད་པ, 2 ཐོབ,
get(s).
541
लालस, སྡུག, ardently longing for. erTTU7, n. མཛེས་སྡུག, beauty.
लावण्य,
fa, n. 5, the invariable mark
which proves the existence of anything in an object (i. e. hetu).
རབ་ཏུ་བསྒྲགས,
fafa, vb. pf. licked.
, f., a line.
, m., the world.

Page #586

542
VOCABULARY
लोकयात्रा at umel, f. RÈ437*, the Tr?, 1 59,2 29(5), a posse
course of the worldly life. I ssive suffix. ampia, PÈT5992an, in- aa, vb. imp. $ 97, say. creasing worldly affairs.
997, pr. pl. 1(a), saying 29, n. 1 19.2 99, the eye. allea, 5875'9 red.
Tafat, vb. Had, says. enfan, QAT958, worldly.
999, n. s@g***), the face.
qera, vb. ", say. 4: pers. pron. acc. plu. 65 (21), 272, m. Třq, killing.
74, f. I'RT, wite 49904, 175*25*3, to be said.
97, n. 1 94N, 2 571 , a 964, inf. 1'45, to say qa, m. , a speaker.
gà, vb. 3 1.5A, 1 salute. apafat, vb. 4785, will say.
qa, 579'9, adorable, to be TQUIA, vb. , I shall say.
saluted respectfully. 974, n. 98 A, a speech. qa, 1996.2 78 959,
produced in a forest. 7, m. @3, a boy. -, 135.2 gât(5), an 'affix
aga'. n. 3W, the body. denoting resemblance, like. ayer". SN°35, with the body.
you.
forest.

Page #587

वयम्, pron.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
ཅག་རྣམས, 3 བདག. 4 བདག་
ཅག, 5 ཨུ, ༔ ཡུ་ཅག, we.
q7ཊཿ, m· 1 གྲོགས་པོ,2ན་ཚོད,
companion, friend.
वर्ग,
वर्ण m.
वयम्
ET
1 ཁོ་བོ་ཅག, z ཁོ་བོ་ ཟྭ་༥་༥ 1 *བསྐྱེད. 2 འཕེལ་(བ),
ing to increase, increasing.
m.
a
༢riqfee, vb. 1 གསུང, 2 གསུངས, describe, explain.
༢r7ཊེ, 1 འཆད་པ, 2 གསུངས་པ, i being described or explained.
rཊའེ, vb. 1 འདུག་པ, 2 གནས་པ,re
mains, exists.
, n., a way.
༢༥, 1 མཆོག, best; 2 དམ་པ, (i) excellent, (ii) m. a boon; 3,5'', raining.
n. rather or better than.
bestowing.
q, n. , the body.
,, to be chosen.
ཝཱ་f«ཊ, 1 བསྐྱོགས, 2 ལེགས, ༔lant
NN, a class, group.
ing, turned.
མདོག, beauty.
, pr. pl. 2,
aifa, vb. 2, rains.
q, vb. 295, increa
sing.
543
caus
ence of.
, 55, (i) m. influence; (ii) subject to, under the influ
ag, f.
वा,
growing.
E, the earth.
q, n. 1 ZE¤Ã, thing, matter; 2 §, a residence, home.
afe, m. མེ, fire.
ind.
1 དང, 2 འམ (prece

Page #588

544
वाक्य
विक्रम
ded by 5 and it takes the, n. (5), prevention.
form of 5 and N respec
, pr. pl., preventing. aft, n., water.
tively), 3, or.
ag, f. 1Ì, 2 Ì', sand. ཝ་ཊཿཊཿ n. 1 གོས, 2 ན་བཟའ, cloth. 8, m. 1 འདུག་པ, 2 གནས, dwel
ling, living.
, n., a sentence.
वाङ्मय,
ངག་གི་རང་བཞིན, consisting
of words
वाच, f. 1 ངག, 2 གསུང, a speech.
r:ཡ, 1 སྨྲ་བྱ. 2 *སྨྲོས, to bc said. वाजिन् m. 1 རྟ, 2 མགྱོགས་འགྲོ.
a horse.
qafa, vb.
with an instrument.
aqua, f. pr. pl.
354, sounding.
VOCABULARY
वादिन् m.
>
༢Tfའིཝ, n. 1 རོལ་མོ, ? བསྒྲགས་པ, a
musical instrument.
वायु m.
, a speaker.
55, the wind.
वासर m. n.
''95, plays, adv. 5′5, for a
piece of cloth.
वासव m.
Indra.
, the day.
, the lord of gods,
m. འཛིན་པ, carrying,
fཝེ-, ind. 1 རྣམ, 2 རྣམ་པར, a pre
fixmeaning 'distinction,' etc.
taru, pr. pl. '', be
ing scattered.
विक्रम, m
, power, strength.

Page #589

II. SANSKRIT TIBETAN
545
विक्रव
away.
विद्या fama, 1 2598, 2 FR598. fagra, n. f*415 qm'l, skill, pro
affected by, overcome with. ficiency, pure consciousness. femeesta, vb. 51°075 92, go fantaa, 1 g 3, 2 973195 , to
be informed, requested. Fagera, 94, with the fame feara, m. l', spreading out. that is proclaimed.
faqurd, vb. EW'RIK'A, befarver, m. 1 9,2 9999, an comes satisfied.
obstacle, hindrance. fan, n. 55, wealth. fararcur f. 551°415'535, reflection, farcit, vb. pf. ANAH, made.
consideration. . faardara, pr. pl. F195555
Farfecat, gd. f*4£99*98. hav
ing known. 2505. being considered.
faqua, À 5:99m, a humorous fafara, 1 YAM, 2 151°445 44
companion and confidential 81. variegated:
friend of the hero of a play. fafanna, gd. 1 YA'J'AWNIN,
fast, m. 97999a, another
country. 2 55°015 ANANIN. having
faed, vb. 1 9,2 W5, 3 w thought.
of Wo, exists. fastą, m. f12 ara, a conqueror, victorious.
farar, f. 2979(5), learning.

Page #590

546
VOCABULARY
विप्रयोग
विद्यादातृ faruratą, m. fqra, one fafarra, m. er="S5, falling · who gives learning, teacher. down, destruction. fagiert, m. 29 T 1; f. facer- fafarniaafa, vb. Rogaz 35, causes
erat, £41RŽTH, a class of to fall down, destroys. semi-divine beings.
fafargrafuan, inf. 1995 59 faaifea, m, 1921955, 2 557 55. to throw down, to des43999735, desirous of learn
troy. ing, a student
fafaada, n. =3979, turning fagreta, 29755'99, devoid of
back, return. learning, ignorant.
fafallet, f. 91, removing. faen, m. 1 97%95*29, 2 FAT ལྡན, ༔ རིག་པ་ཅན, , རིག་པ་
faqart, f. 55W5N, the Indian
lute. 19, a learned man.
faula, f. 55, misfortune, adversity. -fara, ofar *. kind.
fayda, m. 1 1. 2 1. reverse, farrgh, inf. Fasa 35, to do. fafu, m. 897), a rule, the way or Pagar, HN', extensive, much.
Fanyar, F# $50, free from. fanga, n. 35219, discipline, train
famento, m. 1 of 415 RgR'A, 2 farar, ind. 25, without
FR1A, 3 29219, separation.
method of doing a thing.
ing.

Page #591

II. SANSKRIT TIBETAN
547
passions.
विप्रलभ्य
विशाल fam, gd. Ajuta, having foreia, m. 1 RS4A. 2 , deceived.
separation. favere, m. 551415 5525, stay-feefaa, 54°9, made, written. ing abroad.
factor, m. 3558915592(a), faward, vb. 55. distinguishes.
absence of desire or human fawa, m. 1 955, absence of
birth ; 2 5551, wealth. Farrara, vb. FITTINEN, shines. fay, BAA57, lord.
fantaa, gd. 1 af 8. 2 HÕE. faarfara, ', adorned. 3 ŽEJN, 4 58°04 farsa, m. 84A, mistake. JH, having seen. farata, m. n. 155 95, the facadé, VXFT35W, discoloured.
castle in the air; a palace (with fanya, pr. pl. Naĝo. lamentfaye, 55198 55, having
ing. the face turned back, dis- fare, m. 47599959*21. marriage.
fafag, 2697955, desiring to enfarge, gain, separated from, de
ter. prived of.
fafara, pi , various. fargsund, vb. 1°915 299. are · separated,
farnier, HT. great.
seven stories).
inclined.

Page #592

548
VOCABULARY
वीणा
विशुद्धखभाव fayaanr, 5541F5 °57, one fafafanzia, vb. du. pf. W ebg with pure disposition.
V 95, wondered. faritra, vb. opt. 55°45'3,
facere, m. 1 5 355. 2 TN 2, dewould waste away.
tailed description. farta, m. 5595, distinction.
font, m. 1 7 91, arrogance ; faxan, m. 755, confidence. 2 BOTA, wonder. fepula, 52 , rested, repo- farag'a, inf. 945, to forget. sed.
faena, m. 5, a bird. farety, m.299 9. separation. fora, gd. Í 49, confident, fear
fareefa, vb. a@90 l, dwell. less.
FECTA:, vb agal, we move on,
remain. Fale, gd, Š 9 2 JH, having made confident.
fagfalfa, vb. ag nagkaga, fan, n. 54, poison.
will move on, farro, & 579. cast down.
faETTH, inf. 255A, to give up. faqua, &l 'A, uneven, rough.
fafea. 9394, made.
fakta, ĶE*, devoid of. fanten, pr. pl. * garest, being cast down.
atra, m. f. a 98, a wave. fara, m. URI, a country, place, atun, f. 26. the Indian lute.

Page #593

वीर, m.
वृक्ष m.
1,
m.
वीर
དཔའ་པོ. hero,
ཤིང,
a tree.
वृक्षक m.
, a small tree.
རྩū, 1 བསྐོར, urrounded; 2 བསྒྲིབས,
covered.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
1 བགྲེས་པ.༡ རྒན་རྒོན. ༔
རྒན་པ, old.
ཎྜfk, t. འཕེལ་བ, growth,
fe, f. 84, rain.
वेग, m. ཤགས, force. ཞིu. m. 1 སྨིག་མ,2 འོད་མ, a bam
boo.
af, vb., knows.
( 81 ), m. £¤ ̈3⁄45, the Veda
(Sāman).
ary, m. 355, tremor, trembling.
वैकल्य,
n., imperfection,
deficiency.
ཨཱཿཆ༷, གསལ་བ, clear.
sqn, བྲེལ་བ, eagerly or
occupied.
व्यथा, f. ཉེན་པ, pain.
व्यसनिन् m.
व्याघ्र
व्यस्त,
fan, '435. distinguished. 2, m. 1 5, determina
tion; 2345, perseverance. wen, f. རྣམ་པར་བཞག་པ, settle
ment.
fa, 1 N, placed in order, remained; 2, arranged, settled.
व्यसन, n. གདུང་བ, a calamity. བཞེན་པ་ལྡན་པ, addic
ted to any vice.
སེ་སོ,
549
གྱུར་ཞིང, they dwelt.
, a tiger.
व्याघ्र m.
intently
separated.
, vb. aorist, G'

Page #594

550
VOCABULARY
व्याज
शक्यसे
2414, m. SR, pretence, pretext. . -42, f. 95/GTVN, devoted. 3274, m. Žgsl, a hunter. ! zyrfer, m. 10, 2 99.3 65. dis- riafa, vb. DÉF 35. says.
ease. 14, m. Fria, exertion, per- 21AF, 57°21, able, capable. severance.
ylf, f. 1 659,2 815395.3 acufet, f. 1 MF5985141, 2 3°37' 59.4 987', power, might,
59104, perfect proficiency. ability. aymanga, y55751, one who ex- ufan, 975*37. powerful. plains.
atfa, vb. 98, is able. aycanca, n. 1 5385*2,2 9999
Taifa, vb. (2*35, I am able. 8, explaining. acarafernan, 48545'9'4'' 794, 1999, 200, capable of
being effected, under the conto be explained. canard, vb. pass. 939. being ex
774d, vb. gW, is capable of be. plained.
ing done. ogcauretra, pr. pl. pass. 551 ཆུད་པར་བྱེད་པ, being explained.
rtve ( =Tandfar), š594853.910
Hän, you are able (Tib. lit. Ana, pr. pl. 1 BD. 2 ROTAQI,
you have the ability in pracgoing,
trol of.
tice.

Page #595

शत, n.
शक्र, m. བརྒྱ་བྱིན, Indra, the king
of gods.
शक
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
, hundred.
,, a century.
214, m.
शातकुम्भमय,
of gold.
rerfr, f. བརྒྱ་དྲུག་ཅུ,
and sixty.
bed. གསེར་རང་བཞིན, made
, m. 53,
rre མ, བརྒྱ་སྟོང,
thousands, a lac.
དགྲ་བོ,
, ind. 5, slowly.
,, variegated.
शब्दसन्दर्भ, m.
one hundred
one hundred
an enemy.
शब्द m. , a word. ( and ཡིས
are instru. of).
སྒྲ་བཀོད་པ, the com
position of words.
, m. 1, 2, peace, calm
ness, absence of passions..
शाक्य कुमार
, ***, quelling, allay
ing.
, n. 2, sleeping, a bed.
शयनि, (= शयने), मस, on the
शरण n.
, a refuge.
Ma, YAN'Z fit to protect, a
protector.
, n. N, the body.
शल्य, n.
शशक m.
शशभृत् m.
शस्त्र n.
an arrow.
ཟུག་རྔུས, རི་བོཥྱོ, a hare.
शाक्य,
शाक्यकुमार m.
551
a spear, shaft.
, the moon.
མཚོན་ཐབས,
the race
qu Gautama Buddha belonged.
a weapon.
to
prince of the Śākyas.
which
ཤཱཀྱ་གཞོན་ནུ, the

Page #596

552
शुद्धोदन
ཤཱཀྱའི་ཚོགས,th。 frr, 1 དགེ, z ཞི་(བ), auspicious.
multitude of Sakyas.
propitious.
शाक्या, m ¶¶, the Sakyas. farfar,, cool.
शाक्यगण,
m.
ture.
शाक्यगण
शाखिन् m. ཡལ་ག་ལྡན་པ, a tree. ,(), calm, calmed.
,, for pacification.
शाम्यति, vb. 1 े, 2 ( परतूर, शीकर, m.
becomes quiet.
शिरस्,
VOCABULARY
water.
शास्त्र n. Qyq, a religious or, adv.
scientific work.
far, f. ', training, cul
fafara, N, trained.
fafag(4), inf. 4'45, to learn.
*fada, vb. opt.
'¬ ́Î3⁄4,
should learn (Tlb. lit. far,
imp).
farar, f. 2
n. 1 མགོ, 2 དབུ, the head.
stone.
fru, 1 ཀུན་ཏུ་མཆོག. learned, wise;
2 ལྷག་མ, remaining.
one
f, m., a disciple.
ཐིགས་པ,
a fine drop of
མྱུར་དུ, quickly. ཨhdear, f. བསིལ་བ་ཉིད, coolness.
शुक m.
,, having the natu
ral disposition of.
ནེ་ཙོ.
a parrot.
शुक्ल, དཀར་པོ, white.
c, དག་པ, pure. ༤u༥, སེམས་ཅན་དག་པ,
a pure mind.
yalea, 30'q85'8,
one with
a proper
name. the father of Buddha.

Page #597

7, དཀར, white.
शुश्रूषमाण, pt. pl.
शुभ
,, splendid, handsome.
serving.
शुश्रूषा,
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
f. 59, service.
शूकर m. 44, a boar.
शून्य,
, empty, void.
rt, f. 1 སྟོང་ཉིད.2 སྟོང་པ་ཉིད,
voidness, emptiness.
शूर m.
शैल m.
श्रावस्ती
fag, inf. *5, to regret.
,, deplorable.
སྲིད་ཞུ་བྱེད་པ, nswa, vb. མྱ་ངན.afliction in
felt.
,, like void.
དཔའ་པོ, a hero.
, a rock.
70
शोक, m. : མྱ་ངན, 2 མྱངན་གནས (Tib. lit. e, n. the cause of sorrow), sorrow.
འེ་ཕ་ཞེ, vb. 1 གདུང་འགྱུར་ཞིང, 2 གདུང་བར་འགྱུར,grievea.
शोणित n.
7. blood.
, vb. NEN, looks beautiful.
M, f. HEN, beauty. M, HEN', decorated.
, ind, 55, faith, faithfulness.
Tag, inf., to have faith
in.
श्रम m. ཇལ་
, n. 3, hearing,
श्रवणयोः,
(), fatigue.
n.
553
two ears.
name.
ཉན་པ་གཉིས་ཀྱི, of the
,, wearied, tired.
"Ieet, f. མཉན་ཡོད, a town of the

Page #598

554
VOCABULARY
श्री
ACT sit, f. 98121, beauty, grace, pros- stą, m. 1 3951, 2 37°41*, perity.
hearer. **t- (forstua), 510127, with ta, n. 69, the ear. i śri.
Perea, 4896VV, praise-worthy. sted, m. g417°2958792, lit.
feasafa, vb. 65–761, sticks. one with delight, having pros
perity, a kiņg of the name. kete, m. 254°9, union. wa, ÍAV, heard.
941, m. 057957, the phlegYani, gd. 1 kqn, 2 sdyho matic humour (kapha). 56, 3 ski(4), 4 49995
1998, m. 2574, a deer, a wild
beast. JN, having heard.
farar, n. 1, white leprosy. at4, vb, imp. 37°87 let it be
pata, 1975-71, 2 42°A, white. heard. tyd, vb. 350(5), it is being heard.
afara, f. gard*K5*), thirty-six Àra, n. 591a, virtue, or reli- a fenn, 57*8'91, sixtieth. gious merit, bliss.
28, 59'), sixth. STRATA, 19785519, wishing bliss.
apien, 29°3'57'5, twenty-sixth. sitcom, 81354159, to be heard. sex, 48:59, sixteenth.

Page #599

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
555
संक्षोभ
deca, gd. Aplaas, having #, 1 488°(51), with ; 2 419951, brought together. similar, same.
#i, m. 1 .2 , he. #TA, m. 05:57"GI, restraint.
#4, *5:57, all (Tib. lit. 'those"). viata, m. 1 25.239, union, connection.
215, $48, attached. tiada, vb. 295A, is. ret, m. 196, a friend. HTÈT, vb. opt. aggios, should propea, adv. 74°41°55'NIN 218,
live together (Tib. lit. should | with dignity and honour. resort to).
?, m. 315. manure. fallen, n. 1969, shampooing.
HERY, m. 1 7959, 2 57'89, 3 sata, 4 TVSI, covered, རྣམ་པར་བརྟག་པ, thought, imaclothed.
gination, a definite determina, n. 24994, knowledge, per- tion. ception.
arra, vb. ft. 79.57(55), kita, m. %, doubt.
I shall not imagine. ritrat, m. 35, relation.
#RAH, 8d. K È, having gone. Frente, m.QA2A, the world. kita, m. 1 455, 2 ovaga, fifare, m. 25935, one of the five
ve brief.
brief. skandhas in Buddhism. data, in. I941, agitation.

Page #600

556
VOCABULARY
सन्ताप
सङ्गम #, m. 35174°91, coming to afir, f. 15.8, existence. gether
apa, n. 1 549, 2 NHWg52, hatan, n. 1), music.
existence, a brave mind. efaa, m. IV, a minister. #2, 56518, truth (n.), true. ata, ind. 47915, if. He (for Pret ), ind. 57*5, always.
arar, pr. pl. f. 994*45*995 Frana, 0525, existing and not 8, sticking.
existing. sarald ra, vb. , felt eret, ind. 575, always. Rikt, f. 35:9, one of the five HERT, 33, like.
Skandhas in Buddhism. per- ttt, m. garšava, ception.
the teacher of the holy reliena, adv. 575, always. gion. afat, pr. pl. loc. 1 g 5,2 g er, ind. 292, in the very mo. glog, 3 1919, 45410109. (it)
ment, just immediately. being.
fai, pt. pl. plu. Garlipain, the Fa, pr. pl. 1 987*() good, wise ;
wise men. 2 W5'()), existing
HAH, 755, afflicted. pare, m. ap . reverence,
909, m. 1 799847554, 2 1 97554,3 2735081, 4 weer
respect.

Page #601

afra
समागच्छति
གདུང, ༔ ཡོངས་སུ་གདུང་བ, heat,(ཨ, 1 འདྲ་བ, 2 མཉམ་(པ), 3
torture, distress.
མཚུངས, equal,
ཊ་fཋེཊ, vb. 1 གནས, 2 ཡོད, सन्तोष m. ཚེག་ཤེས, satisfaction. affa, vb. ft. 3535 འགྱུར, will make one abandon.
, m., a literary composition.
af, ', doubtful. ཊའེu, ཐེ་ཚེམ་ཟ་བ, doubt.
सन्ध्या,
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
ai, f.
worship.
f. HN, joint, evening.
5, veneration,
are.
सफला,
,, seventh.
efaq, gd. Ѷ¤‍5, having got
assembled.
evdtv, ཞེ་ས་དང་བཅས, respectful.
f. 39'55'988, fruitful.
समधिष्ठित,
557
ཡང་དག་པར་གནས,
governed, guided.
ཊཿ““ཊཿ, མཚུངས་པ་དེ་མ་ཐག་པ,im
mediately contiguous.
-समन्वागत, 1 དང་ལྡན. 2 དང་ལྡན་
, endowed with
aafugu, ed. Go'qv, having as
cended.
ཧ་ཨ་ཧཱུཾཿ,: ནུས་(པ),2 ནུས་དང་ལྡན, ཉྩ ཡོང་བ, able.
ཊཿwfd ཊཿ:, འབོག་རན, the time
to make over.
nafwa, ¶', standing or remaining firm.
,5, combined.
समागच्छति, vb. २Ěমक्ष,
gether.
comes to

Page #602

558
VOCABULARY
समागम
सम्भव
HATTH, m. 1 354 375,2 254 agrera, 256, collected together. 91, union.
ga, m. aš, the ocean. FATETX, pt. pl. 85951, prac
ergafara, *2*5*955, raised up. tising. Furada, vb. opt. 24°95 ,
ACT, gd. 25V AW, having come should practise.
together. Farfer, m. 1 ŜCRÈT, 2 À **, 29 SAV, endowed with. RĒ5, profound meditation.
argrafa, SH VÉANA 3,
I am bringing about HATA, IN Fg5*21949, with respect, 1954, full.
FIA, Ta'ba, gained, obtained. FTATEA:, ŽEP, in brief.
Fry, m. 52, relation, conafart, f. wave 95, fuel, spécially
sacrificial sticks for the sacred i Frag, 1 VN HN, 2 V90 HT4, 8d. AFT, having seen.
སངས་རྒྱས, fully awakened or
enlightened. 4819, n. WEM1, near.
ralfer, F. & 35*89, peragrera, ed. 5855759 fect knowledge.
18, having raised. **, m. 18555, born; 2 255 yg4, m. 47*235A, causc A, possibility.
pect.
"brief.
nection,
fire.

Page #603

सम्भूत
सम्भूत,
སྐྱེས་གྱུར,
सम्भृत्, 3, holding.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
born.
सम्भोग, m. ལོངས་སྤྱོད, enjoyment. (), perfect.
+༥, བརླན་དང་བཅས, fresh.
((༥, n. 1 རྫིང་བུ, ༡ མཚེ,
2
pond.
सरखती, f. དབྱངས་ཅན་མ, peech, the presiding deity of learning. सराष्ट्र, शुभ, along
with the kingdom (i. e. the inhabitants of the kingdom). 467,ནད་དང་བཅས་པ, diseased (lit. one with a disease).
ཊv, ཁྲོ་བ་དང་བཅས་པ, with anger.
af, m. 3, a chapter.
ai, m., a snake.
ཊ་ཞི་,1ཀུན,2 ཐམས་ཅད, all.
स विशेष
ཊཿན, ཐམས་ཅད་མཁྱེན་པ, omni
scient.
ཊཿ་ཞི་ཧྥ་m,f.ཐམས་ཅད་མཁྱེན་བ་ཉིད,
omniscience.
सर्वतस्, ind.
सर्वत्र, ind.
ཀུན་ཏུ, ཀུན་ཏུ,
a lake,, ind. 1 5,2 5
91, ind.
, in every way.
559
on all sides.
everywhere.
ể, always.
fulness.
सर्मधर्म, m. ཆོས་རྣམས, all things or
elements of existence.
ཊཿའིཝ,སངས་རྒྱས་ཀུན, all the
Buddhas.
#àÿ, f. q'5'57, all white.
सलज्ज, ངོ་ཚ་དང་བཅས, with bash
ཊfaཨེན, ཁྱད་པར་དང་བཅས་པ, with speciality.

Page #604

560
VOCABULARY
सविस्मय
सामर्थ्य farha, WV 86755'95N1, with efen, 1 BTN, 2 QIN, 3 553 surprise.
AJN, accompanied by. 428, 591459995*ATH, with the
rera, ind. 559*Y, directly. fraternity of monks. FATTA, BÈAN, alarmed, fright
fire, m. 5*HZ, the sea ened.
HIETA, n. 5, resemblance. Press, 19455*25*31, with eager
eraferet, gd. *9*985, having desite. afha, Rapg5'45h, with a
propitiated.
ent, 299..common. smile. HT, N'PIN:, with a sound. frey, 59°55'45'91, with, FB, 155, 2 *$, with. reflection, censure. HEMA, 55°39, associated with, ay, 1 goral, 2 2194°21,3 g
5, good, well, rightly. FTET 398995, natural, in- TEATT, EN YAFAJN, with net.
kindness. TE*, ind. 314, suddenly.
Re, qg5*45, with ornaHaan, *; possessing a thousand.
itset, n. 1 pkt 1, 2 ABE, n. 1 375, 2 Ž8219,
ཤགས, capability. a thousand:
together with
with
ments.

Page #605

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
561
सामाजिक
सुगति tifat, 35849. a member of an forchert. R 35, like vermiaudience or assembly.
lion. Threa, , common.
entera, vb. 1 *R95, 2 garys
sinks down. 817, m. grã, the essence.
9-, prefix, 1 95*25,2 435,8 7154, n. 25935, similarity.
59,4 198,5 CADA forte, m. 26. . the lion.
good, well, very, etc. faiętea, n. 269 Ê, a throne. gha, n. 24W*45*35, any good
I or virtuous act. fera, 99, sprinkled, watered.
ya, n. 25 (6). 2 4939, case, fere, al, accomplished, a comfort, happiness.
semi-divine being supposed to garfeta, A5 (60)835, desirous of be of great purity and holiness.
comfort, *happiness. foretagga, 'ANN, gerak, 3.9955. conducing to
born in a family of Siddhas. ) happiness. farfa, f. Q999, accomplish- gora, 197:959998"91,25
999. a synonym for ferrufa, vb. 999 )
Buddha. plished.
gora, f. ART, a happy confarmace, n. a . vermilion.
71
ment.
is accomo
dition.

Page #606

562
VOCABULARY
सुचक्ष
सेव्य
, 85, very impure (Tib. fera, '', being in a good state.
impure).
,, with men (Tib.fu, gd. ''g'q, with kinsmen, relatives). having indicated.
སྩarft, བུ་ལ་སོགས, the
son and af, f. 5, production.
others.
58, NẾN,
beautiful.
gt, གཉིད་ལོག, aleep. སྩམfriཎྚིན,རབ་ཏུ་འབད་པ, well
determined or decided.
n.
gf,, fragrant (Tib. lit. a cow or the fabulous cow of plenty).f,
g༥༥, རྙེད་སླ་བ, easy to get. सुवर्ण, གསེར,
gold.
you, *', very clear (Tib. clear).
, ind. ', well, good.
सुसुखम्,
བུ་ཡུ༥༥, ༤dv. ཤིན་ཏ་བདེ་བར,
happily.
सूत्र n. , a thread, a particular kind of books.
very
सूत्रधार m. མདོ་འཛིན་པ,'。 thread
holder,' a stage manager who takes a prominent part in the prelude to a drama.
m. AN', a learned man. सूर्य m. ཉི་མ, the aun.
-सृज्य (with the prefix fव-, =), ed.
བཟློགས་ནས, having dismissed,
sent away.
, opt. 5, should prac
tise.
,, to be attended.

Page #607

सोदर,
सेव्यते
स्पृहक
à, vb. 4, is being at- uruurft, f. གནས་ཐོབ, reaching a
tended.
place.
m.
स्कन्ध,
hརྩམri,ཤིན་ཏུ་གཞོན་ན, tender
ness (Tib. lit. g, very
delicate).
བདེ་བ,
, n.
, gentle.
II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
ཕུང་པོ,
a uterine brother., 1,2 49, kept,
woman.
happiness.
a collection, mass,
heap.
स्तम्भ m. ', a post.
स्तवक m. +མགོ་ལྕོགས, a cluster.
., little, (Tib. lit. स्तोकमात्र, only little).
རྩཨོཾ, f. 1 བུ་མོ, 2 བུད་མེད, ༔ མོ,。
ཕ, གནས་པ,
far, old.
, n., a place.
one who stands.
arranged.
स्थित, ༔ གནས་པ,༧ མཆིས,
mained.
forca, gd. 1
563
, having remained.
འདུག་སྟེ,2 འདུག་
re
fere, སྣུམ་པ, oily. erv, འདོད་བྱེད་པ, deairous.
fært, གནས, irm.
, pr. pl., causing to take bath.
स्नेह, m. 1. ཆགས་པ,2 དགའ་བ
affection.
स्पन्दते, vb. मार्श्वे, moves.
, m., touch.
,, longing, desiring.
, 35, desirous.

Page #608

564
VOCABULARY
स्वस्तिक
स्फुट 692, 1 TVIA, 2 T Q , clear, ee, 59'5*35, very clear. distinct.
9, 1735, 2 55°41'. a kinsFrifa, vb. 59. I remember.
man, relative. , opt. 59°51. may remember.
*94, ind, 1 9997'27, 2 5595, Firefa, vb. *4-95, is being remem
of, by, or from one self. bered (Tib. lit. said).
en, m. H. a sound. FAC, 52, a smile.
rufaa, vb. 3H, sleep. fya, 4-95. rememberd (Tib. said).
safafas, vb. Bare HÀN, sleeps. Fazfat, f. 5979, remembrance.
Tak, wo, being like a dream. Fira, opt. 1 295, 295, may
ra, m. 1 55'97.2 359&T,
nature. be.
pH, ind. 1 55,2 5595, oneAh, m. 386, falling.
self. nad, vb. 575, falls down. per af, m. Í N, the heaven. 892, pr. pt. 34, oozing.
Terugle, with a golden handle.
no, n. 555*1*26. , cne's 2,1959, 2 55, one's own self,
own characteristics. own.
#ar, m. 5541954, one's own **, *5*41. own. cata, 55, own.
I fee, an ìH, prosperity.
gain.

Page #609

II. SANSKRIT-TIBETAN
565
खस्थ
हिंसक
act, 55419, self-dependent,
confident. f., , a master, lord. atef, 555155. one's own object
or interest.
H, m. 5501, a swan. O, 1 435 Q5, 2 93179, 3
5. beaten, killed. %, 307°415 3951, miserable. wretched (Tib. lit. a killer). an, ind. Wot, a ptcl. implying
joy, surprise, or grief. gfra, vb. 1 325A3R9,
2 325-9, kills. gaard, vb. Awg. is destroyed. 64, m. 5. a horse. eft, m. 23141'95. Indra, the lord
of gods.
feu, E596. a deer. EN, m. 1 (with 1747 $, before it)
རྣམ་པར་ལྡང་བ, rising up ; 2
དགའ་བ. pleasure.་ ་ Eida, 597909E, a king of the
name. efare, n. 57, an oblation, clarified
butter. fa, m. 217, the hand. Efech, m. 5 DE, an elephant,
184, inf. 95'45, to give up.. ETT, m. 598, a necklace. Erfia, 52369, pleasing, heart
stealing. 1 &. a ptcl. used merely as
an expletive ; 295, certainly, alone, (used to emphasize an
idea). fer, 1 339, mischievous, 2
B 2*35, injurious, mischie
vous.

Page #610

566
-
ADDENDA
हेमन्
xious.
हिंस्र fĚH, B8 5 9, injurious, no- , A5014, taken.
F4, n. 1 $5,2 976, 3 RAW, feca215905, doing a kind act, the mind. favourable.
pana, u5 R5, heart-stirring. feu, 5750, n. ice ; m. the Himālaya mountain.
to, m. 1 5,2 5*35 (lit. tgha, fH46. m. 4750*, snowy, the with a cause, a cause). Himālaya mountain.
gra, n. 195, the state of a sta, 1 50, 2 987798,3 25197
cause. low, mean ; without. TH1, n. gold.
ADDENDA 5m9*39, (originally great, asceti na g5, fan94, inf. to do,
cism) gue, difficult to do, NA, NA, 40, 13. 7.
Evy Alka , farnaf, passed RIKA, sada, is, LV. CI".
through, fulblled, BC, 4. 19-214, 58, m. old, NA, 5.2. 58VZT, Hra, m. a thing, CŚ, 7". 59, 90, n. the back of the body, 15° ; MK, 1°, 3",•. 10" ; NA,
BC, 31.
3. 8.

Page #611

ADDENDA
25°45'29', much,
NA, 2. 1.
মেৈश, अभिसन्धि m. inten
', attachment, love, 1
*,, to be affec
tion, KA, 9.
ted by means, NBT, 12. 6.
à¤‍g, sà, vb. is said, KP. 1., fa, vb. goes, C§, 17a.
2, 2.2.
-
, m. NA, 6. 2; 2, m. NA. 5a.
মळेस, भवि (in the sense of भवेत् ), vb. may be, LV, B15'.
''', g, corresponding to, NA, 13. 18.
', afa, vb. say, NA, 11a.
ཉམས་སུ་མྱོང་བར་བྱོས་ཤིག, མ་ཡཱཕ
, imp. let it be felt, NA,
5.4.
,, opt. should live
together (Tib. lit. should resort
to).
,, to be seen, KP, 3. I.
567
,, vb. teaches, LV.
C227.
a
ঘ(7), 1 अवाप्ति, f., 2 प्राप्ति f.
obtaining, NA, 2, 3°.
मधुर पास, सपत्र, m. a simi
lar instance or one in which the major term is found. 55'5'9',
ta, opt.
should put faith in, BC, 40°,a. सवय, असमय, m. untime, 2", BC.
959558, afguin,
ration from me, BC, 43".
such.
འདི་ལྟ་བུ, རྩྲིརྩཝ, 55'495'8, fax, imp. enter,
LV, A511.
,, n. place, receptacle.
sepa

Page #612

568
* VOCABULARY
FFVF15A, agfär, of four kinds, or the duties of a religious NB, 7. 1.
student. LV. C120 apg, , beaten, NA, 12, 4, 681aangkis, आक्रमेय्या, SENHV*45*35, farefa, opt. may attack, LV. B154,
vb. makes the thril of hairs, J'gą, puti, m. this world. NA 7. 20.
o , sarta , vb. perceived, Agafat, fragrant, lit. a cow or
felt. the fabulous cow of plenty of the name, NA, 9. 8.
95 5191, af##, not mischiev949 591, WHAT.
ous, UV, 23. f, ungratefulness, LV. B1. AAN, , vb. you will see, 590, py, n. the middle, KP, LV, B 1421 9. 4.
aš5475 TRI, Fha, imp. for55), Har, m. a king of the give, LV.B 1224. 25. name, NA, 7.2.
9995341H, Freya, having FR19, 191, m. exertion, per
the face turned away, BC, 8o. severance, LV. C2“.
WSA, , light, swift, UV, 25*. 98a, Jahru, pr. pl. seeking after, LV, C4"?
WERNÉ 98'45'9, afa, o BTT, HETAH (?), great I fulil, NA, 2. 16.
naked (?), LV. B21". WE'V E , afecavita, opt. SEN*215 591, art, celibacy should give up, UV, 4o.

Page #613

ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS
569
NY'qzJFA, fotfesa, 3, a ptcl. signifying accusitive,
dative, and locative cases, and troubled. BK, 4o.
an infinitive. q011, afay, the right side, NA, 191995 REV, KITA, welcome, g*.
NA, 11". 570, Fyed, vb. moaves, NA, 9". 995*850 4RU59 9:35, litera, not moving.
much, many, NA, 2, 1. .
4795', Th, n. a speech, NA, RC 15, fara ind. long, LV,A | go 11'.
1 , fq, f. the heaven, BC, 63.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS
PRAJNĀDAŅDA. Read 50 mg for 78 ; 90 afreg: for ÅTN: ; 13* gua: for na: ; 15* HTET for A1914; 230 sa: for $1; 24" frame
i gaufrary for : g: fwalfeant; 25atat for tem ; 26° zlahi for zlḥai ; omit art ; 286 55 for 9. omit; 29° after 50 reads for 5. so de for te ; d 243 for 234.
72

Page #614

570
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS
NAGANANDA.༡༠ ལོངས for ལངས་4 པདྨ;12 བ for པ. 16 བྱའོ for བྱའ; s. 2 ཤི་བའི for ཤེ་བའི; s. 2 སྲིད་ for མི་, zt. བོ for བ, a for fའི 7ག་nfor གལའེ; 13 inaert • before རྒྱན, t4 རྡོགས for རྟགས 19 add ཊ below ཤིང: read འཐོར་བའི་for མཐོར་པའི, 20 པ་ན་ for པན་:༠ དམར་བ་ for དམར་པ; • delete. .: 6 སྟག for རྡག: 10° ཚུ forཆོ.6* ཁྱེའུས་ for ཁྱེའས. 5 གཅོད་ for གཅད. 6 འགེངས་ for འགྱེངས; 11. 4 ཞི་ for ifen, ཙའ་: for ཙཞd, 5 བཏད for བཏང; 12.༠ ཡུ་བུ for ཡུ་འུ; ia ནགཤ for གཞ, 2 ཀྱི for ཀྱ.
UDANAvARGA. ]• add ལ after ཁྱོད. ji• read བར for པར, is གྱིས for ཀྱིས. 17༠ འོག་ཏ་ for རྟོག་ཏུ་ བགགt •for འོགེsft.
BUDDHAcARITA. I• ་ for = ; 23 ཕབ for ཕཔ; 4 འ' for འ: 5༠ ༣% for 43 :84 ལྷཁ: for ང་ཚུ: 10° བྱེད་ for བྱེད་ • བཀའ for ༠ཤT;20* སྐྱེས་ for སྐྱེས་:33. fl: for ཚla::345
for ::42• ཀྱིས་ for ཀྱས་:43* ཙནུའོ for ༼ཀ; 44• བརྩེ for བ་:45° འོ for གཡོག:66» ཚ་བའ for dཞིན, and ga for ཕྱི་: 67+ དུ་ for ཏུ་: 68° འབྲད་ seems to be འབྲང་ LALITAvISTARA. A. • སྒོ་པའིfor སྒོ་བའི: ༠༠ གཟིར་ for གཟེར་

Page #615

ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS
མཆིའོ for མཆིད་ ; 11" ཚུལ་for ཚུ་ལ་ ; 1a" སྤྲོས་ for སྤྲས. ;
26
‘ བརྒྱ་ for པརྒྱ་ ; 14* insert ལ afterབཞི, and read པོའི ི for
བའི, " བྱ་བ་ for བྱ་པ་;
39
16
་
༢ ཕུང་
B. 10 ད་ for ད་ : p. 123, I. 4 omit
53
51
for ཕྱང་ ; anufor fe&are:
r585,
10" (Skt.) read "for
. 15
16
note 20 ffor qceཡc4T ; 11" for ·, རྞ for : for 1", for
15
; 12‘‘ མཛོདfor མཛད ; 1ཇུ" ཚེ for ཆེ ; 21i inaert ཆེ་ after པོ་
29' ག་བུར for ག་བུར.
57.1
5
for
C. p. 131, 5『šT: for u་leT: ; 1" fafft for fifaཊེ ; 8'" faaft- 'for faaའི; '' udun for uqam;" བforཔ.
ს
p
BODHISATTVAVADANAKALPALATA. 1 པོས་ for པས ; “ ད for 5. and ° འགྲེའི for འགྲའི ; 14 ri for qw; I6" ele{w for लोचनम् : न्दु : for ཛྭr༊ ; 17" མཆུ་ for མཆ་ ; 19* མཐུའི་ for མཐའི་ ; 20‘༠ སྲོག for གྲོགས་ as readby S. D.. 21 ངམ་ for ངན་; 29 ག་བུར for ག་བུར.
c
BHAGAVADGITA. 3* སྤུ for སྤྲ : ' གཞུ་ for གཞ ; 12, 13 པའང་
for པ་འང་.
5
NYAYABINDU. 11. བྱུང་ for བྱང་ ; 20. delete* ; 25.
रुपाल ; 27. ' रूप्यं for रुप्यं.
NYAYABINDUTIKA. 4. 18 བཙམས་སོfor བརྩམ་མོ; 12." ཁོང་
for གོང.
रूपाल्

Page #616

572
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS
CATUHSATAKA. JU VIII for XIII ; 24 99 for 99 ; 10 གཉིས་ for གཉས་:13“ འོ་ for ཡོ་:18• ག for ཕགཞུ; 21• ཐ for 14.
MOLAMADHYAMAKAKĀRIKĀ. 14 " for #, delete "afa.
KAsYAPAPARIVARTA. 1. ]1 ཡེ for ཡ; ༢༠ ལྟང་for ལྷང; 31 ཡེ for ཡ ; ལྟུང for ལྷང;2. ] ཝཱ་ for tཛིན་:4. ]? ཤེས for ཤས;༠. 31 དུ for ད ; s. 1• བྱ་བ་ for བྱབ ; s. 27 བོཊ་ for '.
KKvYADARsA. I• རྨ་ཁ for རྨ་ཁ ; 2• བསྡུས་ for བསྡུས་: 64 པྲ་ཨོཀྐ for པྲ་ཡོ༔
NOTES. P. 224, 1. 4, substantives for sabso. P. 225, 1. 2, See for see. P. 226, 1. 18, stavaka for stavak. P. 230, 1. 7, ground for gerund. P. 232, 1. 13, omit of. P. 248, 1. 6, read tvām for tvam ; 1. 10, ārāvana for rāvana ; 1. II, add the after in ; 1. 19, read is for arc. P. 255, 1. 6, kavala- for kabala. P. 258, 1. 10, nāvamanyeta for འdoབmoued. P. 275, 1. 6, བn for བ. P. 283, l. 6. ཉིད for ཉིད;1. 19, ཏ for 5. P. 30i,1. 19, ག་བུར for གབུར.P. 312.1. 15. སྨྱོ་ for སྨྲ་
VOCABULARY. P. 326. col. 2. -4704, to be understood for-qra, to be explained. P. 328. col. 2, འཁྲགས for འཁྲགས. P. 332, col. 2, སྲོགfor གྲོགས. P. 336, col. 2, འགེངས for འགྱེངས. P. 337, col. 1,

Page #617

ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS
573
for f. P, 339, col. I,
add UV before 26° P. 338, col. I, conqueror for conquer. P. 340, col. 1, N for N. P. 341, col. 2, add, bright before BC. P. 352, col. 2, add 45° after 55. P. 361, col. I, under add 2, loud. P. 365, col. 1, under add 4 a, m. understanding. P. 366, col. I, delete. the
line beginning with ལྟལས་ P. 372, col 2, དབང་པོ for དབང་བ. P. 380, col. 1, acute for accute. P. 383, col. 2, བདེ for A. P. 389, col. 2, लालस for लालसा. P. 390, col. 1, བརྡུངས for 45. P. 399, col. 2. E for E. P. 405, col. 2, humorous for humours. P. 434, col. 2, causing for ceasing. P. 435 col. 1, 5 for 5, for, and brillant for brillant ; col.
2.
for. P. 438, col. I, fafford for fafaferrà, omit 2nd before to and read 2nd after wonder. P. 455, col. I, N for N. P. 459, col. 2, pr. pl. for pf. ptcl. P. 462, col. I, pl. for ptcl. P. 474, col. I, 59(4) for () P. 480, col. 2, for

Page #618


Page #619

APPENDIX
1. Catalogues. The following catalogues, some of them of the Kanjur or of the Tanjur, others of both of them, give information with regard to names, lengths, subjects, authors, translators, etc. of the works included in them:
1. P. Cordier: Catalogue du Fonds Tibétain 'de la Bibliothéque Nationale. Parts II and III.
Here are catalogued the books of the Tanjur only.
2. Marcelle Lalou: Répertorie du Tanjur d'apres le Catalogue de P. Cordier, Paris, 1933.
This is an alphabetical catalogue of the names of the books and their authors and translators nientioned in Cordier's Catalogue. This volume has made Cordier's Catalogue more useful.
3. H. Beckh: Verzeichnis der tibetischen Handschriften der Preussischen Staatsbibliothek, Berlin, 1914.
4. A Complete Catalogue of the Tibetan Buddhist Canon (Bkaḥ-hgyur and Bstan-hgyur), Tôhoku Imperial University, Japan, 1934. This is the latest catalogue of the Kanjur and the Tanjur.
2. Analyses. The following two works supply the descriptive contents of the Kanjur :

Page #620

576
APPENDIX
1. Alexander Csoma de Köros: The Analysis of the Kanjur in the Asiatic Researches, Vol. XX.
2. Léon Feer: Analyse du Kandjour, Recueil des Livres sacrés an Tibet par Alexander Csoma de Köros, Hongrois-Siqulien de Transylvaine. Traduité de l'anglais et augmentée de diverses additions et remarques.-Annales du Musée Guimet.
3. Grammars and Manuals. 1. Alexander Csoma de Köros: A Grammar of the Tibetan Language in English, Calcutta, 1834.
2. Ph. Éd Foucaux: Grammaric de Langue Tibétaine, Paris, 1858.
3. Sarat Chandra Das: An Introduction to the Tibetan Language with the texts of Situ Sumtag, etc. Darjeeling, 1915.
4. H. A. Jäschke: Tibetan Grammar, Addenda by A. H. Francke assisted by W. Simson, 1929, Walter de Gruyter & Co., Berlin W 10 und Leipzig.
5. Herbert Bruce Hannah: A Grammar of the Tibetan Language, Literary and Coloquial, Calcutta, 1912.
6. C. A. Bell: Grammar of Coloquial Tibetan, Calcutta, 1919.
7. - Manual of Colloquial Tibetan, Calcutta, 1901.
8. Graham Sandberg: Manual of Colloquial Tibetan, Thacker, Spink & Co., Calcutta, 1894.

Page #621

APPENDIX
9. Vincent C. Henderson:
IO.
Baptist Mission Press, Calcutta, 1903.
Lama Lobzang Mingyur Dorje: Tibetan-English Primer, Calcutta University, 1938.
577
Tibetan Manua
4. Dictionaries.
I..
Alexander Csoma de Köros: A TibetanEnglish Dictionary, Calcutta, 1834.
2. Sarat Chandra Das: A Tibetan-English Dictionary, Revised and Edited by Graham Sandberg and A. William Heyde, Calcutta, 1902.
3. H. A. Jäschke: A Tibetan-English Dictionary to which is added an English-Tibetan Vocabulary, Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co. Ltd., London, 1934.
An English
4. Lama Dawasamdup Kazi: Tibetan Dictionary, Calcutta, 1919.
5. C. A. Bell: English-Tibetan Colloquial Dictionary, Calcutta, 1920.
6. G. de Roerich in collaboration with Lama Lobzang Mingyur Dorje: Tibetan-English Dictionary. Urusvati Himalayan Research Institute of Roerich Museum, Naggar, Kulu, Punjab, Br. India. Not yet published, leaflet sent on application.

Page #622
578 - APPENDIX 5. Vocabularies. 1. Sakaki: Mahavyutpatti, Sanskrit, Tibetan and Chinese in two parts, Japan. 2. Satish Chandra Vidy a bh usana: Mahavyutpatti, Sanskrit, Tibetan, and English under the title of SanskritTibetan-English Vocabulary in Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. IV, 1913. Incomplete. 3. -- Sragdbara-stotra, Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1908. 4. - Bilingual Index of Nyayabindu: Sanskrit and Tibetan Words, Asiatic Society of Bengal, 1917. 5. E. Ober miller: Indices Verborum to the Nyayabindu, Two Parts, Bibliotheca Buddhica, XXV. 6. -- The Doctrine of Prajnaparamita, Reprint from Acta Orientalia, Vol. XI, 1932. 7. Friedrich Weller: Index to the Tibetan Translation of Kasyapaparivarta, Harvard, 1933. 8. Vidh u shekhara Bhattacharya: Nyayapravesa, Part II (Tibetan Text), Gaekwad Oriental Series, 1927. In books, Nos. 3-6, and 8 Word Indexes, Sanskrit-Tibetan and Tibetan-Sanskrit, are given.